HomeMy WebLinkAboutSPECS
SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL
HOME2-CARMEL,IN
03/04/2019
PROJECT NO. B4-134-705
OWNER:
THE WITNESS GROUP (MR. AAKASH PATEL)
ARCHITECT:
RICARDO J MUNIZ-GUILLET, AIA
5453 NW 106 TH DR
CORAL SPRINGS MARGATE, FL 33076
00 01 01 Project Title Page
00 01 000 NOTICE TO BIDDERS
00 4200 Contractor Bid Form
00 4300 Prequalification Form
Prequalification Form – Part I
00 5200 Contractor Agreement Forms
Exhibit A – Safety Information
Exhibit B – 2nd Tier Sub/Supplier Listing
Sample Coi
00 6500 Geotechnical Report
00 8100 Equal Employment Opportunity Requirements
00 8913 Construction Milestone Schedule
01 25 00 Substitution Procedures
01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures
01 40 00 Quality Requirements
DIVISION 01
01 1000 Project Summary
01 1200 Summary Of Bid Package Scopes
01 1400 Work Restrictions And Rules
Exhibit A – Safety Work Rules & Osha Compliance
01 2100 Standard Work Items For All Bid Packages
01 2300 Altnernates
01 2900 Payment Procedures
01 3119 Project Meetings
01 3200 Lean Construction Requirements
01 3300 Submittal Procedures
01 5000 Temporary Facilities
01 6000 Product Requirements
01 7329 Cutting And Patching
01 7419 Daily Cleaning
01 7700 Project Closeout
01 7823 Operations And Maintenance Procedures
01 7836 Warranties And Bonds
01 7839 Project Record Documents
01 7840 Building Information Modeling (Bim)
DIVISION 02
Not Used
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
03 30 00 Cast In Place Concrete
03 30 00 Architectural Concrete
03 35 43 Polished Concrete Finishing
03 45 00 Precast Architectural Concrete
03 53 00 Concrete Topping
03 54 13 Gypsum Cement Underlayment
Base4 Construction Specifications
Home2 Carmel
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 00 - Bidding Reqiurements, Contractor Forms & Conditions Of The Contract
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
04 20 00 Unit Masonry
04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry
04 26 13 Masonry Veneer
04 43 13.16 Adhered Stone Masonry Veneer
04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry
DIVISION 05 - METALS
05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
05 51 13 Metal Pan Stairs
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
06 15 16 Wood Roof Decking
06 16 00 Sheathing
06 17 53 Shop Fabricated Wood Trusses
06 18 00 Glue Laminated Construction
06 41 13 Wood Veneer Faced Architectural Cabinets
06 41 16 Plastic Laminate Clad Architectural Cabinets
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing
07 14 13 Hot Fluid Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation
07 24 19 Water Drainage Exterior Insulation And Finish System (Eifs)
07 25 00 Weather Barriers
07 26 00 Vapor Retarders
07 27 13 Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barriers
07 27 15 Non Bituminous Self Adhering Sheet Air Barriers
07 27 26 Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers
07 42 93 Soffit Panels
07 52 16 Styrene Butadiene Styrene (Sbs) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
07 54 23 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (Tpo) Roofing
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim
07 71 00 Roof Specialties
07 72 00 Roof Accessories
07 81 00 Applied Fireproofing
07 81 23 Intumescent Fireproofing
07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping
07 84 43 Joint Firestopping
07 91 00 Preformed Joint Seals
07 92 00 Joint Sealants
07 92 19 Acoustical Joint Sealants
07 95 13.13 Interior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies
07 95 13.16 Exterior Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors And Frames
08 12 13 Hollow Metal Frames
08 12 16 Aluminum Frames
08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors
08 14 33 Stile And Rail Wood Doors
08 31 13 Access Doors And Frames
08 32 13 Sliding Aluminum Framed Glass Doors
08 41 13 Aluminum Framed Entrances And Storefronts
08 42 13 Aluminum Framed Entrances
08 42 29.23 Sliding Automatic Entrances
08 43 13 Aluminum Framed Storefronts
08 44 13 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls
08 51 13 Aluminum Windows
08 71 00 Door Hardware
08 80 00 Glazing
08 80 00 Fire Resistant Glazing
08 91 16 Operable Wall Louvers
08 91 19 Fixed Louvers
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
09 21 16.23 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies
09 22 16 Non Structural Metal Framing
09 24 00 Cement Plastering
09 29 00 Gypsum Board
09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling
09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings
09 54 36 Suspended Decorative Grids
09 65 13 Resilient Base And Accessories
09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring
09 68 13 Tile Carpeting
09 68 16 Sheet Carpeting
09 72 00 Wall Coverings
09 91 13 Exterior Painting
09 91 23 Interior Painting
09 93 00 Staining And Transparent Finishing
09 97 26 Cementitous Coatings
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10 21 13.14 Stainless Steel Toilet Compartments
10 21 13.16 Plastic Laminate Clad Toilet Compartments
10 22 39 Folding Panel Partitions
10 26 00 Wall And Door Protection
10 28 00 Toilet, Bath And Laundry Accessories
10 28 19 Tub And Shower Enclosures
10 44 13 Fire Protection Cabinets
10 44 16 Fire Extinguishers
10 56 13 Metal Storage Shelving
10 56 26 Mobile Storage Shelving
10 75 16 Ground Set Flagpoles
10 75 23 Wall Mounted Flagpoles
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11 30 13 Residential Appliances
11 40 00 Food Service Equipment
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12 32 13 Manufactured Wood Veneer Faced Casework
12 32 16 Manufactured Plastic Laminate Clad Casework
12 36 16 Metal Countertops
12 36 23.13 Plastic Laminate Clad Countertops
12 36 40 Stone Countertops
12 36 61.16 Solid Surfacing Countertops
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13 11 00.02 Swimming Pools - Indoor
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
14 21 00 Electric Traction Elevators
14 91 33 Laundry And Linen Chutes
DIVISIONS 15 – 20
Not Used
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
21 10 00 Fire Suppression Systems
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing
22 05 13
22 05 23 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
22 05 29
22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation
22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping
22 11 23 Domestic Water Pumps
22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
22 30 00 Plumbing Equipment
22 34 00 Fuel-Fired, Domestic Water Heaters
DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)
23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC
23 05 13
23 05 29
23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
23 07 00 HVAC Insulation
23 11 23 Facility Natural-Gas Piping
23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping
23 31 13 Metal Ducts
23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories
23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators
23 74 33 Dedicated Outdoor Air Units
23 81 13.13 Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioning Units
23 81 26 Split-System Air-Conditioners
23 8239 Unit Heaters
DIVISION 24
Not Used
DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
25 51 10
DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical
26 05 19
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems
26 09 24 Lighting Controls
26 09 43 Network Lighting Controls
26 22 00 Low-Voltage Transformers
26 24 00 Switchboards and Panelboards
26 27 26 Wiring Devices
26 28 16 Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers
26 32 13 Engine-Driven Generator Sets-Natural Gas
Common Motors Requirements for HVAC Equipment
Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment
Integrated Automation Control of Guestroom Equipment
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment
Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
26 36 00 Transfer Switches
26 43 13 Surge Protection For Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits
26 51 19 Interior Lighting (26 51 00-01)
26 56 19 Exterior Lighting
DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS
27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications
27 10 00 Structured Cabling
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 31 00 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
31 31 16 Termite control
END OF SECTION
SECTION SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 1
SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting
comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction
from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due
to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory
changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that
are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer
advantage to Contractor or Owner.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the
following, as applicable:
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or insta llation
method cannot be provided, if applicable.
b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed
to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and
separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed
substitution.
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with
those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable
Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design
characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements
indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and
fabrication and installation procedures.
SECTION SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 2
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.
g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and
addresses as well as names and addresses of architects and owners.
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and
interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from ICC-ES.
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed
substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the
overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot
be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on
manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of
availability, or delays in delivery.
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract
Sum.
l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with
requirements in the Contract Documents, except as indicated in
substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate
for applications indicated.
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may
subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed
substitution to produce indicated results.
2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for
substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of
proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of
receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a
proposed substitution within time allocated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed
substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to
perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.
1.5 PROCEDURES
A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the
approved substitutions.
SECTION SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 3
1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of
need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and
review of related submittals.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
produce indicated results.
b. Complete attached “Request Form Substitution” and submit with other
required documentation.
c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
schedule.
e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
having jurisdiction.
f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
Work.
h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is
uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is
acceptable to all contractors involved.
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if
received within 30 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that
time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied,
Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with
these requirements:
a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time,
energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional
responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities
may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation
services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar
considerations.
b. Complete attached “Request Form Substitution” and submit with other
required documentation.
c. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract
Documents.
d. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will
produce indicated results.
e. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
SECTION SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES Page 4
f. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction
schedule.
g. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities
having jurisdiction.
h. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
i. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the
Work.
j. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
k. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested
substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is
uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is
acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 25 00
REQUEST FORM SUBSTITUTION
Reason for Substitution Request
SPECIFIED PRODUCT PROPOSED PRODUCT
Is no longer available Will reduce schedule by _________
Is unable to meet project schedule Will increase schedule by ________
Is unsuitable for the designated application
Cannot Interface with adjacent materials Will reduce budget by $_________
or Cannot provide the specified warranty Will increase budget by $________
Cannot be constructed as indicated Is for Supplier’s convenience
Cannot be obtained due to one or more of the Is for Subcontractor’s convenience
following: Other:
Strike
Lockout
Bankruptcy of manufacturer or supplier
Supporting Data:
Item does not meet Brand Approved Specifications, GC has submitted to and secured Brand
approval in advance of this request for Substitution.
Brand Contact:
Drawing Specifications, Product Data, Performance Data, Test Data and any other necessary
information to facilitate review of the Substitution Request are attached
Sample is attached Sample will be sent if requested
Quality Comparison
Provide all necessary data in a side-by-side comparison to facilitate the review of this substitution
request:
SPECIFIED PRODUCT PROPOSED PRODUCT
Manufacturer:
Name/ Brand:
General Information
No: Date:
Project Information Specified Product or System
Number:
Name:
Location:
Substitution Request for:
Specification Section No:
Article Paragraph:
Contact information
GC:
PM:
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Page 1
SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and
processing Contract modifications.
1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work,
not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of
proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised
Drawings and Specifications.
1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either
to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
2. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise
specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost
adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute
the change.
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs,
with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested,
furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts
of trade discounts.
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the
effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity
duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total
float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to
the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to
Architect.
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change
on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate
the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES Page 2
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting
an extension of the Contract Time.
6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 25 00 "Substitution Procedures" if the
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or
system specified.
1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A. On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, Architect will issue a
Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor.
1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive.
Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the
Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the
Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the
Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work
required by the Construction Change Directive.
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data
necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 26 00
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 1
SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for
compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other
quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with
the Contract Document requirements.
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control
services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not
limited by provisions of this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise
further described means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous
projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special
requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for
installation of the Work and for completed Work.
C. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction
operation, including installation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.
1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require
that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized
individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project
before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
E. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited
according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or
by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified
requirements.
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 2
F. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source;
for example, plant, mill, factory, or shop.
G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both.
Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
H. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and
during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and
substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.
I. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during
and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the
Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-
control services do not include contract administration activities performed by Architect.
1.3 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications
by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract
Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and
design criteria indicated.
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more
standards or requirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply
with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different,
but apparently equal, to Architect for direction before proceeding.
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified
shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply
exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum
within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values
are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer
uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having
jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities
having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:
1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed
in the Statement of Special Inspections.
2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the
Statement of Special Inspections.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance"
Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 3
in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized
authority.
C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's record, submit copies of permits,
licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices,
receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents
established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of
the Work.
1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in
other Sections. Include the following:
1. Date of issue.
2. Project title and number.
3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency.
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.
8. Complete test or inspection data.
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and
testing and inspection.
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies
with the Contract Document requirements.
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification
levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As
applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification
requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service
representative requirements.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying,
or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 4
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in
material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities
shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations.
Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for
the activities indicated.
1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for
specialists.
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with
the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection indicated, as
documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in
individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is
acceptable to authorities.
H. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction
testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods,
comply with the following:
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and
construction.
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and
analyzing results to prevent delaying the W ork.
c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.
d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens and test assemblies do
not reuse products on Project.
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to
Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract
Documents.
1.8 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's
responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of
testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection
they are engaged to perform.
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated
by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to
Contractor.
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 5
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether
specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.
1. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services.
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed
to in writing by Owner.
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that
requires testing or inspection will be performed.
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit
a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
4. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having
jurisdiction, when they so direct.
C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were
Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and
reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract
Documents.
D. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in
performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and
inspections.
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed
in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-
situ tests are conducted.
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service through Contractor.
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
6. Do not perform duties of Contractor.
E. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 01 33 00
"Submittal Procedures."
F. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's
technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical
representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences,
examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of
Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of
written reports.
G. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives
performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 6
reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of
operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1. Access to the Work.
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing
and inspection. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by
testing agency.
6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at
Project site.
H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-
assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity
of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special
tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of
Owner, and as follows:
1. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies
observed in the Work during performance of its services.
2. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-
control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having
jurisdiction.
3. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
4. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
5. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the
following:
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 7
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access
to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
1. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services,
repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore
patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams
that are as invisible as possible.
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 01 40 00
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 1
SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete
materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending,
and placement.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material certificates.
B. Material test reports.
C. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified
professional engineer, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed
concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for
production facilities and equipment.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing
indicated.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
1. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents
or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture
designs.
B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents:
1. ACI 301.
2. ACI 117.
2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true,
and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number
of joints.
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved
material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars,
ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I zinc coated after fabrication and bending.
C. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed bars,,
epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch bar length.
D. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated
from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.
E. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet.
F. Galvanized-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain,
fabricated from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.
G. Epoxy-Coated Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 884/A 884M, Class A coated,
Type 1, plain steel.
H. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar
supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of
Standard Practice."
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Materials:
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 3
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, [Type I] [Type II] [Type I/II] [Type III]
[Type V], [gray] [white].
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, graded.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: [1-1/2 inches] [1 inch] [3/4 inch] nominal.
C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330/C 330M, [1-inch] [3/4-inch] [1/2-inch] [3/8-inch]
nominal maximum aggregate size.
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing
calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
F. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
G. RETAIN WATERSTOPS IF REQUIRED.
2.5 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent
passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and
directional changes.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. BoMetals, Inc.
b. Sika Corporation.
c. Vinylex Waterstop & Accessories.
B. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip,
butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding
to concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. CETCO, a Minerals Technologies company.
b. Henry Company.
c. Sika Corporation.
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 4
2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Refer to section 07 26 00 – Vapor Retarders
2.7 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for
application to fresh concrete.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. BASF Corporation.
b. Dayton Superior.
c. SpecChem, LLC.
2.8 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic
fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
2.9 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the
basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.
B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed
to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not
less than 40 percent.
C. Admixtures (when applicable to the project): Use admixtures according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Use [water-reducing] [high-range water-reducing] [or] [plasticizing] admixture in
concrete, as required, for placement and workability.
2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high
temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use
industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight,
and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50.
2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
A. Normal-Weight Concrete:
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45
3. Slump Limit: 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or
plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 5
4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-
inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished floors to exceed 3 percent.
6. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's
recommended rate, but not less than a rate of 1.0 lb/cu. yd..
2.11 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F,
reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support
vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be
applied, until structure can support such loads.
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.
C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining
work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings,
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing,
and supporting reinforcement.
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder
before placing concrete.
3.4 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of
concrete.
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 6
B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints,
sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth
equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and
finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction
joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete
surfaces.
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into
concrete when cutting action does not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface
and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at
slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade
beams, and other locations, as indicated.
3.5 WATERSTOP INSTALLATION
A. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other locations indicated, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and
embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.
B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that
no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or
planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction
joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to
ACI 301.
3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with
tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that
exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material,
arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and
patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified
limits on formed-surface irregularities.
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 7
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view,.
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where
indicated:
1. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of
thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1-
1/2 parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white
portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout
matches adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout.
When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog
spray for at least 36 hours.
2. grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture
matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed
surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening,
and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and
bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile
amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction.
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and to receive concrete floor toppings.
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill
low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform,
smooth, granular texture.
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish and to be covered
with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-
bed terrazzo.
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete
by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until
surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth
any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated exposed to view or to be covered with
resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane,
paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.
2. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and
an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots
and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 8
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated where
ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While
concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.
F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and
elsewhere as indicated.
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming
with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required
final finish with Architect before application.
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or
hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for
hot-weather protection during curing.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot,
dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after
placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams,
supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist
cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue
curing for remainder of curing period.
D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following
methods:
1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or
roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to
heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of
coating and repair damage during curing period.
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound
without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing
compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound
does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.
2. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after
initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat.
Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Page 9
3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's
approval.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
END OF SECTION 03 30 00
SECTION 033300 - ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 1
SECTION 03 33 00 - ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place architectural concrete, including form facings,
reinforcement and accessories, concrete materials, concrete mixture design,
placement procedures, and finishes.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
C. Formwork Shop Drawings.
D. Placement schedule.
E. Samples: For each of the following materials:
1. Form-facing panels.
2. Form ties.
3. Form liners.
4. Exposed aggregates.
5. Chamfers and rustications.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material certificates.
B. Material test reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Sample Panels: After approval of verification sample and before casting
architectural concrete, produce field sample panels to demonstrate the approved range
of selections made under Sample submittals. Produce a minimum of three sets of full-
scale panels, cast vertically, approximately 48 by 48 by 6 inches minimum, to
demonstrate the expected range of finish, color, and texture variations.
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform
preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures.
SECTION 033300 - ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 2
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.
B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the
Contract Documents:
1. ACI 301.
2. ACI 303.1.
2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork and
other form-facing material requirements.
B. Form-Facing Panels for As-Cast Finishes: Steel- and glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, or
other approved nonabsorptive panel materials that provide continuous, true, and
smooth architectural concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize
number of joints.
C. Form Liners: Units of face design, texture, arrangement, and configuration indicated.
Furnish with manufacturer's recommended liquid-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent surface
treatments of concrete.
D. Rustication Strips: Metal or rigid plastic, or with sides beveled and back kerfed;
nonstaining; in longest practicable lengths.
E. Chamfer Strips: Metal, rigid plastic, elastomeric rubber, or dressed wood, 3/4 by 3/4
inch, minimum; nonstaining; in longest practicable lengths.
F. Form Joint Tape: Compressible foam tape; pressure sensitive; AAMA 800; minimum
1/4 inch thick.
G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or removable ties designed
to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete
on removal.
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for steel
reinforcement and other requirements for reinforcement accessories.
SECTION 033300 - ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 3
B. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire fabric in place; manufactured according to
CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."
1. Where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use gray, all-plastic CRSI
Class 1, gray, plastic-protected bar supports.
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same
brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and
obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.
B. Cementitious Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, [Type I] [Type II] [Type I/II] [Type III],
[gray] [white].
C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, Class 5S coarse aggregate or better,
graded. Provide aggregates from single source with documented service-record data of
at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions
using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: [1 inch] [3/4 inch] [1/2 inch] [3/8 inch].
2. Gradation: [Uniformly] [Gap] graded.
D. Normal-Weight Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M or ASTM C 144, manufactured or
natural sand, from same source for entire Project.
E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.
F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and that does not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing
calcium chloride.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
G. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored
water-reducing admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other
alkalis.
SECTION 033300 - ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 4
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
b. Scofield, a Business Unit of Sika Corporation.
c. Solomon Colors, Inc.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
H. Water: Potable, complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M, except free of wash water from
mixer washout operations.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B.
1. For integrally colored concrete, curing compound shall be approved by color
pigment manufacturer.
2. For concrete indicated to be sealed, curing compound shall be compatible with
sealer.
2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of cast-in-place architectural
concrete proportioned on basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both,
according to ACI 301.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed
design mixtures based on laboratory trial mixtures.
B. Cementitious Materials: For cast-in-place architectural concrete exposed to deicers,
limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement
according to ACI 301 requirements.
C. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's
written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved
mockup.
D. Concrete Mixtures:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): [5000 psi] [4500 psi] [4000 psi] [3500 psi]
[3000 psi].
2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.46.
3. Slump Limit: [3 inches] [4 inches] [8 inches for concrete with verified slump
of 2 to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or
plasticizing admixture] <Insert dimension(s)>, plus or minus 1 inch.
4. Air Content: [5-1/2] <Insert number> percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point
of delivery for 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
5. Air Content: [6] <Insert number> percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of
delivery for [1-inch] [3/4-inch] nominal maximum aggregate size.
SECTION 033300 - ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 5
2.7 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Architectural Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete
according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish batch ticket information.
1. Clean equipment used to mix and deliver cast-in-place architectural concrete to
prevent contamination from other concrete.
2. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F,
reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork,
embedded items, and shoring and reshoring.
B. Limit deflection of form-facing panels to not exceed ACI 303.1 requirements.
1. Class A, 1/8 inch.
C. Construct forms to result in cast-in-place architectural concrete that complies with
ACI 117 (ASI 117M).
D. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of cast-in-place architectural concrete.
E. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust,
dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.
F. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar
leaks and maintain proper alignment.
G. Place form liners accurately to provide finished surface texture indicated. Provide solid
backing and attach securely to prevent deflection and maintain stability of liners during
concreting. Prevent form liners from sagging and stretching in hot weather. Seal joint s
of form liners and form-liner accessories to prevent mortar leaks. Coat form liner with
form-release agent.
3.2 REINFORCEMENT AND INSERT INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for fabricating and
installing steel reinforcement. Securely fasten steel reinforcement and wire ties against
shifting during concrete placement.
B. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
SECTION 033300 - ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 6
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS
A. Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less
than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete if concrete is hard enough to not be
damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations are
maintained.
1. Cut off and grind glass-fiber-reinforced plastic form ties flush with surface of
concrete.
B. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that
support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved 28-day design
compressive strength. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit
removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close
joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for cast-in-
place architectural concrete surfaces.
3.4 JOINTS
A. Construction Joints: Install construction joints true to line, with faces perpendicular to
surface plane of cast-in-place architectural concrete, so strength and appearance of
concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
construction joints unless otherwise indicated.
B. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints true to line, with faces
perpendicular to surface plane of cast-in-place architectural concrete, so strength and
appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by
Architect.
3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement
unless approved by Architect.
B. Deposit concrete continuously between construction joints. Deposit concrete to avoid
segregation.
3.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Architectural Concrete Finish: Match Architect's design reference sample, identified
and described as indicated, to satisfaction of Architect.
B. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture
matching adjacent formed surfaces.
SECTION 033300 - ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 7
1. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly a cross adjacent
unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
C. Maintain uniformity of special finishes over construction joints unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Form-Liner Finish: Produce a textured surface free of pockets, streaks, and
honeycombs, and of uniform appearance, color, and texture.
3.7 CONCRETE CURING
A. Begin curing cast-in-place architectural concrete immediately after removing forms
from concrete. Cure according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following
methods that will not mottle, discolor, or stain concrete:
1. Curing compound.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Comply with field quality-control requirements in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-
Place Concrete."
3.9 REPAIR, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING
A. Repair and cure damaged finished surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete
when approved by Architect. Match repairs to color, texture, and uniformity of
surrounding surfaces and to repairs on approved mockups.
1. Remove and replace cast-in-place architectural concrete that cannot be repaired
and cured to Architect's approval.
B. Protect corners, edges, and surfaces of cast-in-place architectural concrete from
damage; use guards and barricades.
C. Protect cast-in-place architectural concrete from staining, laitance, and contamination
during remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 03 33 00
SECTION 033543 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING Page 1
SECTION 03 35 43 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes polished concrete finishing, including staining and scoring.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each type of product requiring color selection.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Sample Panels: After approval of samples, produce field sample panels to
demonstrate the approved range of selections made under Sample submittals.
Produce a minimum of three sets of full-scale panels, approximately 48 by 48 inches
minimum, to demonstrate the expected range of finish, color, and appearance
variations.
1. Locate panels as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
2. Maintain field sample panels during construction in an undisturbed condition as a
standard for judging the completed Work.
3. Demolish and remove field sample panels when directed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STAIN MATERIALS (when applicable to the project).
A. Reactive Stain: Acidic-based stain with wetting agents and high-grade, UV-stable
metallic salts that react with calcium hydroxide in cured concrete to produce
permanent, variegated, or translucent color effects.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Bomanite Co.
b. Scofield, a Business Unit of Sika Corporation.
c. SureCrete Design Products.
B. Penetrating Stain: Water-based, acrylic latex, penetrating stain with colorfast pigments.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
SECTION 033543 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING Page 2
a. Americrete, Inc.
b. Bomanite Co.
c. Scofield, a Business Unit of Sika Corporation.
2.2 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS (when applicable to the project).
A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Polished Concrete Finish: Clear, waterborne
solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components;
odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. ARDEX Americas.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
c. Nox-Crete Products Group.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 POLISHING
A. Polish: Level 2: Low sheen, 400 grit.
B. Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs.
1. Machine grind floor surfaces to receive polished finishes level and smooth.
2. Apply reactive stain for polished concrete in polishing sequence and according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment for polished concrete in polishing
sequence and according to manufacturer's written instructions, allowing
recommended drying time between successive coats.
4. Apply penetrating stain for polished concrete in polishing sequence and
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
5. Continue polishing with progressively finer-grit diamond polishing pads to gloss
level, to match approved mockup.
6. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing
operations.
7. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces.
3.2 STAINING (when applicable to the project).
A. Newly placed concrete shall be at least 14 days old before staining.
B. Prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Clean concrete thoroughly by scraping, applying solvents or stripping agents,
sweeping and pressure washing, or scrubbing with a rotary floor machine and
detergents recommended by stain manufacturer. Rinse until water is clear and
allow surface to dry.
SECTION 033543 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING Page 3
2. Test surfaces with droplets of water. If water beads and does not penetrate
surface, or penetrates only in some areas, profile surfaces by acid etching or
grinding, sanding, or abrasive blasting. Retest and continue profiling surface until
water droplets immediately darken and uniformly penetrate concrete surfaces.
C. Scoring (when applicable to the project): Score decorative jointing in concrete surfaces
1/16 inch deep with diamond blades to match pattern indicated. Rinse until water is
clear. Score [after] [before] staining.
1. Joint Width: 3/8 inch.
D. Allow concrete surface to dry before applying stain. Verify readiness of concrete to
receive stain according to ASTM D 4263 by tightly taping 18-by-18-inch, 4-mil-thick
polyethylene sheet to a representative area of concrete surface. Apply stain only if no
evidence of moisture has accumulated under sheet after 16 hours.
E. Reactive Stain: Apply reactive stain to concrete surfaces according to manufacturer's
written instructions and as follows:
1. Apply stain by uncolored bristle brush, roller, or high-volume, low-pressure
sprayer and immediately scrub into concrete surface with uncolored, acid-
resistant nylon-bristle brushes in continuous, circular motion. Do not spread stain
after fizzing stops. Allow to dry four hours and repeat application of stain in
sufficient quantity to obtain color consistent with approved mockup.
2. Remove stain residue after four hours by wet scrubbing with commercial-grade
detergent recommended by stain manufacturer. Rinse until water is clear.
Control, collect, and legally dispose of runoff.
F. Penetrating Stain: Apply penetrating stain to concrete surfaces according to
manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1. Apply first coat of stain to dry, clean surfaces by airless sprayer or by high-
volume, low-pressure sprayer.
2. Allow to dry four hours and repeat application of stain in sufficient quantity to
obtain color consistent with approved mockup.
3. Rinse until water is clear. Control, collect, and legally dispose of runoff.
END OF SECTION 03 35 43
SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 1
SECTION 03 45 00 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes architectural precast concrete cladding units.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Design Reference Sample: Sample of approved architectural precast concrete color,
finish and texture, preapproved by Architect.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Design Mixtures: For each precast concrete mixture. Include compressive strength and
water-absorption tests.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Detail fabrication and installation of architectural precast concrete units.
2. Indicate locations, plans, elevations, dimensions, shapes, and cross sections of
each unit.
3. Indicate joints, reveals, drips, chamfers, and extent and location of each surface
finish.
4. Indicate details at building corners.
D. Samples: Design reference samples for initial verification of design intent, for each type
of finish indicated on exposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units, in sets
of three, representative of finish, color, and texture variations expected; approximately
12 by 12 by 2 inches.
E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For architectural precast concrete indicated to comply
with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.
B. Material certificates.
C. Material Test Reports: For aggregates.
D. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.
SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering
architectural precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This
responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Designated as a PCI-certified plant for Group A, Category A1 - Architectural
Cladding and Load Bearing Units or designated as an APA-certified plant for
production of architectural precast concrete products.
B. Quality-Control Standard: For manufacturing procedures and testing requirements,
quality-control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances for types of units
required, comply with PCI MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and
Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products."
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D.1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel"; and AWS D1.4/D1.4M,
"Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."
D. Sample Panels: After sample approval and before fabricating architectural precast
concrete units, produce a minimum of two sample panels approximately 16 sq. ft. in
area for review by Architect. Incorporate full-scale details of architectural features,
finishes, textures, and transitions in sample panels.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Furnish loose connection hardware and anchorage items to be embedded in or
attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide locations, setting
diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions, as required, for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in
Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design architectural precast concrete
units.
B. Design Standards: Comply with ACI 318 and design recommendations of
PCI MNL 120, "PCI Design Handbook - Precast and Prestressed Concrete," applicable
to types of architectural precast concrete units indicated.
C. Calculated Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide architectural precast concrete
units with fire-resistance rating indicated as calculated according to ACI 216.1 and
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Structural Performance: Provide architectural precast concrete units and connections
capable of withstanding design loads indicated within limits and under conditions
indicated.
SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 3
2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from
galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.
C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.
D. Supports: Suspend reinforcement from back of mold or use bolsters, chairs, spacers,
and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded
wire reinforcement in place according to PCI MNL 117.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or Type III, gray, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. For surfaces exposed to view in finished structure, use gray or white cement, of
same type, brand, and mill source.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: Except as modified by PCI MNL 117, ASTM C 33/C 33M,
with coarse aggregates complying with Class 5S. Stockpile fine and coarse aggregates
for each type of exposed finish from a single source (pit or quarry) for Project.
1. Face-Mixture-Coarse Aggregates: Selected, hard, and durable; free of material
that reacts with cement or causes staining; to match selected finish sample.
a. Gradation: Uniformly graded.
2. Face-Mixture-Fine Aggregates: Selected, natural or manufactured sand
compatible with coarse aggregate; to match approved finish sample.
C. Coloring Admixture: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic or natural mineral-oxide pigments
or colored water-reducing admixtures, temperature stable, and nonfading.
D. Water: Potable; free from deleterious material that may affect color stability, setting, or
strength of concrete and complying with chemical limits of PCI MNL 117.
E. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other required admixtures.
F. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other
admixtures and to not contain calcium chloride, or more than 0.15 percent chloride ions
or other salts by weight of admixture.
2.4 STEEL CONNECTION MATERIALS
A. Carbon-Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 4
B. Carbon-Steel-Headed Studs: ASTM A 108, AISI 1018 through AISI 1020, cold finished,
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type A or Type B, with arc shields and with minimum mechanical
properties of PCI MNL 117, Table 3.2.3.
C. Carbon-Steel Plate: ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C.
D. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 or Grade 35028.
E. Carbon-Steel Castings: ASTM A 27/A 27M, Grade 60-30.
F. High-Strength, Low-Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A 572/A 572M.
G. Carbon-Steel Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B or Grade C.
H. Wrought Carbon-Steel Bars: ASTM A 675/A 675M, Grade 65.
I. Deformed-Steel Wire or Bar Anchors: ASTM A 496/A 496M or ASTM A 706/A 706M.
J. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Studs: ASTM A 307, Grade A or ASTM F 1554, Grade 36;
carbon-steel, hex-head bolts and studs; carbon-steel nuts, ASTM A 563; and flat,
unhardened steel washers, ASTM F 844.
K. Zinc-Coated Finish: For exterior steel items, steel in exterior walls, and items indicated
for galvanizing, apply zinc coating by hot-dip process according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint with dry film containing
not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035B
or SSPC-Paint 20.
2.5 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, and clean,
natural sand, ASTM C 144 or ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 to 3
parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.
Water-soluble chloride ion content less than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when
tested according to ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
B. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Packaged, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout
containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents,
plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M,
Grade A for drypack and Grades B and C for flowable grout and of consistency suitable
for application within a 30-minute working time. Water-soluble chloride ion content less
than 0.06 percent by weight of cement when tested according to
ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
C. Epoxy-Resin Grout: Two-component, mineral-filled epoxy resin; ASTM C 881/C 881M,
of type, grade, and class to suit requirements.
SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 5
2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type of precast concrete required.
B. Design mixtures may be prepared by a qualified independent testing agency or by
qualified precast plant personnel at architectural precast concrete fabricator's option.
C. Limit water-soluble chloride ions to maximum percentage by weight of cement
permitted by ACI 318 or PCI MNL 117 when tested according to
ASTM C 1218/C 1218M.
D. Normal-Weight Concrete Mixtures: Proportion mixtures by either laboratory trial batch
or field test data methods according to ACI 211.1, with materials to be used on Project,
to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 5000 psi minimum.
E. Water Absorption: 6 percent by weight or 14 percent by volume, tested according to
ASTM C 642, except for boiling requirement.
F. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at
point of placement having an air content complying with PCI MNL 117.
G. When included in design mixtures, add other admixtures to concrete mixtures
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Cast-in Anchors, Inserts, Plates, Angles, and Other Anchorage Hardware: Fabricate
anchorage hardware with sufficient anchorage and embedment to comply with design
requirements. Accurately position for attachment of loose hardware, and secure in
place during precasting operations. Locate anchorage hardware where it does not
affect position of main reinforcement or concrete placement.
1. Weld-headed studs and deformed bar anchors used for anchorage according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS C5.4, "Recommended Practices for Stud Welding."
B. Furnish loose hardware items including steel plates, clip angles, seat angles, anchors,
dowels, cramps, hangers, and other hardware shapes for securing architectural
precast concrete units to supporting and adjacent construction.
C. Cast-in reglets, slots, holes, and other accessories in architectural precast concrete
units as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
D. Reinforcement: Comply with recommendations in PCI MNL 117 for fabricating, placing,
and supporting reinforcement.
E. Reinforce architectural precast concrete units to resist handling, transportation, and
erection stresses and specified in-place loads.
SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 6
F. Comply with requirements in PCI MNL 117 and requirements in this Section for
measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete. After concrete batching, no
additional water may be added.
G. Place face mixture to a minimum thickness after consolidation of the greater of 1 inch
or 1.5 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less than the minimum reinforcing
cover specified.
H. Place concrete in a continuous operation to prevent cold joints or planes of weakness
from forming in precast concrete units.
1. Place backup concrete mixture to ensure bond with face-mixture concrete.
I. Thoroughly consolidate placed concrete by internal and external vibration without
dislocating or damaging reinforcement and built-in items, and minimize pour lines,
honeycombing, or entrapped air voids on surfaces. Use equipment and procedures
complying with PCI MNL 117.
1. Place self-consolidating concrete without vibration according to PCI TR-6,
"Interim Guidelines for the Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete in
Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute Member Plants." Ensure adequate bond
between face and backup concrete, if used.
J. Comply with PCI MNL 117 for hot- and cold-weather concrete placement.
K. Identify pickup points of architectural precast concrete units and orientation in structure
with permanent markings, complying with markings indicated on Shop Drawings.
Imprint or permanently mark casting date on each architectural precast concrete unit
on a surface that does not show in finished structure.
L. Cure concrete, according to requirements in PCI MNL 117, by moisture retention
without heat or by accelerated heat curing using low-pressure live steam or radiant
heat and moisture. Cure units until compressive strength is high enough to ensure that
stripping does not have an effect on performance or appearance of final product.
M. Discard and replace architectural precast concrete units that do not comply with
requirements, including structural, manufacturing tolerance, and appearance, unless
repairs meet requirements in PCI MNL 117 and Architect's approval.
2.8 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
A. Fabricate architectural precast concrete units to shapes, lines, and dimensions
indicated so each finished unit complies with PCI MNL 117 product tolerances as well
as position tolerances for cast-in items.
2.9 FINISHES
A. Exposed faces shall be free of joint marks, grain, and other obvious defects. Corners,
including false joints shall be uniform, straight, and sharp. Finish exposed-face
surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match approved design reference
sample and as follows:
SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 7
1. Design Reference Sample.
B. Finish exposed top surfaces of architectural precast concrete units to match face-
surface finish.
C. Finish unexposed surfaces of architectural precast concrete units with as cast finish.
2.10 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality-Control Testing: Test and inspect precast concrete according to PCI MNL 117
requirements. If using self-consolidating concrete, also test and inspect according to
PCI TR-6, ASTM C 1610/C 1610M, ASTM C 1611/C 1611M, ASTM C 1621/C 1621M,
and ASTM C 1712.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install clips, hangers, bearing pads, and other accessories required for connecting
architectural precast concrete units to supporting members and backup materials.
B. Erect architectural precast concrete level, plumb, and square within specified allowable
tolerances. Provide temporary supports and bracing as required to maintain position,
stability, and alignment of units until permanent connections are completed.
1. Maintain horizontal and vertical joint alignment and uniform joint width as erection
progresses.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, maintain uniform joint widths of 3/4 inch.
C. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, welding, grouting, or
as otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and
spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.
D. Welding: Comply with applicable requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M and
AWS D1.4/D1.4M for welding, welding electrodes, appearance, quality of welds, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
E. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to
prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment.
F. Grouting or Dry-Packing Connections and Joints: Grout connections where required or
indicated. Retain flowable grout in place until hard enough to support itself.
Alternatively, pack spaces with stiff dry-pack grout material, tamping until voids are
completely filled. Place grout and finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent
concrete surfaces. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it
affects finishes or hardens. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after
initial set.
SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 8
3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, and in alignment
without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
special inspections and prepare reports:
1. Erection of loadbearing precast concrete members.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
and prepare test reports.
C. Visually inspect field welds and test according to ASTM E 165 or to ASTM E 709 and
ASTM E 1444. High-strength bolted connections are subject to inspections.
D. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and
Architect.
E. Repair or remove and replace work where tests and inspections indicate that it does
not comply with specified requirements.
F. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.4 REPAIRS
A. Repair architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. Architect reserves
the right to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements.
B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and
uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation
between original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a
distance of 20 feet.
C. Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings with galvanizing repair paint
according to ASTM A 780/A 780M.
D. Wire brush, clean, and paint damaged prime-painted components with same type of
shop primer.
E. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not
comply with requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.
SECTION 034500 - PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE Page 9
B. Clean mortar, plaster, fireproofing, weld slag, and other deleterious material from
concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.
C. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint
treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.
1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete
fabricator's recommendations. Protect other work from staining or damage due to
cleaning operations.
2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of
exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.
END OF SECTION 03 45 00
SECTION 03 53 00 - CONCRETE TOPPING
1. GENERAL
1. SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Emery-aggregate concrete floor topping.
2. Iron-aggregate concrete floor to pping.
2. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
2. PRODUCTS
1. CONCR ETE FLOOR TOPPINGS
A. E mery-Aggregate Concrete Floo r Topping: Factory-
prepared and dry-packaged mixture of graded, crushed emery aggregate containing not less
than 50 percent aluminum oxide, not less than 24 percent ferric oxide , and not more than 8
percent silica; portland cement or blended hydraulic ceme nt ; plasticizers; and other admixtures
to which only water needs to be added at Project site.
1. Manufacturers: Subje ct to compliance with
requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Dayton Superior.
b. Laticrete International, Inc .
c. US Concrete Materials, LLC.
2. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 1 0,000 psi ;
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
B. Iron-Aggregate Concrete Floor Topping: Factory-prepared
and dry-packaged mixture of graded iron a ggregate, portland cem ent, plasticizers, and other
admixtures to which only water needs to be added at Project s ite.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. BASF Corporation .
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM
company .
c. US Concrete Materials, LLC.
2. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 12,000 psi;
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2. CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporat ion Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film
forming; manufactured for applicatio n to fresh concret e.
B. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing
Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 25 percent solids content, minimum.
3. RELATED MAT ER IALS
A. Semirig id Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100
percent solids epoxy resin with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 80 accord ing to
ASTM D 2240.
B. Joint-Filler Strips: AST M D 1751, asphalt-saturated
cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork .
C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II.
D. Sand: ASTM C 404, fine aggrega te passing No. 16 sieve.
E. Water: Potable.
F. A crylic-Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II,
non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.
G. Epoxy Adhesive (when applicable to the project): A ST M C
881/C 881M, Type V, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to
damp surfaces, of class and grade to suit r equirements.
4. MIXING
A. Bonding Slurry: Mix portland cement with sand and water a
ccording to manufacturer ’s written instructions.
B. Floor Topping: Mix concrete floor topping materials and wat
er in appropriate drum-type batch machine mix er or truck mixer according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
3. EXECUTION
1. PREPARATION
A. Existing Concrete (when applicable to the project):
Remove existing surface treatments and de teriorated and unsound concrete. Mechanically
abrade base slabs to produce a heav ily scarified surface profile with an ampl itude of 1/4 inch .
1. Prepare and clean existing base slabs according to
concrete floor topping manufacturer's written instructions. Fill voids, cracks , and cavities in
base slabs.
2. Saw cut contraction and construction joints in
existing concrete to a depth of 1/2 inch and fill with semirigid joint fil ler.
3. To both sides of joint edges and at perimeter of
existing bas e slab, mechanically remove a 4-inch-wide and 0- to 1-inch-deep, tapered wedge
of concrete and retexture surface .
B. Install joint-filler strips where topping abuts vertical
surfaces.
2. FLOOR TOP PING APPLICATION
A. Mon olithic Floor Topp ing (when applicable to the project):
After textured-float finish is applied to fresh concrete of b ase slabs specified in Section 03 30 00
"Cast-in-Place Concrete," place concret e floor topping while concrete is still plastic.
B. Deferred Floor Topping (when applicable to the project):
Within 72 hours of placing base slabs, mix and scrub bon ding slurry into dampened concrete to
a t hickness of 1/16 to 1/8 inch , without puddling. Place floor topping while slurry is still tacky.
C. Existing Conc rete (when applicable to the project): Apply e
poxy-bonding adhesive, mixed according to manufacturer's written ins tructions, and scrub into
dry base slabs to a thickness of 1/16 to 1/8 inch , without puddling. P lace floor topping while
adhesive is still tacky.
D. Place concrete floor topping continuously in a single layer,
tamping and consolidating to achieve tight contact with bonding surface. Do not permit cold
joints or seams to devel op within pour strip.
1. Screed surface with a straightedge and strike off to
correct elevations.
2. Slope surface s uniformly where indicated.
3. Begin initial floating, using bull flo ats to form a
uniform and open-textured surface plane free of humps or hollows.
E. Finishing: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats as
soon as concrete floor topping can support equipme nt a nd opera tor. Restraighten, cut down
high spots, and fill low sp ots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until concrete floor
topping surface has a uniform, smooth, granu lar texture.
1. Hard Trowel Finish: After floating surface, apply first
trowel fin ish and cons olidate concrete floor topping by power-driven trowel without allowing
blisters to develop. Continue troweling passes and restraighten u ntil surface is smooth and un if
orm in texture.
F. Construction Joints: Construct joints true to line with faces p
erpendicular to surface plane of concrete floor topping, at locations indicated or as approved by
Architect.
1. Coat face of construction joint with epoxy adhesive
at locations w here concrete floor topping is placed against hardened or partially hardened co ncr
e te floor topping.
G. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contr action
joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-
inch-wide joints into concrete floor topping when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise
damage surface and before random contraction c racks develop.
1. Form joints in concrete floor topping over contracti on
joints in base slabs unless otherwise indicated.
2. Construct contraction joints for a combined depth
equal to top ping thi ckness and not less than one-fourth of base-slab thickness.
3. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to one -
half of concrete floor topping thickness, but not less than 1/2 inch deep.
3. PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete floo r topping from
premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporati on retarder to
concrete floor topping surfaces in hot, d ry, or windy conditions before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufact urer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and
bull floating or darbying floor topping, but before float finishing.
C. Begin curing immediately after f inishi ng concrete floor
topping. Cure by one or a combination of the following me thods, according to concrete floor
topping manufacturer's written instructions:
1. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in two coats in
continuous operations by power spray or roller accor ding to ma nufacturer's written instructions.
4. JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare and clean contraction jo ints and install semirigid
joint filler, accor ding to manufacturer's written instructions, once topping has fully cured.
B. Install semirigid joint filler full depth of contr acti on joints.
Overfill joint and trim semirigid joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.
5. REPAIR
A. Defective Topping: Repair and patch defective concrete
floor topping areas, including areas that have not bonded to concrete substrate.
END OF SECTION 03 53 00
SECTION 035413 - GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT Page 1
SECTION 03 54 13 - GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes self-leveling, gypsum cement underlayment for application below
interior floor coverings.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for
substrate temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other
conditions affecting underlayment performance.
1. Place gypsum cement underlayments only when ambient temperature and
temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENTS
A. Gypsum Cement Underlayment: Self-leveling, gypsum cement product that can be
applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/8 inch to match adjacent floor elevations.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. ARDEX Americas.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
c. Maxxon Corporation.
2. Cement Binder: Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTM C 219.
3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2500 psi at 28 days when tested according
to ASTM C 472.
SECTION 035413 - GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT Page 2
4. Underlayment Additive (when applicable to the project): Resilient-emulsion
product of underlayment manufacturer, formulated for use with underlayment
when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.
B. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.
C. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,
conditions, and application indicated.
D. Surface Sealer (when applicable to the project): Designed to reduce porosity as
recommended by manufacturer for type of floor covering to be applied to
underlayment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written
instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through
underlayment.
2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents,
dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.
1. Moisture Testing (when underlayment is placed on hardened concrete slabs)
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of
3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
C. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate
movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment
bond and remove sanding dust.
D. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove
waxes, sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond;
prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with
underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
SECTION 035413 - GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT Page 3
1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after
application recommended in writing by manufacturer.
2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion to substrate
and between coats.
3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same
width to continue through underlayment.
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.
1. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent
contamination during application and curing processes.
E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in
writing by underlayment manufacturer.
F. Apply surface sealer at rate recommended by manufacturer (when applicable to the
project).
G. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate,
including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
END OF SECTION 03 54 13
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 1
SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Decorative concrete masonry units.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of
unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product. For masonry units, include
data on material properties material test reports substantiating compliance with
requirements.
B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and
proportions of ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property
specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength,
ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to
comply with compressive strength requirement.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated
with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry
damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 2
B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements
contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of
units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units
where such defects are exposed in the completed Work.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly
designs indicated.
1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and
labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching
exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints,
headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed
units and where indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. BASF Corporation.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
c. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area
compressive strength of [2150 psi] [2800 psi] [3050 psi].
2. Density Classification: [Lightweight] [Medium weight] [Normal weight][ unless
otherwise indicated].
D. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area
compressive strength of 2150 psi .
2. Density Classification: [Lightweight] [Medium weight] [Normal weight].
3. Pattern and Texture:
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 3
a. Standard pattern, ground-face finish.[ Match Architect's samples.]
b. Standard pattern, split-face finish.[ Match Architect's samples.]
c. Standard pattern, split-ribbed finish.[ Match Architect's samples.]
d. Scored vertically, standard finish.[ Match Architect's samples.]
2.3 CONCRETE LINTELS
A. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density
classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area
compressive strength not less than that of CMUs.
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for
cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to
produce mortar color indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime
containing no other ingredients.
D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Holcim (US) Inc.
b. Lafarge North America Inc.
c. Lehigh Hanson; HeidelbergCement Group.
E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded
for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments
with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Davis Colors.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
c. Solomon Colors, Inc.
F. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated
lime, masonry cement or mortar cement and mortar pigments, all complying with
specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.
1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 4
1) Holcim (US) Inc.
2) Lafarge North America Inc.
3) Lehigh Hanson; HeidelbergCement Group.
2. Colored Masonry Cement:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Holcim (US) Inc.
2) Lafarge North America Inc.
3) Lehigh Hanson; HeidelbergCement Group.
G. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent
passing the No. 16 sieve.
2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to
produce required mortar color.
H. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
A. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use
with concrete bricks containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. BASF Corporation.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
c. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
B. Water: Potable.
2.5 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,
Grade 60.
B. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.
2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.
5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter.
6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet.
C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder or truss type with
single pair of side rods.
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 5
D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:
1. Ladder type with one side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more
than 4 inches wide, plus one side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches wide or
less.
2. Tab type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of
backing wythe and with rectangular tabs sized to extend at least halfway through
facing wythe, but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
3. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at
each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-
and-eye connections having a maximum horizontal play of 1/16 inch and
maximum vertical adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway
through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
E. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry-Veneer
Anchors: Single 0.187-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized carbon-steel continuous wire.
2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at
least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from
materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial
Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches
wide.
1. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel wire.
D. Partition Top Anchors: 0.105-inch-thick metal plate with a 3/8-inch-diameter metal rod
6 inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that
allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
E. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:
1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist a 100-lbf load
in both tension and compression perpendicular to plane of wall without deforming
or developing play in excess of 1/16 inch.
2. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.075-
inch-thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
3. Fabricate wire ties from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel wire
unless otherwise indicated.
4. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Wire tie and a rib-stiffened, sheet
metal anchor section.
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 6
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) FERO Corporation.
2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
5. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Wire tie and a gasketed sheet metal
anchor section, with pronged legs of length to match thickness of insulation or
sheathing and raised rib-stiffened strap to provide a slot for inserting wire tie.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2) Wire-Bond.
6. Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except with hex washer
head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10 diameter, and with coating with
salt-spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours according to
ASTM B 117.
2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,
adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-
laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030
inch.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
3) W.R. Meadows, Inc.
B. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing
sheets to each other and to substrates.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from
neoprene or PVC.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound,
complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with
ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to
maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 7
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
D. Weep/Cavity Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full
height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe;
in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc.
2) Keene Building Products.
3) Mortar Net Solutions.
E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not
degrade within the wall cavity.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
c. Mortar Net Solutions.
2. Configuration: Provide one of the following:
a. Strips, not less than 3/4 inch thick and 10 inches high, with dimpled surface
designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging
with mortar.
2.9 MASONRY-CELL FILL
A. Lightweight-Aggregate Fill: ASTM C 331/C 331M.
2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for
removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from
new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product
expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of
masonry units being cleaned.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a Hohmann & Barnard company.
b. EaCo Chem, Inc.
c. PROSOCO, Inc.
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 8
2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other
admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar.
4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar.
5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be
exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is
consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended
mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly
blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide
the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or
needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M.
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N.
3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet
walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and
for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
4. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.
1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement or mortar cement by
weight.
3. Mix to match Architect's sample.
4. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following
units:
a. Decorative CMUs.
E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates
and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
1. Mix to match Architect's sample.
2. Application: Use colored-aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the
following units:
a. Decorative CMUs.
F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 9
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)
that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for
specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a
continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws;
provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting
of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges
concealed.
B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors
and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq.
in. per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so
they are damp but not wet at time of laying.
3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2
inch or minus 1/4 inch.
2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than
plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more
than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more
than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do
not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-
inch maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in
10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals,
and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch
in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,
3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 10
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.
3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/8 inch.
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns,
and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and,
where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry
in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay CMUs as follows:
1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings
where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints
or slush head joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes
(other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 11
3.5 COMPOSITE MASONRY
A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods:
1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not
less than one metal tie for 4.5 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 36 inches
o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses.
Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36
inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls,
provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically.
2. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.
a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement
extending across both wythes.
b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-
type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe
attached to ties.
B. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and
shoving units of other wythe into place.
C. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown
at juncture, bond walls together as follows:
1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 8 inches o.c.
2. Provide continuity with masonry-joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T-
shaped units.
3. Provide rigid metal anchors not more than 24 inches o.c. If used with hollow
masonry units, embed ends in mortar-filled cores.
3.6 CAVITY WALLS
A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods:
1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not
less than one metal tie for 4.5 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 36 inches
o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses.
Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36
inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls,
provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically.
2. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.
a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement
extending across both wythes.
b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable-type (two-piece-
type) reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe
attached to ties.
c. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry,
use adjustable-type (two-piece-type) reinforcement with continuous
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 12
horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential
movement regardless of whether bed joints align.
B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel
beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to
trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.
C. Installing Cavity Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately
12 inches o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic
fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and
other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units
firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown.
3.7 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS
A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with
the following requirements:
1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal
fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses
one fastener.
2. Embed tie sections or connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints.
3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties
up and down.
4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 25
inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than one anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. of wall
area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not
exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter.
3.8 MASONRY-CELL FILL
A. Pour lightweight-aggregate fill into cavities to fill void spaces. Maintain inspection ports
to show presence of fill at extremities of each pour area. Close the ports after filling has
been confirmed. Limit the fall of fill to one story high, but not more than 20 feet.
3.9 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of
5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of
6 inches.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet
walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings
and extending 12 inches beyond openings.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 13
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND CAVITY VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels,
ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that
could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall
flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with
mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape.
2. At multiwythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer
wythe, turned up a minimum of 4 inches, and through inner wythe to within 1/2
inch of the interior face of wall in exposed masonry. Where interior face of wall is
to receive furring or framing, carry flashing completely through inner wythe and
turn flashing up approximately 2 inches on interior face.
3. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry
at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not
less than 2 inches to form end dams.
4. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal drip edge.
5. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall.
Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
C. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of
masonry immediately above embedded flashing.
1. Use specified weep/cavity vent products to form weep holes.
2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated
with loose-fill insulation.
D. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for
cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article.
E. Install cavity vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified
weep/cavity vent products to form cavity vents.
1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated.
Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to
support reinforced masonry elements during construction.
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 14
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed
masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar
and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during
construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have
hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may
be placed on them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained
enough strength to resist grout pressure.
1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for
grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and
inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas
as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply
with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.
D. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for
compressive strength.
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140
for compressive strength.
F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided,
according to ASTM C 780.
G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.
Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength.
H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to
ASTM C 1019.
3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to
remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as
follows:
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY Page 15
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic
scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned
for comparison purposes.
3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner.
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly
by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as
fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of
off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 04 20 00
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Page 1
SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Concrete masonry units.
2. Decorative concrete masonry units.
3. Pre-faced concrete masonry units.
4. Steel reinforcing bars.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of
unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product. For masonry units, include
data on material properties material test reports substantiating compliance with
requirements.
B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of type and proportions of
ingredients.
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property
specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength,
ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to
comply with compressive strength requirement.
1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated
with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Page 2
damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements
contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of
units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units
where such defects are exposed in the completed Work.
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly
designs indicated.
1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and
labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching
exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints,
headers, bonding, and other special conditions.
B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed
units and where indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. BASF Corporation.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
c. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area
compressive strength of [2150 psi] [2800 psi] [3050 psi].
2. Density Classification: [Lightweight] [Medium weight] [Normal weight][ unless
otherwise indicated].
D. Concrete Building Brick: ASTM C 55.
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Page 3
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area
compressive strength of [2800 psi] [3050 psi] [3750 psi] [4050 psi].
2. Density Classification: [Lightweight] [Medium weight] [Normal weight].
E. Decorative CMUs: ASTM C 90.
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area
compressive strength of [2150 psi] [2800 psi] [3050 psi].
2. Density Classification: [Lightweight] [Medium weight] [Normal weight].
3. Pattern and Texture:
a. Standard pattern, ground-face finish.[ Match Architect's samples.]
b. Standard pattern, split-face finish.[ Match Architect's samples.]
c. Standard pattern, split-ribbed finish.[ Match Architect's samples.]
d. Scored vertically, standard finish.[ Match Architect's samples.]
2.3 CONCRETE LINTELS
A. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density
classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area
compressive strength not less than that of CMUs.
2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for
cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to
produce mortar color indicated.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime
containing no other ingredients.
D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Holcim (US) Inc.
b. Lafarge North America Inc.
c. Lehigh Hanson; HeidelbergCement Group.
E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded
for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments
with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Davis Colors.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Page 4
c. Solomon Colors, Inc.
F. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated
lime or masonry cement and mortar pigments, all complying with specified
requirements, and containing no other ingredients.
1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Holcim (US) Inc.
2) Lafarge North America Inc.
3) Lehigh Hanson; HeidelbergCement Group.
2. Colored Masonry Cement:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Holcim (US) Inc.
2) Lafarge North America Inc.
3) Lehigh Hanson; HeidelbergCement Group.
G. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to
produce required mortar color.
H. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
I. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use
with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. BASF Corporation.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
c. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
J. Water: Potable.
2.5 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,
Grade 60.
B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning
masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Page 5
0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for
number of bars indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Dur-O-Wal; a Hohmann & Barnard company.
b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.
1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.
2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.
5. Spacing of Cross Rods: Not more than 16 inches o.c.
6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet.
2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from
materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial
Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,
adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-
laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030
inch.
B. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and
interlocking CMU web covers made from UV-resistant, high-density polyethylene. Cell
flashing pans have integral weep spouts designed to be built into mortar bed joints and
that extend into the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a. Mortar Net Solutions.
C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 07 62 00
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Page 6
D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing
sheets to each other and to substrates.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from
neoprene or PVC.
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound,
complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard
sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as
indicated.
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M,
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).
2.9 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other
admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar.
4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar.
5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be
exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is
consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended
mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly
blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide
the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N.
3. For mortar parge coats, use Type N.
4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet
walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and
for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.
5. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.
1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight.
2. Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight.
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Page 7
3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following
units:
a. Decorative CMUs.
b. Pre-faced CMUs.
E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates
and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
1. Application: Use colored-aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints with the
following units:
a. Decorative CMUs.
b. Pre-faced CMUs.
F. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)
that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces
and pour height.
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for
specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a
continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws;
provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting
of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges
concealed.
3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2
inch or minus 1/4 inch.
2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than
plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more
than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more
than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Page 8
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do
not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-
inch maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in
10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals,
and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch
in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,
3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.
3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/8 inch.
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform
joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns,
and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and,
where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry
in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.
D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a
layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or
grout into core.
F. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,
posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.
3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:
1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.
2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.
3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Page 9
4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings
where cells are not grouted.
B. Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush
head joints.
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes
(other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of
5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of
6 inches.
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.
2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet
walls.
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings
and extending 12 inches beyond openings.
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.
3.6 FLASHING
A. General: Install embedded flashing at ledges and other obstructions to downward flow
of water in wall where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that
could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall
flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with
mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape.
2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At
heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2
inches to form end dams.
3. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall.
Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Page 10
edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts
aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of
CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.
3.7 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to
support reinforced masonry elements during construction.
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed
masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar
and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during
construction and curing of reinforced masonry.
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have
hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may
be placed on them during construction.
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and
inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas
as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply
with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.
C. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140
for compressive strength.
D. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided,
according to ASTM C 780.
E. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.
Test mortar for mortar air content.
F. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to
ASTM C 1019.
G. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at
seven days and at 28 days.
3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to
remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as
follows:
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY Page 11
1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned
for comparison purposes.
2. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in
NCMA TEK 8-4A.
3.10 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as
fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of
off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 04 22 00
SECTION 042613 - MASONRY VENEER Page 1
SECTION 04 26 13 - MASONRY VENEER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Clay face brick.
2. Concrete face brick.
B. Products Installed but Not Furnished under This Section:
1. Steel lintels in masonry veneer.
2. Steel shelf angles for supporting masonry veneer.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated
with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry
damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction
requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature
is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less
than seven days after completing cleaning.
B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements
contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by
requirements in the Contract Documents.
SECTION 042613 - MASONRY VENEER Page 2
B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of
units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units
where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.
2.2 BRICK
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching
finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units:
1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise
expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with
exposed surfaces finished.
2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would
result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.
B. Clay Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.
1. Grade SW .
2. Type FBX.
3. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested
according to ASTM C 67.
4. rated "not effloresced."
5. Size: As selected by Architect.
6. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect.
2.3 CONCRETE BRICK
A. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent.
1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that
does not reduce flexural bond strength.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) BASF Corporation.
2) Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
3) GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
B. Concrete Face Brick: ASTM C 1634.
1. Density Classification: Lightweight.
2. Size: As selected by Architect.
3. Texture: As selected by Architect.Match Architect's samples.
4. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for
cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to
produce mortar color indicated.
SECTION 042613 - MASONRY VENEER Page 3
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime
containing no other ingredients.
D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Holcim (US) Inc.
b. Lafarge North America Inc.
c. Lehigh Hanson; HeidelbergCement Group.
E. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded
for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments
with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Davis Colors.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
c. Solomon Colors, Inc.
F. Colored Cement Products: Packaged blend made from portland cement and hydrated
lime, masonry cement or mortar cement and mortar pigments, all complying with
specified requirements, and containing no other ingredients.
1. Colored Portland Cement-Lime Mix:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Holcim (US) Inc.
2) Lafarge North America Inc.
3) Lehigh Hanson; HeidelbergCement Group.
2. Colored Masonry Cement:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Holcim (US) Inc.
2) Lafarge North America Inc.
3) Lehigh Hanson; HeidelbergCement Group.
G. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.
1. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.
2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to
produce required mortar color.
SECTION 042613 - MASONRY VENEER Page 4
H. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use
with concrete bricks containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. BASF Corporation.
b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
c. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
I. Water: Potable.
2.5 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at
least a 5/8-inch cover on outside face.
B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from
materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.
2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial
Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.
C. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors:
1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist a 100-lbf load
in both tension and compression perpendicular to plane of wall without deforming
or developing play in excess of 1/16 inch.
2. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.075-
inch-thick steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication.
3. Fabricate wire ties from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel wire
unless otherwise indicated.
4. Fabricate wire connector sections from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized,
carbon-steel wire.
5. Contractor's Option: Unless otherwise indicated, provide any of the adjustable
masonry-veneer anchors specified.
6. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Wire tie and a rib-stiffened, sheet
metal anchor section with screw holes top and bottom, with a projecting vertical
tab having a slotted hole for inserting wire tie.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) FERO Corporation.
2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
7. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Wire tie and a rib-stiffened, sheet
metal anchor section with screw holes top and bottom, with projecting tabs
having holes for inserting vertical legs of wire tie formed to fit anchor section.
SECTION 042613 - MASONRY VENEER Page 5
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
3) Wire-Bond.
8. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Wire tie and a sheet metal anchor
section, 1-1/4 inches wide by 9 inches long, with screw holes top and bottom and
with raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch wide by 5-1/2 inches long, stamped into
center to provide a slot between strap and base for inserting wire tie.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by the following:
1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
9. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Wire tie and a sheet metal anchor
section, 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long, with screw holes top and bottom and
with raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch wide by 3-5/8 inches long, stamped into
center to provide a slot between strap and base for inserting wire tie.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
3) Wire-Bond.
10. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Wire tie and a gasketed sheet metal
anchor section, 1-1/4 inches wide by 6 inches long, with screw holes top and
bottom; top and bottom ends bent to form pronged legs of length to match
thickness of insulation or sheathing; and raised rib-stiffened strap, 5/8 inch wide
by 6 inches long, stamped into center to provide a slot between strap and base
for inserting wire tie.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2) Wire-Bond.
2.6 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,
adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-
laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030
inch.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
SECTION 042613 - MASONRY VENEER Page 6
1) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
3) W.R. Meadows, Inc.
B. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard
products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing
sheets to each other and to substrates.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;
compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from
neoprene or PVC.
B. Weep/Vent Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Mesh Weep/Vent: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full
height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe;
in color selected from manufacturer's standard.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Advanced Building Products Inc.
2) Keene Building Products.
3) Mortar Net Solutions.
C. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not
degrade within the wall cavity.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
c. Mortar Net Solutions.
2. Configuration: Provide one of the following:
a. Strips, not less than 3/4 inch thick and 10 inches high, with dimpled surface
designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging
with mortar.
2.8 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for
removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from
new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product
expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of
masonry units being cleaned.
SECTION 042613 - MASONRY VENEER Page 7
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a Hohmann & Barnard company.
b. EaCo Chem, Inc.
c. PROSOCO, Inc.
2.9 MORTAR MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents,
accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other
admixtures unless otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be
exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is
consistent.
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended
mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly
blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Use Type
N unless another type is indicated.
D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.
E. Colored-Aggregate Mortar: Produce required mortar color by using colored aggregates
and natural color or white cement as necessary to produce required mortar color.
1. Mix to match Architect's sample.
2. Application: Use colored aggregate mortar for exposed mortar joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a
continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws;
provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting
of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges
concealed.
B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors
and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.
C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq.
in. per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so
they are damp but not wet at time of laying.
SECTION 042613 - MASONRY VENEER Page 8
3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2
inch or minus 1/4 inch.
2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than
plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more
than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.
B. Lines and Levels:
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more
than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do
not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2
inch maximum.
3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in
10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals,
and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch
in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,
3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.
C. Joints:
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus
1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.
2. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus
or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses
by more than 1/8 inch.
3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surf ace bond patterns with uniform
joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns,
and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and,
where possible, at other locations.
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry
in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face
dimensions at corners or jambs.
3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient
mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush
head joints.
SECTION 042613 - MASONRY VENEER Page 9
B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than
joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS
A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with
the following requirements:
1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal
fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses
one fastener.
2. Embed tie sections or connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints.
3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties
up and down.
4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and 24
inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than one anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall
area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not
exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter.
B. Provide not less than 1 inch of airspace between back of masonry veneer and face of
sheathing.
3.6 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, AND VENTS
A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels,
ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where
indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of
air in cavities, and where indicated.
B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that
could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall
flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with
mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape.
2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry
at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not
less than 2 inches to form end dams.
3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop
flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal drip edge.
4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall.
Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible
flashing to top of metal flashing termination.
C. Install weep holes in veneers in head joints of first course of masonry immediately
above embedded flashing.
1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes.
2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
SECTION 042613 - MASONRY VENEER Page 10
D. Place cavity drainage material in airspace behind veneers to comply with configuration
requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories"
Article.
E. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified
weep/vent products to form vents.
1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated.
Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and
inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas
as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply
with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.
B. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for
compressive strength.
C. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140
for compressive strength.
D. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided,
according to ASTM C 780.
3.8 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to
remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as
follows:
1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned
for comparison purposes.
2. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner.
3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly
by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.
4. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.9 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as
fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of
off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 04 26 13
SECTION 044313.16 - ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER Page 1
SECTION 04 43 13.16 - ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Stone masonry adhered to wood framing and sheathing.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory, and manufactured product.
B. Samples:
1. For each stone type indicated.
2. For each color of mortar required.
1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Stone Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and
sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated
with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather
construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature
is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried.
C. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements
contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Mortar manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of adhered manufactured masonry veneer that fail in
materials, workmanship, or adhesion within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period:
a. Product Warranty: 20 years from date of substantial completion.
b. Installation: 1 year from date of substantial completion.
SECTION 044313.16 - ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED STONE
A. Material Standards:
1. Maximum Absorption according to ASTM C 97/C 97M: 7.5 percent.
2. Minimum Compressive Strength according to ASTM C 170/C 170M: 4000 psi.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as indicated
on drawings or approved equal.
2.2 MORTAR MATERIALS
A. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar from a single manufacturer. To
be mixed with potable water clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids,
alkalis, salts, organic minerals or other deleterious substances.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following or approved equal:
1. Laticrete International, Inc: MVIS – Masonry Veneer Installation System.
2. MAPEI Corporation.
3. Mer-Krete Systems; ParexLahabra, Inc.
C. Masonry Veneer Mortar: Polymer-modified portland cement mortar recommended by
the mortar manufacturer for the application indicated.
1. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate
or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.
2. Provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition
to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
D. Masonry Pointing Mortar: For thin brick and where indicated, provide mortar
manufacturer’s recommended masonry pointing mortar in color selected by Architect
from manufacturer’s standard.
E. Water: Potable.
2.3 WEATHER BARRIER
A. Provide and install weather barrier as indicated in section 07 25 00 – Weather Barriers.
2.4 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Flexible Flashing: For flashing unexposed to the exterior, use the following unless
otherwise indicated:
SECTION 044313.16 - ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER Page 3
1. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable,
adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-
laminated, polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than
0.030 inch.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
2) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
3) Polyguard Products, Inc.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES
A. Weep Products: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:
1. Mesh Weep Holes: Free-draining mesh; made from polyethylene strands, full
width of head joint and 2 inches high by thickness of stone masonry; in color
selected from manufacturer's standard.
B. Expanded Metal Lath: 3.4 lb/sq. yd., self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying with
ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60.
2.6 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for
removing mortar and grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains
from stone masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces;
expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and stone producer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a Hohmann & Barnard company.
b. Hydroclean; Hydrochemical Techniques, Inc.
c. PROSOCO, Inc.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size, and shape indicated, including details
on Drawings and pattern specified in "Setting Stone Masonry" Article.
B. Gage backs of stones for adhered veneer if more than 81 sq. in. in area.
C. Thickness of Stone: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than the following:
1. Thickness: 1 inch plus or minus 1/8 inch.
D. Finish exposed stone faces and edges to comply with requirements indicated for finish
SECTION 044313.16 - ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER Page 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces indicated to receive adhered manufactured masonry veneer, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of adhered veneer.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 MANUFACTURED VENEER UNITS
A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations for the adhered
stone veneer system used.
3.3 ADHERED MASONRY VENEER INSTALLATION
A. Comply with mortar manufacturer’s written instructions, for adhered masonry veneer
system specified.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 10
feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more. For external corners, expansion
joints, control joints, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or
1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.
B. Variation from Level: For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves,
and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4 inch in 20 feet or 1/2 inch in 40 feet or
more.
C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plan, do not exceed 1/2 inch in
20 feet or 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.
D. Measure variation from level, plumb, and position shown in plan as a variation of the
average plane of each stone face from level, plumb, or dimensioned plane.
E. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Stones: Do not exceed one-half of tolerance
specified for thickness of stone.
3.5 POINTING
A. Prepare joint surfaces for pointing with mortar by removing dust and mortar particles.
Where setting mortar was removed to depths greater than surrounding areas, apply
pointing mortar in layers not more than 3/8 inch deep until a uniform depth is formed.
SECTION 044313.16 - ADHERED STONE MASONRY VENEER Page 5
B. Point joints by placing and compacting pointing mortar in layers of not more than 3/8
inch deep. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow to it become thumbprint hard
before applying next layer.
C. Tool joints, when pointing mortar is thumbprint hard, with a smooth jointing tool to
produce the following joint profile:
1. Joint Profile: Concave.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry of the following description:
1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged units. Units may be repaired if
methods and results are approved by Architect.
2. Defective joints.
3. Masonry not matching approved samples and mockups.
4. Masonry not complying with other requirements indicated.
B. Replace in a manner that results in masonry matching approved samples and
mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of
replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean masonry as work progresses. Remove mortar fins and
smears before tooling joints.
END OF SECTION 04 43 13.16
SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY Page 1
SECTION 04 72 00 - CAST STONE MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cast-stone trim.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. For cast-stone units, include dimensions and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast-stone units. Include
dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished
faces.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.
B. Material Test Reports: For each mix required to produce cast stone, based on testing
according to ASTM C 1364.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast -stone units similar to
those indicated for this Project, that has sufficient production capacity to manufacture
required units, and is a plant certified by the Cast Stone Institute the Architectural
Precast Association or the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute for Group A,
Category AT.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CAST-STONE UNITS
A. Cast-Stone Units: Comply with ASTM C 1364.
1. Units shall be manufactured using the vibrant dry tamp method.
2. Units shall be resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory
testing according to ASTM C 666/C 666M, Procedure A, as modified by
ASTM C 1364.
SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY Page 2
B. Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated
texture on all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs.
3. Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated.
C. Cure Units as Follows:
1. Cure units in enclosed, moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity
and temperature of 100 deg F for 12 hours or 70 deg F for 16 hours.
2. Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following:
a. No fewer than five days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F or above.
b. No fewer than six days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F or above.
c. No fewer than seven days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F or above.
d. No fewer than eight days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F or above.
D. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.
E. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from steel complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B. Dowels: 1/2-inch-diameter round bars, fabricated from steel complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M.
C. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for
removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from
new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product
expressly approved for intended use by cast-stone manufacturer and expressly
approved by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry
materials.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; a Hohmann & Barnard company.
b. EaCo Chem, Inc.
c. PROSOCO, Inc.
2.3 MORTAR
A. Comply with requirements in Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry" for mortar mixes.
1. For setting mortar, use Type N.
2. For pointing mortar, use Type N.
B. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.
SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY Page 3
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample and test cast-stone units
according to ASTM C 1364.
1. Include one test for resistance to freezing and thawing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR
A. Install cast-stone units to comply with requirements in Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry."
B. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated.
1. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar.
2. Fill collar joints solid as units are set.
3. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set.
4. Keep head joints in copings and between other units with exposed horizontal
surfaces open to receive sealant.
5. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant.
C. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch. Rake joints
to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remo ve
excess mortar as joints are raked.
D. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8
inch. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before
applying next layer.
E. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard. Use a smooth plastic
jointer larger than joint thickness.
3.2 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch
maximum.
B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch
maximum.
C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or
one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.
D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush
alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by
more than 1/16 inch, except where variation is due to warpage of units within
tolerances specified.
SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY Page 4
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching
approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved
by Architect.
B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples,
complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses.
1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.
2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter.
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as
follows:
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic
scrape hoes or chisels.
2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison
purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with
cleaning of cast stone.
3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid
strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.
4. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by
rinsing thoroughly with clear water.
5. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 04 72 00
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Page 1
SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Structural steel.
2. Grout.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as
described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.
B. Welding certificates.
C. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.
D. Source quality-control reports.
E. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality
Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality
Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Page 2
1. AISC 303.
2. AISC 360.
3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract
Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads
indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.
1. Select and complete connections using [schematic details indicated] [and]
[AISC 360]
2. Use Allowable Stress Design; data are given at service-load level.
B. Moment Connections: PR, partially restrained.
C. Construction: Shear wall system
2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.
B. Channels, Angles, M-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural
tubing.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.
2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel
structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436,
Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.
B. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex
steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and
ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.
1. Finish: Hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating.
C. Shear Connectors (when applicable to the project): ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through
1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Page 3
D. Unheaded Anchor Rods: [ASTM F 1554, Grade 36] [ASTM F 1554, Grade 55,
weldable].
1. Configuration: [Straight] [Hooked].
2. Finish: [Plain] [Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C] [Mechanically
deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50].
E. Headed Anchor Rods: [ASTM F 1554, Grade 36] [ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable],
straight.
1. Finish: [Plain] [Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C] [Mechanically
deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50].
F. Threaded Rods: [ASTM A 36/A 36M] [ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B7].
1. Finish: [Plain] [Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C] [Mechanically
deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50].
G. [Clevises] [and] [Turnbuckles]: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars,
ASTM A 108, Grade 1035.
2.4 PRIMER
A. Primer: Comply with Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior
Painting."
B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.
C. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting
primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
2.5 GROUT
A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout (when applicable to the project):
ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water
to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.
B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout (when applicable to the project):
ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive
and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-
minute working time.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,"
and to AISC 360.
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Page 4
B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear
connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.
2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt
and type of joint specified.
1. Joint Type: [Snug tightened] [Pretensioned] [Slip critical].
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances,
welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding
work.
2.8 SHOP PRIMING
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded
members to a depth of 2 inches.
2. Surfaces to be field welded.
3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections.
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).
5. Galvanized surfaces.
6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale
and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following
specifications and standards:
1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to
manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a
minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage
of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.
2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and
inspections.
1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being
fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.
B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Page 5
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not
accepted.
3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing
surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for
compliance with requirements.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to
AISC 303 and AISC 360.
B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing
surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates.
Clean bottom surface of plates.
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.
2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate.
3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and
plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with
edge of plate before packing with grout.
4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids
remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply
with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard
Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."
3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint
specified.
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened
SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING Page 6
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances,
welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding
work.
1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of
temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs where indicated, back gouge, and grind steel
smooth.
3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of
axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for
Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
special inspections:
1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details.
2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds.
3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.
B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's
option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not
accepted.
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.
END OF SECTION 05 12 00
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 1
SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
2. Shelf angles.
3. Metal ladders.
4. Miscellaneous steel trim.
5. Metal bollards.
6. Abrasive metal nosings.
7. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:
1. Loose steel lintels.
2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts
indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.
3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they
are not specified in other Sections.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Prefabricated building columns.
2. Metal nosings and treads.
3. Paint products.
4. Grout.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations,
sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and
accessory items.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded [nosing] [and] [tread].
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in
Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design ladders.
B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders shall withstand the
effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in
ANSI A14.3.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling,
opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.
E. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise
indicated.
G. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with
MFMA-4.
1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches.
2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, commercial steel, Type B, with
G90 coating; 0.108-inch nominal thickness.
3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B;
0.0966-inch minimum thickness; unfinished.
H. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.
I. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.
J. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 3
2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for
exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and
class required.
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.
2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.
B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless
otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable
iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all
hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.
C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors.
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply
with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy
Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.
D. Slotted-Channel Inserts (when applicable to project): Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-
steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length
indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8
inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and
nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for
fastening to inserts.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich
primer.
B. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20
and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with
ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically
recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 4
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use
connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges.
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended.
D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
E. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with
integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of
units and 24 inches o.c.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed
to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless
otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as
necessary to receive adjacent construction.
C. Fabricate steel girders for wood frame construction from continuous steel shapes of
sizes indicated (when applicable to project).
1. Where wood nailers are attached to girders with bolts or lag screws, drill or
punch holes at 24 inches o.c.
D. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe
with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top
plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around.
Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated (when
applicable to project).
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 5
2.7 SHELF ANGLES
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to
concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced
not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup
masonry and concrete.
C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.
D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to
cast-in-place concrete.
2.8 METAL LADDERS
A. General:
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, except for elevator pit ladders.
2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
B. Steel Ladders:
1. Space siderails 16 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.
2. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.
3. Rungs: 3/4-inch-diameter steel bars.
4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung.
6. Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of
profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter
corners and use concealed field splices where possible.
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and
installation with other work.
C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer.
2.10 METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.
1. Cap bollards with 1/4-inch-thick steel plate.
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 6
B. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.
2.11 ABRASIVE METAL NOSINGS
A. Extruded Units: Aluminum, with abrasive filler consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon
carbide, or a combination of both, in an epoxy-resin binder.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Amstep Products.
b. Balco, Inc.
c. Wooster Products Inc.
2. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch above
aluminum extrusion.
B. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as
standard with manufacturer.
C. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units.
D. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units.
2.12 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or
concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.
2.13 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for
openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.
B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.
C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.
2.14 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items
supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each
unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in
concrete.
2.15 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 7
2.16 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M
for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron
products.
B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be
embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE
No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application
Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment,
and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and
measured from established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been
hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended
so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches
that of adjacent surface.
D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where
metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into
concrete, masonry, or similar construction.
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS Page 8
3.2 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS
A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days
before installing.
B. Anchor bollards in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. Fill
annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink grout.
C. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.
3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and
roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing
members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove
wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plat e before
packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates
to ensure that no voids remain.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used
for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
END OF SECTION 05 50 00
SECTION 055113 - METAL PAN STAIRS Page 1
SECTION 05 51 13 - METAL PAN STAIRS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.
2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.
3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For metal pan stairs.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For stairs and railings, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. American Stair, Inc.
2. Pacific Stair Corporation.
3. Worthington Metal Fabricators.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in
Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design stairs and railings.
B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft.
2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in.
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in
addition to loads specified above.
SECTION 055113 - METAL PAN STAIRS Page 2
C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2. Infill of Guards:
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
2.3 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
D. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel,
Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads;
exposed.
E. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel,
Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30, unless another grade is required by design loads.
2.4 ABRASIVE NOSINGS
1.
B. Extruded Units: Aluminum units with abrasive filler in an epoxy-resin binder.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc.
b. Balco, Inc.
c. Wooster Products Inc.
2. Provide ribbed units, with abrasive filler strips projecting 1/16 inch above
aluminum extrusion.
C. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as
standard with manufacturer.
D. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete.
SECTION 055113 - METAL PAN STAIRS Page 3
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into
exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd
primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with
ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
C. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 03 30 00
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a
minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.
D. Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches, W1.4 by W1.4,
unless otherwise indicated.
2.7 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, str uts, railings,
clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor
stairs and platforms on supporting structure.
1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for
reassembly and coordinated installation.
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a
radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough
areas on exposed surfaces.
D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation
or otherwise impairing work.
E. Weld connections to comply with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.
5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's
"Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with
spatter removed.
SECTION 055113 - METAL PAN STAIRS Page 4
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed
fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
2.8 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS
A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards
for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Commercial Class,
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
B. Stair Framing:
1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels.
a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers.
2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing
members as needed to comply with performance requirements.
3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers.
4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board assemblies, provide hanger rods or
struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger
rods and struts where they do not encroach on required stair width and are within
the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.
5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts
designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry.
C. Metal Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations
shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements,
but not less than 0.067 inch.
2.9 STAIR RAILINGS
A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for
design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube,
post spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated
loads.
1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch-diameter top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch-square
posts.
2. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch- round pickets spaced less than 4 inches clear.
3. Intermediate Rails Infill: 1-5/8-inch-diameter intermediate rails spaced less than
12 inches clear.
B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at
connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all
around at connections, including at fittings.
1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for
Type 3 welds: partially dressed weld with spatter removed as shown in
NAAMM AMP 521.
C. Form changes in direction of railings by bending.
SECTION 055113 - METAL PAN STAIRS Page 5
D. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for
each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout
entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed
surfaces of components.
E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails.
G. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding.
H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching
to other work.
I. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material,
where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports.
Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses.
2.10 FINISHES
A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with
SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLING METAL PAN STAIRS
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for
installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation,
measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into
concrete unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections
that are not to be left as exposed joints.
D. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.
E. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 03 30 00
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
SECTION 055113 - METAL PAN STAIRS Page 6
1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete.
F. Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLING RAILINGS
A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting
joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design
loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building
construction as follows:
1. Anchor posts to steel by welding to steel supporting members.
2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded
to rail ends and anchored with post installed anchors and bolts.
B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not
indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to
building construction as required to comply with performance requirements.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used
for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION 05 51 13
SECTION 061516 - WOOD ROOF DECKING Page 1
SECTION 06 15 16 - WOOD ROOF DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes solid-sawn and glued-laminated wood roof decking
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Research/Evaluation Reports: For glued-laminated wood roof decking indicated to be
of diaphragm design and construction, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD ROOF DECKING, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection
agencies certified by ALSC's Board of Review.
2.2 SOLID-SAWN WOOD ROOF DECKING (when applicable to project).
A. Standard for Solid-Sawn Wood Roof Decking: Comply with AITC 112.
B. Roof Decking Species: Balsam fir, Douglas fir-larch, Douglas fir-larch (North), hem-fir,
hem-fir (North), southern pine, spruce pine-fir (North), western hemlock, or western
hemlock (North).
C. Roof Decking Nominal Size: 2 by 6.
D. Roof Decking Grade: Select(ed) Decking or Select Dex.
E. Grade Stamps: Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency. Apply
grade stamp to surfaces that are not exposed to view.
F. Moisture Content: Provide wood roof decking with 15 percent maximum moisture
content at time of dressing.
G. Face Surface: Saw textured.
H. Edge Pattern: Beaded edge.
SECTION 061516 - WOOD ROOF DECKING Page 2
2.3 GLUED-LAMINATED WOOD ROOF DECKING (when applicable to project)
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following or approved equal:
1. Filler King Company.
2. Structural Wood Systems; A Division of Harrison Industries.
3. Timberweld.
B. Face Species: Douglas fir-larch or Douglas fir-larch (North).
C. Roof Decking Nominal Size: 2 by 6.
D. Face Grade: Decorative: Sound knots and natural characteristics are allowed, including
chipped edge knots, short end splits, seasoning checks, and some pin holes. Face
knot holes, stains, end slits, skips, roller splits, and planer burns are not allowed.
E. Moisture Content: Provide wood roof decking with 15 percent maximum moisture
content at time of dressing.
F. Face Surface: Saw textured.
G. Edge Pattern: Beaded edge.
H. Laminating Adhesive: Wet-use type complying with ASTM D 2559.
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Fastener Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
B. Sealants: Latex, complying with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint
Sealants" and recommended by sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of substrates
for intended application.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Bostik, Inc.
b. Pecora Corporation.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install solid-sawn wood roof decking to comply with AITC 112.
B. Install laminated wood roof decking to comply with manufacturer's written instructions
(when applicable to project).
SECTION 061516 - WOOD ROOF DECKING Page 3
1. Nail each course of glued-laminated wood roof decking at each support with one
nail slant nailed above the tongue and one nail straight nailed through the face
(when applicable to project).
a. Use 12d nails for 2-by-6 and 2-by-8 roof decking.
2. Slant nail each course of glued-laminated wood roof decking to the tongue of the
adjacent course at 30 inches o.c. and within 12 inches of the end of each unit.
Stagger nailing 15 inches in adjacent courses (when applicable to project).
a. Use 6d nails for 2-by-6 and 2-by-8 roof decking.
C. Anchor wood roof decking, where supported on walls, with bolts as indicated (when
applicable to project).
D. Apply joint sealant to seal roof decking at exterior walls at the following locations:
1. Between roof decking and supports located at exterior walls.
2. Between roof decking and exterior walls that butt against underside of roof
decking.
3. Between tongues and grooves of roof decking over exterior walls and supports at
exterior walls.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Provide water-resistive barrier over roof decking as the Work progresses to protect roof
decking until roofing is applied.
END OF SECTION 06 15 16
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING Page 1
SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wall sheathing.
2. Roof sheathing.
3. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For the following (when applicable to project), from ICC-ES:
1. Wood-preservative-treated plywood.
2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings (when applicable to project): As tested according to
ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate
markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire
Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.
2.2 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for
interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior
construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact
with ground.
B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING Page 2
C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry
or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD
A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying
with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread
index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes,
and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the
burners at any time during the test.
1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above
for fire-retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations
and where indicated.
2. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested
according to ASTM D 5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be
calculated according to ASTM D 6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not
less than span ratings specified. For roof sheathing and where high-temperature
fire-retardant treatment is indicated, span ratings for temperatures up to 170
deg F shall be not less than span ratings specified.
C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.
D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of
qualified testing agency.
E. Application: Treat plywood indicated on Drawings.
2.4 WALL SHEATHING (when applicable to project).
A. Oriented-Strand-Board Sheathing: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 sheathing.
B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
b. National Gypsum Company.
c. USG Corporation.
2. Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick.
C. Cementitious Backer Units: ASTM C 1325, Type A.
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING Page 3
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. C-Cure.
b. Custom Building Products.
c. USG Corporation.
2.5 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Plywood Sheathing: DOC PS 1, Exterior sheathing.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Sheathing: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 sheathing.
2.6 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
2.7 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with
ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by
tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for
covering exposed fasteners.
1. Sheathing Tape: Self -adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by
10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape
manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat
gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Wood Framing: Formulation complying with
APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by
manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too
small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange
joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.
SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING Page 4
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against
abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code.
D. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant
installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent
exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.
E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match
spacing of structural support elements.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered
Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications
indicated.
B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail or staple to wood framing.
b. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.
3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with nails or screws.
2. Install panels with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts
structural elements.
3. Install panels with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials
that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.
B. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply
and trowel sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to
exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other
penetrations and openings.
3.4 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT INSTALLATION
A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written
instructions for type of application indicated.
END OF SECTION 06 16 00
SECTION 06 17 53 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
1. GENERAL
1. SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood roof trusses.
2. Wood floor trusses.
2. AC TION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal truss
accessories, and fasteners.
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details
for trusses.
1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration,
and spaci ng for each type of truss required.
2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and spec ies of lumber.
3. Indicate location s, siz es, and materials for
permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss members due to design
loads.
4. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, ori
entation, and location of metal connector plates .
5. Show splice details and b earing details.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-plate-connected
wood trusses indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criter ia, in cluding
analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional eng ineer responsible for their
preparation.
3. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For metal-plate-connected wood
trusses, signed by officer of truss-fabricating firm.
B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:
1. Metal-plate connectors.
2. Metal t russ accessories.
4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Metal Connecto r-Plat e Manufacturer Qualifications: A
manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1
for manufacture of connector plates.
1. Manufactu rer's responsibilities include providing
professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop
Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a
recognized quality-assurance program, complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 , and
involves third-party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
Architect and authorities having jurisdiction
5. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations
in SBCA BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling,
Installing , Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."
2. PRODUCTS
1. PERFORMANCE REQUIREM ENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional
engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design metal-plate-c onnect
ed w ood trusses.
B. Structural Performance: Metal-plate-connected wood
trusses shall be capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions
indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1.
C. Comply with applicable requirements and
recommendations of TPI 1, TPI DSB, and SBCA BCSI.
D. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable
requirements in AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and its "
Supplement."
2. DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applic able rules of any rules-
writing agency certified by the American Lumber Standard Committee (ALSC) Board of Review.
Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and
grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moi stu
re content at time of dressing.
B. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies
with requirements for miscellaneous lumber in Section 06 10 00 "Rough Carpentry."
3. METAL CONNECTOR PLATES
A. Man ufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by one of the following:
1. Eagle Metal Products .
2. MiTek I ndustries, Inc .
3. Truswal Systems Corporation .
B. G eneral: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1.
C. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653 M;
Structural Steel (SS), high-strengt h low-alloy steel Type A (HSL AS Type A), or high-strength
low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G60 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch t
hick.
4. FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that
comply with requirements spec ified in this article for m at erial and manufacture.
1. Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors
that comply with written recommendations of metal framing manufacturer.
2. Where trusses are exposed to weather, in ground
contact, or in area of high rel ative humidity, provide fas te ners with hot-dip zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
5. METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by one of the following:
1. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.
2. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
3. USP Structural Connectors .
B. A llowable design loads, as published by manufacturer,
shall comply with or exceed those indicated . Manufacturer's published values shall be determin
ed from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive
testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Framing anchors shall be
punched for fasteners adequate to withstand same loads as framing an chors.
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.
6. FABRICATION
A. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated;
use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly, with joi nts closely
fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated.
1. Fabricate wood t russes within manufacturing
tolerances in TPI 1.
B. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located
and securely embedded simul taneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic
press.
3. EXECUTION
1. INSTALLATION
A. Install wood trusses only after su pporting construction is in
place and is braced and secured.
B. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one
piece, assemble trusses before installing.
C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes
and types of trusses required, exercising c are not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-
plane bending or other causes.
D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI
recommendations and as indicated.
E. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss
tie-downs or floor truss han gers as a pplicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in
metal framing anchors according to manufacturer's fastening sche dules and written instructions.
F. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection
and before construction loads are applied. Anchor en ds of permanent bracing where
terminating at walls or beams.
1. Install bracing to comply with Section 06 10 00 "Rou
gh Carpentry."
2. Install and fasten strongb ack bracing vertically
against vertical web of parallel-chord floor trusses at centers indicated.
G. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1 .
H. Do not alter trusses in field. Do n ot cut, drill, notch, or
remove truss members.
I. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not comply
with requirements.
END OF SECTION 06 17 53
SECTION 061800 - GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION Page 1
SECTION 06 18 00 - GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes framing using structural glued-laminated timber.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency
indicating that structural glued-laminated timber complies with requirements in
AITC A190.1.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: An AITC- or APA-EWS-licensed firm.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111.
B. Individually wrap members using plastic-coated paper covering with water-resistant
seams.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
A. General: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with AITC A190.1 and
AITC 117 or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Factory mark each piece of structural glued-laminated timber with AITC Quality
Mark or APA-EWS trademark. Place mark on surfaces that are not exposed in
the completed W ork.
2. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made with wet-use adhesive complying
with AITC A190.1.
B. Species and Grades for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber: [Alaska cedar] [Douglas
fir-larch] [Southern pine] [Any species] <Insert species> that complies with
SECTION 061800 - GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION Page 2
[structural properties] [combination symbols] [beam stress classifications]
indicated.
C. Species and Grades for [Beams] [and] [Purlins]:
1. Species and Beam Stress Classification: [Alaska cedar, 20F-1.5E] [Any
species, 20F-1.5E] [Any species, 24F-1.7E] [Douglas fir-larch, 24F-1.8E]
[Southern pine, 24F-1.8E] <Insert species and beam stress classification>.
2. Lay-up: [Balanced] [Either balanced or unbalanced].
D. Species and Grades for [Columns] [and] [Truss Members]:
1. Species and Combination Symbol: [Alaska cedar, 70] [Douglas fir-larch, 1]
[Douglas fir-larch, 3] [Southern pine, 47] [Southern pine, 50] <Insert species
and combination symbol>.
E. Appearance Grade: [Premium] [Architectural] [Industrial] [Framing], complying with
AITC 110.
2.2 TIMBER CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.
2. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
3. USP Structural Connectors.
B. Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials:
1. Structural-steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020.
3. Hot-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Structural Steel,
Type SS, Grade 33.
C. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust-inhibitive primer, 2-mil dry film
thickness.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is
effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is compatible
with indicated finish.
B. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that
is compatible with indicated finish.
SECTION 061800 - GLUED-LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION Page 3
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either
circular or parabolic camber equal to 1/500 of span.
B. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length, apply a
saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces, keeping surfaces
flood coated for not less than 10 minutes.
C. Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation
coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Erect structural glued-laminated timber true and plumb and with uniform,
close-fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until
permanent supporting members are in place.
1. Handle and temporarily support glued-laminated timber to prevent surface
damage, compression, and other effects that might interfere with indicated finish.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Repair damaged surfaces after completing erection. Replace damaged structural
glued-laminated timber if repairs are not approved by Architect.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve
a useful purpose, including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from
work of other trades.
1. Slit underside of wrapping to prevent accumulation of moisture inside the
wrapping.
END OF SECTION 06 18 00
SECTION 064113 - WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Page 1
SECTION 06 41 13 - WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood-veneer-faced architectural cabinets.
2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing architectural
cabinets that are not concealed within other construction.
3. Shop finishing of architectural cabinets.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For architectural cabinets.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate
products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET FABRICATORS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
SECTION 064113 - WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Page 2
2.2 CABINETS, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of architectural cabinets indicated for construction, finishes,
installation, and other requirements.
2.3 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality grade specified unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Do not use plain-sawn softwood lumber with exposed, flat surfaces more than 3
inches wide.
2. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with
requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and
quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.
1. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
3. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in
ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, except for density.
4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.
5. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or MDF finished with thermally
fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements
of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for Test Methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.
2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are
indicated, use materials that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as
determined by testing performed on identical products by a qualified testing agency.
1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise
defective.
2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise
adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials
from untreated materials.
3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of
qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on
surfaces that will be concealed from view after installation.
2.5 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with
architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
SECTION 064113 - WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Page 3
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch-thick metal,
and as follows:
1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01361.
C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees
of opening.
D. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
E. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 5 inches long, 2-1/2 inches deep, and 5/16 inch
in diameter.
F. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
G. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests,
B04081.
H. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.
I. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.
J. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
K. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
L. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
M. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated refer to interior design specifications
manual and brand standards for color.
1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: BHMA 613 for bronze base;
BHMA 640 for steel base; match Architect's sample.
2. Bright Brass, Clear Coated: BHMA 605 for brass base; BHMA 632 for steel base.
3. Bright Brass, Vacuum Coated: BHMA 723 for brass base; BHMA 729 for zinc-
coated-steel base.
4. Satin Brass, Blackened, Bright Relieved, Clear Coated: BHMA 610 for brass
base; BHMA 636 for steel base.
5. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for
steel base.
6. Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 651 for
steel base.
7. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.
N. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with
product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
SECTION 064113 - WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Page 4
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-
dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed
anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face
of exterior walls and at floors.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces
before fabrication.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as
necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide
ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances,
electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges
of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
2.8 SHOP FINISHING
A. General: Finish architectural cabinets at fabrication shop as specified in this Section.
Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B. General: Shop finish transparent-finished architectural cabinets at fabrication shop as
specified in this Section. See Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting" for field finishing of
opaque-finished architectural cabinets.
C. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for transparent-
finished items specified to be field finished. See Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting"
and Section 09 93 00 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for material and application
requirements.
D. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for
finishing architectural cabinets, as applicable to each unit of work.
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of cabinets.
E. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: System - 11, catalyzed polyurethane.
SECTION 064113 - WOOD-VENEER-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS Page 5
3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to cabinets made
from closed-grain wood before staining and finishing.
4. Staining: Match approved sample for color.
5. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods.
6. Filled Finish for Open-Grain Woods: After staining, apply wash-coat sealer and
allow to dry. Apply paste wood filler and wipe off excess. Tint filler to match
stained wood.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not
less than 72 hours.
B. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed.
C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.
Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing
nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
cabinet surface.
1. For shop-finished items, use filler matching finish of items being installed.
D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches
using concealed shims.
1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair
damaged finish at cuts.
2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and
to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and
accessory items as indicated.
3. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish.
4. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more
than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-
inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.
E. Shop Finishes: Touch up finishing after installation of architectural cabinets. Fill nail
holes with matching filler.
END OF SECTION 06 41 13
SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
1. GENERAL
1. SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.
2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for
installing plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets th at are not concealed within other
construction.
2. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-faced architectural
cabinets.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment
details.
2. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to
Shop Drawing s.
3. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality
Certification Program .
4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabri cator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled
workers who custom fabricate products s imilar to those required for this Project and whose
products have a record of successful in-servi ce performance.
1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification
Program accredited participant.
B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
2. PRODUCTS
1. AR CHITECTUR AL CABINET FABRICATORS
2. PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with
the "Architectural Woodwo rk Standards" for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, fin ish
e s, installation, and ot her requirements.
1. Provide inspections of fabrication and install ation
together with labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork
complies with requirements of grades specified.
B. High-Pressure De cora tive Laminate: NEMA LD 3 , grades
as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, refer to interior design specifications manual and brand standard s for approved
manufacturers .
C. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: refer to inter ior
design specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers
3. WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with
requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet and quality
grade specified unless otherwise indicated .
1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials
that comply with requirements of referenced qu ality standar d for each type of architectural
cabinet and quality grade specified unl ess otherwise indicate d.
1. Medium-Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Gr
ade 130.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 .
3. So ftwood Plywood: DOC PS 1 , medium-density
overlay .
4. FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General: Where fire-
retardant-treated materials are indica ted, use materials that are acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction as determined by tes ting performed on identical products by a qualified testing
agency.
1. Use tr eated materials that comply with requirements
of referenced quality standard. Do not use materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise
defective.
2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not
bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finish es. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated
materials from untreated materials.
3. Iden tify fire-retardant-treated materials with
appropriate classification ma rking of qualified testing agency in the form of removable paper
label or imprint on surfaces th at will be concealed from view after installation.
5. CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Ge neral: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory
materials associated with architectural cabinets except for item s specified in Section 08 71 00 "
Door Hardware."
B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, five-knuckle steel hinges made
from 0.095-inch-thick metal, and as follows:
1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Flush Doors: BHMA A15 6
.9, B01361.
2. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A1
56.9, B01521 .
C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type):
BHMA A156.9, B01602, 170 degrees of opening .
D. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
E. Wire Pulls: Bac k mounted, solid metal, 5 inches long, 2-1/
2 inches deep, and 5/16 inch in diameter .
F. Catches: Ma gnetic catches, BHMA A156.9 , B03141 .
G. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9,
B04071; with shelf rests, B04081 .
H. Shelf Rests: BHMA A1 56.9, B04013; metal.
I. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.
J. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E071 21.
K. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
L. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.
M. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware,
provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated refer to
interior design specifications manual and brand standards for color.
1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed:
BHMA 613 for bronze base; BHMA 6 40 for steel base; match Architect's sample.
2. Bright Brass, Clear Coated: BHMA 605 for brass
base; BHMA 632 for steel base.
3. Bright Brass, Vacuum Coated: BHMA 723 for brass b
ase; BHMA 729 fo r zinc-coated-steel base.
4. Satin Brass, Blackened, Bright Relieved, C lear
Coated: BHMA 610 for brass base; BHMA 636 for steel base.
5. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or
bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.
6. Bright Chromium Plated: BH MA 625 for brass or
bronze base; BHMA 651 for steel base.
7. Satin Stainless Steel: BHM A 630.
N. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard
finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
6. MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blockin g, Shims, and Ha nging Strips: Softwood
or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.
B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and fin ish required for
each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expa nsion sleeves or expansion bolts for
post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at
inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
7. FABRICATION
A. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware
application, to maximum extent possible befo re shipment to Project s ite. Disassemble
components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site,
provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
B. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive
h ardware, appliances, ele ctrical work , and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use
templates or rou ghing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand
edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
C. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in
Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and in GANA's "Glazing Manual ."
1. For glass in frames, se cure glass with removable
stops.
2. For exposed glass edges, polish and grind smooth.
3. EXECUTION
1. INSTALLATION
A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity
conditions i n installation areas for not less than 72 hours.
B. Grade: Inst all cabinets to comply with quality standard
grade of item to be installed.
C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly
attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet i nstallation screws.
D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in l ine to a tolerance
of 1/8 inch in 96 inches using concealed shims.
1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjo inin g work, refinish
cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.
2. In stall cabinets without distortion so doors and
drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers
in openings and to provide unencumbered oper ation. Complete installation of hardware and
accessory items as indica te d.
3. Fasten wall cabinets through b ack, near top and
bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with .
END OF SECTION 06 41 16
SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Page 1
SECTION 07 11 13 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having
jurisdiction unless otherwise indicated.
2.2 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following or approved equal:
1. BASF Corporation.
2. Henry Company.
3. Karnak Corporation.
B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
C. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1.
D. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing.
B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water
as recommended in writing by manufacturer.
C. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668/D 1668M, Type I.
SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Page 2
D. Protection Course: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation, unfaced, ASTM C 578,
Type X, 1/2 inch thick.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time
between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless otherwise indicated.
1. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection.
2. Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a
smooth surface and uninterrupted coverage.
B. Where dampproofing footings and foundation walls, apply from finished-grade line to
top of footing; extend over top of footing and down a minimum of 6 inches over outside
face of footing.
1. Extend dampproofing 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not
extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed.
2. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners,
changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where indicated as
"reinforced," by embedding an 8-inch-wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in
a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in
addition to other coats required.
C. Where dampproofing exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls, lap
dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties, and
other items that penetrate inner wythe.
1. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs
that interrupt inner wythe.
2. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto shelf angles supporting veneer.
D. Where dampproofing interior face of above-grade, exterior concrete and masonry
walls, continue dampproofing through intersecting walls by keeping vertical mortar
joints at intersection temporarily open or by dampproofing wall before constructing
intersecting walls.
3.2 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING
A. Concrete Foundations: Apply two brush or spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq.
ft. for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat.
B. Unexposed Face of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply one brush or spray coat at not
less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft..
C. Unexposed Face of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray
coat at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft..
SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING Page 3
D. Concrete Backup for Brick Veneer Assemblies or Stone Veneer Assemblies: Apply one
brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft..
E. Masonry Backup for Brick Veneer Assemblies or Stone Veneer Assemblies: Apply
primer and one brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft..
F. Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and one brush or spray coat
at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft.
3.3 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION
A. Install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply with
dampproofing-material and protection-course manufacturers' written instructions for
attaching protection course.
END OF SECTION 07 11 13
SECTION 071413 - HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING Page 1
SECTION 07 14 13 - HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rubberized-asphalt waterproofing membrane, unreinforced.
2. Molded-sheet drainage panels.
3. Insulation.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings,
penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins to adjoining waterproofing, and other
termination conditions.
C. Samples: For plaza-deck pavers in each color and texture required.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by
manufacturer.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing and sheet
flashings that do not comply with requirements or that fail to remain watertight within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
SECTION 071413 - HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE
A. Hot Fluid-Applied, Rubberized-Asphalt Waterproofing Membrane: Single component;
100 percent solids; hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.
b. Henry Company.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M, asphaltic primer.
B. Elastomeric Sheet: 50-mil-minimum, uncured sheet neoprene with manufacturer's
recommended contact adhesives as follows:
1. Tensile Strength: 1400 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C.
2. Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412.
3. Tear Resistance: 125 psi minimum; ASTM D 624, Die C.
4. Brittleness: Does not break at minus 30 deg F; ASTM D 2137.
C. Metal Termination Bars (when applicable to project): Manufacturer's standard,
predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum termination bars; approximately 1 by 1/8 inch
thick; with stainless-steel anchors.
D. Sealants and Accessories: Manufacturer's recommended sealants and accessories.
E. Reinforcing Fabric: Manufacturer's recommended, spun-bonded polyester fabric.
F. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-
asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as
follows:
1. Thickness: 1/8 inch, nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch, nominal,
elsewhere.
2.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS (when applicable to project).
A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel (when applicable to
project): Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a
nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not
exceeding No. 70 sieve, laminated to one side with or without a polymeric film bonded
to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core,
with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm/ft..
SECTION 071413 - HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING Page 3
B. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite
subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent
opening size not exceeding No. 40 sieve, laminated to one side with or without a
polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-
plastic-sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm/ft..
2.4 INSULATION
A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. DiversiFoam Products.
b. Dow Chemical Company (The).
c. Owens Corning.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide
clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.
B. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of
waterproofing fluids.
3.2 JOINTS, CRACKS, AND TERMINATIONS
A. Prepare and treat substrates to receive waterproofing membrane, including joints and
cracks, deck drains, corners, and penetrations according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Adhere strip of elastomeric sheet to substrate in a layer of hot rubberized
asphalt. Extend elastomeric sheet a minimum of 6 inches on each side of moving
joints and cracks or joints and cracks exceeding 1/8 inch thick, and beyond deck
drains and penetrations. Apply second layer of hot fluid-applied, rubberized
asphalt over elastomeric sheet.
2. Embed strip of reinforcing fabric into a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Extend
reinforcing fabric a minimum of 6 inches on each side of nonmoving joints and
cracks not exceeding 1/8 inch thick, and beyond roof drains and penetrations.
B. At expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall or deck-to-deck joints, bridge joints
with elastomeric sheet extended a minimum of 6 inches on each side of joints and
adhere to substrates in a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Apply second layer of hot
fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt over elastomeric sheet.
SECTION 071413 - HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING Page 4
3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install elastomeric sheets at terminations of waterproofing membrane according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. Apply primer, at manufacturer's recommended rate, over prepared substrate and allow
it to dry.
B. Heat and apply rubberized asphalt according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Unreinforced Membrane: Apply hot rubberized asphalt to substrates and adjoining
surfaces indicated. Spread to form a uniform, unreinforced, seamless membrane, 180-
mil minimum thickness.
D. Apply waterproofing over prepared joints and up wall terminations and vertical surfaces
to heights indicated or required by manufacturer.
E. Cover waterproofing with protection course with overlapped joints before membrane is
subject to backfilling, construction or vehicular traffic.
3.5 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall
or deck substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use methods that do
not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity.
Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.
1. For vertical applications, install board insulation protection course before
installing drainage panels.
3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units into rubberized asphalt according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 07 14 13
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION Page 1
SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board.
2. Molded polystyrene foam-plastic board.
3. Polyisocyanurate foam-plastic board.
4. Glass-fiber blanket.
5. Mineral-wool blanket.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Research reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD
A. Extruded polystyrene boards in this article are also called "XPS boards."
B. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type IV: ASTM C 578, Type IV, 25-psi minimum
compressive strength; unfaced; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes
of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. DiversiFoam Products.
b. Dow Chemical Company (The).
c. Owens Corning.
2. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an
approved assembly.
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION Page 2
2.2 MOLDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD
A. Molded Polystyrene Board, Type IX: ASTM C 578, Type IX, 25-psi minimum
compressive strength.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. DiversiFoam Products.
b. Dow Chemical Company (The).
c. Owens Corning.
2.3 POLYISOCYANURATE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD
A. Polyisocyanurate Board, Foil Faced: ASTM C 1289, foil faced, Type I, Class 1 or 2.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The).
b. Firestone Building Products.
c. Rmax, Inc.
2. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an
approved assembly.
2.4 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET
A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
c. Owens Corning.
B. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Kraft Faced: ASTM C 665, Type II (nonreflective faced), Class C
(faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor
barrier).
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
c. Owens Corning.
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION Page 3
2.5 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS
A. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane
facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
b. Rockwool International.
c. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.
B. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Reinforced-Foil Faced: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced),
Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84);
Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-
scrim polyethylene.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
b. Rockwool International.
c. Thermafiber, Inc.; an Owens Corning company.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84.
2. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with
maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450,
respectively, per ASTM E 84.
B. Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer.
C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water
barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to
substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
D. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and
sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide ventilation between insulated
attic spaces and vented eaves.
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION Page 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications.
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left
exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple
layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-
value.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION
A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using
manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches below
exterior grade line.
B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from
exterior walls.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATION WALL INSULATION
A. Butt panels together for tight fit.
B. Adhesive Installation: Install with adhesive or press into tacky waterproofing or
dampproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24
inches o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit
courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly
in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION Page 5
1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece
wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 04 20 00 "Unit
Masonry."
3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the
following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing
members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths
that will produce a snug fit between ends.
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated
for or protected from contact with insulation.
4. Attics: Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated
attic spaces at vented eaves.
5. For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as
follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange
of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish
material is installed over it.
6. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder
facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward as indicated on
Drawings.
b. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed as indicated on Drawings.
B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where
required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum
volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft.
2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF CURTAIN-WALL INSULATION
A. Install board insulation in curtain-wall construction according to curtain-wall
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Hold insulation in place by securing metal clips and straps or integral pockets
within window frames, spaced at intervals recommended in writing by insulation
manufacturer to hold insulation securely in place without touching spandrel glass.
Maintain cavity width of dimension indicated on Drawings between insulation and
glass.
2. Install insulation to fit snugly without bowing.
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION Page 6
END OF SECTION 07 21 00
SECTION 072419 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM
(EIFS) Page 1
SECTION 07 24 19 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM
(EIFS)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that are field applied over substrate.
2. Water-resistive barrier coatings.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each EIFS component, trim, and accessory, including water-resistive
barrier coatings.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include details for EIFS buildouts.
2. Include details for parapet cap flashing.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer certificates.
B. Product certificates.
C. Product test reports.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Sample warranty.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
SECTION 072419 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM
(EIFS) Page 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by AWCI International as
qualified to install Class PB EIFS using trained workers.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Dryvit Systems, Inc.
2. Parex USA, Inc.
3. Sto Corp.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. EIFS Performance: Comply with ASTM E 2568 and with the following:
1. Weathertightness: Resistant to uncontrolled water penetration from exterior, with
a means to drain water entering EIFS to the exterior.
2. Impact Performance: ASTM E 2568, Medium where not within 4’ of floor surface.
High where within 4’ of floor surface.
3. Drainage Efficiency: 90 percent average minimum when tested according to
ASTM E 2273.
2.3 EIFS MATERIALS
A. Water-Resistive Barrier Coating: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and
accessories for use as water-resistive barrier coating; compatible with substrate.
1. Water-Resistance: Comply with physical and performance criteria of
ASTM E 2570/E 2570M.
B. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Cold-applied, self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-
asphalt, and polyethylene-film composite sheet or tape and primer; EIFS
manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer.
C. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated
use; specifically formulated to be applied to back side of insulation in a manner that
SECTION 072419 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM
(EIFS) Page 3
creates open vertical channels designed to serve as an integral part of the water-
drainage system of the EIFS-clad drainage-wall assembly; compatible with substrate.
D. Molded, (Expanded) Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with
ASTM E 2430/E 2430M.
1. Foam Buildouts: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.
E. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for
compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with
retained mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. according to
ASTM E 2098/E 2098M.
F. Base Coat: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture.
G. Primer: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for
preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat.
H. Finish Coat: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating.
1. Colors: As indicated on drawings.
2. Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
I. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to
comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized
PVC; and complying with ASTM D 1784, manufacturer's standard cell class for use
intended, and ASTM C 1063.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EIFS INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C 1397, ASTM E 2511, and EIFS manufacturer's written
instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.
B. Water-Resistive Barrier Coating: Apply over sheathing to provide a water-resistive
barrier.
C. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over water-resistive barrier coating, applied and
lapped to shed water; seal at openings, penetrations, and terminations. Prime
substrates with flashing primer if required and install flashing.
D. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, at windowsills,
and elsewhere as indicated. Coordinate with installation of insulation.
E. Board Insulation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with
ASTM C 1397.
SECTION 072419 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM
(EIFS) Page 4
1. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched-trowel method, with notches oriented
vertically to produce drainage channels that remain functional after the insulation
is adhered to substrate.
2. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting
more than 1/32 inch from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due
to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch. Prevent
airborne dispersal and immediately collect insulation raspings or sandings.
3. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that
does not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and water-resistive barrier
coating.
F. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer.
G. Base Coat: Apply full coverage to exposed insulation and foam build-outs with not less
than 1/16-inch dry-coat thickness.
H. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed reinforcing mesh in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free
installation with mesh continuous at corners, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or
otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397. Do not lap reinforcing mesh
within 8 inches of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying additional base-coat
material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are invisible.
I. Double-Layer Reinforcing-Mesh Application: Where indicated or required, apply
second base coat and second layer of reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2-1/2
inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 in same manner as
first application. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.
J. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip-reinforcing mesh around openings, extending
4 inches beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch strip-reinforcing mesh
diagonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch-wide, strip-
reinforcing mesh at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is
lapped not less than 4 inches on each side of corners.
K. Foam Buildouts: Fully embed reinforcing mesh in base coat.
L. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same
manner and thickness as first application, except without reinforcing mesh. Do not
apply until first base coat has cured.
M. Finish Coat: Apply full-thickness coverage over dry primed base coat, maintaining a
wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, to produce a uniform finish of color and
texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture
variations.
N. Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by
EIFS manufacturer.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform.
SECTION 072419 - WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM
(EIFS) Page 5
1. Refer t structural drawings for list of required special inspections.
B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections.
C. EIFS Tests and Inspections: According to ASTM E 2359/E 2359M.
D. EIFS will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 07 24 19
SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS Page 1
SECTION 07 25 00 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Building wrap.
2. Flexible flashing.
3. Drainage material.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER
A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-
developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to
ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Dow Chemical Company (The).
b. DuPont Safety and Construction.
c. Raven Industries, Inc.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 75 perms per ASTM E 96/E 96M,
Desiccant Method (Procedure A).
3. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according
to NFPA 285.
B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS Page 2
2.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING
A. Butyl Rubber Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a
pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum
foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025
inch.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. DuPont Safety and Construction.
b. Raven Industries, Inc.
c. TYPAR.
2. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according
to NFPA 285.
B. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of
a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film,
aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less
than 0.025 inch.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.
b. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
c. TYPAR.
2. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according
to NFPA 285.
2.3 DRAINAGE MATERIAL
A. Drainage Material: Product shall maintain a continuous open space between water-
resistive barrier and exterior cladding to create a drainage plane and shall be used
under siding and adhered masonry veneer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Keene Building Products.
b. Mortar Net Solutions.
c. TYPAR.
2. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according
to NFPA 285.
SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS Page 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION
A. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at
expansion- or control-joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty
requirements.
1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches except that at
flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
2. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings.
3. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings.
3.3 DRAINAGE MATERIAL INSTALLATION
A. Install drainage material over building wrap and flashing to comply with manufacturer's
written instructions.
END OF SECTION 07 25 00
SECTION 072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS Page 1
SECTION 07 26 00 - VAPOR RETARDERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Polyethylene vapor retarders.
2. Reinforced-polyethylene vapor retarders.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for under-slab vapor retarders.
2. Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation" for vapor retarders integral with insulation
products.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 10-mil- thick sheet, with maximum
permeance rating of 0.1 perm.
2.2 REINFORCED-POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Sheet with outer layers of polyethylene film
laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim
and weighing not less than 20 lb/sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. ISI Building Products.
b. Raven Industries, Inc.
c. Reef Industries, Inc.
SECTION 072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS Page 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS ON FRAMING
A. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission.
Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives, vapor retarder fasteners, or other
anchorage system as recommended by manufacturer. Extend vapor retarders to cover
miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber
insulation.
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs
and sealing with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written
instructions. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating
vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating
objects and vapor retarders.
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other
work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS IN CRAWL SPACES
A. Install vapor retarders over prepared grade. Lap joints a minimum of 12 inches and
seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. Install second layer over pathways to
equipment.
B. Extend vapor retarder over footings and seal to foundation wall or grade beam with
manufacturer's recommended tape.
1. Extend vapor retarder vertically minimum 16 inches above top of footing.
C. Seal around penetrations such as utilities and columns in order to create a monolithic,
airtight membrane at grade surface, perimeter, and all vertical penetrations.
END OF SECTION 07 26 00
SECTION 07 27 13 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIERS
1. GENERAL
1. SUMMARY
A. Section includes self-adhering, vapor-retarding, modified
bituminous sheet air barriers.
2. ACTION SUBMI TTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings : For air-barrier assemblies.
1. Include details for substrate joints and cracks,
counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with ad
joining constructio n.
3. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of modified bituminous
sheet air barrier.
B. Product test reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and
supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.
2. PRODUCTS
1. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Air-Barrier Performance: Air-barrier assembly and seals
with adjacent cons truction shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier . Air-barrier
assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate
expansion and control joints, construction material c hanges, penetrations, and transitions at
perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.
B. Air-Barrie r Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq.
ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft., when tested acc ording to ASTM E 2357.
2. SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIER
A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: 40-mil-thick, self-adhering
sheet consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asp halt laminated to a 4-mil-thick, cross-laminated
polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side .
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide products by one of the follow ing:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.
b. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
c. Henry Company .
2. P hysical and Performance Properties:
a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of
surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
b. Tensile Strength: Minimum 250 psi ;
ASTM D 412, Die C.
c. Ultimate Elongation: Mi nimum 200 percent;
ASTM D 412, Die C.
d. Puncture Resistance: Minimum 40 lbf;
ASTM E 154/E 154M.
e. Water Absorption: Maximum 0.15 percent wei
ght gain after 48-hour immersion at 70 deg F ; ASTM D 570.
f. Vapor Permeance: Maximum 0.1 perm );
ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method.
g. Ad he sion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in.
when tested according to ASTM D 4541 as modified by ABAA.
h. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes
NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly.
i. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to s unlight
for 30 days according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Requirement: Provide primers, transition strips, termination
strips, joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars,
termination mastic, substrate p atching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants,
and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer to
produce a complete air-barrier assembly and that are compatible with primary air -barrier
material and adjacent construction to which they may seal.
B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for
substrate by a ir-barrier material manufacturer.
3. EXECUTION
1. SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal subst rate and joints and
cracks in substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions and details. Provide clean,
dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to
prevent spillage and ov erspray affecting other construction.
C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill
honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching
membrane.
D. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles,
and o ther obstructions.
E. At changes in su bstrate plane, apply sealant or termination
mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
F. Bridge expansion joints and discontinuous wall-to-wall,
deck-to-wall, and deck-to-deck joints with air-barrier access ory material that accommodates
joint movement according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.
2. INSTALLATION
A. Install materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's
written instructions and details and according to recommendations in A STM D 6 135 to form a
seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier.
1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range
between 25 and 40 deg F , install self-adhering, modified bituminous air-ba rrier sheet produced
for low-temperature a pplication. Do not install low-temperature sheet if ambient or substrate
temperature is higher than 60 deg F .
2. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against
priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate a nd allow it to dry.
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and a llow it to
dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier sheet on same day. Reprime areas
exposed for more than 24 hours.
C. Apply and firmly adhere air-barrier sheets over area to
receive air barrier. Accurately a lign sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch-minimum lap widths
and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure airtight installation.
1. Apply sheets in a shingled manner to shed water.
2. Roll sheets firmly to enhance adhesion to substrate.
D. Install air-barr ier sheet and accessory materials to form a
seal with adjacent construction and to maintain a continuous air barrier.
E. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier sheet
continuously to roofing-membra ne air barrier, concrete below-grade struc tures, floor-to-f loor
construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront
systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall
openin gs, using accessory materials.
F. Wall Openings: Prime conceal ed, perimeter frame surfaces
of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply transition strip so that a minimum of 3
inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches o f contact over firm
bearing to perimeter f r ames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
G. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in air
barrier. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with air-barrier sheet extending 6 inches b
eyond repaired areas in all directions.
H. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and
inspected by testing agency.
I. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not
comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components .
3. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: E ngage a qualified testing agency to
perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests: As determined by testing agency from among the
following tests:
1. Air-Leakage-Location Testing: Air-barrier assemblies
will be tested for evidence of air leakage according to ASTM E 1 1 86, chamber pressurizatio n
or depressurization with smoke tracers .
2. Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be
tested for required adhesion to substrate according to ASTM D 4541 for eac h 600 sq. ft. of
installed air barrier or part thereof.
C. Air barrie rs will be considered defecti ve if they do not pass
tests and inspections.
1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to
manufacturer's written instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.
2. Remove and replace deficient air-b arrier com ponent
s for retesti ng as specified above.
D. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow
manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
4. CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application
an d remainder of cons truction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 07 27 13
SECTION 072715 - NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS Page 1
SECTION 07 27 15 - NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Self-adhering, vapor-permeable, nonbituminous sheet air barriers.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.
1. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips,
penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining
construction.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of nonbituminous self-adhering sheet air barrier.
B. Product test reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Air-Barrier Performance: Air-barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction
shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier. Air-barrier assemblies shall
be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion
and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at
perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.
B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57
lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 2357.
SECTION 072715 - NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS Page 2
2.2 NONBITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIER
A. Vapor-Permeable Nonbituminous Sheet: Minimum 20-mil-thick, self-adhering sheet
consisting of a breathable carrier film or fabric and an adhesive with release liner on
adhesive side.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings & W aterproofing Inc.
b. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
c. Henry Company.
2. Physical and Performance Properties:
a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft.
pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
b. Puncture Resistance: Minimum 40 lbf; ASTM E 154/E 154M.
c. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 15 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant
Method, Procedure A.
d. Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in. when tested according to
ASTM D 4541 as modified by ABAA.
e. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an
approved assembly.
f. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 50 days according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Requirement: Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint sealants,
counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars, termination mastic,
substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants, and other
accessory materials that are recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer to
produce a complete air-barrier assembly and that are compatible with primary air-
barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal.
B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in substrate
according to manufacturer's written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust-free,
and dry substrate for air-barrier application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
SECTION 072715 - NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS Page 3
C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate
pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane.
D. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.
E. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp
corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
F. Bridge expansion joints and discontinuous wall-to-wall, deck-to-wall, and deck-to-deck
joints with air-barrier accessory material that accommodates joint movement according
to manufacturer's written instructions and details.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details
to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier.
1. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to
substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas
that will be covered by air-barrier sheet on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more
than 24 hours.
C. Apply and firmly adhere air-barrier sheets over area to receive air barrier. Accurately
align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch-minimum lap widths and end laps.
Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure airtight installation.
1. Apply sheets in a shingled manner to shed water.
2. Roll sheets firmly to enhance adhesion to substrate.
D. Install air-barrier sheet and accessory materials to form a seal with adjacent
construction and to maintain a continuous air barrier.
E. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier sheet continuously to roofing-membrane air
barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing
and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers,
exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using
accessory materials.
F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,
storefronts, and doors. Apply transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage
is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of contact over firm bearing to
perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
G. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in air barrier. Slit and flatten
fishmouths and blisters. Patch with air-barrier sheet extending 6 inches beyond
repaired areas in all directions.
H. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by testing agency.
SECTION 072715 - NONBITUMINOUS SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR BARRIERS Page 4
I. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements;
repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests: As determined by testing agency from among the following tests:
1. Air-Leakage-Location Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence
of air leakage according to ASTM E 1186, chamber pressurization or
depressurization with smoke tracers.
2. Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for required adhesion to
substrate according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. of installed air barrier or
part thereof.
C. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.
2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified
above.
D. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; f ollow manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of
construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 07 27 15
SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Page 1
SECTION 07 27 26 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Vapor-permeable, fluid-applied air barriers.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.
1. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips,
penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining
construction.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Product test reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Air-Barrier Performance: Air-barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction
shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier. Air-barrier assemblies shall
be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion
and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at
perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.
B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57
lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 2357.
SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Page 2
2.2 HIGH-BUILD AIR BARRIERS, VAPOR PERMEABLE
A. High-Build, Vapor-Permeable Air Barrier: synthetic polymer membrane with an
installed dry film thickness, according to manufacturer's written instructions, of 35 mils
or thicker over smooth, void-free substrates.
1. Synthetic Polymer Type:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) GCP Applied Technologies Inc.
2) Henry Company.
3) Tremco Incorporated.
2. Physical and Performance Properties:
a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft.
pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant
Method, Procedure A.
c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 200 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.
d. Adhesion to Substrate: Minimum 16 lbf/sq. in. when tested according to
ASTM D 4541.
e. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an
approved assembly.
f. UV Resistance: Can be exposed to sunlight for 30 days according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Requirement: Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint reinforcing
fabric and strips, joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal
termination bars, termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes,
foam sealants, lap sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in
writing by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and that
are compatible with primary air-barrier material and adjacent construction to which they
may seal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in substrate
according to manufacturer's written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust-free,
and dry substrate for air-barrier application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray
affecting other construction.
SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Page 3
C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate
pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching material.
D. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.
E. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp
corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.
F. Bridge expansion joints and discontinuous wall-to-wall, deck-to-wall, and deck-to-deck
joints with air-barrier accessory material that accommodates joint movement according
to manufacturer's written instructions and details.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details
to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier.
1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and
base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.
2. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of
3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.
3. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to
substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.
4. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to
areas that will be covered by air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas
exposed for more than 24 hours.
B. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane
air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing
and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers,
exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using
accessory materials.
C. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls,
storefronts, and doors. Apply transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage
is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to
perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact.
D. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit
and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches
beyond repaired areas in strip direction.
E. High-Build Air Barriers: Apply continuous unbroken air-barrier material to substrates
according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier material in full contact around
protrusions such as masonry ties.
1. Vapor-Permeable, High-Build Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as
recommended in writing by manufacturer to comply with performance
requirements, but not less than 35 mils, applied in one coat.
F. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by testing agency.
SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Page 4
G. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with re quirements;
repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests: As determined by testing agency from among the following tests:
1. Air-barrier dry film thickness.
2. Air-Leakage-Location Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence
of air leakage according to ASTM E 1186, chamber pressurization or
depressurization with smoke tracers.
3. Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for required adhesion to
substrate according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. of installed air barrier or
part thereof.
C. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.
2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified
above.
D. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of
construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Remove masking materials after installation.
END OF SECTION 07 27 26
SECTION 074293 - SOFFIT PANELS Page 1
SECTION 07 42 93 - SOFFIT PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes metal soffit panels.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of
deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.
1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the
effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span.
SECTION 074293 - SOFFIT PANELS Page 2
B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at the following test-pressure difference:
1. Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according
to ASTM E 331 at the following test-pressure difference:
1. Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 lbf/sq. ft..
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental
effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat
gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material
surfaces.
2.2 METAL SOFFIT PANELS
A. General: Provide metal soffit panels designed to be installed by lapping and
interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through
panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required
for weathertight installation.
B. Metal Soffit Panels: Match profile and material of metal [wall] or [roof] panels.
1. Finish: [Match finish and color of metal wall panels] or [Match finish and
color of metal roof panels].
2. Sealant: Factory applied within interlocking joint.
C. Flush-Profile Metal Soffit Panels: [Solid] and [Perforated] panels formed with vertical
panel edges and [intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced] or [a flat pan]
between panel edges; with flush joint between panels.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. ATAS International, Inc.
b. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
c. PAC-CLAD; Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
2. Material: Same material, finish, and color as metal [wall] or [roof] panels.
3. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with
manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural
performance required.
a. Thickness: 0.032 inch.
b. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
c. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
SECTION 074293 - SOFFIT PANELS Page 3
d. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Panel Coverage: [8 inches] [12 inches] [16 inches] [20 inches].
5. Panel Height: [0.875 inch] [1.0 inch] [1.5 inches] [3.0 inches].
D. Reveal-Joint-Profile Metal Soffit Panels: [Solid] or [Perforated] panels formed with
vertical panel edges and [intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced] [a flat
pan] between panel edges; with recessed reveal joint between panels.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. ATAS International, Inc.
b. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
c. PAC-CLAD; Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
2. Material: Same material, finish, and color as metal [wall] [roof] panels.
3. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with
manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural
performance required.
a. Thickness: 0.032 inch.
b. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
c. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
d. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Panel Coverage: [8 inches] [12 inches] [16 inches] [20 inches].
5. Panel Height: [0.75 inch] [1.0 inch] [1.5 inches].
E. V-Groove-Profile Metal Soffit Panels: [Solid] or [Perforated] panels formed with
vertical panel edges and [intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced] [a flat
pan] between panel edges; with a V-groove joint between panels.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. ATAS International, Inc.
b. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
c. PAC-CLAD; Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
2. Material: Same material, finish, and color as metal [wall] or [roof] panels.
3. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with
manufacturer, with temper as required to suit forming operations and structural
performance required.
a. Thickness: 0.032 inch.
b. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
c. Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
d. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Panel Coverage: [6 inches] [12 inches] [14 inches].
SECTION 074293 - SOFFIT PANELS Page 4
5. Panel Height: [0.375 inch] [0.44 inch] [0.50 inch] [0.625 inch].
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-
coated steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or
ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless
otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required for support
and alignment of metal panel system.
B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel
system including trim, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and
similar items. Match material and finish of metal panels unless otherwise indicated.
1. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-
foam or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible
closure strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure
strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.
C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal
panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish
flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.
D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide
exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps
or factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed
fasteners.
E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant types recommended by manufacturer that are
compatible with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene
compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/8 inch thick.
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal panel
manufacturer.
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated
performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated
profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
B. On-Site Fabrication: Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, metal
panels may be fabricated on-site using UL-certified, portable roll-forming equipment if
panels are of same profile and warranted by manufacturer to be equal to factory-
formed panels. Fabricate according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions
and to comply with details shown.
SECTION 074293 - SOFFIT PANELS Page 5
C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate st iffening ribs, if any, for full
length of panel.
D. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips
that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize
noise from movements.
E. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with
manufacturer's recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics
of item indicated.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Panels and Accessories:
1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin
manufacturers' written instructions.
2. Concealed Finish: W hite or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel
support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel
manufacturer's written recommendations.
1. Soffit Framing: Wire tie or clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply
with requirements for assemblies indicated.
3.2 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Metal Soffit Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint
at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.
1. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight
enclosure.
2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on
weather side of metal panels.
3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal
without rupture of washer.
4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to
compress washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels.
Install screws in predrilled holes.
SECTION 074293 - SOFFIT PANELS Page 6
B. Watertight Installation:
1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels,
using sealant or tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-
type panels and elsewhere as needed to make panels watertight.
2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and
accessories.
3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with sealant
and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.
C. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and
weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with
flashings and other components.
D. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written
installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated.
Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions. On completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as
recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during
construction.
END OF SECTION 07 42 93
SECTION 075216 - STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS
MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 1
SECTION 07 52 16 - STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS
MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS)-modified bituminous membrane roofing.
2. Roof insulation.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from
ICC-ES.
B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by
roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to
receive manufacturer's special warranty.
SECTION 075216 - STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS
MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 2
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing
system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Firestone Building Products.
2. GAF.
3. Soprema, Inc.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation fasteners for roofing
system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by
membrane roofing manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when
tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
B. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according
to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.
C. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the following
uplift pressures:
1. Corner Uplift Pressure: <Insert lbf/sq. ft. >.
2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: <Insert lbf/sq. ft. >.
3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: <Insert lbf/sq. ft. >.
D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof
slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs
indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
2.3 ROOFING SHEET MATERIALS
A. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type I, nonperforated, asphalt-impregnated and -coated,
glass-fiber sheet, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides.
SECTION 075216 - STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS
MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 3
B. Smooth-Surfaced Roofing Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6164/D 6164M, Grade S, Type I or II,
SBS-modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with polyester fabric); smooth surfaced;
suitable for application method specified.
2.4 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS
A. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 6164/D 6164M, Grade S, Type I or II, SBS-modified asphalt
sheet (reinforced with polyester fabric); smooth surfaced; suitable for application
method specified.
2.5 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with roofing.
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
Retain "Roofing Asphalt" Paragraph below for roofing asphalt used with base
sheets or glass-fiber base-ply sheets, and possibly with roofing membrane and
base flashing. See roofing manufacturer's written instructions for requirements.
Although "steep" asphalt (Type III) is used, "extra steep" asphalt (Type IV)
predominates.
B. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or IV as recommended by roofing system
manufacturer for application.
C. Cold-Applied Adhesive: Roofing system manufacturer's standard asphalt-based, one-
or two-part, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive specially formulated for compatibility
and use with roofing membrane and base flashings.
D. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing
components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
2.6 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum
substrate, 1/2 inch thick.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. National Gypsum Company.
c. USG Corporation.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening substrate
board to roof deck.
SECTION 075216 - STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS
MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 4
2.7 ROOF INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or
glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
b. GAF.
c. Rmax, Inc.
B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4
inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes
where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof
insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to
attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer.
C. Insulation Cant Strips: ASTM C 728, perlite insulation board.
2.9 WALKWAYS
A. Walkway Cap-Sheet Strips: ASTM D 6164/D 6164M, Grade G, Type I or II, SBS-
modified asphalt sheet (reinforced with polyester fabric); granule surfaced; suitable for
application method specified, and as follows:
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt and adhesives from penetrating
substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent
building construction.
SECTION 075216 - STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS
MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 5
3.2 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof
slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.
1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at
corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to roofing system manufacturers'
written instructions.
3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Insulation Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree insulation cant strips at
junctures of roofing system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45
degrees.
B. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
C. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall
insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of
each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in
each direction.
1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers,
install noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if
applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer.
D. Install tapered edge strips at perimeter edges of roof that do not terminate at vertical
surfaces.
E. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install first layer of insulation to deck
using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified
board-type roof insulation to deck type.
1. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and
field of roof.
2. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
3. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in insulation adhesive, firmly pressing
and maintaining insulation in place.
3.4 ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions
and applicable recommendations in ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the
Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing" and as follows:
1. Deck Type: N (nailable).
2. Adhering Method: M (mopped).
3. Base Sheet: One.
4. Number of SBS-Modified Asphalt Sheets: One.
5. Surfacing Type: M (mineral-granule-surfaced cap sheet).
SECTION 075216 - STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS
MEMBRANE ROOFING Page 6
B. Where roof slope exceeds 1/2 inch per 12 inches, install roofing membrane sheets
parallel with slope.
C. Coordinate installation of roofing system so insulation and other components of the
roofing system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left
uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.
D. Install lapped base-sheet course, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants.
Attach base sheet as follows:
1. Adhere to substrate in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt.
E. Install modified bituminous roofing sheet and cap sheet according to roofing
manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend
roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants.
1. Unroll roofing sheets and allow them to relax for minimum time period required
by manufacturer.
F. Laps: Accurately align roofing sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side
and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids.
1. Repair tears and voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed.
G. Install roofing sheets so side and end laps shed water.
3.5 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION
A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloped and vertical surfaces, at roof
edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing
system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing
membrane and 4 inches onto field of roofing membrane.
C. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of
roofing.
D. according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30-inch- metal flashing in bed of asphaltic adhesive on
completed roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with roofing cap-sheet stripping,
and extend a minimum of 4 inches beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing
membrane. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain
clamping ring.
3.6 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Walkway Cap-Sheet Strips: Install walkway cap-sheet strips over roofing membrane,
using same application method as used for roofing cap sheet.
END OF SECTION 07 52 16
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING Page 1
SECTION 07 54 23 - THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system.
2. Substrate board.
3. Roof insulation.
4. Walkways.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. For insulation and roof system component fasteners, include copy of FM
Approvals' RoofNav listing.
B. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work,
including the following:
1. Layout and thickness of insulation.
2. Base flashings and membrane termination details.
3. Flashing details at penetrations.
4. Tapered insulation layout, thickness, and slopes.
5. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.
6. Tie-in with adjoining air barrier.
7. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.
C. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: For roofing system, indicating compliance with wind
uplift performance requirements.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer Certificates:
1. Performance Requirement Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer,
certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in
"Performance Requirements" Article.
a. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.
2. Special Warranty Certificate: Signed by roof membrane manufacturer, certifying
that all materials supplied under this Section are acceptable for special warranty.
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING Page 2
B. Product Test Reports: For roof membrane and insulation, for tests performed by a
qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with specified requirements.
C. Research reports.
D. Field Test Reports:
1. Fastener-pullout test results and manufacturer's revised requirements for
fastener patterns.
E. Field quality-control reports.
F. Sample warranties.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is listed in FM Approvals'
RoofNav for roofing system identical to that used for this Project.
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by
roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to
receive manufacturer's special warranty.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing
system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Accelerated Weathering: Roof membrane shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure
when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
B. Impact Resistance: Roof membrane shall resist impact damage when tested according
to ASTM D 3746, ASTM D 4272, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in FM
Approvals 4470.
C. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design roofing system to resist the following wind uplift
pressures when tested according to FM Approvals 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897:
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING Page 3
1. Zone 1 (Roof Area Field): <Insert lbf/sq. ft. >.
2. Zone 2 (Roof Area Perimeter): <Insert lbf/sq. ft. >.
a. Location: From roof edge to <Insert dimension> inside roof edge.
3. Zone 3 (Roof Area Corners): <Insert lbf/sq. ft. >.
a. Location: <Insert dimension> in each direction from building corner.
D. FM Approvals' RoofNav Listing: Roof membrane, base flashings, and component
materials shall comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 or FM Approvals 4470
as part of a roofing system, and shall be listed in FM Approvals' RoofNav for Cla ss 1 or
noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals
Certification markings.
1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: [Class 1A-60] [Class 1A-75] [Class 1A-90]
[Class 1A-105] [Class 1A-120].
2. Hail-Resistance Rating: SH.
E. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof
slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
F. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs
indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
2.2 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
A. TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878/D 6878M, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced,TPO sheet.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
b. Firestone Building Products.
c. GAF.
2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.
2.3 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for
intended use and compatible with other roofing components.
1. Adhesive and Sealants: Comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils
thick, minimum, of same color as TPO sheet.
C. Prefabricated Pipe Flashings: As recommended by roof membrane manufacturer.
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING Page 4
D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based.
E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless steel or
aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roofing
components to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet
flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T -joint covers, lap
sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.
2.4 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, Type X gypsum board.
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
B. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum board or
ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, fiber-reinforced gypsum board.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
b. National Gypsum Company.
c. USG Corporation.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch thick.
3. Surface Finish: Factory primed.
C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate
board to roof deck.
2.5 ROOF INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or
glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
b. Firestone Building Products.
c. GAF.
2. Size: 48 by 48 inches.
3. Thickness: Refer to Architectural drawings for minimum R-value.
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING Page 5
B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards.
1. Material: Match roof insulation.
2. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch.
3. Slope:
a. Roof Field: 1/4 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
b. Saddles and Crickets: 1/2 inch per foot unless otherwise indicated on
Drawings.
2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners with metal or plastic plates complying with
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof
insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to
attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:
1. Bead-applied, low-rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive.
2.7 WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-
textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing
system manufacturer.
1. Size: Approximately 36 by 60 inches.
2. Color: Contrasting with roof membrane.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Perform fastener-pullout tests according to roof system manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Submit test result within 24 hours after performing tests.
a. Include manufacturer's requirements for any revision to previously
submitted fastener patterns required to achieve specified wind uplift
requirements.
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING Page 6
3.3 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions,
FM Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements, and FM Global Property Loss
Prevention Data Sheet 1-29.
B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent
water from entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when
rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning Work on
adjoining roofing.
3.4 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, with end joints
staggered not less than 24 inches in adjacent rows.
3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed at end of workday.
B. Comply with roofing system and roof insulation manufacturer's written instructions for
installing roof insulation.
C. Installation Over Wood Decking:
1. Mechanically attach base layer of insulation and substrate board using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified
board-type roof insulation to wood decks.
a. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' RoofNav for
specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.
b. Fasten insulation to resist specified uplift pressure at corners, perimeter,
and field of roof.
2. Install upper layers of insulation and tapered insulation with joints of each layer
offset not less than 12 inches from previous layer of insulation.
a. Staggered end joints within each layer not less than 24 inches in adjacent
rows.
b. Trim insulation neatly to fit around penetrations and projections, and to fit
tight to intersecting sloping roof decks.
c. Make joints between adjacent insulation boards not more than 1/4 inch in
width.
d. At internal roof drains, slope insulation to create a square drain sump with
each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 24 inches.
1) Trim insulation so that water flow is unrestricted.
e. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING Page 7
f. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and
penetrations.
g. Adhere each layer of insulation to substrate using adhesive according to
FM Approvals' RoofNav assembly requirements and FM Global Property
Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified Windstorm Resistance
Classification, as follows:
1) Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation
adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.
3.6 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Adhere roof membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Unroll roof membrane and allow to relax before installing.
C. Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical
personnel.
D. Accurately align roof membrane, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
E. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roof membrane at rate required
by manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roof membrane. Do not
apply to splice area of roof membrane.
F. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roof membrane securely at terminations,
penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.
G. Apply roof membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
H. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roof membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps
of roof membrane and sheet flashings, to ensure a watertight seam installation.
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to
seal cut edges of roof membrane and sheet flashings.
2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample
areas.
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roof membrane that do not comply with
requirements.
I. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roof
membrane in place with clamping ring.
3.7 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate,
and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC-POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING Page 8
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured
sheet flashing.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air
weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate
through termination bars.
3.8 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways:
1. Install flexible walkways at the following locations:
a. Perimeter of each rooftop unit.
b. Between each rooftop unit location, creating a continuous path connecting
rooftop unit locations.
c. Between each roof hatch and each rooftop unit location or path connecting
rooftop unit locations.
d. Top and bottom of each roof access ladder.
e. Between each roof access ladder and each rooftop unit location or path
connecting rooftop unit locations.
f. Locations indicated on Drawings.
g. As required by roof membrane manufacturer's warranty requirements.
2. Provide 6-inch clearance between adjoining pads.
3. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible
adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing system, inspect
roofing system for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a
written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to
warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 07 54 23
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 1
SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manufactured reglets.
2. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.
3. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
4. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
5. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Product test reports.
C. Sample warranty.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal
flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a
record of successful in-service performance.
1. For copings and roof edge f lashings that are SPRI ES-1 tested, shop shall be
listed as able to fabricate required details as tested and approved.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet
metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes
within specified warranty period.
1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads,
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without
failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen,
and shall remain watertight.
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for
dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. SPRI Wind Design Standard (when applicable to project): Manufacture and install
copings and roof edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of
resisting the following design pressure:
1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by
applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required,
with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not
less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat,
and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and
resin manufacturers' written instructions.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt;
nonperforated.
B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-
resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl-
or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 3
withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide prim er according to
written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.
b. Henry Company.
c. Owens Corning.
2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher.
3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20
deg F or lower.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and
other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim
installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking
rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and
recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic
caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC
sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather
side of metal.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable
for metal being fastened.
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule
matching internal gutter width.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound
sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag,
nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; of type,
grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and
trim and remain watertight.
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
F. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound,
recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including
riveted joints.
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 4
G. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.
H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for
application.
2.5 MANUFACTURED REGLETS
A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile required, formed to provide secure
interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing
indicated with factory-mitered and -welded corners and junctions and with interlocking
counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corporation.
b. Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
2. Material: Aluminum, 0.024 inch thick.
3. Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating.
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown
and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions,
geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet
metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges
folded back to form hems.
3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use
exposed fasteners on faces exposed to view.
B. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to
provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal
standard.
D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being
anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet
metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 5
F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for
intended use.
2.7 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet
tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long sections.
Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same
metal as gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with
thickness not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints,
expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.
B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with
mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and
anchors.
1. Fabricate from the following materials:
a. Aluminum: 0.024 inch thick.
C. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers to dimensions required, with closure flange trim
to exterior, 4-inch-wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond
cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
D. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge
and of dimensions and shape required, complete with outlet tubes. Fabricate from the
following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
E. Splash Pans: Fabricate to dimensions and shape required and from the following
materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
2.8 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) or and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-
long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long sections. Furnish with 6-inch-wide, joint cover
plates.
1. Fabricate from the Following Materials:
a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.
B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch-long, but not exceeding 12-foot-long, sections.
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to
support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight.
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 6
1. Fabricate from the Following Materials:
a. Aluminum: 0.050 inch thick.
C. Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the
following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
D. Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
F. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick.
2.9 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Apron, Step, Cricket, and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
B. Valley Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.
C. Drip Edges: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
D. Eave, Rake, Ridge, or Hip Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
2.10 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar
flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-
inch-high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick.
B. Wall Expansion-Joint Cover: Fabricate from the following materials:
1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize
use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle
fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle
free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with
temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for
installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water,
with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap
side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover
underlayment within 14 days.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,
protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide
uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of welds, and sealant.
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before
fabricating sheet metal.
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of
buckling and tool marks.
5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts
pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent
separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal
standard.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated-aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal
flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim contact wood,
ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on
cementitious or wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner
or intersection.
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 8
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,
filled with sealant concealed within joints.
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than
1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and
locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as
required for a tight installation.
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to
comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.
3.3 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage
system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate
installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.
B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted joints or joints sealed with sealant. Provide
for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in
position. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.
1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50
feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
C. Built-in Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal
expansion. Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures and seal watertight with
sealant.
1. Install underlayment layer in built-in gutter trough and extend to drip edge at
eaves and under underlayment on roof sheathing. Lap sides minimum of 2
inches over underlying course. Lap ends minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps
between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with roofing nails. Install
slip sheet over underlayment.
2. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50
feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide hangers with
fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and
bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.
E. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs. Set in asphalt
roofing cement or elastomeric sealant compatible with the substrate.
F. Parapet Scuppers: Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal
flanges to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing
membrane.
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 9
G. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall, with elevation of conductor head rim at
minimum of 1 inch below scupper or gutter discharge.
H. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration
indicated. Lap joints minimum of 4 inches in direction of water flow.
3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements
and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set
units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are
permanently watertight and weather resistant.
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to
recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock
bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate.
C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in
cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated.
D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar
with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base
flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base
flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing.
Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints
minimum of 4 inches.
F. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with
installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric or butyl
sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture
according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate
installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as
windows, doors, and louvers.
B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in
Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry." or Section 04 42 00 "Exterior Stone Cladding."
C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place
Concrete." or Section 04 20 00 "Unit Masonry."
D. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill,[ jamb,] and
similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Page 10
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Clean off excess sealants.
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing
and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
END OF SECTION 07 62 00
SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 1
SECTION 07 71 00 - ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Copings.
2. Roof-edge specialties.
3. Roof-edge drainage systems.
4. Reglets and counterflashings.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each type of roof specialty and for each color and texture specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
B. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer offering products meeting
requirements that are FM Approvals listed for specified class and SPRI ES-1 tested to
specified design pressure.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace
roof specialties that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within
specified warranty period.
1. Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to
ASTM D 2244.
SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 2
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to
ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. FM Approvals' Listing (when applicable to project): Manufacture and install copings and
roof-edge specialties that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for
windstorm classification, [Class 1-60] [Class 1-75] [Class 1-90] [Class 1-105]
[Class 1-120]. Identify materials with FM Approvals' markings.
B. SPRI Wind Design Standard (when applicable to project): Manufacture and install
copings and roof-edge specialties tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of
resisting the following design pressures:
1. Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, hole elongation,
overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other
detrimental effects. Provide clips that resist rotation and avoid shear stress as a result
of thermal movements. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to
both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material
surfaces.
2.2 COPINGS
A. Metal Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of metal coping cap in section
lengths not exceeding 12 feet, concealed anchorage; with corner units, end cap units,
and concealed splice plates with finish matching coping caps.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
b. Metal-Era, Inc.
c. PAC-CLAD; Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Coping Caps: Aluminum sheet, 0.040 inch thick.
a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
b. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 3
3. Corners: Factory mitered and sealed.
4. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Snap-on or face leg hooked to continuous
cleat with back leg fastener exposed, fabricated from coping-cap material.
a. Snap-on Coping Anchor Plates: Concealed, galvanized-steel sheet, 12
inches wide, with integral cleats.
b. Face-Leg Cleats: Concealed, continuous galvanized-steel sheet.
2.3 ROOF-EDGE SPECIALTIES
A. Canted Roof-Edge Fascia and Gravel Stop : Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia
consisting of snap-on metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet and a
continuous formed galvanized-steel sheet cant, 0.028 inch thick, minimum, with
extended vertical leg terminating in a drip-edge cleat. Provide matching corner units.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
b. Metal-Era, Inc.
c. PAC-CLAD; Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Fascia Covers: Aluminum sheet, 0.040 inch thick.
a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
b. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Corners: Factory mitered and sealed.
4. Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape as fascia cover.
5. Fascia Accessories (when applicable to project): Fascia extenders with
continuous hold-down cleats Wall cap Soffit trim Overflow scuppers Overflow
scuppers with perforated screens Spillout scuppers Downspout scuppers with
integral conductor head and downspout adapters Downspout scuppers with
integral conductor head and downspout adapters and perforated screens.
B. Roof-Edge Fascia: Manufactured, two-piece, roof-edge fascia consisting of snap-on
metal fascia cover in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet and a continuous metal
receiver with integral drip-edge cleat to engage fascia cover and secure single-ply roof
membrane. Provide matching corner units.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
b. Hickman Company, W. P.
c. Metal-Era, Inc.
2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Fascia Covers: Aluminum sheet, 0.040 inch thick.
a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
b. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 4
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Corners: Factory mitered and sealed.
4. Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material, finish, and shape as fascia cover.
5. Receiver: Galvanized-steel sheet, nominal 0.040-inch thickness.
6. Fascia Accessories: Fascia extenders with continuous hold-down cleats Wall
cap Soffit trim Overflow scuppers Overflow scuppers with perforated screens
Spillout scuppers Downspout scuppers with integral conductor head and
downspout adapters Downspout scuppers with integral conductor head and
downspout adapters and perforated screens.
C. One-Piece Gravel Stops: Manufactured, one-piece, metal gravel stop in section lengths
not exceeding 12 feet, with a horizontal flange and vertical leg fascia, and concealed
splice plates of same material, finish, and shape as gravel stop. Provide matching
corner units.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
b. Metal-Era, Inc.
c. PAC-CLAD; Petersen Aluminum Corporation.
2. Formed Aluminum Sheet Gravel Stops: Aluminum sheet, 0.040 inch thick.
a. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.
b. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Corners: Factory mitered and sealed.
4. Accessories (when applicable to project): Fascia extenders with continuous
hold-down cleats Wall cap Soffit trim.
2.4 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following or approved equal:
1. ATAS International, Inc.
2. Hickman Company, W. P.
3. Metal-Era, Inc.
B. Gutters: Manufactured in uniform section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with matching
corner units, ends, outlet tubes, and other accessories. Elevate back edge at least 1
inch above front edge. Furnish flat-stock gutter straps, gutter brackets, expansion
joints, and expansion-joint covers fabricated from same metal as gutters.
1. Aluminum Sheet: 0.040 inch thick.
2. Corners: Factory mitered and sealed.
3. Gutter Supports: Gutter brackets with finish matching the gutters.
SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 5
C. Downspouts: Plain rectangular complete with elbows, manufactured from the following
exposed metal. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and
anchors.
1. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
D. Parapet Scuppers: Manufactured with closure flange trim to exterior, 4-inch-wide wall
flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or tapered strip into field
of roof.
1. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
E. Conductor Heads: Manufactured conductor heads, each with flanged back and
stiffened top edge, and of dimensions and shape indicated, complete with outlet tube
that nests into upper end of downspout.
1. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
F. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.5 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following or approved equal:
1. Berridge Manufacturing Company.
2. Cheney Flashing Company.
3. Hickman Company, W. P.
B. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet
and counterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal:
1. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
2. Corners: Factory mitered and sealed.
3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide reglets with slotted holes for fastening to
substrate, with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with
channel for sealant at top edge.
C. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings
by 4 inches and in lengths not exceeding 12 feet designed to snap into reglets or
through-wall-flashing receiver and compress against base flashings with joints lapped,
from the following exposed metal:
1. Formed Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick.
D. Accessories:
1. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure
flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal
counterflashing or where reglet is provided separate from metal counterflashing.
SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 6
2. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before
counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.
E. Aluminum Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish req uired,
with temper to suit forming operations and performance required.
2.7 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of
slip-resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified
asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.
b. Henry Company.
c. Metal-Fab Manufacturing, a Drexel Metals Company.
2. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; stable after testing at 240 deg F.
3. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970/D 1970M; passes after testing at
minus 20 deg F.
B. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt,
nonperforated.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and
designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise
indicated:
1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads
matching color of sheet metal.
2. Fasteners for Aluminum: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each
application.
C. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type joints with limited
movement.
SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 7
D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with
ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for
application.
2.9 FINISHES
A. Coil-Coated Aluminum Sheet Finishes:
1. High-Performance Organic Finish: Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to
exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 2605. Fluoropolymer finish containing not
less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply
with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply
wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6
inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2
inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
1. Apply continuously under copings roof-edge specialties and reglets and
counterflashings.
2. Coordinate application of self-adhering sheet underlayment under roof specialties
with requirements for continuity with adjacent air barrier materials.
B. Felt Underlayment: Install with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of
mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water,
with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
C. Slip Sheet: Install with tape or adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of
mechanical fasteners under roof specialties. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water,
with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor
roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, underlayments, sealants, and other
miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems.
1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-
canning and without warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 8
2. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of sealant.
3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in weathertight performance.
Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture.
4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted.
5. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals
from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces
with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof specialties with bituminous
coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by
manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance.
C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties.
1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 12 feet with no joints within 18 inches of
corners or intersections unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F,
set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting
proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.
D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not
less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.
E. Seal concealed joints with butyl sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer.
F. Seal joints as required for weathertight construction. Place sealant to be completely
concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F.
3.3 COPING INSTALLATION
A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and
devices with concealed fasteners.
B. Anchor copings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener spacing
to meet performance requirements.
1. Interlock face and back leg drip edges of snap-on coping cap into cleated anchor
plates anchored to substrate at 30-inch centers.
3.4 ROOF-EDGE SPECIALITIES INSTALLATION
A. Install cleats, cants, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with
concealed fasteners.
B. Anchor roof edgings with manufacturer's required devices, fasteners, and fastener
spacing to meet performance requirements.
SECTION 077100 - ROOF SPECIALTIES Page 9
3.5 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof
perimeter flashing with installation of roof-edge drainage system.
B. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to
firmly anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 12 inches apart. Attach ends
with rivets and seal with sealant to make watertight. Slope to downspouts.
1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50
feet apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
C. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide
hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away
from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.
1. Provide elbows at base of downspouts at grade to direct water away from
building.
2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system indicated.
D. Parapet Scuppers: Install scuppers through parapet where indicated. Continuously
support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to interior wall face, over
cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.
E. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall with elevation of conductor top edge 1 inch
below scupper or gutter discharge.
3.6 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without
embedded reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted
counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings.
B. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers;
ensure that counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap
counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with butyl sealant. Fit
counterflashings tightly to base flashings.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are
installed.
END OF SECTION 07 71 00
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES Page 1
SECTION 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof hatches.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory.
B. Shop Drawings: For roof accessories.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranties.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which
manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence
of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOF HATCH
A. Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated single-walled curbs,
welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb
counterflashing and weathertight perimeter gasketing, straight sides, and integrally
formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. BILCO Company (The).
b. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES Page 2
c. O'Keeffe's Inc.
B. Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, 36 by 36 inches.
C. Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal uplift load.
D. Hatch Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet.
1. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard thickness for hatch size indicated.
2. Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
E. Construction:
1. Insulation: Cellulosic-fiber board.
a. R-Value: 12.0 according to ASTM C 1363.
2. Nailer: Factory-installed wood nailer continuous around hatch perimeter.
3. Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard
metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid.
4. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to
roof profile.
5. Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches above roofing surface unless
otherwise indicated.
6. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb with
perimeter curb height that is constant. Equip hatch with water diverter or cricket
on side that obstructs water flow.
F. Hardware: Spring operators, hold-open arm, galvanized-steel spring latch with turn
handles, galvanized-steel butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside
and outside.
1. Provide two-point latch on lids larger than 84 inches.
2. Provide remote-control operation.
G. Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails,
clamps, fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a
complete installation; attached to roof hatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23
requirements and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck.
2. Posts and Rails: Galvanized-steel pipe, 1-1/4 inches in diameter or galvanized-
steel tube, 1-5/8 inches in diameter.
3. Flat Bar: Galvanized steel, 2 inches high by 3/8 inch thick.
4. Maximum Opening Size: System constructed to prevent passage of a sphere 21
inches in diameter.
5. Self-Latching Gate: Fabricated of same materials and rail spacing as safety
railing system. Provide manufacturer's standard hinges and self-latching
mechanism.
6. Post and Rail Tops and Ends: Weather resistant, closed or plugged with
prefabricated end fittings.
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES Page 3
7. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow
sections of handrail and railing members.
8. Fabricate joints exposed to weather to be watertight.
9. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match railing system.
10. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
H. Ladder-Assist Post: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof-
access ladder.
1. Operation: Post locks in place on full extension; release mechanism returns post
to closed position.
2. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck.
3. Material: Steel tube.
4. Post: 1-5/8-inch- diameter pipe.
5. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 METAL MATERIALS
A. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, AZ50 coated.
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply
with ASTM A 755/A 755M. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer Finish: AAMA 621. System consisting of primer
and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent PVDF
resin by weight.
B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, manufacturer's standard alloy and
temper for type of use, finished to match assembly where used; otherwise mill finished.
C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to
ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated.
D. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M, round tube.
E. Galvanized-Steel Tube: ASTM A 500/A 500M, round tube, hot-dip galvanized
according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.
F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, galvanized.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and
other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES Page 4
B. Cellulosic-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, thickness as
indicated.
C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for
aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and complying with
AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.
D. Underlayment:
1. Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt,
nonperforated.
2. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil-thick polyethylene sheet complying with
ASTM D 4397.
3. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for
application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with
finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to
exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated:
E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC,
or silicone or a flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.
F. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant as recommended by
roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.
G. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586/D 4586M, asbestos free, of consistency
required for application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. Install roof
accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install roof accessories level; plumb; true to line and elevation; and without
warping, jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks.
2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting
indicated loads.
3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required
to complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.
4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling,
leaking, or loosening of fasteners and seals.
B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals
from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces
with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by
manufacturer.
1. Coat concealed side of uncoated aluminum roof accessories with bituminous
coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES Page 5
2. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or
wood substrates, install a course of underlayment and cover with manufacturer's
recommended slip sheet.
C. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.
3.2 REPAIR AND CLEANING
A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting
according to Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting."
B. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully
repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07 72 00
SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING Page 1
SECTION 07 81 00 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 81 23 "Intumescent Fireproofing" for mastic and intumescent fire-
resistive coatings.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive materials.
1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Evaluation reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by
fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install
manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.
SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to
requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or
UL 263; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appro priate
markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted
otherwise.
C. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.
2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS
A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight,
dry formulation, complying with indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water
at Project site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance and application or
conveyed in a dry state and mixed with atomized water at place of application.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Carboline Company; a subsidiary of RPM International.
b. Isolatek International.
c. Pyrok, Inc.
2. Application: Designated for exterior use by a qualified testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Bond Strength: Minimum 150-lbf/sq. ft. cohesive and adhesive strength based on
field testing according to ASTM E 736.
4. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according
to requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker,
but not less than 0.375 inch.
5. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
6. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84.
a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 10 or less.
7. Compressive Strength: Minimum 10 lbf/sq. in. according to ASTM E 761.
8. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937.
9. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759.
10. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to
ASTM E 760.
11. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. in 24 hours according to
ASTM E 859.
SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING Page 3
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and
substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.
B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer for the required fire-
resistance design.
C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer.
D. Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type recommended in
writing by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work
and according to each fire-resistance design.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials
during application.
B. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in
writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied
and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated
and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness,
primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting
fireproofing work.
B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials,
application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply
fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to
achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
C. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. After the spraying operation in
each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method
recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.
SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING Page 4
D. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been
applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient
applications.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
special inspections:
1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, Subsection 17 05 .13, "Sprayed Fire-
Resistant Materials."
B. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and
retest.
2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test
results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING
A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of
Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and
clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
B. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.
C. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using
manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.
3.6 APPLIED FIREPROOFING SCHEDULE
CONSTRUCTION
FIRE RATED
VALUE
THICKNESS OF
FIREPROOFING
MATERIAL
UL ASSEMBLY
Steel Columns 1 Hour Per Manufacturer X772, X790
Steel Floor Beams 1 Hour Per Manufacturer D916
Steel Floor Deck 1 Hour Not Required
Steel Roof Girder
Trusses & Beams
1 Hour Per Manufacturer P732
Metal Roof Deck 1 Hour Per Manufacturer P732
END OF SECTION 07 81 00
SECTION 078123 - INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING Page 1
SECTION 07 81 23 - INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coatings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 81 00 "Applied Fireproofing" for sprayed fire-resistive materials
(SFRM).
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Evaluation reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by
fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install
manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to
requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.
SECTION 078123 - INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING Page 2
B. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or
UL 263; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate
markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted
otherwise.
C. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.
2.2 MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS
A. Mastic and Intumescent Fire-Resistive Coating: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed
formulation or factory-mixed, multicomponent system consisting of intumescent base
coat and topcoat, and complying with indicated fire-resistance design.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Carboline Company; a subsidiary of RPM International.
b. Isolatek International.
c. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
2. Application: Designated for "interior general purpose" and "conditioned interior
space purpose" use by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
3. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according
to requirements of fire-resistance design.
4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84.
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
5. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard finishes.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and
substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.
B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer for the required fire-
resistance design.
C. Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type recommended in
writing by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design.
SECTION 078123 - INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING Page 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work
and according to each fire-resistance design.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials
during application.
B. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in
writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied
and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.
C. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface
imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of
fireproofing.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated
and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness,
primers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing
work.
B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixin g materials,
application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply
fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to
achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
C. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. After the spraying operation in
each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method
recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.
D. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been
applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient
applications.
E. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes:
1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written
instructions for each finish selected.
2. Spray-Textured Finish: Finish left as spray applied with no further treatment.
3. Rolled, Spray-Textured Finish: Even finish produced by rolling spray-applied
finish with a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness.
SECTION 078123 - INTUMESCENT FIREPROOFING Page 4
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following
special inspections:
1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, Subsection 17 05 .14, "Mastic and
Intumescent Fire-Resistant Coatings."
B. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and
retest.
2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test
results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING
A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of
Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and
clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.
B. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.
C. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using
manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.
END OF SECTION 07 81 23
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Page 1
SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location,
illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems
have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written
instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems"
Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Page 2
a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a
qualified testing agency.
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."
2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of
smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction
penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another,
with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products.
b. Hilti, Inc.
c. Tremco, Inc.
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with
ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive
pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.
1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure
differential of 0.01-inch wg.
1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated.
2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of
water leakage when tested according to UL 1479.
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings
determined per UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-
inch wg.
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at and no more
than 50-cfm cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. at both ambient and elevated
temperatures.
E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are
needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Page 3
components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved
by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications.
C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings.
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of
firestopping.
D. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and
penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings
and penetrating items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to
produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems
with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS,"
using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch strokes.
1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from
end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections
according to ASTM E 2174.
B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or
removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to
comply with requirements.
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING Page 4
C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only
after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
END OF SECTION 07 84 13
SECTION 078443 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING Page 1
SECTION 07 84 43 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.
2. Joints in smoke barriers.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of
firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been
installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article.
Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified
testing agency.
SECTION 078443 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING Page 2
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."
2.2 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS
A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and
other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between
which joint firestopping systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall
accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage
of fire and hot gases.
B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping
systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products.
b. Hilti, Inc.
c. Tremco, Inc.
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the
wall, floor, or roof in or between which it is installed.
3. F-Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor assembly.
C. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined
per UL 2079 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. 3M Fire Protection Products.
b. Hilti, Inc.
c. Tremco, Inc.
2. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft. of joint at both ambient and elevated
temperatures.
D. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of
less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.
E. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and
forming materials, that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain
ratings required. Use only components specified by joint firestopping system
manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for conditions indicated.
SECTION 078443 - JOINT FIRESTOPPING Page 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written
installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric
fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional
shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove
combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent
components of fire-resistive joint system.
D. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to
produce the following results:
1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as
required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed
by joints.
3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work,
finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
inspections according to ASTM E 2393.
B. Where deficiencies are found or joint firestopping systems are damaged o r removed
due to testing, repair or replace joint firestopping systems so they comply with
requirements.
C. Proceed with enclosing joint firestopping systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.
END OF SECTION 07 84 43
SECTION 079100 - PREFORMED JOINT SEALS Page 1
SECTION 07 91 00 - PREFORMED JOINT SEALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes preformed, foam joint seals.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each preformed joint seal product.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of preformed joint seal required.
C. Preformed joint seal schedule.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Sample warranties.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace preformed joint seals that do not
comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish preformed joint seals
to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements
specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Preformed, Foam Joint Seals: Manufacturer's standard joint seal manufactured from
urethane or EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and
impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in
precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widt hs based on design criteria
indicated, with factory- or field-applied adhesive for bonding to substrates.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
SECTION 079100 - PREFORMED JOINT SEALS Page 2
a. BASF Corp. - Watson Bowman Acme Corp.
b. MM Systems Corporation.
c. Pecora Corporation.
2. Design Criteria:
a. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings.
b. Movement Capability: -25 percent/+25 percent.
3. Joint Seal Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by preformed-joint-seal manufacturer for joint
substrates indicated.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to preformed joint
seal manufacturer, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to promote
best adhesion to joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with preformed joint
seals and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing preformed
joint seals to comply with preformed joint seal manufacturer's written instructions and
the following requirements:
1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means
that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with
adhesion.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by preformed joint seal
manufacturer or as indicated by tests or prior experience.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of adhesive or
primer with adjoining surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with preformed joint seal manufacturer's wr itten installation
instructions for products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements
apply.
SECTION 079100 - PREFORMED JOINT SEALS Page 3
B. Installation of Preformed, Foam Joint Seals:
1. Install each length of seal immediately after removing protective wrapping.
2. Firmly secure compressed joint seals to joint gap side to obtain full bond using
exposed pressure-sensitive adhesive or field-applied adhesive as recommended
by manufacturer.
3. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at splices, ends, turns,
and intersections of joints.
4. For applications at low ambient temperatures, heat foam joint seal material in
compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 07 91 00
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 1
SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants.
2. Urethane joint sealants.
3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants.
4. Latex joint sealants.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.
B. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Sample warranties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the
testing indicated.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do
not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to
repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 2
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL
A. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: To match adjacent materials or as selected by
Architect from manufacturers full range.
2.2 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50
percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing
silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
B. Silicone, Nonstaining, M, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50
percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing
silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25
percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
B. Urethane, M, NS, 50, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50
percent movement capability nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920,
Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 3
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
C. Urethane, M, NS, 25, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25
percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920,
Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
D. Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 50 percent and minus 50
percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant;
ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 50, Uses T and NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
2.4 MILDEW -RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS
A. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Non Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-
component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability,
nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, Use NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
B. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Grade NF.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 4
2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING
A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), and of size
and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum
sealant performance.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Alcot Plastics Ltd.
b. BASF Corporation.
c. Construction Foam Products; a division of Nomaco, Inc.
B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants
to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following
requirements:
1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means
that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with
adhesion.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant
manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or
primer with adjoining surfaces.
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 5
3.2 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1193 and joint-sealant manufacturer's written
installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent
requirements apply.
B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used
between sealants and backs of joints.
D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that
allow optimum sealant movement capability.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning
or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and
that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
1. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise
indicated.
3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints in brick pavers.
b. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
c. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete paving units.
d. Joints in stone paving units, including steps.
e. Tile control and expansion joints.
f. Joints between different materials listed above.
g. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 6
a. Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units.
c. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
d. Joints in dimension stone cladding.
e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
b. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.
c. Control and expansion joints in brick flooring.
d. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
e. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Tile control and expansion joints.
c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry concrete walls and
partitions.
d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces not subject to significant movement.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors
windows and elevator entrances.
c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 7
F. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and
horizontal nontraffic surfaces.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.
c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, neutral curing, S, NS, 25, NT.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
G. Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics.
1. Joint Locations:
a. Aluminum thresholds.
b. Sill plates.
c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.
2. Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based.
3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
END OF SECTION 07 92 00
SECTION 079219 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS Page 1
SECTION 07 92 19 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes acoustical joint sealants.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each acoustical joint sealant.
B. Samples: For each kind and color of acoustical joint sealant required.
C. Acoustical-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
3. Joint-sealant formulation.
4. Joint-sealant color.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Sample warranties.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace acoustical joint
sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this
Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish acoustical joint
sealants to repair or replace those joint sealants that do not comply with performance
and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
SECTION 079219 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide acoustical joint-sealant products that effectively reduce airborne sound
transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex
acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. Pecora Corporation.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
2. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range of colors.
B. Primer: Material recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer where
required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates.
C. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of
sealants and sealant backing materials.
D. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and
surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing acoustical
joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant
manufacturer.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or
primer with adjoining surfaces.
SECTION 079219 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS Page 3
3.2 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A. Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions
unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at
openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install
acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through
penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written
recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies,
including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings.
C. Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of
acoustical ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
END OF SECTION 07 92 19
SECTION 079513.13 - INTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES Page 1
SECTION 07 95 13.13 - INTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes interior expansion joint cover assemblies.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For each expansion joint cover assembly.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, splices, block-out requirement,
attachments to other work, and line diagrams.
C. Samples: For each expansion joint cover assembly and for each color and texture
specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing.
B. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T-joints, corners,
curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous
expansion joint cover assemblies.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance (when applicable to project): Expansion joint cover assemblies
shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to
ASCE/SEI 7.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings (when applicable to project): Provide expansion joint cover
assemblies with fire barriers identical to those of systems tested for fire resistance
according to UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966 by a qualified testing agency.
C. Expansion Joint Design Criteria:
1. Type of Movement: Thermal or Wind sway.
2. Type of Movement: Seismic.
SECTION 079513.13 - INTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES Page 2
a. Joint Movement: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3 FLOOR EXPANSION JOINT COVERS
A. Metal-Plate Floor Joint Cover: Metal cover plate fixed on one side of joint gap and free
to slide on other.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Construction Specialties, Inc.
b. Inpro Corporation.
c. MM Systems Corporation.
2. Application: Floor to floor and Floor to wall.
3. Installation: Surface mounted or Recessed No bump.
4. Load Capacity:
a. Uniform Load: 50 lb/sq. ft.
b. Concentrated Load: 300 lb.
c. Maximum Deflection: 0.0625 inch.
5. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than required for assembly in which joint is
located.
6. Cover-Plate Design: Plain.
7. Exposed Metal:
a. Aluminum: Clear anodic, Class I.
B. Center-Plate Floor Joint Cover: Assembly consisting of center plate that slides over
metal frames fixed to sides of joint gaps.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Construction Specialties, Inc.
b. Inpro Corporation.
c. MM Systems Corporation.
2. Application: Floor to floor or Floor to wall.
3. Installation: Surface mounted or Recessed No bump.
4. Load Capacity:
a. Uniform Load: 50 lb/sq. ft.
b. Concentrated Load: 300 lb.
c. Maximum Deflection: 0.0625 inch.
5. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than required for assembly in which joint is
located.
6. Cover-Plate Design: Plain.
7. Exposed Metal:
SECTION 079513.13 - INTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES Page 3
a. Aluminum: Clear anodic, Class I.
C. Elastomeric-Seal Floor Joint Cover: Assembly consisting of elastomeric seal anchored
to frames fixed to sides of joint gap.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Balco, Inc.
b. Construction Specialties, Inc.
c. Inpro Corporation.
2. Application: Floor to floor or Floor to wall.
3. Installation: Surface mounted or Recessed.
4. Load Capacity:
a. Uniform Load: 50 lb/sq. ft.
b. Concentrated Load: 300 lb.
c. Maximum Deflection: 0.0625 inch.
5. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than required for assembly in which joint is
located.
6. Exposed Metal:
a. Aluminum: Clear anodic, Class I.
7. Seal: Preformed elastomeric membrane or extrusion.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 WALL EXPANSION JOINT COVERS
A. Metal-Plate Wall Joint Cover: Metal cover plate fixed on one side of joint gap and free
to slide on other.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Balco, Inc.
b. Construction Specialties, Inc.
c. Inpro Corporation.
2. Application: Wall to wall or Wall to corner.
3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than required for assembly in which joint is
located.
4. Exposed Metal:
a. Aluminum: Clear anodic, Class I.
B. Center-Plate Wall Joint Cover: Assembly consisting of center plate that slides over
gaskets in metal frames fixed to sides of joint gaps.
SECTION 079513.13 - INTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES Page 4
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Balco, Inc.
b. Construction Specialties, Inc.
c. Inpro Corporation.
2. Application: Wall to wall or Wall to corner.
3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than required for assembly in which joint is
located.
4. Exposed Metal:
a. Aluminum: Clear anodic, Class I.
C. Elastomeric-Seal Wall Joint Cover: Assembly consisting of elastomeric seal anchored
to frames fixed to sides of joint gap.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Balco, Inc.
b. Construction Specialties, Inc.
c. Inpro Corporation.
2. Application: Wall to wall or Wall to corner.
3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than required for assembly in which joint is
located.
4. Exposed Metal:
a. Aluminum: Clear anodic, Class I.
5. Seal: Preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.5 CEILING EXPANSION JOINT COVERS
A. Elastomeric-Seal Ceiling Joint Cover: Assembly consisting of elastomeric seal
anchored to frames fixed to sides of joint gap.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Balco, Inc.
b. Construction Specialties, Inc.
c. Inpro Corporation.
2. Application: Ceiling to ceiling or Wall to ceiling.
3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than required for assembly in which joint is
located.
a. Aluminum: Clear anodic, Class I.
SECTION 079513.13 - INTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES Page 5
4. Seal: Preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6 for
sheet and plate.
B. Elastomeric Seals: Manufacturer's standard preformed elastomeric membranes or
extrusions to be installed in metal frames.
C. Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, to comply with performance criteria
for required fire-resistance rating.
D. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard, flexible elastomeric material.
E. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, or thicker.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Moisture Barriers: Manufacturer's standard continuous, waterproof membrane within
joint and attached to substrate on sides of joint.
1. Provide where indicated on Drawings.
B. Manufacturer's standard attachment devices, as indicated or required for complete
installations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare substrates according to expansion joint cover assembly manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing
expansion joint cover assemblies.
C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing
expansion joint cover assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements
are indicated.
SECTION 079513.13 - INTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES Page 6
D. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion joint
cover assemblies.
1. Repair or grout block out as required for continuous frame support using
nonmetallic, shrinkage-resistant grout.
2. Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.
a. Shimming is not permitted.
3. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished
surfaces measured from established lines and levels.
4. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due
to ambient temperature at time of installation.
5. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal
without buckling of frames.
6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3
inches from each end and not more than 24 inches o.c.
E. Seals: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints.
1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections.
2. Seal transitions. Vulcanize or heat-weld field-spliced joints as recommended by
manufacturer.
3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with
adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.
F. Install with hairline mitered corners where expansion joint cover assemblies change
direction or abut other materials.
G. Terminate exposed ends of expansion joint cover assemblies with field- or factory-
fabricated termination devices.
H. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Coordinate installation of expansion joint cover
assembly materials and associated work so complete assemblies comply with
performance requirements.
1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire
resistance throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices.
I. Moisture Barrier Drainage: If indicated, provide drainage fittings and connect to drains.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete.
B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections.
END OF SECTION 07 95 13.13
SECTION 079513.16 - EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES Page 1
SECTION 07 95 13.16 - EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes exterior building expansion joint cover assemblies.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 07 91 00 "Preformed Joint Seals" for preformed foam and extruded-
silicone joint seals.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For each expansion joint cover assembly.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, splices, block-out requirement,
attachments to other work, and line diagrams.
C. Samples: For each exposed expansion joint cover assembly and for each color and
texture specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing.
B. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T-joints, corners,
curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous
expansion joint cover assemblies.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Seismic Performance (when applicable to project): Expansion joint cover assemblies
shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to
ASCE/SEI 7.
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings (when applicable to project): Provide expansion joint cover
assemblies with fire barriers identical to those of systems tested for fire resistance
according to UL 2079 or ASTM E 1966 by a qualified testing agency.
C. Expansion Joint Design Criteria:
SECTION 079513.16 - EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES Page 2
1. Type of Movement: Thermal or Wind sway.
2. Type of Movement: Seismic.
a. Joint Movement: As indicated on Drawings.
2.3 EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVERS
A. Exterior Metal-Plate Joint Cover: Assembly consisting of sliding metal cover plate in
continuous contact with gaskets mounted on metal frames fixed to sides of joint gap.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Balco, Inc.
b. Construction Specialties, Inc.
c. Inpro Corporation.
2. Application: Wall to wall, Wall to soffit or Soffit to soffit.
3. Installation: Surface mounted.
4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than required for assembly in which joint is
located.
5. Exposed Metal:
a. Aluminum: Clear anodic, Class I.
B. Exterior Elastomeric-Seal Joint Cover: Assembly consisting of elastomeric seal
anchored to surface-mounted frames fixed to sides of joint gap.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Balco, Inc.
b. Construction Specialties, Inc.
c. Inpro Corporation.
2. Application: Wall to wall, Wall to soffit or Soffit to soffit.
3. Installation: Surface-mounted or Recessed.
4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than required for assembly in which joint is
located.
5. Exposed Metal:
a. Aluminum: Clear anodic, Class I.
6. Seal: Preformed elastomeric membrane or extrusion.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
SECTION 079513.16 - EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES Page 3
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6 for
sheet and plate.
B. Elastomeric Seals: Manufacturer's standard preformed elastomeric membranes or
extrusions to be installed in metal frames.
C. Fire Barriers: Any material or material combination, to comply with performance criteria
for required fire-resistance rating.
D. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard, flexible elastomeric material.
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Moisture Barriers: Manufacturer's standard moisture barrier consisting of a continuous,
waterproof membrane within joint and attached to substrate on sides of joint.
1. Provide where indicated on Drawings.
B. Manufacturer's standard attachment devices, as indicated or required for complete
installations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare substrates according to expansion joint cover assembly manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing
expansion joint cover assemblies. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit
type of construction indicated and to provide for secure attachment of expansion joint
cover assemblies.
C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing
expansion joint cover assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements
are indicated.
D. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion joint
cover assemblies.
1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished
surfaces measured from established lines and levels.
SECTION 079513.16 - EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES Page 4
2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due
to ambient temperature at time of installation.
3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal
without buckling of frames.
4. Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces.
a. Shimming is not permitted.
5. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3
inches from each end and not more than 24 inches o.c.
E. Seals: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints.
1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections.
2. Seal transitions. Vulcanize or heat-weld field-spliced joints as recommended by
manufacturer.
3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with
adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.
F. Install with hairline mitered corners where expansion joint cover assemblies change
direction or abut other materials.
G. Terminate exposed ends of expansion joint cover assemblies with field- or factory-
fabricated termination devices.
H. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies (when applicable to project): Coordinate installation
of expansion joint cover assembly materials and associated work so complete
assemblies comply with performance requirements.
1. Fire Barriers: Install fire barriers to provide continuous, uninterrupted fire
resistance throughout length of joint, including transitions and field splices.
I. Moisture Barrier Drainage: If indicated, provide drainage fitting and connect to drains.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete.
When protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections.
END OF SECTION 07 95 13.16
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 1
SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Interior standard steel doors and frames.
2. Exterior standard steel doors and frames.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the
supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as
those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following or approved equal:
1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY.
2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY.
3. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings
indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide assemblies with gaskets listed
and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and
installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 2
B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-
protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.
C. Thermally Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door assemblies with U-factor of not more
than 0.50 deg Btu/F x h x sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM C 518.
2.3 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for
materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and
clearances, and as specified.
B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3; SDI A250.4, Level A. At
locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
1. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
c. Face: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.
d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.
e. Core: Kraft-paper honeycomb.
f. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer's standard vertical steel stiffener core for
fire-rateddoors.
2. Frames:
a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.
b. Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame
as indicated on drawings.
c. Construction: As indicated on architectural drawings and allowed per Hotel
Brand Specifications and standards
2.4 EXTERIOR STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct hollow-metal doors and frames to comply with standards indicated for
materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and
clearances, and as specified.
B. Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3; SDI A250.4, Level A. At
locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
1. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with
minimum A60coating.
d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush.
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 3
e. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same
material as face sheets. Seal joints against water penetration.
f. Bottom Edges: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment
of weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face
sheets. Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape.
g. Core: Polyurethane.
h. Fire-Rated Core: Manufacturer's standard vertical steel stiffener with
insulation core for fire-rated doors.
2. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch,
with minimum A60 coating.
b. Construction: As indicated on architectural drawings and allowed per Hotel
Brand Specifications and standards.
2.5 BORROWED LITES
A. Fabricate of uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.
B. Construction: As indicated on architectural drawings and allowed per Hotel Brand
Specifications and standards.
C. Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple
sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same
or greater thickness as metal as frames.
D. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame
standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.
2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for
frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of
frame height above 7 feet.
3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter bolts with
expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer.
B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor.
C. Floor Anchors for Concrete Slabs with Underlayment: Adjustable-type anchors with
extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of
frames at top of underlayment.
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 4
D. Material: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M; hot-dip galvanized according
to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
2.7 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free
of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for
application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other
accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);
consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping
limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide
alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater
thickness as frames.
1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no
visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten
members at crossings and to jambs by welding.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door
silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door
silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal doors and frames to receive
templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement,
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 5
mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule,
and templates.
1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-
mounted door hardware.
2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal doors and frames for
hardware.
C. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Provide stops and moldings flush with face of door, and with beveled stops
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that
each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior
doors and frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal
doors and frames.
4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and
installation types indicated.
5. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws
spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c.
from each corner.
2.9 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free
primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for
substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged
exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by
grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and
invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are
removed.
B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-
mounted door hardware.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with SDI A250.11.
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Page 6
1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove
temporary braces without damage to completed Work.
a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations
by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes.
b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80.
3. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of
postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop
Drawings.
4. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
5. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout or mortar.
6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with
postinstalled expansion anchors.
7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs
on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
B. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit and adjust hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within
clearances specified below.
1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors: Comply with SDI A250.8.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.
C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and with
hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP
A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing
repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 08 11 13
SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES Page 1
SECTION 08 12 13 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Interior standard steel frames.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to
NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference
numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following or approved equal:
1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY.
2. Curries Company; ASSA ABLOY.
3. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings
indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide assemblies with gaskets listed
and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable
SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES Page 2
to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and
installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled
by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-
protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.
2.3 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES
A. Construct hollow-metal frames to comply with standards indicated for materials,
fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances,
and as specified.
B. Interior Frames: SDI A250.8. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
1. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.
2. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as
adjacent door frame.
3. Construction: As indicated on architectural drawings and allowed per Hotel Brans
Specifications and standards
4. Exposed Finish: Prime.
2.4 BORROWED LITES
A. Fabricate of uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch.
B. Construction:As indicated on architectural drawings and allowed per Hotel Brans
Specifications and standards
2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:
1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame
standard, and suitable for performance level indicated.
2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for
frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of
frame height above 7 feet.
3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch-diameter bolts with
expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer.
B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor.
C. Floor Anchors for Concrete Slabs with Underlayment: Adjustable-type anchors with
extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of
frames at top of underlayment.
D. Material: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill
phosphatized.
SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES Page 3
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
suitable for exposed applications.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free
of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials.
F. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping
limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide
alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater
thickness as frames.
1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no
visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten
members at crossings and to jambs by welding.
2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
3. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door
silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door
silencers.
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal frames to receive templated
mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising,
drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and
templates.
1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal frames for hardware.
C. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form
corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
1. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that
each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior
frames. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal frames.
SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES Page 4
3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and
installation types indicated.
4. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws
spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c.
from each corner.
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1. Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.
2. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow-metal frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely
fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's
written instructions. Comply with SDI A250.11.
B. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary
braces without damage to completed Work.
1. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by
welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush,
and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes.
2. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening.
C. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80.
D. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
1. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
E. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
F. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space
between frames and masonry with grout or mortar.
G. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors.
H. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances:
1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES Page 5
2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
I. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and with
hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP
A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged
areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
B. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing
repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 08 12 13
SECTION 081216 - ALUMINUM FRAMES Page 1
SECTION 08 12 16 - ALUMINUM FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior aluminum frames for doors.
2. Interior aluminum frames for glazing.
3. Interior aluminum doors.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum frames:
1. Include elevations, sections, and installation details for each wall-opening
condition.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following or approved equal:
1. Advanced Architectural Frames.
2. Frameworks, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
3. Versatrac Frames; a division of American Door Products Inc.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Frames (when applicable to the project): Frames for fire-rated door
assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure
according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221, with alloy and temper required to suit structural and
finish requirements, and not less than 0.062 inch thick.
SECTION 081216 - ALUMINUM FRAMES Page 2
B. Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers.
C. Glazing Frames: Extruded aluminum, for indicated glass thickness.
D. Door Tracks (when applicable to the project): Extruded aluminum where exposed,
sized to enclose sliding-door hardware, and in finish matching frame and trim finish.
E. Trim (when applicable to the project): Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch
thick; removable, snap-in casing trim, glazing stops and door stops, without exposed
fasteners.
F. Doors: Manufacturer's standard, factory-assembled, 1-3/4-inch-thick, aluminum-framed
door construction.
1. Door Operation: As indicated on drawings.
2. Stiles: Coordinate stile width with card key manufacturer requirements.
3. Rails: 6-inch top rail and 6-inch bottom rail.
G. Door Finish: Match frame and trim finish.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
H. Frame and Trim Finish: Factory-applied, baked-enamel or powder-coat finish.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal
fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware,
anchors, and other items being fastened.
B. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals in
black color.
C. Smoke Seals: Intumescent strip or fire-rated gaskets in black.
D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded rubber or plastic, to
accommodate glazing thickness indicated; in black.
E. Glass: As specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
F. Door Hardware: As specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted
hairline joints at butted and mitered connections.
B. Factory prepare aluminum frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include
cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door
SECTION 081216 - ALUMINUM FRAMES Page 3
Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door
Hardware."
1. Locate hardware cutouts and reinforcements as required by fire-rated label for
assembly.
C. Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without
dismantling frame.
1. Locate removable stops on the inside of spaces accessed by keyed doors.
D. Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place;
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. At fire-protection-rated openings, install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
B. Install frame components in the longest possible lengths with no piece less than 48
inches; components 72 inches or shorter shall be one piece.
C. Glass: Install glass according to Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and aluminum-frame
manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Door Hardware: Install according to Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" and aluminum-
frame manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods
recommended in writing by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 and 610.
B. Touch Up: Repair marred frame surfaces to blend inconspicuously with adjacent
unrepaired surface so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches as viewed by
Architect. Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily
repaired.
END OF SECTION 08 12 16
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 1
SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer and plastic-laminate faces.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind
of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:
1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.
2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.
4. Requirements for veneer matching.
5. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
6. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C. Samples: For plastic-laminate door faces and factory-finished doors.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following or approved equal:
1. Eggers Industries.
2. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.
3. VT Industries Inc.
2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's,
and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 2
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with
requirements of grades specified.
B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by
a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at
positive pressure according to NFPA 252.
1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-
protection rating indicated.
2. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed
by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
3. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications
indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed
intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
D. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft
control, based on testing according to UL 1784.
E. Particleboard-Core Doors:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2.
2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to
eliminate through-bolting hardware.
3. Provide doors with glued-wood-stave or structural-composite-lumber cores
instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.
F. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:
1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.
a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf.
b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.
2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces.
2. Species: As indicated on finish drawings and allowed per Hotel Brands
Specifications and standards
3. Cut: As indicated on architectural drawings and allowed per Hotel Brands
Specifications and standards
4. Match between Veneer Leaves:match. As indicated on architectural drawings
and allowed per Hotel Brands Specifications and standards
5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces As indicated on architectural
drawings and allowed per Hotel Brands Specifications and standards
6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening.
7. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 3
8. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is
abrasive planed before veneering.
9. Construction: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.
2.4 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED DOORS
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with
NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.
3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate
manufacturer's full range of products.
4. Exposed Vertical Edges: Plastic laminate that matches faces, applied before
faces.
5. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.
6. Construction: Three plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is
abrasive planed before faces are applied.
7. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is
abrasive planed before faces and crossbands are applied.
2.5 LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS
A. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame
formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked-enamel- or powder-
coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.
B. Metal Louvers:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company.
b. L & L Louvers, Inc.
c. McGill Architectural Products.
d. McGill Architectural Products.
2. Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with, As indicated on architectural drawings
and allowed per Hotel Brands Specifications and standards.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
B. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply
with applicable requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 4
2.7 FACTORY FINISHING
A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete
fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not
surface applied, before finishing.
1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers
may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards"
System 11, catalyzed polyurethane.
3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4. Effect: . As indicated on architectural drawings and allowed per Hotel Brands
Specifications and standards.
5. Sheen: Satin. As indicated on architectural drawings and allowed per Hotel
Brands Specifications and standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions
and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.
2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as
indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or
permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges
of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering
unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4
inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is
required at Project site.
END OF SECTION 08 14 16
SECTION 08 14 33 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
1. GENERAL
1. SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior stile and rail wood doors.
2. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For stile and rail wood doors. Indicate
location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not
covered in Product Data; and other pertinent data.
3. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality
Certification Program certificates.
2. PRODUCTS
1. MATERIALS
A. Ge neral: Use only materials that comply with referenced
standards and other requirements specified. Assemble exterior doors and sidelites with wet-use
adhesives.
2. INTERIOR STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
A. Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors : Interior custom doors
complying with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards," and with
other requirements specified.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal:
a. Assa Abloy, Maiman.
b. Karona by JELD-WEN .
c. Ma sonite International, Harring Doors .
2. G rade: Premium .
3. Finish: Transparent .
4. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish : . As
indicated on architec tural drawings and allowed per Ho tel Brand s Specifications and standards
.
5. Door Construction for Transparent Finish:
a. Stil e and Rail Construction: Clear lumber;
may be edge glued for width.
b. Raised-Panel Construction: Cle ar lumber;
edge glued for width.
6. Raised-Panel Thickness : 1-3/4 inches.
7. Flat-Panel Thickness: 1/2 inch .
8. Glass: Uncoated, clear, fully tempered float glass, 5.
0 mm thick , complying with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
3. INTERIOR FIRE-RATED, STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
A. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80
that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agen cy, for fire-protection ratings indicated,
based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252.
1. Edge Construction: Provide edge constructi on with
intumescent seals concea led by outer stile. Comply w ith specified requirements for exposed
edges.
B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and
labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784.
C. Interior Fire-Rated Stile and Rail Wood Doors : Fire-rated
(20-minute rating) doors complying with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural
Woodwork Standards," and with other requirements specified.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal:
a. Eggers Industries .
b. Masonite International, Harring Doors.
c. VT Industries Inc .
2. G rade: Premium .
3. Fin ish: Transparent .
4. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish : As
indicated on architectural drawings and allowed per Ho tel Brand s Specifications and standards
.
5. Door Construction for Transparent Finish: 1-3/4-inch-
thick stiles and rails and veneered flat panels not less than 5/8 inch thick.
a. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered,
structural composite lumber or ve neered , edge- and end-glued clear lumber . Select veneers
for similarity of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match between adjacent pieces. Use
veneers not less than 1/16 inch thick.
b. Raised-Panel Construction: Veneered,
shaped, wood-based panel product with veneer conforming to raised-panel shape.
c. Flat-Panel Construction: Veneered, wood-
based panel product.
D. Interior Fir e-Rated Stile and Rail Wood Doors : Fire-rated
(45-minute rating) doors complying with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural
Woodwork Standards," and with other requirements specified.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide products by one of the following or approved equal:
a. Eggers Industries .
b. Masonite International, Harring Doors .
c. VT Industries Inc .
2. G rade: Premium .
3. Finish : Transparent .
4. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish : As
indicated on architectural drawings and allowed per Ho tel Brand s Specifications and standards
.
5. I nterior Fire-Rated Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch-thic
k, edged and veneered mineral-core stiles and rails and 1-1/8-inch-thick, v eneered mineral-
core raised panels.
6. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide
laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance.
Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
4. STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICAT ION
A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for
field fitting .
B. Factory machine door s for hardware that is not surface
applied.
C. Glazed Openings: Trim openings indicated for glazing with
solid wood moldings, with one side removable. Miter wood moldings at corner joints.
D. Glazed Openings: Factory install glazing in door s,
complying with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." I nstall glass using manufacturer's standard
elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with removable
wood moldings. Mite r wood moldings at corner joints.
5. FINISHIN G
A. Finish wood doors at factory that are indicated to receive
transparent finish.
B. For doors indicated to be factory finished, comply with the
AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards," and with other requirements
specified.
C. Transparent Finish:
1. Grade: Premium .
2. Finish: AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Ar chitectural
Woodwork Standards".
3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufactur e
r's full range .
4. Effect : As indicated on architectural drawings and al
lowed per Ho tel Bran d s Specifications and standards .
5. Sheen: Satin .
3. EXECUTION
1. INSTALLATION
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 71 00 "Door
Hardware."
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with ma nufa
cturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.
2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to
NFPA 105.
C. J ob-Fit ted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with
uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits
set by manufactur er or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges
of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and
between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering unle ss otherwise indicated. Where threshold i s shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch fr
om bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at loc
k and hinge edges.
3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches on lock
edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance
at each edge.
END OF SECTION 08 14 33
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Page 1
SECTION 08 31 13 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each type of access door and frame and for each finish specified.
C. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are
listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated,
according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Babcock-Davis.
b. Karp Associates, Inc.
c. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
2. Description: Face of door flush with frame; with concealed flange for gypsum
board installation and concealed hinge.
3. Locations: Wall and ceiling.
4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door (interior use): Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage,
factory primed.
5. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door (exterior use): Nominal 0.064 inch, 16
gage factory primed.
6. Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door.
7. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, screwdriver operated.
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Page 2
2.3 FIRE-RATED ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Babcock-Davis.
b. Karp Associates, Inc.
c. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
2. Description: Door face flush with frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation
enclosed in sheet metal; with exposed flange, self-closing door, and concealed
hinge.
3. Locations: Wall and ceiling.
4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than as indicated on drawings.
5. Temperature-Rise Rating: 450 deg F at the end of 30 minutes.
6. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door (interior use): Nominal 0.036 inch, 20 gage,
factory primed.
7. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door (exterior use): Nominal 0.040 inch, 20
gage, factory primed.
8. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
9. Latch and Lock: Self-latching door hardware, operated by key.
B. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Babcock-Davis.
b. Karp Associates, Inc.
c. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
2. Description: Door face flush with frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation
enclosed in sheet metal; with concealed flange for gypsum board installation,
self-closing door, and concealed hinge.
3. Locations: Wall and ceiling.
1. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than as indicated on drawings.
2. Temperature-Rise Rating: 450 deg F at the end of 30 minutes.
3. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door (interior use): Nominal 0.036 inch, 20 gage,
factory primed.
4. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door (exterior use): Nominal 0.040 inch, 20
gage, factory primed.
5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
6. Latch and Lock: Self-closing, self-latching door hardware, operated by knurled-
knob.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES Page 3
B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-
rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel
(CS), exposed.
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;
with minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.
D. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with
exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
B. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.
Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure
access doors to types of supports indicated.
C. Latch and Lock Hardware:
1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly
closed.
2. Keys: Furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning,
conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.
1. Factory Finished: Apply manufacturer's standard baked-enamel or powder-coat
finish immediately after cleaning and pretreating, with minimum dry-film thickness
of 1 mil for topcoat.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
END OF SECTION 08 31 13
SECTION 083213 - SLIDING ALUMINUM-FRAMED GLASS DOORS Page 1
SECTION 08 32 13 - SLIDING ALUMINUM-FRAMED GLASS DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes sliding aluminum-framed glass doors for exterior locations.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For sliding aluminum-framed glass doors.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification data.
B. Product test reports.
C. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating sliding aluminum-
framed glass doors that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of
documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and
calculations.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of sliding aluminum-framed glass doors that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period:
a. Sliding Door: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Insulating-Glass Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
c. Laminated Glass: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
d. Aluminum Finish: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
SECTION 083213 - SLIDING ALUMINUM-FRAMED GLASS DOORS Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. EFCO Corporation.
2. Kawneer North America, an Arconic company.
3. Wojan Window & Door.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for minimum
standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless
more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Product Certification: AAMA certified with label attached to each door.
B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:
1. Minimum Performance Class: Class R.
2. Minimum Performance Grade: Grade 15.
C. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum total fenestration product U-factor of
0.35 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F. Verify min standards based on local code requirements.
See Architectural Code study
D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum total fenestration product
SHGC of 0.27. Verify min standards based on local code requirements. See
Architectural Code study
2.3 SLIDING ALUMINUM-FRAMED GLASS DOORS
A. Frames and Door Panels: Fabricated from aluminum extrusions complying with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
1. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames and door panels with an
integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior
and interior surfaces in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.
B. Threshold and Sill Cap/Track: Provide extruded-aluminum threshold and track of
thickness, dimensions, and profile indicated; designed to comply with performance
requirements indicated and to drain to the exterior; with manufacturer's standard finish.
1. Low-Profile Floor Track: ADA-ABA compliant.
SECTION 083213 - SLIDING ALUMINUM-FRAMED GLASS DOORS Page 3
2.4 GLAZING
A. Glass and Glazing: Manufacturer's standard glazing system that produces weather tight
seal. Comply with requirements indicated in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
1. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark safety glazing with certification label
of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of
glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
2. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190, certified through IGCC as complying with
requirements of IGCC.
a. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with air.
b. Low-E coating.
2.5 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware, fabricated from a corrosion-
resistant material compatible with aluminum complying with AAMA 907 and designed
to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock sliding aluminum-framed glass
doors.
B. Lock: Install manufacturer's keyed cylinder lock and multipoint locking device on each
movable panel, lockable from the inside only. Adjust locking device to allow
unobstructed movement of the panel across adjacent panel in the direction indicated.
2.6 INSECT SCREENS
A. General: Design sliding aluminum-framed glass doors to accommodate screens in a
tight-fitting, removable arrangement, fully integrated with door frame. Provide screen
for each operable door panel.
B. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: ASTM D 3656, 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 count per sq. in. mesh
of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to
corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration. Comply with
ASTM D 3656.
1. Mesh Color: Manufacturer's standard.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Provide anchors, clips, and accessories of aluminum,
nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel or iron for sliding aluminum-framed
glass doors, complying with ASTM B 456 or ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service
conditions; provide sufficient strength to withstand design pressure indicated.
1. Windborne-Debris Resistance: Provide anchors of same design used in
windborne-debris resistance testing.
SECTION 083213 - SLIDING ALUMINUM-FRAMED GLASS DOORS Page 4
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate sliding aluminum-framed glass doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete
system for assembling components and anchoring doors.
B. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each door panel.
C. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal drainage passages to conduct infiltrating
water to exterior.
D. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze sliding aluminum-framed glass doors in the factory
where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in
Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in color
coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for
installing doors, hardware, accessories, and other components.
B. Install sliding aluminum-framed glass doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without
distortion, without warp or rack of frames and panels, and without impeding thermal
movement; anchored securely in place to structural support; and in proper relation to
wall flashing, vapor retarders, air barriers, water/weather barriers, and other adjacent
construction.
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, to provide weathertight
construction.
D. Install sliding aluminum-framed glass doors and components to drain condensation,
water penetrating joints, and moisture migrating within doors to the exterior.
E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
F. Adjust operating panels and screens to provide a tight fit at contact points and weather
stripping for smooth operation, without binding, and a weathertight closure. Adjust
hardware for proper alignment, smooth operation, and proper latching without
unnecessary force or excessive clearance.
SECTION 083213 - SLIDING ALUMINUM-FRAMED GLASS DOORS Page 5
END OF SECTION 08 32 13
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Page 1
SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Storefront framing.
2. Manual-swing entrance doors.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans,
elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.
1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
2. Include point-to-point wiring diagrams.
C. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier,
detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures
and diagrams.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated
to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from
manufacturer.
B. Product test reports.
C. Source quality-control reports.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Sample warranties.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Page 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing
indicated and accredited by the International Accreditation Service or the International
Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying
with ISO/IEC 17025.
C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes
requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies.
Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of
components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to
adjoining construction.
1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except
with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-
framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes
or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in
Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and
storefronts.
B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as
determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing
those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication,
installation, or other defects in construction.
1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of
supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-
term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Page 3
2. Failure also includes the following:
a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
b. Glass breakage.
c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
e. Failure of operating units.
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction
perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for
each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of
individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch,
whichever is smaller.
a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between framing
members and operable units.
3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as
follows:
a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus
1/4 inch for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches or 1/175 times span,
for spans of less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches.
E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330/E 330M as follows:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, storefront
assemblies, including entrance doors, do not evidence deflection exceeding
specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
storefront assemblies, including entrance doors and anchorage, do not evidence
material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing
members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10
seconds.
F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:
1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:
a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential
of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
2. Entrance Doors:
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Page 4
a. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-
pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas,
including entrance doors, when tested according to a minimum static-air-
pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not
less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as
follows:
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system
shall have U-factor of not more than 0.41 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined
according to NFRC 100. Verify min standards based on local code requirements.
See Architectural Code study.
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Fixed glazing and framing areas as a
system shall have SHGC of no greater than 0.26 as determined according to
NFRC 200. Verify min standards based on local code requirements. See
Architectural Code study.
3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall
have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 15 as
determined according to NFRC 500.
4. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. EFCO Corporation.
2. Kawneer North America, an Arconic company.
3. Tubelite Inc.
B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Exterior Framing Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Interior Vestibule Framing Construction: Nonthermal.
3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
4. Finish: High-performance organic finish.
5. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.
6. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated.
7. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer.
C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing
members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Page 5
D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
2.3 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. EFCO Corporation.
2. Kawneer North America, an Arconic company.
3. Tubelite Inc.
B. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing or
automatic operation.
1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick,
extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners
with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that
incorporate concealed tie rods.
a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate
aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the
interior.
2. Door Design: As indicated.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and
preformed gaskets.
2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in
Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
B. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated
in door and frame schedule for each entrance door, to comply with requirements in this
Section.
1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color
indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to
named products.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
3. Opening-Force Requirements:
a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than
30 lbf to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open the door to
its minimum required width.
b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.
C. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, quantity, size, and other
distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Page 6
Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware
designations as follows:
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are
listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing
minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door
Hardware Sets" Article.
2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these
standards and requirements for description, quality, and function.
D. Cylinders: As specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
E. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each
door leaf.
F. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner.
1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide setscrew in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a
groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed.
2. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.
3. Quantities:
a. For doors up to 87 inches high, provide three hinges per leaf.
b. For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches high, provide four hinges per
leaf.
G. Continuous-Gear Hinges: BHMA A156.26.
H. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
I. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.
J. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection,
based on testing according to UL 305.
K. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key
control number and include notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE".
L. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated
for aluminum framing.
M. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.
N. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3 extruded aluminum.
1. When used with panic exit devices, provide removable mullions listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Page 7
jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. Use only
mullions that have been tested with exit devices to be used.
O. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation,
sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use;
adjustable to comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force.
P. Concealed Overhead Holders and Stops: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.
Q. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door
location indicated, with integral rubber bumper.
R. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000 molded neoprene or ASTM D 2287
molded PVC.
2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701/702, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile
with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.
S. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed
fasteners on mounting strip.
T. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21 raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than
1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch.
U. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored
to frame hinge-jamb at center-pivoted doors.
2.5 GLAZING
A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of
black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.6 MATERIALS
A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
C. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
D. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
E. Steel Reinforcement (when required):
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Page 8
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
4. Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying
with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to
recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to
applicable SSPC standard.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or
discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces
by descaling or grinding.
C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing
to maintain required glazing edge clearances.
5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.
6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to
greatest extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting
stops.
E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door
operation and for installing entrance door hardware.
F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the
greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware
before applying finishes.
H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project
according to Shop Drawings.
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in color
coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Page 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and
electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic
action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer
for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.
2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in
Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust
weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.
F. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact
points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written
instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of
aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.
1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas
designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not
evidence water penetration.
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS Page 10
a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.
2. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 783 at 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing in
"Performance Requirements" Article but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-
air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.
3. Water Penetration: ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform static-air-pressure
differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory
testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.,
and shall not evidence water penetration.
C. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not
pass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 08 41 13
SECTION 084213 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES Page 1
SECTION 08 42 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manual-swing entrance doors.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments
to other work.
1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
2. Include point-to-point wiring diagrams.
C. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier,
detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures
and diagrams.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from
manufacturer.
B. Product test reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Sample warranties.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by manufacturer.
SECTION 084213 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES Page 2
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing
indicated and accredited by the International Accreditation Service or the International
Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying
with ISO/IEC 17025.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-
framed entrances that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes
or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. EFCO Corporation.
2. Kawneer North America, an Arconic company.
3. Tubelite Inc.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as
determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances representing those indicated for
this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or
other defects in construction.
B. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330/E 330M as follows:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, entrance
doors do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
entrance doors, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural
distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2
percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10
seconds.
SECTION 084213 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES Page 3
D. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:
1. Entrance Doors:
a. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-
pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
E. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas of
entrance doors when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure
differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than
6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
F. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy perf ormance according to NFRC as
follows:
1. shall have U-factor of not more than 0.41 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined
according to NFRC 100. Verify min standards based on local code requirements.
See Architectural Code study.
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Fixed glazing and framing areas as a
system shall have SHGC of no greater than 0.26 as determined according to
NFRC 200. Verify min standards based on local code requirements. See
Architectural Code study.
3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas as a system shall
have an NFRC-certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 15 as
determined according to NFRC 500.Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC). Verify
min standards based on local code requirements. See Architectural Code study.
G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.3 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing or
automatic operation.
1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick,
extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners
with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that
incorporate concealed tie rods.
a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate
aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the
interior.
2. Door Design: As indicated on drawings.
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and
preformed gaskets.
SECTION 084213 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES Page 4
B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch
thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Nominal Size: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing
members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
E. Materials:
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated.
a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
2. Steel Reinforcement (when required):
a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
d. Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer
complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after
surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods
according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces
according to applicable SSPC standard.
2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in
Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
B. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated
in door and frame schedule for each entrance door, to comply with requirements in this
Section.
1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color
indicated, and products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to
named products.
2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
3. Opening-Force Requirements:
a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than
30 lb ft to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open the door
to its minimum required width.
b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.
SECTION 084213 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES Page 5
C. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, quantity, size, and other
distinctive qualities of each type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance
Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using entrance door hardware
designations as follows:
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are
listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing
minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in "Entrance Door
Hardware Sets" Article.
2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these
standards and requirements for description, quality, and function.
D. Cylinders: As specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
E. Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
1. Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each
door leaf.
F. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner.
1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide setscrew in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a
groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed.
2. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.
3. Quantities:
a. For doors up to 87 inches high, provide three hinges per leaf.
b. For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches high, provide four hinges per
leaf.
G. Continuous-Gear Hinges: BHMA A156.26.
H. Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
I. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.
J. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection,
based on testing according to UL 305.
K. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
1. Keying: Master key system. Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key
control number and include notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE".
L. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated
for aluminum framing.
M. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.
N. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3 extruded aluminum.
SECTION 084213 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES Page 6
1. When used with panic exit devices, provide removable mullions listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. Use only
mullions that have been tested with exit devices to be used.
O. Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, with accessories required for a complete installation,
sized as required by door size, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use;
adjustable to comply with field conditions and requirements for opening force.
P. Concealed Overhead Holders and Stops: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.
Q. Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door
location indicated, with integral rubber bumper.
R. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000 molded neoprene or ASTM D 2287
molded PVC.
2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701/702, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile
with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.
S. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed
fasteners on mounting strip.
T. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21 raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than
1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch.
U. Finger Guards: Manufacturer's standard collapsible neoprene or PVC gasket anchored
to frame hinge-jamb at center-pivoted doors.
2.5 GLAZING
A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of
black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or
discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces
by descaling or grinding.
C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
SECTION 084213 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES Page 7
3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing
to maintain required glazing edge clearances.
5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to
greatest extent possible.
D. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door
operation and for installing entrance door hardware.
E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the
greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware
before applying finishes.
G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project
according to Shop Drawings.
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in color
coat.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and
electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic
action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer
for this purpose or installing nonconductive spacers.
2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed, as specified in
Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation.
SECTION 084213 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES Page 8
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact
points.
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written
instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on aluminum-framed
entrances.
1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas
designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not
evidence water penetration.
2. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 783 at 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing in
"Performance Requirements" Article but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-
air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
3. Water Penetration: ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform static-air-pressure
differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory
testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.,
and shall not evidence water penetration.
C. Aluminum-framed entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 08 42 13
SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES Page 1
SECTION 08 42 29.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes exterior and interior, sliding, power-operated automatic entrances.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For sliding automatic entrances.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware mounting heights, and attachment
details.
2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Indicate locations of activation and safety devices.
4. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities,
and locations.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For automatic entrances.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Product test reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Sample warranties.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM.
SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES Page 2
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic
entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on
which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to
ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to
ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE ASSEMBLIES
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
B. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in
Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design automatic entrances.
B. Structural Performance: Automatic entrances shall withstand the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated
according to ASCE/SEI 7.
1. Seismic Loads: As indicated on drawings.
2. Wind Loads: As indicated on drawings.
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface
temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
D. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of
1.25 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed entrance-system area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at
a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES Page 3
2.3 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances, including doors,
sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, controls,
and accessories required for a complete installation.
B. Sliding Automatic Entrance:
1. Single- and Biparting-Sliding Units:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Besam Entrance Solutions; ASSA ABLOY.
2) DORMA USA, Inc.
3) Stanley Access Technologies.
2. Single- and Biparting-Telescoping-Sliding Units:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Besam Entrance Solutions; ASSA ABLOY.
2) DORMA USA, Inc.
3) Stanley Access Technologies.
3. Configuration: As indicated on architectural drawings and allowed per Hotel
Brands Specifications and standards.
a. Traffic Pattern: Two way.
b. Emergency Breakaway Capability: As indicated on Drawings.
c. Mounting: Between jambs.
4. Operator Features:
a. Power opening and closing.
b. Drive System: Chain or belt.
c. Adjustable opening and closing speeds.
d. Adjustable hold-open time between zero and 30 seconds.
e. Obstruction recycle.
f. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator.
5. Sliding-Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Carrier assembly
that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or delrin-covered, ball-
bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track, or ball-
bearing-center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered, continuous
roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot
assembly.
a. Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two antirise rollers
for each active leaf.
SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES Page 4
6. Sliding-Door Threshold: Threshold members and bottom-guide-track system with
stainless-steel, ball-bearing-center roller wheels.
a. Configuration: Saddle-type threshold across door opening and surface-
mounted guide-track system at sidelites.
7. Controls: Activation and safety devices according to BHMA standards.
a. Activation Device: Motion sensor mounted on each side of door header to
b. Safety Device: Presence sensor mounted on each side of door header and
two photoelectric beams mounted in sidelite jambs on one side of the door
to detect pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from closing.
c. Sidelite Safety Device: Presence sensor, mounted above each sidelite on
side of door opening through which doors travel, to detect obstructions and
to prevent door from opening.
8. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), and header with high-performance organic finish
(two-coat fluoropolymer).
2.4 ENTRANCE COMPONENTS
A. Framing Members: Extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch thick and reinforced as
required to support imposed loads.
1. Nominal Size: 1-3/4 by 4-1/2 inches.
2. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 0.062-inch wall thickness.
B. Stile and Rail Doors: 1-3/4-inch-thick, glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch-thick,
extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Mechanically fasten corners with
reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full
length of top and bottom rails.
1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
2. Stile Design: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Rail Design: As indicated on drawings.
4. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; match stile design and
C. 1-3/4-inch-deep sidelites and transom with minimum 0.125-inch-thick, extruded-
aluminum tubular stile and rail members matching door design.
1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail door.
2. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail members for each sidelite; match stile design.
D. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch-thick extruded aluminum and extending
full width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. Provide
hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and
controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access.
1. Mounting: Surface mounted.
E. Signage: As required by cited BHMA standard.
SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES Page 5
1. Application Process: Decals.
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221.
2. Sheet: ASTM B 209.
B. Steel Reinforcement: Reinforcement with corrosion-resistant primer complying with
SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and
pretreatment. Use surface preparation methods according to recommendations in
SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
C. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276/A 276M or ASTM A 666, type 304.
D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
E. Expanded Aluminum Mesh: Expanded and flattened aluminum sheet according to the
geometry of ASTM F 1267.
F. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
G. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
H. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive,
nonstaining grout; complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; of consistency suitable for
application.
I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with
ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
J. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners
and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
2.6 DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS
A. General: Provide operators and controls, which include activation and safety devices,
according to BHMA standards, for condition of exposure, and for long-term,
maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.
B. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for
door size, weight, and movement.
1. Door Operator Performance: Door operators shall open and close doors and
maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind
loads.
2. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained, overhead units
powered by fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing
speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of
SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES Page 6
electric motor; with solid-state microprocessor controller; complying with UL 325;
and with manual operation with power off.
C. Motion Sensors: Self-contained, K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units; fully
enclosed by their plastic housings; adjustable to provide detection-field sizes and
functions required by BHMA A156.10.
1. Provide capability for switching between bi- and unidirectional detection.
2. For one-way traffic, sensor on egress side shall not be active when doors are
fully closed.
D. Presence Sensors: Self-contained, active-infrared scanner units; adjustable to provide
detection-field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10. Sensors shall remain
active at all times.
E. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly for recessed
mounting. Beams shall not be active when doors are fully closed.
F. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits,
provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked,
latched, or bolted.
2.7 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and
hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to
match door finish.
B. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Device that allows door to swing out in
direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position. Interrupt powered
operation of door operator while in breakaway mode.
C. Deadlocks: Deadbolt operated by exterior cylinder and interior thumb turn, with
minimum 1-inch-long throw bolt; BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
1. Cylinders: As specified in Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware."
a. Keying: Integrate into building master key system.
b. Keys: Two for each cylinder.
2. Deadbolts: Laminated-steel hook, mortise type, BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
3. Two-Point Locking for Stile and Rail Sliding Doors: Mechanism in stile of active
door leaf that automatically extends second lockbolt into overhead carrier
assembly threshold.
4. Lock/Unlock Indicator: Lock position indicators integrated with locking system.
Stile is mounted on secure side of door. Visual display of lock position as follows:
"OPEN" in black letters when unlocked, and "LOCKED" in red letters when
locked.
5. Armored Strike: Reinforced security strike plate.
SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES Page 7
D. Automatic Locking: Electrically controlled device mounted in header that automatically
locks sliding door in closed position, preventing door panels from sliding manually.
Provide fail- secure operation if power fails.
1. Power Interruption: Lock shall be engaged, preventing doors from sliding
manually.
2. Means of Egress: Standard breakaway feature.
E. Access-Control Locking: Electrically controlled device mounted in header that
automatically locks sliding door in closed position, preventing door panels from sliding
manually. Provide fail- secure operation if power fails.
1. Include concealed, vertical-rod, tamper-proof exit devices, complying with
UL 305, with latching into threshold and overhead carrier assembly and released
by full-width panic bar,, prohibiting manual breakout of door(s) from exterior.
2. Power Interruption: Lock shall be engaged, preventing doors from sliding
manually.
3. Means of Egress: Vertical rod exit device.
4. Include locking devices for sidelites to prevent manual breakout.
F. Dustproof Strikes for All-Glass Sliding Doors: Recessed, floor type, BHMA A156.16,
Grade 1, to receive deadbolt.
G. Weather Stripping: Replaceable components.
1. Sliding Type: AAMA 701/702, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile
with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.
2.8 ACCESSORIES
A. Guide Rails: Anodized aluminum, fabricated from bars or tubing, minimum 30 inches
high, and finished to match doors unless otherwise indicated; positioned and projecting
from face of door jamb for distance as indicated, but not less than that required by
BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel; with filler panel.
1. Filler Panel: Expanded aluminum mesh.
a. Orient expanded aluminum mesh with long dimension of diamonds parallel
to top rail.
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Mounting: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Aluminum Finish: Finish matching door and frame.
2.9 FABRICATION
A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and
thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards.
SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES Page 8
B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete
fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment
to Project site.
1. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection
devices.
2. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints, with ends coped or mitered to
produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
3. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints, condensation
occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within system to
exterior.
4. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly
from building structure.
5. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units.
C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as r equired to
support imposed loads and for installing hardware.
D. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and
testing.
E. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and
type of glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."
F. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as
required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site.
Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.
1. Provide sliding-type weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of doors.
G. Controls:
1. General: Factory install activation and safety devices in doors and headers as
required by BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel.
2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in color
coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES Page 9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install automatic entrances according to manufacturer's written instructions
and cited BHMA A156.10 for direction of pedestrian travel, including signage, controls,
wiring, and connection to the building's power supply.
1. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints
free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints
watertight.
2. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
3. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating.
B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established
lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely
in place.
1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent
possible.
2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and
true to location with anchorage for permanent support.
3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within
framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior.
4. Level recesses for recessed thresholds using nonshrink grout.
C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system.
D. Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control system, as
specified in Section 28 13 00 "Access Control Software and Database Management."
E. Controls: Install and adjust activation and safety devices according to manufacturer's
written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel. Connect
control wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
F. Guide Rails: Install rails according to BHMA A156.10, including Appendix A, and
manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.
G. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
H. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" to
provide weathertight installation.
1. Set thresholds, framing members and flashings in full sealant bed.
2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.
I. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door, as required by cited BHMA
standard for direction of pedestrian travel.
SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES Page 10
J. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to
terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations
on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Certified Inspector: Engage a Certified Inspector to test and inspect components,
assemblies, and installations, including connections.
B. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized
service representative:
1. Test and inspect each automatic entrance, using AAADM inspection forms, to
determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards.
C. Automatic entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware, moving parts, door operators, and controls to function smoothly, and
lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable
BHMA standards.
B. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation
equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrances.
END OF SECTION 08 42 29.23
SECTION 08 43 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
1. GENERAL
1. SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Storefront framing.
2. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed storefronts. Include
plans, elevations, sections, full-size de tails, and attachments to other work.
1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent
thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed
storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criter ia, including
analysis data signed and sealed by the qual ified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
3. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy
performance values from manufacturer.
B. Product test repor ts.
C. Source quality-control reports.
D. Field quality-control reports.
E. Sample warranties.
4. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
5. QUALITY ASSU RANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers
and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufa cturer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to
ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in
Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of
assemblies. Aes thetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and
profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to
adjoining construction.
1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged
solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval . If changes are proposed, submit
comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.
6. WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace compo nents of aluminum-framed storefronts that do not comply with requirements or th
at fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period : F ive years from date of
Substantial Completion.
B. Special Fi nish Warranty: Standard form in which
manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replac e aluminum that shows evidence of
deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specifie d warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of
Substantial Completion.
2. PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by one of the following:
1. EFCO Corporation .
2. Kawneer Nor th Americ a, an Arconic company.
3. Tubelite Inc.
7. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional
engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design al uminum-framed
storefront s.
B. General Performance: Comply with performance
requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed storefronts representing
those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installati
on, or other defects in construction.
1. Aluminum-framed storefronts shall withstand
movements of supporting structure, including, but not limited to, twist, column shortening, long-
term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentr ated live loads.
2. Failure also includes the following:
a. Thermal stresses transferring to building
structure.
b. Glass breakage.
c. Noise or vibration created by wind and
thermal and structural movements.
d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners,
attachments, and other components.
e. Failure of o perating units.
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Dra wings.
2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings .
D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure,
as follows:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to e dge of
glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length
for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing
lites to 3/4 inch , whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parall el to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/3 60
of clear span or 1/8 inch , whichever is smaller .
a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch
clearance between framing members and operable units.
3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members
overhang an anchor point, as follows:
a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater
than 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches or 1/175
times span, for spans less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches .
E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330/E 330M as follow
s:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load
design pressures, storefront asse mblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative
wind-load design pressures, storefront assemblies, includ ing anchorage, do not evidence
material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members
exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity,
but not less than 10 seconds.
F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration
as follows:
1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:
a. Maximum air le akage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a
static-air-pressure dif ferential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according
to ASTM E 331 as follo ws:
1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed
glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential
of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.
H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy
performance according to NFRC as follows:
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and
framing areas as a system shall have U-factor of not more th an 0.41 Btu/sq . ft. x h x deg F as
determined according to NFRC 100.
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): Fixed glazing
and framing areas as a syst em shall have SHGC of no greater than 0.26 as determined accordi
ng to NFRC 200. Verify min standards based on local code requirements. See Architectural
Code study.
3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and
framing areas as a sy stem shall have an NFRC-cer tified condensation resistance rating of no
les s than 15 as determined according to NFRC 500.
I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements
resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F , ambient; 180
deg F , material surfaces.
8. STOREFRONT SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-alu
minum frami ng members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed
loads .
1. Exterior Framing Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Interior Vestibule Framing Construction: Nonthermal
.
3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with
gaskets on four sides.
4. Glazing Plane: Front.
5. Finish : High-performance organic finish.
6. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.
7. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manuf
acturer for type of use and finish indicated.
8. Steel Reinforcement: As required by manufacturer.
B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer
plates for f raming members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard
high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, n o nferrous shims for aligning system components.
9. GLAZING
A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner
pressure-gl azing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shim
s or spacers.
C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
10. MA TERIALS
A. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 .
B. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 .
C. Extruded Stru ctural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
D. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
E. Steel Reinforcement (when required):
1. S tructural Sha pes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/
A 36M.
2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/
A 1008M.
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
4. Primer: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-
resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 1 2.00; applied immediately after surface
preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to
recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfac es according to applicable SSPC
standard.
11. FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishin g.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to
minimiz e distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from e xp
osed surfaces by desca ling or grinding.
C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the
followi ng characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects
or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Physical a nd thermal isolation of glazing from
framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movem
ents of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearan
ces.
5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exteri
or.
6. Fasteners, anchors, an d connection devices that are
concealed from view to greatest extent possible.
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for
flush glazing without projecting stops.
E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their
locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.
12. ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fl uoropolymer
fin ish complying with AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by
weight in color coat.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from ma n
ufacturer's full range .
3. EXECUTION
1. INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with ma nufacturer's written instructi ons.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burr s and
distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anch ors with separators and isolators to
prevent metal corrosion and electr olytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of
moving joints.
6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum is in con tact with dissimilar metals,
protect against galvanic action by paintin g contact surfaces with materi als recommended by
manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.
2. W here aluminum is in contact with concrete or
masonry, protect aga inst corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Set continuous sill members and fl ashing in fu ll sealant
bed, as specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants," to produce weathertight installation.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with
established lines and grades.
E. Install operable uni ts level and plumb, securely anchored,
and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce
proper op eration.
F. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
2. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qual ified testing agency to
perform te sts and inspections.
B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on
representative areas of aluminum-framed storefronts .
1. Water-Spray T est: Be fore installation of interior
finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2
and shall not evidence water penetration.
a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as
directed by Architect.
2. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 783 at 1.5 times the rate
specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article but not more than 0.09
cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as
directed by Architect.
3. Wa ter Penetration: ASTM E 1105 at a minimum unifo
rm static-air-pressure differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for
laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft., and
shall not evidence water penetration.
C. Aluminum-framed storefronts will be considered defective
if they do not p ass tests and inspections.
D. Prepare t est and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 08 43 13
SECTION 084413 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS Page 1
SECTION 08 44 13 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes glazed aluminum curtain walls.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments
to other work.
1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls indicated to comply
with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Energy Performance Certificates: NFRC-certified energy performance values from
manufacturer.
B. Product test reports.
C. Field quality-control reports.
D. Sample warranties.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by manufacturer.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.
C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes
requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies.
SECTION 084413 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS Page 2
Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of
components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to
adjoining construction.
1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except
with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive
explanatory data to Architect for review.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
glazed aluminum curtain wall that do not comply with requirements or that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes
or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes
within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in
Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design glazed aluminum curtain walls.
B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as
determined by testing of glazed aluminum curtain walls representing those indicated for
this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or
other defects in construction.
1. Glazed aluminum curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting
structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-
term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
2. Failure also includes the following:
a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
b. Glass breakage.
c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
e. Failure of operating units.
C. Structural Loads:
1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
SECTION 084413 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS Page 3
D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction
perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for
each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of
individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch,
whichever is smaller.
a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between framing
members and operable units.
3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as
follows:
a. Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus
1/4-inch for spans greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches or 1/175 times span,
for spans less than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches.
E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do
not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural
distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2
percent of span.
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10
seconds.
F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:
1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:
a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential
of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:
1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when
tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of
positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..
H. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as
follows:
1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-
factor of not more than 0.45 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to
NFRC 100.
2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar
heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.35 as determined according to
NFRC 200. Verify min standards based on local code requirements. See
Architectural Code study.
SECTION 084413 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS Page 4
3. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-
certified condensation resistance rating of no less than 15 as determined
according to NFRC 500.
I. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes:
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. EFCO Corporation.
2. Kawneer North America, an Arconic company.
3. Tubelite Inc.
2.3 FRAMING
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1. Construction: Thermally broken.
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
3. Glazing Plane: Front.
4. Finish: High-performance organic finish.
5. Fabrication Method: Either factory- or field-fabricated system.
B. Pressure Caps: Manufacturer's standard aluminum components that mechanically
retain glazing.
1. Include snap-on aluminum trim that conceals fasteners.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
D. Materials:
1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and
finish indicated.
a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
2. Steel Reinforcement (when required): Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich,
corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied
immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface
preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and
prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
SECTION 084413 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS Page 5
a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
2.4 GLAZING
A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of
black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.
C. Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or
discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces
by descaling or grinding.
C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing
to maintain required glazing edge clearances.
5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior.
6. Provisions for safety railings mounted on interior face of mullions.
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to
greatest extent possible.
D. Fabricate components to resist water penetration as follows:
1. Internal guttering system or other means to drain water passing joints,
condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within
glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.
E. Factory-Assembled Frame Units:
1. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
2. Prepare surfaces that are in contact structural sealant according to sealant
manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion.
3. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.
4. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
5. Install glazing to comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project
according to Shop Drawings.
SECTION 084413 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS Page 6
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in color
coat.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Do not install damaged components.
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and
electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
6. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize
distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding.
7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
B. Metal Protection:
1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic
action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or
installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this
purpose.
2. Where aluminum is in contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within glazed aluminum curtain wall to exterior.
D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B. Test Area: Perform tests on representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain walls.
C. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of
glazed aluminum curtain walls.
SECTION 084413 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS Page 7
1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas
designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not
evidence water penetration.
a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.
D. Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests
and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 08 44 13
SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS Page 1
SECTION 08 51 13 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes aluminum windows for exterior locations.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect
screens, operational clearances, and details of installation, including anchor, flashing,
and sealant installation.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Sample warranties.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace aluminum windows
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period:
a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
b. Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
c. Aluminum Finish: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WINDOW PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and
minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and
fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
1. Window Certification: AAMA certified with label attached to each window.
B. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows:
SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS Page 2
1. Minimum Performance Class: R.
2. Minimum Performance Grade: 15.
C. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of 0.30 Btu/sq. ft.
x h x deg F.
D. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of
0.40.
E. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal
performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 45.
F. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for
thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient
and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of
components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental
effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both
solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.
2.2 ALUMINUM WINDOWS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following or approved equal:
1. Gerkin Windows and Doors.
2. Quaker Window Products, Inc.
3. TRACO.
4. Wojan.
B. Operating Types: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Frames and Sashes: Aluminum extrusions complying with
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440.
1. Thermally Improved Construction: Fabricate frames, sashes, and muntins with an
integral, concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier located between exterior
materials and window members exposed on interior side in a manner that
eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.
D. Glass: Clear annealed glass, ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.
1. Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings.
E. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190.
1. Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.
a. Tint: As indicated on drawings.
b. Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings.
SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS Page 3
2. Lites: Two.
3. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with air.
4. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.
F. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces
weathertight seal.
G. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant hardware
sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.
1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
H. Projected Window Hardware:
1. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Complying with AAMA 901 when tested according
to ASTM E 405, Method A. Provide operators that function without requiring the
removal of interior screens or using screen wickets.
a. Type and Style: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
types and styles.
2. Hinges: Non-friction type, not less than two per sash.
3. Lock: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Limit Devices: Limit clear opening to 4 inches for ventilation; with custodial key
release.
I. Hung Window Hardware:
1. Counterbalancing Mechanism: AAMA 902.
2. Locks and Latches: Operated from the inside only.
3. Tilt Latch: Releasing latch allows sash to pivot about horizontal axis.
J. Horizontal-Sliding Window Hardware:
1. Sill Cap/Track: Designed to comply with performance requirements indicated and
to drain to the exterior.
2. Locks and Latches: Operated from the inside only.
3. Roller Assemblies: Low-friction design.
K. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash
unless otherwise indicated.
L. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware,
anchors, and other components.
1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being
fastened.
SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS Page 4
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Dividers As indicated on architectural drawings and allowed per Hotel Brand
Specifications and standards (False Muntins): Provide extruded-aluminum divider
grilles in designs indicated for each sash lite.
1. Type: Permanently located at exterior lite.
2. Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Profile: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
B. Subsills: Thermally broken, extruded-aluminum subsills in configurations indicated on
Drawings.
C. Column Covers: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on
Drawings.
D. Interior Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on
Drawings.
E. Panning Trim: Extruded-aluminum profiles in sizes and configurations indicated on
Drawings.
F. Receptor System: Two-piece, snap-together, thermally broken, extruded-aluminum
receptor system that anchors windows in place.
2.4 INSECT SCREENS
A. General: Fabricate insect screens to integrate with windo w frame. Provide screen for
each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted.
1. Type and Location: As indicated on architectural drawings and allowed per Hotel
Brand Specifications and standards.
B. Aluminum Frames: Complying with SMA 1004 or SMA 1201.
C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber
threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage,
stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration. Comply with
ASTM D 3656/D 3656M.
1. Mesh Color: Manufacturer's standard.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for
assembling components and anchoring windows.
B. Glaze aluminum windows in the factory.
C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weathertight installation.
SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS Page 5
D. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to
exterior.
E. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged sashes and similar lines of natural
water penetration.
F. Mullions: Provide mullions and cover plates, matching window units, complete with
anchors for support to structure and installation of window units. Allow for erection
tolerances and provide for movement of window units due to thermal expansion and
building deflections. Provide mullions and cover plates capable of withstanding design
wind loads of window units.
G. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the
factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for
shipment and installation.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. High-Performance Organic Finish (Two-Coat Fluoropolymer): AA-C12C40R1x
(Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: conversion
coating; Organic Coating: manufacturer's standard two-coat, thermocured system
consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat
containing not less than 50 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight). Prepare,
pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with AAMA 2604 and
with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and
color densities.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware,
accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not
addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements
in ASTM E 2112.
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to
wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weathertight construction.
C. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and
moisture migrating within windows to the exterior.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or
electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS Page 6
E. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather
stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.
F. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging
protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and
other substances.
G. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or
damaged during construction period.
END OF SECTION 08 51 13
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 1
SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a. Swinging doors.
b. Sliding doors.
c. Folding doors.
2. Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.
3. Electrified door hardware.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware.
1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and
security systems.
C. Samples: For each exposed product in each finish specified.
D. Door hardware schedule.
E. Keying schedule.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and
approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 2
is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architec t, and Owner
about door hardware and keying.
1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule.
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware,
including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of
manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this
Project.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in
providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently
certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door
hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless
otherwise indicated below:
a. Electromagnetic and Delayed-Egress Locks: Five years from date of
Substantial Completion.
b. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
c. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
d. Concealed Floor Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated doors are indicated, provide door
hardware complying with NFPA 80 that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure
according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door
assemblies are required, provide door hardware that complies with requirements of
assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
1. Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. at the tested pressure
differential of 0.3-inch wg of water.
C. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch.
Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 3
E. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply
with the DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1.
2.2 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and
door hardware schedule.
1. Door hardware is scheduled in Part 3 and on drawings per brand specifications.
2.3 HINGES
A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on
hollow-metal doors and hollow-metal frames.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Hager Companies.
b. Lawrence Hardware Inc.
c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.
2.4 SELF-CLOSING HINGES AND PIVOTS
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
2. Hager Companies.
3. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
4. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.
2.5 CENTER-HUNG AND OFFSET PIVOTS
A. Center-Hung and Offset Pivots: BHMA A156.4.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. Hager Companies.
c. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.6 CONTINUOUS HINGES
A. Continuous Hinges: BHMA A156.26; minimum 0.120-inch-thick, hinge leaves with
minimum overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to
template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are
complete.
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 4
B. Pin-and-Barrel-Type Hinges:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Hager Companies.
b. Lawrence Hardware Inc.
C. Continuous, Gear-Type Hinges: Extruded-aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves
joined by a continuous extruded-aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-
lubricating thrust bearings.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Hager Companies.
b. Pemko Manufacturing Co.
c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.
2.7 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule.
B. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled
fire doors, and as follows:
1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw.
2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw.
3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw.
C. Lock Backset: 2-3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated.
D. Lock Trim:
1. Description: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Levers: Cast.
3. Escutcheons (Roses): Cast.
4. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.
E. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying
with requirements indicated for applicable lock or latch and with strike box and curved
lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch.
1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim.
3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for
aluminum framing.
4. Rabbet Front and Strike: Provide on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles.
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 5
F. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2; Grade 1; Series 4000.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.
c. Yale Security Inc; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
G. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or
brass parts; Series 1000.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.
c. Yale Security Inc; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.8 ELECTRIC STRIKES
A. Electric Strikes: BHMA A156.31; Grade 1; with faceplate to suit lock and frame.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
b. Allegion plc.
c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.
2.9 ELECTROMAGNETIC LOCKS
A. Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA A156.23; electrically powered; with electromagnet
attached to frame and armature plate attached to door; full-exterior or full-interior type,
as required by application indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. Securitron Magnalock Corporation; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
c. Security Door Controls.
B. Delayed-Egress Electromagnetic Locks: BHMA A156.24, electrically powered, with
electromagnet attached to frame and armature plate attached to door; depressing push
bar for more than three seconds initiates irreversible alarm and adjustable time delay
for egress. When integrated with fire alarm, fire alarm voids time delay.
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 6
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. Door Controls International, Inc.
c. Securitron Magnalock Corporation; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.10 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS
A. Electromechanical Locks: BHMA A156.25; Grade 1; motor or solenoid driven; with
strike that suits frame.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.
c. Yale Security Inc; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.11 SELF-CONTAINED ELECTRONIC LOCKS
A. Self-Contained Electronic Locks: BHMA A156.25, bored; with internal, battery-
powered, self-contained electronic locks; consisting of complete lockset, motor-driven
lock mechanism, and actuating device; enclosed in zinc-dichromate-plated, wrought-
steel case, and strike that suits frame. Provide key override, low-battery detection and
warning, LED status indicators, and ability to program at the lock.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. Kaba Ilco Corp.
c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.
2.12 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS
A. Exit Locks and Alarms: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Arrow USA; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
b. Precision Hardware, Inc.; a Stanley company.
c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.
2.13 SURFACE BOLTS
A. Surface Bolts: BHMA A156.16.
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 7
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. Door Controls International, Inc.
c. Trimco.
2.14 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS
A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch throw; designed for mortising
into door edge.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. Door Controls International, Inc.
c. Trimco.
2.15 AUTOMATIC AND SELF-LATCHING FLUSH BOLTS
A. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16; minimum 3/4-inch throw;
designed for mortising into door edge.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. Door Controls International, Inc.
c. Trimco.
2.16 EXIT DEVICES AND AUXILIARY ITEMS
A. Exit Devices and Auxiliary Items: BHMA A156.3.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.
c. Yale Security Inc; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
2.17 LOCK CYLINDERS
A. Lock Cylinders: Tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or
nickel silver. Provide cylinder from same manufacturer of locking devices.
B. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1 permanent cores; face finished to
match lockset.
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 8
1. Core Type: Interchangeable.
C. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of
construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys.
D. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent
cores. Provide 10 construction master keys.
2.18 KEYING
A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28,
appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock.
1. No Master Key System: Only change keys operate cylinders.
a. Provide three cylinder change keys.
2. Master Key System: Change keys and a master key operate cylinders.
a. Provide three cylinder change keys and five master keys.
3. Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, and a grand master key
operate cylinders.
a. Provide three cylinder change keys and five each of master and grand
master keys.
4. Great-Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, a grand master
key, and a great-grand master key operate cylinders.
a. Provide three cylinder change keys and five each of m aster, grand master,
and great-grand master keys.
B. Keys: Nickel silver.
1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and
include the following notation:
a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
2.19 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.28; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish;
containing key-holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders,
key-gathering envelopes, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of
150 percent of the number of locks.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 9
a. American Key Boxes and Cabinets.
b. HPC, Inc.
c. Lund Equipment Co., Inc.
2.20 OPERATING TRIM
A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; aluminum unless otherwise indicated.
2.21 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS
A. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3; consisting of active-leaf, hold-open lever and inactive-leaf
release trigger; fabricated from steel with nylon-coated strike plates; with built-in,
adjustable safety release.
B. Carry-Open Bars: BHMA A156.3; prevent the inactive leaf from opening before the
active leaf; provide polished brass or bronze carry-open bars with strike plate for
inactive leaves of pairs of doors unless automatic or self-latching bolts are used.
C. Astragals: BHMA A156.22.
2.22 SURFACE CLOSERS
A. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable sweep
and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves and forged-steel main arm.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on
size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-
sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.
2.23 CONCEALED CLOSERS
A. Concealed Closers: BHMA A156.4; rack-and-pinion hydraulic type with adjustable
sweep and latch speeds controlled by key-operated valves. Comply with
manufacturer's written instructions for size of door closers depending on size of door,
exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers,
adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 10
2.24 CLOSER HOLDER RELEASE DEVICES
A. Closer Holder Release Devices: BHMA A156.15; Grade 1; closer connected with
separate or integral releasing and fire- or smoke-detecting devices. Door shall become
self-closing on interruption of signal to release device. Automatic release is activated
by smoke detection system.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.
c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.
2.25 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Allegion plc.
b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
c. Trimco.
2.26 ELECTROMAGNETIC STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A156.15, Grade 1; wall-mounted
electromagnetic single unit with strike plate attached to swinging door; coordinated with
fire detectors and interface with fire-alarm system for labeled fire-rated door
assemblies.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Lawrence Hardware Inc.
b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.
2.27 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 11
2.28 DOOR GASKETING
A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily
replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. National Guard Products, Inc.
b. Pemko Manufacturing Co.
c. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
B. Maximum Air Leakage: When tested according to ASTM E 283 with tested pressure
differential of 0.3-inch wg, as follows:
1. Smoke-Rated Gasketing: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of door opening.
2. Gasketing on Single Doors: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of door opening.
3. Gasketing on Double Doors: 0.50 cfm per foot of door opening.
2.29 THRESHOLDS
A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. National Guard Products, Inc.
b. Pemko Manufacturing Co.
c. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
2.30 SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE
A. Sliding Door Hardware: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails,
hangers, supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Hager Companies.
b. Johnson, L. E., Products, Inc.
c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.
2.31 FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: BHMA A156.14; complete sets including overhead rails, hangers, supports,
bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 12
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Johnson, L. E., Products, Inc.
b. PC Henderson Inc.
c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; a division of Stanley Security Solutions.
2.32 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; fabricated from 0.050-inch-thick aluminum;
with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
c. Trimco.
2.33 AUXILIARY DOOR HARDWARE
A. Auxiliary Hardware: BHMA A156.16.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company.
c. Trimco.
2.34 AUXILIARY ELECTRIFIED DOOR HARDWARE
A. Auxiliary Electrified Door Hardware:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or Approved Equal. Refer to Hotel brand specifications and
brand standards:
a. Allegion plc.
b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY.
c. Security Door Controls.
2.35 FINISHES
A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware
schedule.
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 13
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following
unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.
2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.
3. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that
are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and
reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-
mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.
C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not
fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one
hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other
equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
D. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate
offset pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than one
intermediate offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every
30 inches of door height greater than 90 inches.
E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during
construction period.
1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying
schedule.
2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.
F. Key Control Cabinet: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control
system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.
G. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above
accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect.
1. Configuration: Provide least number of power supplies required to adequately
serve doors with electrified door hardware.
H. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of
sealant complying with requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
I. Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in
door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
J. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 14
1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware.
K. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
L. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is
closed.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of
heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility
requirements.
3.3 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. All hardware to be verified with door hardware schedule on architectural plans and
brand specifications.
END OF SECTION 08 71 00
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING Page 1
SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Glass for windows, doors, interior borrowed lites, storefront framing, glazed
curtain walls, sloped glazing & skylights.
2. Glazing sealants and accessories.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum
edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified
according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to
replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period.
Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are
not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING Page 2
manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, crack ing, and other
indications of deterioration in coating.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace
laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of
laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed
to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to
manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination
materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by
referenced laminated-glass standard.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace
insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of
insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not
attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to
manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by
dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following or approved equal:
1. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope™.
2. Pilkington North America.
3. Viracon, Inc.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in
Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design glazing.
B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits
and under conditions indicated determined according to the International Building Code
and ASTM E 1300.
1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Design Snow Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Thickness of Patterned Glass: Base design of patterned glass on thickness at
thinnest part of the glass.
4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by
differential shading within individual glass lites.
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING Page 3
C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with
16 CFR 1201, Category II.
D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance
properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on
procedures indicated below:
1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's
WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.
2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.
3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.
2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product
manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are
indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section
or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing
Manual."
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and
AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."
3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped
Glazing."
4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American
Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and
Residential Use."
B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's
name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at
least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that
complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.
E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-
strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with
"Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated,
provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply
with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated,
provide fully tempered float glass.
2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING Page 4
B. Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3.
C. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A
(uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as
indicated, Quality-Q3.
D. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I,
Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2
(tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.
2.5 LAMINATED GLASS
A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no
tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after
fabrication and installation.
1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer or cast-in-place and
cured-transparent-resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written
instructions.
2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as
needed to comply with requirements.
3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.
2.6 INSULATING GLASS
A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass
separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.
1. Sealing System: Dual seals.
2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
2.7 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General:
1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact,
including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel
substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions
existing at time of installation.
3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING Page 5
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. Pecora Corporation.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. Pecora Corporation.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket
manufacturer.
B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85,
plus or minus 5.
C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement
(side walking).
E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of
size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum
glazing sealant performance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants,
gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated,
including those in referenced glazing publications.
B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes
glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken
glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.
C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined
by preconstruction testing.
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING Page 6
D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin
course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass
lites.
F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
3.2 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit
openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely
in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting
blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable
stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses
in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting
blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression
gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression
gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending
stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket
manufacturer.
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other
masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a
month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass
manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without
damage to coatings.
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING Page 7
C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
3.4 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type : Clear and fully tempered float glass.
1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm.
2. Safety glazing where required.
3.5 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Glass Type : Clear insulating glass.
1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm.
3. Outdoor Lite: float glass.
4. Interspace Content: Air.
5. Indoor Lite: float glass.
6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: Reference brand standards for maximum
7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: Reference brand standards for maximum
8. Safety glazing where required.
B. Glass Type : Low-E-coated, clear insulating glass.
1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm.
3. Outdoor Lite: float glass.
4. Interspace Content: Air.
5. Indoor Lite: float glass.
6. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.
7. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: Reference brand standards for maximum
8. Summer Daytime U-Factor: Reference brand standards for maximum
9. Visible Light Transmittance: Reference brand standards for minimum
10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Reference brand standards for maximum
11. Safety glazing where required.
END OF SECTION 08 80 00
SECTION 088813 - FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING Page 1
SECTION 08 88 13 - FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire-protection-rated glazing.
2. Fire-resistance-rated glazing.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum
edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable
tolerances.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Glass Samples: Samples to be made available to owner/architect upon request
1. For each type of glass product; 12 inches square.
C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace
laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of
laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use t hat are not attributed
to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to
manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination
materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by
referenced laminated-glass standard.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Manufacturer's Special W arranty on Double Glazing Units with Clear Gel Fill:
Manufacturer agrees to replace units that deteriorate within specified warranty period.
Deterioration of double glazing units with clear gel fill is defined as failure of hermetic
seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and
cleaning glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the
leakage of gel fill from units, air bubbles within units, or obstruction of vision by
contamination or deterioration of gel.
SECTION 088813 - FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING Page 2
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product
manufacturers and organization below unless more stringent requirements are
indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this
Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing
Manual."
B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glazing with certification label of the Safety
Glazing Certification Council or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's
name, type of glass, glass thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass
complies.
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Ultraclear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear), with visible
light transmission not less than 91 percent.
C. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A
(uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated, Quality-Q3.
D. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no
tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after
fabrication and installation.
2.3 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING
A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on positive-
pressure testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9, including the hose-stream test, and
shall comply with NFPA 80.
1. Fire-protection-rated glazing required to have a fire-protection rating of 20
minutes shall be exempt from the hose-stream test.
B. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing
with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Label shall indicate manufacturer's name; test standard; whether glazing is permitted to
be used in doors or openings; if permitted in openings, whether or not glazing has
SECTION 088813 - FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING Page 3
passed the hose-stream test; whether or not glazing meets 450 deg F temperature-rise
limitation; and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.
C. Fire-Protection-Rated Tempered Glass: 6-mm thickness, fire-protection-rated
tempered glass; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc.
b. SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions.
c. Technical Glass Products.
D. Film-Faced Ceramic Glazing: Clear, ceramic flat glass; 5-mm thickness; faced on one
surface with a clear glazing film; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc.
b. SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions.
c. Technical Glass Products.
E. Laminated Ceramic Glazing: Laminated glass made from two plies of clear, ceramic
glass; 8-mm total thickness; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc.
b. SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions.
c. Technical Glass Products.
F. Laminated Glass with Intumescent Interlayers: Laminated glass made from multiple
plies of uncoated, ultraclear float glass; with intumescent interlayers; and complying
with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc.
b. Pilkington North America.
c. Technical Glass Products.
2.4 FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED GLAZING
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-resistance ratings indicated, based on testing
according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263.
B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-resistance-rated
glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
SECTION 088813 - FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING Page 4
jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, test standard, that the glazing is
approved for use in walls, and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.
C. Laminated Glass with Intumescent Interlayers: Laminated glass made from multiple
plies of uncoated, ultraclear float glass; with intumescent interlayers; and complying
with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc.
b. Pilkington North America.
c. Technical Glass Products.
D. Double Glazing Units with Clear Gel Fill: Double glazing units made from two lites of
uncoated, fully tempered, ultraclear float glass; with a perimeter edge seal enclosing a
cavity filled with optically clear, intumescent gel; and complying with 16 CFR 1201,
Category II.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following or approved equal:
a. SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions.
2.5 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Provide glazing gaskets, glazing sealants, glazing tapes, setting blocks, spacers, edge
blocks, and other glazing accessories that are compatible with glazing products and
each other and are approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant
glazing products with which products are used for applications and fire-protection
ratings indicated.
B. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Rated Glazing Products: Neutral-curing silicone glazing
sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. Comply
with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants
suitable for applications indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc.
c. Tremco Incorporated.
2. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from
manufacturer's full range.
SECTION 088813 - FIRE-RESISTANT GLAZING Page 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING
A. Use methods approved by testing agencies that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing
products.
B. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants,
gaskets, and other glazing materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated,
including those in referenced glazing publications.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass
with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and
impair performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined
by preconstruction testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course
of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass
lites.
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Immediately after installation, remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other
masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a
month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.
1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass
manufacturer.
C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.
END OF SECTION 08 88 13
SECTION 089116 - OPERABLE WALL LOUVERS Page 1
SECTION 08 91 16 - OPERABLE WALL LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes operable, extruded-aluminum louvers.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles,
and spacing.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring for motorized operable
louvers.
C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranties.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on
which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified,
as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided,
except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.
B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and related components for motor-
operated louvers that are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA
standards If using motorized operated louvers only.
SECTION 089116 - OPERABLE WALL LOUVERS Page 2
2.2 OPERABLE EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A. Louver Construction and Operation: Provide operable louvers with extruded-aluminum
frames and blades of not less than 0.080-inch nominal thickness, and with operating
mechanisms to suit louver sizes. See Architectural plans and mechanical plans for
types.
1. Hand operation with push bars.
2. Crank operation with removable-crank operator in sill or jamb.
3. Chain operation with tension spring, wall clip, pull chain, and 160 deg F fusible
link.
4. Motor operation: See Mechanical Plans.
B. Single-Blade Operable Louver:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Construction Specialties, Inc.
b. Ruskin Company.
c. Vent Products Co., Inc.
2. Louver Depth: 4 inches.
3. Blade Type: Drainable.
4. Accessories: Equip louvers as follows:
a. Vinyl blade-edge gaskets for each louver blade.
5. Louver Performance Ratings:
a. Free Area: Not less than 7.0 sq. ft. for 48-inch-wide by 48-inch-high louver.
a. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: See Mechanical Plans.
b. Air Performance: See Mechanical Plans.
6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.3 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.
1. Screen Location: Interior face unless otherwise indicated.
2. Screening Type: Bird screening, except where insect screening is indicated.
B. Louver Screen Frames: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which
screens are attached.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
SECTION 089116 - OPERABLE WALL LOUVERS Page 3
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005, with temper as required for
forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
1. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
D. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion
anchors, fabricated from stainless-steel components, with allowable load or strength
design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or
equal to the design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M
conducted by a qualified testing agency.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with
ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material
tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with f illet welds
concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes
bolted connections between frame members necessary.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in color
coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Color: Match adjacent surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to
screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight
connection.
SECTION 089116 - OPERABLE WALL LOUVERS Page 4
C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers,
as indicated.
D. Protect unpainted galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with
concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying
a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets
or nonmetallic flashing.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Test operable louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units that
comply with requirements.
B. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction, so no evidence remains
of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by
Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
END OF SECTION 08 91 16
SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS Page 1
SECTION 08 91 19 - FIXED LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fixed extruded-aluminum louvers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 08 11 13 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal
doors.
2. Section 08 14 16 "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in flush wood doors.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles,
and spacing.
C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on tests performed according to AMCA 500-L.
B. Sample warranties.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on
which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified,
as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided,
except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.
SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS Page 2
2.2 FIXED EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS
A. Horizontal Drainable-Blade Louver:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Construction Specialties, Inc.
b. Ruskin Company.
c. Vent Products Co., Inc.
2. Louver Depth: 4 inches.
3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch.
4. Mullion Type: Exposed.
5. Louver Performance Ratings:
a. Free Area: Not less than 7.0 sq. ft. for 48-inch-wide by 48-inch-high louver.
b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than 900 fpm.
a. Air Performance: See Mechanical Plans.
b. Air Performance: See Mechanical Plans.
6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2.3 LOUVER SCREENS
A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver or as required by plans. See
Architectural window details for required screen locations
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.
2. Screening Type: Bird screening, except where insect screening is indicated.
B. Louver Screen Frames: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which
screens are attached.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005, with temper as required for
forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.
C. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
1. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.
3. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.
D. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion
anchors, fabricated from stainless-steel components, with allowable load or strength
design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or
SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS Page 3
equal to the design load, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M
conducted by a qualified testing agency.
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with
ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material
tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.
B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds
concealed from view unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes
bolted connections between frame members necessary.
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with
AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 50 percent PVDF resin by weight in color
coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with
coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Color: Match adjacent surfaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to
screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight
connection.
C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers,
as indicated.
D. Protect unpainted galvanized- and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with
concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying
a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets
or nonmetallic flashing.
SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS Page 4
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction, so no evidence remains
of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by
Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
END OF SECTION 08 91 19
SECTION 092116.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES Page 1
SECTION 09 21 16.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of
assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by
a testing and inspecting agency.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES
A. Basis of Design: UL U428. All gypsum board shaft wall components are to comply with
products and assemblies indicated in basis of design assembly.
B. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated on drawings.
C. STC Rating: As indicated on drawings.
D. Gypsum Shaftliner Board:
1. Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner
panels with paper faces, 1 inch thick, with double beveled long edges.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
2) National Gypsum Company.
3) USG Corporation.
E. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
SECTION 092116.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES Page 2
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
b. National Gypsum Company.
c. USG Corporation.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
F. Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing, General: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements
for metal unless otherwise indicated and complying with requirements for fire-
resistance-rated assembly indicated.
G. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive, corner, and end members as
follows:
1. Depth: As indicated on drawings.
2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.
H. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard
long-leg length, but at least 2 inches long and matching studs in depth.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.
I. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and
contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-
rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to
accommodate depth of studs.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. ClarkDietrich.
b. Fire Trak Corp.
c. SCAFCO Steel Stud Company.
J. Finish Panels: Gypsum board as specified in Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board.".
K. Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board."
2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes as
specified in Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft
wall assembly manufacturer's written instructions for application indicated.
B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand
loading conditions imposed on shaft wall assemblies without exceeding allowable
SECTION 092116.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES Page 3
design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are
embedded.
D. Reinforcing: Galvanized-steel reinforcing strips with 0.033-inch minimum thickness of
base metal (uncoated).
E. Acoustical Sealant: Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install gypsum board shaft wall assemblies to comply with requirements of
fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated and manufacturer's written installation
instructions.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or
mold damaged.
C. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft wall assemblies
so both elements of Work remain complete and undamaged.
D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with shaft wall assemblies; frame both sides of
expansion joints with furring and other support.
E. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft wall assemblies around openings
and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of
fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, wall-mounted door stops, and
similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft wall assembly framing.
1. Reinforcing: Provide where items attach directly to shaft wall assembly as
indicated on Drawings; accurately position and secure behind at least one layer
of face panel.
F. Penetrations: Install supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and
fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons and floor
indicators, and similar items.
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of
panels while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.
H. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated.
I. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft
wall assemblies.
J. Sound-Rated Shaft Wall Assemblies: Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical
sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and
penetrations within each assembly.
SECTION 092116.23 - GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES Page 4
K. Gypsum Board Cants: At projections into shaft exceeding 4 inches, install gypsum
board cants covering tops of projections.
L. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not
more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
M. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
END OF SECTION 09 21 16.23
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 1
SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.
2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and
tracks.
B. Evaluation reports for firestop tracks post-installed anchors and power-actuated
fasteners.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that
framing members are certified according to the product-certification program of the
Certified Steel Stud Association or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that
incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent
testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E 90
and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 2
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645.
1. Steel Studs and Tracks:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following or approved equal::
1) ClarkDietrich.
2) MarinoWARE.
3) MBA Building Supplies.
b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.
c. Depth: As indicated on Drawings 1-5/8 inches.
C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1. Clip System (when applicable to the project) : Clips designed for use in head-of-
wall deflection conditions that provide a positive attachment of studs to tracks
while allowing 2-inch minimum vertical movement.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following or approved equal:
1) ClarkDietrich.
2) MarinoWARE.
3) Steel Construction Systems.
2. Single Long-Leg Track System (when applicable to the project): ASTM C 645 top
track with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs,
installed with studs friction fit into top track and with continuous bridging located
within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.
3. Double-Track System (when applicable to the project): ASTM C 645 top outer
tracks, inside track with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated
for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track sized to friction-fit over inner
track.
4. Deflection Track (when applicable to the project): Steel sheet top track
manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing
resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated
for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following or approved equal:
1) ClarkDietrich.
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 3
2) MarinoWARE.
3) MBA Building Supplies.
D. Firestop Tracks (when applicable to the project): Top track manufactured to allow
partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining
continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than
indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. ClarkDietrich.
b. MarinoWARE.
c. Steel Construction Systems.
E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate (when applicable to the project): Steel sheet for blocking
and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. ClarkDietrich.
b. MarinoWARE.
c. Steel Construction Systems.
2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.
F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging (when applicable to the project): Steel, 0.0538-inch
minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. ClarkDietrich.
b. MarinoWARE.
c. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized
steel.
G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels (when applicable to the project): ASTM C 645.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. ClarkDietrich.
b. MarinoWARE.
c. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch.
3. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 4
H. Resilient Furring Channels (when applicable to the project): 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet
members designed to reduce sound transmission.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. ClarkDietrich.
b. MarinoWARE.
c. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
2. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels (when applicable to the project): 0.053-inch uncoated-
steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum
uncoated-steel thickness of 0.0329 inch.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.
J. Z-Shaped Furring (when applicable to the project): With slotted or nonslotted web, face
flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal
thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal::
a. ClarkDietrich.
b. MarinoWARE.
c. MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter
wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01 as appropriate for the
substrate.
a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure.
b. Type: Torque-controlled, expansion anchor or adhesive anchor.
c. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to
comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless
otherwise indicated.
d. Material for Exterior or Interior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is
Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts,
ASTM F 594.
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 5
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in
diameter.
D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.
E. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-
metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Cold-Rolled Channels (when applicable to the project): 0.0538-inch uncoated-
steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.
2. Steel Studs and Tracks (when applicable to the project): ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0269 inch.
b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels (when applicable to the project):
ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch.
4. Resilient Furring Channels (when applicable to the project): 1/2-inch-deep
members designed to reduce sound transmission.
a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt
felt), nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud
size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 6
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that
apply to framing installation.
B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections
securely fastened.
C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services,
heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater
than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at
exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated
to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate
partitions above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,
install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of
finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door
frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum
1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in
finished assembly.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills
of openings to match framing required above door heads.
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-
rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous
from floor to underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-
resistance-rated assembly indicated.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly
indicated.
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 7
6. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent
to arcs.
b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally
along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs,
place studs 6 inches o.c.
E. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry
attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
F. Z-Shaped Furring Members:
1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and
hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to
wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or
powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide f lange of furring members to wall with short
flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short
flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space
second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not
more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.3 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater
than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated
by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by struct ural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within
ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective
means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces
hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension
members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 8
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling
loads within performance limits established by referenced installation
standards.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to
inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to
deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by
attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure
and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause
hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger
inserts that extend through forms.
7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in
12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and
transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION 09 22 16
SECTION 092400 - CEMENT PLASTERING Page 1
SECTION 09 24 00 - CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior vertical plasterwork (stucco).
2. Exterior horizontal and nonvertical plasterwork (stucco).
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat and for each color and texture
specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide cement plaster assemblies identical
to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119 by a
qualified testing agency.
2.2 METAL LATH
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, cold-rolled carbon-steel sheet with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Alabama Metal Industries Company; a Gibraltar Industries company.
b. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
c. ClarkDietrich.
2. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Flat, 2.5 lb/sq. yd..
3. Flat-Rib Lath: Rib depth of not more than 1/8 inch, 2.75 lb/sq. yd..
4. 3/8-Inch Rib Lath: 3.4 lb/sq. yd.
B. Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790a, Type I, Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable paper.
1. Provide paper-backed lath unless otherwise indicated.
SECTION 092400 - CEMENT PLASTERING Page 2
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063, and coordinate depth of trim and accessories
with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
B. Metal Accessories:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Alabama Metal Industries Company; a Gibraltar Industries company.
b. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
c. ClarkDietrich.
2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet,
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 zinc coating.
3. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip
galvanized-zinc coating.
4. External- (Outside-) Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating.
5. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.
a. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise
indicated.
b. Smallnose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners.
c. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated
stiffening rib; use on columns and for finishing unit masonry corners.
d. Bullnose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch minimum, with expanded flanges; use
at locations indicated on Drawings.
6. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-
edged style; with expanded flanges.
7. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-
type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with
perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.
8. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded
pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges.
9. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized)
steel; formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable
from 1/4 to 5/8 inch wide; with perforated flanges.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of
affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.
C. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: ASTM C 1063.
D. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-
inch diameter unless otherwise indicated.
SECTION 092400 - CEMENT PLASTERING Page 3
2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems
formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over cement
plaster base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats
for acrylic-based finishes.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Dryvit Systems, Inc.
b. Senergy; BASF Corp.
c. Sto Corp.
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.6 PLASTER MIXES
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.
1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least
two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber
quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious
materials.
B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat
plasterwork as follows:
1. Portland and Plastic Cement Mixes:
a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1
part portland cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of
cementitious material.
b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1
part portland cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious
material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
C. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Unit Masonry and Concrete: Single base (scratch) coat
for two-coat plasterwork on low-absorption plaster bases as follows:
1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and
0 to 3/4 part lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious
material.
2. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
D. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For ready-mixed finish-coat plasters or acrylic-
based finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
SECTION 092400 - CEMENT PLASTERING Page 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Prepare smooth, solid substrates for plaster according to ASTM C 926.
B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for
design designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.
3.2 INSTALLING METAL LATH
A. Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.
3.3 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.
B. Reinforcement for External (Outside) Corners:
1. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement or cornerbead at exterior
locations.
2. Install cornerbead at interior locations.
C. Control Joints: Locate as indicated on Drawings.
3.4 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.
B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete substrates for direct
application of plaster.
C. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for
three-coat plasterwork with 3/4-inch total thickness, as follows:
1. Portland and plastic cement mixes.
D. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for
three-coat plasterwork and having 1/2-inch total thickness, as follows:
1. Portland and plastic cement mixes.
E. Walls; Base-Coat Mix: For base (scratch) coat, for two-coat plasterwork and having
3/8-inch thickness on masonry or 1/4-inch thickness on concrete, as follows:
1. Portland and plastic cement mix.
F. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mix: For base (scratch) coat, for two-coat plasterwork and having
1/4-inch thickness on concrete, as follows:
SECTION 092400 - CEMENT PLASTERING Page 5
1. Portland and plastic cement mix.
G. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float finish to match Architect's sample.
H. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats,
and sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Concealed Exterior Plasterwork: Where plaster application is used as a base for
adhered finishes, omit finish coat.
3.5 PLASTER REPAIRS
A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check
cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to
substrate has failed.
END OF SECTION 09 24 00
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD Page 1
SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.
3. Tile backing panels.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each texture finish indicated on same backing indicated for Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction
identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified
according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each
area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
b. National Gypsum Company.
c. USG Corporation.
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD Page 2
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
b. National Gypsum Company.
c. USG Corporation.
2. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
b. National Gypsum Company.
c. USG Corporation.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
D. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-
resistant core and paper surfaces.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
b. National Gypsum Company.
c. USG Corporation.
2. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to
ASTM D 3274.
2.4 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD
2.5 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS
A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard
edges.
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD Page 3
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
b. National Gypsum Company.
c. USG Corporation.
2. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type.
B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with fiberglass mat
laminated to both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
b. National Gypsum Company.
c. USG Corporation.
2. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type.
2.6 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with
manufacturer's standard edges.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
b. National Gypsum Company.
c. USG Corporation.
2. Core: 1/2 inch, regular type.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to
ASTM D 3274.
B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325, with
manufacturer's standard edges.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. National Gypsum Company.
c. USG Corporation.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to
ASTM D 3274.
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD Page 4
2.7 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or
paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.
f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc.
2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and
removable strip covering slot opening.
2.8 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface
areas, use setting-type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,
fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim
accessories.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping
compound.
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD Page 5
D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting -type taping compound and setting-
type, sandable topping compound.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board
manufacturer.
E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel
manufacturer.
2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
2.9 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards
and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members
from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size
recommended by panel manufacturer.
D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from
glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of
assembly.
E. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex
sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound
transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as
demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. Pecora Corporation.
c. USG Corporation.
F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation."
G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07 26 00 "Vapor Retarders."
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD Page 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and
mold damaged.
B. Comply with ASTM C 840.
C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with
edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting
structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
D. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's writ ten instructions.
E. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically
indicated as not intended to receive tape.
G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.
3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.
4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23
"Interior Painting."
5. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23
"Interior Painting."
H. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written
instructions for use as exposed soffit board.
I. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD Page 7
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
END OF SECTION 09 29 00
SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING Page 1
SECTION 09 30 13 - CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ceramic mosaic tile.
2. Quarry tile.
3. Porcelain tile.
4. Glazed wall tile.
5. Tile backing panels.
6. Waterproof membrane for thinset applications.
7. Crack isolation membrane.
8. Metal edge strips.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of
amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's supervisor for Project holds the International Masonry Institute's
Foreman Certification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard-grade tile that complies with
ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING Page 2
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with
ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards
referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and
other requirements specified.
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Ceramic Tile Type: Factory-mounted ceramic mosaic tile.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers:
B. Ceramic Tile Type: Square-edged quarry tile.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers:
C. Ceramic Tile Type: Porcelain tile.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers:
D. Ceramic Tile Type: Glazed wall tile.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers:
E. Accessories: Provide vitreous china accessories of type and size indicated, suitable for
installing by same method as used for adjoining wall tile.
2.3 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition
between adjacent floor finishes.
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch
above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit
height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.
2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS
A. Fiber-Cement Backer Board: ASTM C 1288.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. CertainTeed Corporation.
b. James Hardie Building Products, Inc.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING Page 3
2.5 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies
with ANSI A118.10 and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application
indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.
B. PVC Sheet: PVC heat-fused on both sides to facings of nonwoven polyester.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Compotite Corporation.
b. Noble Company (The).
2. Nominal Thickness: 0.040 inch.
C. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. ARDEX Americas.
b. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC.
c. MAPEI Corporation.
2.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies
with ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the
manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories
recommended by manufacturer.
B. PVC Sheet: PVC heat-fused on both sides to facings of nonwoven polyester; 0.040-
inch nominal thickness.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
following:
a. Compotite Corporation.
C. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Bostik, Inc.
b. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC.
c. MAPEI Corporation.
2.7 SETTING MATERIALS
A. Modified Dry-Set Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.
SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING Page 4
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC.
b. MAPEI Corporation.
c. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added at
Project site.
3. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
B. Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC.
b. MAPEI Corporation.
c. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
2.8 GROUT MATERIALS
A. High-Performance Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC.
b. MAPEI Corporation.
c. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
2. Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC.
b. MAPEI Corporation.
c. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland
cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting
materials for installations indicated.
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness,
metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for
flooring applications; nickel silver exposed-edge material.
SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING Page 5
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Blanke Corporation.
b. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc.
c. Schluter Systems L.P.
C. Floor Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not
change color or appearance of grout.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Bonsal American, an Oldcastle company.
b. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.
c. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other
substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness
tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply
with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with
thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically
recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.
B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced
mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward
drains.
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended
and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as
those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended,
either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING Page 6
3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for
TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of
the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are
referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and
apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
a. Exterior tile floors.
b. Tile floors in wet areas.
c. Tile swimming pool decks.
d. Tile floors in laundries.
e. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.
f. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles.
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form
complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work
neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint
alignments.
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and
other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed
tile edges.
E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting bed thickness so that
tiles are flush.
F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work
and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile
work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint
widths unless otherwise indicated.
G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated refer to interior design specifications manual
and brand standards for approved manufacturers:
H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions
indicated.
I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including
control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation
of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly
above them.
SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING Page 7
J. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or
other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
K. Floor Sealer: Apply floor sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints,
remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
L. Install tile backing panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and
manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.
M. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written
instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded
securely to substrate.
N. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's
written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely
to substrate.
END OF SECTION 09 30 13
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 1
SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior
ceilings.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. CertainTeed Corporation.
3. USG Corporation.
B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Manufacturer's standard panels according to
ASTM E 1264.
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 2
C. Classification: <Insert type, form, and pattern>.
D. Color: [White] [As selected from manufacturer's full range] [Match Architect's
sample] [As indicated by manufacturer's designation] [As indicated on Drawings]
[As indicated in a schedule] <Insert color>.
E. Light Reflectance (LR): <Insert LR>.
F. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): <Insert CAC>.
G. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): <Insert NRC>.
H. Articulation Class (AC): <Insert AC>.
I. Edge/Joint Detail: [Square] [Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-
system members] [Flush reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system
members].
J. Thickness: [1/8 inch] [7/16 inch] [9/16 inch] [5/8 inch] [3/4 inch] [7/8 inch] [1 inch] [1-
1/2 inches] [2 inches] [3 inches] [As indicated on Drawings].
K. Modular Size: [24 by 24 inches] [24 by 48 inches] [24 by 72 inches] [24 by 96
inches] [48 by 48 inches] [As indicated on Drawings].
2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. CertainTeed Corporation.
3. USG Corporation.
B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal
suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M.
C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners
roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-
dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps
on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
D. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross
runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated,
or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 9/16-inch-wide metal
caps on flanges.
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 3
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in
ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with
seismic design requirements.
B. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard hold-down.
C. Impact Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-clip system designed to absorb impact
forces against acoustical panels.
D. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed to secure acoustical
panels in place during a seismic event.
2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. CertainTeed Corporation.
3. USG Corporation.
B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply
with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish,
and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at
borders unless otherwise indicated.
B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's
written instructions.
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS Page 4
B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area
and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical
legs of moldings before they are installed.
2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
3. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. Install panels with pattern running in one direction parallel to long axis of
space.
END OF SECTION 09 51 13
SECTION 095436 - SUSPENDED DECORATIVE GRIDS Page 1
SECTION 09 54 36 - SUSPENDED DECORATIVE GRIDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes rigid, open-frame, suspended grids and suspension systems for
ceilings.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, and coordinated with
each other, using input from installers of the items involved.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
2.2 SUSPENDED DECORATIVE GRIDS, GENERAL
A. Sheet Metal: Selected for surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface
blemishes where exposed to view in finished unit. Do not use materials whose exposed
surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, variations in flatness exceeding
those permitted by referenced standards for stretcher-leveled metal sheet, stains,
discolorations, or other imperfections.
SECTION 095436 - SUSPENDED DECORATIVE GRIDS Page 2
B. Grid Fabrication: Components are formed from metal indicated. Manufacturer's
standard units of size, shape, and profile indicated; finished to comply with
requirements indicated.
C. Cover Profiles and Trim: Provide manufacturer's standard cover profiles and trim for
exposed members, and as indicated or required, for edges of grids, at changes in
ceiling height, and for other conditions, of same metal and finish as suspended
decorative grids.
D. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide ceiling manufacturer's standard metal
suspension systems of types and finishes indicated that comply with applicable
ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements. Provide systems complete with runners or beams,
splice sections, connector clips, alignment clips, leveling clips, hangers, molding, trim,
web covers, load-resisting struts, fixture filler pans, clips and adapters, and other
suspension components required to support ceiling units and other ceiling-supported
construction.
E. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in
ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable
load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and
ACI 318, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per
ASTM E 488/E 488M conducted by a qualified testing agency.
2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable f or application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load
capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the
design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified
testing agency.
F. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following
requirements:
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load
indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, Direct Hung, is less than yield stress
of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.
G. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
H. Exposed Metal Edge Moldings, Covers, Trim, and Fixture Filler Panels: Provide
exposed members as indicated or required to conceal edges of and penetrations
through ceiling, to conceal edges of beams, to cover runner webs, for fixture trim and
adapters, for fasciae at changes in ceiling height, and for other conditions; of metal and
finish matching suspended decorative grids unless otherwise indicated.
1. For Circular Penetrations of Ceiling: Fabricate edge moldings to diameter
required to fit penetration exactly.
SECTION 095436 - SUSPENDED DECORATIVE GRIDS Page 3
2.3 ALUMINUM GRID UNITS FOR SUSPENDED DECORATIVE GRIDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Hunter Douglas Architectural Products, Inc.
3. USG Corporation.
B. Aluminum Sheet: Roll-formed aluminum sheet, complying with ASTM B 209; alloy and
temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish
indicated.
1. Sheet Metal Thickness: Not less than 0.018 inch.
C. Beam Grid Module: [8 inches square] [12 inches square] [18 inches square] [24
inches square] [30 inches square] [36 inches square] [48 inches square] [24 by 48
inches] [As indicated on Drawings].
D. Beam Width by Height: [2 by 2 inches] [2 by 4 inches] [3 by 3 inches] [4 by 4
inches] [As indicated on Drawings].
E. Cell Panel Module: [24 inches square] [24 by 48 inches] [As indicated on
Drawings] [Manufacturer's standard].
F. Cell Module: [2 inches square] [3 inches square] [4 inches square] [6 inches
square] [8 inches square] [12 inches square] [As indicated on Drawings].
G. Cell Profile, Width by Height: [3/8 by 2 inches] [3/8 by 4 inches] [9/16 by 2 inches]
[As indicated on Drawings].
H. Finish: [Lacquered mill] [Clear anodized] [Clear mirror anodized] [Painted to match
color indicated by product designation] [Painted to match Architect's sample]
[Painted in color selected from manufacturer's full range] [Bright-reflective
metallic finish selected from manufacturer's full range].
2.4 STEEL GRID UNITS FOR SUSPENDED DECORATIVE GRIDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Hunter Douglas Architectural Products, Inc.
B. Steel Sheet: Commercial-quality, cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet; stretcher leveled; with
protective coating complying with ASTM C 635/C 635M.
1. Painted Finishes: Electrolytic zinc-coated steel complying with
ASTM A 879/A 879M, 04Z coating, surface treatment as recommended by finish
manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.
SECTION 095436 - SUSPENDED DECORATIVE GRIDS Page 4
2. Chemical/Mechanical Finishes: Uncoated steel sheet complying with
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M with luster or bright finish as required by finisher for
applying electroplating or other metallic-finishing processes.
3. Sheet Metal Thickness: Not less than 0.020 inch.
C. Beam Grid Module: [8 inches square] [12 inches square] [18 inches square] [24
inches square] [30 inches square] [36 inches square] [48 inches square] [24 by 48
inches] [As indicated on Drawings].
D. Beam Width by Height: [2 by 2 inches] [2 by 4 inches] [3 by 3 inches] [4 by 4
inches] [As indicated on Drawings].
E. Cell Panel Module: [24 inches square] [24 by 48 inches] [As indicated on
Drawings] [Manufacturer's standard].
F. Cell Module: [1 inch square] [2 inches square] [3 inches square] [4 inches square]
[6 inches square] [8 inches square] [12 inches square] [24 inches square] [As
indicated on Drawings].
G. Cell Profile, Width by Height: [3/8 by 2 inches] [9/16 by 2 inches] [As indicated on
Drawings].
H. Finish: [Painted to match color indicated by product designation] [Painted to
match Architect's sample] [Painted in color selected from manufacturer's full
range] [Plated with metallic finish, as selected from manufacturer's full range]
[Bright-reflective metallic finish selected from manufacturer's full range].
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Measure each installation area and establish layout of suspended decorative grids to
balance border widths at opposite edges of each space. Comply with layout shown on
reflected ceiling plans.
B. Install suspended decorative grids to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic
design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and
CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
C. Install suspended decorative grids in coordination with suspension system and
exposed moldings and trim. Comply with installation tolerances according to CISCA's
"Metal Ceilings Technical Guidelines."
END OF SECTION 09 54 36
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Page 1
SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Vinyl base.
2. Rubber stair accessories.
3. Vinyl molding accessories.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 VINYL BASE
2.2 VINYL BASE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers:
B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic).
1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous).
2. Style and Location: As indicated on drawings.
C. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on drawings.
2.3 RUBBER STAIR ACCESSORIES
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products
according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
C. Stair Nosings:
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Page 2
1. Locations: As indicated on drawings.
2. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on drawings.
2.4 VINYL MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers:
B. Description: Vinyl nosing for carpet, nosing for resilient floor covering, reducer strip for
resilient floor covering & transition strips.
C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.
D. Locations: As indicated on drawings.
E. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on drawings.
2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-
based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by
resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for
resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient
stair-tread manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion
of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces
according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH
scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Page 3
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq.
ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test
areas evenly spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space
where they are to be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by
resilient products.
3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces,
and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops
of adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of
resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with
returns not less than 3 inches in length.
a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with
returns not less than 3 inches in length.
a. Miter corners to minimize open joints.
3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES Page 4
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to
substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor
covering that would otherwise be exposed.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient
products.
B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from resilient stair treads before
applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply two coat(s).
C. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 65 13
SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Page 1
SECTION 09 65 19 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Vinyl composition floor tile.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and pattern specified.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient floor tile, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing
agency.
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers
B. Size: As indicated on drawings.
C. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on drawings.
SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Page 2
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-
based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor
tile manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive
manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.
C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instr uctions to ensure
adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and
hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within
range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5
or more than 9 pH.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq.
ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test
areas evenly spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb
of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install floor tiles until materials are the same temperature as space where they
are to be installed.
1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and
installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by
resilient floor tile.
SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Page 3
3.2 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to
avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1. Lay tiles square with room axis.
C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same
sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked,
chipped, or deformed tiles.
1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and
permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend
floor tiles to center of door openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other
nonpermanent marking device.
G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint
covers, and similar items in installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and
pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile
edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.
H. Adhere floor tiles to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at
joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
I. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before
applying liquid floor polish.
1. Apply two coat(s).
END OF SECTION 09 65 19
SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING Page 1
SECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes modular carpet tile.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture required.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers
Association at the Commercial II certification level.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CARPET TILE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING Page 2
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-
based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to
suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability
requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer
for releasable installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Concrete Slabs:
1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq.
ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test
areas evenly spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of in 24
hours.
b. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and
carpet tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates
pass testing.
B. Wood Subfloors: Verify that underlayment surface is free of irregularities and
substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to
receive carpet tile.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level
cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32
inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other
substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by
adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet
tile.
SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING Page 3
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular
Carpet" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
D. Maintain pile-direction patterns recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or
seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
I. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of
equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection
methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09 68 13
SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING Page 1
SECTION 09 68 16 - SHEET CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Tufted carpet.
2. Woven carpet.
3. Carpet cushion.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture required.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
B. Sample warranties.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers
Association at the Commercial II certification level.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty for Carpet Cushion: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
components of carpet cushion installation that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TUFTED CARPET
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
2.2 WOVEN CARPET
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
2.3 CARPET CUSHION
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
2.4 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-
based formulation provided or recommended by [carpet] [carpet cushion]
manufacturer.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and
subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed
carpet and is recommended or provided by carpet and carpet cushion manufacturers.
C. Tackless Carpet Stripping: W ater-resistant plywood, in strips as required to match
cushion thickness and that comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard."
D. Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet
manufacturer for sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form
secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Concrete Slabs:
1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq.
ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test
areas evenly spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb
of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING Page 3
b. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive,
carpet cushion, and carpet manufacturers. Proceed with installation only
after substrates pass testing.
B. Wood Subfloors: Verify that underlayment surface is free of irregularities and
substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" and with carpet
manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level
cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32
inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other
substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by
adhesive, carpet, and carpet cushion manufacturers.
D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing
carpet.
3.3 CARPET INSTALLATION
A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" and carpet and carpet cushion
manufacturers' written installation instructions for the following:
1. Direct-glue-down installation.
2. Double-glue-down installation.
3. Carpet with attached-cushion installation.
4. Preapplied adhesive installation.
5. Hook-and-loop installation.
6. Stretch-in installation.
7. Stair installation.
B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written instructions and Shop Drawings for seam
locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile.
At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.
1. Stretch-in Carpet Installation: Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle
with carpet seams.
C. Install as indicated on Drawings.
D. Install borders with mitered corner seams.
E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.
SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING Page 4
F. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in
furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or
seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
G. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
H. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future
cutting by repeating on carpet as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining
marking device.
I. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of
equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection
methods recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and carpet cushion and
adhesive manufacturers.
END OF SECTION 09 68 16
SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS Page 1
SECTION 09 72 00 - WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Vinyl wall covering.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each type of wall covering and for each color, pattern, texture, and finish
specified, full width by 36-inch- long in size.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings
applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below
by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.
2.2 VINYL WALL COVERING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
B. Description: Provide mildew-resistant products in rolls from same production run and
complying with the following:
SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS Page 2
1. FS CCC-W-408D and CFFA-W -101-D for Type I, Light-Duty products.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall
covering and substrate application indicated and as recommended in writing by wall-
covering manufacturer.
B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in Section 09 91 23
"Interior Painting" and recommended in writing by primer/sealer and wall-covering
manufacturers for intended substrate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt,
oil, grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers.
C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of
flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.
1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete
masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
2. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. Prime with
primer recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering
manufacturer.
3. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply primer recommended in writing by
primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.
4. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer
manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.
5. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.
D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell
finish with fine sandpaper.
E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture
trims, and similar items.
F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation
areas not less than 24 hours before installation.
3.2 WALL-COVERING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated.
SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS Page 3
B. Install wall covering without lifted or curling edges and without visible shrinkage.
C. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt
seams without overlaps or gaps between strips.
D. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other
defects.
E. Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.
F. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture
trims, and similar items.
END OF SECTION 09 72 00
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 1
SECTION 09 91 13 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following exterior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Fiber-cement board.
3. Clay masonry.
4. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
5. Steel and iron.
6. Galvanized metal.
7. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
8. Stainless steel.
9. Wood.
10. Plastic.
11. Portland cement plaster (stucco).
12. Gypsum board.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
B. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
C. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85
degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
D. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and
application instructions.
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2. PPG Paints.
3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed
in the Exterior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed
in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by
topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture
meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent.
3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.
4. Wood: 15 percent.
5. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.
6. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with
existing finishes and primers.
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 3
D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems
indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are
removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of
size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation
and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in
"MPI Manual."
B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to
work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by
Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged
or defaced painted surfaces.
3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4).
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 4
B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. Latex Floor Paint System:
a. Prime Coat: Floor paint, latex, matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Floor paint, latex, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum MPI Gloss Level 3).
C. Cement Board Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4).
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
D. Clay Masonry Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4).
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
E. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4).
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
F. Steel and Iron Substrates:
1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based.
b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (MPI Gloss Level 3).
d. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss
(MPI Gloss Level 5).
e. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
2. Aluminum Paint System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal.
b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint, matching topcoat.
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 5
c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint.
G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4).
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
H. Aluminum Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4).
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
I. Stainless-Steel Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4).
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
J. Wood Substrates: Exposed framing.
1. Latex over Latex Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4).
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
K. Wood Substrates: [Wood trim] [Architectural woodwork] [Doors] [Windows] [Wood
board siding] [and] [wood fences].
1. Latex over Latex Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4).
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING Page 6
2. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd for exterior wood.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4).
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
L. Wood Substrates: Wood-based panel products.
1. Latex over Latex Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4).
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
M. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, water based.
b. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based.
c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4).
f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
g. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
N. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4).
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
O. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex for exterior wood (reduced).
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4).
e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
END OF SECTION 09 91 13
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 1
SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the
following interior substrates:
1. Concrete.
2. Cement board.
3. Clay masonry.
4. Concrete masonry units (CMUs).
5. Steel and iron.
6. Galvanized metal.
7. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
8. Wood.
9. Plastic.
10. Gypsum board.
11. Plaster.
12. Spray-textured ceilings.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85
degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85
degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and
application instructions.
1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product
category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
2. PPG Paints.
3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed
in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed
in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by
topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture
meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent.
3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent.
4. Wood: 15 percent.
5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
6. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with
existing finishes and primers.
D. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 3
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems
indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are
removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of
size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation
and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in
"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."
B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp
lines and color breaks.
3.4 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
of 65 units at 60 degrees).
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss
Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 4).
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 4
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
B. Concrete Substrates, Traffic Surfaces:
1. Latex Floor Enamel System:
a. Prime Coat: Floor paint, latex, matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Floor paint, latex, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum MPI Gloss Level 3).
C. Cement Board Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
of 65 units at 60 degrees).
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss
Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
D. Clay Masonry Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkali resistant, water based.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
of 65 units at 60 degrees).
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 5
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss
Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
E. CMU Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
of 65 units at 60 degrees).
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss
Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
F. Steel Substrates:
1. Latex System, Alkyd Primer:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 6
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
of 65 units at 60 degrees).
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss
Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
3. Aluminum Paint System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, quick dry, for metal.
b. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Aluminum paint.
G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
of 65 units at 60 degrees).
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss
Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
H. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:
1. Latex System:
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 7
a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
of 65 units at 60 degrees).
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss
Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
I. Wood Substrates: Exposed framing.
1. Latex over Latex Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
of 65 units at 60 degrees).
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss
Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
J. Wood Substrates:
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 8
1. Latex over Latex Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
of 65 units at 60 degrees).
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss
Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
K. Wood Substrates:
1. Latex over Latex Primer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
of 65 units at 60 degrees).
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss
Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 9
L. Plastic Substrates:
1. Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
of 65 units at 60 degrees).
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss
Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
M. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates:
1. Latex, Flat System: Spray applied.
a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, flat, matching topcoat.
b. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
2. Latex System: Spray applied.
a. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
of 65 units at 60 degrees).
N. [Gypsum Board] [and] [Plaster] Substrates:
1. Latex over Latex Sealer System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior.
b. Prime Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 2).
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING Page 10
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 3).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior (MPI Gloss Level 4).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
i. Topcoat: Latex, interior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss
of 65 units at 60 degrees).
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss
Level 1).
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2).
e. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3).
f. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 4).
g. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5).
h. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
END OF SECTION 09 91 23
SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING Page 1
SECTION 09 93 00 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood stains and transparent
finishes on the following substrates:
1. Exterior Substrates:
a. Exposed glued-laminated beams and columns.
b. Exposed framing.
c. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry or woodwork).
d. Wood-based panel products.
2. Interior Substrates:
a. Exposed glued-laminated beams and columns.
b. Exposed framing.
c. Dressed lumber (finish carpentry or woodwork).
d. Wood-based panel products.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85
degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and
application instructions.
1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product
category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
B. Samples: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co.
SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING Page 2
2. PPG Paints.
3. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed
in wood finish systems schedules for the product category indicated.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. Stain Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Exterior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured
with an electronic moisture meter.
C. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 15 percent, when measured
with an electronic moisture meter.
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with
existing finishes and primers.
E. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates
and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING Page 3
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are
removable. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and finishing.
1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written
instructions for each substrate condition and as specified.
1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse
thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil
marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing.
2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew
removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in
"MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."
B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush
marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage
by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave
in an undamaged condition.
B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged
or defaced finished wood surfaces.
3.5 EXTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Wood Substrates: Exposed framing.
1. Clear, Two-Component Polyurethane Varnish System:
a. Prime Coat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two component, matching
topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two component,
matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two component (MPI Gloss
Level 6 or 7).
B. Wood Substrates:
1. Clear, Two-Component Polyurethane Varnish System:
SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING Page 4
a. Prime Coat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two component, matching
topcoat.
b. Topcoat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two component (MPI Gloss
Level 6 or 7).
C. Wood Substrates: Wood-based panel products.
1. Solid-Color, Solvent-Based Stain System:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd for exterior wood.
b. Intermediate Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, solid hide, matching
topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, solid hide.
2. Semitransparent Stain System:
a. Prime Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semitransparent, matching
topcoat.
b. Topcoat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semitransparent.
3. Varnish over Stain System:
a. Stain Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semitransparent.
b. First Intermediate Coat: Varnish matching topcoat.
c. Second Intermediate Coat: Varnish matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Varnish, with UV inhibitor, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5).
e. Topcoat: Varnish, with UV inhibitor, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
4. Varnish System:
a. Prime Coat: Varnish matching topcoat.
b. First Intermediate Coat: Varnish matching topcoat.
c. Second Intermediate Coat: Varnish matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Varnish, with UV inhibitor, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 5).
e. Topcoat: Varnish, with UV inhibitor, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
f. Topcoat: Varnish, marine spar, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 7).
D. Wood Substrates: Traffic surfaces
1. Deck Stain over Wood Preservative System:
a. Preservative Coat: Preservative, for exterior wood.
b. Intermediate Coat: Stain, for exterior wood decks, matching topcoat.
c. Top coat: Stain, for exterior wood decks.
2. Deck Stain System:
a. Prime Coat: Stain, for exterior wood decks, matching topcoat.
b. Top coat: Stain, for exterior wood decks.
3.6 INTERIOR WOOD -FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Wood Substrates: Exposed framing.
SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING Page 5
1. Water-Based Varnish over Stain System:
a. Stain Coat: Stain, semitransparent, for interior wood.
b. First Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
c. Second Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, satin (MPI Gloss Level 4).
e. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
2. Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System:
a. Stain Coat: Stain, semitransparent, for interior wood.
b. First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
c. Second Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil modified, satin (MPI Gloss
Level 4).
e. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil modified, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
3. Polyurethane Varnish System:
a. Prime Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil modified, satin (MPI Gloss
Level 4).
d. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil modified, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
4. Clear, Two-Component Polyurethane System:
a. Prime Coat: Two-component polyurethane matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Two-component polyurethane matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two component (MPI Gloss
Level 6 or MPI Gloss Level 7).
B. Wood Substrates:
1. Semitransparent Stain System:
a. Prime Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semitransparent, matching
topcoat.
b. Topcoat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semitransparent.
2. Water-Based Varnish over Stain System:
a. Stain Coat: Stain, semitransparent, for interior wood.
b. First Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
c. Second Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, satin (MPI Gloss Level 4).
e. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
3. Water-Based Varnish System:
a. Prime Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, satin (MPI Gloss Level 4).
d. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING Page 6
e. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
4. Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System:
a. Stain Coat: Stain, semitransparent, for interior wood.
b. First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
c. Second Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil modified, satin (MPI Gloss
Level 4).
e. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil modified, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
5. Polyurethane Varnish System:
a. Prime Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil modified, satin (MPI Gloss
Level 4).
d. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil modified, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
6. Clear, Two-Component Polyurethane System:
a. Prime Coat: Two-component polyurethane matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Two-component polyurethane matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Varnish, aliphatic polyurethane, two component (MPI Gloss
Level 6 or MPI Gloss Level 7).
C. Wood Substrates:
1. Semitransparent Stain System:
a. Prime Coat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semitransparent, matching
topcoat.
b. Topcoat: Stain, exterior, solvent based, semitransparent.
2. Water-Based Varnish over Stain System:
a. Stain Coat: Stain, semitransparent, for interior wood.
b. First Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
c. Second Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, satin (MPI Gloss Level 4).
e. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
f. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
3. Water-Based Varnish System:
a. Prime Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Water-based varnish matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, satin (MPI Gloss Level 4).
d. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
e. Topcoat: Varnish, water based, clear, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6).
4. Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System:
a. Stain Coat: Stain, semitransparent, for interior wood.
b. First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
c. Second Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING Page 7
d. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil modified, satin (MPI Gloss
Level 4).
e. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil modified, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
5. Polyurethane Varnish System:
a. Prime Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
b. Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.
c. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil modified, satin (MPI Gloss
Level 4).
d. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil modified, gloss (MPI Gloss
Level 6).
END OF SECTION 09 93 00
SECTION 099726 - CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS Page 1
SECTION 09 97 26 - CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and application of cementitious coating systems
on concrete and masonry
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: In each color and gloss of topcoat.
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, not less than 8 inches square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Material certificates.
B. Product test reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following or approved equal:
1. BASF Corporation.
2. Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company.
3. MAPEI Corporation.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed
in the Cementitious Coating Schedule for the paint category indicated.
2.2 CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS
A. Polymer-Modified Cementitious Coating: Containing portland cement, polymer, and
hydrated lime or aggregates.
SECTION 099726 - CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS Page 2
1. Compressive Strength: Not less than 3500 psi at 28 days according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
2. Tensile Strength: Not less than 350 psi at 28 days according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Other Materials: Provide crack fillers, block fillers, and related materials that are
compatible with cementitious finish-coat materials and substrates indicated, under
conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on
testing and field experience.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with
requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and
surfaces are dry.
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates
and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for mixing and preparing materials and
as applicable to substrates indicated.
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to
be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and coating.
1. After completing coating operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil,
grease, incompatible coatings, and loose substrate materials.
D. Cementitious and Masonry Surfaces: Remove release agents, curing compounds,
efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of
surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Crack Repair: Fill cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions before coating
surfaces.
SECTION 099726 - CEMENTITIOUS COATINGS Page 3
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.
B. Apply coating to achieve material thickness as recommended in writing by
manufacturer, but not less than the following:
1. First Coat: Apply polymer-modified cementitious coating material at the rate of 2
lb/sq. yd. to achieve a total cured thickness of 25 mils.
2. Second Coat: Apply polymer-modified cementitious coating material at the rate of
1 lb/sq. yd. to achieve a total cured thickness of 15 mils.
C. On previously coated surfaces, apply coating to achieve material thickness as
recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than the following:
1. Apply polymer-modified cementitious coating material at the rate of 1 lb/sq. yd. to
achieve a total cured thickness of 15 mils.
3.4 CEMENTITIOUS COATING SCHEDULE
A. Above-Grade Concrete and Masonry:
1. Polymer-Modified Cementitious Coating:
a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer.
c. Topcoat: Polymer-modified cementitious coating.
END OF SECTION 09 97 26
SECTION 10 21 13.14 - STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS
1. GENERAL
1. SUMMARY
A. Section include s stainless-steel toilet compartments
configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens .
2. ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans,
elevations, sections, details, and attachment details.
C. Samples for each type of toilet compartment material indica
ted.
3. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
4. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
2. PRODUCTS
1. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable
provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments
designa ted as accessible.
2. STAINLESS-STEEL TOILET CO MPARTMENTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide products by one of the following or approved equal:
1. Accur ate Partitions Corp., an ASI Group Company .
2. American Sanitary Partition Corporation.
3. Global Partit ions Corp., an ASI Group Company .
B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.
C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung flat panel .
D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal
facing sheets pressure laminated to core material; w ith continuous, interlockin g molding strip or
lapped-and-formed edge closures; corners secu red by welding or clips and exposed welds
ground smooth. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, sta ins,
discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other im perfections.
1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-
deadening honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide
finished thickness of 1 inch for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches for pilasters.
2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provid e concealed internal
reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units of size and material adequate for panel to
withstand applied downward load on grab bar of at least 250 lbf , when tested according to
ASTM F 446, without deformation of panel.
3. Tapping Reinfor cement: Provide concealed
reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching
items to units.
E. Urinal-Screen Construction:
1. Flat-Panel Urinal Screen: Matching panel
construction.
F. Facing Sheets and Closures: Stainles s-steel sheet of nomin
al thicknesses as follows:
1. Pilasters, Braced at Both Ends: Manufacturer's
standard thickness, but not less than 0.038 inch.
2. Pilasters, Unbraced at One End: Manufacturer's
standard thickness, but not less than 0.050 inch.
3. Panels: Manu facturer's standard thickness, but not
less than 0.031 inch.
4. Doors: Manufacturer's standard thick n ess, but not
less than 0.031 inch.
5. Flat-Panel Urinal Screens: Thickness matching the
panels.
G. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless-steel sheet,
not les s than 0.031-inch nominal thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware.
H. Brackets (Fittings):
1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets; chrome-plated
zamac .
I. Stainless-Steel Finish: No. 4 bright, directional polish on
exposed faces. Protect expos ed surfac es from damage by application of strippable, tem porary
protective covering before shipment.
3. HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard
stainless-steel operating hardware and accessories.
1. Provide units that comply with regula tory
requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible.
B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous,
extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C. Anchorage s and Fasteners: Manufactu rer's standard
exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-
resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed
anchors, use stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated
steel anchors compatible with related materials.
4. FABRICATION
A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment
components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-
partition toilet accessories and solid blocking within panel where required for attachment of
toilet accessories.
B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard
corrosion-resistant suppor ts, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor
conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated,
provide 24-inch-wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wi de out-
swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch-wid e clear opening for compartment s designated as
accessible.
3. EXECUTION
1. INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and pl umb. Secure units in position with
manufacturer's recommend ed anchoring devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch .
b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch .
2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to
pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of
panel.
a. Locate wa ll brackets so holes for wall anchors
oc cur in masonry or tile joints.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at
walls.
2. ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware
according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper ope ration. Set hinges on in -
swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when
unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 10 21 13.14
SECTION 102113.16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD TOILET COMPARTMENTS Page 1
SECTION 10 21 13.16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes plastic-laminate-clad toilet compartments configured as toilet
enclosures and urinal screens.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachment details.
C. Samples for each type of toilet compartment material indicated.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural
& Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as
accessible.
SECTION 102113.16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD TOILET COMPARTMENTS Page 2
2.2 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD TOILET COMPARTMENTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following or approved equal:
1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
2. Global Partitions Corp., an ASI Group Company.
3. Scranton Products.
B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.
C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung.
D. Door, Panel, Screen, and Pilaster Construction: One-piece, plastic-laminate facing
sheets pressure laminated to core material without splices or joints in facings or cores;
with laminate applied to edges before faces to seal edges and prevent laminate from
being pried loose. Seal exposed core material at cutouts to protect core from moisture.
1. Core Material: Particleboard.
2. Doors and Panels: Finished to not less than 1 inch thick.
3. Pilasters: Provide construction to comply with the following:
a. Finished to not less than 1-1/4 inches thick and with internal, nominal
0.134-inch-thick, steel-sheet reinforcement.
b. Finished to not less than 1 inch thick and with internal, nominal 0.120-inch-
thick, steel-sheet reinforcement.
E. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Formed from stainless-steel sheet, not less than
0.031-inch nominal thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware.
F. Brackets (Fittings):
1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, chrome-plated zamac.
G. Plastic-Laminate Finish: One color and pattern in each room.
1. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard operating hardware and
accessories.
1. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at
compartments designated as accessible.
B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail
with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless
steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads.
SECTION 102113.16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD TOILET COMPARTMENTS Page 3
Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use
stainless-steel, hot-dip galvanized-steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel
anchors compatible with related materials.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, general-purpose HGS grade, 0.048-inch nominal
thickness.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated.
Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories
where required for attachment of toilet accessories.
B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports,
leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at
pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch-wide in-swinging
doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch-wide out-swinging doors with a
minimum 32-inch-wide clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid,
straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended
anchoring devices.
1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.
b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.
2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three
brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.
a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile
joints.
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
c. Locate bracket fasteners so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile
joints.
d. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
SECTION 102113.16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD TOILET COMPARTMENTS Page 4
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware
manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging
doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when
unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 10 21 13.16
SECTION 102239 - FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS Page 1
SECTION 10 22 39 - FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manually operated, acoustical panel partitions.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, attachment details.
2. Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation
requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.
3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For each type of operable panel partition.
B. Product test reports.
C. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by manufacturer.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable
panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
SECTION 102239 - FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified testing
agency for the following acoustical properties according to test methods indicated:
1. Sound-Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested for
laboratory sound-transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90,
determined by ASTM E 413, and rated for not less than the STC indicated.
2. Noise-Reduction Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly, identical to
partition tested for STC, tested for sound-absorption performance according to
ASTM C 423, and rated for not less than the NRC indicated.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide panels with finishes complying with one of
the following as determined by testing identical products by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified
testing agency.
a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
2. Fire Growth Contribution: Complying with acceptance criteria of local code and
authorities having jurisdiction when tested according to NFPA 265 Method B
Protocol or NFPA 286.
2.2 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing,
suspension system, operators, and accessories.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following manufacturers or approved equal:
a. Hufcor, Inc.
b. Modernfold, Inc.
c. Panelfold Inc.
B. Panel Operation: As indicated on drawings.
C. Panel Construction: As required to support panel from suspension components and
with reinforcement for hardware attachment. Fabricate panels with tight hairline joints
and concealed fasteners. Fabricate panels so finished in-place partition is rigid; level;
plumb; aligned, with tight joints and uniform appearance; and free of bow, warp, twist,
deformation, and surface and finish irregularities.
D. Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled
system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.
SECTION 102239 - FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS Page 3
E. STC: Not less than 56.
F. NRC: Not less than 0.90.
G. Panel Materials:
1. Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard thickness.
2. Steel Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard
thickness.
3. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher
for type of use, corrosion resistance, and finish indicated; manufacturer's
standard strengths and thicknesses for type of use.
4. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
5. Cement Board: ASTM C 1288.
6. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1.
7. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2.
8. Plywood: DOC PS 1.
H. Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard.
I. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and
accessories; with decorative, protective finish.
J. Finish Facing: As indicated on interior design drawings.
2.3 SEALS
A. Description: Seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance
requirements and the following:
1. Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage.
2. Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent
panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces,
when operable panel partition is extended and closed.
B. Horizontal Bottom Seals: Manufacturer's standard continuous-contact seal exerting
uniform constant pressure on floor.
1. Mechanically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom
seal by operating handle or built-in operating mechanism, with operating range
not less than 2 inches between retracted seal and floor finish.
2.4 PANEL FINISH FACINGS
A. Description: Finish facings for panels that comply with indicated fire-test-response
characteristics and that are factory applied to operable panel partitions with appropriate
backing, using mildew-resistant nonstaining adhesive as recommended by facing
manufacturer's written instructions.
SECTION 102239 - FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS Page 4
B. Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Covering: Manufacturer's standard, mildew-resistant,
washable, vinyl-coated fabric wall covering; complying with WA-101, Type III-Heavy
Duty; Class A.
1. Color/Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Fabric Wall Covering: Manufacturer's standard fabric, from same dye lot, treated to
resist stains.
1. Color/Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
D. Cap-Trimmed Edges: Protective perimeter-edge trim with tight hairline joints
concealing edges of panel and finish facing.
E. Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted
around panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on
vertical panel edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel-to-panel joints.
2.5 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support,
designed for operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Size
track to support partition operation and storage without damage to suspension system,
operable panel partitions, or adjacent construction. Limit track deflection to no more
than 0.10 inch between bracket supports. Provide a continuous system of track
sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for
partition operation and storage.
B. Carriers: Trolley system as required for configuration type, size, and weight of partition
and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels.
C. Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for operation, storage,
track configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible
with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel
or aluminum.
2.6 ELECTRIC OPERATORS
A. Factory-assembled electric operation system of size and capacity recommended and
provided by operable panel partition manufacturer for partition specified; with electric
motor and factory-prewired motor controls, speed reducer, chain drive, control stations,
control devices, and accessories required for operation. Include wiring from control
stations to motor. Coordinate operator wiring requirements and electrical
characteristics with building electrical system.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Control Equipment: Comply with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and NEMA ICS 6.
D. Motor Electrical Characteristics:
SECTION 102239 - FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS Page 5
1. Horsepower: Manufacturer's standard.
2. Volts: 115.
3. Phase: Single phase.
4. Hertz: 60.
E. Control Stations: Two single-key-operated, constant-pressure control stations located
remotely from each other on opposite sides and opposite ends of partition run. Wire in
series to require simultaneous activation of both key stations to operate part ition. Each
three-position control station labeled "Open," "Close," and "Off." Furnish two keys per
station.
F. Obstruction-Detection Devices: Equip each motorized operable panel partition with
indicated automatic safety sensor that causes operator to immediately stop and
reverse direction.
G. Limit Switches: Adjustable switches, interlocked with motor controls and set to
automatically stop operable panel partition at fully extended and fully stacked positions.
H. Emergency Release Mechanism: Quick disconnect-release of electric-motor drive
system, permitting manual operation in event of operating failure.
I. Electric Interlock: Equip each motorized operable panel partition with electric interlocks
at locations indicated, to prevent operation of operable panel partition under the
following conditions:
1. On storage pocket door, to prevent operation if door is not in fully open position.
2. On partitions at location of convergence by another partition, to prevent operation
if merging partitions are in place.
2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Storage Pocket Door: Full height at end of partition runs to conceal stacked partition; of
same materials, finish, construction, thickness, and acoustical qualities as panels;
complete with operating hardware. Hinges in finish to match other exposed hardware.
1. Manufacturer's standard method to secure storage pocket door in closed
position.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations,
including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation.
B. Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.
C. Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted
ends is not acceptable.
SECTION 102239 - FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS Page 6
D. Light-Leakage Test: Illuminate one side of partition installation and observe vertical
joints and top and bottom seals for voids. Adjust partitions for alignment and full
closure of vertical joints and full closure along top and bottom seals.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust storage pocket doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or
warping.
B. Verify that safety devices are properly functioning.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions.
END OF SECTION 10 22 39
SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION Page 1
SECTION 10 26 00 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Corner guards.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For each type of wall and door protection showing locations and
extent.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12
inches long.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Material certificates.
C. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of wall- and
door-protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723; testing by a
qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural
& Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1.
2.2 CORNER GUARDS
A. Surface-Mounted, Plastic-Cover Corner Guards: Manufacturer's standard assembly
consisting of snap-on, resilient plastic cover installed over retainer; including mounting
hardware; fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Construction Specialties, Inc.
b. Inpro Corporation.
c. Musson Rubber Co.
2. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.078-inch wall thickness; in dimensions
and profiles indicated on Drawings.
a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
3. Continuous Retainer: Minimum 0.060-inch-thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum.
4. Retainer Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-absorbing clips.
5. Top and Bottom Caps: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching
cover; field adjustable for close alignment with snap-on cover.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Plastic Materials: Chemical- and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant plastic with
integral color throughout; extruded and sheet material as required, thickness as
indicated.
B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal
screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-
type fasteners where exposed to view.
C. Adhesive: As recommended by protection product manufacturer.
SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION Page 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written
instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with
chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.
B. Mounting Heights: Install wall and door protection in locations and at mounting heights
indicated on Drawings.
C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim, joint moldings, and
other accessories required for a complete installation.
1. Provide anchoring devices and suitable locations to withstand imposed loads.
2. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice aluminum
retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer
than 12 inches apart.
3. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.
END OF SECTION 10 26 00
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Page 1
SECTION 10 28 00 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Public-use washroom accessories.
2. Private-use bathroom accessories.
3. Warm-air dryers.
4. Childcare accessories.
5. Underlavatory guards.
6. Custodial accessories.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: Full size, for each exposed product and for each finish specified.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Page 2
2.2 PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
B. Paper Towel (Roll) Dispenser:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
C. Automatic Paper Towel (Roll) Dispenser:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
6. Lockset: Tumbler type.
D. Waste Receptacle:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
E. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
F. Combination Towel (Roll) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Page 3
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
G. Liquid-Soap Dispenser:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
H. Automatic Liquid-Soap Dispenser:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
I. Grab Bar:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
J. Mirror Unit:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
2.3 PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
A. Toilet Tissue Dispenser:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
B. Shower Curtain Rod:
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Page 4
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
C. Soap Dish:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
D. Robe Hook:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
E. Towel Bar:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
F. Towel Shelf:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
G. Towel Rack:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Page 5
2.4 WARM-AIR DRYERS
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
A. High-Speed Warm-Air Dryer:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
B. Multiple Airflow Warm-Air Dryer:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
2.5 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES
A. Diaper-Changing Station:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
2.6 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Page 6
2.7 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Utility Shelf:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
B. Mop and Broom Holder:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2. Description: Refer to franchise specifications for specified products.
3. Mounting: As indicated on drawings.
4. Operation: Refer to franchise specifications for product operational details.
5. Material and Finish: Refer to franchise specifications for product finishes.
2.8 FABRICATION
A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and
resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners
appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units
level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested
according to ASTM F 446.
END OF SECTION 10 28 00
SECTION 102819 - TUB AND SHOWER ENCLOSURES Page 1
SECTION 10 28 19 - TUB AND SHOWER ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes framed shower doors and enclosures.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For tub and shower doors and enclosures.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of tub and
shower doors and enclosures that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period, without monetary limitation.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FRAMED ENCLOSURES
A. Glass panels with full perimeter frames of extruded aluminum with screw-fastened
corners. Minimum 3/8-inchpenetration of glass into frame. Framing members of
thickness required to support imposed loads.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
B. Frames, Hardware, and Trim: Manufacturer's standard units as indicated and as
required for a complete installation.
1. Materials: Refer to franchise specifications for materials.
SECTION 102819 - TUB AND SHOWER ENCLOSURES Page 2
C. Bypassing Doors: Sliding units suspended from top track by fully adjustable ball-
bearing rollers. Self-draining sill tracks with nylon panel guides. Molded jamb bumpers
with concealed fasteners.
1. Door Pulls: Full-door-width, single-sided towel bars.
D. Swinging Doors: Refer to franchise specifications for hinge type. Manufacturer's
standard pulls and latch.
E. Glazing: Safety glazing materials complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category II, with
permanently etched identification acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Glass Nominal Thickness: 6 mm.
2. Patterned Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type II, Class 1
(clear), Form 3; Quality-Q6, Finish F1 (patterned, one side).
a. Pattern: Manufacturer's standard.
F. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard stainless-steel or other noncorrosive fasteners.
G. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, neutral-curing silicone joint
sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare and install per manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent
requirements are contained in GANA's "Glazing Manual."
B. Clean substrates, removing projections, filling voids, and sealing joints.
C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames and panels, and
anchor securely in place.
D. Fasten components securely in place, with provisions for thermal movement. Install
with concealed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install components to drain and return water to tub or shower.
F. Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
G. Repair, refinish, or replace components damaged during installation.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust operating parts and hardware for smooth, quiet operation and watertight
closure. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.
B. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 10 28 19
SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS Page 1
SECTION 10 44 13 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Babcock-Davis.
b. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
c. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated and 1-hour fire rated.
1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated
from 0.043-inch-thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick
fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS Page 2
C. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.
D. Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame
overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer
edge (backbend).
1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4- to 1-1/2-inch backbend depth.
2. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.
E. Cabinet Trim Material: Steel sheet.
F. Door Material: Steel sheet.
G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.
H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for
cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
J. Accessories:
1. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling
sharply on door handle.
2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter
style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER."
1) Location: Applied to cabinet door.
2) Application Process: Silk-screened.
3) Lettering Color: .
4) Orientation: Vertical.
K. Materials:
1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
a. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
b. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color
densities.
2. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3,
3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear).
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame,
door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS Page 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and
size of cabinet and trim style.
B. Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
D. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.
E. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that
integral locking devices operate properly.
END OF SECTION 10 44 13
SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Page 1
SECTION 10 44 16 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to
ensure fit and function.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,
"Portable Fire Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an
independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS Page 2
2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Babcock-Davis.
b. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
c. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B.
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type UL-rated 2A-10B:C nominal capacity, with
monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled
container.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.
B. Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at
locations indicated.
END OF SECTION 10 44 16
SECTION 105613 - METAL STORAGE SHELVING Page 1
SECTION 10 56 13 - METAL STORAGE SHELVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Case-type metal storage shelving.
2. Four-post metal storage shelving.
3. Post-and-beam metal storage shelving.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of blocking and backing required for installation of metal
storage shelving attached to wall and ceiling assemblies.
B. Coordinate locations and installation of metal storage shelving that may interfere with
ceiling systems including lighting, HVAC, speakers, sprinklers, access panels,
electrical switches or outlets, and floor drains.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For metal storage shelving.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
2. Include installation details of connectors, lateral bracing, and special bracing.
C. Samples: For each type of metal storage shelving and for each color specified.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by
manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CASE-TYPE METAL STORAGE SHELVING
A. Case-Type Metal Shelving: Complying with MH 28.1; freestanding units and field
assembled from factory-formed components. Shelves span between two independent
supporting sheet metal end panels that allow shelf-height adjustment over full height of
SECTION 105613 - METAL STORAGE SHELVING Page 2
shelving unit. Provide fixed top and bottom shelves, adjustable intermediate shelves,
and accessories indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
B. Load-Carrying Capacity per Shelf: 200 lb, uniformly distributed.
C. End Panels: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, with concealed perforations at
front and back edges at manufacturer's standard spacing for receiving adjustable shelf
clips.
1. Adjustable Shelf Clips: Cold-rolled steel, with projections designed to engage at
least two perforations in end panels.
D. Back Panel (if applicable): One piece, fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.
E. Shelves: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Fabricate shelves with vertical front
that is flanged and returned.
F. Base: Closed front, with base strips fabricated from same material and with same finish
as end panels.
G. Accessories:
1. Finished End Panels: Fabricated as solid full-height panels from same material
and with same finish as end panels, with trim along edges abutting end panels
and top shelf.
2. Shelf Dividers: Fabricated from same material and with same finish as shelves;
full-height type.
3. Bins: Fabricated from same material and with same finish as shelves;.
4. Shelf-Label Holders: Clear plastic, designed to clip onto front edge of shelf.
H. Steel Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 FOUR-POST METAL STORAGE SHELVING
A. Open Four-Post Metal Storage Shelving: Complying with MH 28.1 and field assembled
from factory-formed components. Shelves span between supporting corner posts that
allow shelf-height adjustment over full height of shelving unit. Provide fixed top and
bottom shelves, adjustable intermediate shelves, and accessories indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Adjustable Shelving; Karp Associates, Inc.
b. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC.
c. Spacesaver Corporation.
2. Load-Carrying Capacity per Shelf: 350 lb.
SECTION 105613 - METAL STORAGE SHELVING Page 3
3. Posts: Fabricated from hot-rolled steel; in angle shape; with perforations at 1-1/2
inches o.c. to receive shelf-to-post connectors.
a. Unit Configuration: Configure shelving units as individual, freestanding
starter- and add-on unit assemblies.
1) Add-On Shelf Posts: Fabricated from hot-rolled steel, T shape;
perforated to match main posts.
b. Post Base: Bolt leveler.
4. Bracing: Manufacturer's standard, single or double diagonal cross bracing.
a. Location: At unit back and ends as required for stability, load-carrying
capacity of shelves, and number of shelves indicated.
5. Back Panel: One piece fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.
6. End Panels: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.
7. Solid-Type Shelves: Uncoated steel sheet.
a. Slots or Holes for Shelf Dividers: 2 inches o.c.
b. Fabricate fronts and backs of shelves with box-formed edges, with corners
lapped and welded.
8. Framed-Type Wire Shelves: Steel wire; with shelf frame fabricated from same
material and with same finish as posts.
9. Shelf-to-Post Connectors: Mechanical fasteners (nuts and bolts).
10. Base: Open, with exposed post legs.
11. Accessories:
a. Finished End Panels: Fabricated as solid full-height panels from
manufacturer's standard thickness cold-rolled steel sheet and with same
finish as posts, with trim for a finished appearance along edges abutting
posts and top shelf.
b. Shelf Dividers: Fabricated from same material and with same finish as
shelves; full-height type.
c. Bins: Fabricated from same material and with same finish as shelves; size
as indicated on Drawings.
d. Shelf-Label Holders: Clear plastic, designed to clip onto front edge of
shelf.
12. Steel Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.3 POST-AND-BEAM METAL STORAGE SHELVING
A. Post-and-Beam Metal Shelving: Complying with MH 28.2; field-assembled from
factory-formed components. Shelves are supported by beams that span between
supporting corner posts that allow beam-height adjustment over full height of shelving
unit. Provide fixed top and bottom beams, adjustable intermediate beams, and
accessories indicated.
SECTION 105613 - METAL STORAGE SHELVING Page 4
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. Lyon Workspace Products, LLC.
b. Republic Storage Systems, LLC.
c. UNICOR.
B. Load-Carrying Capacity per Shelf: 400 lb, uniformly distributed.
C. Posts: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel; in manufacturer's standard shape; with
perforations at 1-1/2 inches o.c. to receive beam-to-post connectors.
1. Unit Configuration: Configure shelving units as individual, freestanding
assemblies.
2. Post Base: Cold-rolled steel floor plate, drilled for floor anchors.
D. Beams: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel; in channel or flanged shape. Provide beam
at each side of each shelf, with center supports as required for load-carrying capacity
of shelf.
1. Beam-to-Post Connectors: Projecting rivet at each end that engage posts.
a. Top and Bottom Shelf Beams: Provide with single beam-to-post
connectors.
b. Intermediate Shelf Beams: Provide with single beam-to-post connectors.
2. Beam Quantity: As required for number of shelves indicated per shelving unit.
E. Flat Metal Shelves: Fabricate fronts and backs of shelves with box-formed edges, with
corners lapped and welded from the following material:
1. Material: Steel sheet, uncoated.
F. Accessories:
1. Tie Plates: Cold-rolled steel, finished to match posts; designed for joining posts
of adjacent shelving units.
2. Supports: Back-to-wall and back-to-back type that bolt to posts; as required for
shelving unit stability.
G. Steel Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.4 ANCHORS
A. Floor Anchors: Galvanized-steel, post-installed expansion anchors. Provide number
per unit recommended by manufacturer unless additional anchors are indicated in
calculations.
SECTION 105613 - METAL STORAGE SHELVING Page 5
B. Wall Anchors: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel anchors designed to secure
metal storage shelving to adjacent wall. Provide one per shelving unit for each shelving
unit adjacent to a wall unless additional anchors are indicated in calculations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal storage shelving level, plumb, square, rigid, true, and with shelves flat and
free of dents or distortion. Make connections to form a rigid structure, free of buckling
and warping.
1. Install exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using
concealed fasteners where possible.
2. Install braces, straps, plates, brackets, and other reinforcements as needed to
support shelf loading and as required for stability.
3. Adjust post-base bolt leveler to achieve level and plumb installation.
4. Anchor shelving units to floor with floor anchors through floor plate. Shim floor
plate to achieve level and plumb installation.
5. Connect side-to-side and back-to-back shelving units together.
6. Install shelves in each shelving unit at equal spacing.
a. Case-Type Metal Storage Shelving: Install adjustable shelf clips at front
and back of each shelf.
b. Four-Post Metal Storage Shelving: Install four clips, one at each post, for
support of each shelf; with clips fully engaged in post perforations.
c. Post-and-Beam Metal Storage Shelving: Install beams with beam-to-post
connectors fully engaged in post perforations.
B. Accessories:
1. Install finished end panels and trim at exposed ends of shelving units.
2. Shelf Dividers: Install at locations indicated on Drawings.
3. Bins: Install at locations indicated on Drawings.
4. Shelf-Label Holders: Install one on each shelf.
a. Install centered within each shelving unit.
5. Record Box Support Rails: Provide two for each record storage box.
6. Shelf Inlays: Install one per shelf.
7. Storage Baskets: Install at locations indicated on Drawings.
8. Back Ledges: Install one per shelf.
9. Side Ledges: Install on each side of each shelf.
3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Erect case-type and four-post metal storage shelving to a maximum tolerance from
vertical of 1/2 inch in up to 10 feet of height, not exceeding 1 inch for heights taller than
10 feet.
SECTION 105613 - METAL STORAGE SHELVING Page 6
B. Erect post-and-beam metal storage shelving to a maximum tolerance from vertical of
1/4 inch in 84 inches of height.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust metal storage shelving so that connectors and other components engage
accurately and securely.
B. Adjust and lubricate operable components to operate smoothly and easily, without
binding or warping. Check and readjust operating hardware.
C. Touch up marred finishes or replace metal storage shelving that cannot be restored to
factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or
furnished by metal storage shelving manufacturer.
D. Replace metal storage shelving components that have been damaged beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 10 56 13
SECTION 105626 - MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING Page 1
SECTION 10 56 26 - MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Manually operated systems.
2. Steel-bracket shelving.
3. Steel-case shelving.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Show shelving layout, location and extent of rail system and clear-
aisle widths from face of carriages.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
B. Sample warranty.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of mobile
shelving systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide mobile shelving systems capable of supporting the
following:
1. Load per Linear Foot of Carriage: 1000 lb/ft.
B. Operating Force: For manually operated systems, maximum 1 lbf required to move
1000 lb.
SECTION 105626 - MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING Page 2
2.2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard mobile storage shelving systems and
components. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's
standard components as required for a complete system.
B. Inserts: Furnish required concrete inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing
track system, and furnish other components of work where installation of devices is
specified in another Section.
C. Flooring: Underlayment thickness required to bring aisle floor finish flush with rail tops.
1. Plywood Underlayment: DOC PS 1, Interior, Underlayment.
a. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a
flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84.
2. Particleboard Underlayment: ANSI A208.1, Grade PBU.
3. Ramps: Manufacturer's standard metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel ramp not
steeper than 1:12, with non-slip finish.
D. Tracks: Steel rails with tops machined to mate with guide wheels and with ends
designed to provide smooth, secure continuity between sections without field welding.
Provide mounting brackets, anchorage devices, adjustable leveling devices, and stops
at terminations of rails to prevent carriages from running off track ends.
1. Mounting: Surface mounted.
E. Carriages: Rigid frames consisting of C-shaped cold-formed steel beams and cross
beams, designed to allow secure anchorage of shelving units.
1. Wheels: Manufacturer's standard number of bearing-mounted, steel wheels,
precision ground to mate with tracks.
2. Bumpers: Provide two rubber bumpers with minimum depth of 1/2 inch each
side.
F. Carriage End Panels: Full depth and height of shelving units. Provide at both ends of
each range.
1. Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet, 0.048 inch thick.
2.3 MANUALLY OPERATED SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
2.4 STEEL-BRACKET SHELVING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
SECTION 105626 - MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING Page 3
B. Steel-Bracket Shelving: ANSI Z39.73, shelving consisting of two uprights and two
spreaders per section forming a four-sided frame, with adjustable shelves on one or
both sides of uprights cantilever-hung by brackets. Configure units for mounting on
mobile carriages.
C. Shelving Units: Refer to franchise specifications for specific shelve size configurations.
2.5 STEEL-CASE SHELVING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
B. Steel-Case Shelving: Shelving consisting of full end, top, and back panels, with end
panels made to receive adjustable shelves in slots or to receive clips to support
adjustable shelves. Configure units for mounting on mobile carriages.
C. Shelving Units: Refer to franchise specifications for specific shelve size configurations.
2.6 STEEL FOUR-POST SHELVING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, Refer to franchise
specifications for approved vendors.
B. Steel Four-Post Shelving: Shelving consisting of four angle-iron uprights per section,
with adjustable shelves resting on shelf supports hung on uprights. Configure units for
mounting on mobile carriages.
C. Shelving Units: Refer to franchise specifications for specific shelve size configurations.
2.7 MATERIALS
A. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.
1. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on
finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat to achieve a minimum dry film
thickness of 2 mils.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
SECTION 105626 - MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING Page 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Level and plumb tracks to a tolerance of 0.09 inch in 120 inches with no more than
0.06-inch variation between adjacent rails. Use permanent shims or non-shrink grout
as indicated by manufacturer.
B. Surface-Mounted Track Systems: Install underlayment, ramps, and finish flooring
according to manufacturer's written instructions and flush with track surfaces. Do not
extend ramps beyond ends of carriages.
C. Carriage Installation: Mount mobile carriages on track system and adjust for smooth
operation. Provide non-moving carriages securely fixed to rails where indicated.
D. Attach shelving units to carriages according to manufacturer's written instructions and
as required to prevent vibration during movement.
1. Level and plumb shelving units to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
END OF SECTION 10 56 26
SECTION 107516 - GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES Page 1
SECTION 10 75 16 - GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes ground-set flagpoles made from aluminum.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, operating characteristics, fittings, accessories, and
finishes for flagpoles.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For flagpoles.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flagpoles to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flagpoles as complete units, including fittings, accessories,
bases, and anchorage devices, from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in
Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design flagpole assemblies.
B. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports,
shall withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated.
1. Wind Loads: Determine according to NAAMM FP 1001. Refer to structural
drawings for basic wind speed based on Project location.
SECTION 107516 - GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES Page 2
2.3 ALUMINUM FLAGPOLES
A. Aluminum Flagpoles: Cone-tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded
tubing complying with ASTM B 241/B 241M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness
of 3/16 inch.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Acme/Lingo Flagpoles, LLC.
b. Baartol Company.
c. U.S. Flag & Flagpole Supply, LP.
B. Exposed Height: 30 feet.
C. Metal Foundation Tube: Manufacturer's standard corrugated-steel foundation tube,
0.060-inch wall thickness with 3/16-inch steel bottom plate and support plate; 3/4-inch-
diameter, steel ground spike; and steel centering wedges welded together. Galvanize
foundation tube after assembly. Furnish loose hardwood wedges at top of foundation
tube for plumbing pole.
D. Sleeve for Aluminum Flagpole: Fiberglass or PVC pipe foundation sleeve, made to fit
flagpole, for casting into concrete foundation.
2.4 FITTINGS
A. Finial Ball: Flush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole-
butt diameter.
1. 0.063-inch spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole.
B. Internal Halyard, Winch System: Manually operated winch with control stop device and
removable handle, stainless-steel cable halyard, and concealed revolving truck
assembly with plastic-coated counterweight and sling. Furnish flush access door
secured with cylinder lock. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole.
1. Halyard Flag Snaps: Chromium-plated bronze swivel snap hooks with neoprene
or vinyl covers. Furnish two per halyard.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Drainage Material: Crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; coarse aggregate.
B. Sand: ASTM C 33/C 33M, fine aggregate.
C. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag urethane joint sealant complying
with requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with
ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
SECTION 107516 - GROUND-SET FLAGPOLES Page 3
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare uncoated metal flagpoles that are set in foundation tubes by painting below-
grade portions with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
B. Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose
soil and foreign matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete.
Place and compact drainage material at excavation bottom.
C. Foundation Tube: Place foundation tube, center, and brace to prevent displacement
during concreting. Place concrete. Plumb and level foundation tube and allow concrete
to cure.
D. Place concrete, as specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Compact
concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist-cure exposed concrete for no fewer than
seven days or use nonstaining curing compound.
E. Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and
uniform in texture and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter
of concrete base.
3.2 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install flagpoles where indicated and according to Shop Drawings and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Foundation Tube: Place flagpole in tube, seated on bottom plate between steel
centering wedges, and install hardwood wedges to secure flagpole in place. Place and
compact sand in foundation tube and remove hardwood wedges. Seal top of
foundation tube with a 2-inch layer of elastomeric joint sealant and cover with flashing
collar.
END OF SECTION 10 75 16
SECTION 107523 - WALL-MOUNTED FLAGPOLES Page 1
SECTION 10 75 23 - WALL-MOUNTED FLAGPOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes wall-mounted flagpoles made from aluminum.
B. Owner-Furnished Material: Flags.
C. Related Requirements:
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, operating characteristics, fittings, accessories, and
finishes for flagpoles.
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For flagpoles.
1. Include loads, point reactions, and locations for attachment of flagpoles to
building's structure.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flagpoles to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flagpoles as complete units, including fittings, accessories,
bases, and anchorage devices, from single source from single manufacturer.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in
Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design flagpole assemblies.
B. Structural Performance: Flagpole assemblies, including anchorages and supports,
shall withstand design loads indicated within limits and under conditions indicated.
SECTION 107523 - WALL-MOUNTED FLAGPOLES Page 2
1. Wind Loads: Determine according to NAAMM FP 1001. Refer to structural
drawings for basic wind speed based on Project location.
2.3 ALUMINUM FLAGPOLES
A. Aluminum Flagpoles: Cone-tapered flagpoles fabricated from seamless extruded
tubing complying with ASTM B 241/B 241M, Alloy 6063, with a minimum wall thickness
of 3/16 inch.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following or approved equal:
a. Acme/Lingo Flagpoles, LLC.
b. Baartol Company.
c. U.S. Flag & Flagpole Supply, LP.
B. Exposed Length: As indicated on drawings.
C. Vertical Wall Mount: Cast-aluminum mounting bracket complete with escutcheon,
mounting plate and through-wall anchorage.
1. Finish: Same as flagpole.
D. Outrigger Wall Mount: Aluminum mounting bracket complete with escutcheon,
mounting plate and through-wall anchorage.
1. Finish: Same as flagpole.
2.4 FITTINGS
A. Finial Ball: Flush-seam ball, sized as indicated or, if not indicated, to match flagpole-
butt diameter.
1. 0.063-inch spun aluminum, finished to match flagpole.
B. Finial Eagle: Sized as standard with manufacturer for flagpole size indicated.
1. Cast aluminum, finished to match flagpole.
2. 20-oz. copper with 23-karat gold-leaf finish.
C. Internal Halyard, Winch System: Manually operated winch with control stop device and
removable handle, stainless-steel cable halyard, and concealed revolving truck
assembly with plastic-coated counterweight and sling. Furnish flush access door
secured with cylinder lock. Finish truck assembly to match flagpole.
1. Halyard Flag Snaps: Chromium-plated bronze swivel snap hooks with neoprene
or vinyl covers. Furnish two per halyard.
SECTION 107523 - WALL-MOUNTED FLAGPOLES Page 3
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FLAGPOLE INSTALLATION
A. General: Install flagpoles where shown and according to Shop Drawings and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Mounting Brackets and Bases: Anchor brackets and bases securely to structural
support with fasteners as indicated on Shop Drawings.
END OF SECTION 10 75 23
SECTION 113013 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES Page 1
SECTION 11 30 13 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cooking appliances.
2. Kitchen exhaust ventilation.
3. Refrigeration appliances.
4. Cleaning appliances.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Sample warranties.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or
components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Appliances: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. Gas-Fueled Appliances: Certified by a qualified testing agency for each type of gas-
fueled appliance according to ANSI Z21 Series standards.
SECTION 113013 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES Page 2
2.2 APPLIANCES
1. Refer to Equipment Schedule as indicated on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with
concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and
that rough openings are completely concealed.
B. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been
completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate
equipment.
C. Range Anti-Tip Device: Install at each range according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:
1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each
appliance according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify
compliance with each manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters.
2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.
3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation.
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and components.
B. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 11 30 13
SECTION 114000 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Page 1
SECTION 11 40 00 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes equipment for foodservice facilities.
B. Owner-Furnished Equipment: Where indicated, Owner will furnish equipment for
installation by Contractor.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For fabricated equipment. Include plans, elevations, sections,
roughing-in dimensions, fabrication details, utility service requirements, and
attachments to other work.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: For foodservice facilities.
1. Indicate locations of foodservice equipment and connections to utilities.
2. Key equipment using same designations as indicated on Drawings.
3. Include plans and elevations; clearance requirements for equipment access and
maintenance; details of equipment supports; and utility service characteristics.
B. Sample warranties.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Refrigeration Compressor Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace
compressors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
SECTION 114000 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. NSF Standards: Provide equipment that bears NSF Certification Mark or UL
Classification Mark certifying compliance with applicable NSF standards.
B. UL Certification: Provide electric and fuel-burning equipment and components that are
evaluated by UL for fire, electric shock, and casualty hazards according to applicable
safety standards, and that are UL certified for compliance and labeled for intended use.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Install equipment to comply with the following:
1. ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
2. NFPA 54, "National Fuel Gas Code."
3. NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."
4. NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations."
2.2 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT
1. Refer to Equipment Schedule as indicated on drawings.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Installation Accessories, General: NSF certified for end-use application indicated.
B. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; silicone. Type S (single component),
Grade NS (nonsag), Class 25, Use NT (nontraffic) related to exposure, and Use M, G,
A, or O as applicable to joint substrates indicated.
1. Public Health and Safety Requirements:
a. Sealant is certified for compliance with NSF standards for end-use
application indicated.
b. Washed and cured sealant complies with the FDA's regulations for use in
areas that come in contact with food.
2. Cylindrical Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type C, closed-cell polyethylene, in
diameter greater than joint width.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Stainless-Steel Finishes: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into
finish. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
B. Powder-Coat Finishes: Comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions for
application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
SECTION 114000 - FOODSERVICE EQUIPMENT Page 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install foodservice equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Connect equipment to utilities.
2. Provide cutouts in equipment, neatly formed, where required to run service lines
through equipment to make final connections.
B. Complete equipment assembly where field assembly is required.
1. Provide closed butt and contact joints that do not require a filler.
2. Grind field welds on stainless-steel equipment until smooth and polish to match
adjacent finish.
C. Install equipment with access and maintenance clearances that comply with
manufacturer's written installation instructions and with requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction.
D. Install cabinets and similar equipment on bases in a bed of sealant.
E. Install closure-trim strips and similar items requiring fasteners in a bed of sealant.
F. Install joint sealant in joints between equipment and abutting surfaces with continuous
joint backing unless otherwise indicated. Produce airtight, watertight, vermin-proof,
sanitary joints.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. After completing installation of equipment, repair damaged finishes.
B. Clean and adjust equipment as required to produce ready-for-use condition.
C. Protect equipment from damage during remainder of the construction period.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain f oodservice
equipment.
END OF SECTION 11 40 00
SECTION 123213 - MANUFACTURED WOOD-VENEER-FACED CASEWORK Page 1
SECTION 12 32 13 - MANUFACTURED WOOD-VENEER-FACED CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes manufactured wood-veneer-faced cabinets of stock design.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 12 36 23.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops."
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards"
apply to the work of this Section.
B. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
C. Hardwood Plywood: A panel product composed of layers or plies of veneer, or of
veneers in combination with lumber core, hardboard core, MDF core, or particleboard
core, joined with adhesive and faced both front and back with hardwood veneers.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of casework
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond.
b. Warping of components.
c. Failure of operating hardware.
d. Deterioration of finishes.
SECTION 123213 - MANUFACTURED WOOD-VENEER-FACED CASEWORK Page 2
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
2.2 CASEWORK, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and
WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of casework indicated for
construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that
casework complies with requirements of grades specified.
B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, configurations, and finish materials of
manufactured wood-veneer-faced casework by referencing designated manufacturer's
catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' casework of similar sizes and door and drawer
configurations, of same finish materials, and complying with the Specifications may be
considered. See Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements."
2.3 WOOD-VENEER-FACED CABINETS
A. Semiexposed Materials:
1. Solid Wood: Sound hardwood lumber, selected to eliminate appearance defects,
of any species similar in color and grain to exposed wood.
2. Plywood: Hardwood plywood of any species similar in color and grain to exposed
wood. Provide backs of same species as faces.
3. Provide solid wood or hardwood plywood for semiexposed surfaces unless
otherwise indicated.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, particleboard core except where veneer core is
indicated.
B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
D. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 .
E. Edgebanding: Wood veneer of same species as face veneer.
SECTION 123213 - MANUFACTURED WOOD-VENEER-FACED CASEWORK Page 3
1. Select wood edgebanding for grain and color compatible with face veneers.
2. Colors: Refer to interior design specifications manual and brand standards for
approved manufacturers.
2.5 CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard satin-
finish, commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware.
1. Use threaded metal or plastic inserts with machine screws for fastening to
particleboard, except where hardware is through bolted from back side.
B. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CASEWORK INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Install casework level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
Where casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit,
with fasteners concealed where practical.
C. Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust subtops within 1/16 inch
of a single plane. Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.
Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.
D. Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust fronts and bottoms
within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten cabinets to hanging strips, masonry, framing,
wood blocking, or reinforcements in walls and partitions. Align similar adjoining doors
to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.
E. Fasten cabinets to adjacent cabinets and to masonry, framing, wood blocking, or
reinforcements in walls and partitions to comply with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's
"Architectural Woodwork Standards."
F. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or
bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or
soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
END OF SECTION 12 32 13
SECTION 123216 - MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD CASEWORK Page 1
SECTION 12 32 16 - MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes plastic-laminate-faced cabinets of stock design.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 12 36 23.13 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Countertops."
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards"
apply to the work of this Section.
B. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
C. Hardwood Plywood: A panel product composed of layers or plies of veneer, or of
veneers in combination with lumber core, hardboard core, MDF core, or particleboard
core, joined with adhesive, and faced both front and back with hardwood veneers.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other
work.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program
certificates.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of casework
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Delamination of components or other failures of glue bond.
b. Warping of components.
c. Failure of operating hardware.
SECTION 123216 - MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD CASEWORK Page 2
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
2.2 CASEWORK, GENERAL
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and
WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of casework indicated for
construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. Grade: Premium.
2. Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that
casework complies with requirements of grades specified.
B. Product Designations: Drawings indicate sizes, configurations, and finish materials of
manufactured plastic-laminate-faced cabinets by referencing designated
manufacturer's catalog numbers. Other manufacturers' casework of similar sizes and
door and drawer configurations, of same finish materials, and complying with the
Specifications may be considered. See Section 01 60 00 "Product Requirements."
2.3 CASEWORK
A. Design:
1. Flush overlay.
B. Exposed Materials:
1. Plastic Laminate: Grade HGS.
a. Colors and Patterns: Refer to interior design specifications manual and
brand standards for approved manufacturers.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide specified edgebanding on all exposed
edges.
3. Solid Wood: Clear hardwood lumber of species indicated, selected for compatible
grain and color.
C. Semiexposed Materials:
1. Plastic Laminate: Grade VGS unless otherwise indicated. Provide plastic
laminate for semiexposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Provide thermoset decorative panels for
semiexposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
SECTION 123216 - MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD CASEWORK Page 3
a. Provide plastic laminate of same grade as exposed surfaces for interior
faces of doors and drawer fronts and other locations where opposite side of
component is exposed.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP-1, particleboard core except where veneer core is
indicated.
B. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.
C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
D. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130 .
E. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
2.5 COLORS AND FINISHES
A. Plastic-Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes refer to interior design specifications
manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
B. PVC Edgebanding Color: As selected from casework manufacturer's full range.
2.6 CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware, General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard satin-
finish, commercial-quality, heavy-duty hardware.
1. Use threaded metal or plastic inserts with machine screws for fastening to
particleboard except where hardware is through-bolted from back side.
B. Butt Hinges: Stainless-steel, semiconcealed, five-knuckle hinges complying with
BHMA A156.9, Grade 1, with antifriction bearings and rounded tips. Provide two hinges
for doors less than 48 inches high, and provide three hinges for doors more than 48
inches high.
C. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, Type B01602, Provide
two hinges for doors less than 48 inches high, and provide three hinges for doors more
than 48 inches high.
D. Pulls: Solid wire pulls, fastened from back with two screws. For sliding doors, provide
recessed flush pulls. Provide two pulls for drawers more than 24 inches wide.
E. Door Catches: Provide two catches on doors more than 48 inches high.
F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, Type B05091.
SECTION 123216 - MANUFACTURED PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD CASEWORK Page 4
G. Drawer and Hinged Door Locks: five-pin tumbler, brass with chrome-plated finish, and
complying with BHMA A156.11, Grade 1.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CASEWORK INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Install casework level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
Where casework abuts other finished work, apply filler strips and scribe for accurate fit,
with fasteners concealed where practical.
C. Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust subtops within 1/16 inch
of a single plane. Align similar adjoining doors and drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.
Bolt adjacent cabinets together with joints flush, tight, and uniform.
D. Wall Cabinets: Hang cabinets straight, level, and plumb. Adjust fronts and bottoms
within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten to hanging strips, masonry, framing, wood
blocking, or reinforcements in walls and partitions. Align similar adjoining doors to a
tolerance of 1/16 inch.
E. Fasten cabinets to adjacent cabinets and to masonry, framing, wood blocking, or
reinforcements in walls and partitions to comply with the AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's
"Architectural Woodwork Standards."
F. Adjust casework and hardware so doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or
bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean finished surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish damaged or
soiled areas to match original factory finish, as approved by Architect.
END OF SECTION 12 32 16
SECTION 123616 - METAL COUNTERTOPS Page 1
SECTION 12 36 16 - METAL COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Stainless-steel countertops.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For metal fabrications.
1. Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Detail fabrication
and installation, including field joints.
2. For countertops, show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed
in metal countertops.
3. For wall-mounted shelves, indicate requirements for blocking or reinforcements
in supporting construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STAINLESS-STEEL FABRICATIONS
A. Countertops: Fabricate from 0.062-inch-thick, stainless-steel sheet. Provide smooth,
clean exposed tops and edges in uniform plane, free of defects. Provide front and end
overhang of 1 inch over the base cabinets.
1. Joints: Fabricate countertops without field-made joints.
2. Weld shop-made joints.
3. Sound deaden the undersurface with heavy-build mastic coating.
4. Extend the top down to provide a 1-inch-thick edge with a 1/2-inch return flange.
5. Form the backsplash coved to and integral with top surface, with a 1/2-inch-thick
top edge and 1/2-inch return flange.
6. Provide raised (marine) edge around perimeter of tops containing sinks; pitch
tops containing sinks two ways to provide drainage without channeling or
grooving.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
SECTION 123616 - METAL COUNTERTOPS Page 2
B. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant that complies with applicable
requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" and the following:
1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag,
neutral curing, silicone.
2. Color: Clear.
2.3 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISH
A. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional satin finish matching No. 4
finish, with no evidence of welds and free of cross scratches. Run grain with long
dimension of each piece. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces.
Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal countertops level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed
shims.
B. Field Jointing: Where possible, make field jointing in the same manner as shop jointing;
use fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare edges to be joined in shop so
Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not required. Locate field joints
where shown on Shop Drawings.
C. Secure countertops to cabinets with Z- or L-type fasteners or equivalent; use two or
more fasteners at each front, end, and back.
D. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent
deflection.
E. Seal junctures of countertops, splashes, and walls with sealant for countertops.
F. Protection: Provide 6-mil plastic or other suitable water-resistant covering over
countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c.
Remove protection at Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 12 36 16
SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS Page 1
SECTION 12 36 23.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes plastic-laminate-clad countertops.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For plastic-laminate-clad countertops.
1. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.
C. Samples: Plastic laminates in each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Certificates: For the following:
1. Composite wood products.
2. High-pressure decorative laminate.
3. Adhesives.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate
products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of
successful in-service performance.
1. Shop Certification: AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork
Standards" for grades of plastic-laminate-clad countertops indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
1. Provide inspections of fabrication and installation together with labels and
certificates from AWI certification program indicating that countertops comply
with requirements of grades specified.
SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS Page 2
B. Grade: Premium.
C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved.
D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and
textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: refer
to interior design specifications manual and brand standards for approved
manufacturers.
E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces.
F. Core Material: Particleboard or MDF.
G. Core Material at Sinks: Particleboard or MDF made with exterior glue.
H. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch.
2.2 WOOD MATERIALS
A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality
standard unless otherwise indicated.
1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.
B. Composite Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of
referenced quality standard for each type of countertop and quality grade specified
unless otherwise indicated.
1. MDF: Medium-density fiberboard, ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.
2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Wire-Management Grommets: Circular, molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic
caps with slot for wire passage.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive.
SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS Page 3
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate countertops to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Provide front and
end overhang of 1 inch over base cabinets. Ease edges to radius indicated for the
following:
1. Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members: 1/16 inch unless otherwise indicated.
B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment
to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and
installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance f or scribing,
trimming, and fitting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Grade: Install countertops to comply with same grade as item to be installed.
B. Assemble countertops and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was
not completed in the shop.
1. Provide cutouts for appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar
items. Locate openings accurately, and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to
produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to
remove splinters and burrs.
2. Seal edges of cutouts by saturating with varnish.
C. Field Jointing: Where possible, make in the same manner as shop jointing, using
dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Prepare
edges to be joined in shop so Project-site processing of top and edge surfaces is not
required. Locate field joints where shown on Shop Drawings.
1. Secure field joints in countertops with concealed clamping devices located within
6 inches of front and back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches.
Tighten according to manufacturer's written instructions to exert a constant,
heavy-clamping pressure at joints.
D. Scribe and cut countertops to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair
damaged finish at cuts.
E. Countertop Installation: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base
cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.
1. Install countertops level and true in line. Use concealed shims as required to
maintain not more than a 1/8-inch-in-96-inchesvariation from a straight, level
plane.
2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and
to walls with adhesive.
3. Seal joints between countertop and backsplash, if any, and joints where
countertop and backsplash abut walls with mildew-resistant silicone sealant or
SECTION 123623.13 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD COUNTERTOPS Page 4
another permanently elastic sealing compound recommended by countertop
material manufacturer.
F. Protection: Provide Kraft paper or other suitable covering over countertop surfaces,
taped to underside of countertop at a minimum of 48 inches o.c. Remove protection at
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 12 36 23.13
SECTION 123640 - STONE COUNTERTOPS Page 1
SECTION 12 36 40 - STONE COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes stone countertops.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each variety of stone, stone accessory and manufactured product.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of stone countertops.
1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone countertops by
field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain each variety of stone, regardless of finish, from a
single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance
and physical properties.
2.2 GRANITE
A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 615/C 615M.
B. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
SECTION 123640 - STONE COUNTERTOPS Page 2
2.3 ADHESIVES, GROUT, SEALANTS, AND STONE ACCESSORIES
A. General: Use only adhesives formulated f or stone and ceramic tile and that are
recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated.
B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-
setting and -grouting epoxy.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
D. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant that complies with applicable
requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" and that will not stain the stone it is
applied to.
1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag,
neutral curing, silicone.
2. Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone; Class 25.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
E. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical
properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application
indicated.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved manufacturers.
2.4 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks,
seams, and starts that may impair structural integrity, function, or appearance.
B. Fabricate stone countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements
indicated.
1. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated.
2. Fabricate molded edges with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to
reverse contour of edge profile to produce uniform shape throughout entire
length of edge and with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping,
and matched at joints between units. Form corners of molded edges as indicated
with outside corners slightly eased unless otherwise indicated.
3. Finish exposed faces of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of
each stone type required and to match approved Samples and mockups. Provide
matching finish on exposed edges of countertops, splashes, and cutouts.
SECTION 123640 - STONE COUNTERTOPS Page 3
2.5 STONE COUNTERTOPS
A. General: Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design
Manual VII."
B. Nominal Thickness: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than 1-1/4 inches. Gage
backs to provide units of identical thickness.
C. Splashes: Provide 3/4-inch-thick backsplashes and end splashes unless otherwise
indicated.
D. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field.
E. Cutouts and Holes:
1. Undercounter Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in shop using
template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth,
even curves.
2. Counter-Mounted Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings
for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of
cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.
3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap
dispensers, and similar items.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS
A. Install countertops by adhering to supports with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive.
B. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Shim and adjust stone to locations
indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned
according to established relationships.
C. Space joints with 1/16-inch gap for filling with grout. Use temporary shims to ensure
uniform spacing.
1. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that
countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width.
D. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts
to prevent damage while cutting. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone.
Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finish ed
surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent
snipping.
E. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall with water-cleanable epoxy
adhesive. Leave 1/16-inch gap between countertop and splashes for filling with
sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing.
SECTION 123640 - STONE COUNTERTOPS Page 4
F. Grout joints to comply with ANSI A108.10. Remove temporary shims before grouting.
Tool grout uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool.
G. Apply sealant to joints and gaps specified for filling with sealant; comply with
Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying sealant.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive,
grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately.
B. Clean stone countertops no fewer than six days after completion of sealant installation,
using clean water and soft rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents,
cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that
may damage stone.
C. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer
manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 12 36 40
SECTION 123661.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS Page 1
SECTION 12 36 61.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid surface material countertops.
2. Solid surface material backsplashes.
3. Solid surface material end splashes.
4. Solid surface material apron fronts.
5. Solid surface material sinks.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks.
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash
profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, refer to interior design
specifications manual and brand standards for approved.
2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION
A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written
instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
B. Cutouts and Holes:
1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using
template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth,
even curves.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.
SECTION 123661.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS Page 2
B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00
"Joint Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of
countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of
countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.
C. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with
adhesive.
D. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive.
E. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts
to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed,
and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease
edges slightly to prevent snipping.
F. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
END OF SECTION 12 36 61.16
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 1
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pool & Spa Constructed of Gunite and Shotcrete System.
a. The Pool Contractor shall be responsible for design and installation of indoor pool
and spa system.
2. Pool Contractor shall be responsible for submitting and securing necessary approvals
and permits, including payment of fees, and expenses for the preparation of any required
documentation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 92 00 (07920) - Joint Sealants
2. Section 09 30 00 (09310) - Tiling
3. Division 22 (15) and 26 (16) Specifications for the following:
a. Excavation for electrical and plumbing lines.
b. Pool deck hose bibs.
c. Cold water supply within pool equipment room.
d. Gas line for pool heaters.
e. Conduit wiring, receptacles and disconnects to the pool equipment room.
f. Pool heater flues.
g. Filter room, decks, sealing of joints between pool and deck, shall be provided as
work of other sections.
h. Connection of floor & deck drains and hose bibs is specified in Division 22.
i. Connection of pool heater to gas source and heater vent piping in equipment room
shall be performed by Contractor.
j. Provisions for combustion air.
k. Connection of automatic water fill system and fill spout cold water lines from water
source in equipment room is specified in Division 22.
l. Connection of all pool equipment, starters and switches; grounding of pool, pool
equipment, pool lights and niches, and wiring of pool & spa lights from electrical
panel in equipment room is specified in Division 26.
m. On Projects that include emergency generator, the underwater pool niche lights shall
be connected to emergency power.
4. Section 31 20 00 (02300) - Earthwork
5. Section 33 10 00 (02500) - Utility Services
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Applicable requirements of the following Specifications and Codes apply to work of this
Section:
1. Local building and health codes.
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:
a. ANSI/APSP-1 “Standard for Public Swimming Pools”
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 2
b. ANSI/APSP-7 “American National Standard for Suction Entrapment Avoidance in
Swimming Pools, Wading Pools, Spas, Hot Tubs, and Catch Basins”
c. ANSI/APSP-11 “Standards for Water Quality in Public Pools and Spas”
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): Publications
a. A615 "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement"
b. C33 “Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates”
c. C150 “Standard Specification for Portland Cement“
4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Publication
a. “Coding and Labeling”
5. Gunite Contractors Association (GCA): Publication
a. G-84, “Gunite and Shotcrete”
6. Association of Pool & Spa Professionals (APSP)
7. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publication:
a. 70 "National Electric Code"
8. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF): Seal of approval program.
9. Tile Council of America, Inc. Publication
a. "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation".
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. System shall include:
1. Provide systems of fully compatible components and construction methods required for
complete and operable systems for indoor swimming pool & spa including but not limited
to excavation, dewatering of construction area and removal of excess earth from site.
2. Gunite and shotcrete shell.
a. Finish Plaster Mix (Diamond Rite).
3. Excavating, hauling, backfilling, grading and incidental earthwork in conjunction with the
construction of the swimming pool.
a. Handle and dispose of excess material, regardless of type, character, or
composition.
4. Connections of water and gas to pool equipment.
5. Connection of motors, pumps, compressors, switches and timers, lights, and wiring
necessary for interfacing of equipment.
6. Pool Equipment.
a. Filter Systems
b. Flow Meters
c. Water Treatment Systems
d. Heaters
e. Recirculation Pumps and Motora
f. Piping
g. Fittings, Lights and Accessories
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 3
h. Deck Drain System
1) Automatic Water Fill System and Fill Spout
7. All pools and spas, including equipment, shall be designed and constructed to avoid
entrapment of clothes, hair and people and shall comply with the U.S. Pool Safety Act
(Virginia Graeme Baker Pool and Spa Safety Act) and ANSI/APSP-7 "American National
Standard for Suction Entrapment Avoidance in Swimming Pools, Wading Pools, Spas,
Hot Tubs, and Catch Basins".
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1. Product Data:
a. Manufacturer's technical literature with installation and storage instructions for each
product specified.
b. Pumps: Pump performance curves indicating GPM vs. TDH, maximum efficiency
point, and maximum a amperage draw, together with current characteristics and
service factor of motor.
C. Shop Drawings
1. Submit the following Shop Drawings to the [Architect][Owner’s Representative]for
approval:
a. Complete design of swimming pool, including all component parts, attachments,
devices, or other work, filtration filter, size, turn-over capacity, and supporting
calculations.
b. Foundation plan and details and Sections through pool shall be included.
c. Mechanical schematic.
d. Detail for ladder and pool wall interface.
2. Show all shop erection details.
3. All Shop Drawings shall be certified and sealed by a Professional Engineer, registered in
the state in which project is being submitted.
4. The pool manufacturer shall certify to the Owner that the depth and configuration of the
pool is acceptable and compatible with all known safety standards for the manufacturer's
designed product.
D. Samples:
1. Precast concrete pool coping deck and in pool and spa deck, One-12" long section of
coping, complete with stenciled depth marking.
2. Submit three (3) samples of each type and color of tile required.
E. Quality Control:
1. Design Data:
a. Hydraulic analysis: Engineer's sealed calculations and total dynamic head (TDH) for
swimming pool system for equipment other than that specified.
b. Structural analysis: Engineer's sealed calculations and analysis for pool concrete
design.
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 4
F. At the completion of the work, the Pool Contractor shall furnish to the Owner two bound copies
of an operation manual. Minimum content of these manuals shall be:
1. Operating Instructions
2. Equipment Literature with Parts List of all Equipment
3. Water Chemistry Procedures
4. Suggested Safety Procedures
5. Repainting/Refinishing Procedures
6. Include chemical analysis of source/make-up water supply
7. Copies of all manufacturer's warranties
8. Test reports
9. Sealed Engineer's drawings.
10. Certificates: From local authorities indicating that pool construction and performance
conform to requirements of respective authorities.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All work under this Section must be performed by a Contractor experienced and regularly
engaged in building, commercial swimming pools. Contractors bidding this work must have
completed five (5) projects within the past ten years equal to or larger than this project.
B. Pool specification and related pool drawings are to be considered as performance guidelines
only meeting minimum requirements which may change as result of local code and health
department requirements.
1. The project Drawings and Specifications supplement each other. In the event of a
conflict, the Specifications shall govern. Piping locations are schematic. Precise
locations of piping shall be determined by actual field condition. Fittings are not shown.
The Pool Contractor shall include all fittings norm ally required for a completed system.
2. This Contractor shall be responsible for reviewing the complete set of Contract
Documents and coordinate work with other trades.
C. All work under this Section shall be inspected and installed in accordance with all current local
and state codes and regulations.
1. The Pool Contractor shall obtain the following:
a. Board of Health Design Approvals
b. State Board of Health Inspections and Final Approval
c. Structural and Electrical Inspections and Final Approvals on his Portion of the Work
D. The standards of these Plans and Specifications are intended to provide the Owner with a low
maintenance pool.
E. Pool Contractor to be responsible for design and installation of pools, including layouts,
routing of piping, as well as the proper location and quantities of required accessories.
Responsibilities also include necessary valves, devices, and controls for pool system as
required.
F. Contractor's design drawings must be sealed and signed by a licensed Engineer registered in
State in which project is being constructed.
G. Contractor shall submit, on his letterhead, a list of all variations and deviations he finds that
differ between local code requirements and bid drawings.
H. At the completion of the work, the Pool Contractor shall fill the pool with water and instruct the
Owner's operating personnel in the operation of all equipment.
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 5
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate this work with the work of other Sections to avoid any delay or
interference with other work.
1. Filter room, decks, sealing of joints between pool and deck, fencing and landscaping
shall be provided as work by other Sections.
2. Connection of all pool equipment, starters and switches; grounding of pool, pool
equipment, pool lights and niches, and wiring of pool lights shall be performed by Pool
Subcontractor from electrical panel in equipment room.
3. Connection of floor drains, deck drains and hose bibs shall be provided as work of other
Sections.
4. Connection of pool heater to gas source and heater vent piping in equipment room shall
be performed by [Pool Subcontractor] [Mechanical Contractor].
5. Provisions for combustion air will be provided as work by other Sections.
6. Connection of automatic water fill system and fill spout cold water lines from water source
in equipment room shall be performed by Pool Subcontractor.
B. Lines, Grades, and Elevations:
1. The General Contractor shall establish a bench mark for elevations and control points for
measurements and layouts. The Pool Contractor shall be responsible for lines, grades,
and measurements from these points required for the installation of the pool.
C. Utilities:
1. The Contractor shall supply the water required for construction and filling and testing of
the pool from permanent accepted system.
D. The Pool Contractor shall test the Owner's natural water supply and furnish and supply start-
up chemicals as required for start-up, including chlorine and requirements to balance total
alkalinity and calcium hardness, and shall obtain same.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. The Pool Contractor shall warranty his work against defects in labor and equipment, including
paint, for a period of one year from Substantial Completion. Substantial Completion shall be
defined as the date of acceptance by the Owner or initial usage, whichever occurs first. This
warranty shall not include minor defects that do not affect the use of the pool such as
scratches, minor dents, or concrete curing cracks.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS: The following manufacturers are approved for use as identified in the
individual paragraphs below:
A. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers:
1. None
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. A & B Brush
2. Action/Haviland (800-333-0400)
3. American Olean Tile Co. (800-933-8453)
4. American Products
5. Anchor Industries, Inc. (800-544-4445)
6. Aqua Creek Products (888-687-3552)
7. Berkeley (Sta-Rite Water Systems) ( 888-237-5353)
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 6
8. Bio-Lab, Inc. (800-959-7946)
9. Blue White Industries (714-893-8529)
10. Cal-June, Inc. (818-761-3516)
11. Dal-Tile Corp. (800-933-8453)
12. Federal Stone Industries, Inc. ( 800-513-5030)
13. Frost Co. (Inter-Fab) (800-737-5386)
14. A. J. Giammanco & Associates, Inc. (Lion Pool Products) (800-546-6766)
15. Gould Pumps, Inc (315-568-2811)
16. Grace Construction Products (800-778-2880)
17. Guardex (Bio-Lab) (800-959-7946)
18. Halogen Supply (800-777-7946)
19. Hydrotech (Bio Lab). (800-795-7946)
20. Inlays Inc. (800-426-6873
21. Jandy (707.776.8200)
22. Lochinvar Corp. (615-889-8900)
23. Mameco International, Inc.; a Division of Tremco, Inc. (800-321-6412)
24. Mec-O-Matic (Pulsafeeader) (800-333-6677)
25. Mortex Manufacturing, Inc. (800-338-3255)
26. Omni (Div. Bio-Lab) (800-959-7946)
27. PAC-FAB, Inc. (see Paragon Aquatics) (800-983-7665)
28. Paragon Aquatics, a Division of Pentair, Inc. (845-463-7200) .
29. Pentair Pool Products (800-843-5628)
30. Purex (see Pentair Products)
31. Quaker Plastic Corporation (888-288-6644)
32. Rainbow, a Brand of Pentair, Inc. (800-831-7133)
33. Raypak, Inc (818-889-1500)
34. George Fischer Signet Scientific Co. (800-854-4090)
35. S.R. Smith, LLC (800-824-4387)
36. Spectrum Products (800-791-8057)
37. StaRite Pool and Spa Group a Pentair Company (800-843-5628)
38. Stenner
39. Swimquip (See Sta-Rite Pool Spa Group) (800-752-0183)
40. Taylor Technologies. (800-837-8548)
41. Telodyne Laars (415-382-8220)
42. Whitten (Aquatic Development Group) (518-783-0038)
43. W. R. Meadows, Pool Deck Construction Products (800-542-7665)
44. VAK PAK (800-877-1824)
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 7
2.02 POOL AND SPA STRUCTURE - GENERAL
A. Size of pool shall be as shown on Drawings.
B. Joint sealant shall be polyurethane, Mameco Vulkem No. 45.
C. Ceramic Tiling: Tile used in conjunction with surfaces in contact with water shall be furnished
and installed by pool Contractor.
D. Perimeter and general purpose sealants shall be polyurethane, refer to Section 07 92 00
(07920)
2.03 POOL & SPA MATERIALS
A. Concrete:
1. Definitions:
a. Gunite: Dry-mix. Originally a trade name used to designate a mixture of Portland
cement and sand thoroughly mixed dry, passed through a cement gun and
conveyed by air through a flexible tube, hydrated at the nozzle and placed by air
pressure.
b. Shotcrete: Wet-mix. transit-mix (ready-mix) combination of Portland cement,
aggregates and water, pumped in a plastic state to the nowle, where air is added to
place the material.
2. Materials and mixes for "Gunite" and shotcrete shall conform to GCA publication G-84.
3. Gunite:
a. Aggregate: ASTM C33, washed sand; clean, hard, sharp particles, well graded in
size within the following limits:
Size Percent by Weight
Passing through 3/8 inch screen 100
Passing through No. 4 95 to 100
Passing through No. 8 65 to 90
Passing through No. 16 45 to 75
Passing through No. 30 30 to 50
Passing through No. 50 10 to 22
Passing through No.100 2 to 8
b. Mix one part cement to 4 1/2 parts of sand based on dry, loose volume (minimum
3,000 psi compressive strength in 28 days).
c. Portland cement and water: As specified hereinafter.
4. Shotcrete:
a. Transit mix (ready-mix) materials conforming to aggregate specified above for
"Gunite" and with the additional following grading for pea gravel:
Sieve Size Percent by Weight
1/2" 100
3/8" 90
b. Mix Strength: Minimum 5,000 psi compressive strength in 28 days.
c. Submit design mix and certify material for weight, water content and mixing time.
d. Portland Cement and Water: As specified hereinafter.
5. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II.
6. Water: Potable.
7. Forms: Exterior plywood, APA-B8 Plyform Class 1, mill-oiled.
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 8
8. Form Oil: Lacquer or resin type compatible with mill-oil.
9. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615 grade 40.
10. Gauging Wires: Piano wire, 0.027" thick.
B. Ceramic Tiling:
1. [Refer to Interior Finish Index]
2. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic tile at Step Nosings:
a. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers:
1) None
b. Approved Manufacturers:
1) Dal-Tile Corp
2) American Olean Tile Co.
3. Provide certification by manufacturer for use in indoor pools.
4. Pool Tile: [Refer to Drawings and Interior Finish Index for size and location] [2" x 2"]
[3" x 3"] at water line below coping cap and at spa seating areas.
5. [2" x 2"] [3" x 3"] non-slip unglazed ceramic mosaic tile in color as shown in Interior Finish
Index at step nosings forming a [2"][3”] horizontal and [2"][3”] vertical band. Refer to
Interior Finish Index.
6. Special Tiles:
a. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers:
1) None
b. Approved Manufacturers:
1) Inlays Inc. (800-426-6873
7. Pool Depth Markings: 6" x 6" tile with 4" high lettering depth marking in both feet and
meters for skim line (smooth) and deck (non-slip), as required by local and state public
swimming pool codes.
a. Numbers with Small FT and Small M Tiles: “Ceramic FT & MDM Series”; Inlays Inc.
8. No Diving Sign Tile: Adjacent to each depth marker, provide international symbol "No
Diving" sign tile. "No Diving" tile shall be 6” x 6” for skim-line and 6" x 6" for deck (non-
slip) white ceramic with black lettering and markings and a red circle with cross hatch, as
required by local and state public swimming pool codes.. Where shown on Drawings,
provide 6” x 12” tile with 4" high lettering with text “NO DIVING”.
a. International Symbol No Diving Tiles: “Ceramic MG Series”; Inlays Inc.
b. Letters Only Tiles “No Diving”: “Ceramic TMG Series”; Inlays Inc.
9. Depth marking and no diving tiles shall be placed on the vertical pool walls as part of the
6” tile band below the coping so as to be easily readable from the water side. Depth
marking and "No Diving" tiles on the horizontal surface of deck, shall be within 18" of the
water edge and positioned to be read while standing on the deck facing the water. Pool
markings shall be placed at maximum and minimum depths, all points of slope change, at
every one foot of depth increment, and at major deviations in shape. Markers shall be
spaced at no more than 10 foot intervals and arranged to be uniformly located.
10. Tile Mortar and Grout: As specified in Section 09 30 00 (09310) – Tiling.
11. Refer to Interior Finish Index for colors.
C. Finish Plaster Mix:
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 9
1. White marble, White waterproof cement and bonding agent.
2. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers:
a. None
3. Approved Manufacturers:
a. “Diamond Brite” Pool Finish; SGM (Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.) (800-641-
9247)
b. No Substitutions
4. Finish and Color: Selected by Owner’s Representative
D. Sealant and Back-Up Material: See Section 07 92 00 (07920) - Joint Sealants
E. Precast Concrete Pool and Spa Coping:
1. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers:
a. None
2. Approved Manufacturers:
a. “Model DQ”; Federal Stone Industries, Inc. (301-271-7121)
b. Approved Substitution
3. Precast concrete, wet pour, white, 12-inches wide x minimum 2-feet long, safety hand
grip style, raised safety edge, coping stone with raised slip resistant pattern on upper
surface. Provide one-piece radius corners.
4. Provide bonding coat as recommended by finish manufacturer.
2.04 SPA
A. Type: Gunnite as specified above.
B. Heater: As selected by Owner.
C. See drawings for size and configuration.
D. Provide step and railing to meet all applicable codes.
E. Furnish and install with 15-minute remote timer for spa operation.
F. Warranty: Include one-year warranty starting at the Date of Substantial Performance.
2.05 FILTER SYSTEM
A. Pressure Filters:
1. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers:
a. None
2. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Paragon Aquatics, a Division of Pentair, Inc. (845-463-7200)
b. StaRite Pool and Spa Group a Pentair Company (800-843-5628)
c. Approved Substitution
3. Filter systems: Listed as approved by the National Sanitation Foundation for sand filters
at flow rates of 20 GPM per square foot of filter area, and bear the National Sanitation
Foundation Seal of Approval. Maximum filter flow rate shall not exceed 15 GPM per
square foot of filter area.
4. Filter or Filter Battery Stainless steel or fiberglass hi-rate pressure sand filters.
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 10
5. Include with each filter top mounted influent pressure gauge, reading 0 to 60 psi, manual
air release valve, multi-port diameter valve, backwash site glass and transparent dame
top.
B. Filter Media: Sand, with an effective size of 0.45 to 0.55 mm with uniformly coefficient of 1.6
maximum.
C. Filter Face Piping:
1. Pipe, valves, and fittings shall make a complete unit or battery from inlet to outlet.
2. Arrange piping to carry out operations of filtering, backwashing and by-pass of filter for
pool draining.
3. Face pipe and fittings: PVC SCH 40.
2.06 FLOW METERS
A. Flow Meter:
1. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers:
a. None
2. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Paragon Aquatics, a Division of Pentair, Inc. (845-463-7200)
b. StaRite Pool and Spa Group a Pentair Company (800-843-5628)
c. "CF-300 Series; Blue White Industries, pilot tube type.
d. Approved Substitution by Signet Scientific Co.
2.07 WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
A. Chemical Feeder by Owner.
B. Chemical Feeder:
1. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers:
a. None
2. Approved Manufacturers:
a. “Model 25163000”; Hydrotech
b. Approved Substitution by Omni
c. Approved Substitution by Guardex
d. Approved Substitution
3. Include in-line flow meter, flow control valve, clear dome top and shut-off valves on both
sides of feeder.
4. Quantity: Two - One at spa; one at pool.
C. Chemicals:
1. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers:
a. None
2. Approved Manufacturers:
a. "SpaBrom" bromine sticks - Hydrotech 20 lb.
b. Approved Substitution.
D. Test Kit:
1. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers:
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 11
a. None
2. Approved Manufacturers:
a. "#K-1744-H"; Taylor Technologies
b. “#26122000”-“Guardex” Bio-Lab.
c. Approved Substitution
2.08 POOL AND SPA HEATERS
A. Pool Heaters:
1. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers:
a. None
2. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Telodyne Laars (415-382-8220)
b. Raypak, Inc (818-889-1500)
c. Approved Substitution.
B. Heaters:
1. Size for pool and spa as shown on the Drawings, complete. Design based on
maintaining a temperature of 80 degrees F for pool and 104 degrees F for spa.
2. Heaters must be A.S.M.E coded and labeled.
C. Furnish in-line thermometer with 2 degrees F. intervals and a minimum range of 60-120
degrees F.
2.09 RECIRCULATING PUMP AND MOTOR
A. Pumps:
1. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers:
a. None
2. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Paragon Aquatics, a Division of Pentair, Inc. (845-463-7200)
b. StaRite Pool and Spa Group a Pentair Company (800-843-5628)
c. Approved Substitution
3. Self priming unit with hair and lint strainer capable of delivering the designated GPM at
the designated head during the filtering operation without overloading along the full length
of the pump curve.
B. Pump Motors:
1. Energy efficient, UL listed "E-plus Century”; Gould Pumps, Inc.
2. Electrical Characteristics: As shown on Drawings
2.10 PIPING
A. Piping within filter room: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), Type 1-1220, Schedule 40 IPS, Class #135.
N.S.F. approved and labeled.
B. Pool fill line: Schedule K copper.
C. Filtered water supply piping to pool: Schedule 80 PVC. N.S.F. approved.
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 12
D. Filter connection piping which connects the filter plant to the filter pump and to the
recirculation piping, backwash piping and other piping associated with filter system: PVC,
Type 1-1220, Schedule 40 IPS, Class #135. N.S.F. approved and labeled.
E. Fittings for PVC pipe: Whenever PVC pipe is used, all fittings shall be heavy weight, Schedule
40, of same manufacture as PVC pipe used.
F. NOTE: The first 24" of piping coming from pool heater shall be copper. Where the copper
connects to PVC piping, after the 24", provide a copper to PVC transition connection.
G. Valves:
1. Small Valves (up to and including 2-1/2" in size): Gate valves, all brass with threaded
ends for ferrous pipe, 125 lb. non-rising stem type.
2. Large valves (larger than 2-1/2"): Rubber lined, cast iron, water type butterfly valves.
Valves shall be hand operated with cadmium plated ductile iron discs, stainless steel
stems and pins, and Buna-N seats and rated for 125 psi.
3. Valve extension stems and keys: Provide as required to operate the system.
4. Pipe identification: Plastic tags for valves in filter room.
H. Pipe Joints:
1. Cement and thinners: Use for making solvent welded joints. Of type compatible with
kind of piping used.
2. Teflon tape (.003" min thickness): Use on the male threads of threaded pipe joints.
I. Fillers and levelers: Provide instrumentation sensors and valves to automatically fill and
maintain level of pool complete with wiring and controls.
J. Chemical feed and heater controls: Provide instrumentation sensors and valves to
automatically feed chemicals and maintain temperature of pool complete with wiring and
controls.
2.11 SCHEDULES OF POOL FITTINGS' LIGHTS AND EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
Description Manufacturer Model Number
A. Pool Fittings
1. Floor Inlet Frost A-41014
2. Pool Wall Inlet Swimquip 8429
3. Auto Water Level Control Mar-Max LTC 0024S
4. 1-1/2" Hydrostat Valve Frost A-41452
5. 1-1/2" Hydrostat Tube Swimquip 7017-157
6. 1-1/2" Skimmer American Prod 844201
7. 1" Fill Spout Frost A-41240
8. Pool Main Drain Sump Swimquip 7017-0103
9. Pool Main Drain Grate Swimquip 7010741
B. Underwater Lights:
(Coordinate with Section 16510(26 51 00))
1. 100W/300W/12V Light
(Two) Pac-Fab PHL-301/PHL-300
2. Light Niche Pac-Fab 425.4
C. Deck Fittings:
1. Grab Rail, 1.90-1/2” OD x .065
Stainless Steel with smooth grip finish
S. R. Smith
2. Deck Anchor S. R. Smith AS-100B
3. Escutcheon Plate S. R. Smith IEP-100
4. Ladder 3 tread 1.90” OD x .065” S. R. Smith SRS 506
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 13
Stainless Steel with mirror finish.
Provide every 75’ at perimeter
D. Maintenance Accessories:
1. Vacuum Cleaner Head Swivel Wheel Rainbow Flex-A-Vacuum
2. Vacuum Hose Heavy Duty Action/Haviland 1-1/2" x 35'
3. Vacuum Pole (Telescopic 8’ to 16’) Rainbow #812-16 (8'-16’)
4. Utility Pole Frost A40177-2
5. 18" Curved Wall Brush A&B Brush 3000
Spectrum 13210
6. Algae Brush A&B Brush 2004
Spectrum 13260/13270
7. Pole Adapter Frost A-41420 w/Brass
Bolts & Wing Nuts
8. Deck Swab Halogen Supply 48" CR Rubber
9. Brush Stabilizer A&B Brush Water Foil
E. Safety Accessories:
1. Life Buoy (24" Approx.) Cal-June, Inc. U.S.C.G.
2. Throw Line w/ Floating Balls (Verify
that minimum length of line is equal to
width of pool)
AJ Giammanco [60’]
3. Life Hook Rainbow #153 Double Arm
(R221026/R221030)
4. Life Hook Pole Rainbow 820-16 (R191116)
5. Life Hook Pole Adapter Frost A-14420 w/Brass
Bolts and Wing Nuts
6. 16 Unit First Aid Kit
2.12 DECK DRAIN SYSTEM
A. Deck Drain System.
1. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers:
a. None
2. Approved Manufacturers:
a. “Deck-O-Drain”, W. R. Meadows, Pool Deck Construction Products (800-542-7665)
b. “Deck Drain-A-Way System II”, Quaker Plastic Corporation (888-288-6644)
c. “Drain Rite” Mortex Manufacturing (800-338-3255)
d. Approved Substitution
B. Material:
1. Heavy wall, bondable, non-corrosive PVC
2. Provide all nailing clips, couplers and fittings, end adapters, clean-out plugs and
protective tape over drain surface.
C. Size: +/- 1-1/2” x 3-1/4” high x min. 8 ft. lengths, Center Channel.
D. Color: As selected by Owner’s Representative
2.13 ADA ACCESSIBLE LIFT
A. Accessible Lift:
1. Avendra, LLC Preferred Manufacturers:
a. None
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 14
2. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Hydraulic Powered, Fixed Lift: "Swim-Lift Model Gallatin - ADA Handicap Pool/Spa
Lift"; Spectrum Aquatics (800-791-8057) including the following accessories:
1) 400 lbs weight capacity
2) “Preset Anchor” for new construction applications.
3) “Water Box for Water Powered Pool Lift”
4) Model 27364 Cover”
b. Rechargeable Battery Powered, Fixed Lift: "Swim-Lift Model 57961 Anchored
Freedom - ADA Handicap Pool/Spa Lift"; Spectrum Aquatics (800-791-8057)
including the following accessories:
1) 350 lbs weight capacity
2) One watertight remote control, battery and battery charger, footrest, deck
anchor, seat belt.
3) Model 47949 Cover”
c. Rechargeable Battery Powered, Fixed Lift: “The Revolution Lift Model F-700RL”;
Aqua Creek Products (888-687-3552), including the following accessories:
1) 500 lbs weight capacity
2) Secondary Anchor Kit”
3) “Model F-720RLC Cover”
d. Rechargeable Battery Powered, Fixed Lift: “The Scout Lift Model F-8005SC”; Aqua
Creek Products (888-687-3552), including the following accessories:
1) 350 lbs weight capacity
2) “Model F-450SC Cover”
e. Rechargeable Battery Powered, Fixed Lift: “The Scout Hi-Lift Model F-802SCNA-
HLD”; Aqua Creek Products (888-687-3552), including the following accessories:
1) “350 lbs weight capacity
2) Model F-450SC Cover”
f. Approved substitution.
g. Rechargeable Battery Powered, Portable Lift: "Swim-Lift Model 42618 Portable
Freedom - ADA Handicap Pool/Spa Lift"; Spectrum Aquatics (800-791-8057)
including the following accessories:
1) 300 lbs weight capacity
2) One watertight remote control, battery and battery charger, footrest, deck
anchor, seat belt.
3) Model 47949 Cover”
h. Rechargeable Battery Powered, Portable Lift: “Splash! – Semi Portable Lift
System”; S.R. Smith, LLC (800-824-4387), including the following accessories:
1) 400 lbs weight capacity
2) “Model 400-000 Caddy”
3) “Model 940-3000 Total Cover”
i. Rechargeable Battery Powered, Portable Lift: “The Revolution Lift”; Aqua Creek
Products (888-687-3552), including the following accessories:
1) 500 lbs weight capacity
2) “Model FR-714TC Transport Cart”
3) “Model F-710RLA Anchor Kit”
4) “Model F-720RLC Cover”
j. Approved substitution.
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 15
B. [Portable, ]Hydraulic or battery-powered, self assisted power lift, ADA (2010) compliant,
stainless steel frame with a capacity to support minimum 300 pounds with the horizontal arm
fully extended. [Must be able to accommodate locations at both the pool and spa].
C. Provide lifter, anchor assemblies, and all other components required for a complete and
operational installation. Provide sleeves in deck at pool and at spa if required.
1. For Hydraulic powered system, furnish and install a stainless steel water box in the pool
deck adjacent to the installation site of the lift. A hose spigot shall be plumbed into the
box to allow for the connection of a flexible hose.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas in which work is to be performed. Report in writing to Owner's Representative
all prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of work. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Starting work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall then,
at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work
encountered.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Perform earthwork and dewater excavation in compliance with Section 31 20 00 (02300) -
Earthwork. Remove excess earth from site if required and as directed by the Owner's
Representative.
B. Trench for system as specified in Section 31 20 00 (02300) - Earthwork and provide system
as specified in Section 33 00 00 (02500) - Utility Services.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Formwork and Reinforcement:
1. Install form work to lines and profiles shown. Brace forms for work to prevent movement
during concrete placing operations.
a. Allow other trades sufficient time for installation of equipment and materials which
must be fastened to forms.
b. Clean form surfaces prior to concrete placing operations.
2. Place reinforcing steel as shown on drawings. Steel shall be free from dirt' rust' oil, paint
and mill scale.
3. Securely wire-tie steel at points where bars cross. Stagger splices and laps.
4. Install gauging wires to establish thickness of finish work.
5. After placing pool reinforcing, but before placing concrete, confirm that grounding circuits
have been provided by the electrical contractor to steel reinforcement, grab rails, and
hand rails, as required by the National Electrical Code, Article 680. No concrete shall be
placed until this requirement has been complied with.
B. Concrete:
1. Placing of "Gunite" and shotcrete: Conform to the requirements of GCA publication G-84
and as specified herein.
2. Gunite:
a. Mixing: Mix dry in batch mixing machine for a period of not less than 1 minute.
b. Mix and strength: As specified in Part 2.
3. Shotcrete
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 16
a. Mixing time: Mixing time for materials delivered by ready-mix trucks to job site, shall
not exceed two hours or 250 revolutions of drum, whichever comes first. Additional
water may be added at job site only if requested by Contractor. When additional
water is added, rotate drum minimum of 30 additional revolutions.
4. Placing Concrete:
a. Place concrete against original undisturbed soil, thoroughly compacted earth.
b. Remove all loose, fine aggregate or rebound from surfaces receiving concrete
before placing succeeding layers. Whenever possible, first layer shall entirely cover
reinforcing steel to secure it in proper position.
c. Where new concrete is applied against existing concrete, thoroughly clean the
existing surface and drench with water at least twice on the day before placing new
concrete. Surfaces upon which concrete will be applied shall be sufficiently damp to
prevent excessive absorption of water content in new concrete mix, but not so wet
as to overcome suction.
d. Concrete deposited on vertical surfaces shall be shot at right angle to surface
starting at the bottom and continuing upward. Build up in layers of a thickness that
will not slump, allowing sufficient time between placing of layers for initial set to take
place.
5. Finishing:
a. When thickness and planes outlined by forms and gauging wires have been
reached, rod surfaces to true lines. After rodding, remove gauging wires. Finish all
exposed surfaces to straight and true lines.
b. Finish: Gun finish as left by nozzle.
6. Continuously moisture cure for no less than 7 days.
C. Equipment:
1. Flow meters: Install in straight run of pipe having minimum length of 10 pipe diameters
upstream and 4 pipe diameters downstream and in position that can be easily read by
operator.
2. Chemical Feed injection: Locate Injection points downstream from all filter room
equipment.
D. Deck Drain System:
1. Install deck drain system in strict accordance with manufacturer recommendations and
written instructions.
2. Grade subsoil, sloping it toward drain location. Drive 3-1/2” short stakes into ground at
30” o/c – two nailing strips per 10 ft. section. Attach nailing clips and place drain over the
stakes. Use couplers to ensure a straight even line. After aligning, nail firmly to stakes.
3. Insert adapter. Install Clean-out. Place concrete and trowel gradual (min. ¼”/ft.) slope to
drain. After concrete has set, install end plug.
4. Coordinate removal of protective tape with deck finish coating application.
E. Piping:
1. Cut all pipe with mechanical cutter without damage to pipe.
2. Placing and Laying: Inspect pipe for defects before installation. Clean the interior of pipe
thoroughly of foreign matter and keep clean during laying operation. Pipe shall not be
laid in water or when trench conditions are unacceptable as determined by the Owner's
Representative. Water shall be kept out of the trench until the pipe is installed. When
work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely closed so that no
trench water, earth or other substance will enter the pipes or fittings.
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 17
3. Threaded Joints: After cutting and before threading the pipe shall be reamed and shall
have burrs removed. Screw joints shall be made with graphite or inert filter and oil or with
an approved graphite compound applied to male threads only. Threads shall be full-cut
and not more than 3 threads on the pipe remain exposed. Use Teflon 11 tape on the
male threads of all threaded pipe joints. Caulking of threaded joints to stop or prevent
leaks will not be permitted. Unions shall be provided where required for disconnection of
exposed piping. Unions will be permitted where access is provided.
4. Solvent welded joints shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's printed
instructions and the following minimum standards:
a. Fittings shall fit easily on the pipe before applying cement. The outer surface area of
pipe and inner wall of fitting shall be dry and dean. Thinner is to be applied to the
outer surface of the pipe and to the inner surface of the fitting. Cement is to be
applied to the outer surface of the pipe, or on the male section of fittings only. When
the outside surface area of the pipe is satisfactorily covered with cement allow ten
(10) seconds open time to elapse before inserting pipe end into fitting. After full
insertion of pipe into fitting, turn fitting about the pipe end approximately 1/8 to 1/4 of
a turn. Wipe off excess cement at the joint in a neat cove bead.
b. Joints shall remain undisturbed for a minimum of 10 minutes from time of jointing the
pipe and fitting. If necessary to apply pressure to a newly made joint, limit to 10% of
rated pipe pressure, during the first 24 hours after the joint has been made.
c. Full working pressure shall not be applied until the joints have set for a period of 24
hours.
d. Make provisions for expansion and contraction by way of swing joints or snaking.
e. Protect plastic pipe from exposure to aromatic hydro-carbons, halogenated hydra
carbons, and most of esters and ketones that attack the material. Protect all pipe
from mechanical damage and long exposure to sunlight during storage.
5. Install piping without cross connections or inter-connection between distribution supply
for drinking purposes and swimming pool that will permit backflow of water into potable
water supply. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation.
Equipment and pool fittings shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and
chemical or mechanical injury. At completion of work fittings, materials and equipment
shall be thoroughly clean and adjusted for proper operation.
6. Filter Face Piping: Arrange to carry out operations of filtering backwashing and filter
draining.
7. Valve identification: Label all valves.
8. Testing and Flushing:
a. Pressure Piping: After the pipe is laid, the joints completed, and the trench partially
backfilled leaving joints exposed for examination, subject new lines to a hydrostatic
pressure of not less than 50 pounds per square inch. Joints shall remain watertight
under this pressure for a period of two hours.
b. Gravity Lines: A water test shall be applied to all gravity drain piping system, either
in their entirety or in sections. All openings shall be tightly plugged and each system
filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. Water shall be kept
in the system, or in the portion under test's for at least 15 minutes before inspection
starts. System shall be tight at all joints.
c. Flushing: Pipelines leading to the pool shall be thoroughly flushed clean with
chlorinated water before the pool is filled and placed in use.
F. Plaster Finish:
1. Finish concrete surfaces in pool with a wood float finish to a smooth consistent finish
acceptable to Owner Representative.
SECTION 13 11 00.02 (13152) - SWIMMING POOLS - INDOOR Page 18
2. Fill uneven surfaces and depressions with [manufacturer's recommendations ] [cement
plaster brown coat].
3. Wash all pool surfaces thoroughly with dilute solution of muriatic acid and flush with fresh
water to assure a clean surface free of loose materials, dust, and foreign matter.
4. Plaster installation:
a. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
b. Do not apply plaster when rain is imminent or at temperatures below 60°F.
c. Apply in two coats using the double-back method to obtain a total thickness of not
less than 3/8" or more than ½”. Use tile as screed.
5. Trowel to smooth, dense, impervious surface free of stains and uniform white color
consistency.
6. Fill pool as plaster work progresses.
G. Tile Installation: Where shown on Drawings, use setting materials and grout in accordance
with Section 09310 (09 30 13).
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. For Gunite Shotcrete Work:
1. Compressive strength test: Take 1 sample for pool floor construction and 1 sample for
wall construction but no less than a minimum test for each 50 cu. yd. of concrete.
2. Submit copy of test results to Owner's Representative.
B. Water Treatment
1. Obtain a chemical analysis of the source/make-up water supply and submit to Owner's
Representative. Include the following:
a. Total alkalinity/ppm
b. Calcium hardness/ppm
c. Chlorine/ppm
d. pH
e. Iron
f. Copper
2. Treat and balance pool water prior to turnover of pool to Owner's Operations Division.
3. Balance water to establish:
Total alkalinity: 80-100 ppm
Calcium hardness: 20~275 ppm
Total Available CHL (Pool): 1.5 ppm
Free Available CHL (Pool: 1.5 ppm
Total Available CHL (Spa): 3.0 ppm
Free Available CHL (Spa): 3.0 ppm
pH: 7.4 - 7.6
Iron content: 0.0 ppm
Copper content: 0.0 ppm
Saturation Index -.3- +.3
4. Stabilization (outdoor pool) 40 ppm
END OF SECTION
SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 1
SECTION 14 21 00 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes electric traction passenger elevators.
1.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features,
finishes, and similar information.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at
each landing, coordination with building structure, relationships with other
construction, and locations of equipment.
2. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at
points of support, and maximum and average power demands.
C. Samples: For finishes involving color selection.
1.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For elevator equipment, accessories, and
components, from manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit,
and machine room layout and dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, and electrical
service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by
authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.
C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from
Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard one-year maintenance agreement, starting
on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations,
conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.
SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 2
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace
elevator work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 5 year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELEVATOR MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. KONE Inc.
2. Schindler Elevator Corp.
3. ThyssenKrupp Elevator.
4. Otis Elevator
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with requirements for accessible elevators in the
United States Access Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1.
C. Seismic Performance: Elevator system shall withstand the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and shall comply with elevator seismic
requirements in ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
1. Project Seismic Design Category: As indicated on structural drawings.
2. Elevator Component Importance Factor: 1.0.
2.3 ELEVATORS
A. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Unless
otherwise indicated, manufacturer's standard components shall be used, as included in
standard elevator systems and as required for complete system.
B. Elevator Description:
1. Elevator Number(s): Insert elevator number(s) as indicated on Drawings.
2. Machine Type: Geared traction.
3. Rated Load: 2500 lb or 3500 lb
4. Rated Speed: 200 fpm.
5. Operation System: Selective-collective automatic operation.
6. Security Features: Keyswitch operation.
7. Car Enclosures:
a. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 3
b. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
c. Side and Rear Wall Panels: as indicated on brand standards or interior
design documents.
d. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
e. Ceiling: as indicated on brand standards or interior design documents
Handrails: 1/2 by 2 inches rectangular satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at
rear of car.
f. Floor prepared to receive floor finish as indicated on brand standards or
interior design documents.
8. Hoistway Entrances:
a. Width: 42 inches.
b. Height: 84 inches.
c. Type: Single-speed side sliding.
d. Frames: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
e. Doors and Transoms: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
9. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
10. Additional Requirements:
a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with
frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.
b. Provide hooks for protective pads in all cars and one complete set(s) of full-
height protective pads.
2.4 TRACTION SYSTEMS
A. Elevator Machines: Variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type hoisting machines
and solid-state power converters.
B. Fluid for Hydraulic Buffers: Fire-resistant fluid.
C. Machine Beams: Provide steel framing to support elevator hoisting machine and
deflector sheaves from the building structure. Comply with Section 05 50 00 "Metal
Fabrications" for materials and fabrication.
D. Guides: Roller guides or polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides. Provide guides
at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames.
2.5 OPERATION SYSTEMS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation systems as
required to provide type of operation indicated.
B. Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters' service.
1. Keyswitch Operation: Push buttons are activated and deactivated by security
keyswitches at car-control stations.
SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 4
2.6 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES
A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more
microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance.
Interruption of one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.
B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for pre determined
adjustable time, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound
and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy.
2.7 CAR ENCLOSURES
A. General: Provide enameled or powder-coated steel car enclosures to receive
removable wall panels, with removable car roof, access doors, power door operators,
and ventilation.
1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops
where required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.
B. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1. Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, formed-metal construction; fabricated from
stainless-steel sheet.
2. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to 1/2-inch fire-
retardant-treated particleboard with manufacturer's standard protective edge trim.
Panels shall have a flame-spread index of 25 or less, when tested according to
ASTM E 84. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect
from elevator manufacturer's full range.
3. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from
stainless-steel sheet or by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and
edges of enameled or powder-coated steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds
4. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors.
5. Sills: Extruded or machined metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
6. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and ceiling panels of translucent
acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic.
7. Metal Ceiling: Flush panels, with incandescent downlights in the center of each
panel.
8. Light Fixture Efficiency: Not less than 35 lumens/W.
9. Ventilation Fan Efficiency: Not less than 3.0 cfm/W.
2.8 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES
A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-
frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and
accessories. Frame size and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction.
1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self-
supporting with reinforced head sections.
B. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply
with NFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable
SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 5
to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing at as close-to-neutral pressure as
possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
1. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours with 30-minute temperature rise of 450
deg F.
C. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1. Enameled or Powder-Coated Steel Frames: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel
sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel or powder-coat finish; colors as
selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet.
3. Star of Life Symbol: Identify emergency elevators with star of life symbol, not less
than 3 inches high, on both jambs of hoistway door frames.
4. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from
stainless-steel sheet or by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and
edges of enameled or powder-coated steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds
metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning.
5. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges.
6. Sills: Extruded or machined metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick.
7. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.
2.9 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit
until call has been fulfilled. Provide buttons and lighted elements illuminated with LEDs.
B. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed or semirecessed car-
control stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, either integral with car-
control station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by
authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with
visible signal, which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not
require handset use. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification,
instructions for use, and battery backup power supply.
D. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted
cabinet in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way
telephone communication service.
E. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located
above car door or above car-control station. Also, provide audible signal to indicate to
passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. Include
travel direction arrows if not provided in car-control station.
F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing.
SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 6
G. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal
landings. Provide the following:
1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance
frames.
2. Units mounted in both jambs of entrance frame.
H. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival
and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.
1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on cars.
I. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button
stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating
that in case of fire, elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead.
Provide one sign at each hall push-button station unless otherwise indicated.
2.10 FINISH MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed,
matte finish.
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, commercial steel, Type B, pickled.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.
D. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304.
E. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
F. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.
G. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS or
Type HGL.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts
to minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to
elevator system.
B. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by
manufacturers.
C. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch, up or down, regardless of load and travel direction.
D. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with
nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.
SECTION 142100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Page 7
E. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows unless otherwise indicated:
1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at
center of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers.
2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance.
3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting
elevator use (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required
and recommended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and
agencies.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to one elevator.
Comply with the following requirements for elevator used for construction purposes:
1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of
finished car, to protect finishes from damage.
2. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as
needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment.
3. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service.
4. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence
remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the
shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as
required.
3.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service
shall include 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer.
Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective
components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator
operation at rated speed and capacity.
END OF SECTION 14 21 00
SECTION 149133 - LAUNDRY AND LINEN CHUTES Page 1
SECTION 14 91 33 - LAUNDRY AND LINEN CHUTES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes laundry and linen chutes.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Chase: The shaft that encloses a chute.
B. Access Door: Door other than an intake or discharge door that penetrates the chase
wall for service access to devices in the chase.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting and attachment details.
2. Include diagrams for power, signal and control wiring.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plan(s) and other details drawn to scale, and coordinated with
each other, using input from installers of the items involved.
B. Product certificates.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and maintenance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
1. Chutes International.
2. Midland Chutes.
3. U.S. Chutes; U.S.C. Group.
SECTION 149133 - LAUNDRY AND LINEN CHUTES Page 2
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a qualified testing and inspecting agency, for fire-protection ratings
indicated.
1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric (neutral) pressure according to NFPA 252 or
UL 10B.
2. Intake Doors: Labeled, 1-1/2-hour fire-resistance rated with 30-minute
temperature rise of 250 deg F.
3. Discharge Doors: Labeled, 1-1/2-hour fire-resistance rated with 30-minute
temperature rise of 250 deg F.
4. Access Doors: Labeled, 1-1/2-hour fire-resistance rated with 30-minute
temperature rise of 250 deg F.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
C. Standard: Provide chutes complying with NFPA 82.
2.3 CHUTES
A. Chute Metal: Aluminum-coated, cold-rolled, commercial steel sheet;
ASTM A 463/A 463M, Type 1, with not less than T1-40 coating.
1. Thickness: 0.060 inch.
B. Chute Size: 24-inch diameter.
2.4 DOORS
A. Intake-Door Assemblies: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, stainless-steel self-closing
units with positive latch and latch handle, with stainless-steel trim; constructed as
required for performance requirements indicated; and with frame suitable for the
enclosing chase construction.
1. Door Type: Side hinged, 180-degree swing, square.
2. Size: Manufacturer's standard size for door type, chute type, and diameter
indicated.
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard satin or No. 3 directional polish.
4. Lockset: Lever-handle-type cylinder lock that releases latch with key that is
removable only when cylinder is locked.
a. Lock Cylinder: Cylinders standard with manufacturer.
b. Keying: For each chute, key cylinders alike.
c. Keys: Two for each cylinder.
5. Electrical Interlocks: Interlock system that is energized by opening one intake
door; remaining intake doors automatically lock when system is energized.
SECTION 149133 - LAUNDRY AND LINEN CHUTES Page 3
B. Discharge-Door Assemblies: Aluminum-coated-steel doors; horizontal-discharge, top-
hinged, self-closing and latching, hopper-type door; constructed as required for
performance requirements indicated; equipped with 165 deg F fusible links that cause
doors to close in the event of fire; with floor-mounted leg brace designed to absorb
impact of material dropping against chute; and with minimum NPS 2 (DN 50) drain pipe
connection.
C. Detector System: Heat- and smoke-detecting interlock system with temperature-rise
elements that locks chute doors when temperature in chute reaches a predetermined,
adjustable temperature.
1. Locate smoke detector outside discharge door with solenoid to close discharge
door.
D. Access-Door Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard ASTM A 240/A 240M,
Type 302/304, stainless-steel doors with trim; constructed as required for performance
requirements indicated; with frame suitable for the enclosing chase construction; and in
satin or No. 3 directional polish finish; equipped with cylinder locks that release latch
with keys that are removable only when cylinder is locked.
1. Lock Cylinder: Cylinders standard with manufacturer.
2. Keying: Key access-door cylinders alike.
3. Keys: Two for each cylinder.
E. Manual Control System: Control system with manual switch that lock chute doors
during shutdown hours and service operations.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Chute Fire Sprinklers: NFPA 13; manufacturer's standard, recessed, automatic,
NPS 1/2 sprinklers; ready for piping connections.
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Factory-assemble chutes to greatest extent practicable.
B. Roof Vent: Extend vent to height above roofing surface as indicated on Drawings.
Equip vent with full insect screening and metal explosion-release cap. Fabricate with
roof-deck flange, counterflashing, and clamping ring of nonferrous metal compatible
with chute metal.
C. Chute Fire Sprinklers: Install internally within chute, recessed out of the chute area
through which material travels, and according to NFPA 13.
D. Equipment Access: Fabricate chutes with access for maintaining equipment located
within the chute, such as flushing and sanitizing units, fire sprinklers, and plumbing and
electrical connections.
SECTION 149133 - LAUNDRY AND LINEN CHUTES Page 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install and test chutes before installing enclosing chase construction.
B. Install chutes according to NFPA 82 and manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install chutes plumb, without obstructions that might prevent materials from free falling
within chutes.
D. Anchor flanges of chute vents to roof curbs before installing roofing and flashing. Install
chute-vent counterflashing after roofing and roof-penetration flashing are installed.
E. Electrical Interlock System: Install according to applicable NECA 1 recommendations.
F. Test and adjust chute components after installation. Operate doors, locks, and interlock
systems to demonstrate that hardware operates properly and smoothly and electrical
wiring is connected correctly.
G. Test heat- and smoke-sensing devices for proper operation.
H. Do not remove labels of testing and inspecting agencies.
3.2 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain each chute and related equipment.
END OF SECTION 14 91 33
SECTION 21 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Page 1
SECTION 21 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Piping Materials and Fittings
2. Joining Materials
3. Dielectric Fittings
4. Mechanical Sleeve Seals
5. Piping Specialties
6. Piping Installation
7. Equipment Installation
8. Concrete Bases.
9. Erection of Metal Supports
10. Erection of Wood Supports
11. Cutting and Patching
12. Grouting
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 21 10 00 (13900) – Fire Suppression Systems
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Example s include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
SECTION 21 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Page 2
1. Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, mechanical sleeve seals, and
identification m aterials and devices.
2. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of fire
suppression equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations,
and building components. Show space requirements for installation and access.
Indicate if sequence and coordination of installations are important to efficient flow of the
Work. Include the following:
a. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem
movement.
b. Clearances for installing and maintaining installation.
c. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties,
including space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
d. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.
e. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
f. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
g. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
h. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building
during construction.
i. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and
ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
j. Reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installation of air outlets and
inlets, light fixtures, communication system components, sprinklers, and other
ceiling-mounted items.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate fire suppression equipment installation with other building components.
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction to allow for fire suppression installations.
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of fire suppression materials and equipment
for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning
before closing in building.
E. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if fire suppression items requiring
access are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in
Section 08 31 00 - "Access Doors and Panels."
F. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices
are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and
similar concealment.
SECTION 21 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Page 3
1.06 Posted Operating Instructions
A. Provide and post operating instructions for all fire suppression systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full -face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32.
1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10
percent lead content.
2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent maximum
lead content.
3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.
4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.
5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead
content.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.
2. BAg1: Silver alloy.
3. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
G. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D2564. Include primer according to ASTM F656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D3138.
H. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F477, elastomeric gasket.
I. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-steel
bolts and nuts.
J. Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes.
1. Sleeve: ASTM A126, Class B, gray iron.
SECTION 21 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Page 4
2. Followers: ASTM A47 malleable iron or ASTM A536 ductile iron.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
5. Finish: Enamel paint.
2.02 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Anvil International, Inc., a Subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. (603-422-8000)
2. Central Plastics Co. (800-654-3872)
3. Grinnell Mechanical Products, A Tyco International Company (800-500-4768)
4. Perfection Corporation (800-544-6344)
5. Mueller Industries, Inc. (800-348-8464)
6. Victaulic Co. of America (800-742-5842)
7. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. (978-688-1811)
8. Zurn Plumbing Products Group of Jacuzzi Brands, Inc. (805-238-7100)
B. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to
prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
C. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld -neck
end types and matching piping system materials.
D. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
E. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure
at 180 deg F.
F. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150-psig minimum
working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
G. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-face or
ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt
sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150-psig minimum
working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
H. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.03 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
a. Metraflex Inc. (800-621-4347)
b. PSI-Thunderline/Link-Seal (800-423-2410)
B. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.
2.04 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
SECTION 21 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Page 5
3. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
B. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to
conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.
1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
2. OD: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and set screw.
a. Finish: Polished chrome-plate.
4. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.
2.05 GROUT
A. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, non-
staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psig, 28-day compressive strength.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specifies otherwise.
Individual Division 21 piping Sections specifies unique piping installation requirements.
B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate
general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements
were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on
Coordination Drawings as required by Division 01 Sections and as outlined in Part 1 of this
section.
C. Install piping at indicated slope.
D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or p arallel to building walls.
Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow
sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling pan el removal.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation.
J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
SECTION 21 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Page 6
M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board
partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chrome-
plated finish.
2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set screw.
3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass with concealed hinge, set screws, and chrome-plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set-screw or spring clips.
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and
roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other
wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below
floor slab as required to secure clamping rings where required.
2. Build sleeves into walls and slabs as work progresses.
3. Install sleeves large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes sm aller than 6-inch NPS (DN150).
b. Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6-inch NPS (DN150) and larger, penetrating
gypsum-board partitions.
4. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure
flashing between clamping flanges. Refer to Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing and
Trim" for flashing.
a. Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout.
5. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealant. Refer to Section 07 92 00 "Joint
Sealants" for materials.
6. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless
otherwise indicated.
O. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger.
3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.
P. Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.
SECTION 21 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Page 7
Q. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire stopping materials. Refer to Section
07 84 00 - "Firestopping" for materials.
R. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
S. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
T. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in
individual piping specification Sections:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to CDA’s "Copper Tube Handbook."
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe
and Tube."
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and
restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat
or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal
threading is specified.
c. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being
threaded.
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended Practices and
Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and welding
operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size,
type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
Assemble joints by s equencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and
gaskets as flat and parallel as poss ible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten
bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.
8. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean
cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
a. Comply with ASTM F402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
b. CPVC Piping: ASTM D2846 and ASTM F493.
c. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D2672.
d. PVC Non-pressure Piping: ASTM D2855.
9. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean
cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D2657 procedures and manufacturer's
written instructions.
a. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
SECTION 21 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Page 8
b. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
U. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at
final connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS (DN50) or smaller threaded
pipe connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves
and at final connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights is not indicated.
B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only
in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Owner’s Representative.
C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install fire suppression equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement
of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to
other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping install ed at required slope as specified in other
Division 21 sections.
F. Clearance from Electrical Equipment: Wet piping is prohibited in electric rooms and closets,
elevator machine rooms and installation over transformers, switchboards and motor control
centers.
3.03 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates
for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psig 28-day compressive-strength concrete and
reinforcement as specified in Section 03 30 00 - "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.04 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor fire suppression materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
C. Prime and paint all metal supports per Section 09 90 00 requirements similar to “Pipes and
Mechanical Equipment”.
3.05 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor fire
suppression materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view
or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners
without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
SECTION 21 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION Page 9
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary
for fire suppression installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
C. Refer to Division 01 Sections for additional requirements.
3.07 GROUTING
A. Install nonmetallic, non-shrink, grout for fire suppression equipment base bearing surfaces,
pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipm ent.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 21 10 00 (13900) - FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS Page 1
SECTION 21 10 00 (13900) - FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe and Fittings.
2. Sprinklers.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
2. Section 28 31 00 - Fire Alarm and Detection Systems: Wire and connection of sprinkler
flow and tamper switches
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor is responsible for code compliance, research, design,
coordination, and installation of a complete and functional hydraulically calculated sprinkler
system (and standpipe system, if required) that meets the approval of and is in accordance
with all applicable regulations and requirements of the following and as further specified:
1. Current editions of NFPA 13, 14, 20, 25, and 96.
2. Applicable Codes.
3. Authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Alarm system devices including alarm valves, flow switches, pressure switches, tamper
switches and coordination with Fire Alarm and Detection Subcontractor.
C. Shop drawings and calculations prepared and submitted in accordance with the requirements
of all Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
D. Obtaining all permits and approvals of the fire protection system.
E. Field acceptance testing.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 with the following
supporting data:
1. Product Data:
a. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, characteristics, models, options and
other supplemental data to clearly communicate information specific to this project.
b. Submit separate "Letter of Conformance" for each specified item.
2. Shop Drawings and calculations sealed by a registered Professional Engineer licensed in
the state where the project is located.
3. Be responsible for code research and obtaining all required flow test data and
hydraulically designing a fire protection system that meets all applicable requirements.
Arrange for, and conduct the flow test.
4. Fire protection submittal data shall include the following:
5. Flow Test Data.
6. Complete Hydraulic Calculations.
7. Complete Stamped and Coordinated Shop Drawings.
SECTION 21 10 00 (13900) - FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS Page 2
8. Pipe and Fittings.
9. Valves.
10. Sprinkler Heads.
11. Escutcheons.
12. All Applicable Devices, Alarms, and Specialties.
13. Air Compressor and Accessories (If required)
14. Applicable Control/Wiring Diagrams.
15. Fire Department Connections
16. Valve Cabinets
17. Backflow Preventers.
18. Fire pump, fire pump data, controller or transfer switch data.
B. Submittal data shall be bound sets and be submitted at one time i n accordance with Section
01330 - Submittals and Substitutions.
C. Do not proceed with work without final approved submittal data bearing all approval stamps.
D. Be responsible for delays caused by not following the above procedure and/or not completing
the design portion of the work in a timely manner.
E. Record Documents:
1. Refer to Section 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents and Section 01 78 23 - Operating
and Maintenance Data for required closeout documents to be provided at completion of
Project. In addition to the documents listed in these Sections, the following documents
shall be included:
a. Provide above/below ground test certificates.
b. Record Documents shall include System Drawings, Equipment Data and Operation
Instructions, and Maintenance Instruction Manuals.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 21 05 00 – Common Work Results for Fire Suppression.
B. Fire Pump: The manufacturer shall provide the services of a qualified Field Engineer to assist
in the proper installation of equipment, make necessary mechanical adjustments, and align
fire pump flexible coupling. Arrange, conduct and provide all required test equipment for Field
Acceptance Test. Test shall be witnessed by the Fire Marshal and the authority having
jurisdiction and the Owner.
C. MANUFACTURERS
1. All sprinkler system equipment is to be UL Listed.
1.05 DESIGN
A. Zoning: At a minimum, the system shall be zoned by floor or as required to meet the approval
of all applicable Codes and Authorities, whichever is most stringent.
B. Inspectors test connections: Locate at the remote end of each zone with discharge pipe to
exterior.
C. Low-Rise Buildings: Connect sprinkler piping to riser at each zone. Provide control valve,
flow and tamper switches at each connection monitored on the fire alarm system. Locate
inspector’s test assembly at remote end of zone with discharge piped to exterior drain.
SECTION 21 10 00 (13900) - FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS Page 3
D. High-Rise Buildings: Connect guest room floor sprinkler piping to two (2) risers at each floor
with a control valve and flow and tamper switch (at each connection and inspectors test
connection). At non-guest room levels, locate inspector’s test connection at remote end of
each zone with discharge pipe to exterior.
E. High-Rise Buildings are buildings exceeding four (6) stories or more than 75 feet in height to
the floor of the highest occupiable story from the lowest level of fire department access.
F. Design densities (based on NFPA 13 requirements):
1. Guest Rooms: Wet pipe system with 0.10 gpm per square foot, all heads (up to a
maximum of 5) in the largest most remote guestroom plus 100 gpm for hose.
2. Public Spaces, Offices, and Dining Room: Wet pipe system with 0.10 gpm per square
foot over the most remote 1,500 square feet plus 100 gpm for hose.
3. Kitchen Areas: Wet pipe system with 0.15 gpm per square foot over the most remote
1,500 square feet area plus 100 gpm for hose.
4. Mechanical rooms, Laundry, Storage, and Service Areas: Wet pipe system with 0.13
gpm per square foot over 2,500 square feet plus 100 gpm for hose.
5. Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork: Wet pipe system with 0.15 gpm per square foot over the
entire cooking hood and duct plan area plus 100 gpm for hose.
6. Attics: Light hazard wet pipe system with 0.10 gpm per square foot to the most remote
1,500 square feet plus 100 gpm for hose.
-or-
Light hazard-Dry pipe system with 0.10 gpm per square foot over the most remote 1,950
square feet plus 100 gpm for hose.
7. Attics: Ordinary Hazard and Service Equipm ent Areas: Wet pipe system with 0.15 gpm
per square feet over the most remote 1,500 square foot area plus 100 gpm for hose.
-or-
Ordinary Hazard-Dry Pipe System with 0.15 gpm per square foot over the most remote
1,950 square feet area plus 100 gpm for hos e. Parking Garages: Wet Pipe System with
0.13 gpm per square foot over the most remote 2,500 square feet plus 100 gpm for hose.
-or-
Dry Pipe System with 0.13 gpm per square foot over the most remote 3,500 square feet
plus 100 gpm for hose.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. The Fire Protection Subcontractor shall be responsible for reviewing the complete set of
Contract Documents and coordinating his work with all other trades involved including building
design loads.
B. Sprinkler head locations shall be as shown on the Architect ural Reflected Ceiling Plans. If the
Contractor finds that additional sprinklers are required to meet Codes, the Contractor shall
proceed with the additional heads at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. The fire protection piping and head layout shall function in such a manner so as not to
interfere with lighting fixtures, air distribution devices, equipment, piping, beams, and
ductwork. The work under this section shall yield to all other trades.
1.07 SPRINKLER/STANDPIPE SYSTEM
A. Provide the building with a complete, approved, operational sprinkler system in all areas.
B. Provide wet-pipe sprinklers for habitable spaces such as guestrooms, guestroom corridors,
restaurants, ballrooms, meeting rooms and public areas.
SECTION 21 10 00 (13900) - FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS Page 4
C. Design documents are for information only. The Sprink ler subcontractor shall be responsible
for the actual layouts, routing of piping, and additional sprinkler heads to meet all requirements
of the authority having jurisdiction as well as the provision of a fire pump as required.
D. Be responsible for freeze protection as follows:
1. A dry pipe system shall be provided in the attics and in any other unheated areas where
necessary so as to prevent freezing. The dry pipe system shall be complete with a tank
mounted air compressor, storage tank, controls, valves, galv anized steel pipe, and all
necessary appurtenances for a complete, functional system. Dry pipe system shall be
pitched to avoid freezing. Termination of drains shall be approved by Fire Protection
Department.
a. The entire dry pipe system must utilize galvanized steel pipe.
2. Dry type heads may be provided off the wet system in unheated areas such as the
landscape storage room, port-cocheres, or laundry dryer enclosure.
3. Wet piping shall not be routed through unheated areas, such as attics, etc.
4. For repairing and/or all costs incurred from damage caused by freezing of the fire
protection system.
5. Use of Heat-tape is not acceptable.
6. The dry pipe system is required to deliver water to the system test connection within 60
seconds, starting at the normal air pressure on the system and at the time of fully opened
inspection test connection.
E. Provide a Fire Department standpipe system where required by code.
F. Provide a combination sprinkler/standpipe riser system where standpipes are required by
code.
G. The sprinkler layout for the guest rooms, suites, and corridors shall be as required to meet the
approval of all applicable Codes, and Local Authorities whichever is most stringent.
H. The Contractor shall provide a fire pump complete with a jockey pump, controller, and all
devices necessary for a complete, approved functional system per NFP A 20, and Local
Authorities.
I. Guest Room Bathrooms: Sprinklers not required if less than 55 square feet unless
combustible (with flame spread rating of greater than 25; i.e., fiberglass or plas tic) tubs or
shower enclosures are used.
J. Pressure Reducing Valves: Design system within maximum pressure of 175 psi without use
of pressure reducing valves.
K. Safety Factor: Provide a 10% hydraulic safety factor
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. All sprinkler system equipment is to be UL Listed.
2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Piping - Class I, Schedule 40 ASTM black steel piping for branches and Class I Schedule 10
ASTM black steel for mains..
1. Piping (piping only, excluding fittings) for dry systems shall be galvanized steel.
2. Alternate: CPVC or XL Thin-wall for wet sprinkler pipe.
B. Exposed piping and fittings in kitchen shall be chrome-plated.
SECTION 21 10 00 (13900) - FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS Page 5
2.03 KITCHEN HOOD AND DUCT FIRE SUPPRESSION
A. Provide a complete "Ansul Piranha” automatic, water-assisted, wet chemical, fire suppression
system by Tyco Fire & Security for protection of the exhaust duct and all grease-producing
cooking surfaces located under canopy hoods. The system, including all of its components
shall be UL Standard 300 listed.
B. Kitchen hood and duct system flow switch (or control units of the Ansul fire suppression
system) to perform these functions:
1. Send fire alarm signal to FACP
2. Disconnect gas and all electric for cooking appliances and lighting under the hood
(manual reset is required).
3. Shut-off kitchen hood make-up air handler.
2.04 SPRINKLERS
A. Sprinkler heads shall be UL Listed.
B. Sprinkler heads and escutcheons shall have a white finish unless noted otherwise.
C. Sprinklers: Fast-response 68 degrees C – 74 degrees C (155 degrees F – 165 degrees F),
recessed or semi-recessed type heads throughout, except as follows:
Room/Space Head Type Temp. Rating
Attic Systems Quick Response – ventilated 100 degrees C (212 degrees F)
Quick Response –
unventilated
141 degrees C (286 degrees F)
Dry pipe Systems Quick Response 100 degrees C (212 degrees F)
Mech./Elect. Quick Response 68 degrees C – 74 degrees C
Elevator Machinery Quick Response 100 degrees C (212 degrees F)
Swimming Pools Corrosion - proof- 68 degrees C – 77degrees C
Quick response (155 degrees F –170 degrees F)
Porches Dry-side wall, corrosion-
proof / Quick response
100 degrees C (212 degrees F)
Balcony (combustible) Dry-side wall, corrosion-
resistant / Quick response
100 degrees C (212 degrees F)
Sauna/Steam Rooms Corrosion proof / Quick
Response
141 degrees C (286 degrees F)
Walk-in
Coolers/Freezers
Dry pendent / Quick
response
74 degrees C (165 degrees F)
Parking Structures Quick Response 100 degrees C (212 degrees F)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install and support fire protection system to resist all applicable seismic forces per
requirements.
B. Locate wet pipe and dry pipe inspector test valves and associated sight glasses at remote
ends of system, in accessible locations. Provide drain pipes to exterior. Do not discharge onto
sidewalks or landscaping.
C. Under no circumstance shall wet sprinkler pipes be routed through attics or other unheated
spaces.
D. Access panels for service and access to valves in enclosed ceiling and walls.
SECTION 21 10 00 (13900) - FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS Page 6
3.02 TESTING
A. Before a property is opened to the public, the fire protection system shall be fully operational,
contractor tested, and approval obtained from Fire Protection Department. In order to obtain
approval, the fire protection system shall be operated by the contractor under simulated
emergency conditions in the presence of Fire Protection personnel and the contractor shall
demonstrate compliance with hotel brand standards.
B. Automatic Sprinkler System:
1. Contractor shall flush and pressure test system prior to observation of the test of water
flow and tamper switches.
C. Kitchen Hood and Duct Fire Suppression:
1. Contractor shall pre-test all coordinated components by activation of kitchen hood and
duct flow switch or control unit.
2. Contractor shall demonstrate compliance by operating initiating devices, activating
coordinated alarms, gas, electric, and hood supply air fan shut-downs.
D. Provide all equipment necessary to perform test.
E. Refer to Submittals Paragraph for required certifications and documents to be provided with
closeout documents.
3.03 TRAINING
A. Conduct training as specified in Section 01 79 00 (01820) - "Training”.
B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for tro ubleshooting,
servicing, and maintaining system.
C. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days’ advance notice.
D. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
operate and maintain fire pump.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Page 1
SECTION 22 05 00 (15050) COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Piping materials and fittings.
2. Joining materials.
3. Dielectric fittings.
4. Mechanical sleeve seals.
5. Piping Specialties
6. Grouting
7. Piping Insulation.
8. Equipment Installation.
9. Concrete Bases.
10. Erection of Metal Supports.
11. Erection of Wood Supports
12. Cutting and Patching
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 31 00 - Project Management and Coordination
2. Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching
3. Section 01 78 43 - Spare Parts and Materials
4. Section 01 79 00 - Training
5. Section 01 78 23 - Operating and Maintenance Data
6. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
7. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
8. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
9. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping
10. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors
11. Section 09 90 00 - Painting
12. Section 22 05 53 – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: Labeling and
identifying plumbing systems and equipment.
13. Section 31 20 00 – Earth Moving
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
SECTION 22 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Page 2
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
4. PEX: Cross-linked Poly Ethylene
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1. Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, plumbing sleeve seals, and
identification materials and devices.
2. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of plumbing
equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building
components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Indicate if sequence
and coordination of installations are important to efficient flow of the Work. Include the
following:
a. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem
movement.
b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
c. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialties,
including space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
d. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.
e. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
f. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
g. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
h. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building
during construction.
i. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and
ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions,
capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in
writing and connecting plumbing and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors,
bases, and equipment spaces are increased. Additional costs shall be approved in advance
by appropriate Contract Modification for these increases.
1. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must
meet design requirements. See drawings for equipment schedules and requirements.
SECTION 22 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Page 3
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate plumbing equipment installation with other building components.
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction to allow for plumbing installations.
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of plumbing materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning
before closing in building.
E. Coordinate connection of plumbing systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities
and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
companies, and controlling agencies.
F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if plumbing items requiring access are
concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Section
08 31 13 - "Access Doors and Frames."
G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices
are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and
similar concealment.
1.07 Posted Operating Instructions
A. Provide and post operating instructions for all plumbing systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Dielectric Unions:
a. Hart Industries, International, Inc. (800-769-0503)
b. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. (978-688-1811)
c. Zurn Plumbing Products Group of Jacuzzi Brands, Inc. (805-238-7100)
2. Dielectric Flanges:
a. Capitol Manufacturing Company, A member of The Phoenix Forge Group (800-848-
1100)
b. Central Plastics Co. (800-654-3872)
c. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. (978-688-1811)
3. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:
a. Central Plastics Co. (800-654-3872)
4. Dielectric Couplings:
SECTION 22 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Page 4
a. Lochinvar Corp. (615-889-8900)
5. Dielectric Nipples:
a. Grinnell Mechanical Products, A Tyco International Company (800-500-4768)
b. Perfection Corporation (800-544-6344)
c. Victaulic Co. of America (800-742-5842)
6. Plumbing Sleeve Seals:
a. Metraflex Inc. (800-621-4347)
b. PSI-Thunderline/Link-Seal (800-423-2410)
2.02 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Divisions 22 piping Sections for pipe and fitting materials and joining
methods.
1. Section 22 11 16 - Domestic Water Piping.
2. Section 22 13 16 – Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping.
3. Section 23 11 23 – Facility Natural Gas Piping.
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.03 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness, unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or
ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32.
1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10
percent lead content.
2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent maximum
lead content.
3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.
4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.
5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead
content.
F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.
2. BAg1: Silver alloy.
SECTION 22 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Page 5
3. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
G. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvent cements for the following:
1. ABS Piping: ASTM D2235.
2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F493.
3. PVC Piping: ASTM D2564. Include primer according to ASTM F656.
4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D3138.
5. PEX Pipes- UPONOR-TYPE-A
H. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F477, elastomeric gasket.
I. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: AWWA C110, rubber gasket, carbon-steel
bolts and nuts.
J. Couplings: Iron-body sleeve assembly, fabricated to match OD of plain-end, pressure pipes.
1. Sleeve: ASTM A126, Class B, gray iron.
2. Followers: ASTM A47 malleable iron or ASTM A536 ductile iron.
3. Gaskets: Rubber.
4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA C111.
5. Finish: Enamel paint.
2.04 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. General: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals, to
prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.
1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld-
neck end types and matching piping system materials.
2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
B. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure
at 180 deg F.
C. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150-psig minimum
working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
D. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly, full-face or
ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt
sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
1. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150-psig minimum
working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and non-corrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.05 Plumbing Sleeves
A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
SECTION 22 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Page 6
4. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
2.06 PLUMBING SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.
2.07 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type if required to
conceal protruding fittings and sleeves.
1. ID: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping.
2. OD: Completely cover opening.
3. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and set screw.
a. Finish: Polished chrome-plate.
4. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.
B. Grout:
1. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B.
a. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, non-
staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
b. Design Mix: 5000-psig, 28-day compressive strength.
c. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install piping as described below, unless piping Sections specifies otherwise.
Individual Division 22 piping Sections specifies unique piping installation requirements.
B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate
general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements
were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated, unless deviations to layout are approved on
Coordination Drawings as required by Division 01 Sections and as outlined in Part 1 of this
section.
C. Install piping at indicated slope.
D. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
E. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
F. Install piping free of sags and bends.
G. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls.
Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow
sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
I. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation.
J. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing.
K. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
SECTION 22 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Page 7
L. Install couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions.
M. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board
partitions, and suspended ceilings according to the following:
1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast brass, one piece, with set screw, and polished chrome-
plated finish.
2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set screw.
3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plates in Utility Areas: Cast-iron floor plates.
4. Insulated Piping: Cast brass with concealed hinge, set screws, and chrome-plated finish.
5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast brass or stamped steel, with set-screw or spring clips.
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and
roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of plumbing equipment areas or other
wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below
floor slab as required to secure clamping rings where required.
2. Build sleeves into walls and slabs as work progresses.
3. Install sleeves large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6-inch NPS (DN150).
b. Steel, Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6-inch NPS (DN150) and larger, penetrating
gypsum-board partitions.
4. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure
flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve
to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Section 07 62 00 "Sheet Metal Flashing
and Trim" for flashing.
a. Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with non-shrink, nonmetallic grout.
5. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe
or pipe insulation, using elastomeric joint sealant. Refer to Section 07 92 00 "Joint
Sealants" for materials.
6. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant, unless
otherwise indicated.
O. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and plumbing
sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing plumbing sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger.
3. Assemble and install plumbing sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.
P. Underground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal
pipe penetrations using plumbing sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space
between pipe and sleeve for installing plumbing sleeve seals.
1. Assemble and install plumbing sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to expand and make
watertight seal.
SECTION 22 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Page 8
Q. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire stopping materials. Refer to Section
07 84 00 - "Firestopping" for materials.
R. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
S. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
T. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in
individual piping specification Sections:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to CDA’s "Copper Tube Handbook."
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe
and Tube."
5. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and
restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a. Note internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat
or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.
b. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads, unless dry seal
threading is specified.
c. Align threads at point of assembly.
d. Tighten joint with wrench. Apply wrench to valve end into which pipe is being
threaded.
e. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
6. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, "Recommended Practices and
Procedures for Welding Low Carbon Steel Pipe," using qualified processes and welding
operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
7. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Select appropriate gasket material, size,
type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned.
Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and
gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten
bolts gradually and uniformly using torque wrench.
8. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean
cloth or paper towels. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:
a. Comply with ASTM F402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
b. CPVC Piping: ASTM D2846 and ASTM F493.
c. PVC Pressure Piping: ASTM D2672.
d. PVC Non-pressure Piping: ASTM D2855.
9. Plastic Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean
cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D2657 procedures and manufacturer's
written instructions.
a. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
SECTION 22 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Page 9
b. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
U. Piping Connections: Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping 2-inch NPS (DN50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at
final connection to each piece of equipment with 2-inch NPS (DN50) or smaller threaded
pipe connection.
2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves
and at final connection to each piece of equipment with flanged pipe connection.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights is not indicated.
B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only
in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Owner’s Representative.
C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to
other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
E. Install equipment giving right of way to piping installed at required slope as specified in other
Division 22 sections.
F. Clearance from Electrical Equipment: Piping is prohibited in electric rooms and closets,
elevator machine rooms and installation over transformers, switchboards and motor control
centers.
3.03 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates
for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psig 28-day compressive-strength concrete and
reinforcement as specified in Section 03 30 00 - "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.04 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
C. Prime and paint all metal supports per Section 09 90 00 requirements.
3.05 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor
plumbing materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view
or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners
without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary
for plumbing installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
SECTION 22 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING Page 10
B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
C. Refer to Division 01 Sections for additional requirements.
3.07 GROUTING
A. Install nonmetallic, non-shrink, grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump
and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 05 13 (15090) - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Page 1
SECTION 22 05 13 (15090) COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING
EQUIPMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Basic Motor Requirements
2. Polyphase Motors
3. Single Phase Motors
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 22 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor
requirements for motor-driven equipment.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in Project with the following supporting data:
1. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting
arrangements; size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding
lug; and coatings.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide motors specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Polyphase.
C. Motors smaller than 1/2 HP: Single phase.
D. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
E. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected.
F. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, general purpose continuous duty, design type “B.”
G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to start,
accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.
H. Enclosure: Open drip proof, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Efficiency: Motors shall have a higher efficiency rating than industry standard average motor
as delineated in IEEE Standard 112, Test Method 13.
2.02 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, medium induction motor.
1. Design Characteristics: NEMA MG 1, Design B, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Energy-Efficient Design: Where indicated.
SECTION 22 05 13 (15090) - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Page 2
3. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. Multispeed motors have separate
winding for each speed.
4. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
6. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
indicated controller, with required motor leads brought to motor terminal box to suit control
method.
C. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Critical vibration frequencies are not within operating range of controller output.
2. Temperature Rise: Match rating for Class B insulation.
3. Insulation: Class H.
4. Thermal Protection: Where indicated, conform to NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally
protected motors.
D. Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to NEMA MG 1:
1. Measurement of winding resistance.
2. No-load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. High-potential test.
5. Alignment.
2.03 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the following, to suit starting
torque and other requirements of specific motor application.
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 1/20 hp.
C. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens
power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to
temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal protection device automatically resets when
motor temperature returns to normal range, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Bearings: Ball-bearing type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces
on motor shaft. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings for other single-phase motors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ADJUSTING
A. Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt-driven motors.
B. Align pulleys and install belts.
C. Tension according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 05 23 (15110) - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Page 1
SECTION 22 05 23 (15110) GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Valves.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 22 05 53 (15075) – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: For valve
tags and charts.
2. Division 22 Plumbing Piping System Sections: Special purpose valves
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in Project with the following supporting data:
1. Product Data for each valve type. Include body material, valve design, pressure and
temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and
arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions. Include
list indicating valve and its application.
2. Maintenance data for valves to include in the operation and maintenance manual
specified in Division 01. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting,
servicing, disassembling, and repairing.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 01. Provide
all valves of the same manufacturer where possible.
1. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for building services piping and
ASME B31.1 for power piping.
B. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
3. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling.
4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
5. Block check valves in either closed or open position.
B. Use the following precautions during storage:
1. Maintain valve end protection.
2. Store indoors and maintain valve temperature higher than ambient dew-point
temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight
enclosures.
C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points.
SECTION 22 05 23 (15110) - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Page 2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Ball Valves and Gate Valves:
a. Hammond Valve Corporation (800-348-6544)
b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. (262-432-2700)
c. NIBCO Inc. (574-295-3000)
2. Balancing Valves:
a. Victaulic Company (800-742-5842)
b. Hays Fluid Controls, A Romac Industries, Inc. Company (800-354-4297)
3. Check Valves:
a. Hammond Valve Corporation (800-348-6544)
b. Milwaukee Valve Company, Inc. (262-432-2700)
c. NIBCO Inc. (574-295-3000)
2.02 GENERAL
A. Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems, except as specified below.
1. Nonrising stem valves may be used only where headroom prevents full extension of
rising stems.
B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of
this Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.
C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special
operator features:
1. Handwheels: For valves other than quarter turn.
2. Lever Handles: For quarter-turn valves 6 inches (DN150) and smaller, except for plug
valves, which shall have square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug
valves.
E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems arranged
to receive insulation.
F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.
G. Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
H. Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast iron, ASME B16.5 for steel, and ASME B16.24 for bronze
valves.
I. Solder Joint: ASME B16.18.
1. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point
below 840 deg F for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.
2.03 BALL VALVES
A. Ball Valves, 4 Inches (DN100) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 600-psi CWP, ASTM
B584 bronze body and bonnet, 2-piece construction; chrome-plated brass ball, standard port
for 1/2-inch (DN15) valves and smaller and conventional port for 3/4-inch (DN20) valves and
larger; blowout proof; bronze or brass stem; Teflon seats and seals; threaded or soldered end
connections:
SECTION 22 05 23 (15110) - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Page 3
1. Operator: Vinyl-covered steel lever handle.
2. Stem Extension: For valves installed in insulated piping.
3. Memory Stop: For operator handles (balancing valves).
2.04 GATE VALVES
A. Gate Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi cold working
pressure (CWP), ASTM B62 cast-bronze body and bonnet, solid-bronze wedge, copper-silicon
alloy rising stem, Teflon-impregnated packing with bronze packing nut, threaded or soldered
end connections; and with aluminum or malleable-iron handwheel.
B. Gate Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, 200-psi CWP, ASTM
A126 cast-iron body and bonnet, solid cast-iron wedge, brass-alloy stem, outside screw and
yoke, Teflon-impregnated packing with 2-piece packing glad assembly, flanged end
connections; and with cast-iron handwheel.
2.05 BALANCING VALVES
A. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Adjustable, with 2 readout ports and memory setting indicator.
Include manufacturer’s standard hoses, fittings, valves, differential pressure meter, and
carrying case.
1. 2-inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Bronze body with brass ball, adjustment knob,
calibrated nameplate, and threaded or solder-joint ends.
2. 2-inch NPS (DN500 and Smaller: Bronze, Y-pattern body with adjustment knob and
threaded ends.
B. Memory-Stop Balancing Valves, 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: MSS SP-110, ball valve,
rated for 400-psig minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, ASTM B62 bronze body with standard
port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, solder-joint
ends, and vinyl-covered steel handle with memory-stop device.
C. Automatic Flow Control Valves (AFCV): Automatic flow control valves shall be factory set to
rated flow, and shall automatically control the flow to within 10% of the rated value, over a 40
to 1 differential pressure, operating range, (2 to 80 PSID). Operational temperature shall be
rated from fluid freezing, to 225 degree F.
1. "MESURFLO" by Hays Fluid Controls, or approved substitution by listed manufacturers.
a. Automatic Flow Control valve body shall be constructed of hot forged brass UNS
C37700 or C36000 per ASTM B283 latest revision, ductile iron per ASTM A395,
valve grade cast iron per ASTM B209, or UNS C84400 Cast Semi-Red Brass with
inch size pipe thread fittings per ASME B1.20.1, and B31.9. UNS C37700 and UNS
C36000 valve bodies are suitable for 600 PSIG Iron, and Cast Brass valve bodies
are suitable for 400 PSIG. Working Pressure rating per ASTM A53 threaded joint
type. Valve body shall also be available with sweat fittings per ASME B16.22
requirements and are intended for use in Building Services Piping meeting the
requirements of ASME B31.9. The Temperature/Pressure Rating of the Solder Joint
is dependent upon the type of solder used. ASME Standard B16.22 Pressure
Ratings should be reviewed prior to sweating.
2. "Y-BALL MESURFLO" by Hays Fluid Controls, or approved substitution by listed
manufacturers:
a. Ball Valve, combination Automatic Flow Control Valves, shall be made of hot forged
brass UNS C37700 per ASTM B283 Latest Revision, using full flow design balls,
blowout proof stems, and shall be rated for 600 PSIG WOG.
b. Copper Sweat fittings 1/2, 3/4, 1 & 1 1/4, INCH shall be suitable for 522 PSIG.
Working Pressure Rating per ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping.
c. Threaded fittings 1/2, through 1 1/2 INCH shall be suitable for 600 PSIG. Working
Pressure Rating per ASTM A53B for threaded joint type extra weight, of the pipe
SECTION 22 05 23 (15110) - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Page 4
size indicated. (For most Building Services applications, ANSI Class 125 rating.)
Flow rates from .5 to 24.0 GPM will have a differential pressure operating range of 2
to 80 PSID. Flow rates shall be field changeable without breaking the piping
connections.
3. Valve internal control mechanism shall be of a quiet, clog resistant design and consist of
one or more, precision sculptured brass or polyphenylsulfone with high temperature
elastomeric diaphragm. Each automatic balancing valve will automatically control the flow
rate within 10% of its rated flow, over a temperature range of 32 to 225 degree F, and a
pressure differential range of 2-80 PSID. Flow increments shall be available in 0.125 to
0.5 GPM steps for 0.5 to 8.0 GPM, 1.0 to 2.0 GPM steps for 9.0 to 24 GPM, and 5.0
GPM steps for 25 to 200 GPM.
4. Dual pressure/temperature test ports for verifying the pressure differential and system
temperature shall be standard.
5. Manufacturer shall provide certified independent laboratory tests verifying accuracy of
performance.
6. All valves shall be marked per MMS-SP-25-78 (1983) and shall show as a minimum;
controlled flow direction, flow rate, PSID control range, manufacturer and model number.
2.06 CHECK VALVES
A. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, 200-psi
CWP, or Class 150, 300-psi CWP; horizontal swing, Y-pattern, ASTM B62 cast-bronze body
and cap, rotating bronze disc with rubber seat or composition seat, threaded or soldered end
connections:
B. Swing Check Valves, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: MSS SP-71, Class 125, 200-CWP,
ASTM A126 cast-iron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing bronze disc, flanged or grooved
end connections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operation.
D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for
proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition
suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.
F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install valves as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
C. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
D. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
SECTION 22 05 23 (15110) - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Page 5
E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe and in a position
to allow full stem movement.
F. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:
1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level.
G. Sectional Valves: Install sectional gate or ball valves closest to main on each branch and riser
serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, and where indicated.
H. Shutoff Valves: Install gate or ball shutoff valve on each water supply to equipment, on each
supply to plumbing fixtures without supply stops, and where indicated.
I. Drain Valves: Install drain valves for equipment, at base of each water riser, at low points in
horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping.
1. Install hose-end drain valves with cap and chain at low points in water mains, risers, and
branches.
2. Install stop-and-waste drain valves where indicated.
J. Balancing Valves: Install in each hot-water circulation return branch, discharge side of each
pump and circulator, and where indicated.
3.03 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to
a bright finish. Clean valve socket.
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.
D. Open gate and globe valves to fully open position.
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.
F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside valve.
Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder melts on contact. Feed solder
until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the
solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.
3.04 THREADED CONNECTIONS
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to
determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.
B. Align threads at point of assembly.
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry
seal threading is specified.
D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is
being threaded.
3.05 FLANGED CONNECTIONS
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as
flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually
and uniformly with a torque wrench.
C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for
proper shutoff and retention.
SECTION 22 05 23 (15110) - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING Page 6
3.06 VALVE END SELECTION
A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
1. Copper Tube Size, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: Solder ends.
2. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-1/2 Inches (DN65) and Smaller: Threaded or grooved end.
3. Steel Pipe Sizes, 3 Inches (DN80) and Larger: Grooved end or flanged.
3.07 APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. General Application: Use gate and ball, valves for shutoff duty; globe and ball for throttling
duty. Refer to piping system Specification Sections for specific valve applications and
arrangements.
B. Domestic Water Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Ball Valves: Class 150, 600-psi CWP, with stem extension.
C. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation Systems: Use the following valve types:
1. Balancing Valves: Automatic or adjustable Ball valves with readout ports.
3.08 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 1
SECTION 22 05 29 (15060) HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Hangers and Supports for Plumbing System Piping and Equipment.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05 50 00 (05500) - Metal Fabrications
2. Section 09 90 00 (09900) - Painting
3. Section 21 10 00 (13900) - Fire Suppression Systems
4. Section 22 05 48 (15070) – Vibration and Seismic Control for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) with the
following supporting data:
1. Product Data:
a. For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-
hanger shield insert indicated.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Engineering Responsibility: Where required by the local authority having jurisdiction design
and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each multiple pipe support, trapeze,
and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for
this Project in material, design, and extent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components:
a. Cooper B-Line, Inc. (618-654-2184)
b. Grinnell Mechanical Products, A Tyco International Company (800-500-4768)
c. National Pipe Hanger Corporation (609-261-5353)
2. Channel Support Systems:
a. Cooper B-Line, Inc. (618-654-2184)
b. Grinnell Mechanical Products, A Tyco International Company (800-500-4768)
c. National Pipe Hanger Corporation (609-261-5353)
SECTION 22 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 2
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:
a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. (301.333.4631)
b. Erico (Michigan Hanger) (440-248-0100)
c. PHS Industries, Inc. (800-626-2336)
4. Powder-Actuated and Mechanical Anchor Fastener Systems:
a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp. (800-336-1640)
b. Hilti, Inc.(800-879-8000)
c. ITW Ramset/Red Head (800-899-7890)
2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components:
1. MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications"
Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types.
a. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-
applied finish.
b. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Channel Support Systems:
1. MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
2. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are
in direct contact with copper tubing.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:
1. 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield.
2. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type I cellular glass.
3. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C552, Type I cellular glass.
4. For Trapeze or Clamped System: Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.
5. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
6. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-
out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
D. Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and
exterior applications.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
SECTION 22 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and systems.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Specification Sections.
C. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified
in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.
3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 to allow off-
center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
4. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
5. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
6. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
7. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
8. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion
support and cast-iron floor flange.
D. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20 (DN20 to DN500).
E. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
F. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
3. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.
4. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
5. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by
using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
SECTION 22 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 4
G. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent
crushing insulation.
3.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled channel systems.
1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install building attachments to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping
span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads,
including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expansion joints, and at changes in direction
of piping.
D. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install
fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
E. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.
J. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert
with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.
2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span arc of 180 degrees.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN90): 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
b. NPS 4 (DN100): 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
SECTION 22 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 5
5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
3.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Prime and Paint Equipment Supports as specified in Section 09 90 00 “Painting”.
3.04 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections that cannot
be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments, to level
equipment, and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
3.06 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 09 90 00 “Painting”.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 1
SECTION 22 30 00 (15430) - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backflow Preventers
2. Water Regulators
3. Thermostatic Mixing Valves
4. Clothes Washer Drain & Supply
5. Hydrants
6. Trap Primer Valves
7. Drain Valves
8. Backwater Valves
9. Floor Drains
10. Roof Drains
11. Grease Interceptors
12. Oil Interceptors
13. Lint Interceptors
14. Miscellaneous Piping Specialties B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 53 23 (07530) - Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing]
2. Section 07 62 00 (07620) - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim]
3. Section 22 05 00 (15050) – Common Work Results for Plumbing
4. Section 22 05 23 (15110) – General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
5. Section 22 05 53 (15075) – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: for
labeling and identifying requirements.
6. Section 22 05 19 (15122) - Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping
7. Section 22 11 16 (15140) - Domestic Water Piping
8. Section 22 13 16 (15150) - Drainage and Vent Piping
9. Section 22 40 00 (15410) – Plumbing Fixtures and Plumbing Fixture Matrix
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Publications:
1. A112.1.2 “Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems (For Plumbing Fixtures and Water-Connected
Receptors)”
2. A112.14.1 “Backwater Valves”
3. A112.3.1 “Grate Openings”
4. A112.21.1M “Floor Drains”
5. A112.21.2M “Roof Drains”
6. A112.21.3M “Hydrants for Utility and Maintenance Use”
SECTION 22 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 2
7. B1.20.7 “Hose Coupling Screw Threads, Inch”
8. B31.9 “Building Services Piping”
B. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE) Publications:
1. 1001 “Performance Requirements for Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers”
2. 1003 “Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves”
3. 1010 “Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters”
4. 1011 “Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers”
5. 1012 “Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric
Vent”
6. 1013 “Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers
and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers”
7. 1015 “Performance Requirements for Double Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies
and Double Check Fire Protection Backflow Prevention Assemblies”
8. 1017 “Performance Requirements for Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Hot
Water Distribution Systems”
9. 1018 “Performance Requirements for Trap Seal Primer Valves - Potable Water
Supplied”
10. 1019 “Performance Requirements for Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant,
Automatic Draining Type”
11. 1020 “Performance Requirements for Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly”
C. ASTM International (ASTM) Publications: (American Society for Testing and Materials)
1. A48 "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings"
2. A74 “Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings”
3. B62 “Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings”
4. C564 “Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings” D. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Publications:
1. C550 “Standard for Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and
Hydrants” E. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Publications:
F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
a. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accommodate both directions, or as
separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
B. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, vinyl
tape, at least 3 mils thick.
1. Width: 1-1/2 inches on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches; 2-1/2
inches for larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
SECTION 22 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 3
C. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and
1/2-inch sequenced numbers. Include 5/32-inch hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.032-inch thick, polished brass.
2. Size: 1-1/2-inches diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link chain and S-hooks.
E. Access Panel and Equipment Markers: 1/16-inch thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers,
with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve and equipment
identification corresponding to schedules on Drawings. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for
attachment.
F. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls
for each page of valve schedule. Include screws.
1. Frame: Extruded aluminum.
2. Glazing: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness
glass.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install pipe markers on each system as indicated below. Include arrows showing normal
direction of flow.
1. Domestic Cold Water.
2. Domestic Hot Water.
3. Domestic Hot Water Return.
4. Sanitary Drain.
5. Storm Drain.
6. Condensate.
7. Vent.
B. Marker Type: Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on pipe insulation segment
where required for hot, non-insulated pipes.
C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes by one of following methods:
1. Snap-on application of pretensioned, semirigid plastic pipe marker.
D. Locate pipe markers where piping is exposed in m achine rooms; accessible maintenance
spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations
according to the following:
1. Near each valve and control device.
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or nonaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at a maximum of 50-foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet
in areas of congested piping and equipment.
SECTION 22 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 4
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced
markers.
3.02 VALVE TAGS
A. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops, shutoff valves, faucets,
convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of
endues fixtures and units. List tagged valves in valve schedule.
B. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color scheme, and
with captions similar to those indicated in the following:
1. Domestic Cold Water
2. Domestic Hot Water
3. Domestic Hot Water Return
4. Gas
C. Tag Material: Brass.
D. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:
1. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches round.
2. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches round.
3. Gas: 1-1/2 inches round.
E. Install framed valve schedule in each major mechanical equipment room.
F. Valve schedule and tag locations shall be shown on record drawings.
3.03 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PLUMBING EQUIPMENT.
A. Label all plumbing equipment with designations as indicated in plumbing equipment
schedules on Drawings.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Relocate plumbing identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by
work of this or other Divisions.
B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 07 00 (15083) - PLUMBING INSULATION Page 1
SECTION 22 07 00 (15083) PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials
2. Jackets
3. Accessories and Attachments
4. Vapor Retarders
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 84 00 (07840) - Firestopping: Firestopping materials and requirements for
penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Section 22 05 29 (15060) - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment:
For pipe insulation shields and protection saddles.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM) Publications:
1. E84 "Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials"
2. C195 “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement”
3. C196 “Standard Specification for Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Thermal Insulating
Cement”
4. C449 “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting Thermal Insulating and
Finishing Cement”
5. C450 “Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS
Piping, and Vessel Lagging”
6. C547 “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation”
7. C553 “Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for
Commercial and Industrial Applications”
8. C921 “Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for
Thermal Insulation”
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1. Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Submit Manufactures data for each type of insulation used.
b. Application of field-applied jackets.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an
apprenticeship program or similar industry recognized craft training program.
SECTION 22 07 00 (15083) - PLUMBING INSULATION Page 2
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
specified in this Section according to ASTM E84, by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
rating of 50 or less.
2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
rating of 150 or less.
1.05 STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section
22 05 29 - "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.
C. Coordinate installation and testing of electric heat tracing.
1.07 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after
installing and testing heat-trace tape. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping
that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corp. (610-647-3011)
b. Knauf Insulation. (800-825-4434)
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. (800-447-3759)
2.02 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
1. Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the following:
a. Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C547, Type 1, with factory-applied,
all-purpose, vapor-retarder jacket.
b. Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C553, Type II, without facing.
c. Fire-Resistant Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and
grades:
1) Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber
insulation, for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging
cloth to unfaced glass-fiber insulation.
2) Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
d. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor
applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
e. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C195.
SECTION 22 07 00 (15083) - PLUMBING INSULATION Page 3
f. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cements: Comply with ASTM C196.
g. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C449.
B. Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers:
1. Comply with ASTM C450 for dimensions used in preforming insulation to cover valves,
elbows, tees, and flanges.
2.03 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
aluminum foil.
C. PVC Jacket: High-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC; 20 mils thick; roll stock ready for shop or
field cutting and forming.
1. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
2. PVC Jacket Color: White or gray.
3. PVC Jacket Color: Color-code piping jackets based on materials contained within the
piping system.
D. Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-mil-
thick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.
1. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges,
reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply
covers for lavatories for the disabled.
2. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.
1. Tape Width: 4 inches.
2.05 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry pipe and fitting surfaces. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
3.03 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of
piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each piping system.
SECTION 22 07 00 (15083) - PLUMBING INSULATION Page 4
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Apply insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal pipe runs.
E. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
H. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
I. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
J. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
K. Apply insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-
retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated. Refer to special instructions for applying
insulation over fittings, valves, and specialties.
L. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic.
1. Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, extend insulation on
anchor legs at least 12 inches from point of attachment to pipe and taper insulation ends.
Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
3. Install insert materials and apply insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by the insulation
material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect the jacket from tear or puncture by the hanger, support, and
shield.
M. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, taper
insulation ends. Seal tapered ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer to maintain vapor retarder.
N. Apply adhesives and mastics at the manufacturer's recommended coverage rate.
O. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Circumferential Joints: Cover with 3-inch wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip and spaced 4 inches o.c.
3. Longitudinal Seams: Overlap jacket seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Apply insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a. Exception: Do not staple longitudinal laps on insulation having a vapor retarder.
4. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to flanges, unions, valves, and fittings.
5. At penetrations in jackets for thermometers and pressure gages, fill and seal voids with
vapor-retarder mastic.
SECTION 22 07 00 (15083) - PLUMBING INSULATION Page 5
P. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Extend metal jacket of exterior insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top
of roof flashing.
4. Seal metal jacket to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: For penetrations of below-grade exterior walls, terminate
insulation flush with mechanical sleeve seal. Seal terminations with vapor-retarder mastic.
R. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
floors.
S. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through penetrations
of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1. Firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers are specified in Section 07 84 00
"Firestopping."
T. Floor Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through floor assembly.
1. For insulation with vapor retarders, seal insulation with vapor-retarder mastic where floor
supports penetrate vapor retarder.
3.04 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands without
deforming insulation materials.
2. Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with vapor-
retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15 to 20 feet to
form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6
inches o.c.
4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple longitudinal
tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlapping
seams at least 1 inch and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered sections
of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe
insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
SECTION 22 07 00 (15083) - PLUMBING INSULATION Page 6
3. Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.
2. When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket insulation
to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve
operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange insulation for access to
stainer basket without disturbing insulation.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available. Secure fitting
covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams with tape and
vapor-retarder mastic.
3.05 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Flexible connectors.
2. Vibration-control devices.
3. Fire-suppression piping.
4. Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Insulation applications will be considered defective if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements. Remove defective Work and replace with new materials
according to these Specifications.
B. Reinstall insulation and covers on fittings and valves uncovered for inspection according to
these Specifications.
3.07 INTERIOR INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. General:
1. Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor
retarders, and field-applied jackets.
2. Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.
Service Material Thickness Field
Applied
Jacket
Vapor
Retarder
Required
Finish
B. Domestic cold
water, hot and
recirculated hot
water, and
condensate
drains Operating
Temperature:
60 to 140 deg. F.
Mineral fiber
with jacket
Copper
Piping
ALL
sizes:
1/2”
None Yes None
C. Horizontal
Rainwater
Mineral fiber
or Cellular
Cast Iron
Pipe, ALL
Foil and
paper
Yes None
SECTION 22 07 00 (15083) - PLUMBING INSULATION Page 7
conductors glass, with
jacket
sizes: ½”
D. Horizontal
Rainwater
conductors
Mineral fiber
or Cellular
glass, with
jacket
PVC
Pipe, ALL
sizes: ½”
Foil and
paper
Yes None
E. Roof drain
bodies
Mineral fiber
or Cellular
glass, with
jacket
1” None Yes None
F. Exposed
sanitary drains
and domestic
water supplies
and stops for
fixtures for the
disabled
“Lav-Guard”
as
Manufactured
by Truebro
PVC P-trap
and supply
covers
No White
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 11 16 (15140) - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Page 1
SECTION 22 11 16 (15140) DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe and Tube Materials.
2. Fittings.
3. Joining Materials.
4. Polyethylene Encasement.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 22 05 00 (15050) – Common Work Results for Plumbing
2. Section 22 05 29 (15060) - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
3. Section 22 05 23 (15110) – General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
4. Section 31 20 00 (02300) - Earthwork
5. Section 33 00 00 (02500) - Utility Services: for exterior water service piping.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Publications:
1. B1.20.1 "Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch"
2. B16.18 “Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings”
3. B16.22 “Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings”
4. B16.24 “Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 400,
600, 900, 1500 and 2500”
5. B31.9 “Building Services Piping”
B. ASTM International (ASTM) Publications:
1. A47 "Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings"
2. A536 "Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings"
3. A674 “Standard Practice for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe for Water or
Other Liquids”
4. B32 "Standard Specification for Solder Metal"
5. B75 “Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube”
6. B88 “Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube”
7. B584 “Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications”
8. D1785 “Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40,
80, and 120”
9. F437 “Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80”
10. F438 “Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40”
11. F439 “Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80”
SECTION 22 11 16 (15140) - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Page 2
12. F441/F441M “Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic
Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80”
C. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Publications:
1. C104/ANSI A21.4-03 “Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and
Fittings for Water”
2. C105/ANSI A21.5-99 “Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe
Systems”
3. C110/ANSI A21.10-03 “Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 In.-48 In. (76
mm-1,219 mm), for Water”
4. C111/ANSI A21.11-00 “Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe
and Fittings”
5. C115/ANSI A21.15-99 “Standard for Flanged Ductile-Iron Pipe with Ductile-Iron or Gray-
Iron Threaded Flanges”
6. C151/ANSI A21.51-02 “Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water”
7. C153/ANSI A21.53-00 “Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service”
8. C550 “Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants”
9. C600 “Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances”
10. C606 “Grooved and Shouldered Joints”
11. C651 “Disinfecting Water Mains”
12. C652 “Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities”
D. American Welding Society (AWS) Publications:
1. A5.8 "Specification For Filler Metals For Brazing And Braze Welding"
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Water Service Piping: Water piping outside building that conveys water to building (by Site
Subcontractor).
B. Service Entrance Piping: Water piping at entry into building between water service piping and
water distribution piping (by Plumbing Subcontractor, beginning at 5’-0” outside of building).
C. Water Distribution Piping: Water piping inside building that conveys water to fixtures and
equipment throughout the building.
1.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Combined Fire-Protection and Domestic, Service Entrance Piping: 250 psig (provide only
where permitted by the authority having jurisdiction).
2. Service Entrance Piping: 160 psig.
3. Water Distribution Piping: 125 psig.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1. Product Data: Water Samples, Test Results, and Reports: Specified in "Field Quality
Control" and "Cleaning" articles.
SECTION 22 11 16 (15140) - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Page 3
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
C. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," Sections 1
through 9 for potable-water piping and components.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
C. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Types L, water tube, drawn temper.
D. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, 250-psig minimum pressure rating with mechanical- or push-
on-joint bell, plain spigot end, and AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining. Include AWWA C111
ductile-iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts with mechanical-joint pipe. Include
AWWA C111 rubber gasket with push-on-joint pipe.
E. Flanged, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C115 ductile-iron barrel with 250-psig pressure rating and
AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining. Include Class 150 or 300, iron-alloy threaded flanges that
match piping.
F. CPVC PIPING
1. CPVC Schedule [40] [80] Pipe: ASTM F441/F 441M.
a. CPVC Schedule 40 Fittings: ASTM F438, socket type.
b. CPVC Schedule 80 Fittings: [ASTM F439, socket] [ASTM F437, threaded]
[ASTM F439, socket type or ASTM F437, threaded] type.
2.02 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
B. Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18 cast-copper alloy or ASME B16.22
wrought copper.
C. Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B75 copper tube or ASTM B584 bronze castings.
D. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint end. Furnish Class 300 flanges if
required to match piping.
E. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket
joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded
ends. Include threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1 on threaded ends.
F. Ductile-Iron, Mechanical- or Push-on-Joint Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron
standard pattern; or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern; with 250-psig minimum
pressure rating and AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining. Include AWWA C111 ductile- or gray-
iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts with m echanical-joint fittings. Include
AWWA C111 rubber gaskets with push-on-joint fittings.
G. Ductile-Iron, Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound fitting with combination of flanged and
mechanical-joint ends conforming to AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include 2 gasketed ball-
joint sections, 1 or more gasketed sleeve sections, 250-psig minimum working-pressure
rating, and AWWA C550 epoxy interior coating. Assemble components for offset and
expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111 ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel
bolts.
SECTION 22 11 16 (15140) - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Page 4
H. Ductile-Iron, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM A47 malleable-iron castings or ASTM A536 ductile-
iron castings with cement-mortar lining or AWWA C550 interior coating and dimensions
matching ductile-iron pipe.
I. Ductile-Iron Flanged Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern; with 250-
psig minimum pressure rating and AWWA C104 cement-mortar lining.
J. Ferrous Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized steel fitting with telescoping body and slip-
pipe section. Include 150-psig minimum pressure rating, packing rings, packing, limit rods,
chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe section, flanged ends, and AWWA C550 epoxy interior
coating.
K. Ferrous, Double Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized steel fitting with telescoping body
and 2 slip-pipe sections. Include 150-psig minimum pressure rating, packing rings, packing,
limit rods, chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe sections, flanged ends, and AWWA C550 epoxy
interior coating.
2.03 JOINING MATERIALS
A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
B. Refer to Section 22 05 00 - "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for commonly used joining
materials.
C. Solder: ASTM B32, Alloy Sn95, Sn94, or E; lead free.
D. Brazing Filler Metal: AWS A5.8, BCuP, copper phosphorus or BAg, silver classification.
E. Copper, Keyed Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606.
Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and bolts and nuts.
F. Ductile-Iron, Keyed Couplings: AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous
housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and bolts and nuts.
G. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure
rating at least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined.
2.04 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT
A. Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping: ASTM A674 or AWWA C105 polyethylene
film, 0.008-inch minimum thickness, tube or sheet.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Section 31 20 00 - "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating
may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Fitting Option: Mechanically formed tee-branch outlets and brazed joints may be used on
aboveground copper tubing.
D. Underground, Service Entrance Piping: Do not use flanges or valves underground. Use the
following:
1. 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type K (Type A); copper, solder-joint
pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. 2-1/2- to 3-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65 to DN90): Soft copper tube, Type K (Type A); copper,
solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
SECTION 22 11 16 (15140) - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Page 5
3. 4- to 8-Inch NPS (DN100 to DN200): Ductile-iron pipe and fittings, and mechanical or
push-on joints.
E. Aboveground, Water Distribution Piping: Use the following:
1. 3-1/2-Inch NPS (DN90) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); copper, solder-
joint fittings; and soldered joints.
2. 4- to 6-Inch NPS (DN100 to DN150): Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B) with grooved
ends; copper, grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
F. Underground, Water Distribution Piping: Do not use flanges or valves underground. Use the
following:
1. 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Soft copper tube, Type L (Type B); wrought-copper,
solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. 2-1/2- to 4-Inch NPS (DN65 to DN100): Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); wrought-
copper, solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
G. Non-Potable-Water Piping: Use the following:
1. 3-1/2-Inch NPS (DN90) and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L (Type B); solder-joint
pressure fittings; and soldered joints - or - PVC ASTM D1785, schedule 40.
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 - "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping installation.
3.04 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Extend service entrance piping to exterior water service piping in sizes and locations indicated
for service entrances into building. Refer to Section 33 00 00 - "Utilities" for water service
piping.
B. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside building at each service entrance pipe per local Utility Code requirements.
C. Install water-pressure regulators downstream from shutoff valves. Refer to Section 22 10 13 -
"Plumbing Specialties" for water-pressure regulators.
D. Ductile-Iron, Service Entrance Piping: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried piping
between shutoff valve and connection to water service piping with restrained joints. Anchor
pipe to wall or floor at entrance. Include thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal
offsets.
1. Encase piping with polyethylene film according to ASTM A674 or AWWA C105 if required
by the local authority having jurisdiction.
E. Install wall penetration system at each service entrance pipe penetration through foundation
wall. Make installation watertight. Refer to Section 22 05 00 - "Common Work Results for
Plumbing" for wall penetration systems.
3.05 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install piping with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain.
3.06 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 - "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to
coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
3.07 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 22 05 29 - "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for
pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following:
SECTION 22 11 16 (15140) - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Page 6
1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.
2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs 100
feet and less.
3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer
than 100 feet.
4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight, horizontal runs
longer than 100 feet.
5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 100 feet or longer. Support
pipe rolls on trapeze.
6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.
B. Install supports according to Section 22 05 29 - "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment"
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. 3/4-Inch NPS (DN20) and Smaller: Maximum horizontal spacing, 60 inches with 3/8-inch
minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet.
2. 1-Inch NPS (DN25): Maximum horizontal spacing, 72 inches with 3/8-inch minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet.
3. 1-1/4-Inch NPS (DN32): Maximum horizontal spacing, 72 inches with 3/8-inch minimum
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet.
4. 1-1/2 and 2-Inch NPS (DN40 and DN50): Maximum horizontal spacing, 96 inches with
3/8-inch minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet.
5. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65): Maximum horizontal spacing, 108 inches with 1/2-inch minimum
rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet.
6. 3-Inch NPS (DN80): Maximum horizontal spacing, 10 feet with 1/2-inch minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet.
7. 3-1/2-Inch NPS (DN90): Maximum horizontal spacing, 10 feet with 1/2-inch minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet.
8. 4- and 5-Inch NPS (DN100 and DN125): Maximum horizontal spacing, 10 feet with 1/2-
inch minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 10 feet.
F. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.08 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior water service piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect water distribution piping to service entrance piping at shutoff valve, and extend to and
connect to the following:
1. Water Heaters: Connect cold-water supply and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated,
but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
2. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Section 22 40 00 - "Plumbing Fixtures."
SECTION 22 11 16 (15140) - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Page 7
3. Equipment: Connect hot- and cold-water supply piping as indicated. Provide shutoff
valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections 2-
1/2-inch NPS (DN65) and larger.
4. Booster Systems (Where required): Connect cold-water suction and discharge piping.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction.
a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Test service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced water piping until
it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed
before it has been tested and approved.
3. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean and disinfect service entrance piping and water distribution piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing water piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired before using.
2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if
method is not prescribed, procedure described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or
as described below:
a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of
chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
SECTION 22 11 16 (15140) - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING Page 8
2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of
chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine is no longer in water coming
from system after the standing time.
d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedure if biological examination shows contamination.
B. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities.
C. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
3.11 COMMISSIONING
A. Fill water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping
is full of water.
B. Perform the following steps before putting into operation:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
6. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for
application where used and that cartridges are clean and ready for use.
C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation. Do not
operate water heaters before filling with water.
D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
1. Water-Pressure Regulators: Set outlet pressure at 80 psig maximum, unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Energize pumps and verify proper operation.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 11 23 (15440) - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS Page 1
SECTION 22 11 23 (15440) DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Domestic Water Inline Pumps
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 22 05 23 - General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
2. Section 22 11 16 - Domestic Water Piping
3. Section 22 34 00 – Fuel-Fired Domestic Water Heaters.
4. Division 26 Sections for power-supply wiring, field-installed disconnects, electrical
devices, and motor controllers.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating items
selected for use in Project with the following supporting data:
1. Product Data:
a. Include certified performance curves and rated capacities of selected models;
shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories for
each type and size of pump specified. Indicate pumps' operating point on curves.
2. Maintenance Data: For each pump specified to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 01.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of pumps through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers
1. Domestic Water Inline Pumps:
a. Delta-p (563-506-8040)
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. (716-693-8813)
c. ITT Industires (201-760-9800)
d. Taco, Inc. (401-942-2360)
e. Grundfos booster pumps (+1) 2819942700
f. Hydromatic sump & circulation pumps 855-274-8947
SECTION 22 11 23 (15440) - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS Page 2
2.02 GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, single-stage, centrifugal pump units; complying
with UL 778; suitable for potable-water service; with all-bronze or stainless-steel construction
and components in contact with water made of corrosion-resistant materials.
B. Motors: Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 13 "Common Motor Requirements for
Plumbing Equipment" with built-in thermal-overload protection appropriate for motor size and
duty.
C. End Connections for NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Threaded. Pumps available only with
flanged ends may be furnished with threaded companion flanges.
D. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 (DN65) and Larger: Flanged.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested units before
shipping.
F. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal
surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges,
pipe openings, and nozzles.
2.03 DOMESTIC WATER IN-LINE PUMPS
A. Description: Horizontal in-line circulator, rated for 125-psig minimum working pressure and
minimum continuous water temperature of 225 deg F.
1. Construction: Radially split, all-bronze casing.
2. Impeller: ASTM B36, rolled brass; or ASTM B584, cast bronze; overhung, single suction,
and keyed to shaft.
3. Seal: Mechanical.
4. Shaft and Sleeve: Steel shaft, with oil-lubricated copper sleeve.
5. Pump Bearings: Oil-lubricated, bronze-journal or thrust type.
6. Shaft Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration and shaft
misalignment.
7. Motor: Single speed, with oil-lubricated bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and
resiliently mounted to pump casing.
a. Motor Size: For motors larger than 1/2 hp, select motor size that will not overload
through full range of pump performance curve.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of water distribution piping to verify actual locations of connections
before pump installation.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps according to manufacturer's written instructions and with access for periodic
maintenance, including removing motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.
B. Support pumps and piping so weight of each is not supported by the other.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1. Connect water distribution piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe equal to or
greater than size of pump nozzles. Refer to Section 22 11 16 - "Domestic Water Piping."
SECTION 22 11 23 (15440) - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS Page 3
2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of pumps, and check valve and throttling
valve on discharge side of pumps. Install valves same size as connected piping. Refer
to Section 22 05 23 - "General Duty Valves for Plum bing Piping" for general-duty valves.
3. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of pumps. Install at integral pressure-
gage tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and
discharge piping around pumps. Refer to Section 22 05 19 - "Meters and Gages for
Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and gage connectors.
B. Electrical wiring and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.
C. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.04 COMMISSIONING
A. Check suction piping connections for tightness.
B. Final Checks before Starting: Perform the following preventive maintenance operations:
1. Lubricate oil-lubricated-type bearings.
2. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquids is free to
rotate with pump hot and cold. Do not operate pump if it is bound or drags, until cause of
trouble is determined and corrected.
3. Verify that pump controls are correct for required application.
C. Starting procedure for pumps is as follows:
1. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for
operation.
2. Open circulating line valve if pump should not be operated against dead shutoff.
3. Open discharge valve slowly.
4. Check general mechanical operation of pump and m otor.
5. Close circulating line valve once there is sufficient flow through pump to prevent
overheating.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain pumps as specified below:
1. Conduct training as specified in Division 01 Sections.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining pumps.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 13 16 (15150) - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 1
SECTION 22 13 16 (15150) SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe Materials.
2. Fittings.
3. Joining Materials.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 84 00 (07840) - Firestopping: for fire-barrier sealers.
2. Section 08 31 00 (08310) - Access Doors: for access panels to concealed components.
3. Section 09 90 00 (09900) - Painting: for field-applied finishes for piping.
4. Section 11 31 00 (11450) -Residential Appliances: for drainage and vent services for
clothes washers.
5. Section 11 40 00 (11400) - Food Service Equipment: for drainage and vent services for
food service equipment.
6. Section 22 05 00 (15050) – Common Work Results for Plumbing
7. Section 22 05 29 (15060) - Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
8. Section 22 07 00 (15083) - Plumbing Insulation.
9. Section 31 20 00 (02300) – Earth Moving: for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
10. Section 33 00 00 (02500) - Utilities
11. Section 33 46 00 (02620) - Sub drainage
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Sewerage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys sanitary sewage from
building (by Site Contractor).
B. Drainage Piping: Building sewer piping outside building that conveys storm drainage from
building (by Plumbing Contractor, beginning at 5’-0” outside of building.)
C. Service Entrance Piping: Drainage piping at entry into building between outside building
sewer piping and inside drainage piping (by Site Contractor).
D. Drainage and Vent Piping: Piping inside building that conveys waste water and vapors from
fixtures and equipment throughout the building.
E. Force-Main Piping: Drainage piping, under pressure (where required due to local conditions).
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic and other piping materials:
1. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.
1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Systems: 10-foot head of water.
2. Storm Drainage Systems: 10-foot head of water.
3. Sewage, Force-Main Piping Systems: 100 psig (only where required due to local
conditions).
SECTION 22 13 16 (15150) - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 2
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1. Product Data:
2. Test Results and Reports: Specified in "Field Quality Control" Article.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on piping made to specified standards.
B. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation.
C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping
components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-
drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-
sewer" for plastic sewer piping.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE MATERIALS
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Service weight ASTM C564 rubber gasket.
C. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A888 or CISPI 301.
D. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D2665, Schedule 40.
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53.
F. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151.
G. Copper Tubing: ASTM B306.
H. PVC Piping
1. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, solid-wall drain, waste, and vent.
a. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2665, made to ASTM D3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns.
2. Cellular-Core, Schedule 40, PVC Pipe: ASTM F891, Schedule 40.
a. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2665, made to ASTM D3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe.
3. Cellular-Core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC Pipe: ASTM F891, Series PS 100.
a. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2665, made to ASTM D3311, drain, waste, and vent
patterns and to fit Series PS 100 sewer and drain pipe.
2.02 JOINING MATERIALS
A. General: Applications of the following piping joining materials are indicated in Part 3 "Piping
Applications" Article.
B. Refer to Section 22 95 00 - "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for commonly used joining
materials.
C. Hubless, Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Couplings: ASTM C1277 assembly of metal housing,
corrosion-resistant fasteners, and ASTM C564 rubber sleeve or gasket with integral, center
pipe stop. Include the following:
SECTION 22 13 16 (15150) - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 3
D. Sovent Fittings (For sanitary pipe system)
1. Make- PROSETSYSTEMS
2. Aerator & de-aerator fittings.
3. ICC-ES certified.
4. Heavy-Duty, Stainless-Steel couplings: ASTM A666, Type 304, stainless-steel housing
or shield; and stainless-steel clamps. Include gasket.
a. Clamp Width: 3 inches wide with 4 clamps, for piping 1-1/2- to 4-inch NPS.
b. Clamp Width: 4 inches wide with 6 clamps, for piping 5- to 10-inch NPS.
5. Heavy-Duty, FM-Approved, Stainless-Steel Couplings: ASTM A666, Type 304, stainless-
steel housing; and stainless-steel clamps. Include gasket or bushing.
a. Clamp Width: 3 inches wide with 2 clamps, for piping 1-1/2- to 4-inch NPS.
b. Clamp Width: 4 inches wide with 2 clamps, for piping 5- to 10-inch NPS.
6. Heavy-Duty, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A48, 2-piece, cast-iron housing; and stainless-
steel bolts and nuts. Include gasket.
E. Transition Couplings: Coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure
rating at least equal to, and with ends compatible with piping to be joined.
F. Flexible, Transition Couplings for Underground, Nonpressure Piping: ASTM C1173 with
elastomeric sleeve. Include ends same sizes as piping to be joined and include corrosion-
resistant metal band on each end.
1. Sleeve Type for Plain-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric sleeve and stainless-steel band
assembly, fabricated to match outside diameters of piping to be joined. Include the
following:
a. Sleeves for Cast-Iron Soil Piping: ASTM C564 rubber.
b. Sleeves for Plastic Piping: ASTM F477 elastomeric seal.
c. Sleeves for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.
d. Bands: Stainless steel, one at each pipe insert.
2. Gasket Type for Dissimilar-End Piping: Rubber or elastomeric compression gasket,
made to match inside diameter of pipe or hub, and outside diameter of adjoining pipe.
Include the following:
a. Gaskets for Cast-Iron Soil Piping: ASTM C564 rubber.
b. Gaskets for Plastic Piping: ASTM F477 elastomeric seal.
c. Gaskets for Dissimilar Piping: Compatible with piping materials to be joined.
2.03 PIPE AND TUBE FITTINGS
A. General: Applications of the following pipe and tube fitting materials are indicated in Part 3
"Piping Applications" Article.
B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron, Soil-Pipe Fittings: ASTM A74, Service weighthub and spigot.
Include ASTM C564 rubber gasket for each hub.
C. Hubless, Cast-Iron, Soil-Pipe Fittings: CISPI 301.
D. Ferrous Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized steel fitting with telescoping body and slip-
pipe section. Include packing rings, packing, limit rods, chrome-plated finish on slip-pipe
section, and flanged ends.
SECTION 22 13 16 (15150) - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 4
E. Ferrous, Double Expansion Joints: Compound, galvanized steel fitting with telescoping body
and 2 slip-pipe sections. Include packing rings, packing, limit rods, chrome-plated finish on
slip-pipe sections, and flanged ends.
F. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D2665, made to ASTM D3311 drain, waste, and vent pipe
patterns.
G. PVC Plastic, Tubular Fittings: ASTM F409 drainage pattern, with ends as required for
application.
H. Steel Pipe Fittings:
1. Cast-Iron, Threaded, Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.12 [galvanized].
2. Gray-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, [galvanized,] standard pattern.
3. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
4. Cast-Iron, Flanged Fittings: ASME B 16.1, Class 125 [galvanized].
I. Ductile Iron Pipe Fittings:
1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray-iron standard pattern
or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.
a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile or gray-iron glands, rubber
gaskets, and steel bolts.
J. Copper Tube Fittings:
1. ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29 wrought copper, solder-joint fittings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION
A. Refer to Section 31 20 00 - "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.
3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating
may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Aboveground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following:
1. 1-1/2-Inch NPS: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings; and
one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FM-approved, Type 304, stainless steel.
c. Couplings: Heavy-duty, cast iron.
2. 2- to 4-Inch NPS: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service class; hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; and compression joints.
3. 2- to 4-Inch NPS: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings; and
one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FM-approved, Type 304, stainless steel.
c. Couplings: Heavy-duty, cast iron.
d. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
e. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FM-approved, Type 304, stainless steel.
SECTION 22 13 16 (15150) - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 5
f. Couplings: Heavy-duty, cast iron.
D. Underground, Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: Use the following:
1. 1-1/2-Inch NPS: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings; and
one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FM-approved, Type 304, stainless steel.
c. Couplings: Heavy-duty, cast iron.
2. 2- to 4-Inch NPS: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service class; hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; and compression joints.
3. 2- to 4-Inch NPS: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra Heavy class; hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and compression joints.
4. 2- to 4-Inch NPS: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings; and
one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FM-approved, Type 304, stainless steel.
c. Couplings: Heavy-duty, cast iron.
d. Couplings: Compact, Type 304, stainless steel.
5. 2- to 4-Inch NPS (DN50 to DN100): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-
cemented joints.
6. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service
class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; and compression joints.
7. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra
Heavy class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and
compression joints.
8. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron,
soil-pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FM-approved, Type 304, stainless steel.
c. Couplings: Heavy-duty, cast iron.
d. Couplings: Compact, Type 304, stainless steel.
9. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and
solvent-cemented joints.
10. 8-Inch NPS (DN200): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service class; hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; and compression joints.
11. 8-Inch NPS (DN200): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra Heavy class; hub-and-
spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and compression joints.
12. 8-Inch NPS (DN200): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings;
and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FM-approved, Type 304, stainless steel.
c. Couplings: Heavy-duty, cast iron.
d. Couplings: Compact, Type 304, stainless steel.
SECTION 22 13 16 (15150) - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 6
13. 8-Inch NPS (DN200): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
E. Aboveground, Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following:
1. 2- to 4-Inch NPS (DN50 to DN100): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service class;
hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; and compression joints.
2. 2- to 4-Inch NPS (DN50 to DN100): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-
pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FM-approved, Type 304, stainless steel.
c. Couplings: Heavy-duty, cast iron.
d. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 301, stainless steel.
3. 2- to 4-Inch NPS (DN50 to DN100): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-
cemented joints.
4. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service
class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; and compression joints.
5. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron,
soil-pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FM-approved, Type 304, stainless steel.
c. Couplings: Heavy-duty, cast iron.
d. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 301, stainless steel.
6. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and
solvent-cemented joints.
F. Underground, Storm Drainage Piping: Use the following:
1. 3- and 4-Inch NPS (DN80 and DN100): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service
class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; and compression joints.
2. 3- and 4-Inch NPS (DN80 and DN100): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra Heavy
class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and compression
joints.
3. 3- and 4-Inch NPS (DN80 and DN100): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron,
soil-pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FM-approved, Type 304, stainless steel.
c. Couplings: Heavy-duty, cast iron.
d. Couplings: Compact, Type 304, stainless steel.
4. 3- and 4-Inch NPS (DN80 and DN100): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and
solvent-cemented joints.
5. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Service
class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Service class; and compression joints.
6. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra
Heavy class; hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and
compression joints.
7. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron,
soil-pipe fittings; and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
SECTION 22 13 16 (15150) - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 7
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FM-approved, Type 304, stainless steel.
c. Couplings: Heavy-duty, cast iron.
d. Couplings: Compact, Type 304, stainless steel.
8. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and
solvent-cemented joints.
9. 8-Inch NPS (DN200): Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe, Extra Heavy class; hub-and-
spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings, Extra Heavy class; and compression joints.
10. 8-Inch NPS (DN200): Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe; hubless, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings;
and one of the following hubless, cast-iron, soil-piping couplings:
a. Couplings: Heavy-duty, Type 304, stainless steel.
b. Couplings: Heavy-duty, FM-approved, Type 304, stainless steel.
c. Couplings: Heavy-duty, cast iron.
d. Couplings: Compact, Type 304, stainless steel.
11. 8-Inch NPS (DN200): PVC plastic pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.
G. Aboveground, Sewage Force Mains: Use the following:
1. 2- to 4-Inch NPS (DN50 and DN100): Hard copper water tube, Type L (Type B); copper,
solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. 2- to 4-Inch NPS (DN50 and DN100): Hard copper water tube, Type L (Type B); copper,
grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
3. 2- to 4-Inch NPS (DN50 to DN100): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded
fittings.
4. 2- to 4-Inch NPS (DN50 to DN100): Galvanized steel pipe; steel, grooved-end fittings;
and steel, keyed couplings.
5. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): Hard copper water tube, Type L (Type B);
copper, grooved-end fittings; and copper, keyed couplings.
6. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): Galvanized steel pipe and cast-iron, threaded
fittings.
7. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): Galvanized steel pipe; steel, grooved-end
fittings; and steel, keyed couplings.
8. 5- and 6-Inch NPS (DN125 and DN150): Ductile-iron, grooved-end pipe; ductile-iron,
grooved-end fittings; and ductile-iron, keyed couplings.
H. Underground, Sewage-Force-Main, Service Entrance Piping: Use the following:
1. 2- to 3-Inch NPS (DN50 to DN80): Soft copper water tube, Type K (Type A); wrought-
copper, solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
2. 2- to 3-Inch NPS (DN50 to DN80): Soft copper water tube, Type L (Type B); wrought-
copper, solder-joint pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
3. 4- and 6-Inch NPS (DN100 and DN150): Ductile-iron pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical- or
push-on-joint fittings; rubber gaskets; and mechanical or push-on joints.
3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Refer to Section 22 95 00 - "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping installation.
SECTION 22 13 16 (15150) - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 8
3.04 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 33 00 00 - "Utilities" for sanitary piping and refer to Section 33 46 00
“Subdrainage” for storm piping.
B. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in sizes and
locations indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade
at connections of building sanitary drains with building sanitary sewers.
C. Extend building storm drain piping and connect to storm sewer piping in sizes and locations
indicated for service entrances into building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at
connections of building storm drains and building storm sewers.
D. Extend building sanitary drain, force-main piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping in size
and location indicated for service entrance into building. Install cleanout, fitting with closure
plug or equivalent, inside building.
E. Extend building storm drain, force-main piping and connect to storm sewer piping in size and
location indicated for service entrance into building. Install cleanout, fitting with closure plug or
equivalent, inside building.
F. Ductile-Iron, Force-Main, Service Entrance Piping: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried
piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to sewer piping
outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block
supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
1. Encase piping with polyethylene film according to ASTM A674 or AWWA C105 if required
due to local conditions.
G. Install wall penetration system at each service entrance pipe penetration through foundation
wall. Make installation watertight. Refer to Section 22 95 00 - "Common Work Results for
Plumbing" for wall penetration systems.
3.05 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
B. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends,
and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical
stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-
branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with
common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
make change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard
increasers and reducers if different sizes of piping are connected. Reducing size of drainage
piping in direction of flow is prohibited.
C. Lay buried building drain piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades
and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of
lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past
each joint as completed.
D. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Sanitary Building Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping 3-inch NPS
(DN80) and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping 4-inch NPS
(DN100) and larger.
2. Horizontal, Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Storm Building Drain: 1 percent downward in direction of flow.
4. Horizontal, Storm Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
5. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
SECTION 22 13 16 (15150) - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 9
E. Install force mains at elevations indicated if required due to local conditions.
F. Install engineered, sanitary drainage and vent s ystems in locations indicated and as follows:
1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
G. Install engineered, controlled-flow, storm drainage systems in locations indicated. Comply
with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
H. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slab on grade if
slab is without membrane waterproofing.
I. Install PVC plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D2665.
J. Install underground, PVC plastic drainage piping according to ASTM D2321.
3.06 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Section 22 95 00 - "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Cast-Iron, Soil-Piping Joints: Make joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
1. Compression Joints: Make with rubber gasket matching class of pipe and fittings.
2. Hubless Joints: Make with rubber gasket and sleeve or clamp.
C. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to
coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
D. PVC Piping Joints: Join drainage piping according to ASTM D2665.
E. Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in ASTM F402
for safe handling during joining of plastic pipe and fittings.
3.07 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 22 05 29 - "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for
pipe hanger and support devices. Install the following:
1. Riser clamps, MSS Type 8 or Type 42, for vertical runs.
2. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual, straight, horizontal runs 100
feet and less.
3. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, for individual, straight, horizontal runs longer
than 100 feet.
4. Spring cushion rolls, MSS Type 49, if indicated, for individual, straight, horizontal runs
longer than 100 feet.
5. Pipe rolls, MSS Type 44, for multiple, straight, horizontal runs 100 feet or longer. Support
pipe rolls on trapeze.
6. Spring hangers, MSS Type 52, for supporting base of vertical runs.
B. Install supports according to 22 05 29 - "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment"
C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
E. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. 1-1/2- and 2-Inch NPS (DN40 and DN50): Maximum horizontal spacing, 60 inches with
3/8-inch minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 15 feet.
SECTION 22 13 16 (15150) - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 10
2. 3-Inch NPS (DN80): Maximum horizontal spacing, 60 inches with 1/2-inch minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 15 feet.
3. 4- and 5-Inch NPS (DN100 and DN125): Maximum horizontal spacing, 60 inches with
5/8-inch minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 15 feet.
4. 6-Inch NPS (DN150): Maximum horizontal spacing, 60 inches with 3/4-inch minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 15 feet.
5. 8- through 12-Inch NPS (DN200 through DN300): Maximum horizontal spacing, 60
inches with 7/8-inch minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 15 feet.
6. Spacing for horizontal pipe in 10-foot lengths may be increased to 10 feet. Spacing for
fittings is limited to 60 inches.
F. Install hangers for PVC plastic piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod
diameters:
1. 1-1/2- and 2-Inch NPS (DN40 and DN50): Maximum horizontal spacing, 48 inches with
3/8-inch minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 48 inches.
2. 4- and 5-Inch NPS (DN100 and DN125): Maximum horizontal spacing, 48 inches with
5/8-inch minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 48 inches.
3. 6-Inch NPS (DN150): Maximum horizontal spacing, 48 inches with 3/4-inch minimum rod
diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 48 inches.
4. 8- through 12-Inch NPS (DN200 through DN300): Maximum horizontal spacing, 48
inches with 7/8-inch minimum rod diameter; maximum vertical spacing, 48 inches.
G. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's
written instructions.
3.08 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect service entrance piping to exterior sewerage and drainage piping. Use transition
fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.
B. Connect drainage piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the
following:
1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code. Refer to Section 22 40 00 "Plumbing Fixtures."
2. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code. Refer to Section 22 10 13 - "Plumbing
Specialties."
3. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated,
and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections 2-1/2-inch
NPS (DN65) and larger.
C. Connect force-main piping to service entrance piping, and extend to and connect to the
following:
1. Sump Pumps: Connect force-main piping to sump-pump discharge.
2. Sewage Pumps: Connect force-main piping to sewage-pump discharge.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect drainage and vent piping as follows:
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
SECTION 22 13 16 (15150) - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 11
2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction.
a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Test drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in
absence of published procedure, as follows:
1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and
vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or
concealed before it has been tested and approved.
3. Roughing-In Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water
to point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet of head. Water level must not drop from 15
minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for
leaks.
4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled
with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack
openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping
system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of
water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
5. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
C. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence
of published procedure, as follows:
1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping
until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed
before it has been tested and approved.
2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
3. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
SECTION 22 13 16 (15150) - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING Page 12
B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
D. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats of water-based
latex paint.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 30 00 (15430) - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Page 1
`
SECTION 22 30 00 (15430) - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Backflow Preventers
2. Water Regulators
3. Thermostatic Mixing Valves
4. Clothes Washer Drain & Supply
5. Hydrants
6. Trap Primer Valves
7. Drain Valves
8. Backwater Valves
9. Floor Drains
10. Roof Drains
11. Grease Interceptors
12. Oil Interceptors
13. Lint Interceptors
14. Miscellaneous Piping Specialties B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 53 23 (07530) - Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing]
2. Section 07 62 00 (07620) - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim]
3. Section 22 05 00 (15050) – Common Work Results for Plumbing
4. Section 22 05 23 (15110) – General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
5. Section 22 05 53 (15075) – Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment: for
labeling and identifying requirements.
6. Section 22 05 19 (15122) - Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping
7. Section 22 11 16 (15140) - Domestic Water Piping
8. Section 22 13 16 (15150) - Drainage and Vent Piping
9. Section 22 40 00 (15410) – Plumbing Fixtures and Plumbing Fixture Matrix
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Publications:
1. A112.1.2 “Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems (For Plumbing Fixtures and Water-Connected
Receptors)”
2. A112.14.1 “Backwater Valves”
3. A112.3.1 “Grate Openings”
4. A112.21.1M “Floor Drains”
5. A112.21.2M “Roof Drains”
6. A112.21.3M “Hydrants for Utility and Maintenance Use”
SECTION 22 30 00 (15430) - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Page 2
`
7. B1.20.7 “Hose Coupling Screw Threads, Inch”
8. B31.9 “Building Services Piping”
B. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE) Publications:
1. 1001 “Performance Requirements for Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers”
2. 1003 “Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves”
3. 1010 “Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters”
4. 1011 “Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers”
5. 1012 “Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric
Vent”
6. 1013 “Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers
and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers”
7. 1015 “Performance Requirements for Double Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies
and Double Check Fire Protection Backflow Prevention Assemblies”
8. 1017 “Performance Requirements for Temperature Actuated Mixing Valves for Hot
Water Distribution Systems”
9. 1018 “Performance Requirements for Trap Seal Primer Valves - Potable Water
Supplied”
10. 1019 “Performance Requirements for Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant,
Automatic Draining Type”
11. 1020 “Performance Requirements for Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly”
C. ASTM International (ASTM) Publications: (American Society for Testing and Materials)
1. A48 "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings"
2. A74 “Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings”
3. B62 “Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings”
4. C564 “Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe & Fittings”
D. American Water Works Association (AWWA) Publications:
1. C550 “Standard for Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants”
E. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) Publications:
F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
1. 70 "National Electric Code"
G. Plumbing & Drainage Institute (PDA) Publications:
1. G101 “Testing and Rating Procedure for Grease Interceptors”
2. WH 201 “Water Hammer Arresters Standard” H. Underwriter's
Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards:
1. 486A “Standard For Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper
Conductors”
SECTION 22 30 00 (15430) - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Page 3
`
2. 486B “Standard for Wire Connectors for Use With Aluminum Conductors”
1.03 SUBMITTALS
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on plumbing specialties made to
specified standards.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated plumbing specialties specified in this
Section that are listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.
C. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and
installation.
D. Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical components.
1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described in Section 01 78 43
(01790) - “Spare Parts and materials” below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Backflow Preventers:
a. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. (978-688-1811)
b. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. (805-238-7100)
2. Water Regulators:
a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. (704-847-9191)
b. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. (978-688-1811)
c. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. (805-238-7100)
3. Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves:
a. Lawler Manufacturing Co., Inc. (800-763-2709)
b. Leonard Valve Co. (401-461-1200)
c. Symmons Industries, Inc. (617-848-2250)
4. Clothes Washer Drain & Supply
a. Acorn Engineering Co. (800-488-8999)
b. Guy Gray Manufacturing Co., Inc., IPS Corporation (800-421-2677)
c. Symmons Industries, Inc. (617-848-2250)
5. Hydrants:
a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Division of Smith Industries (334-277-8520)
b. Woodford Manufacturing Co. (719-574-0600)
c. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. (814-455-0921)
6. Water Hammer Arresters:
a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. (503-256-4010)
b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. (816-779-6104)
SECTION 22 30 00 (15430) - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Page 4
`
c. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Division of Smith Industries (334-277-8520)
7. Trap Primer Valves:
a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. (503-256-4010)
b. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Division of Smith Industries (334-277-8520)
c. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. (978-688-1811))
d. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. (814-455-0921)
8. Backwater Valves:
a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Division of Smith Industries (334-277-8520)
b. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. (978-688-1811)
c. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.(814-455-0921)
9. Floor Drains
a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Division of Smith Industries (334-277-8520)
b. Josam Co. (800-365-6726)
c. Zurn Industries, Inc. (814-455-0921)
10. Roof Drains
a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Division of Smith Industries (334-277-8520)
b. Josam Co. (800-365-6726)
c. Zurn Industries, Inc. (814-455-0921)
11. Grease Interceptors
a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Division of Smith Industries (334-277-8520)
b. Josam Co. (800-365-6726)
c. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Jonespec Div. (814-455-0921)
12. Oil Interceptors
a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Division of Smith Industries (334-277-8520)
b. Josam Co. (800-365-6726)
c. Zurn Industries, Inc. (814-455-0921)
13. Lint Interceptors
a. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Division of Smith Industries (334-277-8520)
b. Josam Co. (800-365-6726)
c. Zurn Industries, Inc. (814-455-0921)
2.02 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers, of size indicated for maximum flow rate and
maximum pressure loss indicated.
1. Body: Bronze, with flanged ends.
2. Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating for backflow preventers
having cast-iron or steel body.
3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
4. Exterior Finish: Rough Brass.
5. Strainer on inlet.
6. Test Kit with Plastic Case: Per manufacturer’s recommendation.
SECTION 22 30 00 (15430) - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Page 5
`
B. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001, with floating disc and
atmospheric vent.
C. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011, nickel plated, with nonremovable and
manual drain features, and ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet. Units attached to
rough-bronze-finish hose connections may be rough bronze.
D. Intermediate Atmospheric-Vent Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1012, suitable for continuous
pressure application. Include inlet screen and 2 independent check valves with intermediate
atmospheric vent.
E. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1013, suitable for continuous
pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and
strainer on inlet; test cocks; and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2 air-gap
fitting located between 2 positive-seating check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle one-third of flow range.
F. Double-Check Backflow Prevention Assemblies: ASSE 1015, suitable for continuous
pressure application. Include shutoff valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; and test
cocks with 2 positive-seating check valves.
1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle one-third of flow range.
G. Antisiphon-Pressure-Type Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1020, suitable for continuous pressure
application. Include shutoff valves, spring-loaded check valve, spring-loaded floating disc,
test cocks, and atmospheric vent.
1. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle one-third of flow range.
2.03 WATER REGULATORS
A. General: ASSE 1003, water regulators, rated for initial working pressure of 150 psig
minimum, of size, flow rate, and inlet and outlet pressures indicated. Include integral factory
installed or separate field-installed Y-pattern strainer.
1. 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2. 2-1/2-Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: Bronze or cast-iron body with flanged ends.
Include AWWA C550 or FDA-approved interior epoxy coating for regulators with cast-
iron body.
3. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
4. Exterior Finish: Standard
5. Single-seated, direct-operated type.
B. Single-seated, direct-operated, integral-bypass type.
C. Pilot-operated type, single- or double-seated, cast-iron-body main valve, with bronze-body
pilot valve.
2.04 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES
A. General: ASSE 1017, manually adjustable, thermostatic water mixing valve with bronze body.
Include check stop and union on hot- and cold-water-supply inlets, adjustable temperature
setting, and capacity at pressure loss as indicated.
1. Bimetal Thermostat, Operation and Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum.
B. Thermostatic Water Mixing Valves: Unit, with the following:
1. Piping, of sizes and in arrangement indicated. Include valves and unions.
2. Piping Component Finish: Rough brass.
3. Thermometer: Manufacturer's standard.
SECTION 22 30 00 (15430) - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Page 6
`
2.05 CLOTHES WASHER DRAIN & SUPPLY
A. General: Recessed-mounting outlet boxes with fittings complying with ASME A112.18.1.
Include box with faceplate, services indicated for equipment connections, and wood-blocking
reinforcement.
B. Clothes Washer Outlet Boxes: With hose connections, drain, and the following:
1. Box and Faceplate: Plastic.
2. Shutoff Fittings: 2 hose bibbs.
3. Supply Fittings: Two 1/2-inch NPS (DN15) gate, globe, or ball valves and 1/2-inch NPS
(DN15) copper, water tubing.
4. Drain Fitting: 2-inch NPS (DN50) drainage piping P-trap with 2-inch NPS (DN50)
standpipe extending from floor to outlet box and 2-inch NPS (DN50) waste.
2.06 HYDRANTS
A. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M, nonfreeze, key operation. Provide one operating key.
1. Inlet: 3/4- or 1-inch NPS (DN20 or DN25) threaded or solder joint.
2. Outlet: ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads, and integral or field-installed,
nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker with ASME B1.20.7
gardenhose threads on outlet.
3. Type: Projecting.
4. Finish: Nickel bronze.
B. Wall Hydrants: ASME A112.21.3M or ASSE 1019, nonfreeze, automatic draining, anti-back
flow type, key operation, with 3/4- or 1-inch NPS (DN20 or DN25) threaded or solder-joint
inlet, and ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads on outlet. Include operating key for each
hydrant.
1. Type: Recessed
2. Finish: Nickel bronze.
2.07 TRAP PRIMER VALVES
A. Trap Seal Primer Valves: ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the following
characteristics:
1. 125-psig minimum working pressure.
2. Bronze body with atmospheric-vented drain chamber.
3. Inlet and Outlet Connections: 1/2-inch NPS (DN15) threaded, union, or solder joint.
4. Gravity Drain Outlet Connection: 1/2-inch NPS (DN15) threaded or solder joint.
5. Finished: Rough bronze.
2.08 DRAIN VALVES
A. Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, 3/4-inch NPS (DN20) ball valve, rated for 400-psig
minimum CWP. Include 2-piece, ASTM B62 bronze body with standard port, chrome-plated
brass ball, replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
2. Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread and cap.
3. Hose-End Drain Valve Option: MSS SP-80, gate valve, Class 125, ASTM B62 body,
with 3/4-inch NPS (DN20) threaded or solder-joint inlet and ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose
threads on outlet and cap. Hose bibbs are prohibited for this application.
SECTION 22 30 00 (15430) - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Page 7
`
B. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, ball valve, rated for 200-psig minimum CWP or
MSS SP-80, Class 125, gate valve; ASTM B62 bronze body, with 1/8-inch NPS (DN6) side
drain outlet and cap.
2.09 BACKWATER VALVES
A. Horizontal Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, cast-iron body, with removable bronze
swing-check valve and threaded or bolted cover.
1. Closed-Position Check Valve: Factory assembled or field modified to hang closed
unless subject to backflow condition.
2. Open -Position Check Valve: Factory assembled or field modified to hang open
unless subject to backflow condition
3. Extension: ASTM A74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to
fieldinstalled cleanout at floor, instead of cover
B. Drain Outlet Backwater Valves: Cast-iron or bronze body, with removable ball float, threaded
inlet, and threaded or spigot outlet.
2.10 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Floor Drains:
1. Comply with ASME A112.21.1M and ASME A112.3.1.
2. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Matrix
2.11 ROOF DRAINS
A. Roof Drains:
1. Comply with ASME A112.21.2M and ASME A112.3.1.
2. Refer to Plumbing Fixture Matrix
3. Extension Collars: Required.
4. Underdeck Clamp: Required.
5. Sump Receiver: Required.
2.12 GREASE INTERCEPTORS:
A. Comply with PDI-G101.
B. Plumbing and Drainage Institute Seal: Required.
C. Body Material: Cast iron or Cast iron or steel per local plumbing jurisdiction requirements.
D. Body Extension: If required per local plumbing jurisdiction requirements.
E. Flow Rate: as indicated on drawings.
F. Grease Retention Capacity: as indicated on drawings .
G. Inlet and Outlet Size: as indicated on drawings.
H. Cleanout: Integral.
1. Mounting: as indicated on drawings.
2. Operation: Manual Cleaning.
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010, or PDI-WH 201, bellows or piston type with
pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes are based on water-supply fixture units.
B. Interior Hose Bibbs: Bronze body, with renewable composition disc, 1/2- or 3/4-inch NPS
(DN15 or DN20) threaded or solder-joint inlet. Provide ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads
on outlet and integral or field-installed, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum
breaker.
SECTION 22 30 00 (15430) - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Page 8
`
1. Finish: Rough brass.
2. Operation: Wheel handle.
C. Roof Flashing Assemblies: Coordinate with Division 07 Sections for roofing systems.
D. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,
castiron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section of length to provide
depth indicated; and where indicated, increaser fitting of size indicated, joined with ASTM
C564 rubber gaskets. Size P-trap as indicated.
E. Deep-Seal Traps: Cast iron or bronze, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping,
cleanout where indicated, and trap seal primer valve connection where indicated.
1. 2-Inch NPS (DN50): 4-inch minimum water seal.
2. 2-1/2 Inch NPS (DN65) and Larger: 5-inch minimum water seal.
F. Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and
trap seal primer valve connection.
G. Air-Gap Fittings: ASME A112.1.2, cast iron or cast bronze, with fixed air gap, inlet for drain
pipe or tube, and threaded or spigot outlet.
H. Stack Flashing Fittings: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for
terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe.
I. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include
vented hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe.
J. Vent Terminals: Commercially manufactured, shop-fabricated or field-fabricated, frost-proof
assembly constructed of galvanized steel, copper, or lead-coated copper. Size to provide
1inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with
counter flashing, as indicated.
K. Expansion Joints: ASME A112.21.2M, assembly with cast-iron body with bronze sleeve,
packing gland, and packing, of size and end types corresponding to connected piping.
L. Downspout Boots: ASTM A48, gray-iron casting, with 4-inch NPS (DN100) outlet;
shopapplied bituminous coating; and inlet size indicated or ASTM A74, Service class, hub-
andspigot, cast-iron soil pipe.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLUMBING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install plumbing specialty components, connections, and devices according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
2. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors as indicated.
3. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building
substrate if supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is
indicated.
4. Fasten recessed, wall-mounting plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.
5. Secure supplies to supports or substrate.
6. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless
trap is indicated.
SECTION 22 30 00 (15430) - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Page 9
`
7. Locate drainage piping as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures
and drains.
8. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations
and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal
protruding pipe fittings.
9. Include wood-blocking reinforcement for recessed and wall-mounting plumbing
specialties.
B. Backflow Preventers:
1. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated, at each water-supply
connection to mechanical equipment and systems, and to other equipment and water
systems as indicated. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Locate backflow
preventers in same room as connected equipment. Install air-gap fitting on units with
atmospheric-vent connection and pipe relief outlet drain to nearest floor drain. Do not install
bypass around backflow preventer.
C. Pressure Regulators:
1. Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance valve bypass.
Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet. Refer to Section 22 05 19 - “Meters and Gauges
for Plumbing Piping”.
D. Hose Bibbs:
1. Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.
E. Wall Hydrants:
1. Install wall hydrants with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.
F. Valves:
1. Install trap seal primer valves in accessible locations with valve outlet piping pitched
down toward drain trap a minimum of one percent and connect to floor-drain body, trap,
or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow. Identify device locations on record drawings.
2. Install backwater valves in building drain piping as indicated. For interior installation,
provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover,
and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing.
3. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball, gate,
or globe valve if specific valve is not indicated.
4. Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations. G. Cleanouts:
1. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and
where not indicated, according to the following:
a. Size same as drainage piping up to 4-inch NPS (DN100). Use 4-inch NPS (DN100)
for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
b. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
c. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping 4-inch NPS (DN100) and smaller
and 100 feet for larger piping.
d. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
2. Install cleanout deck plates, of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor, for floor
cleanouts for piping below floors.
3. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with
finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed walls.
H. Flashings and Vent Caps
SECTION 22 30 00 (15430) - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Page 10
`
1. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing
through floors with waterproof membrane.
2. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof (where required).
Maintain 1-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.
I. Floor Drains:
1. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush
with finished floor or as indicated. Size outlets as indicated.
2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set
with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:
a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch
total depression.
b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to one percent slope.
c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than
1inch total depression.
3. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless
otherwise indicated.
4. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
5. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
J. Roof Drains:
1. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas according to roof membrane manufacturer's
written installation instructions. Size outlets as indicated.
2. Install roof-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
3. Position roof drains for easy access and maintenance.
K. Interceptors
1. Install interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow control fitting, according to
authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing.
Above-Floor Installation: Set unit with bottom resting on floor, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Flush with Floor Installation: Set unit and extension if required, with cover flush with
finished floor.
b. Recessed Floor Installation: Set unit in receiver housing having bottom or cradle
supports, with receiver housing cover flush with finished floor.
Install clean out immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral cleanout
on outlet
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection
requirements:
1. Install piping connections between plumbing specialties and piping specified in other
Division 22 Sections.
SECTION 22 30 00 (15430) - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Page 11
`
2. Install piping connections indicated between appliances and equipment specified in
other Sections; connect directly to plumbing piping systems.
3. Install piping connections indicated as indirect wastes from appliances and equipment
specified in other Sections, to spill over receptors connected to plumbing piping
systems. B. Install hoses between plumbing specialties and appliances as required for
connections.
C. Arrange for electric-power connections to plumbing specialties and devices that require
power. Electric power is specified in Division 26 Sections.
D. Supply Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install hot- and cold-water-supply piping of sizes
indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Drainage Runouts to Plumbing Specialties: Install drainage and vent piping, with approved
trap, of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Interceptor Connections: Connect piping, flow-control fittings, and accessories as indicated.
1. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and flow-control fitting and vent to
unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff-type unit. G. Ground electric-powered
plumbing specialties.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.03 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Fabricate flashing manufactured from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other
drainage shapes are required.
B. Burn joints of lead sheets where required.
C. Solder joints of copper sheets where required.
D. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in
floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.
1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches and
skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.
2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around
sleeve.
3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8
inches around specialty.
E. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.
F. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.
G. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counter flashing or commercially made
flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Sections for type of roofing.
H. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure
flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.
I. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes as indicated.
Install drain connection if indicated.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of factory-authorized service representative to
supervise the field assembly of components and installation of grease recovery units,
including piping and electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
SECTION 22 30 00 (15430) - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT Page 12
`
1. Test and adjust plumbing specialty controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and components.
3.05 COMMISSIONING
A. Before startup, perform the following checks:
1. System tests are complete.
2. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired.
3. Clear space is provided for servicing specialties.
B. Before operating systems, perform the following steps:
1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
2. Open general-duty valves to fully open position.
3. Remove and clean strainers.
4. Verify that drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until
clear.
C. Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning.
3.06 DEMONSTRATION
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup
services and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup of
and servicing interceptors.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup of
and servicing grease recovery units.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 22 34 00 (15486) - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Page 1
SECTION 22 34 00 (15486) FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Gas fired water heaters.
2. Storage tanks.
3. Expansion tanks.
4. Accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03 30 00 (03300) - Cast-in-Place Concrete
2. Section 22 05 00 (15050) – Common Work Results for Plumbing
3. Section 22 05 23 (15110) – General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping
4. Section 22 11 23 (15440) – Domestic Water Pumps
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:
1. Z21.10.3 “Gas Water Heaters - Volume III, Storage Water Heaters with Input Ratings
Above 75,000 Btu per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous”
1. [Z21.12] [a. “Addenda 1 to ANSI Z21.12-1990, Draft Hoods”] [“b. Addenda 2 to ANSI
Z21.12-1990 and ANSI Z21.12A-1993, Draft Hoods”] 22_34_00, 2.2G, 2.3G
2. Z21.13 “Gas-Fired Low Pressure Steam and Hot Water Boilers”
3. Z21.15 “Manually Operated Gas Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector Valves and
Hose End Valves”
4. Z21.18 “Gas Appliance Pressure Regulators”
5. Z21.20 “Automatic Gas Ignition Systems and Components”
6. Z21.21 “Automatic Valves for Gas Appliances (same as CSA 6.5)”
7. Z21.22 “Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems”
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Publications:
1. 90.1 “Energy Code for Commercial and High-Rise Residential Buildings”
2. 90.2 “Energy Code for New Low-Rise Residential Buildings”
C. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Publications:
1. “(The 2004) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code”
2. B1.20.1 "Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch"
3. B16.5 “Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24”
4. B16.24 “Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 400,
600, 900, 1500 and 2500”
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
1. 54 “National Fuel Gas Code”
2. 70 "National Electric Code"
E. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications:
SECTION 22 34 00 (15486) - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Page 2
1. 486A “Standard For Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper
Conductors”
2. 486B “Standard for Wire Connectors for Use With Aluminum Conductors”
3. 778 “Standard for Motor-Operated Water Pumps”
4. 795 “Standard for Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating Equipment”
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1. Product Data:
a. For each type and size of water heater, include rated capacities; shipping, installed,
and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.
b. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
2. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of water heaters certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
3. Maintenance Data: For water heaters to include in maintenance manuals specified in
Division 01.
4. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of water heaters through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of water
heaters and are based on specific units indicated.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. ANSI Compliance: Provide gas water heaters that comply with ANSI standards for gas water
heaters and related products and that bear AGA certification label.
E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label water heater, hot-water storage tanks to comply with
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," Division 01.
F. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with performance efficiencies prescribed for the following:
1. ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings," for commercial water heaters.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other
rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements
of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace
components of water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Failures include storage tanks, circulators, and burner assemblies.
SECTION 22 34 00 (15486) - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Page 3
2. Warranty Period: From date of Substantial Completion:
a. Storage Tanks: Five (5) years.
b. Circulators and Burner Assemblies: One (1) Year.
c. Tank Type Water Heaters: Three (3) Year Leakage, One (1) Year Parts.
d. Boilers: Five (5) Year Leakage, One (1) Year Parts.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers
1. Gas Fired Water Heaters: (Power Vent, Storage Type)
a. Lochinvar Corporation. (615-889-8900)
b. A. O. Smith Water Products Co. (800-527-1953)
c. Bradford white (800-334-3393)
2. Gas Fired Water Heaters: (High Efficiency, Separated Combustion)
a. Lochinvar Corporation. (615-889-8900)
b. A. O. Smith Water Products Co. (800-527-1953)
c. Raypak, Inc., a Rheem Company (805-278-5300)
d. RBI Water Heaters (800-811-5490)
e. Brad ford white (800-334-3393)
f. Intelli hot (1-877-835-1705)
g. Rinnai (1-866-383-0707)
3. Expansion Tanks:
a. Amtrol, Inc. (401-884-6300)
b. A. O. Smith Water Products Co. (800-527-1953)
c. Wessels Company. (317-888-9800)
d. Taco, Inc. (401-942-8000)
2.02 GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS ([POWER VENT], STORAGE TYPE)
A. Description: Comply with ANSI Z21.10.3.
B. Storage Tank Construction: ASME -code steel with 160-psig working-pressure rating.
1. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping connections,
relief valve, pressure gage, thermometer, drain, anode rods, and controls as required.
Attach tappings to tank shell before testing and labeling.
a. NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1, pipe
threads.
b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel
and stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-
alloy flanges.
2. Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for
potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
3. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except connections
and controls.
SECTION 22 34 00 (15486) - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Page 4
4. Jacket: Steel, with enameled finish.
C. Burner: For use with [atmospheric] [automatic] [powered] vent water heaters for natural-gas
fuel.
1. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
2. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or
systems.
3. Automatic Ignition: ANSI Z21.20, automatic gas-ignition system and components.
D. Anode Rods: Factory installed, magnesium.
E. Dip Tube: Factory installed. Not required if cold-water inlet is near bottom of storage tank.
F. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005, corrosion-resistant metal, factory installed.
G. Draft Control: [Draft diverter; comply with ANSI Z21.12] [Powered-vent system].
2.03 GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS (HIGH EFFICIENCY)
A. Description: Configuration and components complying with appropriate requirements of
ANSI Z21.13 and UL 795, with nominal efficiency rating not less than 83.7 percent.
B. Unit Construction: ASME code with 160-psig working-pressure rating.
1. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping and other
connections as required. Attach tappings to unit before testing and labeling.
a. NPS 2 (DN50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1, pipe
threads.
b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel
and stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-
alloy flanges.
2. Interior Finish: Corrosion-resistant metal or materials and thicknesses complying with
NSF 61, barrier materials for potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through
tank fittings and outlets.
3. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE 90.1.
4. Jacket: Steel, with enameled finish.
C. Burner: For use with natural-gas fuel, and complying with appropriate requirements of
UL 795.
D. Hot-Water Storage Tank: Connected with piping to circulator and water heater.
1. Construction: According to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, steel
with 125-psig working-pressure rating.
a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank for piping
connections, relief valve, pressure gage, thermometer, drain, anode rods, and
controls as required. Attach tappings to tank shell before testing and labeling.
1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1, pipe threads.
2) NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel and
stainless-steel flanges and according to ASME 16.24 for copper and copper-
alloy flanges.
b. Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier material for
potable water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
c. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE 90.1. Surround entire storage tank except
connections and controls.
2. Anode Rods: Factory installed magnesium.
SECTION 22 34 00 (15486) - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Page 5
3. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005, corrosion-resistant metal, factory installed.
E. Circulator: UL 778, all bronze, in-line, centrifugal, single-stage, radially split case design, with
mechanical seals; with 125-psig minimum working-pressure rating and 225 deg F continuous
water temperature.
F. Piping: Manufacturer’s standard copper tubing.
2.04 EXPANSION TANKS
A. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed,
butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.
B. Construction: 150-psig working-pressure rating.
C. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include
ASME B1.20.1, pipe thread.
D. Tank Interior Finish: Materials and thicknesses complying with NSF 61, barrier materials for
potable-water tank linings. Extend finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.
E. Tank Exterior Finish: Manufacturer's standard, unless finish is indicated.
F. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.
2.05 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: According to the following:
1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22, combination temperature and pressure relief valve.
2. Option: Separate temperature and pressure relief valves are acceptable instead of
combination relief valve.
B. Pressure Relief Valves: According to the following:
1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22 pressure relief valve for storage tanks of 200,000 Btuh
(58.6 kW).
C. Vacuum Relief Valves: According to the following:
1. Gas Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22.
2. Exception: Omit if water heater has integral vacuum-relieving device.
D. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping.
E. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18, appliance type, factory or field installed. Include
pressure rating, capacity, and pressure differential required for water heater and gas supply.
F. Automatic Valves: ANSI Z21.21, appliance, electrically operated, on-off automatic valve.
G. Water Heater Stand and Drain Pan Units: High-density-polyethylene-plastic, 18-inch-high,
enclosed-base stand complying with IAPMO PS 103 and IAS No. 2. Include integral or
separate drain pan with raised edge and NPS 1 (DN25) drain outlet with ASME B1.20.1, pipe
thread.
H. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel stand for floor
mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include dimension that will
support bottom of water heater a minimum of 18 inches above the floor.
I. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated, steel
bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.
J. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less than
base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 (DN20).
SECTION 22 34 00 (15486) - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Page 6
K. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and outlet piping
arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves for field assembly that is
capable of isolating each water heater and of providing balanced flow through each water
heater.
L. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to ASHRAE 90.1 or
ASHRAE 90.2.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated. Refer to Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place
Concrete" and Section 22 05 00 - "Common Work Results for Plumbing."
3.02 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.
1. Exception: Omit concrete bases for commercial water heaters if installation on stand,
bracket, suspended platform, or direct on floor is indicated.
B. Install water heaters, level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and
referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so
controls and devices needing service are accessible.
C. Anchor water heaters to substrate.
D. Where required, install seismic restraints for water heaters. Anchor to substrate.
E. Install and connect gas water heaters according to NFPA 54.
1. Install appliance, gas pressure regulators on gas-burner inlets of water heaters without
pressure regulators.
2. Install vent piping from gas-train pressure regulators and valves to outside of building
where required. Terminate vent piping with brass-screened vent cap fitting. Do not
combine vents except with approval of authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Install temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves
with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend relief valve outlet with water piping in
continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor drain.
G. Install pressure relief valves in water piping for water heaters without storage. Extend relief
valve outlet with water piping in continuous downward pitch and discharge onto closest floor
drain.
H. Install vacuum relief valves in cold-water-inlet piping.
I. Install vacuum relief valves in water heater storage tanks that have copper lining.
J. Install water heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill into open drains or over floor drains.
Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for water heaters that do not have
tank drains. Refer to Section 22 10 13 - "Plumbing Specialties" for drain valves.
K. Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping. Refer to Section 22 05 19 -
"Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.
L. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters. Fabricate,
modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each water heater. Include
shutoff valve, and thermometer in each water heater inlet and outlet, and throttling valve in
each water heater outlet. Refer to Section 22 05 23 - "General Duty Valves for Plumbing
Piping" for general-duty valves and Section 22 05 19 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping"
for thermometers.
M. Arrange for insulation on equipment and piping not furnished with factory-applied insulation.
SECTION 22 34 00 (15486) - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Page 7
N. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks without
integral or fitting-type heat traps.
O. Fill water heaters with water.
P. Charge expansion tanks with air as required by manufacturer.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect hot- and cold-water piping with shutoff valves and unions. Connect hot-water-
circulating piping with shutoff valve, check valve, and union.
D. Connect gas piping to gas burner with drip leg, tee, shutoff valve, and union; minimum size
same as inlet connection.
E. Make connections with dielectric fittings where piping is made of dissimilar metal.
F. Gas, Water Heater Vent Connections: Connect to vent system. Include draft hoods and
diverters where required. Use vents same size as or larger than water heater outlets, but not
smaller than indicated unless smaller vent size has been calculated according to NFPA 54.
Comply with gas utility requirements for sizing. Gas vents are specified in Section 22 51 00
"Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks." Provide ducted combustion air.
G. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are specified in Division 26
Sections. Arrange wiring to allow unit service.
H. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
B. In addition to manufacturer's written installation and startup checks, perform the following:
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.
2. Verify that piping system tests are complete.
3. Check for piping connection leaks.
4. Check for clear relief valve inlets, outlets, and drain piping.
5. Check operation of circulators.
6. Test operation of safety controls, relief valves, and devices.
7. Energize electric circuits.
8. Adjust operating controls.
9. Adjust hot-water-outlet temperature settings. Do not set above 140 deg F unless piping
system application requires higher temperature.
10. Balance water flow through manifolds of multiple-unit installations.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain water heaters.
1. Conduct training as specified in Section 01 79 00 (01820) "Training”.
SECTION 22 34 00 (15486) - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS Page 8
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures for starting and stopping
troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Page 1
SECTION 23 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. HVAC Pipe and Pipe Fittings
2. Joining Materials
3. HVAC Sleeves
4. HVAC Sleeve Seals
5. HVAC Specialties
6. HVAC Piping System Installation
7. HVAC Equipment Installation
8. Concrete Bases.
9. Erection of Metal Supports
10. Erection of Wood Supports
11. Cutting and Patching
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 31 00 - Project Management and Coordination
2. Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching
3. Section 01 78 43 - Spare Parts and Materials
4. Section 01 79 00 - Training
5. Section 01 78 23 - Operating and Maintenance Data
6. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
7. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry
8. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
9. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping
10. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors
11. Section 09 90 00 - Painting
12. Section 23 05 53 – Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment: Labeling and
identifying HVAC systems and equipment.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipm ent rooms, furred
spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above
ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors, or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
SECTION 23 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Page 2
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants, but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1. Product Data: For dielectric fittings, flexible connectors, plumbing sleeve seals, and
identification m aterials and devices.
2. Coordination Drawings: Detail major elements, components, and systems of plumbing
equipment and materials in relationship with other systems, installations, and building
components. Show space requirements for installation and access. Indicate if sequence
and coordination of installations are important to efficient flow of the Work. Include the
following:
a. Planned piping layout, including valve and specialty locations and valve-stem
movement.
b. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation.
c. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, accessories, and specialtie s,
including space for disassembly required for periodic maintenance.
d. Equipment and accessory service connections and support details.
e. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations.
f. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations.
g. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases.
h. Scheduling, sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building
during construction.
i. Floor plans, elevations, and details to indicate penetrations in floors, walls, and
ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment Selection: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics, physical dimensions,
capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in
writing and connecting plumbing and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors,
bases, and equipment spaces are increased. Additional costs shall be approved in advance
by appropriate Contract Modification for these increases.
1. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies of equipment are specified, equipment must
meet design requirements. See drawings for equipment schedules and requirements.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
SECTION 23 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Page 3
B. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.
C. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate HVAC equipment installation with other building components.
B. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction to allow for mechanical installations.
C. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in-place
concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning
before closing in building.
E. Coordinate connection of HVAC systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies,
and controlling agencies.
F. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors if mechanica l items requiring access
are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Section
08 31 13 - "Access Doors and Frames."
G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting, if devices
are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and
similar concealment.
1.07 Posted Operating Instructions
A. Provide and post operating instructions for all HVAC systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. HVAC Sleeve Seals:
a. Metraflex Inc. (800-621-4347)
b. PSI-Thunderline/Link-Seal (800-423-2410)
2.02 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B32.
1. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent silver, with 0.10
percent lead content.
2. Alloy E: Approximately 95 percent tin and 5 percent copper, with 0.10 percent maximum
lead content.
3. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper zinc, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.
4. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper nickel, with 0.10 percent maximum lead content.
5. Alloy Sb5: 95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony, with 0.20 percent maximum lead
content.
B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.
1. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys.
SECTION 23 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Page 4
2. BAg1: Silver alloy.
3. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.03 HVAC SLEEVES
A. Sleeves: The following materials are for wall, floor, slab, and roof penetrations:
1. Steel Sheet Metal: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness, galvanized, round tube closed with
welded longitudinal joint.
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
3. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange.
Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
a. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
2.04 HVAC SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular design, with interlocking rubber links shape d to continuously fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve. Include connecting bolts and pressure plates.
2.05 HVAC SPECIALTIES
A. Grout:
1. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B.
a. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, non-
staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
b. Design Mix: 5000-psig, 28-day compressive strength.
c. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 HVAC PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install HVAC piping as described below, unless piping Sections specifies otherwise.
Individual Division 23 Piping Sections specifies unique piping installation requirements.
B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate
general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated, unless
deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings as required by Division 01
Sections and as outlined in Part 1 of this section.
C. Install components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.
D. Install piping in concealed interior and exterior locations, except in equipment rooms and
service areas.
E. Install piping free of sags and bends.
F. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls.
Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other building elements. Allow
sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal.
H. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus 1-inch clearance around insulation.
I. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, and concrete floor and
roof slabs.
SECTION 23 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Page 5
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other
wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below
floor slab as required to secure clamping rings where required.
2. Build sleeves into walls and slabs as work progresses.
3. Install sleeves large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and
pipe or pipe insulation.
4. Use Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O, neutral-curing silicone sealant.
J. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and
mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve
for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches in diameter and larger.
3. Assemble and install mechanical sleeve seals according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Tighten bolts that cause rubber sealing elements to e xpand and make
watertight seal.
K. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire stopping materials. Refer to Section
07 84 00 - "Firestopping" for materials.
L. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in
requirements.
M. Piping Joint Construction: Join pipe and fittings as follows and as specifically required in
individual piping specification Sections:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
3. Soldered Joints: Construct joints according to CDA’s "Copper Tube Handbook."
4. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS’s "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe
and Tube."
3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to provide maximum possible headroom, if mounting heights is not indicated.
B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only
in diagrammatic form. Refer conflicts to Owner’s Representative.
C. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building system s and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to
other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
E. Clearance from Electrical Equipment: Piping and ductwork are prohibited in electric rooms
and closets, elevator machine rooms and installation over transformers, switchboards and
motor control centers.
3.03 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and
elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
SECTION 23 05 00 (15050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC Page 6
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
C. Prime and paint all metal supports per Section 09 90 00 requirements similar to “Pipes and
Mechanical Equipment”.
3.04 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor
HVAC materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view
or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners
without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary
for mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
C. Refer to Division 01 Sections for additional requirements.
3.06 GROUTING
A. Install nonmetallic, non-shrink, grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump
and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placing of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 05 13 (15090) - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Page 1
SECTION 23 05 13 (15090) - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Basic Motor Requirements
2. Polyphase Motors
3. Single Phase Motors
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 23 Sections for application of motors and reference to specific motor
requirements for motor-driven equipment.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in Project with the following supporting data:
1. Product Data: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting
arrangements; size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry, and grounding
lug; and coatings.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide motors specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. Terms "Listed and Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BASIC MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Basic requirements apply to mechanical equipment motors, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Polyphase.
C. Motors smaller than 1/2 HP: Single phase.
D. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz.
E. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected.
F. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, general purpose continuous duty, design type “B.”
G. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Rated for continuous duty and sufficient to start,
accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, in indicated environment, with
indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering
service factor.
H. Enclosure: Open drip-proof, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Efficiency: Motors shall have a higher efficiency rating than industry standard average motor
as delineated in IEEE Standard 112, Test Method 13.
2.02 POLYPHASE MOTORS
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, medium induction motor.
1. Design Characteristics: NEMA MG 1, Design B, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Energy-Efficient Design: Where indicated.
SECTION 23 05 13 (15090) - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Page 2
3. Stator: Copper windings, unless otherwise indicated. Multi-speed motors have separate
winding for each speed.
4. Rotor: Squirrel cage, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Bearings: Double-shielded, pre-lubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust
loading.
6. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating, unless otherwise indicated.
7. Insulation: Class F, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Motors Used with Reduced-Inrush Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for
indicated controller, with required motor leads brought to motor terminal box to suit control
method.
C. Motors Used with Variable-Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1. Critical vibration frequencies are not within operating range of controller output.
2. Temperature Rise: Match rating for Class B insulation.
3. Insulation: Class H
4. Thermal Protection: Where indicated, conform to NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally
protected motors.
D. Source Quality Control: Perform the following routine tests according to NEMA MG 1:
1. Measurement of winding resistance.
2. No-load readings of current and speed at rated voltage and frequency.
3. Locked rotor current at rated frequency.
4. High-potential test.
5. Alignment
2.03 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A. Type: As indicated or selected by manufacturer from one of the followin g, to suit starting
torque and other requirements of specific motor application.
1. Permanent-split capacitor.
2. Split-phase start, capacitor run.
3. Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B. Shaded-Pole Motors: Do not use, unless motors are smaller than 1/20 hp.
C. Thermal Protection: Where indicated or required, internal protection automatically opens
power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to
temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal protection device automatically rese ts when
motor temperature returns to normal range, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Bearings: Ball-bearing type for belt-connected motors and other motors with high radial forces
on motor shaft. Sealed, pre-lubricated sleeve bearings for other single-phase motors.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ADJUSTING
A. Use adjustable motor mounting bases for belt-driven motors.
B. Align pulleys and install belts.
C. Tension according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 1
SECTION 23 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Hangers And Supports For HVAC System Piping And Equipment.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05 50 00 (05500) - Metal Fabrications
2. Section 09 90 00 (09900) - Painting
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry.
B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) with the
following supporting data:
1. Product Data:
a. For each type of pipe hanger, channel support system component, and thermal-
hanger shield insert indicated.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Engineering Responsibility: Where required by the local authority having jurisdiction design
and preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations for each multiple pipe support, trapeze,
and seismic restraint by a qualified professional engineer.
1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those
performed for installations of hangers and supports that are similar to those indicated for
this Project in material, design, and extent.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components:
a. Cooper B-Line, Inc. (618-654-2184)
b. Grinnell Mechanical Products, A Tyco International Company (800-500-4768)
c. National Pipe Hanger Corporation (609-261-5353)
2. Channel Support Systems:
a. Cooper B-Line, Inc. (618-654-2184)
b. Grinnell Mechanical Products, A Tyco International Company (800-500-4768)
c. National Pipe Hanger Corporation (609-261-5353)
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:
a. Carpenter & Patterson, Inc. (301.333.4631)
SECTION 23 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 2
b. Erico (Michigan Hanger) (440-248-0100)
c. PHS Industries, Inc. (800-626-2336)
4. Powder-Actuated and Mechanical Anchor Fastener Systems:
a. Gunnebo Fastening Corp. (800-336-1640)
b. Hilti, Inc.(800-879-8000)
c. ITW Ramset/Red Head (800-899-7890)
2.02 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Pipe Hangers, Supports, and Components:
1. MSS SP-58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to "Hanger and Support Applications"
Article in Part 3 for where to use specific hanger and support types.
a. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: For piping and equipment that will not have field-
applied finish.
b. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments
are in direct contact with copper tubing.
B. Channel Support Systems:
1. MFMA-2, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.
2. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish.
3. Nonmetallic Coatings: On attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are
in direct contact with copper tubing.
C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts:
1. 100-psi minimum compressive-strength insulation, encased in sheet metal shield.
2. Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C552, Type I cellular glass.
3. Material for Hot Piping: ASTM C552, Type I cellular glass.
4. For Trapeze or Clamped System : Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe.
5. For Clevis or Band Hanger: Insert and shield cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
6. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below
ambient air temperature.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-
out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C. Structural Steel: ASTM A36, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.
D. Grout: ASTM C1107, Grade B, factory-mixed and -packaged, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post hardening and volume adjusting; recommended for both interior and
exterior applications.
2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
3. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
SECTION 23 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 3
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A. General:
1. Specific hanger requirements are specified in Sections specifying equipment and
systems.
2. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Specification Sections.
B. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified
in piping system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.
3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4 to allow off-
center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
4. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
5. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
6. Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
7. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
8. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion
support and cast-iron floor flange.
C. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20 (DN20 to DN500).
D. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
E. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
2. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
3. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are
considerable and rod sizes are large.
4. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
5. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by
using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
SECTION 23 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 4
b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
F. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Specification Sections, install the following types:
1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended by manufacturer to prevent
crushing insulation.
3.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Pipe Hanger and Support Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install
hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from
building structure.
B. Channel Support System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and
support together on field-assembled channel systems.
1. Field assemble and install according to manufacturer's writ ten instructions.
C. Install building attachments to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping
span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads,
including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, and expans ion joints, and at changes in direction
of piping.
D. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install
fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
E. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
I. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," is not exceeded.
J. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert
with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9.
2. Install MSS SP-58, T ype 39 protection saddles, if insulation without vapor barrier is
indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40 protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields
shall span arc of 180 degrees.
4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN8 to DN90): 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
SECTION 23 05 29 (15060) - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 5
b. NPS 4 (DN100): 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.
3.03 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or to support
equipment above floor.
B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C. Prime and Paint Equipment Supports as specified in Section 09 90 00 “Painting”.
3.04 METAL FABRICATION
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for heavy-duty steel trapezes and equipment
supports.
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field -weld connections that cannot
be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no rough ness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments to level
equipment and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.
3.06 PAINTING
A. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded
areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Section 09 90 00 “Painting”.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A780.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 05 53 (15075) - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 1
SECTION 23 05 53 (15075) - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Identifying Devices and Labels
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 05 00 (15050) – Common Work Results for HVAC
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in Project with the following supporting data:
1. Product Data: For identification materials and devices.
2. Samples: Of color, lettering style, and graphic representation required for each
identification material and device.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems" for lettering size,
length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.
1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. General: Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 23 Sections. If
more than single type is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.
B. Pipes Including Insulation: Full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at
each location.
2.02 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS
A. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions as selected by Owner's
Representative.
B. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each
application length.
1. Arrows: Either integrally with piping system service lettering, to accommodate both
directions, or as separate unit, on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
C. Plastic Duct Markers: Manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, in the following color codes:
1. Green: Cold-air supply.
2. Yellow: Hot-air supply.
3. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.
4. Terminology: Include direction of airflow; duct service such as supply, return, and
exhaust; duct origin, duct destination, and design flow.
D. Plastic Tape: Manufacturer's standard color-coded, pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive, vinyl
tape, at least 3 mils thick.
SECTION 23 05 53 (15075) - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 2
1. Width: 1-1/2 inches on pipes with OD, including insulation, less than 6 inches; 2-1/2
inches for larger pipes.
2. Color: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and
1/2-inch sequenced numbers. Include 5/32-inch hole for fastener.
1. Material: 0.032-inch thick, polished brass.
2. Size: 1-1/2-inches diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Valve Tag Fasteners: Brass, wire-link chain and S-hooks.
G. Access Panel Markers: 1/16-inch thick, engraved plastic-laminate markers, with abbreviated
terms and numbers corresponding to concealed valve. Provide 1/8-inch center hole for
attachment.
H. Valve Schedule Frames: Glazed display frame for removable mounting on masonry walls for
each page of valve schedule. Include screws.
1. Frame: Extruded aluminum.
2. Glazing: ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1, Glazing quality B, 2.5-mm, single-thickness
glass.
I. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used in
mechanical identification with corresponding designations indicated. Use numbers, letters,
and terms indicated for proper identification, operation, and maintenance of mechanical
systems and equipment.
1. Multiple Systems: Identify individual system number and service if multiple systems of
same name are indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING PIPING SYSTEMS
A. Install pipe markers on each system as indicated below. Include arrows showing normal
direction of flow.
1. Gas.
2. Condensate.
3. Vent.
4. Chilled Water Supply
5. Chilled Water Return
6. Heating Hot Water Supply
7. Heating Hot Water Return
8. Condenser Water Supply
9. Condenser Water Return
B. Marker Type: Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on pipe insulation segment
where required for hot, noninsulated pipes.
C. Fasten markers on pipes and insulated pipes by one of following methods:
1. Snap-on application of pretensioned, semirigid plastic pipe marker.
D. Locate pipe markers where piping is exposed in machine rooms; acce ssible maintenance
spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations a ccording
to the following:
1. Near each valve and control device.
SECTION 23 05 53 (15075) - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT Page 3
2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Mark each pipe at branch, where flow pattern is not obvious.
3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, or nonaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
6. Spaced at a maximum of 50-foot intervals along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced
markers.
3.02 VALVE TAGS
A. Install on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture supply stops, shutoff valves, faucets,
convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and HVAC terminal devices and similar
roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in valve schedule.
B. Valve Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, color scheme, and with
captions similar to those indicated in the following:
1. Chilled Water
2. Heating Hot Water
3. Condenser Water
C. Tag Material: Brass.
D. Tag Size and Shape: According to the following:
1. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches round.
2. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches round.
3. Gas: 1-1/2 inches round.
E. Install framed valve schedule in each major mechanical equipment room.
F. Valve schedule and tag locations shall be shown on record drawings.
3.03 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING DUCT SYSTEMS.
A. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct markers;
or provide stenciled signs and arrows showing service and direction of flow.
1. Location: Locate signs near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at
maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by
removable ceiling system.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Relocate HVAC identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by
work of this or other Divisions.
B. Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 05 93 (15950) - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 1
SECTION 23 05 93 (15950) - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Balancing airflow within distribution systems, including sub-mains, branches, and
terminals, to indicated quantities according to specified tolerances.
2. Adjusting total HVAC systems to provide indicated quantities.
3. Measuring electrical performance of HVAC and plumbing equipment.
4. Setting quantitative performance of HVAC and plumbing equipment.
5. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
6. Reporting results of the activities and procedures specified in this Section.
7. Adjustment of recirculating domestic hot water return system.
8. Verify performance of package terminal air conditioning units.
B. Related Sections:
1. Testing and adjusting requirements unique to particular systems and equipment are
included in the Sections that specify those systems and equipment.
2. Field quality-control testing to verify that workmanship quality for system and equipment
installation is specified in system and equipment Sections.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): "National Standards for Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing"
B. Air Movement & Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA): 201, "Fans and Systems
C. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB): “Procedural Standards for Testing,
Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems”
D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA): "HVAC
Systems--Duct Design"
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to
reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.
B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including sub-mains, branches,
and term inals, according to design quantities.
C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high
air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn
from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
D. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield
repeatable results.
E. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
F. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. I n
a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
G. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction
side.
H. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
SECTION 23 05 93 (15950) - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 2
I. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of
a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.
J. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.
K. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of a system or equipment.
L. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agent: The entity responsible f or performing and reporting
the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Quality-Assurance Submittals: Within 30 days from the Contractor's Notice to Proceed,
submit 2 copies of evidence that the testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent and this Project's
testing, adjusting, and balancing team members meet the qualifications specified in the
"Quality Assurance" Article below.
C. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from the Contractor’s Notice to
Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents Review Report as specified in Part 3 of
this Section.
D. Submittals Examination Report: Prior to the start of duct or piping fabrication, submit 2 copies
of the Submitted Examination Report as specified in Part 3 of this Section.
E. Certified Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Submit 2 copies of reports prepared, as
specified in this Section, on approved forms certified b y the testing, adjusting, and balancing
Agent.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agent Qualifications: Engage a testing, adjusting, and balancing agent certified by either
AABC or NEBB.
B. Certification of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Certify the testing, adj usting, and
balancing field data reports. This certification includes the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified testing,
adjusting, and balancing reports.
2. Certify that the testing, adjusting, and balanc ing team complied with the approved testing,
adjusting, and balancing plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this
Specification.
C. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports: Use testing, adjusting, and balancing standard
forms from AABC’s “National Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing” or NEBB’s
“Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems”.
D. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every 6 months or more frequently
if required by the instrument manufacturer.
E. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Conference: Meet with the Owner’s representatives on
approval of the testing, adjusting, and balancing strategies and procedures plan to develop a
mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of testing, adjusting, and
balancing team members, equipment manufacturers’ authorized service representatives,
HVAC controls Installer, and other support personnel. Provide 7 days advance notice of
scheduled meeting time and location. As a minimum include the following agenda items:
1. Submittal distribution requirements.
2. Contract Documents examination report.
3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing plan.
SECTION 23 05 93 (15950) - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 3
4. Work schedule and Project site access requirements.
5. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and
equipment, HVAC controls installers, [Commissioning Authority,] and other mechanics to
operate HVAC systems and equipment to support an d assist testing, adjusting, and balancing
activities.
B. Notice: Provide 7 days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.
C. Perform testing, adjusting, and balancing after leakage and pressure tests on air and water
distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Contract Documents to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude
proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment and submit “Contra ct
Documents Examination Report”.
1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of the
Contract.
2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow -
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required
by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing
devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system
and equipment operation.
3. Examine Engineer’s design data, including HVAC and Plumbing system descriptions,
statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems’ output, and
statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC and Plumbing systems and
equipment controls.
B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC and Plumbing systems and equipment including
sheet metal duct fabrication and plumbing piping shop drawings to ensure that the distribution
system is reasonably complete and sufficiently designed to accurately balance t he complete
building. Submit “Submitting Examination Report”.
1. Examine equipment performance data, including fan and pump curves. Relate
performance data to project conditions and requirements, including system effects that
can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce the performance ratings of
HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when
the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air
systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 07
through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 05 and 06.
Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
C. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Specification Sections have
been performed.
1. Examine HVAC and Plumbing systems and equipment installations to verify that
indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-
control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly
installed, and their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and
for efficient system and equipment operation.
SECTION 23 05 93 (15950) - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 4
2. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
3. Examine air-handling equipment to ensure clean filters have been installed, bearings are
greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for
operation.
4. Examine terminal units to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected
and functioning.
5. Examine plenum ceilings, utilized for return air, to verify that they are airtight. Verify that
pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.
6. Examine heat-transfer coils for clean and straight fins.
7. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safet y interlocks and
controls.
8. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
a. Dampers, and other controlled devices operate by the intended controller.
b. Dampers are in the position indicated by the controller.
c. Integrity dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully closed and fully
open positions. This includes dampers in variable-air-volume terminals.
d. Thermostats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.
e. Sensors are located to sense onl y the intended conditions.
f. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
g. Controller set points are set at design values. Observe and record system reactions
to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from design values.
h. Interlocked systems are operating.
i. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to design values.
D. Examine project record documents described in Section 01 78 39 (01785) - “Project Record
Documents”.
E. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of testing, adjusting, and
balancing procedures.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a testing, adjusting, and balancing plan that includes strategies and step -by-step
procedures.
B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the
following:
1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
3. Equipment and duct access doors are properly located, sized, and securely closed.
4. Verify that smoke and fire dampers are open.
5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
6. Access to balancing devices is provided.
7. Windows and doors can be closed so design conditions for system operations can be
met.
SECTION 23 05 93 (15950) - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 5
3.03 GENERAL TESTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures
contained in AABC national standards and this Section or in NEBB's "Procedural Standards
for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section .
B. Mark equipment settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material,
including damper-control positions, balancing, valve indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and
similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
C. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those
removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to the insulation Specifications for this
Project. Plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and
housings.
3.04 FUNDAMENTAL AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic single line diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts and domestic hot
water distribution.
C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow
measurements.
D. Check the airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and
exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
H. Check for airflow blockages.
I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
3.05 CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS' BALANCING PROCEDURES
A. The procedures in this Article apply to constant-volume supply-, return-, and exhaust-air
systems.
B. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum allowable rpm listed by the fan
manufacturer.
1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that
houses the fan.
2. Measure static pressure across each air-handling unit component.
a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters.
SECTION 23 05 93 (15950) - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 6
3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers under final balanced conditions.
4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
5. Adjust fan speed higher or lower than design with the approval of the Owner’s
Representative. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical
connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.
6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-
motor amperage to ensure no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating, and economizer modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
C. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, sub-main ducts, and major branch ducts to design
airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a. Where sufficient space in sub-mains and branch ducts is unavailable for Pilot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
2. Re-measure each sub-main and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust sub-mains and branch ducts to design airflows within specified tolerances.
D. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or the outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
E. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to design airflows within specified tolerances
of design values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the
dampers at the air term inals.
1. Adjust each outlet in the same room or space to within specified tolerances of design
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.06 MOTORS
A. Motors: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor RPM.
4. Efficiency rating if high-efficiency motor.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
3.07 CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans and measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures. Record
compressor data.
SECTION 23 05 93 (15950) - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 7
3.08 HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperatures at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage.
5. Calculated kW at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
3.09 TEMPERATURE TESTING
A. During testing, adjusting, and balancing, report need for adjustment in temperature regulation
within the automatic temperature-control system.
B. Measure indoor and outdoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of 2
successive 8-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final
temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.
3.10 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION
A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.
B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect
control functions.
C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.
D. Verify operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).
E. Verify free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.
F. Confirm interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.
G. Confirm interaction of interlock and lockout systems.
H. Verify main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.
I. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine if the system operates on a
grounded or non-grounded power supply.
J. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.
3.11 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system airflow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent.
B. Set plumbing system water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent.
3.12 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in 3-
ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
1. Include a list of the instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
C. Final Report Contents: In addition to the certified field report data, include the following:
SECTION 23 05 93 (15950) - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 8
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include approved Shop
Drawings and Product Data.
D. General Report Data: In addition to the form titles and entries, include the following data in
the final report, as applicable:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. Owner’s name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of testing, adjusting, and balancing Agent who certifies the report.
10. Summary of contents, including the following:
a. Design versus final performance.
b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.
11. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
12. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
13. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from design values.
14. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms, including the following:
a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air distribution systems and domestic hot
water distribution systems. Present with single-line diagrams and include the following:
1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
2. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
3. Location of manual volume control dampers.
4. Water flow meter.
5. Balancing valve sizes/locations.
F. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data: Include the following:
a. System identification.
SECTION 23 05 93 (15950) - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC Page 9
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in inches and bore.
h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches.
2. Motor Data: Include the following:
a. Make and frame type and size.
b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in inches and bore.
f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).
g. Number of belts, make, and size.
3. Test Data: Include design and actual values for the following:
a. Total airflow rate in cfm.
b. Total system static pressure in inches wg.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
e. Suction static pressure in inches wg
G. Air Handling Test Reports.
H. Gas-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports; i.e., unit heaters, duct furnaces, domestic water
heaters.
I. Electric Coil Test Reports; i.e., electric baseboards, electric unit heaters, electric cabinet
heaters.
J. Duct Traverse Reports.
K. Air Terminal Device Reports; i.e., diffusers/registers/grilles.
L. Pool Dehumidification Test Reports.
M. Package Terminal Air Conditioning Test Reports; including equipment leveling to ensure
condensate is pitched to building exterior.
N. Plumbing Pump Test Reports including recirculating hot water and sump pumps.
O. Instrument Calibration Reports.
3.13 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing testing, adjusting, and balancing, perform additional testing and
balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct
unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures were not performed
during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional inspections, testing, and
adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 07 00 (15081) - HVAC INSULATION Page 1
SECTION 23 07 00 (15081) - HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulation Materials
2. Jackets
3. Accessories and Attachments
4. Vapor Retarders
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 84 00 (07840) - Firestopping: Firestopping materials and requirements for
penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
2. Section 22 07 00 (15083) - Plumbing Insulation
3. Section 23 31 13 (15815) - Metal Ducts: For duct liner.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
1. Product Data:
a. Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied)
for each type of product indicated.
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Submit manufacturer’s data for each type of insulation used.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an
apprenticeship program or similar industry recognized craft training program.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
specified in this Section according to ASTM E84, by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
rating of 50 or less.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for insulation application.
1.06 SCHEDULING
A. Schedule insulation application after testing duct systems. Insulation application may begin
on segments of ducts that have satisfactory test results.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. None
SECTION 23 07 00 (15081) - HVAC INSULATION Page 2
2. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation:
a. None
3. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a. None
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corp. (610-647-3011)
b. Knauf Insulation. (800-825-4434)
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. (800-447-3759)
2. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corp. (610-647-3011)
b. Knauf Insulation. (800-825-4434)
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. (800-447-3759)
3. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a. Armstrong World Industries (800-448-1405)
b. Rubatex International LLC (800-782-2839)
2.02 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral-Fiber Board Thermal Insulation:
1. Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C612, Type IB,
without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing
scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
B. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation:
1. Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C553, Type II,
without facing and with all-service jacket manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing
scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
C. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
1. Closed-cell, sponge or expanded-rubber materials.
2. Comply with ASTM C534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials
a. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
b. Ultraviolet Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
2.03 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A. General: ASTM C921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Foil and Paper Jacket: Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
aluminum foil.
2.04 ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd.
1. Tape Width: 4 inches.
B. Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following m aterials compatible with jacket:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.
SECTION 23 07 00 (15081) - HVAC INSULATION Page 3
2. Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
3. Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.
4. Brass: 0.010 inch thick.
5. Nickel-Copper Alloy: 0.005 inch thick.
C. Wire: 0.080-inch, nickel-copper alloy; 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch,
soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
D. Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge
welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1. Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the attached surface.
E. Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.
1. Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface
temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of
100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
F. Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.
2.05 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
3.03 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply insulation materials, accessories, and finishes according to the manufacturer's written
instructions; with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; and free of voids throughout the length
of ducts and fittings.
B. Refer to schedules at the end of this Section for materials, forms, jackets, and thicknesses
required for each duct system.
C. Use accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Use
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D. Apply multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
E. Seal joints and seams with vapor-retarder mastic on insulation indicated to receive a vapor
retarder.
F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G. Apply insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by the insulation material manufacturer.
SECTION 23 07 00 (15081) - HVAC INSULATION Page 4
H. Apply insulation with the least number of joints practical.
I. Apply insulation over fittings and specialties, with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder
integrity, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Hangers and Anchors: Where vapor retarder is indicated, seal penetrations in insulation at
hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-retarder mastic. Apply insulation
continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
K. Insulation Terminations: For insulation application where vapor retarders are indicated, seal
ends with a compound recommended by the insulation material manufacturer to maintain
vapor retarder.
L. Apply insulation with integral jackets as follows:
1. Pull jacket tight and smooth.
2. Joints and Seams: Cover with tape and vapor retarder as recommended by insulation
material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
3. Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Where vapor retarders are indicated, apply mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent compressing
insulation to less than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Install vapor-retarder mastic on ducts and plenums scheduled to receive vapor retarders.
1. Ducts with Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and seal with vapor-
retarder mastic and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation. Repair
punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-retarder seal.
2. Ducts without Vapor Retarders: Overlap insulation facing at seams and secure with
outward clinching staples and pressure-sensitive tape having same facing as insulation.
O. Roof Penetrations: Apply insulation for interior applications to a point even with top of roof
flashing.
1. Seal penetrations with vapor-retarder mastic.
2. Apply insulation for exterior applications tightly joined to interior insulation ends.
3. Seal insulation to roof flashing with vapor-retarder mastic.
P. Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations: Apply insulation continuously through walls and
partitions, except fire-rated walls and partitions.
Q. Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire/smoke damper
sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.
R. Floor Penetrations: Terminate insulation at underside of floor assembly and at floor support at
top of floor.
1. For insulation indicated to have vapor retarders, taper termination and seal insulation
ends with vapor-retarder mastic.
3.04 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Blanket Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure blanket insulation with adhesive and
anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square
foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Install anchor pins and speed washers on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
SECTION 23 07 00 (15081) - HVAC INSULATION Page 5
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline
of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to
hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4. Impale insulation over anchors and attach speed washers.
5. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
6. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2
inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive
tape having same facing as insulation.
7. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
Secure with steel band at end joints and spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
8. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment
for each surface. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
9. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface
with 6-inch wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating
sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
10. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated
to receive vapor retarder.
B. Board Applications for Ducts and Plenums: Secure board insulation with adhesive and anchor
pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per square
foot, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
3. Space anchor pins as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, along longitudinal centerline
of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches. Space 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Apply additional pins and clips to
hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Anchor pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and
plenums.
d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
4. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
5. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2
inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent
SECTION 23 07 00 (15081) - HVAC INSULATION Page 6
insulation segment with 1/2-inch staples, 1 inch o.c., and cover with pressure-sensitive
tape having same facing as insulation.
6. Apply insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation segment
for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and
inside radius of elbows. Apply insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond the insulation surface
with 6-inch wide strips of the same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating
sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with anchor pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
8. Apply vapor-retarder mastic to open joints, breaks, and punctures for insulation indicated
to receive vapor retarder.
3.05 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
1. Follow manufacturer’s written instructions for applying insulation.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive.
Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the pipe surface.
B. Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
1. Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of the same
thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer’s recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the
pipe surface.
C. Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
1. Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer’s recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to the
pipe surface.
D. Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
1. Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe insulation and
attached according to the manufacturer’s written instructions.
2. Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to
permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For
check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged to allow access to
strainer basket.
3. Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer’s
recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage
of air to the pipe surface.
3.06 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A. Apply glass-cloth jacket, where indicated, directly over bare insulation or insulation with
factory-applied jackets.
SECTION 23 07 00 (15081) - HVAC INSULATION Page 7
1. Apply jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints.
2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch thick coats of jacket manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
3. Completely encapsulate insulation with jacket, leaving no exposed raw insulation.
3.07 DUCT SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B. Materials and thicknesses for systems listed below are specified in schedules at the end of
this Section.
C. Insulate the following plenums and duct systems:
1. Indoor concealed supply-, return-, and outside-air ductwork.
D. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1. Indoor exposed metal ducts, unless noted otherwise.
2. Metal ducts with duct liner, unless noted otherwise.
3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
4. Factory-insulated plenums, casings, terminal boxes, and filter boxes and sections, unless
noted otherwise.
5. Flexible connectors.
6. Vibration-control devices.
7. Testing agency labels and stamps.
8. Nameplates and data plates.
9. Access panels and doors in air-distribution systems.
3.08 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Note: Verify insulation thicknesses below based on guidelines from ASHRAE and local code
requirements.
Service Material Thickness Number of
Layers
R-Value
(Min.
Installed)
Vapor
Retarder
Required
A. Round and
rectangular,
supply-air ducts,
concealed
Mineral-fiber
blanket
1-1/2” One 4.2 Yes
B. Round and
rectangular,
return-air ducts,
concealed
Mineral-fiber
blanket
1-1/2” One 4.2 Yes
C. Round and
rectangular,
outside-air ducts,
concealed
Mineral-fiber
blanket
2” One 4.2 Yes
D. Round and
rectangular,
supply-air ducts,
exposed
None
required,
unless noted
otherwise
Service Material Thickness Number of
Layers
R-Value
(Min.
Installed)
Vapor
Retarder
Required
SECTION 23 07 00 (15081) - HVAC INSULATION Page 8
E. Round and
rectangular,
return-air ducts,
exposed
None
required,
unless noted
otherwise
F. Round and
rectangular,
outside-air ducts,
exposed
Mineral-fiber
blanket
1-1/2” One 4.2 Yes
3.09 OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Note: Verify insulation thicknesses below based on guidelines from ASHRAE and local code
requirements.
Service Material Thickness Number of
Layers
Field Applied
Jacket
A. Round air ducts Closed-cell
elastomeric
[1-1/2”]
[2”]
One [Glass cloth]
[PVC] [Foil
and paper]
B. Rectangular air
ducts
Closed-cell
elastomeric
[1-1/2”]
[2”]
One [Glass cloth]
[PVC] [Foil
and paper]
3.10 ATTIC DUCT AND PLENUM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Service Material Thickness Number of
Layers
A. Round and
rectangular,
supply-air,
return-air, and
outside-air ducts
Mineral fiber
blanket
3” One
3.11 WATER HEATER BREECHING AND CONNECTOR APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Note: Edit the following examples based on the type of appliances used and the type of venting required
Service Material Thickness Number of
Layers
Field Applied
Jacket
A. Round, exposed Mineral-fiber
board
1” One Glass cloth
3.12 PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Service Material Thickness Field Applied
Jacket
Finish
A. Refrigerant
section, liquid
and hot-gas
piping (where
required).
Operating
Temperature:
35 to 50 deg. F.
Flexible
elastomeric
Copper
Piping
ALL
sizes: 1”
None None
3.13 EXTERIOR PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. This application schedule is for above ground insulation outside the building. Loose-fill
insulation, for below ground piping, is specified in Division 33 piping distribution Sections.
Service Material Thickness Field
Applied
Jacket
Vapor
Retarder
Required
Finish
A. Above ground
insulation
Flexible
elastomeric
Copper
Piping
[Aluminum]
[Stainless
Yes Two coats of
manufacturer’s
SECTION 23 07 00 (15081) - HVAC INSULATION Page 9
outside the
building
Operating
Temperature:
35 to 50 deg. F.
ALL
sizes:
1/2”
steel]
[None].
recommended
UV inhibitor
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 11 23 (15194) - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING Page 1
SECTION 23 11 23 (15194) - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipe, Fittings and Joining Materials.
2. Protective Coating.
3. Piping Specialties.
4. Valves.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 81 13 - Sustainable Design Requirements
2. Section 09 90 00 (09900) - Painting
3. Section 22 34 00 (15486) – Fuel-Fired, Domestic Water Heaters
4. Section 23 05 00 (15050) – Common Work Results for HVAC
5. Section 23 05 29 (15060) - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: For
pipe hanger restraints.
6. Section 33 00 00 (02500) - Utility Services: For natural gas service piping, specialties,
and accessories outside the building.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:
1. Z21.15/CGA 9.1 “Manually Operated Gas Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector
Valves and Hose End Valves”
2. Z21.21 “Automatic Valves for Gas Appliances (same as CSA 6.5)”
3. Z21.24/CGA 6.10 “Connectors for Gas Appliances”
4. Z21.41/CSA 6.9 “Quick Disconnect Devices for Use with Gas Fuel Appliances”
5. Z21.70 “Earthquake Actuated Automatic Gas Shutoff Systems”
B. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Publications:
1. B1.20.1 "Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch"
2. B16.1 “Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings”
3. B16.3 “Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings”
4. B16.5 “Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings”
5. B16.9 “Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings”
6. B16.11 “Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded”
7. B16.24 “Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150, 300, 400,
600, 900, 1500 and 2500”
8. B16.33 “Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in Gas Piping Systems up to 125
psi (Sizes NPS ½ through NPS 2)”
9. B16.38 “Large Metallic Valves For Gas Distribution (Manually Operated NPS-2 1/2 To
12,125 PSIG Max)”
10. B16.39 “Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions”
C. ASTM International (ASTM) Publications: (Former American Society for Testing and Materials)
SECTION 23 11 23 (15194) - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING Page 2
1. A53 "Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded
and Seamless"
D. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry. (MSS) Publications:
1. SP-70 “Gray Iron Gate Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends”
2. SP-78 “Socket Welding Reducer Inserts”
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
1. 54 “National Fuel Gas Code (ANSI Z223.1)”
F. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) Publications:
1. Paint - Paint and Coating Standards and Specifications
a. Paint 16 “Brush-Off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel,
Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals”
G. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL):
1. "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory"
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1. Product Data for the following:
a. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing systems. Include associated components.
b. Specialty valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical
connection data of selected models.
c. Pressure regulators. Include pressure rating, capacity, and settings of selected
models.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z223.1, "National Fuel Gas Code."
B. IAS Standard: Provide components listed in IAS's "Directory of A. G. A. and C. G. A Certified
Appliances and Accessories" if specified to be IAS listed.
C. UL Standard: Provide components listed in UL's "Gas and Oil Equipment Directory" if
specified to be UL listed.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Gas System Pressure: As indicated on Drawings
B. Design values of fuel gas supplied for these systems are as follows:
1. Nominal Heating Value: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Nominal Specific Gravity: As indicated on Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
1. Appliance Connector Valves:
a. None.
2. Gas Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
a. None.
SECTION 23 11 23 (15194) - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING Page 3
3. Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
a. None.
4. Automatic Gas Valves:
a. None.
5. UL -Listed Earthquake Valves:
a. None.
6. Service Pressure Regulators:
a. None.
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing Systems:
a. Omega Flex, Inc. (800-355-1039)
b. Titeflex Corporation (800-765-2525)
c. Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp. (800-255-6291)
d. B&K Industries, Inc. (800-782-2385)
e. Cimberio Valve Co. (877-228-9246)
f. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. (704-841-6000)
2. Gas Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:
a. Crane Valves (800-323-3679)
b. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. (262-432-2700)
c. Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div. (217-423-4471)
3. Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:
a. Milliken Valve Co., Inc. (610-861-8803)
b. Mueller Co.; Mueller Gas Products Div. (217-423-4471)
4. Automatic Gas Valves:
a. ASCO General Controls (800-524-1023)
b. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; Division of Emerson (800-800-2726)
c. Honeywell, Inc. (800-328-5111)
5. UL -Listed Earthquake Valves:
a. Energy Pacific (800-638-2032)
b. Safe T Quake Corp. (800-833-5353)
c. Seismic Safety Products, Inc. (800-948-3782)
6. Service Pressure Regulators:
a. American Meter Co. (215-830-1800)
b. Invensys Metering Systems (800-375-8875)
c. Fisher Controls, Division of Emerson. (800-558-5853)
2.02 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
SECTION 23 11 23 (15194) - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING Page 4
2.03 PIPES, TUBES, FITTINGS, AND JOINING MATERIALS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53; Type E or S; Grade B; Schedule 40; black.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with
threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
2. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
3. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
4. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel.
5. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to
ASME B1.20.1.
6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
8. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.
B. Transition Fittings: Type, material, and end connections to match piping being joined.
C. Common Joining Materials: Refer to Section 23 05 00 - "Common Work Results for HVAC"
for joining materials not in this Section.
2.04 PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Paint all exterior exposed gas piping with two coats of rust inhibitive paint.
2.05 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Flexible Connectors: ANSI Z21.24, copper alloy.
B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: ANSI Z21.41, convenience outlets and matching plug connector.
C. Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe
threads.
D. Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Flanged ends according to ASME B16.5 for steel
flanges and according to ASME B16.24 for copper and copper-alloy flanges.
E. Appliance Connector Valves: ANSI Z21.15 and IAS listed.
F. Gas Stops: Bronze body with AGA stamp, plug type with bronze plug and flat or square head,
ball type with chrome-plated brass ball and lever handle, or butterfly valve with stainless-steel
disc and fluorocarbon elastomer seal and lever handle; 2-psig (13.8-kPa) minimum pressure
rating.
G. Gas Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: ASME B16.33 and IAS-listed bronze body and 125-
psig pressure rating.
H. Plug Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: ASME B16.38 and MSS SP-78 cast-iron,
lubricated plug valves, with 125-psig pressure rating.
I. General-Duty Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: ASME B16.38, cast-iron body, suitable
for fuel gas service, with "WOG" indicated on valve body, and 125-psig pressure rating.
1. Gate Valves: MSS SP-70, OS&Y type with solid wedge.
J. Automatic Gas Valves: ANSI Z21.21, with electrical or mechanical operator for actuation by
appliance automatic shutoff device.
K. Earthquake Valves: FM approved or listed in IAS Directory as complying with ANSI Z21.70
and UL listed. Include mechanical operator.
SECTION 23 11 23 (15194) - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING Page 5
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Comply with NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1), "Prevention of Accidental Ignition" Paragraph.
3.02 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING
A. Extend fuel gas piping and connect to fuel gas distribution for service entrance to building.
1. Exterior fuel gas distribution system piping, service pressure regulator, and service meter
will be provided by gas utility.
B. Install strainer upstream from each earthquake valve. Refer to Section 22 10 13 - "Plumbing
Specialties" for strainers.
3.03 CONCRETE BASE INSTALLATION
A. Locate bases at service meters and service regulators.
B. Excavate earth and make level beds to support bases. Set bases level with top surface
projecting approximately 3 inches above grade.
3.04 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Flanges, unions, transition, and special fittings with pressure ratings same as or higher than
system pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Fuel Gas Piping, 0.5 psig or Less: Use the following:
1. NPS 3/4 (DN 20) steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and threaded joints.
2. NPS 3/4 and NPS 1 (DN 20 and DN 25): Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and
threaded joints.
a. Option: Soft copper tube, copper fittings, and brazed joints may be used for runouts
at individual appliances.
3. NPS 1-1/4 to NPS 2 (DN 32 to DN 50): Steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings, and
threaded joints.
4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded
joints.
5. Larger Than NPS 4 (DN 100): Steel pipe, steel welding fittings, and welded joints.
3.05 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 psig or Less: Appliance connector valve or gas
stop.
B. Appliance Shutoff Valves for Pressure 0.5 to 2 psig: Gas stop or gas valve.
C. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Gas valve.
D. Piping Line Valves, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Plug valve or general-duty valve.
E. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Gas valve.
F. Valves at Service Meter, NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Plug valve.
3.06 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 23 05 00 - "Common Work Results for HVAC" for basic piping installation
requirements.
B. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in airtight
conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe with welded joints. Vent
conduit to outside and terminate with screened vent cap.
SECTION 23 11 23 (15194) - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING Page 6
1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible spaces, subject to
approval of authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not such spaces are used as
plenums. Do not locate valves above ceilings.
2. In Floors: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective
Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in floors, subject to approval of authorities
having jurisdiction. Surround piping cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches
of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as
reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs
containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate.
3. In Floor Channels: Gas piping may be installed in floor channels, subject to approval of
authorities having jurisdiction. Channels must have cover and be open to space above
cover for ventilation.
4. In Partitions: Do not install concealed piping in solid partitions. Protect tubing from
physical damage when installed inside partitions or hollow walls.
a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls.
5. In Walls: Gas piping with welded joints and protective wrapping specified in "Protective
Coating" Article in Part 2 may be installed in masonry walls, subject to approval of
authorities having jurisdiction.
6. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes
or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or
elevator shafts.
a. Exception: Accessible above-ceiling space specified above.
C. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect. Include
outlets of service meters. Locate where readily accessible for cleaning and emptying. Do not
install where condensate would be subject to freezing.
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use minimum-length nipple of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long,
and same size as connected pipe. Install with space between bottom of drip and floor for
removal of plug or cap.
D. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, and in floor channels, unless indicated to be exposed to view.
E. Install fuel gas piping at uniform grade of 0.1 percent slope upward toward risers.
F. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
G. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
H. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection
to each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged
devices.
I. Install corrugated, stainless-steel tubing system according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where tubing is restrained
and cannot move.
J. Install strainer on inlet of each line pressure regulator and automatic and electrically operated
valve.
K. Install flanges on valves, specialties, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger
connections.
L. Install vent piping for gas pressure regulators and gas trains, extend outside building, and vent
to atmosphere. Terminate vents with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-
resistant insect screens in large end.
SECTION 23 11 23 (15194) - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING Page 7
M. Install containment conduits for gas piping below slabs, within building, in gastight conduits
extending minimum of 4 inches outside building, and vented to atmosphere. Terminate vents
with turned-down, reducing-elbow fittings with corrosion-resistant insect screens in large end.
Prepare and paint outside of conduits with coal-tar, epoxy-polyamide paint according to
SSPC-Paint 16.
3.07 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Refer to Section 23 05 00 "Common Work Results for HVAC" for basic piping joint
construction.
B. Use materials suitable for fuel gas.
1. Brazed Joints: Make with brazing alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F.
Brazing alloys containing phosphorus are prohibited.
3.08 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Refer to Section 23 05 29 - "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for pipe
hanger and support devices.
B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:
1. NPS 1 (DN 25) and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
2. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod
size, 3/8 inch.
4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 65 to DN 90): Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size,
1/2 inch.
5. NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.
3.09 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of fuel gas piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to appliances using gas with shutoff valves and unions. Install valve upstream
from and within 72 inches of each appliance. Install union downstream from valve.
D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
practical to inlet of each appliance using gas.
3.10 PAINTING
A. Use materials and procedures in Section 09 90 00 "Painting”
B. Paint exterior service meters, pressure regulators, specialty valves, and piping.
1. Color: Gray.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect, test, and purge piping according to NFPA 54 (ANSI Z223.1), Part 4 "Inspection,
Testing, and Purging," and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system until satisfactory results are
obtained.
C. Report test results promptly and in writing to Owner’s Representative and authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Verify capacities and pressure ratings of service meters, pressure regulators, valves, and
specialties.
SECTION 23 11 23 (15194) - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING Page 8
E. Verify correct pressure settings for pressure regulators.
F. Verify that specified piping tests are complete.
3.12 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace dam aged and malfunctioning controls and safety
devices.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 23 00 (15530) - REFRIGERANT PIPING Page 1
SECTION 23 23 00 (15530) - REFRIGERANT PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Tubes.
2. Fittings.
3. Joining Materials.
4. Specialties.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 92 00 (07920) - Joint Sealants
2. Section 07 84 00 (07840) - Firestopping: Firestopping materials and requirements for
penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
3. Section 23 05 00 (15050) – Common Work Results for HVAC
4. Section 23 05 29 (15060) - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment: for
pipe hanger restraints.
5. Section 23 05 53 (15075) – Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
6. Section 22 07 00 (15083) - HVAC Insulation
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
1. Product Data for each valve type and refrigerant piping specialty specified.
2. Refrigerant piping indicated is schematic only. Contractor shall size and design the
piping configuration and install the piping, including oil traps, double risers, specialties,
and pipe and tube sizes, to ensure proper operation and conformance with warranties of
connected equipment.
3. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
4. Maintenance data for refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in the operation
and maintenance manual specified in Division 01 Sections.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. ASME Compliance: Qualify brazing and welding processes and operators according to ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:
1. ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping."
2. ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."
C. UL Standard: Provide products complying with UL 207, "Refrigerant-Containing Components
and Accessories, Non-electrical"; or UL 429, "Electrically Operated Valves."
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are UL listed and labeled.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
SECTION 23 23 00 (15530) - REFRIGERANT PIPING Page 2
1. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:
a. Henry Pratt Company, Subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. (877-436-7966)
b. Parker-Hannifin Corporation; Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Division (800-272-
7537)
c. Sporlan Valve Company (314-647-2775)
2.02 TUBES
A. Use pre-charged tubing where possible.
B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B280, Type ACR, annealed temper.
2.03 TUBE FITTINGS
A. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper streamlined pattern.
2.04 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (Silver).
2.05 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 500-psig operating pressure, 200 deg F operating temperature;
forged-brass body, with replaceable, polished, optical viewing window with color -coded
moisture indicator, and solder-end connections.
B. Permanent Filter-Dryer: 350-psig maximum operating pressure, 225 deg F maximum
operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought-copper fittings for solder-end connections;
molded-felt core surrounded by desiccant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of refrigerant piping. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 APPLICATIONS
A. Above ground, within Building: Type ACR drawn-copper tubing.
B. Below ground for 2-Inch NPS (DN50) and Smaller: Type L (Type B) annealed-copper tubing
installed in schedule 40 PVC sleeve.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.
B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Section 21/22/23 95 00 (15050) - "Basic
Mechanical Materials and Methods."
C. Install piping in short and direct arrangement, with minimum number of joints, elbows, and
fittings.
D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and service of compressor and other equipment.
Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection.
E. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, or
between pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized
to permit installation of full-thickness insulation. Maximum fill: 40%
F. Below ground, install copper tubing in schedule 40 PVC conduit. Vent conduit outdoors.
G. Insulate suction lines.
1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have been
eliminated.
SECTION 23 23 00 (15530) - REFRIGERANT PIPING Page 3
H. Install branch lines to parallel compressors of equal length, and pipe identically and
symmetrically.
I. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be
exposed to mechanical injury.
J. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:
1. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope of 0.4 percent downward to
compressor.
2. Install traps and double risers where indicated and where required to entrain oil in vertical
runs.
3. Liquid lines may be installed level.
K. Use fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
L. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not
permitted, unless expressly indicated.
M. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with level side down.
N. Provide bypass around moisture-liquid indicators in lines larger than 2-inch NPS (DN50).
O. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure -regulating valves, expansion
valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators.
P. Install refrigerant valves according to manuf acturer's written instructions.
Q. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils; remove sight glasses; and remove stems, seats,
and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply
heat near bulb of expansion valve.
R. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16 Sections. Coordinate electrical
requirements and connections.
S. Charge and purge systems, after testing, dispose of refrigerant following ASHRAE 15
procedures.
3.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Section 23 05 29 - "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Provide according to ASME B31.5 and MSS SP-
69.
B. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes.
Tube sizes are nominal or standard tube sizes as expressed in ASTM B88.
1. 1/2 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
2. 5/8 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
3. 1 Inch: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
4. 1-1/4 Inches: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
5. 1-1/2 Inches: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
3.05 PIPE INSULATION
A. Piping insulation is specified in Section 23 07 00 “HVAC Insulation”.
3.06 SPECIALTIES APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION
A. Install permanent filter dryers in low-temperature systems using hermetic compressors, and
before each solenoid valve.
SECTION 23 23 00 (15530) - REFRIGERANT PIPING Page 4
3.07 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Basic pipe and tube joint construction is specified in Section 23 05 00 - "Common Work
Results for HVAC."
B. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon dioxide) during brazing to prevent
formation of scale.
3.08 VALVE INSTALLATIONS
A. Install refrigerant valves according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.09 CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 26 Sections for electrical
connections.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect and test refrigerant piping according to ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.
1. Pressure test with nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27-psig vacuum and 200
psig using halide torch or electronic leak detector. Test to no leakage.
B. Test and adjust controls and saf eties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
C. Repair leaks using new materials; retest.
3.11 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.
3.12 CLEANING
A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR, clean tubing and fittings with
trichloroethylene.
3.13 COMMISSIONING
A. Charge system using the following procedures:
1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test, but before evacuation.
2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump until temperature of 35 deg is indicated
on vacuum dehydration indicator.
3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.
4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between vacuum
pump and system.
5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig.
6. Complete charging of system, using new filter-dryer core in charging line. Provide full-
operating charge.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 31 13 (15815) - METAL DUCTS Page 1
SECTION 23 31 13 (15815) - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sheet Metal Materials.
2. Duct Liner.
3. Sealant Materials.
4. Hangers and Supports.
5. Duct Fabrication.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 84 00 (07840) - Firestopping: For fire-resistant sealants for use around duct
penetrations and fire-damper installations in fire-rated floors, partitions, and walls.
2. Section 08 31 00 (08310) - Access Doors: For wall- and ceiling-mounted access doors
for access to concealed ducts.
3. Section 23 05 93 (15950) - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: For air balancing and final
adjusting of manual-volume dampers.
4. Section 23 07 00 (15081) – HVAC Insulation: For duct insulation.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Conductivity and Apparent Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): As defined in
ASTM C 168.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select and size air -moving and -
distribution equipment and other components of air system. Changes to layout or
configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by the Engineer of
Record. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that
proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pre ssure.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
1. Product Data:
a. For duct liner and sealing materials.
2. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates indicating welding procedures and personnel
comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article.
3. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
4. Record Drawings: Indicate actual routing, fitting details, reinforcement, support, and
installed accessories and devices.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding Standards: Qualify welding procedures and welding personnel to perform welding
processes for this Project according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel" for
hangers and supports; AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum
supporting members; and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam
welding.
SECTION 23 31 13 (15815) - METAL DUCTS Page 2
B. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Comply with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems,"
unless otherwise indicated.
D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking
Operations," Chapter 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store stainless-steel sheets with mill-applied adhesive protective paper maintained
through fabrication and installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized, Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; ASTM A653, G90 coating designation; mill-
phosphatized finish for surfaces of ducts exposed to view.
B. Carbon-Steel Sheets: ASTM A366, cold-rolled sheets; commercial quality; with oiled,
exposed matte finish.
C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A480, Type 316, sheet form with No. 4 finish for surfaces of ducts
exposed to view; and Type 304, sheet form with No. 1 finish for concealed ducts.
D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized, sheet metal ducts; com patible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.02 DUCT LINER
A. General: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner
Standard."
B. Materials: ASTM C1071 with coated surface exposed to airstream to prevent erosion of glass
fibers.
1. Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Thermal Conductivity (k -Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature.
3. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and smoke-developed
rating of 50, when tested according to ASTM C 411.
4. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and ASTM C916.
5. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, m echanical
attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as
recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct.
a. Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- tensile, dead-load test perpendicular
to duct wall.
b. Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting
more than 1/8 inch into airstream.
c. Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire -hazard classification
of duct liner system.
2.03 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Joint and Seam Sealants, General: The term "sealant" is not limited to materials of adhesive
or mastic nature but includes tapes and combinations of open-weave fabric strips and mastics.
1. Joint and Seam Tape: 2 inches wide; glass-fiber fabric reinforced.
SECTION 23 31 13 (15815) - METAL DUCTS Page 3
2. Joint and Seam Sealant: One-part, nonsag, solvent-release-curing, polymerized butyl
sealant, formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.
3. Flanged Joint Mastics: One-part, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric joint sealants,
complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.
2.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel
fasteners appropriate for building materials.
1. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
2. Exception: Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate
concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.
B. Hanger Materials: Galvanized, sheet steel or round, threaded steel rod.
1. Hangers Installed in Corrosive Atmospheres: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rod or
galvanized rods with threads painted after installation.
2. Straps and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--
Metal and Flexible" for sheet steel width and thickness and for steel rod diameters.
C. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self -tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
D. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes complying with ASTM A36/A36M.
1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel shapes and plates.
2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel support materials.
2.05 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate ducts, elbows, transitions, offsets, branch connections, and other
construction with galvanized, sheet steel, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards--Metal and Flexible." Comply with requirements for metal thickness, reinforcing
types and intervals, tie-rod applications, and joint types and intervals.
1. Lengths: Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity
class required for pressure classification.
2. Materials: Free from visual imperfections such as pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
stains, and discolorations.
B. Fabricate range hood exhaust ducts with 0.0598-inch-thick, carbon-steel sheet for concealed
ducts and 0.0500-inch-thick stainless steel for exposed ducts. Weld and flange seams and
joints. Comply with NFPA 96.
2.06 SHOP APPLICATION OF LINER IN RECTANGULAR DUCTS
A. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with 90 percent coverage of adhesive
at liner contact surface area. Multiple layers of insulation to achieve indicated thickness are
prohibited.
B. Apply adhesive to liner facing in direction of airflow not receiving metal nosing.
C. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive.
D. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-edge
overlapping.
E. Do not apply liners in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.
SECTION 23 31 13 (15815) - METAL DUCTS Page 4
F. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding
12 inches transversely around perimeter; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals
not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.
G. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have
either channel or "Z" profile or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at
the following locations:
1. Fan discharge.
2. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
H. Terminate liner with duct buildouts installed in ducts to attach dampers, turning vane
assemblies, and other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or o ther buildout
means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct wall with bolts, screws, rivets, or
welds. Terminate liner at fire dampers at connection to fire-damper sleeve.
2.07 ROUND DUCT FABRICATION
A. Round Ducts: Fabricate supply ducts of galvanized steel according to SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
2.08 ROUND SUPPLY AND EXHAUST FITTING FABRICATION
A. 90-Degree Tees and Laterals and Conical Tees: Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," with metal thicknesses specified for
longitudinal seam straight duct.
B. Diverging-Flow Fittings: Fabricate with a reduced entrance to branch taps with no excess
material projecting from body onto branch tap entrance.
C. Elbows: Fabricate in die-formed, gored, pleated, or mitered construction. Fabricate bend
radius of die-formed, gored, and pleated elbows one and one-half times elbow diameter.
Unless elbow construction type is indicated, fabricate elbows as follows:
1. Mitered-Elbow Radius and Number of Pieces: Welded construction complying with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible," unless otherwise
indicated.
2. 90-Degree, Two-Piece, Mitered Elbows: Use only for supply systems, or exhaust
systems for material-handling classes A and B; and only where space restrictions do not
permit using 1.5 bend radius elbows. Fabricate with single-thickness turning vanes.
3. Round Elbows, 8 Inches and Smaller: Fabricate die-formed elbows for 45- and 90-
degree elbows and pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60, and 90 degrees only. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
4. Round Elbows, 9 through 14 Inches: Fabricate gored or pleated elbows for 30, 45, 60,
and 90 degrees, unless space restrictions require a mitered elbow. Fabricate
nonstandard bend-angle configuration or nonstandard diameter elbows with gored
construction.
5. Round Elbows, Larger Than 14 Inches: Fabricate gored elbows, unless space
restrictions require a mitered elbow.
6. Die-Form ed Elbows for Sizes through 8 Inches and All Pressures: 0.040 inch thick with
two-piece welded construction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DUCT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories.
B. Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure classification indicated.
SECTION 23 31 13 (15815) - METAL DUCTS Page 5
C. Install round ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet, unless interrupted by fittings.
D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, changes in size and shape, and
connections.
F. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct.
G. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular
to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.
H. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and
permanent enclosure elements of building.
I. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
J. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions,
unless specifically indicated.
K. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts,
and similar finished work.
L. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ductwork to avoid passing through transformer vaults,
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures, and through elevator equipment rooms.
M. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and
exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and
duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as duct. Overlap
opening on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
N. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior
walls, install appropriately rated fire damper, sleeve, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke
dampers are specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and
installation methods are specified in Section 07 84 00 "Firestopping."
3.02 RANGE HOOD EXHAUST DUCT INSTALLATIONS
A. Install ducts to allow for thermal expansion of ductwork through 2000 deg F temperature
range.
B. Install ducts without dips or traps that may collect residues, unless traps have continuous or
automatic residue removal.
C. Install access openings and doors at each change in direction and at 20 -foot intervals; locate
on sides of duct a minimum of 1-1/2 inches from bottom; and fit with grease-tight covers of
same material as duct.
D. Do not penetrate fire-rated assemblies.
E. Provide cleanouts at the base of each riser and where required.
3.03 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING
A. General: Seal duct seams and joints according to the duct pressure class indicated and as
described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
B. Pressure Classification Less Than 2-Inch wg: Transverse and longitudinal joints.
C. Seal externally insulated ducts before insulation installation.
D. Materials: 3M Brand No. 800.
3.04 HANGING AND SUPPORTING
A. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat-oval metal duct with support systems indicated in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
SECTION 23 31 13 (15815) - METAL DUCTS Page 6
B. Support horizontal ducts within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch
intersection.
C. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.
D. Install upper attachments to structures with an allowable load not exceeding one -fourth of
failure (proof-test) load.
E. Install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
F. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
3.05 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect equipment with flexible connectors according to Section 23 33 00 (15820) "Duct
Accessories."
B. For branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible."
C. Leakage Test: Perform tests according to SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual."
3.06 ADJUSTING
A. Refer to Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for detailed
procedures.
3.07 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect the system.
Vacuum interior as well as exterior of ducts before final acceptance to remove dust and
debris.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 33 00 (15820) - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 1
SECTION 23 33 00 (15820) - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Manual-Volume Dampers
2. Fire Dampers
3. Turning Vanes
4. Duct-Mounted Access Doors
5. Flexible Connectors
6. Flexible Ducts
7. Zone Control Exhaust Terminals
8. Accessories
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 31 00 (08310) - Access Doors and Panels: For wall- and ceiling-mounted
access doors and panels.
2. Section 23 05 53 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
3. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.
4. Section 23 37 00 (15850) - Air Outlets and Inlets.
5. Section 25 51 00 – Integrated Automation Control of Guestroom Equipment
6. Section 28 31 00 (13850) - Fire Alarm and Detection Systems: For duct-mounted fire
and smoke detectors.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA) Publications:
1. AH124 "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
1. 90A “Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”
2. 90B “Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air-Conditioning Systems”
C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) Publications:
1. “Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide for Air Handling Systems”
2. “HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible”
D. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards:
1. 181 “Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors”
2. 181B “Closure Systems for Use With Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors”
3. 555 “Fire Dampers”
4. 555C “Standard for Safety for Ceiling Dampers”
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
SECTION 23 33 00 (15820) - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 2
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1. Product Data: For the following:
a. Manual-volume dampers.
b. Fire dampers.
c. Duct-mounted access doors.
d. Flexible ducts.
e. Zone Control Exhaust Terminal
2. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,
loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, location, and size
of each field connection. Detail the following:
a. Special fittings and manual- and automatic-volume-damper installations.
b. Fire damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounted access doors and
panels.
3. Product Certificates: Submit certified test data on dynamic insertion loss; self-noise
power levels; and airflow performance data, static-pressure loss, dimensions, and
weights.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA standards:
1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. manuals (SMACNA)
except where details or notes on drawings indicate otherwise.
1. HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible.
2. Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide for Air Handling Systems.
C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard for Safety UL 181, UL 555.
1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described in Section 01 78 43 (01790) “Spare Parts and Materials”
that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are
identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
1. Fire Dampers.
a. None
2. Ceiling Fire Dampers
a. None
3. Flexible Connectors
a. None
4. Flexible Ducts
a. None
5. Zone Control Exhaust Terminal
SECTION 23 33 00 (15820) - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 3
a. None
B. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Manual Volume Dampers.
a. Ruskin Company (816-761-7476)
b. Air Balance, Division of Mestek (419-865-5000)
c. Prefco (Perfect Air Control, Inc.) (800-437-6653)
2. Fire Dampers.
a. Ruskin Company (816-761-7476)
b. Air Balance, Division of Mestek (419-865-5000)
c. Prefco (Perfect Air Control, Inc.) (800-437-6653)
3. Ceiling Fire Dampers
a. Ruskin Company (816-761-7476)
b. Air Balance, Division of Mestek (419-865-5000)
c. Prefco (Perfect Air Control, Inc.) (800-437-6653)
4. Flexible Connectors.
a. Ventfabrics, Inc. (800-621-1207)
b. Ward Industries, Inc. (630-595-7320)
c. Vent Products Co. (800-368-8368)
5. Flexible Ducts
a. Clevaflex. Ltd. (216-941-6505)
b. Approved Substitution
6. Zone Control Exhaust Terminal
a. American Aldes (941-351-3441)
2.02 MANUAL-VOLUME DAMPERS
A. General: Factory fabricated with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades
for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without
vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with
pressure class.
B. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as
indicated, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal
or vertical applications.
1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized, sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch
thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching
to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.
2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized, sheet steel.
3. Blade Axles: Nonferrous.
4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
C. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch thick
zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper
operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
SECTION 23 33 00 (15820) - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 4
2.03 FIRE DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to UL 555.
B. Fire Rating: One and one-half hour unless noted otherwise.
C. Frame: SMACNA Type B with blades out of airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inch-
thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed galvanized, sheet steel.
1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 inch or 0.138 inch thick and length to suit application.
2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame
complies with sleeve requirements.
E. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
F. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034 inch thick, galvanized, sheet steel. In place of
interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034 inch thick, galvanized steel blade connectors.
G. Horizontal Dampers: Include a blade lock and stainless-steel negator closure spring.
H. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 F rated as indicated.
I. Provide access door in duct adjacent to each fire damper.
2.04 CEILING FIRE DAMPERS
A. General: Labeled to UL 555C; comply with construction details for tested floor- and roof-
ceiling assemblies as indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."
B. Frame: 0.040 inch thick, galvanized, sheet steel; round or rectangular; style to suit ceiling
construction.
C. Blades: 0.034 inch thick, galvanized, sheet steel with nonasbestos refractory insulation.
D. Fusible Link: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.
2.05 TURNING VANES
A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and
Flexible."
B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate of 1-1/2 inch wide, curved blades set 3/4 inch o.c.;
support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into side strips suitable for
mounting in ducts.
2.06 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A. General: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
B. Frame: Galvanized, sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
C. Door: Double-wall, galvanized, sheet metal construction with insulation fill and thickness, and
number of hinges and locks as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where
indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.
E. Insulation: 1-inch thick, fibrous-glass.
2.07 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. General: Flame-retarded or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with
UL 181, Class 1.
B. Standard Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches wide
attached to two strips of 2-3/4 inch wide, 0.028 inch thick, galvanized, sheet steel. Select
metal compatible with connected ducts.
SECTION 23 33 00 (15820) - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 5
C. Transverse Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a strip of fabric 3-1/2 inches
wide attached to two strips of 4-3/8 inch wide, 0.028 inch thick, galvanized, sheet steel Select
metal compatible with connected ducts.
D. Conventional, Indoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with
polychloroprene.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.
2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp, and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Minimum Movement: 2 inches.
E. Conventional, Outdoor System Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with a
synthetic-rubber, weatherproof coating resistant to the sun's ultraviolet rays and ozone
environment.
1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.
2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp, and 440 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Minimum Movement: 2 inches.
F. High-Corrosive-Environment System Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric coated with a
chemical-resistant coating (For use in pool area equipment room).
1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd.
2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/inch in the warp, and 340 lbf/inch in the filling.
3. Minimum Movement: 2 inches.
2.08 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. General: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
B. Flexible Ducts, Uninsulated: Corrugated aluminum. For use on dryer vents only.
C. Flexible Ducts, Insulated: Factory-fabricated, insulated, round duct, with an outer jacket
enclosing 1-1/2-inch thick, glass-fiber insulation around a continuous inner liner.
1. Reinforcement: Steel-wire helix encapsulated in inner liner.
2. Outer Jacket: Glass-reinforced, silver Mylar with a continuous hanging tab, integral
fibrous-glass tape, and nylon hanging cord.
3. Inner Liner: Polyethylene film.
D. Pressure Rating: 6-inch wg positive, 1/2-inch wg negative.
2.09 ZONE CONTROL EXHAUST TERMINALS
A. Zone exhaust terminals shall be of sizes and capacities scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Terminal casing shall be minimum 24-guage 690 galvanized steel with integral duct collar.
Include all necessary mounting brackets and hardware.
C. All 120V terminals must be per UL standards.
D. Primary air volume mechanism shall be a single blade damper on solid through blade shaft
with disconnecting drive motor and spring-return enclosure. A perimeter gasket shall seal to
prevent noise and leakage in closed position.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Louvers:
SECTION 23 33 00 (15820) - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 6
1. Provide blank off panels for unused portions of louvers. Panels shall be double wall
construction with 0.032 inch aluminum, and 2 inch thick, internal glass fiber insulation in
accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible.”
B. Open ducts in suspended ceiling: No. 16 USSG, ¾ inch square mesh, screen over each
opening; with 1 inch wide galvanized steel enclosing frame and flanged duct opening to
receive frame. In lieu or screen and volume damper, provide register or grille plus opposed
blade volume damper.
C. Duct sleeves: Minimum 20 gauge USSG galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated.
1. Clearances:
a. Non-insulated duct: 1 inch between duct and sleeve on all sides.
b. Insulated duct: 1 inch between insulation and sleeve on all sides.
c. Grilles, registers and diffusers: Zero clearance.
2. Provide closure collars for exposed ducts on each side of wall or floor opening. Collars
shall be galvanized sheet metal, minimum 4 inch wide, and fit tight against surface and
around duct or insulation. Install with nails 6 inch on center.
3. Framed openings: Provide clearances and closure collars the same as for duct sleeves.
4. Duct-mounted automatic control devices: Mount on mechanical equipment all devices
related to automatic controls such as automatic dampers.
D. Cleanout Doors ( [Kitchen] [and] [Laundry Dryer] Exhaust): Horizontal ducts shall be mounted
maximum 20 ft. apart and in change of direction. Cleanout doors on horizontal duct shall be
mounted on side of duct. Bottom edge shall be not less than 2 inches above bottom of duct.
Cleanout doors at veritical ducts shall be mounted at base. Door and frame shall be same
gauge as duct. Hinges shall be Ventlock No. 260, extra heavy zinc plated. Latches shall be
Ventlock No. 140, cast zinc. Gaskets shall be between door and frame. Gaskets shall be 1/8
inch double thickness rated 2,000 deg F for kitchen exhaust system. Cleanout door size shall
be maximum 24 inch x 24 inch and minimum shall be 24 inch one side, and other side shall be
2 inch less than duct height.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details shown in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and NAIMA's "Fibrous Glass
Duct Construction Standards" for fibrous-glass ducts.
B. Install volume dampers in lined duct; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.
C. Provide test holes at fan inlet and outlet and elsewhere as indicated.
D. Install fire dampers according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.
1. Install fusible links in fire dampers.
E. Install duct access panels for access to both sides of duct coils. Install duct access panels
downstream from volume dampers, fire dampers, turning vanes, automatic dampers, smoke
detectors, outside and exhaust air plenums equipment, and other locations as indicated.
1. Install duct access panels to allow access to interior of ducts for cleaning, inspecting,
adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units.
2. Install access panels on side of duct where adequate clearance is available.
F. Label access doors according to Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
G. Provide flexible connections at fan and building joints.
SECTION 23 33 00 (15820) - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES Page 7
H. Install automatic dampers supplied by the automatic temperature control system
manufacturer. Notch end of rod and label duct/casing to indicate open and closed blade
position.
I. Install zone control exhaust terminals and make required control and electrical connections.
J. Provide volume dampers at following locations:
1. In all duct splits and branch connections of supply, return, and exhaust systems.
2. Ducts connecting to common plenums.
3. Ducts serving single outlet.
4. At open return duct in hung ceiling.
5. Other locations as indicated on drawings.
K. Provide access doors in following locations and as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Automatic dampers: linkage side.
2. Main balancing dampers.
3. Fire dampers.
4. Smoke detection heads.
5. On both sides of ducts where necessary to provide maintenance accessibility to
equipment on the other side.
6. Outside air and exhaust air plenums.
L. Flexible Duct Installation:
1. Installation shall be in accordance with SMACNA and local building code standards.
2. Flexible duct runs shall be a maximum of 5 feet, straight lengths, no bends.
3. Connections to beaded sheet metal fittings shall be with 3 wraps of approved tape and
stainless steel draw band for tight seal. Seal the outer jacket with 3 wraps of approved
UL 181B tape.
4. A 1 ½” minimum strap shall be used to support the flexible duct at a distance not greater
than 5’-0”. Maximum permissible sag is ½” per foot of duct length.
3.02 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.
B. Adjust fire dampers for proper action.
C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Section 23 05 93 "Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC”.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 34 23 (15833) - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 1
SECTION 23 34 23 (15833) - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Centrifugal Roof Ventilators.
2. Ceiling-Mounted Ventilators.
3. Attic Ventilators
4. Motors
5. Factory Finishes
6. Quality Control
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 05 00 (15050) – Common Work Results for HVAC
2. Section 23 05 53 (15075) – Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
3. Section 23 05 13 (15090) – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
4. Section 23 05 93 (15950) - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
C. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section:
1. Roof curbs for roof-mounted exhaust fans.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Air Movement & Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA) Publications:
1. 99 "Standards Handbook" (Revised 2003)
2. 210 "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating"
3. 300 "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans"
4. 301 "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data"
B. Home Ventilating Institute (HVI) Publications:
1. 915 “Procedure for Loudness Rating of Residential Fan Products”
C. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Standards Publications:
1. MG 1 “Motors and Generators”
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
1. 70 "National Electric Code"
E. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications:
1. 486A “Standard For Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper
Conductors”
2. 486B “Standard for Wire Connectors for Use With Aluminum Conductors”
3. 705 “Standard for Power Ventilators”
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Project Altitude: Base air ratings on actual site elevations.
B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
C. Fan Schedule: The following information is described in an equipment schedule on the
Drawings.
SECTION 23 34 23 (15833) - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 2
1. Fan performance data including capacities, outlet velocities, static pressures, sound
power characteristics, motor requirements, and electrical characteristics.
2. Fan arrangement including wheel configuration, inlet and discharge configurations, and
required accessories.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
1. Product Data including rated capacities of each unit, weights (shipping, installed, and
operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and the following:
a. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
b. Certified fan sound power ratings.
c. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and electrical accessories.
d. Material gages and finishes, including color charts.
e. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
2. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating
dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
3. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating clearly
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Maintenance data for power ventilators to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 01 and in Section 23 05 00 "Common Work Results for
HVAC."
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are
listed and labeled by UL where available.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are
listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electr ical Code, Article
100.
C. AMCA Compliance: Provide products that meet performance requirements and are licensed
to use the AMCA Seal.
D. NEMA Compliance: Provide components required as part of fans that comply with applicable
NEMA standards.
E. UL Standard: Provide power ventilators that comply with UL 705.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify clearances.
B. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings are lubricated, and
fans have been commissioned.
1.07 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. Roof
specialties are specified in Division 07 Sections.
SECTION 23 34 23 (15833) - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 3
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described in Section 01 78 43 (01790) “Spare Parts and Materials”
that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with labels describing contents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Centrifugal Roof Ventilators:
a. Carnes Co. (608-845-6411)
b. Loren Cook Company (417-869-6474)
c. Greenheck Fan Corporation(715-359-6171)
d. PennBarry (972-234-3202)
2. Ceiling-Mounted Ventilators:
a. Carnes Co. (608-845-6411)
b. Loren Cook Company (417-869-6474)
c. Greenheck Fan Corporation(715-359-6171)
d. PennBarry (972-234-3202)
e. Broan-NuTone LLC (888-336-6151)
f. Panasonic Corporation of North America (866-292-7292)
3. Attic Ventilators:
a. Carnes Co. (608-845-6411)
b. Loren Cook Company (417-869-6474)
c. Greenheck Fan Corporation(715-359-6171)
d. PennBarry (972-234-3202)
2.02 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive centrifugal fans, as indicated, consisting of housing,
wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and
accessories.
B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece,
aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.
C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.
D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following features:
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self -aligning ball bearings.
3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley.
4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust air stream.
E. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:
1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 percent to less
than 50 percent. (Direct drive fans only).
SECTION 23 34 23 (15833) - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 4
2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan
housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.
3. Bird Screens: Removable 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire.
4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;
factory set to close when fan stops.
5. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 2-inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass
insulation adhered to inside walls; and 2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof
opening and fan base. Built-in cant and mounting flange.
a. Overall Height: 12 inches. Minimum.
2.03 CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS
A. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall, or for concealed in-line
applications.
B. Housing: Galvanized steel lined with acoustical insulation.
C. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan
wheel shall be removable for service.
D. Grille: Aluminum, louvered grille or eggcrate with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment
to fan housing.
E. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for
motor plug-in.
F. Variable-Speed Controller Mounted on Fan Housing: Solid-state control to reduce speed from
100 percent to less than 50 percent.
G. Sound Level: Guestroom Toilets Guestroom Toilets shall have a maximum of 0.3 Sones per
HVI 915 “Procedure for Loudness Rating of Residential Fan Products”. Refer to Light Fixture
Matrix for approved manufacturers and models.
H. Accessories: Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.
2.04 ATTIC VENTILATORS
A. Description: Roof mounted, direct drive, propeller fan consisting of housing, wheel, motor
drive, and thermostat.
B. Housing: Heavy gauge aluminum dome with insect screen, splash guard, heavy gauge
aluminum flashing.
C. Motor Drive: Thermally protected, permanently protected motor.
D. Wheel: Aluminum propeller and hub construction.
E. Thermostat: Single stage line voltage thermostat with 55° to 130° F. range, bimetal actuated.
2.05 MOTORS
A. Refer to Section 23 05 13 - "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for general
requirements for factory-installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
C. Enclosure Type: The following features are required as indicated:
1. Open dripproof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.
2.06 FACTORY FINISHES
A. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.
B. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
C. Aluminum Parts: No finish required.
SECTION 23 34 23 (15833) - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 5
2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required as indicated:
1. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA
Seal.
2. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory
Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements of installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting performance of the power ventilators. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install power ventilators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Support units using the vibration-control devices indicated. Vibration-control devices are
specified in Section 23 05 48 - "Vibration, and Seismic Control for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
1. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.
a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 07 Sections.
2. Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded steel rods and vibration
isolation springs.
3. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure using steel wire or metal straps.
C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D. Label units according to requirements specified in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections.
Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors.
B. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements in Division 16 Sections.
C. Grounding: Ground equipment. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including
grounding connections, according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values.
Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use thos e specified in UL 486A and
UL 486B.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative
to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of fans, including duct and
electrical connections, and to report results in writing.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
SECTION 23 34 23 (15833) - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS Page 6
3.06 CLEANING
A. After completing installation, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction
debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions.
B. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and construction debris. Vacuum clean fan
wheel and cabinet.
3.07 COMMISSIONING
A. Final Checks before Startup: Perform the following operations and checks before startup:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for
piping, ducts, and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-
overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan
wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and
adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended
lubricants.
6. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in
connected ductwork systems are in the fully open position.
7. Disable automatic temperature-control operators.
B. Starting procedures for fans are as follows:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan
to indicated RPM.
2. Measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
D. Refer to Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for procedures for air-
handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.
3.08 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain units.
1. Conduct training as specified in Section 01 79 00 (01820) "Training”.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup
and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 74 33 (15733) - DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS Page 1
SECTION 23 74 33 (15733) - DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Dedicated Outdoor-Air Units with Energy Recovery
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 05 00 (15050) – Common Work Results for HVAC
2. Section 23 05 13 (15090) – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
3. Section 23 05 53 (15075) – Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
4. Section 23 05 93 (15950) – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
5. Division 26 (16) Sections for electrical connections.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Publications:
1. 410 "Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-Heating Coils”
2. 1060 "Performance of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation
Equipment”
B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Publications:
1. 62.1 “Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI Approved)”
2. 90.1 “Energy Code for Commercial and High-Rise Residential Buildings”
C. ASTM International (ASTM) Publications: (Former American Society for Testing and Materials)
1. B117 "Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus"
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
1. 70 "National Electric Code"
2. 90A “Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Cond itions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
1. Product Data including manufacturer's technical data, clearly indicated for each model,
including: rated capacities, operating characteristics, dimensions, weights (shipping,
installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation and startup
instructions.
2. Shop Drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicate
dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection. Detail mounting, securing,
and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof
membrane system.
3. Wiring Diagrams detailing wiring for power, signal, and control systems. Clearly
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
4. Commissioning report, including pre-functional testing checklists, indicating the results of
unit startup, testing and commissioning requirements.
SECTION 23 74 33 (15733) - DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS Page 2
5. Maintenance data for energy recovery units to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 01 and in Section 23 05 00 "Common Work Results for
HVAC."
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. AHRI Certification: Units and their components shall be factory tested according to the
applicable portions of AHRI 1060, "Performance of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy
Recovery Ventilation Equipment," and AHRI 410, "Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-
Heating Coils," and shall be listed and bear the label of the Air-Conditioning, Heating and
Refrigeration Institute (AHRI).
B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors required as part of air -handling units that are
listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.
C. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that
are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the NFPA National Electrical Code,
Article 100.
E. Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 62.1-2004, Section 7 – "Construction and Startup."
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver rooftop units as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering.
B. Coordinate delivery of units in sufficient time to allow movement into building.
C. Handle rooftop units to comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions
for unloading and moving to final location.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described in Section 01 78 43 (01790) “Spare Parts and Materials”
that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with labels describing contents.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant all equipment for a period of one (1) year
from date of substantial completion. Extended warranty specified in this Article shall not
deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Extended Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
components of rooftop air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Extended Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than
five years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Extended Warranty Period for Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less
than 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
3. Extended Warranty Period for Energy Wheels: Manufacturer's standard, but not less
than 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
SECTION 23 74 33 (15733) - DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS Page 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Trane
2. “SolutionAir”; JAFT Corp (888-871-2310 x-108)
3. “RN Series”; AAON, Inc. (905-631-9161)
4. "TotalAire (QS) Series"; Desert Aire (262-946-7400)
5. “Model RVE”; Greenheck Fan Corporation (713-359-6171)
6. "Complevent"; Munters Corporation (800-843-5360)
7. “Model 62D“; Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Division, United Technologies
Corporation (800-827-7435 x 3496)
2.02 DEDICATED OUTDOOR-AIR UNITS WITH ENERGY RECOVERY
A. Description: Packaged self-contained, outdoor rooftop, DX/gas, 100% outside air, energy
recovery unit of capacities and characteristics as scheduled on the dra wings.
1. Each unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, wired, tested and shipped in one
piece.
2. Unit shall be capable of varying the amount of outside air delivered to the space based
on occupancy, humidity, indoor air quality and differential pressure.
3. In the event that the space dry bulb temperature begins to deviate from set point, t he
DOAS shall be capable of varying the outside air supply air temperature to supplement
the cooling or heating requirements of the space.
4. Unit shall be capable of varying the moisture content of outside air to the space based on
space humidity. To maintain 59 grains of moisture per pound of dry air space conditions,
the DOAS must be able deliver air down to 39°F dew point supply air at low air volume
conditions.
5. Units shall be designed to cool or dehumidify with entering air temperatures of 45°-110°F
and operate in heating mode down to -40°F. Units shall be capable of supplying air with
a maximum of 59 grains of moisture per pound of dry air, or less if specified, at both the
dry bulb / mean coincidental wet bulb and dew point / mean coincidental dry bulb
temperatures at the 0.4% ASHRAE design conditions for the location of the installation.
Units not capable of delivering 59 grains of moisture per pound of dry air, or less if
specified, at both design conditions are unacceptable.
6. Units shall provide 100% outdoor air directly to the space, or delivered to the terminal
unit(s) supply air duct. Mixed Air units are NOT acceptable.
B. Unit Cabinet:
1. Unit shall be specifically designed for outdoor rooftop application with a fully weat herproof
cabinet. The unit roof shall be sloped or cross-broken to assure drainage. Unit base shall
overhang the roof curb for water run-off. Rain break overhangs shall be provided above
access doors.
2. Cabinet shall be of double wall, insulated design. The cabinet exterior shall be
constructed of painted 20 gauge or heavier G90 galvanized steel, or unpainted
Type 5052 marine grade aluminum using 12 gauge panels & 8 gauge structural
members, or unpainted Type 304 stainless steel using 18 gauge panels & 14 gauge
structuratl members. The interior shall be Type 5052 aluminum or Type 304 stainless of
similar gauge to the cabinet exterior. The cabinet shall be weatherproof and suitable for
outdoor construction and the entire floor shall be designed to operate as a drain pan so
SECTION 23 74 33 (15733) - DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS Page 4
that in the event that rain would enter the cabinet, it will drain via the condensate drain
connection. Insulation shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASHRAE Standard
90.1-2004, and shall be non-wicking and moisture resistant. The insulation must not be
capable of supporting any biological growth of any kind. All insulation shall have a smoke
and fire rating of 5-5 and shall be rated Class A. The insulation shall have a VOC content
of zero (0).
3. Paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2500 hours, with no visible corrosive
effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance wit h ASTM B117-
95 test procedure.
4. Unit shall have insulated, hinged access doors with quarter turn handles and full
perimeter gasketed seals. Door fastening screws are not acceptable.
5. Unit shall be factory pre-rigged for a 4-point crane lift.
6. All openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least 1/2”
in height around the opening through the base pan.
7. Unit shall have a factory-installed cleanable, insulated, double-sloped condensate drain
connection of aluminum or stainless steel.
8. Outdoor and exhaust air openings shall have a hood or louver with bird screen.
Construction and color shall match cabinet.
9. Dampers:
a. Motor operated outside air damper assembly constructed of extruded aluminum,
hollow core, airfoil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper
blades shall be gear driven and design ed to have no more than 15 CFM of leakage
per sq. ft. of damper area when subjected to 2” w.g. air pressure differential across
the damper. [Damper motor shall be spring return to ensure closing of outdoor air
damper during periods of unit shut down or pow er failure. Damper shall be furnished
with a 2-position actuator.]
b. Gravity type backdraft damper at the exhaust discharge.
10. All evaporator, condenser and water coils shall be cleanable. All coils shall be a
maximum of 4 rows thick, 10 fins per inch and include a minimum of a 4 inch clean-out
access between coils. The floor below the coil shall be suitable for drainage of the
cleaning solution. All coils must be coated in order to reduce corrosion from
contaminants from outside air and moisture and increas e watershed capability. The
coating shall be a thermal set acrylic having an ASTM B117 salt test rating that exceeds
1000 hours. Coatings shall be hydrophobic to aid in draining water from the coil .
Interlaced coils shall NOT be acceptable. Units with coils that have more than 10 fins per
inch or that have lanced fins are NOT acceptable.
11. Color coded wiring diagrams shall be laminated in plastic and permanently affixed inside
the control compartment.
12. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate unit lifting and rigging, service areas and
caution areas.
13. Unit nameplates shall be fixed to the main control panel door.
C. Roof Curb:
1. Roof curb shall be constructed of similar metal as the cabinet construction. Curbs are to
be factory welded construction providing full perimeter support, cross structure support
and air seal for the unit.
D. Supply and Exhaust Fans:
1. Plenum supply fan shall be backward inclined, belt driven, non-overloading, and
designed for high efficiency operation at higher static pressures with lower noise levels.
Blowers shall be constructed of epoxy-coated steel for corrosion resistance. The
SECTION 23 74 33 (15733) - DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS Page 5
assembly shall include a backward inclined fan wheel, housing, solid steel fan shaft,
encased ball bearings, fan pulley and adjustable motor sheaves. Mount fan and motor
assembly on adjustable base for proper belt tensioning.
2. Exhaust fan shall be backward inclined, belt driven, non-overloading, and designed for
high efficiency operation at higher static pressures with lower noi se levels. Blowers shall
be constructed of epoxy-coated steel for corrosion resistance. The assembly shall
include a backward inclined fan wheel, housing, solid steel fan shaft, encased ball
bearings, fan pulley and adjustable motor sheaves. Mount fan and motor assembly on
adjustable base for proper belt tensioning.
3. Fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
4. The fan assembly shall be Blower and motor base is to be mounted on 4 spring and
rubber isolators having minimum 3/4-inch deflection. Blower to be isolated from the
cabinet with a flexible connector having a 25-50 fire rating.
5. Variable Frequency Drives on belt-driven fans shall allow independent balancing of
supply and exhaust airflows.
6. Fan shaft bearings shall be heavy duty, permanently lu bricated, self-aligning ball or roller
pillow block type. Bearings shall have a minimum life (L -10) of 80,000 hours at maximum
operating speed and horsepower for each construction level.
E. Air-Cooled Condenser:
1. The condensing section shall be equipped with vertical discharge, propeller type, direct
drive fans with corrosion-resistant blades and supports. Direct drive fans shall be directly
connected to and supported by the motor shaft. Fans shall be statically and dynamically
balanced.
2. Condenser coils shall have enhanced surface aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded
to the copper tubes with all joints brazed.
F. Refrigerant System:
1. Unit shall be factory charged with R-410A refrigerant.
2. Compressors:
a. Fully hermetic, scroll type compressors with crankcase heater, overload protection
and short cycle protection with minimum on and off timers.
b. Compressors shall be mounted on the compressor manufacturer’s recommended
rubber vibration isolators and shall be isolated from the base pan and supply air to
avoid transmission of noise from the compressor into the building. Vibrasorb
isolators shall be installed in both the suction and discharge tubing of each
compressor.
c. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated compartment to permit operation of
the unit without affecting air flow when the door to the compartment is open.
d. Each compressor shall be individually stage d for capacity control. Units exceeding
2,000 cfm shall have a minimum of 3 independent refrigeration circuits that have no
shared components. Each circuit must be able to operate at any time without the
assistance of aid of any component of the other circuits with the exception of the
controls and blower. Any or all components of any single circuit must be
constructed in such a way as to be removable with disturbing or disrupting or
contaminating any of the other circuits. Each compressor shall be dedicated to an
individual evaporator coil, TXV and condenser coil and operate independently.
Tandem compressors shall NOT be acceptable. Minimum 2-stage capacity control
on units over 10 tons and above.
3. Refrigerant System Specialties for each circuit:
a. Refrigerant dryer.
SECTION 23 74 33 (15733) - DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS Page 6
b. Adjustable thermostatic expansion valve.
c. High and low pressure switches.
d. Gage connection ports.
e. Liquid line sight glass.
f. Service/charging valves.
4. Reheat Coil: Hot gas reheat coil with modulating hot gas reheat control valves piped to
both refrigerant circuits.
5. Reheat Coil: Hot gas reheat coil with 0-100% modulating hot gas reheat control valves
piped to all reheat refrigerant circuits.
6. Capacity Control:
a. Multiple compressor design and Variable Speed Digital Scroll compressor design
shall provide 0-100% capacity control for continuous dehumidification upon demand.
Energy wasting hot gas bypass refrigerant control shall NOT be acceptable.
b. Unit shall be equipped with variable speed low ambient head pressure control to
allow operation down to 35 F.
7. Evaporator coil shall have minimum corrosion potential from dissimilar metals. Coil
casing shall be either copper, aluminum, stainless steel. Galvanized steel coil casings
shall NOT be acceptable
8. Evaporator coil shall be furnished with a double sloped drain pan fabricated of Type 5052
aluminum, or Type 304 stainless steel for the positive drainage of condensate.
G. Filter Section:
1. Both outdoor and exhaust air steams shall have 4” thick pleated, high efficiency filters
with a minimum MERV-13 rating.
H. Filter Section:
1. Both outdoor and exhaust air steams shall have 2” thick fiberglass filters with a minimum
MERV-7 rating.
I. Energy Recovery Wheel:
1. Wheel shall be of the enthalpy type for both sensible and latent recovery; moisture
transfer shall occur entirely in the vapor phase. Wheel shall be constructed of alternate
layers of corrugated and flat aluminum. Enthalpy wheels shall be permanently bonded
with "Micro-Sieve" a desiccant adsorbent specifically developed for the selective transfer
of moisture for equal transfer of sensible and latent energy. The air channels shall be
formed smooth to ensure laminar airflow for low-pressure drops and allow free passage
of particles up to 900 microns. Rotor structure shall be internally reinforced and mounted
on pillow block type bearings. The rotor shall also be removable from the frame. Brush
seals shall be provided around the periphery of the rotor and between the inlet and out let
air passages to effectively prevent air leakage and cross contamination between airflows.
An adjustable purging sector shall be installed to prevent carryover of contaminated
exhaust air into the supply air stream. Performance and cross contamination s hall be
documented through an independent laboratory conducted in accordance with ASHRAE
84-1991 and ARI standards.
2. Factory provided integral DDC automatic temperature control that shall include remote
temperature sensors mounted in each of the four airstreams to monitor exchanger
performance. The control shall modulate rotor speed to prevent frost build -up. A rotor
bypass section shall be incorporated into the cabinet design to bypass the rotor when
conditions are beneficial for overall energy savings.
J. Winter Heating Mode - Indirect-Fired Gas Heating:
SECTION 23 74 33 (15733) - DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS Page 7
1. Gas heating shall be induced-draft combustion type with an energy saving direct spark
ignition system and redundant main gas valves.
2. Heat exchanger shall be tubular section type, constructed of 20 gauge stainless steel.
3. Burners shall be in-shot type constructed of stainless steel and have sufficient staging as
to provide the supply air temperature within 2 degrees (F) of the DOAS supply air
setpoint, even at startup, regardless of the entering air temperature . As the supply air
volume modulates to meet ventilation demands, the supply air temperature shall not rise
above or below the set point temperature, +/- 2 degrees (F).
4. Gas shall enter the unit at a single location.
K. Winter Heating Mode – Heat Pump:
1. The unit shall be designed to provide temperature neutral air to the space and not impact
sensible heating or cooling loads. Terminal units within the space shall provide heating &
cooling as needed.
2. The unit shall provide the supply air temperature within 2 degrees (F) of the DOAS supply
air setpoint, even at startup, regardless of the entering air temperature. As the supply air
volume modulates to meet ventilation demands, the supply air temperature shall not rise
above or below the set point temperature, +/- 2 degrees (F).
3. Supplemental electric or indirect gas-fired heat must NOT be required to deliver the
supply air at room neutral temperature conditions. Redundant electric or indirect gas -
fired heat may be designed into the unit.
L. Controls:
1. Dedicated Outdoor-Air Unit Controller:
a. The unit shall include a factory installed microprocessor based unit controller which
controls the operation of all unit functions including: dampers, supply and exhaust
fans, energy recovery wheel, refrigerant system and gas heater.
b. Controller shall be capable of the monitoring the following functions, safeties and
alarms.
1) Factory-installed dirty filter status for both supply and exhaust filter banks.
2) Factory-installed fan status switch for both supply and exhaust fans.
3) Energy wheel defrost control and air bypass.
c. Controller shall be BACNet, Modbus and LonWorks protocol compatible.
d. Shall include and alarm indicator and audible alarm signal.
2. Fan current transducer.
3. Supply air temperature sensor.
4. Outside air temperature sensor.
5. Relative humidity sensor.
M. Fire Alarm System Interface:
1. Provide dry contact control interface to connect to fire alarm panel, so that unit shuts
down in the event the fire alarm system goes into alarm.
N. Airflow Monitoring/Control & Building Pressure Control:
1. Provide building pressure differential sensor and controls to maintain building pressure at
a user adjustable setting (initially set at 0.05” w.g.). The building pressure sensor is to be
accurate to within 0.02” w.g. and is to be self-calibrating. Upon a rise in building
pressure, the unit controls are to slow down the supply air fan (through the variable
speed drive). The opposite is to happen on a drop in building pressure.
SECTION 23 74 33 (15733) - DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS Page 8
O. Electrical:
1. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and wired main disconnec t switch. Integral
branch fusing shall be accomplished through the use of resettable circuit breakers.
Replaceable fuses are NOT acceptable.
2. Unit shall be provided with phase and brown-out protection to shut down all motors in the
unit if the phases are more than 10% out of balance on voltage, or the voltage is more
than 10% under design voltage or on phase reversal. In the event that a poor power
condition is detected, the power monitoring feature will instantaneously shut the unit
down and isolate the microprocessor controller from the incoming power supply. The
Power Monitor feature shall record and save a minimum of 10 fault conditions in the fault
history log. The Power Monitor feature shall automatically restart the unit after power has
returned within acceptable parameters for a preset period of time.
3. Unit shall be provided with a factory installed and wired 115 volt, 12 amp ground fault
service receptacle powered by a 1.5 KVA transformer. The convenient outlet shall be fed
by an independent power supply.
2.03 MOTORS
A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment" for general
requirements for factory-installed motors.
B. Motor Construction: NEMA MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design B.
C. Enclosure Type: Open, dripproof.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roof for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting installation and
performance of rooftop units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install units level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's recommended clearances.
C. Curb Support: Install roof curbs in such manner as maintain roof bond. Provide roof op ening,
flashing, counter-flashing, sealant, roof insulation and structural framing members. Install and
secure rooftop units on curbs.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific
connection requirements:
1. Install piping to allow service and maintenance.
2. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 22 Section "Natural Gas
Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union
and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.
B. Duct installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
the general arrangement of ducts.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND COMMISSIONING
A. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.
B. Complete commissioning pre-functional testing and functional testing as part of the following.
C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checks and perform the following:
SECTION 23 74 33 (15733) - DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS Page 9
1. Level unit on curb, and flash curbs to unit and to roof.
2. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing.
3. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing.
4. Check that labels are clearly visible.
5. Verify that controls are connected and operable.
6. Remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
7. Verify that filters are installed.
8. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris.
9. Connect and purge gas line.
10. Adjust vibration isolators.
11. Inspect operation of barometric dampers.
12. Check operation of mixing dampers.
D. Lubricate bearings on fan.
E. Check fan-wheel rotation for correct direction without vibration and binding.
F. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension.
G. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
H. Check and record performance of interlocks and protection devices; verify sequences.
I. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer.
J. Check internal isolators.
K. Check outside-air damper for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers.
L. Check controls for correct sequencing of heating, cooling, mixing dampers, and normal and
emergency shutdown.
M. Perform the following operations for both minimum and maximum firing and adjust burner for
peak efficiency. Adjust pilot to stable flame.
1. Measure gas pressure on manifold.
2. Measure combustion-air temperature at inlet to combustion chamber.
3. Measure flue-gas temperature at furnace discharge.
4. Perform flue-gas analysis. Measure and record flue-gas carbon dioxide and oxygen
concentration.
5. Measure supply-air temperature and volume when burner is at maximum firing rate and
when burner is off. Calculate useful heat to supply air.
N. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following:
1. Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
2. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures.
3. Outside-air, dry-bulb temperature.
4. Outside-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.
O. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan
curve.
1. Supply-air volume.
2. Return-air volume.
SECTION 23 74 33 (15733) - DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNITS Page 10
3. Relief-air volume.
4. Outside-air intake volume.
P. After starting and performance testing, change filters, vacuum heat exchanger and coils,
lubricate bearings, and adjust belt tension.
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel.
1. Conduct training as specified in Section 01 79 00 "Training”.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup
and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
3. Review data in the maintenance manuals.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 81 13.13 (15735) - PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS Page 1
SECTION 23 81 13.13 (15735) - PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units (PTAC)
2. Controls
B. Related Sections:
Section 01 81 13 - Sustainable Design Requirements
1. Section 07 92 00 (07920) - Joint Sealants
Section 23 08 00 – Commissioning of HVAC
2. Section 23 09 00 (15900) - HVAC Instrumentation and Controls
3. Section 25 51 10 – Integrated Automation Control of Guestroom Equipment
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) Publications:
1. 2604 “Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High
Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusion and Panels”
B. Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) Publications:
1. 270 “Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment”
2. 310/380 "Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioners and Heat Pumps"
3. 390 “Performance Rating of Single Package Vertical Air-Conditioners and Heat Pumps”
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:
1. ANSI/NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code”
D. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating a nd Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Publications:
1. 15 “Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems”
2. 90.1 “Energy Code for Commercial and High-Rise Residential Buildings”
E. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards:
1. 486A “Standard For Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper
Conductors”
2. 486B “Standard for Wire Connectors for Use With Aluminum Conductors”
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1. Product Data:
a. Include rated capacities, weights, furnished specialties, and accessories for each
model indicated.
2. Shop Drawings: Detail layout and installation of wall penetrations.
SECTION 23 81 13.13 (15735) - PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS Page 2
a. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Section 01 78 23 (01830), “Operation and Maintenance Data.”
4. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
5. Provide Miami-Dade County Product Control Approval Notice of Acceptance if required
by AHJ.
C. LEED Submittals:
Prerequisite EAp2: Minimum Energy Performance
a. Product Data indicating compliance with all applicable requirements in ANSI/
ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2004, Section 6 – Heating, Ventilating and Air
Conditioning.
Prerequisite EAp3: Fundamental Refrigerant Management
b. Product Data indicating refrigerant compliance.
Credit EAc1: Optimize Energy Performance
c. Product Data indicating compliance with efficiency requirements in Advanced
Buildings Core Performance Guide Criteria 2.9 – Mechanical Equipment Efficiency
Requirements
Prerequisite EQp1: Minimum IAQ Performance
d. Product Data indicating compliance with all applicable requirements in ANSI/
ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 62.1-2004, Section 5 – "Systems and Equipment."
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
B. Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
C. Coefficient of Performance: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy
Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that
are listed and labeled by UL and cUL.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the ANSI/NFPA 70, “National Electrical
Code, Article 100.
2. Unit shall be rated in accordance with AHRI Standard 390 and certified by UL or ETL.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of units and wall construction where unit penetrates wall or
is supported by it.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of
other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall
be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Con tractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: A written warranty, executed by the manufacturer and signed by the
Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written instructions for installation,
operation, and maintenance have been followed.
SECTION 23 81 13.13 (15735) - PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS Page 3
1. Full Warranty: After date of substantial completion and start-up, the manufacturer will
repair or replace any parts which are defective in material or workmanship.
a. Warranty Period
1) Friedrich: Two years
2) LG: One year
3) GE: One year
4) Islandaire: One year
2. Sealed Refrigeration System: Manufacturers standard extended warranty, but not less
than four years after date of Substantial Completion.
a. Provide free of charge, on-site repair or replacement of the compressor, condenser,
evaporator or connecting tubing if defective in material or workmanship. This shall
include system refrigeration charge.
3. Non-Sealed Refrigeration System: Manufacturers standard extended warranty, but not
less than five years after date of Substantial Completion.
a. Provide free of charge, on-site repair or replacement of any non-sealed system part
(motor, solenoid, thermistor, thermostat, relays, switch, capacitor, overload, drain
valve, bulb heater, fan, stator) if defective in material or workmanship. The
replacement part may be new or a remanufactured part. The limited warranty
excludes labor including the cost of diagnostics, removal, and reinstallation
necessary to accomplish the repair.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. LG Electronics (866-543-7822)
2. General Electric Company (800-770-4651)
3. Amana
4. Premaire
2.02 PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (PTAC)
A. Description: Packaged, self-contained, through-the-wall terminal units with room cabinet,
electric refrigeration system, heating, and temperature controls; fully charged with refrigerant.
B. PTACs must have a minimum efficiency of 11.3 EER.
C. Cabinet: Provide removable front panel with concealed latches.
1. Mounting: Wall with wall sleeve.
2. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard color.
3. Control Knobs: If provided, shall be secured so that they can not be easily removed (anti-
theft knobs).
4. Discharge Grille and Access Door: Provide discharge grille with hinged door in top of
cabinet for easy access to controls. Hinged door not required if unit has unit or wall
mounted digital controls.
5. Subbase: Enameled steel with adjustable leveling feet and adjustable end plates.
6. Wall Sleeves: Insulated, Galvanized steel.
7. Exterior Grille / Louvers: Extruded architectural aluminum or polymer construction.
a. Factory applied baked enamel finish.
SECTION 23 81 13.13 (15735) - PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS Page 4
b. Two-coat 50% PVDF factory applied finish in accordance with AAMA 2604, dry film
thickness 1.2 mil.
c. Color: Refer to Exterior Finish Index.
d. Comply with the requirements of the Florida Building Code for wind pressure and
infiltration. Provide Miami-Dade County Product Control Approval Notice of
Acceptance. Units without this approval will not be acceptable.
D. Refrigeration System: Direct-expansion indoor coil with capillary restrictor, hermetically
sealed compressor with internal spring isolation, external isolation, permanent-split-capacitor
motor, and overload protection. Charge with R-410A. Include the following:
1. Outdoor coil and fan.
2. Accumulator.
E. Preventative Maintenance: Split outdoor fan shroud for easy access to outdoor coil for
cleaning and maintenance.
F. Air System: Forward or back ward curved, centrifugal, indoor fans with two speed TEFC
permanently lubricated permanent-split-capacitor motor, permanent one or two-piece
interchangeable polyurethane washable filters, return air indoor filters and outdoor vent filter
with concealed operation located under the front panel to manually open and close the
outdoor vent.
1. Curtain Deflector: Manufacturers standard curtain deflector to insure the curtains will not
blow into the discharge air stream.
G. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Nickel-chromium wire, electric-resistance heating elements
with contactor and high-temperature-limit switch.
H. Condensate Drain: Slinger Technology used to pick up/disperse condensate to outdoor coil
for re-evaporation. In addition, provide auxiliary condensate drain kits for connection to piped
condensate drain system to a code approved location..
I. Outdoor Fan: Propeller type with corrosion resistant finish.
J. Coils: Aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes with all joints
brazed.
K. Electrical Requirements: 230/208 volt, pre-wired UL approved length power cord with one
NEMA 6 (208/230 VAC) plug to use with wall receptacle.
L. Corrosion Protection: Provide the following accessories.
1. Painted control box and unit partitions.
2. Pre-coated aluminum coils with copper tubing.
3. Stainless steel tube sheets for outdoor coil.
4. Totally enclosed fan motor with moisture-resistant windings.
M. Insulated Wall Sleeve:
1. Provide polymer wall sleeve with factory installed insulation.
2.03 CONTROLS
A. Control Module:
1. Unit Mounted Controls: Unit-mounted adjustable thermostat, off-heat-cool mode switch,
and fan cycle/continuous switch.
2. Wall Thermostat Controls: Wall thermostat interface with user selectable hi/low fan speed
switch.
SECTION 23 81 13.13 (15735) - PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS Page 5
B. Low Ambient Lockout Control: Prevents cooling cycle operation below 55 deg F ambient
outdoor temperature.
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Factory test to comply with AHRI 270, "Sound Rating of Outdoor
Unitary Equipment."
B. Unit Performance Ratings: Factory test to comply with AHRI 310/380, "Packaged Terminal
Air-Conditioners and Heat Pumps."
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Coordinate installation of wall sleeves in finished wall assembly; seal and weatherproof.
C. Install accessory Molding trim kit to hide any imperfections in wall around wall sleeve.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Electrical: Connect units to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and instructed by
manufacturer.
B. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicate d, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.03 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including
chips, scratches, and abrasions.
3.04 COMMISSIONING
A. After installation, check the following:
1. Unit is level on base and is flashed in exterior wall.
2. Unit casing has no visible damage.
3. Compressor, air-cooled condenser coil, and fans have no visible damage.
4. Set outdoor air vent damper to “open” position.
5. Condenser are clean and free of construction debris.
6. Controls are connected and operable, cycle unit through hi/lo fan and heat/cool
operation.
7. Shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps are removed.
8. Return air and outdoor vent air filters are installed and clean.
9. Drain pan and slinger ring are functioning properly.
10. Effectively disable the temperature limiter stops.
B. Check fan-wheel rotation (evaporator and condenser) for correct direction without vibration
and binding.
C. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Complete manufacturer's startup checks.
D. After starting and performance test, clean filters.
SECTION 23 81 13.13 (15735) - PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR-CONDITIONING UNITS Page 6
3.05 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel.
1. Conduct training as specified in Section 01 79 00 "Training”.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures for starting and stopping
troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 81 26 (15738) - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS Page 1
SECTION 23 81 26 (15738) - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS
GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Split-System Air-Conditioning Units 5 Tons and Less
2. Split-System Air-Conditioning Units 6 Tons and More
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 23 05 00 (15050) – Common Work Results for HVAC
2. Section 23 05 13 (15090) – Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment
3. Section 23 05 53 (15075) – Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment
4. Section 23 05 93 (15950) – Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
5. Division 23 23 00 (15183) – Refrigerant Piping
6. Division 26 (16) Sections for electrical connections.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)
Publications:
1. 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration”
2. 62.1 “Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality (ANSI Approved)”
3. 90.1 “Energy Code for Commercial and High-Rise Residential Buildings”
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
1. 70 "National Electric Code"
C. New Buildings Institute (NBI) Publications:
1. “Core Performance Guide”
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1. Product Data: Include rated capacities, weights, furnished specialties, and accessories
for each model indicated.
2. Shop Drawings: Detail layout and installation of wall penetrations.
a. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and
differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. Maintenance Data: For equipment to include in the maintenance manuals.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. AHRI Certification: Units and their components shall be factory tested according to the
applicable portions of AHRI 1060, "Performance of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy
Recovery Ventilation Equipment," and AHRI 410, "Forced Circulation Air-Cooling and Air-
Heating Coils," and shall be listed and bear the label of the Air-Conditioning, Heating and
Refrigeration Institute (AHRI)."
SECTION 23 81 26 (15738) - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS Page 2
B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide motors required as part of air-handling units that are
listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable NEMA standards.
C. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that
are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the NFPA National Electrical Code,
Article 100.
E. Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 62.1-2004, Section 7 – "Construction and Startup."
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver units as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering.
B. Coordinate delivery of units in sufficient time to allow movement into building.
C. Handle roof mounted units to comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation
instructions for unloading and moving to final location.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of units and wall or ceiling construction, where unit
penetrates wall or ceiling, or is supported by it.
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described in Section 01 78 43 (01790) “Spare Parts and Materials”
that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with labels describing contents.
1.08 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant all equipment for a period of one (1) year
from date of substantial completion. Extended warranty specified in this Article shall not
deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract
Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Extended Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
components of rooftop air conditioners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Extended Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than
five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PRODUCTS
1.09 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. "Model GAM/TTR"; "Model TWE/TTA"; Trane, an Ingersoll Rand Brand; (608-787-4810)
2. "Model NC/ND", York, a Johnson Controls Company; (877-874-7378)
3. “Model 40RUA/38"; Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Division, United Technologies
Corporation (800-827-7435 x 3496)
4. "Model PKA/PUZ","Model PKA/PUY", "Model PEAD/PUZ", Mitsubishi (608-630-4371)
5. "Model VVCA","Model VMDA", "Model VWMA" Lennox (512-750-6101)
SECTION 23 81 26 (15738) - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS Page 3
1.10 INDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)
A. Concealed Evaporator-Fan Components:
1. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and
insulation on back of panel.
2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-
expansion valve. Comply with ARI 210/240.
4. Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than
0.1 inch; leak tested to 300 psig underwater; with a two-position control valve.
5. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory
ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors,
manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box
for overcurrent protection.
6. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to
motor.
7. Fan Motors:
a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type,
and efficiency requirements specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.
c. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
8. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
9. Filters: Permanent, cleanable.
10. Condensate Drain Pans:
a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from
cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and
humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.
1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with
ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
2) Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.
b. Double-wall, stainless-steel sheet with space between walls filled with foam
insulation and moisture-tight seal.
c. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow.
Terminate with threaded nipple on both ends of pan.
1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1.
d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.
e. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate
from top coil.
1.11 INDOOR UNITS (6 TONS OR MORE)
A. Concealed Evaporator-Fan Components:
1. Chassis: Galvanized steel with flanged edges, removable panels for servicing, and
insulation on back of panel.
2. Insulation: Faced, glass-fiber duct liner.
SECTION 23 81 26 (15738) - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS Page 4
3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and thermal-
expansion valve. Comply with ARI 210/240.
4. Water Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than
0.1 inch; leak tested to 300 psig underwater; with a two-position control valve.
5. Electric Coil: Helical, nickel-chrome, resistance-wire heating elements; with refractory
ceramic support bushings, automatic-reset thermal cutout, built-in magnetic contactors,
manual-reset thermal cutout, airflow proving device, and one-time fuses in terminal box
for overcurrent protection.
6. Fan: Forward-curved, double-width wheel of galvanized steel; directly connected to
motor.
7. Fan Motors:
a. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type,
and efficiency requirements specified in Section 23 05 13 "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
b. Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.
c. Three-phase, permanently lubricated, ball-bearing motors with built-in thermal-
overload protection.
d. Wiring Terminations: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
8. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
9. Filters: 2 inch thick, in fiberboard frames.
10. Condensate Drain Pans:
a. Fabricated with one percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from
cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bends) and
humidifiers, and to direct water toward drain connection.
1) Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with
ASHRAE 62.1-2004.
2) Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.
b. Double-wall, stainless-steel sheet with space between walls filled with foam
insulation and moisture-tight seal.
c. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow.
Terminate with threaded nipple on both ends of pan.
1) Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1.
d. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.
e. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate
from top coil.
1.12 OUTDOOR UNITS (5 TONS OR LESS)
A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:
1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by [Architect][Owner’s
Representative], with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water
drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage
ports on exterior of casing.
2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration
isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload
devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
SECTION 23 81 26 (15738) - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS Page 5
a. Compressor Type: Scroll.
b. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and
automatic-reset low-pressure switch.
c. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A.
d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid
subcooler. Comply with ARI 210/240.
3. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
4. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
5. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F.
6. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
1.13 OUTDOOR UNITS (6 TONS OR MORE)
A. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:
1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel in color selected by [Architect][Owner’s
Representative], with removable panels for access to controls, weep holes for water
drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage
ports on exterior of casing.
2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed with crankcase heater and mounted on vibration
isolation device. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload
devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor.
a. Compressor Type: Scroll.
b. Two-speed compressor motor with manual-reset high-pressure switch and
automatic-reset low-pressure switch.
c. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A.
d. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins and liquid
subcooler. Comply with ARI 210/240.
3. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor.
4. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection.
5. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F.
6. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.
1.14 ACCESSORIES
A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Section 23 09 00
"Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC" and Section 23 09 93 "Sequence Of Operations For
HVAC Controls."
B. Thermostat: Low voltage with subbase to control compressor and evaporator fan.
C. Automatic-reset timer to prevent rapid cycling of compressor.
D. Refrigerant Line Kits: Soft-annealed copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried,
pressurized, and sealed; factory-insulated suction line with flared fittings at both ends.
E. Drain Hose: For condensate.
F. Additional Monitoring:
1. Monitor constant and variable motor loads.
2. Monitor variable-frequency-drive operation.
3. Monitor economizer cycle.
SECTION 23 81 26 (15738) - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS Page 6
4. Monitor cooling load.
5. Monitor air distribution static pressure and ventilation air volumes.
EXECUTION
1.15 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roof for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting installation and
performance of roof mounted units. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
1.16 INSTALLATION
A. Install units level and plumb.
B. Install evaporator-fan components using manufacturer's standard mounting devices securely
fastened to building structure.
C. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch- thick, reinforced
concrete base that is 4 inches larger, on each side, than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and
formwork are specified in Section 03 30 00 "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Coordinate anchor
installation with concrete base.
D. Install roof-mounted, compressor-condenser components on prefabricated equipment
supports. Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium -plated fasteners.
E. Install and connect refrigerant tubing to component's quick -connect fittings. Install tubing to
allow access to unit.
1.17 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
1. Water Coil Connections: Comply with requirements specified other Division 23 Sections.
Connect hydronic piping to supply and return coil connections with shutoff -duty valve and
union or flange on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or
flange on the return connection.
B. Where piping is installed adjacent to unit, allow space for service and maintenance of unit.
C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct
Accessories”. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return
ducts to split-system air-conditioning units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct
connectors are specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories."
1.18 CLEANING
A. Remove dirt, and construction debris, and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches,
and abrasions.
1.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND COMMISSIONING
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installati ons, including connections, and
to assist in testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
SECTION 23 81 26 (15738) - SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR-CONDITIONERS Page 7
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls
and equipment.
D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
F. Complete commissioning pre-functional testing and functional testing as part of this work.
G. After starting and performance test, change filters.
1.20 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.21 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel.
1. Conduct training as specified in Section 01 79 00 "Training”.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup
and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.
3. Review data in the maintenance manuals.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 82 39 (15767) - UNIT HEATERS Page 1
SECTION 23 82 39 (15767) - UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Unit Heaters.
2. Cabinet Unit Heaters.
3. Duct Heaters.
4. Baseboard Heaters.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 81 13 - Sustainable Design Requirements
2. Section 23 05 00 (15050) – Common Work Results for HVAC
3. Section 23 08 00 – Commissioning of HVAC
4. Division 26 (16) Sections for electrical connections.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
1. 70 "National Electric Code"
2. 90A “Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”
B. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards:
1. 486A “Standard For Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper
Conductors”
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1. Product data for each type of product specified.
2. Wiring diagrams detailing power and control wiring and differentiating clearly between
manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.
3. Samples of cabinet finish colors for approval.
4. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of Owner’s Representatives and
owners, and other information specified.
5. Field test reports from a qualified independent inspecting and testing agency indicating
and interpreting test results relative to compliance with performance requirements of unit
heaters.
C. LEED Submittals:
1. Prerequisite EQp1: Minimum IAQ Performance
a. Product Data indicating compliance with all applicable requirements in ANSI/
ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 62.1-2004, Section 5 – "Systems and Equipment."
SECTION 23 82 39 (15767) - UNIT HEATERS Page 2
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing unit heaters similar to those
indicated for this Project and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article
100.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Indeeco (800-243-8162)
2. Emerson Electric Co. (314-553-2000)
3. QMark, Marley Engineered Products, An SPX Company (843-479-4006)
4. Markel Products Company (800-682-3398)
5. REDD-I
2.02 ELECTRICAL UNIT HEATERS
A. Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium heating wire element; free from expansion noise and 60-
Hz hum; embedded in magnesium oxide, insu lating refractory; and sealed in high-mass steel
or corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch. Element ends are
enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature does not exceed 550 deg F at any point
during normal operation.
B. Heater Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for overcurrent protection and limit
controls for overtemperature protection of heaters.
C. Fan and Motor: Direct-drive propeller fan and manufacturer's standard motor. Motors sized 1
hp and less include motor overload protection.
D. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.
E. Discharge Configuration: Horizontal discharge with horizontal, adjustable louvers.
F. Optional Accessories: Include the following:
1. Wall thermostat.
2. Safety-switch disconnect on cover of terminal box.
3. Mercury contactors.
4. Fan-delay relay.
2.03 ELECTRICAL CABINET UNIT HEATERS
A. Description:
1. Surface-mounted cabinet with front grille air inlet and front air outlet.
2. Surface-mounted cabinet with front grille air inlet and top air outlet.
3. Surface-mounted cabinet with bottom air inlet and front air outlet.
4. Surface-mounted cabinet with bottom air inlet and top air outlet.
5. Semi-recessed, wall-mounted cabinet with front grille air inlet and front air outlet.
6. Semi-recessed, ceiling-mounted cabinet.
SECTION 23 82 39 (15767) - UNIT HEATERS Page 3
B. Heating Elements: Nickel-chromium heating wire element; free from expansion noise and 60-
Hz hum; embedded in magnesium oxide, insulating refractory; and sealed in high -mass steel
or corrosion-resistant metallic sheath with fins no closer than 0.16 inch (4 mm). Element ends
are enclosed in terminal box. Fin surface temperature does not exceed 550 deg F (288 deg
C) at any point during normal operation.
C. Heater Circuit Protection: One-time fuses in terminal box for over-current protection and limit
controls for over-temperature protection of heaters.
D. Fan and Motor: Centrifugal blower, direct driven by a single-phase, 2-speed electric motor
with inherent overload protection and resilient motor/fan mount.
E. Wiring Terminations: Match conductor materials and sizes indicated.
F. Unit Controls: Thermostat, fan-speed switch, fan ON-AUTOMATIC switch, interval timer, and
outside air-damper control switch.
G. Optional Accessories: Include the following:
1. Integral thermostat.
2. Disconnect switch.
3. Mercury contactor.
4. Fan-delay relay.
5. Kickplate base for floor-mounted units.
H. Finish cabinet with manufacturer's standard enamel, color as selected by Owner’s
Representative.
2.04 ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS:
A. General: Provide electric wall heaters with architectural styling f or exposed or recessed
application.
B. Heater Assembly: The heater assembly which fits into the back box shall consist of a fan
panel upon which is mounted all of the operational parts of the heater.
C. Heating Element: The heating elements shall be of the non-glowing design consisting of a
special resistance wire enclosed in a steel sheath to which steel plate fins are copper brazed.
It shall be warranted for 5 years.
D. Fan and Motor: Fan shall be five bladed aluminum. Fan motor shall be totally enclosed.
E. Fan Delay Switch: Fan control shall be of bi-metallic, snap-action type and shall activate fan
after heating element reaches operating temperature. The fan shall continue to operate after
the thermostat is satisfied and until the heating element is cool.
F. Thermostat: The tamper-proof thermostat shall be of the bimetallic snap-action type with
enclosed contacts. It shall be completely concealed and reactive behind the front cover to
become tamper proof.
G. Thermal Cutout: A thermal cutout shall be built into the system to automatically shut off the
heater in the event of overheating and reactivate the heater when temperatures return to
normal.
H. Disconnect Switch: A double-pole, single throw disconnect switch shall be mounted on the
back box for positive disconnect of power supply. It will be completely concealed behind the
front grid panel.
I. Back Box: The back box shall be designed for duty as a recessed rough -in box in either
masonry or frame installations, and is also used with the surface mounting box in surf ace
mounted installations. The back box shall be 20 gage cold-rolled steel and shall contain
knockouts through which power leads are brought.
SECTION 23 82 39 (15767) - UNIT HEATERS Page 4
J. Front Panel: The front panel shall be of the bar grille type and shall be constructed of 16 gage
cold-rolled steel, welded into a uniform grille to direct the warmed air toward the floor. The
front grille shall be surrounded by a decorative satin-finish aluminum “picture” frame.
K. Three Piece Design: The heater shall be made up of a back box, a heater assembly and a
front panel.
2.05 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS
A. Furnish electric duct heaters of the size, capacity, and mounting style indicated on plans.
Heaters shall be UL listed for zero clearance and shall meet all applicable requirements of the
National Electrical Code.
B. Elements: Construct of 80% nickel and 20% chromium; steps shall be arranged to prevent
stratification when operating at less than full capacity.
C. Coil Terminals: Stainless steel, terminal insulators, and bracket bushings sha ll be constructed
of ceramic and securely positioned. Terminals shall be machine crimped to coil.
D. Frame: Construct of heavy gauge galvanized steel to assure structural rigidity and vertical
galvanized steel supports with stiffening ribs and gussets.
E. Terminal Box: Provide with solid cover and hinge if built-in fuses or interlocking disconnect
switches are provided. Heater terminal box must be totally enclosed. Provide access panel
on both sides of heater.
F. Controls: Include automatic reset thermal cutout, differential pressure air flow switch, and fan
interlock relays. All safety devices shall be serviceable through the terminal box without
removing the heating coil from the duct. Provide multiple stages of control as indicated on the
drawings.
G. Wiring: Power circuits shall have single point termination to built-in disconnect switch. Each
sub-circuit shall be fused per N.E.C. and a fuse control circuit transformer shall be provided.
2.06 ELECTRIC BASEBOARD HEATERS
A. Electric baseboard heaters shall be commercial grade having capacity as indicated.
B. Heating elements shall have aluminum fins bonded to steel sheathed electric heating
elements.
C. Heater enclosures shall have baked enamel finish and bar-type grilles.
D. Heater shall have integral thermostat.
E. Heater shall be UL listed and shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code.
F. Baseboard heater shall be color as selected by Owner’s Representative or prime painted
ready for final field painters to match adjacent surface.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and supports to receive unit heaters for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of units. Do not proceed
with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install heaters as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NFPA 90A.
B. Connect heaters and components to wiring systems and to ground as indicated and instr ucted
by manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, according to
equipment manufacturer's published torque-tightening values for equipment connectors.
Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals
according to tightening requirements specified in UL 486A.
SECTION 23 82 39 (15767) - UNIT HEATERS Page 5
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: After installing unit heaters and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new units and retest.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Replace filters in each cabinet unit heater at project closeout.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 25 51 10 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF GUESTROOM EQUIPMENT Page 1
SECTION 25 51 10 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF GUESTROOM
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide a complete, integrated hotel guestroom automation system for the following:
a. Master Light Switch
b. HVAC Equipment.
1) Motion Sensor Thermostats
c. Central Interface (CI) Server Application.
d. Remote Room Monitoring and Communications.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
2. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware
3. Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC
4. Section 23 81 13.13 - Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioning Units
5. Section 23 81 13.15 - Vertical Packaged Terminal Air-Conditioning Units
6. Section 23 81 46 - Water-Source (Water-Source Closed Loop) Unitary Heat Pumps
7. Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating, And Air Conditioning (HVAC).
8. Division 26 – Electrical; Power Wiring to System Hardware
9. Division 27 – Communications
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1. Product Data: Submit the Manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for
each component and system.
2. Shop Drawings: Submit list of components and equipment to be supplied, including
proposed locations, clearances, and power requirements.
3. Operations and Maintenance Manual: Submit the Manufacturer’s standard operations
and maintenance manual, including emergency maintenance provider.
4. Qualifications: Submit documentation from the Manufacturer and Installer indicating
qualifications listed under Quality Assurance.
5. Warranty: Submit the Manufacturer’s standard one-year labor and parts warranty for
turnkey installation.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Manufacturer: The Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 20 years
documented experience manufacturing integrated room automation systems having similar or
more stringent requirements than the system for the current project. The Manufacturer shall
submit a list of at least 15 completed projects using similar integrated room automation
systems.
SECTION 25 51 10 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF GUESTROOM EQUIPMENT Page 2
B. Qualifications of Installer: Submit a letter signed by the Manufacturer stating that the Installer
is licensed by or acceptable to the Manufacturer of the integrated room automation system.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials and products in unopened, factory-labeled packages. Store and handle in
strict compliance with the Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Protect from
damage. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Conference: Convene a pre-installation conference to establish procedures to coordinate this
work with related and adjacent work.
B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchors that must be built into other work. Work closely with
installers of finish materials so that units are properly aligned with adjacent materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURER
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. TELKONET
2. INNCOM International, Inc. (860-739-4468)
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Master Light Switch:
1. System Description:
a. The switch by the entry door shall be able to act as a master light switch to turn off
all designated light fixtures and switched outlets when activated by the guest.
1) The total load cannot exceed 500 watts at 120 VAC.
b. All wired lighting circuits shall be fed through the master light switch relay contacts.
c. The single-button switch shall be programmed for a toggle function, meaning that
each press of the button would toggle the internal relay and supply or cut power to
the connected circuits.
d. The button would be labeled as “Master Off” to indicate to the guest its intended use.
Programming it as a toggle assures that the guest can turn the lights back on should
they unintentionally turn them off. A blue LED indicator light is turned off when
switch is off.
e. The Magnetic Door Switch provides a trigger input to the master light switch. Upon
entry to the room, if the master light switch relay is off, the door switch shall trigger it
to the “on” state, automatically supplying power to all connected lighting switches in
the room. If the master light switch is already on, then no change of state is to
occur.
f. Upon exiting the master light switch provides a method for the guest to press a
single button to turn off power to all connected lighting circuits. If the guest does not
press the switch, the connected loads shall remain on.
2. Master Light Switch:
a. Acceptable Product: “S-Series Switch Model #S217”; INNCOM International, Inc.
b. 1-Button Switch shall be labeled “MASTER OFF”.
c. Relay Version, 120Vac, 500 Watt maximum load.
SECTION 25 51 10 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF GUESTROOM EQUIPMENT Page 3
d. Color: as noted in drawings
3. Magnetic Door Switch:
a. Acceptable Product: “Magnetic Door Switch Model #S241”; INNCOM International,
Inc.
b. Coordinate with Section 08 71 00 “Door Hardware” for installation of Magnetic Door
Switch.
B. HVAC Controls:
1. HVAC Type: The control strategy will be dependent on the type of HVAC equipment that
is being proposed. The control equipment shall be compatible with the HVAC equipment
with 4 relay control specified for Project.
a. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioners (PTAC): The System shall control one PTAC in
each room. The System shall directly control a 1 or 2-speed, low-voltage interface.
The System will also control the compressor and associated heating equipment.
INNCOM International, Inc. shall provide the PTAC Vendor with the necessary
control card or connectors to be installed at point of manufacture or in the rooms. In
case of existing PTAC’s, the same equipment can be installed in-place by trained
personnel. The System shall provide automatic switchover from heating to cooling
operation at each room.
b. Vertical Terminal Air Conditioners (VTAC): The System shall control one VTAC in
each room. The System shall directly control a 1 or 2-speed, low-voltage interface.
The System will also control the compressor and associated heating equipment.
INNCOM International, Inc. will provide the VTAC Vendor with the necessary card or
connectors to be installed at point of manufacture or in the rooms. In case of existing
VTAC’s, the same equipment can be installed in place by trained personnel. The
System shall provide automatic switchover from heating to cooling operation at each
room.
c. Water Source Heat Pumps (WSHP): The System shall control one WSHP in each
room. The System shall directly control a 1 or 2-speed, low-voltage interface. The
System will also control the compressor and associated heating equipment.
INNCOM International, Inc. shall provide the WSHP Vendor with the necessary
control card or connectors to be installed at point of manufacture or in the rooms. In
case of existing WSHP’s, the same equipment can be installed in-place by trained
personnel. The System shall provide automatic switchover from heating to cooling
operation at each room.
2. HVAC Control Strategies: Provision shall be made to prevent the system from switching
repeatedly from cooling to heating and back while attempting to maintain a constant
target temperature. The System’s temperature-control performance shall meet the
requirements defined below for proportional valves. The System’s humidity-refresh
performance shall meet the requirements defined below.
a. Temperature Control: The System in the room shall employ a PID algorithm to
minimize fan speed and valve changes and to reduce servo-loop error. Such error,
measured as the temperature difference between the set target temperature and the
measured room temperature, shall not exceed 1.0o C under steady-state conditions
and will automatically compensate for changes in the heat/cooling load of the room.
The temperature control algorithm shall be capable of using the full resources of the
FCU to maintain target temperature. Proportional-only algorithms that set the fan
speed in proportion to the error shall not be accepted (as they cause a temperature
control error that increases with the fan speed).
b. Humidity Refresh: The System in the room shall be capable of maintaining a
maximum level of humidity. The refresh cycle will activate in unoccupied rooms only.
SECTION 25 51 10 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF GUESTROOM EQUIPMENT Page 4
1) Humidity Refresh Cycle: The room air conditioning shall be activated on a pre-
defined duty cycle to remove excess humidity. The System shall monitor, via
central sensors or individual room sensors, the air temperature and relative
humidity. When the relative humidity exceeds a preset threshold, the room AC
shall be activated if the AC has been shut down for a period of time that
exceeds a programmable time value (for example, if the AC has not run for the
last one hour).
c. Fan Speed Control: Fan speed shall be selected automatically by the System to
match the heat gain/loss in the room. Fixed-fan operation shall also be available to
the guest. Fan speeds shall be field-programmable to allow limiting fan speeds to a
desired range of speeds. Fan operation shall be configurable to provide for
“Continuous Fan” or “Automatic Fan.” Continuous Fan means that the fan shall run
even when the target temperature has been satisfied. Automatic Fan means that the
fan shall run only on active heating or cooling call.
d. Multiple HVAC Zone Rooms (Suites): The System shall be capable of supporting
multi-zone rooms, where the rooms are not separated by a door, yet each room has
multiple HVAC units. The System shall be able to link the thermostats in these
rooms so that they track. This prevents having one room call for heat while the other
is calling for cooling.
e. Temperature History: The System shall have the capability to store the temperature,
valve, and fan states for each room for at least three months, with all changes being
reported.
f. Energy Conservation:
1) The System shall provide optimized energy conservation measures with
minimum inconvenience to the guest. At least four setback strategies shall be
employed: two when a room is un-rented (either occupied by staff or
unoccupied), and two more when a room is rented (either occupied or
unoccupied).
2) When connected to a Central Network Server, the System shall obtain rented
status automatically from the Property Management System (PMS). No manual
data entry shall be required by the hotel to update the room rented status.
3) The System shall determine room occupancy automatically. The System shall
keep the room status as occupied even while the guest is asleep.
4) Setback values and related parameters shall be independently adjustable for
rented and un-rented modes.
5) Reduced on/off switching during the night or “night setback” shall be available
for implementation by choice of the property as a means to further reduce
energy consumption while the guest is asleep.
g. Digital Thermostat: The unit shall be modular in construction so that each of the
modules can be added at a later time if not installed initially.
1) Acceptable Product: “e4 Smart Digital Thermostat Model #e528 with Integral
Passive Infrared (PIR) Motion Sensor”; INNCOM International, Inc.
2) The System shall include a wall-mounted, illuminated digital thermostat. The
thermostat will be able to display current room temperature, target temperature,
and outside temperature in degrees F and degrees C, as well as the humidity
level.
3) The thermostat shall be easy to operate, and shall allow changing the target
temperature in steps of 1 degree F or 0.5 degree C. Clear indication shall be
provided when the HVAC has been turned off.
SECTION 25 51 10 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF GUESTROOM EQUIPMENT Page 5
4) The thermostat shall have the capacity to work with a built-in Passive Infrared
(PIR) motion sensor OR a remote Passive Infrared (PIR) motion sensor OR
combinations of both.
5) The thermostat shall be capable of directly controlling HVAC units operating on
voltages ranging from 12VDC to 277VAC without the requirement of secondary
control relays for the higher voltage applications. The thermostat shall also be
available in a battery operated version to facilitate installation where the
provision of power may not be practical.
6) The thermostat shall be connectable to the System via a 2-conductor, low-
voltage cable. The thermostat shall also have the capability of connecting to
the HVAC equipment wirelessly via RF signals.
7) The thermostat shall be capable of controlling HVAC units wirelessly using RF
(Zigbee) technology.
8) The thermostat shall include the ecoMODE® green button that the guest can
use to opt-in to the property’s sustainability practices.
h. Digital Thermostat: The unit shall be modular in construction so that each of the
modules can be added at a later time if not installed initially.
1) Acceptable Product: “e4 Smart Digital Thermostat Model #e529 with Integral
Passive Infrared (PIR) Motion Sensor”; INNCOM International, Inc.
2) The System shall include a wall-mounted, illuminated digital thermostat. The
thermostat will be able to display current room temperature, target temperature,
and outside temperature in degrees F and degrees C, as well as the humidity
level.
3) The thermostat shall be easy to operate, and shall allow changing the target
temperature in steps of 1 degree F or 0.5 degree C. Clear indication shall be
provided when the HVAC has been turned off.
4) The thermostat shall have the capacity to work with a built-in Passive Infrared
(PIR) motion sensor OR a remote Passive Infrared (PIR) motion sensor OR
combinations of both.
5) The thermostat shall be capable of controlling HVAC units operating on
voltages ranging from 12VDC to 277VAC with the pairing of secondary control
relays. The thermostat shall be battery operated to facilitate installation where
the provision of power may not be practical.
6) The thermostat shall have the capability of connecting to the HVAC equipment
wirelessly via RF signals.
7) The thermostat shall be capable of controlling HVAC units wirelessly using RF
technology.
8) The thermostat shall include the ecoMODE® green button that the guest can
use to opt-in to the property’s sustainability practices.
3. Occupancy Detection: The System shall combine inputs from the door-position switch
and from a PIR motion detector to determine whether the room is occupied at any time.
Activation of any switch on the digital thermostat or any light switch that is controlled by
the System while the entry door is closed shall place the room in the occupied mode.
a. The current occupancy state of the room shall be available to the room controller
that controls the room HVAC system as well as to a server and its workstations.
C. Central Interface (CI) Server Application:
1. Each guestroom system or sub-system will communicate in real time with a central server
running INNcontrol-II application software. The software shall provide a comprehensive
SECTION 25 51 10 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF GUESTROOM EQUIPMENT Page 6
list of room status information and alarms, and shall also interface among the rooms and
other systems in the hotel.
a. PMS Interface: The software shall interface with the PMS computer through a serial
link or TCP/IP. The PMS will provide the INNcontrol-II software with current sale
status of the guestrooms (rented/un-rented and check-in/checkout). This information
shall be transferred from the INNcontrol-II software to the room within five seconds,
and will be used to determine the operation of the HVAC, lights, and other loads in
the room. The INNcontrol-II server shall also be linked and interfaced with the EDL
server.
b. Management Display: The INNcontrol-II application, or terminals connected to the
INNcontrol-II server, shall provide access to management to view and control such
parameters as room temperature, room target temperature, HVAC operation, light
control, and other conditions and statuses. In general, the INNcontrol-II application
shall provide access to any function of the room control system that is available to
the guest in the room. The System shall be capable of interfacing with the Hotel
Ethernet System via an RS 485 or TCP/IP interface.
c. Remote Access/Diagnostics: The application shall provide full support of a remote
terminal connected via modem or TCP/IP, or via a serial link to the server. The
server software architecture shall be of a client/server structure. The remote
terminals shall be PCs operating under MS Windows 2000 or later. The application
shall be capable of running complete diagnostics of the System from a remote
service center via dial-up phone lines or TCP/IP.
d. Alarm Outputs: The application software shall be programmable to route alarm
conditions to a printer, paging system, file, hard disk, third-party interface, or the
PMS.
e. The user shall have the option of not logging on, which will allow View (read-only)
use of the software, or logging on, which will allow Control functions based on the
logon identification.
f. The software shall open to a pre-determined default language. It shall also be
possible to choose another language available from the list.
g. In the software, the first screen that appears when INNcontrol-II is opened is the
‘Quick View’ screen. Each guestroom selected for Quick View display shall be
represented by a block on the screen. The block shall be numbered to correspond to
the actual room number. By right-clicking on a room block, the user shall be able to
access the menus and sub-menus that will display selected information for that
room. The resulting menu shall allow the display of butler calls, MUR calls, valet
requests, pick up tray requests, DND indications, SOS indications, and possibly one
or two other requests if desired by the property – for example, cab request.
h. All service requests shall be displayed at once on the Quick View screen. The color
coding shall allow easy recognition of each type of call.
i. The software shall allow for the display of guest preferences including
kosher/Sabbath rooms or eco-Mode rooms.
1) Kosher/Sabbath rooms are set up such that all automatic functions that would
be triggered by guests are suspended and the HVAC does not respond to
occupancy information.
2) eco-Mode rooms are activated when the guest presses the Green Button on
the thermostat or eco-Mode programmed switches, thus enrolling in the
property’s environmental sustainability programs.
j. The software shall offer a Dynamic Suite Linking option and it shall display rooms
that are linked as suites. The linked rooms shall be color-coded, and the type of link
(common door or connecting door) shall be shown displayed in the room blocks.
SECTION 25 51 10 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF GUESTROOM EQUIPMENT Page 7
k. The software shall be able to display as a minimum the following room conditions:
1) Rented – Shows which rooms are currently rented.
2) Occupancy – Shows which rooms are currently occupied, either by guests or
staff.
3) Rented + Occupancy – Shows which rooms are rented and occupied.
4) Clean Status – Shows which rooms have been cleaned and which need
cleaning. This option also shows “supervisor required” and “out-of-order.”
5) Dirty Rooms – Shows which rooms need cleaning. The color coding will
indicate the rented and occupancy status for these rooms.
6) Supervisor Visit Requested – Shows which rooms have been cleaned and are
ready for review by a supervisor.
7) Out of Order – Shows which rooms are out of order for any reason (such as
equipment needing repair).
8) Measured Room Temperature – Shows the temperature of each room on the
block grid.
9) Target Room Temperature – Shows the desired room temperature for each
room on the block grid.
10) AC Mode – Shows the operational status of the air conditioning system for all
rooms on the block grid.
11) Measured, Target and AC Mode – Shows all the above on the block grid.
12) Measured Humidity – Shows the humidity for each room on the block grid.
13) HVAC Equipment Operation – Shows heating, cooling, and fan operation for
each room on the block grid.
14) Second Stage Operation – Shows forced, ready, active, and normal status for
each room on the block grid.
15) Peak Demand/Load Shedding/Fire – Shows high, medium, low, and normal for
peak demand/load shedding, and shows HVAC response to fire.
16) VIP/Reduced Energy Management – Indicates room thermostat is not being
controlled by the system.
17) De-Humidification – Shows all rooms on the block grid that are being
dehumidified.
18) De-Icing – Shows all rooms on the block grid that are being de-iced.
19) HVAC Trouble – Shows all rooms on the block grid with active HVAC alarms.
20) Equipment Type – Shows the HVAC equipment type for all rooms on the block
grid.
l. The software shall display diagnostic information for guestroom devices.
m. The software shall have Navigation Tree Displays. The rows of icons allow the user
to display property views in the navigation area below the icon bars by clicking on
the icon. A room can be selected from the Navigation Tree for display of its statuses.
In the Floor View and Network View displays, a plus (+) or minus (-) sign will appear
before each room. A plus sign indicates that more information can be displayed by
clicking on the plus sign.
n. The default icon in the navigation area shall be the Floor View, which shall display a
list of hotel floors. Double clicking on a floor shall display a list of rooms on the floor.
SECTION 25 51 10 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF GUESTROOM EQUIPMENT Page 8
o. The software shall have a Network View icon to display the guestrooms organized
according to their network connectivity status.
p. The software shall be able to display a graph of the HVAC trend for each room. The
display shall show the room’s temperature band as a yellow block. The HVAC trend
line shall be color-keyed: black (the HVAC is not currently heating or cooling), red
(the HVAC is heating), or blue (the HVAC is cooling).
q. The software shall be able to generate reports that show outstanding guest requests
at the time of report generation. The report shall be able to be generated in a
printable notepad format with the time of day of the report generation shown at the
top of the report. The report can be saved and/or printed, making it convenient for
staff to carry as a reminder of outstanding requests.
r. The software shall allow staff to “take ownership” of guest requests. By taking
ownership, the staff member commits to performing the request or ensuring that it is
performed. Once ownership is taken, the room shall be re-listed along with the name
of the person who has taken ownership. This allows anyone on a terminal anywhere
in the property to see who has taken responsibility for a guest request.
s. The software shall allow Hotel staff to designate a room needing cleaning or as
being out of order. Once the room has been cleaned, staff can report that it has
been cleaned and request review by a supervisor. The software indicates that a
hotel maid has seen that the room needs to be cleaned.
D. Room Communications, Monitoring and Control:
1. Throughput: The INNcontrol-II application server and the network that links it to the
rooms shall be able to handle a minimum of five transactions per second per 500 rooms.
A transaction is defined as the sending of a command or data to a room from the
INNcontrol-II server and the receipt of acknowledgment of the proper execution of such
command back at the INNcontrol-II server. The System and its network shall guarantee a
response within five seconds when accessing any room component remotely. Such
response shall not be conditional on any other activities that take place at that time
anywhere else in the System.
2. Network Integrity: The communication in the System shall comply with ISO/OSI
standards. The network shall be secure from insertion of commands from external
stations. Errors in communications shall be detected and corrected automatically. The
addition and removal of stations shall be captured and reported as an alarm by the
INNcontrol-II server.
a. Networking Capabilities: The System shall be capable of communicating from the
INNcontrol-II server to the guestroom devices using a single shielded or unshielded
twisted pair of wires, Cat3 or better.
b. Networking Capabilities: The System shall be capable of communicating from the
INNcontrol-II server to the guestroom devices using a dedicated hybrid RS-
485/Ethernet network or a shared Ethernet network, running on Cat 6 or fiber.
E. Field Programmability:
1. Parameter Changes: All room-related parameters, such as target temperature upon
check-in, setback temperatures, and the like, shall reside in non-volatile memory in each
room and shall be available for programming from the INNcontrol-II server as well as the
in-room thermostat. The server shall be able to access rooms on an individual basis, in
groups, or in total (i.e., the entire property at one time).
2. Program Changes: The application program residing in the room controller shall be
modifiable through the INNcontrol-II server computer without the need to visit the room.
The program stored in each room shall not be affected by the temporary loss of power,
regardless of the duration of the power outage.
SECTION 25 51 10 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION CONTROL OF GUESTROOM EQUIPMENT Page 9
3. Power Fail Recovery: After a power outage, the System throughout the hotel shall start
up automatically and will be fully operational within five minutes after restoration of
power. In the rooms, all loads controlled by the System will be returned to their previous
states, including target temperature, selected fan speed operation, and lights, regardless
of the duration of the power outage.
4. Noise Restriction: All system components shall be installed in such a manner as to
eliminate audible noise to the guest when the System operates while the guest is asleep.
5. Code Compliance: Components installed by the Vendor and wiring/installation performed
by the Vendor shall comply with the applicable standards and electrical codes.
F. Wiring: All field wiring to the System shall be made through plug-in connectors to facilitate
service and diagnostics. The Vendor shall provide as-run wiring diagrams for room wiring and
network wiring.
PART 2 EXECUTION
2.01 INSTALLATION
A. There shall be strict compliance with the Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
The onset of work shall indicate that the Installer accepts the existing substrates and
conditions. System installation shall be coordinated with related and adjacent work.
B. The system shall be tested for proper operation in accordance with the Manufacturer’s
commissioning guide. Damaged components shall be repaired or replaced until the proper
operation is achieved.
2.02 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
as specified below:
1. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting up and
shutting down, troubleshooting, servicing, and maintaining cooling towers.
2. Review data in maintenance manuals.
3. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect Owner’s Representative, with at least
seven days' advance notice.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 05 00 (16050) – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Page 1
SECTION 26 05 00 (16050) COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Supporting Devices for Electrical Components.
2. Electricity- Metering Components.
3. Concrete Equipment Bases.
4. Electrical Demolition.
5. Cutting and Patching For Electrical Construction.
6. Touchup Painting.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03 30 00 (03300) - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 07 84 00 (07840) - Fire stopping.
3. Section 09 90 00 (09900) - Painting.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
1. Product Data: For electricity-metering equipment.
2. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electricity-
metering equipment.
3. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. All work to be in accordance with latest requirements of the NEC and all other applicable
codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over the work.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and
arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical
installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural
components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in
the building.
C. Coordinate electrical service connections to com ponents furnished by utility companies.
SECTION 26 05 00 (16050) – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Page 2
1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and
services, including provision for electricity-metering components.
2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company
providing electrical power and other services.
D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by
finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section 08 31 00
(08310) - "Access Doors."
E. Coordinate all work with Division 15. Electrical Contractor shall provide all wiring and final
connection to all line voltage thermostats. Thermostat provided and installed by Division 15.
F. All electrical drawings are to be read in conjunction with the project specifications and all other
related contract drawings.
G. The contractor shall examine the site and observe the conditions under which the work will be
done or other circumstances which will affect the contemplated work. No allowance will be
made subsequently in the connection for any error or negligence on the contractor’s part.
H. The contractor shall verify exact location, size and extent of all existing utilities, obstructions
and/or other conditions which may affect the proposed work under the project. The contractor
shall take every precaution to prevent damage to existing work and shall repair any damage
as a result of this work.
I. The contractor shall verify all door swings in the field and mount switches on knob side of
doors or as approved by the engineer.
J. The contractor shall carefully examine all contract drawings/specifications and be responsible
for the proper fittings of materials and equipment at each location as indicated without
substantial alteration. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and because of the small
scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which
may be required. Furnishing such fittings that are required to meet such conditions shall be
furnished and installed at no cost.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch diameter
slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c. in webs.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded
C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or
click-type hangers.
E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have
number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body
constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
SECTION 26 05 00 (16050) – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Page 3
2.02 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING
A. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.
B. Meter Sockets: Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company.
C. Modular Meter Centers: Factory-coordinated assembly of a main meter center circuit-breaker
unit with wire ways, tenant meter socket modules, and tenant branch circuit breakers arranged
in adjacent vertical sections, complete with interconnecting buses.
1. Housing: NEMA 250, [Type 1] [Type 3R] enclosure.
2.03 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Section 03 30 00 (03300) -
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2.04 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other
installations.
D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
E. Coordinate work with other trades and install conduit and boxes to clear embedded ducts,
openings, etc. and all structural features.
F. Unless otherwise noted, mounting heights, as shown, are from finished floor to top of panel
board and to centerline of other equipment. Coordinate all mounting heights with contract
drawings, local code requirements, and all A.D.A. requirements.
1. Toggle (snap) switch: 4’-0”.
2. Enclosed circuit breaker: 5’-0”
3. Disconnect (safety) switch: 5’-0”.
4. Motor starter: 5’-0”.
5. Panel board: 6’-6”.
3.02 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A. Damp Locations, [Pool Equipment Rooms], Storage Rooms and Outdoors: Hot-dip
galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components.
B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.
D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at
least four; minimum of 200-lb design load.
SECTION 26 05 00 (16050) – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Page 4
3.03 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide
U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for
securing hanger rods and conduits.
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.
D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent
minimum in the future.
E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.
F. Install 1/4-inch- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be
used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting
and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted
channel and angle supports.
H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is
carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
J. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support.
Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar
hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the
raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.
K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panel boards; disconnect switches, control
enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are
mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-
drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-
rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during
erection of concrete and masonry walls.
M. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise
indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are
indicated:
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.
2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry
units.
3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
5. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
6. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe
straps, or other items.
7. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
8. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its
proof-test load.
SECTION 26 05 00 (16050) – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Page 5
3.04 UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT
A. Install equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding and
empty conduits as required by utility company.
3.05 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply fire stopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to
achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Fire stopping materials and installation
requirements are specified in Section 07 84 00 (07840) “Fire stopping."
3.06 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger, in both
directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage
recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise
indicated. Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Section 03 30 00 (03300) "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.07 DEMOLITION
A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or
disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of
equal capacity, quality, and functionality.
B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be
demolished, in their entirety.
C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in
place, 2 inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface
to match existing finish.
D. Remove demolished material from Project site.
E. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for
relocation.
3.08 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to
permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent
undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing fire stopping has been disturbed.
Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
1. Supporting devices for electrical components.
2. Electricity-metering components.
3. Concrete bases.
4. Electrical demolition.
5. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
6. Touchup painting.
3.10 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in
Section 09 90 00 (09900) - "Painting."
SECTION 26 05 00 (16050) – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL Page 6
3.11 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes,
and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 05 19 (16120) - LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 1
SECTION 26 05 19 (16120) - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and
terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
B. Related Documents:
1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 84 00 (07840) - Fire stopping
2. Section 26 05 00 (16050) – Common Work Results for Electrical
3. Section 26 05 53 (16075) – Identification for the Electrical Systems
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in Project with the following supporting data:
1. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide wires and cables specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver wires and cables according to NEMA WC 26.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations.
B. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated, as required to suit field conditions and
as approved by Owner representative.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Wires and Cables:
a. American Insulated Wire Corp.; Leviton Manufacturing Co. (800-366-2492)
b. Carol Cable Co., Inc. (401-728-7000)
c. Southwire Company (800-444-1700)
d. Alcan Cable Division of Alcan Aluminum Corporation (770-392-2368)
2. Connectors for Wires and Cables:
SECTION 26 05 19 (16120) - LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 2
a. AMP Incorporated (800-522-6752)
b. General Signal; O-Z/Gedney Unit (203-584-0571)
c. Square D Co.; a Division of Groupe Schneider (888-778-2733)
d. Alcan Cable Division of Alcan Aluminum Corporation (770-392-2368)
2.02 BUILDING WIRES AND CABLES
A. UL-listed building wires and cables with conductor material, insulation type, cable
construction, and rating as specified in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article.
B. Rubber Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
C. Thermoplastic Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
D. Cross-Linked Polyethylene Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
E. Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulation Material: Comply with NEMA WC 70.
F. Conductor Material: Copper
1. Feeders 100 ampere or greater may be aluminum "Alcan Stabiloy #8000", or approved
substitution by listed manufacturers.
G. Stranding: Solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded conductor for larger than
No. 10 AWG.
H. Multiconductor Cable: Metal-clad cable, Type MCI.
2.03 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. UL-listed, factory-fabricated wiring connectors of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and
class for application and service indicated. Comply with Project's installation requirements
and as specified in Part 3 "Wire and Insulation Applications" Article.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine raceways and building finishes to receive wires and cables for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wires
and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 WIRE AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS
A. Service Entrance: Type RHW or THWN, in raceway.
B. Horizontal Feeders: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
C. Vertical Feeders: Type THHN/THWW in raceway or type MC cable.
D. Fire-Pump Feeder: Type MI, 3-conductor.
E. Horizontal Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
F. Vertical Branch Circuits: Type THNN/THWW in raceway or Type MC Cable
G. Fire Alarm Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
H. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
I. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN/THWN, in raceway.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and
NECA's "Standard of Installation."
SECTION 26 05 19 (16120) - LOW- VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Page 3
B. Pull Conductors: Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where
necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that
will not damage cables or raceway.
D. Install exposed cables, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members,
and follow surface contours where possible.
E. Support cables according to Section 26 05 00 - "Common Work Results for Electrical."
F. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Section 07 84 00 (07840)
"Fire stopping."
G. Identify wires and cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.04 CONNECTIONS
A. Conductor Splices: Keep to minimum.
B. Install splices and tapes that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation
ratings than conductors being spliced.
C. Use splice and tap connectors compatible with conductor material.
D. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap connector for aluminum conductors.
E. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack.
F. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by
manufacturer.
G. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: On installation of wires and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Correct malfunctioning conductors and cables at Project site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 05 26 (16060) - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1
SECTION 26 05 26 (16060) GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Grounding of Electrical Systems and Equipment.
a. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special
requirements of systems described in other Sections.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 05 19 (16120) – Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
2. Section 26 41 13 (13100) - Lightning Protection for Structures: For additional grounding
and bonding materials.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in Project with the following supporting data:
1. Product Data: For the following:
a. Ground rods.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
1. Comply with UL 467.
B. Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground
construction, comply with IEEE C2.
C. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:
a. Chance/Hubbell (573-682-5521)
b. Copperweld Corp. (931-433-7177)
c. Thomas & Betts, Electrical (800-816-7809)
2.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. For insulated conductors, comply with Section 26 05 19 - "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
B. Material: Aluminum, copper-clad aluminum, and copper.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
D. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On
feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to
provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.
E. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
F. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.
SECTION 26 05 26 (16060) - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2
G. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3.
2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33.
H. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:
1. Bonding Cable: 28kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in
diameter.
2. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.
3. Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
4. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
I. Ground Conductor and Conductor Protector for Wood Poles: As follows:
1. No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper conductor.
2. Conductor Protector: Half-round PVC or wood molding. If wood, use pressure-treated fir,
or cypress or cedar.
J. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators.
K. Equipment Ground Conductor (Green) shall be included with all circuit conductors. In addition,
provide a neutral conductor where applicable.
2.03 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and connected items.
B. Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's
written instructions.
2.04 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: copper-clad steel.
1. Size: 120” long by 3/4” in diameter.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION
A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact
with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone and similar materials.
B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground
connections, except those at test wells.
D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.
E. Ground Rod Clamps at Test Wells: Use bolted pressure clamps with at least two bolts.
F. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
1. Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch from wall and support from wall 6 inches above
finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.
SECTION 26 05 26 (16060) - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3
2. At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the doorway,
and down to the specified height above the floor.
3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding
conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70
are indicated.
B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits.
C. Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit
runs from computer-area power panels or power-distribution units.
D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor
connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway
and from panel board grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor
terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit
or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting
listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate
equipment grounding conductor. Isolate equipment grounding conductor from raceway and
from panel board grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal
of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways
unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.
G. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted
electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond
conductor to each unit and to air duct.
H. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring
closet, and central equipment location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus.
2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
I. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Provide a grounding electrode in addition
to installing a separate equipment grounding conductor with supply branch-circuit conductors.
J. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Bond electrical power system
ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical
service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding
electrode conductor, and install in conduit.
3.03 COUNTERPOISE
A. Ground the steel framework of the building with a driven ground rod at the base of every
corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m)
apart. Provide a grounding conductor (counterpoise), electrically connected to each ground
rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of the building. Use tinned-
copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for counterpoise and for tap to building steel.
Bury counterpoise not less than 18 inches below grade and 24 inches from building
foundation.
3.04 INSTALLATION
A. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and
located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes.
SECTION 26 05 26 (16060) - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 4
1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds,
except at test wells and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel
or damaging copper coating.
B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to
strain, impact, or damage.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation
hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-
welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required;
then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to
penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
D. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to
building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp
connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to
street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each
end.
E. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters.
Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.
F. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve.
G. Install one test well for each service at the ground rod electrically closest to the service
entrance. Set top of well flush with finished grade or floor.
3.05 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select
connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct
contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make
contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds
that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not
acceptable.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type
grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with
winged pressure-type connectors.
D. Non-contact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings
without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a
grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to
grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically non-continuous conduits at entrances
and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make
bolted- and clamped-type connections between conductors and ground rods.
F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A .
SECTION 26 05 26 (16060) - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 5
G. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic com pression tools to provide correct
circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by
connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a
visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
H. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or
grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of
insulation and cable.
3.06 OVERHEAD-LINE GROUNDING
A. Comply with IEEE C2 requirements. Use 2 or more parallel ground rods if a single ground rod
electrode resistance to ground exceeds 25 ohms.
B. Drive ground rods to a depth of 12 inches below finished grade in undisturbed earth.
C. Ground Rod Connections: Use clamp-type connectors listed for the purpose for underground
connections and connections to rods.
D. Lightning Arresters: Separate arrester grounds from other grounding conductors.
E. Secondary Neutral and Tank of Transformer: Interconnect and connect to grounding
conductor.
F. Protect grounding conductors running on surface of wood poles with molding extended from
grade level up to and through communication service and transformer spaces.
3.07 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING
A. Manholes and Hand holes: Install a driven ground rod close to wall and set rod depth so
4 inches will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is
placed and provide a No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into
manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through
concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive tape or heat-shrunk insulating
sleeve from 2 inches above to 6 inches below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof,
no shrink grout.
B. Connections to Manhole Components: Connect exposed-metal parts, such as inserts, cable
racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or hand hole, to ground
rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-
drawn copper conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to
manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer
of splicing and termination kits.
C. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and counterpoise circling
pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and non-current-carrying metal items associated with
substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Use tinned-
copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for counterpoise and for taps to equipment ground
pad. Bury counterpoise not less than 18 inches below grade and 6 inches from the
foundation.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at ground test
wells. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of
precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing
natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-potential method according to
IEEE 81.
SECTION 26 05 26 (16060) - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 6
3. Provide drawings locating each ground rod and ground rod assembly and other
grounding electrodes, identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record
of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each
location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test
results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.
a. Equipment rated 500kVA and less: 10 ohms.
b. Equipment rated 500 to 1000kVA: 5 ohms.
c. Equipment rated More Than 1000kVA: 3 ohms.
d. Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms.
e. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
4. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify
Owner representative promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground
resistance.
3.09 GRADING AND PLANTING
A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this Section.
Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been removed, replace it
as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas disturbed by trenching,
storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. Include application
of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch. Comply with Section 32 90 00 (02900) -
"Planting." Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 05 33 (16130) - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1
SECTION 26 05 33 (16130) RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Raceways include the following:
a. RMC
b. PVC, Schedule 40 or 80
c. EMT
d. FMC
e. LFMC
f. LFNC
g. RNC
h. WIREWAYS
i. SURFACE RASEWAYS
2. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets include the following:
a. Device boxes
b. Floor boxes
c. Outlet boxes
d. Pull and junction boxes
e. Cabinets and hinged-cover enclosures
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 84 00 (07840) - Fire stopping.
2. Section 26 05 00 (16050) - Common Work Results for Electrical: For raceways and box
supports.
3. Section 26 27 26 (16140) - Wiring Devices: For devices installed in boxes and for floor-
box service fittings.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. EMT : Electrical metallic tubing.
B. FMC : Flexible metal conduit.
C. IMC : Intermediate metal conduit.
D. LFMC : Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
E. LFNC : Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit.
F. RMC : Rigid metal conduit.
G. RNC : Rigid nonmetallic conduit.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
B. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data.
SECTION 26 05 33 (16130) - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2
1. Product Data: For surface raceways, Wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code".
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide raceways and boxes specified in this Section that are listed and
labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, "National Electric Code"
Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
3. Comply with NECA 111 “Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT,
LFNC) (ANSI)”
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways and boxes with other construction elements to
ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Metal Conduit and Tubing:
a. Anixter Brothers, Inc. (800-323-8166)
b. Carol Cable Co., Inc. (401-728-7000)
c. Wheatland Tube Co. (800-257-8128)
2. Flexible Conduit:
a. Carol Cable Co., Inc. (401-728-7000)
b. Electric-Flex Co. (800-323-6174)
3. Nonmetallic Conduit and Tubing:
a. Hubbell, Inc.; Raco, Inc. (800-722-6437)
b. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products (800-322-7566)
c. Thomas & Betts Corp. (800-816-7809)
4. Conduit Bodies and Fittings:
a. Emerson Electric Co.; Appleton Electric Co. (800-727-5102)
b. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. (314-531-0460)
c. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products (800-322-7566)
5. Metal Wireways:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co. (203-425-8900)
b. Keystone/Rees, Inc. (219-495-9811)
c. Square D Co.; a Division of Groupe Schneider (888-778-2733)
6. Nonmetallic Wireways:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co. (203-425-8900)
b. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products (800-322-7566)
SECTION 26 05 33 (16130) - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3
7. Surface Metal Raceways:
a. Airey-Thompson Co., Inc.; A-T Power Systems (800-421-6196)
b. Butler Manufacturing Co.; Walker Division (304-485-1611)
c. Wiremold Co. (The); Electrical Sales Division (800-621-0049)
8. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways:
a. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Device Division (203-882-4900)
b. Panduit Corp. (800-777-3300)
c. Wiremold Co. (The); Electrical Sales Division (800-621-0049)
9. Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets:
a. Hoffman Engineering Co.; Federal-Hoffman, Inc. (203-425-8900)
b. Hubbell Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. (314-531-0460)
c. Thomas & Betts Corp. (800-816-7809)
2.02 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.
C. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.
1. Fittings: Set-screw or compression type.
D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
F. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit/tubing materials.
2.03 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC.
B. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or conduit/tubing type and material.
C. LFNC: UL 1660.
2.04 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Material: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated.
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
C. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
D. Wireways Covers: As indicated
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.
2.05 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS
A. Description: PVC plastic extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on
cover and mechanically coupled connections using plastic fasteners.
B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with Wireways as required for
complete system.
SECTION 26 05 33 (16130) - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 4
C. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to
comply with NFPA 70.
2.06 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's
standard prime coating.
B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: 2-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound
with matte texture and manufacturer's standard color.
C. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that
match and mate with raceways.
2.07 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
2.08 FLOOR BOXES
A. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.
2.09 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Small Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
B. Cast-Metal Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
2.10 ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS
A. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.
B. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and
removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in
front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panel boards. Include
metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage, and include accessory feet
where required for freestanding equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance with
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway installation. Do
not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 WIRING METHODS
A. Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods:
1. Exposed: Rigid steel.
2. Concealed: Rigid steel.
3. Underground, Single Run: RNC.
4. Underground, Grouped: RNC.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4.
B. Indoors: Use the following wiring methods:
1. Exposed on ceilings and wall in Mechanical Equipment Rooms galvanized rigid steel
conduit.
SECTION 26 05 33 (16130) - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 5
2. Concealed in spaces above hung ceiling and wall: Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).
3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except in wet or damp locations,
use LFMC.
4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows:
a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel.
C. Underground or concrete encased:
1. Schedule 40 PVC.
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete.
C. Set floor boxes level and adjust to finished floor surface.
D. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
E. Size all conduits supplying motors and associated control equipment to include equipment
grounding conductor sized per NFPA 70 whether or not shown on the drawings or specified.
F. Unless otherwise noted, terminate all conduits stubbing up inside rooms or roof as follows:
1. Conduits for AC power: Stub up 6” above finished floor and provide concrete sill to
protect stub-ups.
2. On PVC conduit for AC power and control cable, provide PVC to galvanized steel rigid
conduit adaptor.
3. Plug or cap all conduits during construction or until permanent conductors are installed.
Taped ends will not be allowed.
G. In exposed conduit runs longer than 300 feet, expansion fittings shall be installed. Where
embedded conduit crosses a structural expansion joint, expansion and deflection fitting shall
be installed.
H. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.
I. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
3.04 INSTALLATION - RACEWAYS
A. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size (DN21).
B. Conceal conduit and EMT, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and
floors.
C. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water
pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
D. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Provide adequate headroom.
E. Support raceways as specified in Section 26 05 00 (16050) - "Basic Electrical Materials and
Methods."
F. Use temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
G. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved
portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab.
H. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and
straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
SECTION 26 05 33 (16130) - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 6
I. Use raceway fittings compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. For
intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.
J. Run concealed raceways, with a minimum of bends, in the shortest practical distance
considering the type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle third of slab thickness where practical, and
leave at least 1-inch concrete cover.
1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete
placement.
2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
3. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size (DN27) parallel to or at right angles to main
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcem ent, place conduit close to slab
support.
4. Transition from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit or rigid steel
conduit, before rising above floor.
L. Install exposed raceways parallel to or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural
members, and follow the surface contours as much as practical.
1. Run parallel or banked raceways together, on common supports where practical.
2. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel. Use
factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends
for parallel raceways.
M. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight.
1. Make raceway terminations tight. Use bonding bushings or wedges at connections
subject to vibration. Use bonding jumpers where joints cannot be made tight.
2. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.
N. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to
enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations are
not secure with 1 locknut, use 2 locknuts: 1 inside and 1 outside the box.
O. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into the
hub so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used,
align raceways so the coupling is square to the box and tighten the chase nipple so no threads
are exposed.
P. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or monofilament
plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each
end of the pull wire.
Q. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size (DN53) and Smaller: In addition
to the above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a
maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes
where necessary to comply with these requirements.
3.05 SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box
supplying the raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.
1. Select each surface raceway outlet box, to which a lighting fixture is attached, of
sufficient diameter to provide a seat for the fixture canopy.
2. Where a surface raceway is used to supply a fluorescent lighting fixture having central-
stem suspension with a back plate and a canopy (with or without extension ring), no
separate outlet box is required.
SECTION 26 05 33 (16130) - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 7
3. Provide surface metal raceway outlet box, and the back plate and canopy, at the feed-in
location of each fluorescent lighting fixture having end-stem suspension.
4. Where a surface metal raceway extension is made from an existing outlet box on which a
lighting fixture is installed, no additional surface-mounted outlet box is required. Provide
a back plate slightly smaller than the fixture canopy.
3.06 INSTALLATION - ACCESSORIES
A. Install raceway sealing fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings
at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound.
For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having
a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the
following points:
1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
B. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding
equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with
the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used
6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded flush plugs flush with floor for
future equipment connections.
C. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 6 feet of flexible conduit for recessed and semi
recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or
movement; and for all motors. Use Liquidtight flexible conduit in wet or damp locations.
Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
D. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that
material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at
the time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
3.08 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish, including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 05 53 (16075) - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 1
SECTION 26 05 53 (16075) IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Electrical identification materials and devices required to comply with ANSI C2, NFPA 70,
OSHA standards, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 05 19 (16120) - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
2. Section 26 05 33 (16130) - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
3. Section 26 24 00 (16440) - Switchboards and Panel Boards
4. Section 26 27 26 (16140) - Wiring Devices
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in project with the following supporting data:
1. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with ANSI C2.
B. Comply with NFPA 70 "National Electric Code”
C. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and NFPA 70 for color-coding.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Brady USA, Inc. (800-541-1686)
2. Panduit corp. (800-777-3300)
3. Seton Identification Products (800-571-2596)
2.02 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum
length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
1. Color: Black letters on orange field.
2. Legend: Indicates voltage
B. Pre-tensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic band
sized to suit the diameter of the line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pretension
gripping action when placed in position.
C. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches
wide.
D. Underground-Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape.
1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick.
2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed legend indicating type of underground line.
SECTION 26 05 53 (16075) - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 2
E. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers
and letters.
F. Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014-inch thick aluminum sheet, with
stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around
wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.
G. Plasticized Card-Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field-printed legends. Orange
background, unless otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener.
H. Aluminum-Faced, Card-Stock Tags: Weather-resistant, 18-point minimum card stock faced
on both sides with emboss able aluminum sheet, 0.002 inch thick, laminated with moisture-
resistant acrylic adhesive, punched for fasteners, and preprinted with legends to suit each
application.
2.03 NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS
A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.
B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate,
minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
C. Baked-Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for
fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch grommets in
corners for mounting.
D. Exterior, Metal-Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather-resistant, non fading, preprinted, cellulose-
acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and
size required for the application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
E. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32,
stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb minimum.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
4. Color: According to color-coding.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Identification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
B. Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate nam es, abbreviations, colors, and other
designations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with those
required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
C. Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install
identification after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.
E. Color Banding Raceways and Exposed Cables: Band exposed and accessible raceways of
the systems listed below:
SECTION 26 05 53 (16075) - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 3
1. Bands: Pre-tensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves; colored adhesive tape; or a
combination of both. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit,
and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.
2. Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot
maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
3. Apply the following colors to the systems listed below:
a. Fire Alarm System: Red
b. Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow
c. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue
d. Security System: Blue and yellow
e. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue
f. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow
F. Caution Labels for Indoor Boxes and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Install pressure-
sensitive, self-adhesive labels identifying system voltage with black letters on orange
background. Install on exterior of door or cover.
G. Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: Install labels externally.
1. Exposed Boxes: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive plastic label on cover.
2. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card-stock tags.
3. Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of panel and circuit number or equivalent.
H. Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling, for exterior underground
power, control, signal, and communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line
marker located directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Where width of
multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches
overall, use a single line marker. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct-buried
cables and cables in raceway.
I. Secondary Service, Feeder, and Branch-Circuit Conductors: Color-code throughout the
secondary electrical system.
1. Color-code 208/120-V system as follows:
a. Phase A : Black.
b. Phase B : Red.
c. Phase C : Blue.
d. Neutral : White.
e. Ground : Green.
2. Color-code 480/277-V system as follows:
a. Phase A : Yellow.
b. Phase B : Brown.
c. Phase C : Orange.
d. Neutral : White with a colored stripe or gray.
e. Ground : Green.
3. Factory apply color the entire length of conductors, except the following field-applied,
color-coding methods may be used instead of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than
No. 10 AWG:
SECTION 26 05 53 (16075) - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 4
a. Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6
inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last
two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch wide
tape in colors specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable identification
markings.
b. Colored cable ties applied in groups of three ties of specified color to each wire at
each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminal and spaced 3 inches
apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten to a snug fit, and cut off excess
length.
J. Power-Circuit Identification: Metal tags or aluminum, wraparound marker bands for cables,
feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard
rooms.
1. Legend: 1/4-inch steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend
corresponding to indicated circuit designations.
2. Tag Fasteners: Nylon cable ties.
3. Band Fasteners: Integral ears.
K. Apply identification to conductors as follows:
1. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers.
2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with
source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color-coding to identify circuits' voltage
and phase.
3. Multiple Control and Communication Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each
conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use a consistent system of tags, color-
coding, or cable marking tape.
L. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows:
1. Warnings, Cautions, and Instructions: Install to ensure safe operation and maintenance
of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-
laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for
system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
2. Emergency Operation: Install engraved laminated signs with white legend on red
background with minimum 3/8-inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power
transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.
M. Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate. Install on each unit of equipment,
including central or master unit of each system. This includes power, lighting, communication,
signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory
identification. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch high
lettering on 1-1/2-inch high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches
high. Use white lettering on black field. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories
of equipment using mechanical fasteners:
1. Panel boards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures
2. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items
3. Electrical switchgear and switchboards
4. Emergency system boxes and enclosures
5. Disconnect switches
6. Enclosed circuit breakers
7. Motor starters
SECTION 26 05 53 (16075) - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Page 5
8. Push-button stations
9. Power transfer equipment
10. Contactors
11. Remote-controlled switches
12. Dimmers
13. Control devices
14. Transformers
15. Telephone switching equipment
16. Fire alarm master station or control panel
17. Security-monitoring master station or control panel
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 09 24-LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK Page 1
SECTION 26 09 24 LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single space wireless lighting control systems and associated components:
1. Wireless occupancy/vacancy sensors.
2. Wireless daylight sensors.
3. Wired load control modules with wireless communication inputs.
4. Wired wall dimmers and switches with wireless communication inputs.
5. Wireless control stations.
6. Fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts.
7. LED Drivers.
8. Power interfaces.
9. Digital dimming ballast modules.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
B. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices:
1. Finish requirements for wall controls specified in this section.
2. Accessory receptacles and wallplates, to match lighting controls specified in this
section.
C. Section 26 5113 - Luminaires, Ballasts, and Drivers - Lutron.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent
Lamp Ballasts - Supplements; 2011.
B. ANSI/ESD S20.20 - Protection of Electrical and Electronic Parts, Assemblies and Equipment
(Excluding Electrically Initiated Explosive Devices); 2007.
C. ASTM D4674 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics
Exposed to Indoor Office Environments; 2002a (Reapproved 2010).
D. IEC 60929 - AC and/or DC-Supplied Electronic Control Gear for Tubular Fluorescent Lamps
- Performance Requirements; 2011.
E. IEC 61000-4-2 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 4-2: Testing and Measurement
Techniques - Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test; 2008.
F. IEC 61347-2-3 - Lamp Control Gear - Part 2-3: Particular Requirements for A.C. and/or D.C.
Supplied Electronic Control Gear for Fluorescent Lamps; 2011.
G. IEC 61347-2-13 - Lamp Control Gear - Part 2-13: Particular Requirements for D.C. or A.C.
Supplied Electronic Control Gear for LED Modules; 2006.
H. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (Cor 1, 2012).
I. ISO 9001 - Quality Management Systems-Requirements; 2008.
J. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
K. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical
Contractors Association; 2010.
L. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2010).
M. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent
Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable
Amendments and Supplements.
N. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
O. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
P. UL 935 - Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Q. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
R. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
SECTION 26 09 24-LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK Page 2
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the placement of sensors and wall controls with millwork, furniture,
equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.
2. Coordinate the placement of wall controls with actual installed door swings.
3. Coordinate the placement of daylight sensors with windows, skylights, and luminaires
to achieve optimum operation. Coordinate placement with ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions to light level measurement installed under
other sections or by others.
4. Coordinate the work to provide luminaires and lamps compatible with the lighting
controls to be installed.
5. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning
service is specified in Part 2 under "LIGHTING CONTROLS - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS", sensor locations to be reviewed in accordance with layout provided by
Lighting Control Manufacturer. Lighting Control Manufacturer may direct Contractor
regarding sensor relocation should conditions require a deviation from locations indicated.
C. Sequencing:
1. Do not install sensors and wall controls until final surface finishes and painting are
complete.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Factory submittals prepared with Hold-for-Release Purchase Order.
B. Design Documents: Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service
is specified in Part 2 under "LIGHTING CONTROLS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS",
Lighting Control Manufacturer to provide plans indicating occupancy/vacancy and/or daylight
sensor locations.
C. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors,
service condition requirements, and installed features.
1. Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors: Include detailed basic motion detection coverage range
diagrams.
2. Wall Dimmers: Include derating information for ganged multiple devices.
D. Samples:
1. Wall Controls:
a. Show available color and finish selections.
b. Provide one sample(s) for each product proposed for substitution upon
request.
2. Sensors: Provide one sample(s) for each product proposed for substitution upon
request.
E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control
system components.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on lighting control system
operation, equipment programming and setup, replacement parts, and recommended
maintenance procedures and intervals.
H. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's Warranty or Enhanced Warranty as specified in
Part 1 under “WARRANTY”. Submit documentation of final executed warranty completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications:
SECTION 26 09 24-LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK Page 3
1. Company with not less than ten years of experience manufacturing lighting control
products using wireless communication between devices.
2. Registered to ISO 9001, including in-house engineering for product design activities.
3. Provides factory direct technical support hotline available 24 hours per day, 7 days
per week.
4. Qualified to supply specified products and to honor claims against product presented
in accordance with warranty.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after
installation.
1. Basis of Design System Requirements - Lutron, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature:
1) Lighting Control System Components, Except Fluorescent Electronic
Dimming Ballasts: Between 32 and 104 degrees F (0 and 40 degrees C).
2) Fluorescent Electronic Dimming Ballasts: Between 50 and 140 degrees
F (10 and 60 degrees C).
b. Relative Humidity: Less than 90 percent, non-condensing.
c. Protect lighting controls from dust.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty, Without Manufacturer Start-Up:
1. Manufacturer Lighting Control System Components, Except Wireless Sensors,
Ballasts/Drivers and Ballast Modules: One year 100 percent parts coverage, no
manufacturer labor coverage.
2. Wireless Sensors: Five years 100 percent parts coverage, no manufacturer labor
coverage.
3. Ballasts/Drivers and Ballast Modules: Three years 100 percent parts coverage, no
manufacturer labor coverage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Energi TriPak;
www.lutron.com.
B. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
1. All proposed substitutions (clearly delineated as such) must be submitted in writing for
approval by Architect a minimum of 10 working days prior to the bid date and must be
made available to all bidders. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied by a review
of the specification noting compliance on a line-by-line basis.
2. Any proposed substitutions to be reviewed by Architect at Contractor's expense at a
rate of $200 per hour.
3. By using pre-approved substitutions, Contractor accepts responsibility and associated
costs for all required modifications to related equipment and wiring. Provide complete
engineered shop drawings (including power wiring) with deviations from the original
design highlighted in an alternate color for review and approval by Architect prior to
rough-in.
C. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from
a single supplier.
2.02 LIGHTING CONTROLS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
--CHOOSE ONLY ONE OF THE TWO SENSOR LAYOUT AND TUNING PARAGRAPHS BELOW--
A. Sensor Layout and Tuning: No Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning
Service to be provided; Lutron LSC-NO-SENS-LT.
1. Contractor to utilize Lighting Control Manufacturer Installation Instructions to
place/install sensors.
SECTION 26 09 24-LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK Page 4
2. At Pre-wire and Startup, Lighting Control Manufacturer to provide a rough sensor
calibration only. Sensor fine-tuning to be the responsibility of Contractor.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) as
suitable for the purpose indicated.
C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required equipment, conduit, boxes,
wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, programming, etc. as necessary for a
complete operating system that provides the control intent indicated.
D. Design lighting control equipment for 10 year operational life while operating continually at
any temperature in an ambient temperature range of 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104
degrees F (40 degrees C) and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.
E. Electrostatic Discharge Tolerance: Design and test equipment to withstand electrostatic
discharges without impairment when tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.
F. Power Failure Recovery: When power is interrupted for periods up to 10 years and
subsequently restored, lights to automatically return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on,
or full off) as prior to power interruption.
G. Wireless Devices:
1. Capable of diagnosing system communications.
2. Capable of having addresses automatically assigned to them.
3. Receives signals from other wireless devices and provides feedback to user.
4. Capable of determining which devices have been addressed.
5. RF Frequency: 434 MHz; operate in FCC governed frequency spectrum for periodic
operation; continuous transmission spectrum is not permitted.
6. RF Range: 60 feet (18 m) line-of-sight or 30 feet (9 m) through typical construction
materials between RF transmitting devices and compatible RF receiving devices.
7. Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) Limits: Comply
with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for Class B application.
H. Device Finishes:
1. Wall Controls: To be selected by Architect from standard colors.
2. Standard Colors: Comply with NEMA WD1 where applicable.
3. Color Variation in Same Product Family: Maximum delta E of 1, CIE L*a*b color units.
4. Visible Parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light
sources as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request.
2.03 WIRELESS SENSORS
A. General Requirements:
1. Operational life of 10 years without the need to replace batteries when installed per
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Communicates directly to compatible RF receiving devices through use of a radio
frequency communications link.
3. Does not require external power packs, power wiring, or communication wiring.
4. Capable of being placed in test mode to verify correct operation from the face of the
unit.
B. Wireless Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors:
1. General Requirements:
a. Provides a clearly visible method of indication to verify that motion is being
detected during testing and that the unit is communicating to compatible RF
receiving devices.
b. Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust and
residue build-up.
c. Sensing Mechanism: Passive infrared coupled with technology for sensing fine
motions; Lutron XCT Technology. Signal processing technology detects fine-
motion passive infrared (PIR) signals without the need to change the sensor's
sensitivity threshold.
d. Provide optional, readily accessible, user-adjustable controls for timeout,
automatic/manual-on, and sensitivity.
SECTION 26 09 24-LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK Page 5
e. Turns off lighting after reasonable and adjustable time delay once the last
person to occupy the space vacates a room or area. Provide adjustable timeout
settings of 1, 5, 15, and 30 minutes.
f. Capable of turning dimmer's lighting load on to an optional locked preset level
selectable by the user. Locked preset range to be selectable on the dimmer
from 1 percent to 100 percent.
g. Color: White.
h. Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions for both temporary
and permanent mounting.
i. Provide temporary mounting means for drop ceilings to allow user to check
proper performance and relocate as needed before permanently mounting
sensor. Temporary mounting method to be design for easy, damage-free
removal.
j. Sensor lens to illuminate during test mode when motion is detected to allow
installer to place sensor in ideal location and to verify coverage prior to
permanent mounting.
k. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors:
1) Provide surface mounting bracket compatible with drywall, plaster, wood,
concrete, and compressed fiber ceilings.
2) Provide recessed mounting bracket compatible with drywall and
compressed fiber ceilings.
l. Wall-Mounted Sensors: Provide wall or corner mounting brackets compatible
with drywall and plaster walls.
2. Wireless Combination Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors:
a. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Programmable to operate as an occupancy sensor
(automatic-on and automatic-off), an occupancy sensor with low light feature
(automatic-on when less than one footcandle of ambient light available and
automatic-off), or a vacancy sensor (manual-on and automatic-off).
b. Wall-Mounted Sensors: Programmable to operate as an occupancy sensor
(automatic-on and automatic-off), or a vacancy sensor (manual-on and
automatic-off).
1) Type OV-CEILING - Ceiling-Mounted Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor;
Lutron Radio Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-OCR2B-P-WH:
Coverage from 324 square feet (30.2 sq m) to 676 square feet (62.4 sq
m) depending on ceiling height from 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 360
degree field of view.
2) Type OV-WALL - Wall-Mounted Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor; Lutron
Radio Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-OWLB-P-WH: Minor motion
coverage of 1500 square feet (139.4 sq m) and major motion coverage
of 3000 square feet (278.7 sq m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6
to 2.4 m); 180 degree field of view.
3) Type OV-CORNER - Corner-Mounted Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor; <<
Lutron Radio Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-OKLB-P-WH; or Lutron
Radio Powr Savr Series, Model ULFR2-OKLB-P-WH (BAA-Buy
American Act Compliant)>>: Minor motion coverage of 1225 square
feet (113.8 sq m) and major motion coverage of 2500 square feet (232.3
sq m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6 to 2.4 m); 90 degree field of
view.
4) Type OV-HALL - Hallway Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor; Lutron Radio
Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-OHLB-P-WH: Major motion coverage of
up to 150 feet (45.7 m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6 to 2.4 m);
narrow field of view.
3. Wireless Vacancy-Only Sensors:
a. Operates only as a vacancy sensor (manual-on and automatic-off) in
accordance with California Title 24 requirements.
b. Product(s):
SECTION 26 09 24-LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK Page 6
1) Type V-CEILING - Ceiling-Mounted Vacancy-Only Sensor; Lutron
Radio Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-VCR2B-P-WH: Coverage from
324 square feet (30.2 sq m) to 676 square feet (62.4 sq m) depending on
ceiling height from 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 360 degree field of view.
2) Type V-WALL - Wall-Mounted Vacancy-Only Sensor; Lutron Radio
Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-VWLB-P-WH: Minor motion coverage
of 1500 square feet (139.4 sq m) and major motion coverage of 3000
square feet (278.7 sq m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6 to 2.4
m); 180 degree field of view.
3) Type V-CORNER - Corner-Mounted Vacancy-Only Sensor; Lutron
Radio Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-VKLB-P-WH: Minor motion
coverage of 1225 square feet (113.8 sq m) and major motion coverage
of 2500 square feet (232.3 sq m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6
to 2.4 m); 90 degree field of view.
4) Type V-HALL - Hallway Vacancy-Only Sensor; Lutron Radio Powr
Savr Series, Model LFR2-VHLB-P-WH: Major motion coverage of up to
150 feet (45.7 m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6 to 2.4 m);
narrow field of view.
C. Wireless Daylight Sensors:
1. Product: Lutron Radio Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-DCRB-WH.
2. Open-loop basis for daylight sensor control scheme.
3. Stable output over temperature from 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104 degrees F
(40 degrees C).
4. Partially shielded for accurate detection of available daylight to prevent fixture lighting
and horizontal light component from skewing sensor detection.
5. Provide linear response from 2 to 150 footcandles.
6. Color: White.
7. Mounting:
a. Provide surface mounting bracket compatible with drywall, plaster, wood,
concrete, and compressed fiber ceilings.
b. Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions for both temporary
and permanent mounting.
c. Provide temporary mounting means for drop ceilings to allow user to check
proper performance and relocate as needed before permanently mounting
sensor. Temporary mounting method to be design for easy, damage-free
removal.
8. Meets California Title 24 requirements.
2.04 LOAD CONTROL MODULES
A. Provide wireless load control modules as indicated or as required to control the loads as
indicated.
B. Junction Box-Mounted Modules:
1. Communicates via radio frequency with up to nine compatible wireless control
stations, up to six occupancy/vacancy sensors, and one daylight sensor.
2. Plenum rated.
3. Digital Ballast Control Modules:
a. Product: Lutron PowPak Dimming Module Model RMJ-ECO32-DV-B.
b. Single integral controller with Class 1 or Class 2 isolated digital output signal
conforming to IEC 60929; capable of direct control without interface.
c. Provides direct low-voltage control of up to 32 compatible digital ballasts, LED
drivers, and ballast modules.
1) Electronically links a digital ballast, LED driver, or ballast module to a
zone for both dimming and turning on/off.
2) Electronically assigns wireless occupancy/vacancy sensors for manual
on/auto off and auto on/auto off control.
3) Electronically assigns wireless control stations for manual local control.
4. Dimming Modules:
SECTION 26 09 24-LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK Page 7
a. Product(s):
1) 5 A dimming module with 0-10V control; Lutron PowPak Dimming
Module Model RMJ-5T-DV-B.
b. Single low voltage dimming module with Class 1 or Class 2 isolated 0-10V
output signal conforming to IEC 60929; source or sink automatically configures.
c. Configurable high- and low-end trim.
d. Relay: Rated for resistive or capacitive loads.
5. Relay Modules:
a. Product(s):
1) 16 A relay module, without contact closure output; Lutron PowPak
Relay Module Model RMJ-16R-DV-B.
2) 16 A relay module, with contact closure output; Lutron PowPak Relay
Module Model RMJ-16RCCO1-DV-B.
3) 5 A relay module, without contact closure output; Lutron PowPak Relay
Module Model RMJ-5R-DV-B.
4) 5 A relay module, with contact closure output; Lutron PowPak Relay
Module Model RMJ-5RCCO1-DV-B.
b. Relay:
1) Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all
lighting loads.
2) Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts
when power is applied to and removed from load circuits.
3) Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive
loads.
c. Contact Closure Output:
1) Single contact closure output with normally open and normally closed dry
maintained contacts suitable for connection to third party equipment (e.g.
building management system, HVAC system, etc.).
2) Contact Ratings: Resistive load; 1 A at 0-24 VDC, 0.5 A at 0-24 VAC.
3) Operation affected by associated occupancy/vacancy sensors and wall
controls.
6. 20 A Receptacle Modules:
a. Product(s):
1) 20 A receptacle module; Lutron PowPak 20 A Receptacle Module
Model RMJ-H20R-DV-B.
b. Relay:
1) Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts
when power is applied to and removed from load circuits.
2) Motor rating of 1 HP at 120 V, 2 HP at 277 V.
7. Contact Closure Output Modules:
a. Product: Lutron PowPak CCO Module Model RMJ-CCO1-24-B.
b. Contact Closure Output:
1) Single contact closure output with normally open and normally closed dry
maintained contacts suitable for connection to third party equipment (e.g.
building management system, HVAC system, etc.).
2) Contact Ratings: Resistive load; 1 A at 0-24 VDC, 0.5 A at 0-24 VAC.
3) Operation affected by associated occupancy/vacancy sensors and wall
controls.
C. Plug-in Modules:
1. Communicates via radio frequency with up to six compatible occupancy/vacancy
sensors and/or wireless control stations, and one daylight sensor.
2. Finish: White, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Lamp Dimmers:
a. Product: Single receptacle lamp dimmer with local dimming control; Lutron
Maestro Wireless Model MRF2-3LD.
b. Provides dimming control of plug-in incandescent lamp loads.
SECTION 26 09 24-LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK Page 8
c. Furnished with local dimming control, connected by cord 6 feet (1.8 m) in
length.
4. Plug-In Dimming Module:
a. Product(s):
1) Three receptacle plug-in dimmer; Lutron Maestro Wireless Model
MRF2-3PD-3.
2) Single receptacle plug-in dimmer; Lutron Maestro Wireless Model
MRF2-3PD-1.
b. Provides dimming/switching control of plug-in incandescent lamp loads.
c. Standby Power Draw: Less than 0.5 W.
5. Plug-In Switching Module:
a. Product(s):
1) Three receptacle plug-in appliance module; Lutron Maestro Wireless
Model MRF2-15APS-3.
2) Single receptacle plug-in appliance module; Lutron Maestro Wireless
Model MRF2-15APS-1.
b. Provides switching control of plug-in general purpose loads.
c. Standby Power Draw: Less than 0.5 W.
d. Provide integral over-temperature detection to automatically turn the load off.
e. Relay:
1) Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all
lighting loads.
2) Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts
when power is applied to and removed from load circuits.
3) Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive
loads.
2.05 WIRED WALL DIMMERS AND SWITCHES WITH WIRELESS COMMUNICATION INPUTS
A. General Requirements:
1. Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects "off" at any control to disconnect the
load from line supply.
2. Provide air gap service switch accessible without removing faceplate.
3. Operates at the rated capacity across the full ambient temperature range including
modified capacities for ganged configurations which require removal of fins.
4. Provide radio frequency interference suppression.
5. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000 V, 200 amps
according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment to performance.
6. Dimmers: Provide full range, continuously variable control of light intensity.
7. Dimmers for Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) Transformers:
a. Provide circuitry designed to control the input of electronic (solid-state) low
voltage (ELV) transformers. Do not use dimmers that utilize standard phase
control.
b. Provide resettable overload protection that provides automatic shut-off when
dimmer capacity is exceeded. Do not use protection methods that are non-
resettable or require device to be removed from outlet box.
c. Designed to withstand a short, per UL 1472, between load hot and either
neutral or ground without damage to dimmer.
8. Dimmers for Magnetic Low Voltage (MLV) Transformers:
a. Provide circuitry designed to control and provide a symmetrical AC waveform to
input of magnetic low voltage transformers per UL 1472.
b. Magnetic low voltage transformers to operate below rated current or
temperature.
9. Fluorescent Dimmers:
a. Provides direct control of fluorescent dimming ballasts up to the ballast
manufacturer's specified rating.
10. Electronic Switches:
a. Listed as complying with UL 20, UL 508, and UL 1472.
SECTION 26 09 24-LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK Page 9
B. Preset Smart Wall Dimmers and Switches with Wireless Communication Inputs; Lutron
Maestro Wireless Series:
1. Communicates via radio frequency with up to nine compatible occupancy/vacancy
sensors and/or wireless control stations, and one daylight sensor.
2. Dimmer Control: Multi-function tap switch with small, raised rocker for dimmer
adjustment.
a. Rocker raises/lowers light level, with new level becoming the current preset
level.
b. Switch single tap raises lights to preset level or fades lights to off.
c. Switch double tap raises light to full on level.
d. Switch tap and hold slowly fades lights to off over period of 10 seconds.
e. LEDs adjacent to tap switch indicate light level when dimmer is on, and function
as locator light when dimmer is off.
3. Switch Control: Switch single tap turns lights on/off.
4. Dimmer High End Trim:
a. Incandescent Dimmers: Minimum of 92 percent of line voltage.
b. Dimmers for Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) Transformers: Minimum of 95
percent of line voltage.
c. Dimmers for Magnetic Low Voltage Transformers: Minimum of 92 percent of
line voltage.
5. Product(s) - Preset Smart Dimmers with Wireless Communication Inputs:
a. Type MA-600CL - Preset Smart Dimmer; Lutron Maestro Wireless Series:
Incandescent/halogen (600 W, 120 V), magnetic low voltage (600 VA/450 W,
120 V), dimmable CFL/LED (150 W, 120 V); multi-location capability using
companion dimmers (up to nine companion dimmers may be connected);
minimum load requirement.
1) Lutron Model MRF2-6CL; single pole/multi-location; 120 V.
b. Type MA-1000 - >>Preset Smart Dimmer; Lutron Maestro Wireless Series:
Incandescent (1,000 W, 120 V), magnetic low voltage (1,000 VA/800 W, 120
V); multi-location capability using companion dimmers (up to nine companion
dimmers may be connected); minimum load requirement.
1) Lutron Model MRF2-10D-120; single-pole/multi-location; 120 V.
c. Type MA-MLV - Preset Smart Dimmer; Lutron Maestro Wireless Series:
Magnetic low voltage (600 VA/450 W, 120 V); multi-location capability using
companion dimmers (up to nine companion dimmers may be connected);
minimum load requirement.
1) Lutron Model MRF2-6MLV; single-pole/multi-location; 120 V.
d. Type MA-ELV - Preset Smart Dimmer; Lutron Maestro Wireless Series:
Electronic low voltage (600 W, 120 V); neutral required; multi-location capability
using companion dimmers (up to nine companion dimmers may be connected);
minimum load requirement.
1) Lutron Model MRF2-6ELV-120; single-pole/multi-location; 120 V.
e. Type MA-3W - Preset Smart Dimmer; Lutron Maestro Wireless Series: 3-
wire fluorescent ballast (6 A, 120-277 V); neutral required; multi-location
capability using companion dimmers (up to nine companion dimmers may be
connected); minimum load requirement.
1) Lutron Model MRF2-F6AN-DV; single-pole/multi-location; 120-277 V.
f. Type MA-COMP - Companion Dimmer: Provides multi-location capability for
compatible Lutron Maestro Wireless Series dimmers.
1) Lutron Model MA-R; gloss finish; 120 V.
2) Lutron Model MSC-AD; satin finish; 120 V.
3) Lutron Model MA-R-277V; gloss finish; 277 V.
4) Lutron Model MSC-AD-277V; satin finish; 277 V.
6. Product(s) - Electronic Switches with Wireless Communication Inputs:
a. Type MA-6A - Electronic Switch; Lutron Maestro Wireless Series: 6 A
lighting/3 A fan (120 V); neutral required; multi-location capability using
SECTION 26 09 24-LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK Page 10
companion switches (up to nine companion switches may be connected);
minimum load requirement.
1) Lutron Model MRF2-6ANS; single-pole/multi-location; 120 V.
b. Type MA-8A - Electronic Switch; Lutron Maestro Wireless Series: 8 A
lighting/5.8 A fan (120 V); neutral required; multi-location capability using
companion switches (up to nine companion switches may be connected);
minimum load requirement.
1) Lutron Model MRF2-8ANS-120; single-pole/multi-location; 120 V.
c. Type MA-SCOMP - Companion Switch: Provides multi-location capabilit y for
compatible Lutron Maestro Wireless Series electronic switches.
1) Lutron Model MA-AS; gloss finish; 120 V.
2) Lutron Model MSC-AS; satin finish; 120 V.
3) Lutron Model MA-AS-277V; gloss finish; 277 V.
4) Lutron Model MSC-AS-277V; satin finish; 277 V.
C. Electronic Switches with Wireless Communication Inputs; Lutron 5A 2-Button RF Switch:
1. Communicates via radio frequency with up to nine compatible occupancy/vacancy
sensors and/or wireless control stations, and one daylight sensor.
2. Switch Control: Separate tap switches for turning lights on and off.
a. LED adjacent to tap switches indicates load status, and functions as locator
light when switch is off.
3. Product(s) - Electronic Switches with Wireless Communication Inputs:
a. Type 5A-2RF - Electronic Switch; Lutron 5A 2-Button RF Switch: CFL/LED
(5 A, 120/277 V), fluorescent (5 A, 120/277 V), incandescent/halogen (600 W,
120 V), magnetic low voltage (600 VA/450 W, 120 V; 1400 VA/1000 W, 277 V),
fan (3 A, 120 V); multi-location capability using standard 3-way mechanical
switches; minimum load requirement.
1) Lutron Model PD-5S-DV; single-pole/3-way; 120/277 V.
2.06 WIRELESS CONTROL STATIONS
A. Product(s):
1. Type P-2BN - 2-Button Control; Lutron Pico Wireless Control Model PJ-2B.
a. Button Marking: Light (icons).
2. Type P-2BNRL - 2-Button with Raise/Lower Control; Lutron Pico Wireless Control
Model PJ-2BRL.
a. Button Marking: Light (icons).
3. Type P-3BN - 3-Button Control; Lutron Pico Wireless Control Model PJ-3B.
a. Button Marking: Light (icons).
4. Type P-3BNRL - 3-Button with Raise/Lower Control; Lutron Pico Wireless Control
Model PJ-3BRL.
a. Button Marking: Light (icons).
5. Single Pedestal; Lutron Pico Pedestal Model L-PED1.
6. Double Pedestal; Lutron Pico Pedestal Model L-PED2.
7. Triple Pedestal; Lutron Pico Pedestal Model L-PED3.
8. Quadruple Pedestal; Lutron Pico Pedestal Model L-PED4.
9. Screw Mounting Kit; Lutron Model PICO-SM-KIT.
10. Wallplate Adapter; Lutron Model PICO-FP-ADAPT.
B. Quantity: As indicated on the drawings.
C. Communicates directly to compatible RF receiving devices through use of a radio frequency
communications link.
D. Does not require external power packs, power or communication wiring.
E. Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.
F. Button Programming:
1. Single action.
2. Toggle action.
G. Includes LED to indicate button press or programming mode status.
H. Models available with integral night light.
I. Mounting:
SECTION 26 09 24-LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK Page 11
1. Capable of being mounted with a table stand or directly to a wall under a faceplate.
2. Faceplates: Provide concealed mounting hardware.
J. Power: Battery-operated with minimum ten-year battery life (3-year battery life for night light
models).
K. Finish: White.
2.07 FLUORESCENT ELECTRONIC DIMMING BALLASTS
A. General Requirements:
1. Designed for 10 year operational life while operating at maximum case temperature
and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.
2. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges without impairment when
tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.
3. Lamp Starting Method: Programmed rapid start.
4. Maximum Inrush Current: 7 amperes for 120V ballasts and 3 amperes for 277V
ballasts.
5. Current Crest Factor (CCF): Less than 1.7.
6. Comply with ANSI C82.11 and list and label as complying with UL 935.
7. Manufactured in a facility that employs ESD reduction practices in compliance with
ANSI/ESD S20.20.
8. Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.
9. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10 percent line
voltage input.
10. Actively prevent overheating in T5-HO linear fluorescent lamp applications.
11. Ballasts to track evenly across multiple lamp lengths and all light levels.
12. Comply with IEC 61347-2-3 as applicable.
B. Digital Control:
1. Lights automatically return to the setting prior to power interruption.
2. Unique internal reference number visibly displayed on ballast cover.
3. Averages two independent daylight harvesting inputs internally.
4. When normal power is lost, ballasts fed with emergency power go to emergency
mode.
5. Replacement of single ballast during maintenance does not require reprogramming.
C. Product(s):
1. Digital Control, One Percent Dimming; Lutron Hi-lume 3D:
a. Dimming Range: 100 percent to less than one percent relative light output for
T8, T5 and T5HO, and five percent relative light output for T5 twin-tube lamps.
b. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand Category A surges of 6,000
V according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment of performance.
c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 10 percent typical (15 percent for
select models).
2. Digital Control, One Percent Dimming; Lutron EcoSystem H-Series:
a. Dimming Range: 100 to less than one percent relative light output for T8, and
one percent relative light output for T5 and T5HO lamps.
b. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand Category A surges of 4,000
V according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment of performance.
c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 10 percent typical (15 percent for
select models).
2.08 LED DRIVERS
A. General Requirements:
1. Designed for 10 year operational life while operating at maximum case temperature
and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.
2. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges without impairment when
tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.
3. UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.
4. Complies with IEC 61347-2-13 as applicable.
5. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand Category A surges of 4,000 V
according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment of performance.
SECTION 26 09 24-LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK Page 12
6. Manufactured in a facility that employs ESD reduction practices in compliance with
ANSI/ESD S20.20.
7. Class A sound rating; inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.
8. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10 percent line
voltage input.
9. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent for loads greater than 25W;
comply with ANSI C82.11.
10. Drivers to track evenly across multiple lamp lengths and all light levels.
11. Configuration tool available to optimize the following for LED fixtures:
a. Light level.
b. Efficacy.
c. Thermal performance.
B. Digital Control:
1. Lights automatically return to the setting prior to power interruption.
2. Operate from input voltage of 120 V through 277 V at 50/60 Hz.
3. When normal power is lost, drivers fed with emergency power go to emergency mode.
4. Replacement of single driver during maintenance does not require reprogramming.
C. Product(s):
1. Forward Phase (Neutral Wire Required), 3-Wire, and Digital Control, One Percent
Dimming; Lutron A-Series:
a. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent relative light output.
b. Maximum Inrush Current: 2 amperes for 120V and 277V drivers.
c. Constant Current Drivers:
1) Support from 200 mA to 2.1 A (in 10 mA steps) to ensure a compatible
driver exists.
2) Support LED arrays up to 40W or 53 W (710 mA to 1.05 A in 10 mA
steps).
d. Constant Voltage Drivers:
1) Support from 10 V to 60 V (in 0.5 V steps) to ensure a compatible driver
exists.
2) Support LED arrays up to 40W.
2. Digital Control, Five Percent Dimming; Lutron EcoSystem 5-Series:
a. Dimming Range: 100 to five percent relative light output.
b. Maximum Inrush Current: Meets NEMA 410 inrush requirements.
c. Constant Current Drivers:
1) Support from 220 mA to 1.4 A to ensure a compatible driver exists.
2) Support LED arrays up to 60W.
2.09 POWER INTERFACES
A. Provide power interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.
B. General Requirements:
1. Phase independent of control input.
2. Dimmer to meet limited short circuit test as defined in UL 508.
3. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
4. Diagnostics and Service: Replacing power interface does not require re-programming
of system or processor.
C. Product(s):
1. Phase-Adaptive Power Module; Lutron PHPM-PA: Provides interface for phase
control input to provide full 16 A circuit output of forward/reverse phase control for
compatible loads.
2. 3-Wire Fluorescent Power Module; Lutron PHPM-3F: Provides interface for phase
control input to provide full 16 A circuit output for compatible line-voltage control
fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts.
3. Switching Power Module; Lutron PHPM-SW: Provides interface for phase control
input to provide full 16 A circuit output of switching for compatible non-dim loads.
SECTION 26 09 24-LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK Page 13
4. Phase-Adaptive Power Module with 3-Wire Fluorescent Input; Lutron PHPM-WBX:
Provides interface for fluorescent ballast control input to provide full 16 A circuit output
for compatible loads.
5. Ten Volt Interface; Lutron GRX-TVI: Provides interface for phase control input to
provide full 16 A circuit output of switching and 0-10 V low voltage control for
compatible fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts.
2.10 DIGITAL DIMMING BALLAST MODULES
A. Provide digital dimming ballast modules as indicated or as required to control the loads as
indicated.
B. General Requirements:
1. Provide continuous 3-wire signal dimming to compatible 3-wire electronic dimming
ballasts.
2. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
3. If power is interrupted and subsequently restored, lights automatically return to the
setting prior to power interruption.
4. Unique internal reference number visible displayed on module cover.
5. Dimmer to meet limited short circuit test as defined in UL 20.
6. Provide integral fault protection to prevent ballast module failure in the event of a mis-
wire.
C. Product(s):
1. 3-Wire Ballast Module, 16 Amp; Lutron EcoSystem Model C5-BMJ-16A:
a. Integrates up to 16 amps of 3-wire electronic dimming ballasts into EcoSystem
digital control system as a single zone.
b. Integrates up to 16 amps of switched high intensity discharge (HID) lighting
load into EcoSystem digital control system as a single zone.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Factory Testing; Lutron Standard Factory Testing:
1. Perform full-function factory testing on all completed assemblies. Statistical sampling
is not acceptable.
2. Perform full-function factory testing on 100 percent of all ballasts and LED drivers.
3. Perform factory burn-in of 100 percent of all ballasts at 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verify that ratings and configurations of system components are consistent with the indicated
requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive system components.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where
applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Sensor Locations:
1. Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is specified in
Part 2 under "LIGHTING CONTROLS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS", locate sensors
in accordance with layout provided by Lighting Control Manufacturer. Lighting Control
Manufacturer may direct Contractor regarding sensor relocation should conditions
require a deviation from locations indicated. Where Lighting Control Manufacturer
Sensor Layout and Tuning service is not specified, locate sensors in accordance with
Drawings.
2. Sensor locations indicated are diagrammatic. Within the design intent, reasonably
minor adjustments to locations may be made in order to optimize coverage and avoid
conflicts or problems affecting coverage, in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
SECTION 26 09 24-LIGHTING CONTROLS - LUTRON ENERGI TRIPAK Page 14
D. Ensure that daylight sensor placement minimizes sensor view of electric light sources.
Locate ceiling-mounted and luminaire-mounted daylight sensors to avoid direct view of
luminaires.
E. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for prescribed period per manufacturer's
recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail
prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in.
F. Lamp Lead Lengths: Do not exceed 3 feet (0.9 m) for T4 4-pin compact and T5 BIAX lamps
and 7 feet (2.1 m) for T5, T5-HO, T8 U-bend, and T8 linear fluorescent lamps.
G. LED Light Engine/Array Lead Length: Do not exceed 100 feet (31 m).
H. Identify system components in accordance with Section 26 0553.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Start-up service is not required.
C. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies
with contract documents.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. On-Site Scene and Level Tuning; Lutron LSC-AF-VISIT: Include as an alternate to the
base bid additional costs for Lighting Control Manufacturer to visit site to conduct meeting
with Owner's representative to make required lighting adjustments to the system for
conformance with original design intent.
B. Sensor Fine-Tuning: Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning
service is specified in Part 2 under "LIGHTING CONTROLS - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS", Lighting Control Manufacturer to provide up to two additional post-
startup on-site service visits for fine-tuning of sensor calibration. Where Lighting Control
Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is not specified, Contractor to provide fine-
tuning of sensor calibration.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.
3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Demonstration: Demonstrate proper operation of lighting control devices to Engineer, and
correct deficiencies or make adjustments as directed.
3.07 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 1
SECTION 26 09 43 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS – LUTRON
PART 1 PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Digital-network lighting control system and associated components:
1. Fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts.
2. LED drivers.
3. Power interfaces.
4. Main units (Lutron Grafik Eye QS).
5. Lighting control modules (Lutron Energi Savr Node).
6. Digital dimming ballast and switching modules (Lutron EcoSystem).
7. Control stations.
8. Low-voltage control interfaces.
9. Wired sensors.
10. Wireless sensors.
11. Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 12 2400 - Window Shades: Motorized roller window shades, for interface with
lighting control system.
B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and
requirements.
C. Section 26 2726 - Wiring Devices - Lutron:
1. Finish requirements for wall controls specified in this section.
2. Accessory receptacles and wallplates, to match lighting controls specified in this
section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ANSI C12.20 - American National Standard for Electricity Meters - 0.2 and 0.5 Accuracy
Classes; 2010.
B. ANSI C82.11 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - High Frequency Fluorescent
Lamp Ballasts - Supplements; 2011.
C. ANSI/ESD S20.20 - Protection of Electrical and Electronic Parts, Assemblies and Equipment
(Excluding Electrically Initiated Explosive Devices); 2007.
D. ASTM D4674 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics
Exposed to Indoor Office Environments; 2002a (Reapproved 2010).
E. IEC 60669-2-1 - Switches for Household and Similar Fixed Electrical Installations - Part 2-1:
Particular Requirements - Electronic Switches; 2009.
F. IEC 60929 - AC and/or DC-Supplied Electronic Control Gear for Tubular Fluorescent Lamps
- Performance Requirements; 2011.
G. IEC 61000-4-2 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 4-2: Testing and Measurement
Techniques - Electrostatic Discharge Immunity Test; 2008.
H. IEC 61000-4-5 - Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) - Part 4-5: Testing and Measurement
Techniques - Surge Immunity Test; 2008.
I. IEC 61347-2-3 - Lamp Control Gear - Part 2-3: Particular Requirements for A.C. and/or D.C.
Supplied Electronic Control Gear for Fluorescent Lamps; 2011.
J. IEC 61347-2-13 - Lamp Control Gear - Part 2-13: Particular Requirements for D.C. or A.C.
Supplied Electronic Control Gear for LED Modules; 2006.
K. IEEE C62.41.2 - Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and less) AC Power Circuits; 2002 (Cor 1, 2012).
L. ISO 9001 - Quality Management Systems-Requirements; 2008.
M. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010.
N. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical
Contractors Association; 2010.
O. NEMA 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with
Electronic Drivers and Discharge Ballasts; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;
2011.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 2
P. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2010).
Q. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent
Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable
Amendments and Supplements.
R. UL 94 - Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances;
Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
S. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
T. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
U. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All
Revisions.
V. UL 935 - Fluorescent-Lamp Ballasts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
W. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
X. UL 2043 - Fire Test for Heat and Visible Smoke Release for Discrete Products and Their
Accessories Installed in Air-Handling Spaces; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
Y. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current
Edition, Including All Revisions.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate the placement of sensors and wall controls with millwork, furniture,
equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others.
2. Coordinate the placement of wall controls with actual installed door swings.
3. Coordinate the placement of daylight sensors with windows, skylights, and luminaires
to achieve optimum operation. Coordinate placement with ductwork, piping,
equipment, or other potential obstructions to light level measurement installed under
other sections or by others.
4. Where motorized window treatments are to be controlled by the lighting control
system provided under this section, coordinate the work with other trades to provide
compatible products.
5. Coordinate the work to provide luminaires and lamps compatible with the lighting
controls to be installed.
6. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain
direction prior to proceeding with work.
B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct on-site meeting with lighting control system manufacturer
prior to commencing work as part of manufacturer's standard startup services. Manufacturer
to review with installer:
1. Low voltage wiring requirements.
2. Separation of power and low voltage/data wiring.
3. Wire labeling.
4. Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is specified in
Part 2 under "DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS", sensor locations to be reviewed in accordance with layout
provided by Lighting Control Manufacturer. Lighting Control Manufacturer may direct
Contractor regarding sensor relocation should conditions require a deviation from
locations indicated.
5. Control locations.
6. Load circuit wiring.
7. Connections to other equipment.
8. Installer responsibilities.
C. Sequencing:
1. Do not install sensors and wall controls until final surface finishes are complete.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Factory submittals prepared with Hold-for-Release Purchase Order.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 3
B. Design Documents: Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service
is specified in Part 2 under "DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM -
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS", Lighting Control Manufacturer to provide plans indicating
occupancy/vacancy and/or daylight sensor locations.
C. Product Data: Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, dimensions, colors,
service condition requirements, and installed features.
1. Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors: Include detailed basic motion detection coverage range
diagrams.
D. Shop Drawings:
1. Provide schematic system riser diagram indicating component interconnections.
Include requirements for interface with other systems.
E. Samples:
1. Wall Controls:
a. Show available color and finish selections.
b. Provide one sample(s) for each product proposed for substitution.
2. Sensors: Provide one sample(s) for each product proposed for substitution upon
request.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include application conditions and limitations of use
stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,
examination, preparation, and installation of product.
G. System Performance-Verification Documentation; Lutron LSC-LEED-DOC: Include as part
of the base bid additional costs for manufacturer's enhanced documentation detailing start-
up performance-verification procedures and functional tests performed along with test
results.
H. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations and settings for lighting control
system components.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include detailed information on lighting control system
operation, equipment programming and setup, replacement parts, and recommended
maintenance procedures and intervals.
J. Warranty: Submit sample of manufacturer's Warranty or Enhanced Warranty as specified in
Part 1 under "WARRANTY". Submit documentation of final execution completed in Owner's
name and registered with manufacturer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.
B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution
requirements.
C. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Company with not less than ten years of experience manufacturing lighting control
systems of similar complexity to specified system.
2. Registered to ISO 9001, including in-house engineering for product design activities.
3. Qualified to supply specified products and to honor claims against product presented
in accordance with warranty.
D. Maintenance Contractor Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized service representative.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions until ready for installation.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Maintain field conditions within manufacturer's required service conditions during and after
installation.
1. System Requirements - Lutron, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
a. Ambient Temperature:
1) Lighting Control System Components, Except Those Listed Below:
Between 32 and 104 degrees F (0 and 40 degrees C).
2) Lighting Management System Computer: Between 50 and 90 degrees F
(10 and 35 degrees C).
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 4
3) Fluorescent Electronic Dimming Ballasts: Between 50 and 140 degrees
F (10 and 60 degrees C).
b. Relative Humidity: Less than 90 percent, non-condensing.
1.09 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty, With Manufacturer Start-Up; Lutron Standard 2-Year
Warranty; Lutron LSC-B2:
1. Manufacturer Lighting Control System Components, Except Lighting Management
System Computer, Ballasts/Drivers and Ballast Modules:
a. First Two Years:
1) 100 percent replacement parts coverage, 100 percent manufacturer
labor coverage to troubleshoot and diagnose a lighting issue.
2) First-available on-site or remote response time.
3) Remote diagnostics for applicable systems.
b. Telephone Technical Support: Available 24 hours per day, 7 days per week,
excluding manufacturer holidays.
2. Lighting Management System Computer: One year 100 percent parts coverage, one
year 100 percent manufacturer labor coverage.
3. Ballasts/Drivers and Ballast Modules: Five years 100 percent parts coverage, no
manufacturer labor coverage.
C. Include as an alternate to the base bid additional costs for manufacturer's Enhanced
Warranty with manufacturer Start-up; Platinum Enhanced Warranty; Lutron LSC-E8P;
coverage to include items listed under manufacturer's standard warranty with manufacturer
start-up above, plus the following upgrades:
1. Manufacturer Lighting Control System Components, Except Lighting Management
System Computer, Ballasts/Drivers and Ballast Modules:
a. First Two Years:
1) Upgrade from as-available Field Service response to 24-hour on-site or
remote response time.
2) Plus annual scheduled Preventive Maintenance Visit.
b. Additional Coverage for Years 3-5: 50 percent replacement parts coverage, no
manufacturer labor coverage.
c. Additional Coverage for Years 6-8: 25 percent replacement parts coverage, no
manufacturer labor coverage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; www.lutron.com.
B. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
1. All proposed substitutions (clearly delineated as such) must be submitted in writing for
approval by Architect a minimum of 10 working days prior to the bid date and must be
made available to all bidders. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied by a review
of the specification noting compliance on a line-by-line basis.
2. Any proposed substitutions to be reviewed by Architect at Contractor's expense at a
rate of $200 per hour.
3. By using pre-approved substitutions, Contractor accepts responsibility and associated
costs for all required modifications to related equipment and wiring. Provide complete
engineered shop drawings (including power wiring) with deviations from the original
design highlighted in an alternate color for review and approval by Architect prior to
rough-in.
C. Source Limitations: Furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from
a single supplier.
2.02 DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Sensor Layout and Tuning: Include as part of the base bid additional costs for Lighting
Control Manufacturer's Sensor Layout and Tuning service; Lutron LSC-SENS-LT:
1. Lighting Control Manufacturer to take full responsibility for wired or wireless sensor
layout and performance for sensors provided by Lighting Control Manufacturer.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 5
2. Lighting Control Manufacturer to analyze the reflected ceiling plans, via supplied
electronic AutoCAD format, and design a detailed sensor layout that provides
adequate occupancy sensor coverage and ensures occupancy and daylight sensor
performance per agreed upon sequence of operations. Contractor to utilize the
layouts for sensor placement.
3. During startup, Lighting Control Manufacturer to direct Contractor regarding sensor
relocation, as required, should conditions require a deviation from locations specified
in the drawings..
4. Lighting Control Manufacturer to provide up to two additional post-startup on-site
service visits within one calendar year from Date of Substantial Completion to fine-
tune sensor calibration per the agreed upon sequence of operations.
B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories Inc. (UL) as
suitable for the purpose indicated.
C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required equipment, conduit, boxes,
wiring, connectors, hardware, supports, accessories, software, system programming, etc. as
necessary for a complete operating system that provides the control intent indicated.
D. Shade Control Requirements:
1. Capable of operating shades and recalling shade presets via keypad, contact closure
input, infrared receiver, lighting management system software, or other lighting control
system interface.
2. Capable of operating any individual, group, or subgroup of shade electronic drive units
within system without requiring separate group controllers.
3. Capable of assigning and reassigning individual, groups, and subgroups of shades to
any control within system without requiring additional wiring or hardware changes.
4. Capable of controlling shade speed for tracking within plus or minus 0.125 inch (3.17
mm) throughout entire travel.
5. Provide 10 year power failure memory for preset stops, open and close limits, shade
grouping and sub grouping and system configuration.
6. Capable of synchronizing multiple shade electronic drive units of the same size to
start, stop and move in unison.
7. Capable of stopping shades within accuracy of 0.125 inch (3.17 mm) at any point
between open and close limits.
8. Capable of storing up to 250 programmable stop points, including open, close, and
any other position.
E. Design lighting control equipment for 10 year operational life while operating continually at
any temperature in an ambient temperature range of 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104
degrees F (40 degrees C) and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.
F. Electrostatic Discharge Tolerance: Design and test equipment to withstand electrostatic
discharges without impairment when tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.
G. Dimming and Switching (Relay) Equipment:
1. Designed so that electrolytic capacitors operate at least 36 degrees F (20 degrees C)
below the capacitor's maximum temperature rating when the device is under fully
loaded conditions at maximum rated temperature.
2. Inrush Tolerance:
a. Utilize load-handling thyristors (SCRs and triacs), field effect transistors (FETs)
and isolated gate bipolar transistors (IGBTs) with maximum current rating at
least two times the rated operating current of the dimmer/relay.
b. Capable of withstanding repetitive inrush current of 50 times the operating
current without impacting lifetime of the dimmer/relay.
3. Surge Tolerance:
a. Panels: Designed and tested to withstand surges of 6,000 V, 3,000 amps
according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEC 61000-4-5 without impairment to
performance.
b. Other Power Handling Devices: Designed and tested to withstand surges of
6,000 V, 200 amps according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment to
performance.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 6
4. Power Failure Recovery: When power is interrupted and subsequently restored, within
3 seconds lights to automatically return to same levels (dimmed setting, full on, or full
off) as prior to power interruption.
5. Dimming Requirements:
a. Line Noise Tolerance: Provide real-time cycle-by-cycle compensation for
incoming line voltage variations including changes in RMS voltage (plus or
minus 2 percent change in RMS voltage per cycle), frequency shifts (plus or
minus 2 Hz change in frequency per second), dynamic harmonics, and line
noise.
1) Systems not providing integral cycle-by-cycle compensation to include
external power conditioning equipment as part of dimming system.
b. Incorporate electronic "soft-start" default at initial turn-on that smoothly ramps
lights up to the appropriate levels within 0.5 seconds.
c. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
d. Control all light sources in smooth and continuous manner. Dimmers with
visible steps are not acceptable.
e. Load Types:
1) Assign a load type to each dimmer that will provide a proper dimming
curve for the specific light source to be controlled.
2) Provide capability of being field-configured to have load types assigned
per circuit.
f. Minimum and Maximum Light Levels: User adjustable on a circuit-by-circuit
basis.
g. Line Voltage Dimmers:
1) Dimmers for Magnetic Low Voltage (MLV) Transformers:
(a) Provide circuitry designed to control and provide a symmetrical AC
waveform to input of magnetic low voltage transform ers per UL
1472.
(b) Dimmers using unipolar load current devices (such as FETs or
SCRs) to include DC current protection in the event of a single
device failure.
2) Dimmers for Electronic Low Voltage (ELV) Transformers: Operate
transformers via reverse phase control. Alternately, forward phase
control dimming may be used if dimming equipment manufacturer has
recommended specific ELV transformers being provided.
3) Dimmers for Neon and Cold Cathode Transformers:
(a) Magnetic Transformers: Listed for use with normal (low) power
factor magnetic transformers.
(b) Electronic Transformers: Must be supported by the ballast
equipment manufacturer for control of specific ballasts being
provided.
h. Low Voltage Dimming Modules:
1) Coordination Between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage
Relay: Capable of being electronically linked to a single zone.
2) Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling the following
light sources:
(a) 0-10V analog voltage signal.
(1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to
IEC 60929.
(2) Sink current according to IEC 60929.
(3) Source current.
(b) 10-0V reverse analog voltage signal.
(c) DSI digital communication.
(d) DALI broadcast communication per IEC 60929:
(1) Logarithmic intensity values complying with IEC 60929.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 7
(2) Linear intensity values for use with LED color intensity
control.
(e) PWM per IEC 60929.
6. Switching Requirements:
a. Rated Life of Relays: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all
lighting loads.
b. Switch load in a manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when
power is applied to and removed from load circuits.
c. Provide output fully rated for continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and
resistive loads.
H. Device Finishes:
1. Wall Controls: As indicated on the drawings.
2. Standard Colors: Comply with NEMA WD1 where applicable.
3. Color Variation in Same Product Family: Maximum delta E of 1, CIE L*a*b color units.
4. Visible Parts: Exhibit ultraviolet color stability when tested with multiple actinic light
sources as defined in ASTM D4674. Provide proof of testing upon request.
I. Interface with building automation system<< as specified in Section _____>>; Lutron
System and Network Integration Consultation; LSC-INT-VISIT.
J. Interface with Existing Work: <<______>>.
2.03 FLUORESCENT ELECTRONIC DIMMING BALLASTS
A. General Requirements:
1. Designed for 10 year operational life while operating at maximum case temperature
and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.
2. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges without impairment when
tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.
3. Lamp Starting Method: Programmed rapid start.
4. Maximum Inrush Current: 7 amperes for 120V ballasts and 3 amperes for 277V
ballasts.
5. Current Crest Factor (CCF): Less than 1.7.
6. Comply with ANSI C82.11 and list and label as complying with UL 935.
7. Designed to not interfere with infrared devices operating at frequencies between 38
kHz and 42 kHz.
8. Manufactured in a facility that employs ESD reduction practices in compliance with
ANSI/ESD S20.20.
9. Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.
10. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10 percent line
voltage input.
11. Actively prevent overheating in T5-HO linear fluorescent lamp applications.
12. Ballasts to track evenly across multiple lamp lengths and all light levels.
13. Comply with IEC 61347-2-3 as applicable.
B. 3-Wire Control:
1. Provide integral fault protection to prevent ballast failure in the event of a mis-wire.
C. Digital Control:
1. Monitor and report lamp and ballast status.
2. Lights automatically return to the setting prior to power interruption.
3. Each ballast responds independently to:
a. Up to 32 occupant sensors.
b. Up to 64 personal control inputs.
c. Two daylight sensors.
4. Unique internal reference number visibly displayed on ballast cover.
5. Averages two independent daylight harvesting inputs internally.
6. Responds to digital load shed command. (Example: If light output is at 30 percent and
a load shed command of 10 percent is received, the ballast automatically sets the
maximum light output at 90 percent and lowers current light output by three percent to
27 percent).
D. Product(s):
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 8
1. 3-Wire Control, One Percent Dimming; Lutron Hi-lume:
a. Dimming Range: 100 percent to one percent relative light output for T4
compact and T5-HO lamps.
b. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand Category A surges of 6,000
V according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment of performance.
c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 10 percent.
2. 3-Wire and Digital Control, One Percent Dimming; Lutron Hi-lume 3D:
a. Dimming Range: 100 percent to less than one percent relative light output for
T8, T5 and T5HO, and five percent relative light output for T5 twin-tube lamps.
b. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand Category A surges of 6,000
V according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment of performance.
c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 10 percent typical (15 percent for
select models).
3. 3-Wire and Digital Control, Ten Percent Dimming; Lutron EcoSystem:
a. Dimming Range: 100 to ten percent relative light output for T8, T5, T5HO, and
T5 twin-tube, and five percent relative light output for T4 compact lamps.
b. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand Category A surges of 4,000
V according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment of performance.
c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 10 percent typical (15 percent for
select models).
d. Digital Control:
1) Connect without interface (except for T4 compact lamp ballasts) to:
(a) Occupancy sensors.
(b) Daylight sensor.
(c) Personal control input (keypad or infrared receiver).
2) Provide a 20V DC source to power connected sensors.
3) Generate digital communication commands to distribute ballast and
sensor data on the digital bus.
4. Digital Control, One Percent Dimming; Lutron EcoSystem H-Series:
a. Dimming Range: 100 to less than one percent relative light output for T8, and
one percent relative light output for T5 and T5HO lamps.
b. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand Category A surges of 4,000
V according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment of performance.
c. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 10 percent typical (15 percent for
select models).
2.04 LED DRIVERS
A. General Requirements:
1. Designed for 10 year operational life while operating at maximum case temperature
and 90 percent non-condensing relative humidity.
2. Designed and tested to withstand electrostatic discharges without impairment when
tested according to IEC 61000-4-2.
3. UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.
4. Complies with IEC 61347-2-13 as applicable.
5. Surge Tolerance: Designed and tested to withstand Category A surges of 4,000 V
according to IEEE C62.41.2 without impairment of performance.
6. Manufactured in a facility that employs ESD reduction practices in compliance with
ANSI/ESD S20.20.
7. Class A sound rating; Inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.
8. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10 percent line
voltage input.
9. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): Less than 20 percent for loads greater than 25W;
comply with ANSI C82.11.
10. Drivers to track evenly across multiple lamp lengths and all light levels.
11. Configuration tool available to optimize the following for LED fixtures:
a. Light level.
b. Efficacy.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 9
c. Thermal performance.
B. 3-Wire Control:
1. Provide integral fault protection to prevent driver failure in the event of a mis-wire.
2. Operate from input voltage of 120 V through 277 V at 60 Hz.
C. Digital Control:
1. Lights automatically return to the setting prior to power interruption.
2. Operate from input voltage of 120 V through 277 V at 60 Hz.
3. Each driver responds independently to:
a. Up to 32 occupant sensors.
b. Up to 16 daylight sensors.
4. Responds to digital load shed command. (Example: If light output is at 30 percent and
a load shed command of 10 percent is received, the ballast automatically sets the
maximum light output at 90 percent and lowers current light output by three percent to
27 percent).
D. Product(s):
1. Forward Phase (Neutral Wire Required), 3-Wire, and Digital Control, One Percent
Dimming; Lutron A-Series:
a. Dimming Range: 100 to one percent relative light output.
b. Maximum Inrush Current: 2 amperes for 120V and 277V drivers.
c. Constant Current Drivers:
1) Support from 200 mA to 2.1 A (in 10 mA steps) to ensure a compatible
driver exists.
2) Support LED arrays up to 40W or 53 W (710 mA to 1.05 A in 10 mA
steps).
d. Constant Voltage Drivers:
1) Support from 10 V to 60 V (in 0.5 V steps) to ensure a compatible driver
exists.
2) Support LED arrays up to 40W.
2. Digital Control, Five Percent Dimming; Lutron EcoSystem 5-Series:
a. Dimming Range: 100 to five percent relative light output.
b. Maximum Inrush Current: Meets NEMA 410 inrush requirements.
c. Constant Current Drivers:
1) Support from 220 mA to 1.4 A to ensure a compatible driver exists.
2) Support LED arrays up to 60W.
2.05 POWER INTERFACES
A. Provide power interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.
B. General Requirements:
1. Phase independent of control input.
2. Rated for use in air-handling spaces as defined in UL 2043.
3. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
4. Diagnostics and Service: Replacing power interface does not require re-programming
of system or processor.
C. Product(s):
1. Phase-Adaptive Power Module; Lutron PHPM-PA: Provides interface for phase
control input to provide full 16 A circuit output of forward/reverse phase control for
compatible loads.
2. 3-Wire Fluorescent Power Module; Lutron PHPM-3F: Provides interface for phase
control input to provide full 16 A circuit output for compatible line-voltage control
fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts.
3. Switching Power Module; Lutron PHPM-SW: Provides interface for phase control
input to provide full 16 A circuit output of switching for compatible non-dim loads.
4. Phase-Adaptive Power Module with 3-Wire Fluorescent Input; Lutron PHPM-WBX:
Provides interface for fluorescent ballast control input to provide full 16 A circuit output
for compatible loads.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 10
5. Ten Volt Interface; Lutron GRX-TVI: Provides interface for phase control input to
provide full 16 A circuit output of switching and 0-10 V low voltage control for
compatible fluorescent electronic dimming ballasts.
2.06 MAIN UNITS (LUTRON GRAFIK EYE QS)
A. Product: Lutron GRAFIK Eye QS.
B. Provide main units with configuration and quantity of zones as indicated or as required to
control the loads as indicated.
C. Finish: As indicated on drawings.
D. Engrave units with button, zone, and scene descriptions as indicated on the drawings.
E. Integrated Wireless Capability:
1. Provide wireless communication inputs for:
a. Occupancy sensors.
b. Daylight sensors.
c. Wireless controller.
2. RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) between sensor and compatible RF receiving device(s).
3. RF Frequency: 434 MHz; operate in FCC governed frequency spectrum for periodic
operation; continuous transmission spectrum is not permitted.
F. Preset Lighting Control with Zone Override:
1. Intensity for each zone indicated by means of one illuminated bar graph per zone.
2. User-programmable zone and scene names.
3. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
4. Astronomical time clock and programmer interface provides access to:
a. Scene selections.
b. Fade zone to a level.
c. Fine-tuning of preset levels with scene raise/lower.
d. Lock out scenes and zones.
e. Fine-tuning of light levels with individual zone raise/lower.
f. Terminal block for wired infrared signal input.
g. Enable/disable wall station.
5. Light intensity with real time energy savings by digital display.
6. Fade time indicated by digital display for current scene while fading.
7. Integral wide angle infrared receiver.
8. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be
adjusted without altering scene values stored in memory.
9. Direct Low-Voltage Control of Digital Ballasts and LED drivers (120V, 220/240V, 277V
and/or 347V Lighting):
a. Electronically link a digital fluorescent lighting ballast to a zone for both
dimming and turning on/off.
b. Electronically assign daylight sensors to digital ballasts and line voltage
dimmers for proportional daylight harvesting.
c. Single integral controller with Class 1 or Class 2 isolated digital output signal
conforming to IEC 60929; capable of direct control without interface.
10. Creates daylighting rows independent of control zones.
11. Capable of re-zoning without re-wiring using programming display on unit.
12. Outputs can be virtually mapped to other device's outputs.
13. Zone raise/lower buttons capable of controlling local lighting loads connected to the
main unit or remote lighting zones in the system.
G. Preset Shade Control with Zone Override:
1. Preset expandable shade control: Provide up to three columns of shade control.
2. For temporary local overrides, individual raise/lower buttons to allow zones to be
adjusted without altering scene values stored in memory.
H. Provides one direct-wired occupancy sensor connection without interface or power pack.
2.07 LIGHTING CONTROL MODULES (LUTRON ENERGI SAVR NODE)
A. Provide lighting control modules as indicated or as required to control the loads as indicated.
B. General Requirements:
1. Listed to UL 508 as industrial control equipment.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 11
2. Delivered and installed as a listed factory-assembled panel.
3. Passively cooled via free-convection, unaided by fans or other means.
4. Mounting: Surface.
5. Connection without interface to wired:
a. Occupancy sensors.
b. Daylight sensors.
c. IR receivers for personal control.
6. LED status indicators confirm communication with occupancy sensors, daylight
sensors, and IR receivers.
7. Contact Closure Input:
a. Directly accept contact closure input from a dry contact closure or sold-state
output without interface to:
1) Activate scenes.
(a) Scene activation from momentary or maintained closure.
2) Enable or disable after hours.
(a) Automatic sweep to user-specified level after user-specified time
has elapsed.
(b) System will provide occupants a visual warning prior to sweeping
lights to user-specified level.
(c) Occupant can reset timeout by interacting with the lighting system.
3) Activate or deactivate demand response (load shed).
(a) Load shed event will reduce lighting load by user-specified
amount.
8. Emergency Contact Closure Input:
a. Turn all zones to full output during emergency state via direct contact closure
input from UL 924 listed emergency lighting interface, security system or fire
alarm system.
b. Allow configurable zone response during emergency state.
c. Disable control operation until emergency signal is cleared.
9. Supplies power for control link for keypads and control interfaces.
10. Distributes sensor data among multiple lighting control modules.
11. Capable of being controlled via wireless sensors and controls.
C. Switching Lighting Control Modules:
1. Product(s):
a. Lutron SoftSwitch Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4S16-S: 16 A continuous-
use per channel.
b. Lutron SoftSwitch Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4S20-S: 20 A (16 A
ballast) continuous-use per channel.
2. Switching:
a. Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all
lighting loads.
b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when
power is applied to and removed from load circuits.
c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
d. Module to integrate up to four individually controlled zones.
e. Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects "off" at any control to disconnect
the load from line supply.
D. 0-10V Lighting Control Modules:
1. Product(s):
a. Lutron 0-10V Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4T16-S: 16 A continuous-use per
channel.
b. Lutron 0-10V Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-4T20-S: 20 A (16 A ballast)
continuous-use per channel.
2. Coordination Between Low Voltage Dimming Module and Line Voltage Relay:
Capable of being electronically linked to single zone.
3. Single low voltage dimming module; capable of controlling following light sources:
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 12
a. 0-10V analog voltage signal.
1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
2) Sink current per IEC 60929.
b. 10V-0V analog voltage signal.
1) Provide Class 2 isolated 0-10V output signal conforming to IEC 60929.
2) Sink current per IEC 60929.
4. Switching:
a. Rated Life of Relay: Typical of 1,000,000 cycles at fully rated 16 A for all
lighting loads.
b. Load switched in manner that prevents arcing at mechanical contacts when
power is applied to and removed from load circuits.
c. Fully rated output continuous duty for inductive, capacitive, and resistive loads.
d. Module to integrate up to four individually controlled zones.
e. Utilize air gap off, activated when user selects "off" at any control to disconnect
the load from line supply.
E. Digital Fixture Lighting Control Modules:
1. Product(s):
a. Lutron EcoSystem Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-1ECO-S: One EcoSystem
Digital Link.
b. Lutron EcoSystem Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-2ECO-S: Two EcoSystem
Digital Links.
2. Provides two-way feedback with digital fixtures for energy monitoring, light level
status, lamp failure reporting, and ballast/driver failure reporting.
3. Provide testing capability using manual override buttons.
4. Each low-voltage digital communication link to support up to 64 ballasts or LED
drivers capable of NFPA 70 Class 1 or Class 2 installation.
F. Total Light Management Control Module (Digital Lighting and Shades Control):
1. Product: Lutron EcoSystem with Shades Energi Savr Node; Model QSN-2ECO-
PS120 - Two EcoSystem Digital Links.
2. Ten fused 30W (60W peak) 24V DC outputs provide power to compatible shades,
drapery drive units, keypads, and accessories.
3. Provide power for 10 to 30 shades dependent on shade dimensions.
4. Provide smart diagnostics for system verification.
5. Provide testing capability using manual override buttons.
6. Each low-voltage digital communication link to support up to 64 ballasts capable of
NFPA 70 Class 1 or Class 2 installation.
2.08 DIGITAL DIMMING BALLAST AND SWITCHING MODULES (LUTRON ECOSYSTEM)
A. Provide digital dimming ballast and switching modules as indicated or as required to control
the loads as indicated.
B. General Requirements:
1. Provide continuous 3-wire signal dimming to compatible 3-wire electronic dimming
ballasts.
2. Utilize air gap off to disconnect the load from line supply.
3. Connect without interface to:
a. Occupancy sensor.
b. Daylight sensor.
c. Personal control input (wall station or infrared receiver).
4. Generate digital communication commands to distribute ballast and sensor data on
the digital bus.
5. If power is interrupted and subsequently restored, lights automatically return to the
setting prior to power interruption.
6. Each ballast module responds independently to:
a. Up to 32 occupancy sensors.
b. Up to 64 personal control inputs.
c. Two daylight sensors.
7. Unique internal reference number visible displayed on module cover.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 13
8. Averages two independent daylight harvesting inputs internally.
9. Responds to digital load shed command.
a. Sets high end trim.
b. Automatically scales light output proportional to load shed command. (Example:
If light output is at 30 percent and a load shed command of 10 percent is
received, the ballast to automatically set the maximum light output at 90
percent and lower current light output by 3 percent to 27 percent).
10. Provide integral fault protection to prevent ballast module failure in the event of a mis-
wire.
C. Product(s):
1. 3-Wire Ballast Module, 2 Amp; Lutron EcoSystem Model C5-BMF-2A:
a. Integrates up to 2 amps of 3-wire electronic dimming ballasts into EcoSystem
digital control system as a single zone.
2. 3-Wire Ballast Module, 16 Amp; Lutron EcoSystem Model C5-BMJ-16A:
a. Integrates up to 16 amps of 3-wire electronic dimming ballasts into EcoSystem
digital control system as a single zone.
b. Integrates up to 16 amps of switched high intensity discharge (HID) lighting
load into EcoSystem digital control system as a single zone.
3. Switching Power Module, 16 Amp; Lutron EcoSystem Model C5-XPJ-16A:
a. Integrates up to 16 amps of high in-rush lighting load (magnetic fluorescent
ballast, electronic fluorescent ballast, HID, incandescent, magnetic low-voltage,
electronic low-voltage, neon/cold cathode and motor loads) into EcoSystem
digital control system as a single zone.
2.09 CONTROL STATIONS
A. Provide control stations with configuration as indicated or as required to control the loads as
indicated.
B. Wired Control Stations:
1. General Requirements:
a. Class 2 (low voltage).
b. UL listed.
c. Control stations can be replaced without reprogramming.
d. Finish: As indicated on drawings.
2. Product(s):
a. Multi-Scene Wired Control:
1) Product(s):
(a) Lutron seeTouch QS.
(b) Lutron Signature Series.
(c) Lutron Architrave.
2) Allows control of any devices part of the lighting control system.
3) Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communication.
4) Functionality:
(a) Upon button press, LEDs to immediately illuminate.
(b) LEDs to reflect the true system status. LEDs to remain illuminated
if the button press was properly processed or LEDs to turn off if
the button press was not processed.
(c) Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.
(d) Replacement of units does not require reprogramming.
5) Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware.
6) Engrave wall stations with button, zone, and scene descriptions as
indicated on the drawings.
7) Silk-screened borders, logos, and graduations to use graphic process
that chemically bonds graphics to faceplate, resistant to removal by
scratching and cleaning.
8) Software Configuration:
(a) Customizable control station device button functionality:
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 14
(1) Buttons can be programmed to perform single defined
action.
(2) Buttons can be programmed to perform defined action on
press and defined action on release.
(3) Buttons can be programmed using conditional logic off of a
state variable such as time of day or partition status.
9) Control station device LEDs to support logic that defines when it is
illuminated:
(a) Scene logic (logic is true when all zones are at defined levels).
(b) Room logic (logic is true when at least one zone is on).
(c) Pathway (logic is true when at least one zone is on).
(d) Last scene (logic is true when spaces are in defined scenes).
10) Contact Closure Interface: Accepts both momentary and maintained
contact closures.
11) Provide integral infrared receiver for personal control where indicated.
b. Single-Scene or Zoned Wired Control:
1) Product: Lutron Pico Wired Control.
2) Turn an individual fixture or group of fixtures on and off.
3) Raise and lower light levels.
4) Recall favorite light levels.
c. Four-Button Preset Wallstation:
1) Product: Lutron EcoSystem CC-4BRL Four-Button Control.
2) Recall four scenes plus all on or all off for one group of fixtures.
3) Master raise/lower control for entire group of fixtures.
4) Integral IR receiver for personal control.
5) Immediate local LED response upon button activation to indicate that a
system command has been requested.
d. Wired Keyswitch:
1) Product: Lutron QS Keyswitch.
2) Configuration:
(a) Type 3MOC - Three position, momentary, center position key
removal; Lutron Model QSWS2-KSI-3MOC.
(b) Type 3MAC - Three position, maintained, center position key
removal; Lutron Model QSWS2-KSI-3MAC.
(c) Type 2MAC - Two position, maintained, center position key
removal; Lutron Model QSWS2-KSI-2MAC.
(d) Type 2MAA - Two position, maintained, any position key removal;
Lutron Model QSWS2-KSI-2MAA.
3) Allows control of any devices part of the lighting control system.
4) Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communication.
5) Functionality:
(a) Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.
(b) Requires key insertion to activate actions.
6) Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware.
7) Engrave wall stations with button, zone, and scene descriptions as
indicated on the drawings.
8) Silk-screened borders, logos, and graduations to use graphic process
that chemically bonds graphics to faceplate, resistant to removal by
scratching and cleaning.
9) Software Configuration:
(a) Customizable control station device button functionality:
(1) Key positions can be programmed to perform single defined
action.
(2) Key positions can be programmed using conditional logic off
of a state variable such as time of day or partition status.
e. Slider Control:
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 15
1) Product: Lutron QS Slider Control.
2) Allows control of any lighting zone in the system via intuitive analog
slider control.
3) Utilize RS485 wiring for low-voltage communication.
4) Available in 1 to 16 zone configurations.
5) Available with or without a take switch to activate the slider scene.
6) Optional keypad ganging.
7) Slider zones can be chained in partitioned spaces.
8) Provide faceplates with concealed mounting hardware.
9) Provide customizable engraving of faceplate as indicated on the
drawings.
10) Functionality:
(a) Full range dimming of individual zones or groups of zones.
(b) Zone levels indicated by slider position.
(c) Integrates with multi-scene wired control.
C. Wireless (Radio Frequency) Controls:
1. Product(s):
a. Type P-2BN - 2-Button Control; Lutron Pico Wireless Control Model PJ-2B.
1) Button Marking: As indicated on drawings.
b. Type P-2BNRL - 2-Button with Raise/Lower Control; Lutron Pico Wireless
Control Model PJ-2BRL.
1) Button Marking: As indicated on drawings.
c. Type P-3BN - 3-Button Control; Lutron Pico Wireless Control Model PJ-3B.
1) Button Marking: As indicated on drawings.
d. Type P-3BNRL - 3-Button with Raise/Lower Control; Lutron Pico Wireless
Control Model PJ-3BRL.
1) Button Marking: As indicated on drawings.
e. Single Pedestal; Lutron Pico Pedestal Model L-PED1.
f. Double Pedestal; Lutron Pico Pedestal Model L-PED2.
g. Triple Pedestal; Lutron Pico Pedestal Model L-PED3.
h. Quadruple Pedestal; Lutron Pico Pedestal Model L-PED4.
i. Screw Mounting Kit; Lutron Model PICO-SM-KIT.
j. Wallplate Adapter; Lutron Model PICO-FP-ADAPT.
2. Quantity: As indicated on the drawings.
3. Communicates via radio frequency to compatible dimmers, switches, and plug-in
modules.
4. Does not require external power packs, power or communication wiring.
5. Allows for easy reprogramming without replacing unit.
6. Button Programming:
a. Single action.
b. Toggle action.
c. Defined action on press and defined action on release.
7. Includes LED to indicate button press or programming mode status.
8. Models available with integral night light.
9. Mounting:
a. Capable of being mounted with a table stand or directly to a wall under a
faceplate.
b. Faceplates: Provide concealed mounting hardware.
10. Power: Battery-operated with minimum ten-year battery life.
11. Finish: As indicated on drawings.
D. Infrared Handheld Controls:
1. Product(s):
a. Four-Scene Wireless Infrared Transmitter; Lutron Model GRX-IT-WH:
Operates up to 50 feet (15 m) line-of-sight to receiver.
b. Single-Scene Wireless Infrared Transmitter; Lutron Model C-FLRC-WH:
Operates up to 12 feet (3.7 m) line-of-sight to receiver.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 16
2. Quantity: As indicated on the drawings.
3. Designed for use in conjunction with compatible infrared receiver and lighting control;
compatibility dependent on that receiver, not transmitter.
4. Learnable by other variable frequency remote controls.
2.10 LOW-VOLTAGE CONTROL INTERFACES
A. Provide low-voltage control interfaces as indicated or as required to control the loads as
indicated.
B. UL listed.
C. Contact Closure Interface:
1. Product: Lutron Model QSE-IO.
2. The contact closure input device to accept both momentary and maintained contact
closures.
3. The contact closure output device can be configured for maintained or pulsed outputs.
4. Contact closure can be programmed using conditional logic off of a state variable
such as time of day or partition status.
D. Wallbox Input Closure Interface:
1. Product: Lutron Model QSE-CI-WCI.
2. Mounts in wallbox behind contact closure keypad to provide interface for up to eight
contact closure inputs.
3. The contact closure input device to accept both momentary and maintained contact
closures.
E. RS232 and Ethernet Interface:
1. Product: Lutron Model QSE-CI-NWK-E.
2. Provide ability to communicate via Ethernet or RS232 to audiovisual equipment,
touchscreens, etc.
3. Allow creation of custom output strings.
4. Provide control of:
a. Light scene selections.
b. Fine-tuning of light scene levels with raise/lower.
c. Shade group presets.
d. Fine-tuning of shade preset levels with raise/lower.
e. Simulate system wall station button presses and releases.
5. Provide status monitoring of:
a. Light scene status.
b. Shade group status.
c. Wall station button presses and releases.
d. Wall station LEDs.
6. Provide ability to send custom output strings.
F. DMX Interface:
1. Product: Lutron Model QSM-CI-DMX.
2. Provide ability to:
a. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 lighting channel.
b. Map a single zone intensity to three DMX512 channels for RGB/CMY color
control.
c. Map a single zone intensity to a single DMX512 integration channel.
d. Smoothly transition from one color to another in a cross fade.
e. Automatically sequence through a variety of colors.
f. Download, program, and customize a color wheel for each unit.
G. Sensor Modules:
1. Products:
a. Sensor module with both wired and wireless inputs; Lutron Model QSM2-4W-
C.
b. Sensor module with wired inputs only; Lutron Model QSMX-4W-C.
c. Sensor module with wireless inputs only; Lutron Model QSM2-XW-C.
2. Wired Modules:
a. Provide wired inputs for:
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 17
1) Occupancy sensors.
2) Daylight sensors.
3) IR receivers for personal control.
4) Digital ballast wall stations.
3. Wireless Modules:
a. Provide wireless communication inputs for:
1) Occupancy sensors.
2) Daylight sensors.
3) Wireless controller.
b. RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) between sensor and compatible RF receiving devices.
c. RF Frequency: 434 MHz; operates in FCC governed frequency spectrum for
periodic operation; continuous transmission spectrum is not permitted.
4. Communicate sensor information to wired low-voltage digital link for use by
compatible devices.
2.11 WIRED SENSORS
A. Wired Occupancy Sensors:
1. General Requirements:
a. Connects directly to compatible ballasts and modules without the need of a
power pack or other interface.
b. Turns off or reduces lighting automatically after reasonable time delay when a
room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy the space.
c. Accommodates all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours
and habits.
d. Comply with UL 94.
e. Self-Adaptive: Continually adjusts sensitivity and timing to ensure optimal
lighting control for any use of the space.
f. Furnished with field-adjustable controls for time delay and sensitivity to override
any adaptive features.
g. Provide capability to:
1) Add additional timeout system-wide without need to make local
adjustment on sensor.
2) Group multiple sensors.
h. Power Failure Memory: Settings and learned parameters to be saved in non-
volatile memory and not lost should power be interrupted and subsequently
restored.
i. Furnished with all necessary mounting hardware and instructions.
j. Class 2 devices.
k. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Indicate viewing directions on mounting bracket.
l. Wall-Mounted Sensors: Provide swivel-mount base.
m. Color: White.
2. Wired Passive Infrared Sensors:
a. Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust and
residue build-up.
b. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted
viewing areas.
c. Product(s):
1) Type WP-CEILING450 - Ceiling-Mounted Passive Infrared Sensor, 450
square feet (42 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CIR-450-WH: Coverage of
450 square feet (42 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7
m); 360 degree field of view.
2) Type WP-CEILING1500 - Ceiling-Mounted Passive Infrared Sensor,
1500 square feet (140 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CIR-1500-WH:
Coverage of 1500 square feet (140 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12
feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 360 degree field of view.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 18
3) Type WP-WALL - Wall-Mounted Passive Infrared Sensor; Lutron Model
LOS-WIR-WH: Coverage of 1600 square feet (149 sq m) with ceiling
height of 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 110 degree field of view.
3. Wired Ultrasonic Sensors:
a. Utilize an operating frequency of 32 kHz or 40 kHz, crystal-controlled to operate
within plus/minus 0.005 percent tolerance.
b. Product(s):
1) Type WU-CEILING500 - Ceiling-Mounted Ultrasonic Sensor, 500 square
feet (46 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CUS-500-WH: Coverage of 500
square feet (46 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to 3.7 m);
180 degree field of view.
2) Type WU-CEILING1000 - Ceiling-Mounted Ultrasonic Sensor, 1000
square feet (93 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CUS-1000-WH: Coverage of
1,000 square feet (93 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to 3.7
m); 180 degree field of view.
3) Type WU-CEILING2000 - Ceiling-Mounted Ultrasonic Sensor, 2000
square feet (186 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CUS-2000-WH: Coverage of
2000 square feet (186 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to 3.7
m); 360 degree field of view.
4. Wired Dual Technology Sensors:
a. Passive Infrared: Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to
eliminate dust and residue build-up.
b. Ultrasonic: Utilize an operating frequency of 32 kHz or 40 kHz, crystal-
controlled to operate within plus/minus 0.005 percent tolerance.
c. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted
viewing areas.
d. Isolated Relay: Provide an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open,
Normally Closed, and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data
Logging and other control options where indicated.
e. Integral Photocell: Provide an integral photocell with adjustable sensitivity to
prevent lights from turning on when there is sufficient natural light where
indicated.
f. Product(s), Without Isolated Relay and Integral Photocell:
1) Type CDT500 - Ceiling-Mounted Dual Technology Sensor, 500 square
feet (46 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CDT-500-WH: Coverage of 500
square feet (46 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to 3.7 m);
180 degree field of view.
2) Type CDT1000 - Ceiling-Mounted Dual Technology Sensor, 1000
square feet (93 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CDT-1000-WH: Coverage of
1000 square feet (93 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to 3.7
m); 180 degree field of view.
3) Type CDT2000 - Ceiling-Mounted Dual Technology Sensor, 2000
square feet (186 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CDT-2000-WH: Coverage of
2000 square feet (186 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to 3.7
m); 360 degree field of view.
4) Type WDT - Wall-Mounted Dual Technology Sensor; Lutron Model
LOS-WDT-WH: Coverage of 1600 square feet (149 sq m) with ceiling
height of 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 110 degree field of view.
g. Product(s), With Isolated Relay and Integral Photocell:
1) Type CDT500R - Ceiling-Mounted Dual Technology Sensor, 500 square
feet (46 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CDT-500R-WH: Coverage of 500
square feet (46 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to 3.7 m);
180 degree field of view; with isolated relay and integral photocell.
2) Type CDT1000R - Ceiling-Mounted Dual Technology Sensor, 1000
square feet (93 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CDT-1000R-WH: Coverage
of 1000 square feet (93 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 19
3.7 m); 180 degree field of view; with isolated relay and integral
photocell.
3) Type CDT2000R - Ceiling-Mounted Dual Technology Sensor, 2000
square feet (186 sq m); Lutron Model LOS-CDT-2000R-WH: Coverage
of 2000 square feet (186 sq m) with ceiling height of 8 to 12 feet (2.6 to
3.7 m); 360 degree field of view; with isolated relay and integral
photocell.
4) Type WDTR - >>Wall-Mounted Dual Technology Sensor; Lutron Model
LOS-WDT-R-WH: Coverage of 1600 square feet (149 sq m) with ceiling
height of 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 110 degree field of view; with
isolated relay and integral photocell.
B. Sensor Power Packs:
1. Product(s):
a. Lutron Model PP-120H Power Pack; 120 VAC power input/24 VDC, 100 mA
power output.
b. Lutron Model PP-230H Power Pack; 230 VAC power input/24 VDC, 100 mA
power output.
c. Lutron Model PP-277H Power Pack; 277 VAC power input/24 VDC, 100 mA
power output.
d. Lutron Model PP-347H Power Pack; 347 VAC power input/24 VDC, 100 mA
power output.
e. Lutron Model PP-DV Power Pack; 120-277 VAC power input/24 VDC, 100
mA power output.
f. Lutron Model PP-DV-M Power Pack; 120-277 VAC power input (manual)/24
VDC, 100 mA power output.
g. Lutron Model PP-SH Power Pack; control relay only (no power input/output);
requires another power pack for power and counts as one of three sensors
connected to a power pack.
2. Provide sensor power packs where required for power connection to sensors.
3. For ease of mounting, installation and future service, power pack(s) to be able to
mount through a 1/2 inch knockout in a standard electrical enclosure and be an
integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching
control relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power. Transformer to provide
power to a minimum of three sensors.
4. Relay Contact Rating: 20 A ballast (120/277 V); 15 A incandescent (120 V).
5. Plenum-rated.
6. Control Wiring Between Sensors and Control Units: Class 2, 18-24 AWG, stranded UL
Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums,
where applicable.
C. Infrared Receivers:
1. Product: Lutron Model EC-IR-WH.
2. Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication.
3. Can be replaced without reprogramming.
4. 360 degree reception of wireless infrared remote controls.
5. Immediate local LED response upon reception of handheld transmitter
communication.
6. Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles.
7. Constructed via sonic welding.
8. Color: White.
D. Wired Daylight Sensors:
1. Digital Interior Daylight Sensor:
a. Product: Lutron Model EC-DIR-WH.
b. Use Class 2 wiring for low voltage communication.
c. Can be replaced without reprogramming.
d. Open-loop basis for daylight sensor control scheme.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 20
e. Stable output over temperature from 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104
degrees F (40 degrees C).
f. Partially shielded for accurate detection of available daylight to prevent fixture
lighting and horizontal light component from skewing sensor detection.
g. Provide linear response from 0 to 500 footcandles.
h. Integral IR receiver for personal control.
i. Mountable on lighting fixtures or recessed acoustical ceiling tiles.
j. Constructed via sonic welding.
k. Color: White.
2. Daylight Control Package:
a. Product: Lutron CES Series (Lutron CES Analog Sensor, LC8 Controller,
and Power Pack).
b. Controller:
1) Product: Lutron Model LC8.
2) Automatically switches a dry contact according to changes in ambient
light levels.
3) Fully adjustable separate high and low setpoints, with an adjustable dead
band between set points to prevent unwanted cycling.
4) Input time delay to prevent unwanted cycling due to intermittent light
level fluctuations.
5) Signal/setpoint and relay status indication.
6) Sensor calibration input.
c. Sensors:
1) Class 2, three-wire analog devices.
2) Provision for zero or offset based signal.
3) Indoor Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/I: With fresnel lens and 60
degree cone of response; sensor range of 0 to 750 footcandles.
4) Outdoor Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/O: Weatherproof, with hood
over aperture to shield sensor from direct sunlight; sensor range of 0 to
750 footcandles.
5) Atrium Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/A: With translucent dome
and 180 degree field of view; sensor range of 2 to 2,500 footcandles.
6) Skylight Photo Sensors; Lutron Model CES/S: With translucent dome
and 180 degree field of view; sensor range of 10 to 7,500 footcandles.
E. Infrared Partition Sensors:
1. Product: Lutron Model GRX-IRPS-WH.
2. Provide contact closure based on status of the partition wall (open/close) enabling
automatic linking of controls.
2.12 WIRELESS SENSORS
A. General Requirements:
1. Operational life of 10 years without the need to replace batteries when installed per
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Communicates directly to compatible RF receiving devices through use of a radio
frequency communications link.
3. Does not require external power packs, power wiring, or communication wiring.
4. Capable of being placed in test mode to verify correct operation from the face of the
unit.
5. RF Range: 30 feet (9 m) between sensor and compatible RF receiving device(s).
6. Electromagnetic Interference/Radio Frequency Interference (EMI/RFI) Limits: Comply
with FCC requirements of CFR, Title 47, Part 15, for Class B application.
B. Wireless Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors:
1. General Requirements:
a. Provides a clearly visible method of indication to verify that motion is being
detected during testing and that the unit is communicating to compatible RF
receiving devices.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 21
b. Utilize multiple segmented lens, with internal grooves to eliminate dust and
residue build-up.
c. Sensing Mechanism: Passive infrared coupled with technology for sensing fine
motions; Lutron XCT Technology. Signal processing technology detects fine-
motion passive infrared (PIR) signals without the need to change the sensor's
sensitivity threshold.
d. Provide optional, readily accessible, user-adjustable controls for timeout,
automatic/manual-on, and sensitivity.
e. Turns off lighting after reasonable and adjustable time delay once the last
person to occupy the space vacates a room or area. Provide adjustable timeout
settings of 1, 5, 15, and 30 minutes.
f. Capable of turning dimmer's lighting load on to an optional locked preset level
selectable by the user. Locked preset range to be selectable on the dimmer
from 1 percent to 100 percent.
g. Color: White.
h. Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions for both temporary
and permanent mounting.
i. Provide temporary mounting means to allow user to check proper performance
and relocate as needed before permanently mounting sensor. Temporary
mounting method to be design for easy, damage-free removal.
j. Sensor lens to illuminate during test mode when motion is detected to allow
installer to verify coverage prior to permanent mounting.
k. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors:
1) Provide surface mounting bracket compatible with drywall, plaster, wood,
concrete, and compressed fiber ceilings.
2) Provide recessed mounting bracket compatible with drywall and
compressed fiber ceilings.
3) Provide customizable mask to block off unwanted viewing areas.
l. Wall-Mounted Sensors: Provide wall or corner mounting brackets compatible
with drywall and plaster walls.
2. Wireless Combination Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors:
a. Ceiling-Mounted Sensors: Programmable to operate as an occupancy sensor
(automatic-on and automatic-off), an occupancy sensor with low light feature
(automatic-on when less than one footcandle of ambient light available and
automatic-off), or a vacancy sensor (manual-on and automatic-off).
b. Wall-Mounted Sensors: Programmable to operate as an occupancy sensor
(automatic-on and automatic-off), or a vacancy sensor (manual-on and
automatic-off).
c. Product(s):
1) Type OV-CEILING - Ceiling-Mounted Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor;
Lutron Radio Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-OCR2B-P-WH:
Coverage from 324 square feet (30.2 sq m) to 676 square feet (62.4 sq
m) depending on ceiling height from 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 360
degree field of view.
2) Type OV-WALL - Wall-Mounted Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor; Lutron
Radio Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-OWLB-P-WH: Minor motion
coverage of 1500 square feet (139.4 sq m) and major motion coverage
of 3000 square feet (278.7 sq m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6
to 2.4 m); 180 degree field of view.
3) Type OV-CORNER - Corner-Mounted Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor; <<
Lutron Radio Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-OKLB-P-WH; or Lutron
Radio Powr Savr Series, Model ULFR2-OKLB-P-WH (BAA-Buy
American Act Compliant)>>: Minor motion coverage of 1225 square
feet (113.8 sq m) and major motion coverage of 2500 square feet (232.3
sq m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6 to 2.4 m); 90 degree field of
view.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 22
4) Type OV-HALL - Hallway Occupancy/Vacancy Sensor; Lutron Radio
Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-OHLB-P-WH: Major motion coverage of
up to 150 feet (45.7 m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6 to 2.4 m);
narrow field of view.
3. Wireless Vacancy-Only Sensors:
a. Operates only as a vacancy sensor (manual-on and automatic-off) in
accordance with California Title 24 requirements.
b. Product(s):
1) Type V-CEILING - Ceiling-Mounted Vacancy-Only Sensor; Lutron
Radio Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-VCR2B-P-WH: Coverage from
324 square feet (30.2 sq m) to 676 square feet (62.4 sq m) depending on
ceiling height from 8 to 12 feet (2.4 to 3.7 m); 360 degree field of view.
2) Type V-WALL - Wall-Mounted Vacancy-Only Sensor; Lutron Radio
Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-VWLB-P-WH: Minor motion coverage
of 1500 square feet (139.4 sq m) and major motion coverage of 3000
square feet (278.7 sq m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6 to 2.4
m); 180 degree field of view.
3) Type V-CORNER - Corner-Mounted Vacancy-Only Sensor; Lutron
Radio Powr Savr Series, Model LFR2-VKLB-P-WH: Minor motion
coverage of 1225 square feet (113.8 sq m) and major motion coverage
of 2500 square feet (232.3 sq m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6
to 2.4 m); 90 degree field of view.
4) Type V-HALL - Hallway Vacancy-Only Sensor; Lutron Radio Powr
Savr Series, Model LFR2-VHLB-P-WH: Major motion coverage of up to
150 feet (45.7 m) with mounting height of 6 to 8 feet (1.6 to 2.4 m);
narrow field of view.
C. Wireless Daylight Sensors:
1. Product: Lutron Model LFR2-DCRB.
2. Open-loop basis for daylight sensor control scheme.
3. Stable output over temperature from 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 104 degrees F
(40 degrees C).
4. Partially shielded for accurate detection of available daylight to prevent fixture lighting
and horizontal light component from skewing sensor detection.
5. Provide linear response from 0 to 10,000 footcandles.
6. Color: White.
7. Mounting:
a. Provide surface mounting bracket compatible with drywall, plaster, wood,
concrete, and compressed fiber ceilings.
b. Provide all necessary mounting hardware and instructions for both temporary
and permanent mounting.
c. Provide temporary mounting means to allow user to check proper performance
and relocate as needed before permanently mounting sensor. Temporary
mounting method to be design for easy, damage-free removal.
8. Meets California Title 24 requirements.
2.13 ACCESSORIES
A. Emergency Lighting Interface:
1. Product: Lutron Model LUT-ELI.
2. Provides total system listing to UL 924 when used with lighting control system.
3. Senses all three phases of building power.
4. Provides an output to power panels or digital ballast interfaces if power on any phase
fails and sends all lights controlled by these devices to an emergency light level
setting. Lights to return to their previous intensities when normal power is restored.
5. Accepts a contact closure input from a fire alarm control panel.
B. Provide power supplies as indicated or as required to power system devices and
accessories.
1. Product(s):
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 23
a. Junction box-mounted power supply for shades, keypads, and accessories, and
for providing additional low voltage power to communication link; Lutron Model
QSPS-J-1-50; with miswire and thermal protection.
b. Plug-in power supply for shades, drapery drive units, keypads, and
accessories, and for providing additional low voltage power to communication
link; Lutron Model QSPS-P1-1-50; with miswire protection; powered from
standard receptacle using cord 6 feet (1.8 m) in length.
c. Ten output power supply panel for shades, draper y drive units, keypads and
accessories, and for providing additional low voltage power to communication
link; Lutron Model QSPS-P1-10-60.
d. Power supply for keypads and accessories (not for shades/window treatments),
and for providing additional low voltage power to communication link; Lutron
Model STEP-PS.
2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Factory Testing; Lutron Standard Factory Testing:
1. Perform full-function factory testing on all completed assemblies. Statistical sampling
is not acceptable.
2. Perform full-function factory testing on 100 percent of all ballasts and LED drivers.
3. Perform factory audit burn-in of all dimming assemblies and panels at 104 degrees F
(40 degrees C) at full load for two hours.
4. Perform factory burn-in of 100 percent of all ballasts at 104 degrees F (40 degrees C).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.
B. Verify that ratings and configurations of system components are consistent with the indicated
requirements.
C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive system components.
D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where
applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Provide dedicated network between lighting management system computer and lighting
management hubs.
D. Define each dimmer/relay load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control functions.
E. Sensor Locations:
1. Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is specified in
Part 2 under "DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS", locate sensors in accordance with layout provided by Lighting
Control Manufacturer. Lighting Control Manufacturer may direct Contractor regarding
sensor relocation should conditions require a deviation from locations indicated.
Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is not
specified, locate sensors in accordance with Drawings.
2. Sensor locations indicated are diagrammatic. Within the design intent, reasonably
minor adjustments to locations may be made in order to optimize coverage and avoid
conflicts or problems affecting coverage, in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
F. Mount exterior daylight sensors to point due north with constant view of daylight.
G. Ensure that daylight sensor placement minimizes sensor view of electric light sources.
Locate ceiling-mounted and luminaire-mounted daylight sensors to avoid direct view of
luminaires.
H. Automated Shade Control Sensors:
1. Mount rooftop cloudy day sensors to point in the direction of each facade.
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 24
2. Ensure that window shadow sensor placement provides an unobstructed view of
outdoors. Do not place at a skylight or above indirect luminaires.
I. Lamp Burn-In: Operate lamps at full output for prescribed period per manufacturer's
recommendations prior to use with any dimming controls. Replace lamps that fail
prematurely due to improper lamp burn-in.
J. Lamp Lead Lengths: Do not exceed 3 feet (0.9 m) for T4 4-pin compact and T5 BIAX lamps
and 7 feet (2.1 m) for T5, T5-HO, T8 U-bend, and T8 linear fluorescent lamps.
K. LED Light Engine/Array Lead Length: Do not exceed 100 feet (31 m).
L. System and Network Integration Consultation; Lutron LSC-INT-VISIT: Include as part of
the base bid additional costs for Lighting Control Manufacturer to conduct meeting with
facility representative and other related equipment manufacturers to discuss equipment and
integration procedures.
1. Coordinate scheduling of visit with Lighting Control Manufacturer. Manufacturer
recommends that this visit be scheduled early in construction phase, after system
purchase but prior to system installation.
M. Identify system components<< in accordance with Section 26 0553>>.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Startup Services; Lutron Standard Startup Services:
1. Manufacturer's authorized Service Representative to conduct minimum of two site
visits to ensure proper system installation and operation.
2. Conduct Pre-Installation visit to review requirements with installer as specified in Part
1 under "Administrative Requirements".
3. Conduct second site visit upon completion of lighting control system to perform
system startup and verify proper operation:
a. Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is
specified in Part 2 under “DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEM – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS”, authorized Service Representative
to verify sensor locations, in accordance with layout provided by Lighting
Control Manufacturer; Lighting Control Manufacturer may direct Contractor
regarding sensor relocation should conditions require a deviation from locations
indicated.
b. Verify connection of power wiring and load circuits.
c. Verify connection and location of controls.
d. Address devices.
e. Verify system operation control by control.
f. Verify proper operation of manufacturer's interfacing equipment.
g. Configure initial groupings of ballast for wall controls, daylight sensors and
occupancy sensors.
h. Provide initial rough calibration of sensors; fine-tuning of sensors is
responsibility of Contractor unless provided by Lighting Control Manufacturer as
part of Sensor Layout and Tuning service where specified in Part 2 under
"DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM - GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS".
i. Train Owner's representative on system capabilities, operation, and
maintenance, as specified in Part 3 under "Closeout Activities".
j. Obtain sign-off on system functions.
k. After Hours Startup; Lutron LSC-AH-SU: Include as an alternate to the base
bid additional costs to perform manufacturer's startup procedures outside
normal working hours (Monday through Friday, 7am to 5pm).
C. Correct defective work, adjust for proper operation, and retest until entire system complies
with contract documents.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. On-Site Scene and Level Tuning; Lutron LSC-AF-VISIT: Include as part of the base bid
additional costs for Lighting Control Manufacturer to visit site to conduct meeting with
SECTION 26 0943 - NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROLS Page 25
Owner's representative to make required lighting adjustments to the system for
conformance with original design intent.
B. Sensor Fine-Tuning: Where Lighting Control Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning
service is specified in Part 2 under “DIGITAL-NETWORK LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM –
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS”, Lighting Control Manufacturer to provide up to two additional
post-startup on-site service visits for fine-tuning of sensor calibration. Where Lighting Control
Manufacturer Sensor Layout and Tuning service is not specified, Contractor to provide fine-
tuning of sensor calibration.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match
original factory finish.
3.06 COMMISSIONING
A. See Section 01 9113 for commissioning requirements.
3.07 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.
B. See Section 01 7900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.
C. Demonstration:
1. On-Site Performance-Verification Walkthrough; Lutron LSC-WALK: Include as part
of the base bid additional costs for lighting control manufacturer to provide on-site
demonstration of system functionality to facility representative.
D. Training:
1. Include services of manufacturer's authorized Service Representative to perform on-
site training of Owner's personnel on operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
lighting control system as part of standard system start-up services.
a. Include training on software to be provided:
1) Configuration software used to make system programming and
configuration changes.
2) Control and monitor.
3) Energy savings display software.
4) Personal web-based control software.
2. Customer-Site Solution Training Visit; Lutron LSC-TRAINING: Include as part of the
base bid additional costs for Lighting Control Manufacturer to provide one day(s) of
additional on-site system training.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from subsequent construction operations.
3.09 MAINTENANCE
A. See Section 01 7000 - Execution Requirements, for additional requirements relating to
maintenance service.
B. Software Maintenance Agreement; Lutron LSC-SMA: Include as part of the base bid
additional costs for manufacturer to provide quarterly compatibility testing results for PC-
based lighting control software and new patches issued for Microsoft Operating System,
Database, and Browser tools.
1. If new Microsoft patches create a software conflict, manufacturer to provide lighting
control software patches to ensure continued operation.
C. System Optimization Visit; Lutron LSC-SYSOPT: Include as part of the base bid additional
costs for Lighting Control System Manufacturer to visit site six months after system start-up
to evaluate system usage and discuss opportunities to make efficiency improvements that
will fit with the current use of the facility.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 22 00 (16460) LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 1
SECTION 26 22 00 (16460) LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Dry-Type Distribution And Specialty Transformers Rated 1000 V And Less.
a. General-Purpose Distribution and Power Transformers
b. Buck-Boost Transformers
c. Control and Signal Transformers
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 05 26 (16060) - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
2. Section 26 05 53 (16075) - Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in Project with the following supporting data;
1. Product Data:
a. Include data on features, components, ratings, and performance for each type of
transformer specified. Include dimensioned plans, sections, and elevation views.
Show minimum clearances and installed devices and features.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and identify term inals for tap changing and connecting
field-installed wiring.
3. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transformers certifying that the products
furnished comply with requirements.
4. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
5. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for tests specified in Part 3.
6. Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in the maintenance manuals specified in
Division 01.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: In addition to requirements specified in Section 01450
(01 45 00) "Quality Control," an independent testing agency shall meet OSHA criteria for
accreditation of testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907; or shall be a full-member company of
the International Electrical Testing Association.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International
Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies, to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
B. Listing and Labeling: Provide transformers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
C. Comply with IEEE C2.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
SECTION 26 22 00 (16460) LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 2
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's written instructions
within the enclosure of each ventilated-type unit throughout periods during which equipment is
not energized and is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature
and humidity.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Acme Electric Corp.; Transformer Division (800-334-5214)
2. Cutler-Hammer/Eaton Corp. (800-498-2678)
3. GE Electrical Distribution & Control (203-747-7111)
4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. (800-964-4114)
5. Square D; A division of Groupe Schneider (888-778-2733)
2.02 TRANSFORMERS, GENERAL
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units of types specified, designed for
60-Hz service.
B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.
C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices, except for taps.
D. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.
E. Enclosure: Class complies with NEMA 250 for the environment in which installed.
2.03 GENERAL-PURPOSE DISTRIBUTION AND POWER TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NEMA ST 20 and list and label as com plying with UL 1561.
B. Cores: One leg per phase.
C. Windings: One coil per phase in primary and secondary.
D. Enclosure: Indoor, ventilated.
E. Insulation Class: 185 or 220 deg C class for transformers 15kVA or smaller; 220 deg C class
for transformers larger than 15kVA.
1. Rated Temperature Rise: 115 deg C maximum rise above 40 deg C.
F. Taps: For transformers 3kVA and larger, full-capacity taps in high-voltage windings are as
follows:
1. Taps, 3 through 10kVA: Two 5-percent taps below rated high voltage.
2. Taps, 15 through 500kVA: Six 2.5-percent taps, 2 above and 4 below rated high voltage.
3. Taps, 750kVA and above: Four 2.5-percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated high
voltage.
G. K-Factor Rating: Transformers indicated to be K-factor rated are listed to comply with
UL 1561 requirements for non-sinusoidal load current handling capability to the degree
defined by the designated K-factor.
1. Transformer design prevents overheating when carrying full load with harmonic content
corresponding to the designated K-factor.
2. Nameplate states the designated K-factor of the transformer.
H. Wall-Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets for transformers up to 45 kVA.
SECTION 26 22 00 (16460) LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 3
2.04 BUCK-BOOST TRANSFORMERS
A. Units comply with NEMA ST 1 and are listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or
UL 1561.
B. Description: Self-cooled dry type, rated for continuous duty, and connected as
autotransformers to provide the percentage of buck or boost indicated.
2.05 CONTROL AND SIGNAL TRANSFORMERS
A. Units comply with NEMA ST 1 and are listed and labeled as complying with UL 506.
B. Ratings: Continuous duty. If rating is not indicated, provide capacity exceeding peak load by
50 percent minimum.
C. Description: Self-cooled, 2 windings.
2.06 FINISHES
A. Indoor Units: Manufacturer's standard paint over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and primer.
B. Outdoor Units: Comply with ANSI C57.12.28.
2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Design and routine tests comply with referenced standards.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with safety requirements of IEEE C2.
B. Arrange equipment to provide adequate spacing for access and for circulation of cooling air.
C. Identify transformers and install warning signs according to Section 26 05 53 - "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
D. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.02 GROUNDING
A. Separately Derived Systems: Comply with NFPA 70 requirements for connecting to grounding
electrodes and for bonding to metallic piping near the transformer.
B. Comply with Section 26 05 26 - "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems” for materials
and installation requirements.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test Objectives: To ensure transformer is operational within industry and manufacturer's
tolerances, is installed according to the Contract Documents, and is suitable for energizing.
B. Test Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests for each transformer, attach a dated and
signed "Satisfactory Test" label to tested component.
C. Schedule tests and provide notification at least 7 days in advance of test commencement.
D. Report: Submit a written report of observations and tests. Report defective materials and
installation.
E. Tests: Include the following minimum inspections and tests according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91 for test methods and data correction
factors.
1. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical and electrical integrity, and
damage or deterioration. Verify that temporary shipping bracing has been removed.
Include internal inspection through access panels and covers.
SECTION 26 22 00 (16460) LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS Page 4
2. Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer's published
torque values or, if not available, those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3. Insulation Resistance: Perform mega ohmmeter tests of primary and secondary winding
to winding and winding to ground.
a. Minimum Test Voltage: 1000 V, dc.
b. Minimum Insulation Resistance: 500 mega ohms.
c. Duration of Each Test: 10 minutes.
d. Temperature Correction: Correct results for test temperature deviation from 20
deg C standard.
F. Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data.
Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Verify that transformers meet specified
requirements.
3.04 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect components. Remove paint splatters and other spots,
dirt, and debris. Repair scratches and mars on finish to match original finish. Clean
components internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A. After installing and cleaning, touch up scratches and mars on finish to match original finish.
B. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization equipment
throughout normal operating cycle of facility. Record primary and secondary voltages and tap
settings and submit with test results.
C. Adjust buck-boost transformer connections to provide optimum voltage conditions at utilization
equipment throughout normal operating cycle of facility.
D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial
Completion, provide on-site assistance in readjusting transformer tap settings to suit actual
occupied conditions. Provide up to 2 visits to Project site for this purpose without additional
cost.
1. Voltage Recordings: Contractor performed. Provide up to 48 hours of recording on the
low-voltage system of each medium-voltage transformer.
2. Point of Measurement: Make voltage recordings at load outlets selected by Owner’s
Representative.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 24 00 (16440) SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS Page 1
SECTION 26 24 00 (16440) SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Service And Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 V and Less.
2. Load Centers and Panel boards, over current Protective Devices, And Associated
Auxiliary Equipment Rated 600 V and less for The Following Types:
a. Lighting and Appliance Branch-Circuit Panel boards.
b. Distribution Panel boards.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 03 30 00 (03300) - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 26 05 19 (16490) - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
3. Section 26 05 53 (16075) - Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI : Electromagnetic interference
B. GFCI : Ground-fault circuit interrupter
C. RFI : Radio-frequency interference
D. RMS : Root mean square
E. SPDT : Single pole, double throw
F. TVSS : Transient voltage surge suppressor
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for Project with the following supporting data:
1. Product Data:
a. For each type of switchboard, panel board, over current protective device, TVSS
device, ground-fault protector, accessory, and component indicated. Include
dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
2. Shop Drawings: For each switchboard, panel board and related equipment.
a. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances
and service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices,
equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:
1) Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
2) Bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings.
3) Short-circuit current rating of switchboards and over current protective devices.
4) Descriptive documentation of optional barriers specified for electrical insulation
and isolation.
5) Utility company's metering provisions with indication of approval by utility
company.
6) UL listing for series rating of installed devices.
SECTION 26 24 00 (16440) SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS Page 2
7) Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
b. Wiring Diagrams: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring and differentiate
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that switchboards,
over current protective devices, accessories, and components will withstand seismic
forces defined in Section 26 05 48 (16071) “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical
Work." Include the following:
a. Basis of Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test
of assembled components or on calculation.
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
internal and external parts during a seismic event."
c. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of
internal and external parts during a seismic event and the unit will be fully
operational after the event."
d. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
e. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
4. Qualification Data: Submit data for testing agencies indicating that they comply with
qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
5. Field Test Reports: Submit written test reports and include the following:
a. Test procedures used.
b. Test results that comply with requirements.
c. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply
with requirements.
6. Manufacturer's field service report.
7. Updated mimic-bus diagram for switchboard reflecting field changes after final
switchboard load connections have been made, for record.
8. Maintenance Data: For Switchboards, Panel boards and components to include in
maintenance manuals specified in Division 01. In addition to requirements specified in
Division 01 Section "Contract Closeout," include the following:
a. Routine maintenance requirements for switchboards and all installed components.
b. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting over current protective
devices.
c. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of over current
protective device.
9. Panel board Schedules: For installation in panel boards. Submit final versions after load
balancing.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Testing agency that is a member company of the International
Electrical Testing Association and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the International
Electrical Testing Association or National Institute for Certification in Engineering
Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.
SECTION 26 24 00 (16440) SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS Page 3
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with NEMA PB 2 for switchboards.
D. Comply with NEMA PB1 for panel boards.
E. Comply with NFPA 70.
F. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for
switchboards, including clearances between switchboards, and adjacent surfaces and other
items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver in sections of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
B. Store indoors in clean dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect
from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.
C. Handle switchboards according to NEMA PB 2.1.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Installation Pathway: Remove and replace access fencing, doors, lift-out panels, and
structures to provide pathway for moving switchboards into place.
B. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 104 deg F.
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
1.07 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switchboards, panel boards, and components with other
construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required
workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 03 30 00
(03300) "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Switchboards:
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products (800-498-2678)
b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div. (888-437-3765)
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. (800-964-4114)
d. Square D Co.; a Division of Groupe Schneider (888-778-2733)
2. Panel boards, over current Protective Devices, Controllers, Contactors, and Accessories:
a. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products (800-498-2678)
b. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Div. (888-437-3765)
c. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. (800-864-4114)
d. Square D Co.; a Division of Groupe Schneider (888-778-2733)
SECTION 26 24 00 (16440) SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS Page 4
2.02 SWITCHBOARDS - MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Front-Connected, Front-Accessible Switchboard fixed individually mounted main device,
panel-mounted branches, and sections rear aligned.
B. Nominal System Voltage: [480Y/277 V] [208 Y/120 V]
C. Main-Bus Continuous: [4000] [3000] [2500] [2000] [1600] [1200]
2.03 SWITCHBOARDS - FABRICATION AND FEATURES
A. Enclosure: Steel: [NEMA 250, Type 3R] [NEMA 250, Type 3R, with interior-lighted walk-in
aisle].
B. Barriers: Between adjacent switchboard sections.
C. Utility Metering Compartment: Fabricated compartment and section complying with utility
company's requirements. If separate vertical section is required for utility metering, match and
align with basic switchboard.
D. Bus Transition and Incoming Pull Sections: Matched and aligned with basic switchboard.
E. Hinged Front Panels: Allow access to circuit-breaker, metering, accessory, and blank
compartments.
F. Buses and Connections: Three phase, four wire, unless otherwise indicated. Include the
following features:
1. Phase- and Neutral-Bus Material: Hard-drawn copper of 98 percent conductivity or tin-
plated, high-strength, electrical-grade aluminum alloy.
a. If bus is aluminum, use copper or tin-plated aluminum for circuit-breaker line
connections.
b. If bus is copper, use copper for feeder circuit-breaker line connections.
2. Ground Bus: 1/4-by-2-inch minimum size, drawn-temper copper of 98 percent
conductivity, equipped with pressure connectors for feeder and branch-circuit ground
conductors. For busway feeders, extend insulated equipment grounding cable to busway
ground connection and support cable at intervals in vertical run.
3. Contact Surfaces of Buses: Silver plated for copper to copper and copper to aluminum
connections, silver or tin plating for aluminum to aluminum connections.
4. Main Phase Buses, Neutral Buses, and Equipment Ground Buses: Uniform capacity for
entire length of switchboard's main and distribution sections. Provide for future
extensions from both ends.
5. Isolation Barrier Access Provisions: Permit checking of bus-bolt tightness.
6. Neutral Buses: 100 percent of the ampacity of the phase buses, unless otherwise
indicated, equipped with pressure connectors for outgoing circuit neutral cables. Bus
extensions for bus way feeder neutral bus is braced.
G. Future Devices: Equip compartments with mounting brackets, supports, bus connections, and
appurtenances at full rating of circuit-breaker compartment.
2.04 SWITCHBOARDS - INSTRUMENTATION
A. Instrument Transformers: NEMA EI 21.1, IEEE C57.13, and the following:
1. Potential Transformers: Secondary voltage rating of 120 V and NEMA accuracy class of
0.3 with burdens of W, X, and Y.
2. Current Transformers: Ratios shall be as indicated with accuracy class and burden
suitable for connected relays, meters, and instruments.
3. Control-Power Transformers: Dry type, mounted in separate compartments for units
larger than 3 kV.
SECTION 26 24 00 (16440) SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS Page 5
B. Ammeters, Voltmeters, and Power-Factor Meters: ANSI C39.1.
1. Meters: 4-inch diameter or 6 inches square, flush or semi-flush, with anti-parallax 250-
degree scales and external zero adjustment.
2. Voltmeters: Cover an expanded-scale range of nominal voltage plus 10 percent.
C. Instrument Switches: Rotary type with off position.
1. Voltmeter Switches: Permit reading of all phase-to-phase voltages and, where a neutral
is indicated, phase-to-neutral voltages.
2. Ammeter Switches: Permit reading of current in each phase and maintain current-
transformer secondary’s in a closed-circuit condition at all times.
D. Feeder Ammeters: 2-1/2-inch minimum size with 90- or 120-degree scale. Meter and transfer
device with an off position, located on over current device door for indicated feeder circuits
only.
2.05 SWITCHBOARDS - CONTROL POWER
A. Control Circuits: 120 V, supplied through secondary disconnecting devices from control-
power transformer.
B. Control-Power Fuses: Primary and secondary fuses for current-limiting and overload
protection of transformer and fuses for protection of control circuits.
C. Control Wiring: Factory installed, with bundling, lacing, and protection included. Provide
flexible conductors for No. 8 AWG and smaller, for conductors across hinges, and for
conductors for interconnections between shipping units.
2.06 PANELBOARDS - FABRICATION AND FEATURES
A. Enclosures: Flush- and/or surface-mounted cabinets as indicated on drawings. NEMA PB 1,
Type 1, to meet environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
2. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel.
3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.
B. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box
dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.
C. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim
cover.
D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer
coat.
E. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover, mounted inside metal frame, inside panel
board door.
F. Bus: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity or tin-plated aluminum.
G. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material.
H. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground
conductors; bonded to box.
I. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, and necessary appurtenances required
for future installation of devices.
J. Isolated Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for branch-circuit equipment ground conductors;
insulated from box.
K. Extra-Capacity Neutral Bus: Neutral bus rated 200 percent of phase bus and UL listed as
suitable for nonlinear loads.
SECTION 26 24 00 (16440) SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS Page 6
L. Gutter Barrier: Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.
M. Feed-through Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at
opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
2.07 PANELBOARDS - SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING
A. UL label indicating series-connected rating with integral or remote upstream devices. Include
size and type of upstream device allowable, branch devices allowable, and UL series-
connected short-circuit rating.
B. Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.
2.08 PANELBOARDS - LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUITS
A. Branch Over current Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without
disturbing adjacent units.
B. Doors: Front mounted with concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock;
keyed alike.
2.09 PANELBOARDS - DISTRIBUTION
A. Doors: Front mounted, except omit in fused-switch panel boards; secured with vault-type
latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.
B. Main Over current Protective Devices: Circuit breaker.
C. Branch over current protective devices shall be one of the following:
1. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Plug-in circuit breakers.
2. For Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in
circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for
removal.
2.10 LOAD CENTERS
A. Over current Protective Devices: Plug-in, full-module circuit breaker.
B. Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type for main, neutral, and ground lugs and buses.
2.11 SWITCHBOARD AND PANELBOARDS - OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault
currents.
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip
setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-
mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.
3. Electronic Trip Unit Circuit Breakers: RMS sensing; field-replaceable rating plug; with the
following field-adjustable settings:
a. Instantaneous trip
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings
less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.
SECTION 26 24 00 (16440) SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS Page 7
5. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-
style fuse listed for use with circuit breaker; trip activation on fuse opening or on opening
of fuse compartment door.
6. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with [5] [30]-mA trip
sensitivity.
B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings,
and number of poles.
2.12 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
A. Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Suitably identified, wall-m ounted, lockable, compartmented steel box or
cabinet. Arrange for wall mounting.
2.13 IDENTIFICATION
A. Mimic Bus for Switchboard: Continuously integrated mimic bus factory applied to front of
switchboard. Arrange in single-line diagram format, using symbols and letter designations
consistent with final mimic-bus diagram. Coordinate mimic-bus segments with devices in
switchboard sections to which applied. Produce a concise visual presentation of principal
switchboard components and connections.
B. Presentation Media: Painted graphics in color contrasting with equipment factory-finished
background to represent bus and components, complete with lettered designations.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROTECTION
A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
3.02 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive switchboards for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Install switchboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 2.1.
B. Install panel boards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1
C. Support switchboards on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness.
D. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 26 05 48 (16071)
"Seismic Controls for Electrical Work."
E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from switchboard units and components.
F. Operating Instructions: Frame and mount the printed basic operating instructions for
switchboards, including control and key interlocking sequences and emergency procedures.
Fabricate frame of finished wood or metal and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic.
Mount on front of switchboards.
G. Mounting of Panel boards: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panel
boards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish.
H. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panel
board loads. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create
directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.
I. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
SECTION 26 24 00 (16440) SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS Page 8
J. Provision for Future Circuits at Flush Panel boards: Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty
conduits from panel board into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling
space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or
below slab not on grade.
K. Wiring in Panel board Gutters: Arrange conductors into groups and bundle and wrap with wire
ties after completing load balancing.
3.04 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Section 26 05 53 (16075) "Identification for Electrical Systems".
B. Switchboard Nameplates: Label each switchboard compartment with engraved metal or
laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
C. Panel board Nameplates: Label each panel board with engraved metal or laminated-plastic
nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.05 CONNECTIONS
A. Install equipment grounding connections for switchboards with ground continuity to main
electrical ground bus.
B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1. Test insulation resistance for each switchboard bus, component, connecting supply,
feeder, and control circuit.
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
B. Testing: After installing switchboards and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test indicated
in NETA ATS, Sections 7.1, 7.5, 7.6, 7.9, 7.10, 7.11, and 7.14 as appropriate. Certify
compliance with test parameters.
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
C. Infrared Scanning: Switchboard only. After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60
days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switchboard. Remove front
panel so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.
1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each
switchboard 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.
2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to
detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.
3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switchboards
checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected,
remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.
D. Balancing Loads: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final
Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes as follows:
1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading.
SECTION 26 24 00 (16440) SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS Page 9
2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of
the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax
machines and on-line data-processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.
3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings
before and after changes and submit test records.
4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard,
is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum
requirement.
3.07 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
3.08 CLEANING
A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of switchboards. Remove paint
splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 27 26 (16140) WIRING DEVICES Page 1
SECTION 26 27 26 (16140) WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Receptacles, Connectors, Switches, and Finish Plates.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 05 53 (16075) – Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Standards Publications:
1. WD 1 “General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices”
2. WD 6 “Wiring Devices—Dimensional Requirements”
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
1. 70 "National Electric Code"
C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications:
1. 486A “Standard For Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper
Conductors”
2. 486B “Standard for Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors”
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01
Specification Sections.
1. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals
specified in Division 01.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with NEMA WD 1.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
1. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described in Section 01 78 43 (01790) “Spare Parts and Materials”
that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Receptacles, Switches and Wall Plates
SECTION 26 27 26 (16140) WIRING DEVICES Page 2
a. Legrand (877-295-3472)
b. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. (800-736-6682).
c. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc (888-LUTRON1)
2. Wiring Devices:
a. GE Company; GE Wiring Devices (401-886-6200)
b. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div. (203-882-4900)
c. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. (314-531-0460)
d. Legrand (877-295-3472)
e. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. (800-736-6682).
3. Illuminated Night Light with Sensor
a. Legrand (877-295-3472)
4. Pendant Cord and Connector Devices
a. GE Company; GE Wiring Devices (401-886-6200)
b. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div. (203-882-4900)
c. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. (314-531-0460)
d. Legrand (877-295-3472)
e. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. (800-736-6682).
5. Cord and Plug Sets
a. GE Company; GE Wiring Devices (401-886-6200)
b. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div. (203-882-4900)
c. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. (314-531-0460)
d. Legrand (877-295-3472)
e. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. (800-736-6682).
6. Multioutlet Assemblies:
a. Airey-Thompson Co. (800-421-61969)
b. Wiremold (800-621-0049)
7. Poke-through, Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles:
a. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div. (203-882-4900)
b. Legrand (877-295-3472)
c. Square D Co.; a Division of Groupe Schneider (888-778-2733)
d. Wiremold. (800-621-0049)
2.02 RECEPTACLES
A. Straight Blade and Locking Type Receptacles: General duty grade, NEMA 5-20R duplex type.
B. GFCI Receptacles: Feed-through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex
receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design
units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- deep outlet box without an adapter.
C. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Equipment grounding contacts connected only to the green
grounding screw terminal of the device with inherent electrical isolation from mounting strap.
1. Devices: Listed and labeled as isolated-ground receptacles.
SECTION 26 27 26 (16140) WIRING DEVICES Page 3
2. Isolation Method: Integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable
parts.
2.03 SWITCHES
A. Rocker Switches and matching Receptacles:
1. Switches shall be 15 AMP; 120/277 VAC, side-wired with grounding screw similar to
“Decora Devices” as manufactured by Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc., or approved
substitution by listed manufacturers.
2. Switch and matching cover plate that hides the screws.
3. Where more than one switch occurs at the same location, they shall be ganged under
one plate. Where space does not permit horizontal ganging, interchangeable type
switches may be used, only with approval of the Owner’s Representative.
4. Locations:
a. Refer to Drawings
b. Public Spaces
c. Lobby Space
d. Guestrooms
B. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on/off switches and
audible and electromagnetic noise filters.
1. Control: Continuously adjustable slide. Single-pole or three-way switch to suit
connections.
2. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjustable slide;
single pole with soft tap or other quiet switch; electromagnetic filter to eliminate noise,
RF, and TV interference; and 5-inch wire connecting leads.
3. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim
potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of
consistent dimming to a maximum of 1 percent of full brightness, with filters to reduce
audible noise, RF and TV interference.
2.04 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices.
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
2. Provide plates for all devices and outlets with opening configuration suitable for devices
to be covered.
3. Plates shall be smooth urea plastic secured in place with screws finished to match the
plates. Back of the house areas, such as equipment spaces, shall have steel plates.
Stainless steel plates shall be used in kitchens. Weatherproof plates shall be used where
exposed to the weather or in pool area.
2.05 PENDANT CORD/CONNECTOR DEVICES
A. Description: Matching, locking type, plug and receptacle body connector, NEMA WD 6,
Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, Heavy-Duty grade.
1. Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external
cable grip.
2. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel wire
strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for
corresponding connector.
SECTION 26 27 26 (16140) WIRING DEVICES Page 4
2.06 CORD AND PLUG SETS
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of
equipment being connected.
1. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with type SOW-A jacket. Green-
insulated grounding conductor, and equipment-rating ampacity plus a minimum of 30
percent.
2. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for
connection.
2.07 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B. Compartmentation: Barrier separates power and signal compartments.
C. Housing Material: Die-cast aluminum, satin finished.
D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Signal Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening, unless otherwise indicated.
2.08 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box unit with
multi-channeled, through-floor raceway/fire stop unit and detachable matching floor service-
outlet assembly.
1. Size: Selected to fit nominal 3-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness.
2. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly.
3. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 3-inch cored openings and reestablish fire rating
of floor.
4. Wiring: Three No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors; one 75-ohm coaxial
telephone/data cable; and one four-pair, 75-ohm telephone/data cable.
2.09 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES
A. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a
complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
B. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish.
C. Wire: No. 12 AWG.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure.
B. Protect devices and assemblies during painting. Install wall plates when painting is complete.
C. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging as instructed by
manufacturer.
D. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.
E. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,
multi-gang wall plates.
F. Adjust locations at which floor service outlets and telephone/power service poles are installed
to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
SECTION 26 27 26 (16140) WIRING DEVICES Page 5
3.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Section 26 05 53 (16075) "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated,
identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate.
2. Receptacles: Identify panel board and circuit number from which served. Use machine-
printed, pressure-sensitive, abrasion-resistant label tape on face of plate and durable
wire markers or tags within outlet boxes.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch-circuit equipment grounding conductor.
B. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Connect to isolated-ground conductor routed to designated
isolated equipment ground terminal of electrical system.
C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at least six
times.
B. Check TVSS receptacle indicating lights for normal indication.
C. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
D. Replace damaged or defective components.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly
painted wall plates or devices.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 28 16 (16410) - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 1
SECTION 26 28 16 (16410) - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Individually Mounted Switches and Circuit Breakers Used for the following:
a. Service Disconnect Switches.
b. Feeder And Equipment Disconnect Switches.
c. Feeder Branch-Circuit Protection.
d. Motor Disconnect Switches.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 05 19 (16490) - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: For
fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
2. Section 26 05 53(16075) - Identification for Electrical Systems.
3. Section 26 24 00 (16440) - Switchboards and Panelboards: For individually enclosed,
fused power-circuit devices used as feeder disconnect switches.
4. Section 26 27 26(16140) - Wiring Devices: For attachment plugs and receptacles, and
snap switches used for disconnect switches.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00(01330)
indicating specified items selected for use in Project with the following supporting data:
1. Product Data:
a. Descriptive data and time-current curves.
b. Let-through current curves for circuit breakers with current-limiting characteristics.
c. Coordination charts and tables and related data.
2. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems and differentiating
between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
3. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with
project names and addresses, names and addresses of owners representative and
owners, and other information specified.
4. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results.
5. Maintenance data for tripping devices to include in the operation and maintenance
manual specified in Division 01.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: In addition to the requirements specified in Section 01 45 00 -
"Quality Control," an independent testing agency shall meet OSHA criteria for accreditation of
testing laboratories, Title 29, Part 1907, or shall be a full member company of the International
Electrical Testing Association (NETA).
1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by NETA or the National
Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies, to supervise on-site testing
specified in Part 3.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain disconnect switches and circuit breakers from one source and by
a single manufacturer.
C. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
D. Listing and Labeling: Provide disconnect switches and circuit breakers specified in this
Section that are listed and labeled.
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,
Article 100.
SECTION 26 28 16 (16410) - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 2
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Disconnect Switches:
a. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division (888-437-3765)
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. (800-964-4114)
c. Square D Co.; a Division of Groupe Schneider (888-778-2733)
d. Eaton Corp. Cutler-Hammer Products (800-498-2678)
2. Fusible Switches:
a. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division (888-437-3765)
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. (800-964-4114)
c. Square D Co.; a Division of Groupe Schneider (888-778-2733)
d. Eaton Corp. Cutler-Hammer Products (800-498-2678)
3. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers:
a. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division (888-437-3765)
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. (800-964-4114)
c. Square D Co.; a Division of Groupe Schneider (888-778-2733)
d. Eaton Corp. Cutler-Hammer Products (800-498-2678)
4. Combination Circuit Breaker and Ground Fault Trip:
a. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division (888-437-3765)
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. (800-964-4114)
c. Square D Co.; a Division of Groupe Schneider (888-778-2733)
d. Eaton Corp. Cutler-Hammer Products (800-498-2678)
5. Molded-Case, Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers:
a. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution and Control Division (888-437-3765)
b. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. (800-964-4114)
c. Square D Co.; a Division of Groupe Schneider (888-778-2733)
d. Eaton Corp. Cutler-Hammer Products (800-498-2678)
2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Enclosed, Non-fusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.
B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, clips to accommodate
specified fuses, enclosure consistent with environment where located, handle lockable with 2
padlocks, and interlocked with cover in CLOSED position.
C. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, Type 1, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental
conditions of installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.
2. Kitchen Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel.
3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
2.03 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS
A. Enclosed, Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with lockable handle.
B. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as indicated
and interrupting rating to meet available fault current.
C. Application Listing: Appropriate for application, including switching fluorescent lighting loads
or heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment.
D. Circuit Breakers, 200 A and Larger: Trip units interchangeable within frame size.
SECTION 26 28 16 (16410) - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS Page 3
E. Circuit Breakers, 400 A and Larger: Field-adjustable, short-time and continuous-current
settings.
F. Current-Limiting Trips: Where indicated, let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, Class RK-
5.
G. Current Limiters: Where indicated, integral fuse listed for circuit breaker.
H. Lugs: Mechanical lugs and power-distribution connectors for number, size, and material of
conductors indicated.
I. Shunt Trip: Where indicated.
J. Accessories: On drawings.
K. Enclosure: NEMA AB 1, Type 1, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental
conditions of installed location.
1. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.
2. Kitchen Areas: Type 4X, stainless steel.
3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches and circuit breakers in locations as indicated, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install disconnect switches and circuit breakers level and plumb.
C. Install wiring between disconnect switches, circuit breakers, control, and indication devices.
D. Connect disconnect switches and circuit breakers and components to wiring system and to
ground as indicated and instructed by manufacturer.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use
those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
E. Identify each disconnect switch and circuit breaker according to requirements specified in
Section 26 05 53(16075) - "Electrical Identification."
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1. Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in
NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for disconnect switches and Section 7.6 for molded-case circuit
breakers. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable disconnect switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated or as
directed in coordination study report.
3.04 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed
finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips,
scratches, and abrasions.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 32 13.16 ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS - NATURAL GAS Page 1
SECTION 26 32 13.16 ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS - NATURAL GAS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED WORK
Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this section.
Section 26 36 00 - Transfer Switches
REFERENCE STANDARDS
NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
NFPA110 – Emergency and Standby Power Systems
ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators
UL2200 – Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies
PERMITS
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary permits for the complete
installation of the generator fuel system and related equipment.
SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing detailed equipment assemblies and indicate
dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, plan and elevation views with overall location
and interconnection point dimensions, method of field assembly, components and location and
size of each field connection.
Approved manufacturers: Cummins (or equivalence).
Include product data for generator and all accessories: batteries and charger, engine generator
set, muffler, exhaust piping external to unit, fuel tank & system, outdoor/Indoor enclosure, remote
annunciator(s), remote emergency stop, load center and lighting integral to enclosure, cooling
system heaters. In addition, fuel consumption rate curves at various loads, ventilation and
combustion air requirements, thermal damage curves for generator, time current characteristic
curves for generator protective device (if included) and electrical ratings and diagrams including
schematic and interconnection diagrams.
Certified Test Reports. Factory test reports including noise level, exhaust emissions, and field
quality tests.
Certification of Torsional Vibration Compatibility.
Documentation for a 1-year comprehensive engine, parts, and enclosure warranty.
Wiring diagram for status of generator output circuit breaker(s) or OCPD serving the emergency
side of each automatic transfer switch. Include annunciation and indication monitoring integral to
annunciator panel. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
Provide verification of coordination for Emergency and Legally Required Standby systems
overcurrent devices with all supply side overcurrent protective devices.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer: Company specializing in packaged engine generator systems with minimum ten
years documented experience. Packaged generator assembly shall meet UL 2200 requirements.
EXTRA MATERIAL
Provide two additional sets of each fuel, oil, and air filter elements required for the engine
SECTION 26 32 13.16 ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS - NATURAL GAS Page 2
generator system and one additional set of all required belts.
PART 2-PRODUCTS
SYSTEM RATINGS
The generator set manufacturer shall verify the engine as capable of driving the generator with all
accessories in place and operating at the nameplate rating after de-rating for the range of
temperature expected in service and the altitude of the installation.
The engine-generator set shall be capable of picking up 100% of nameplate kW, less applicable
de-rating factors, in one step with the engine-generator set at operating temperature.
Voltage regulation shall be ±1.0% of rated voltage for any constant load between no load and
rated load. Random voltage variation with any steady state load from no load to full load shall not
exceed ±1.0% of rated voltage.
Frequency regulation shall be ±0.5% from steady state no load to steady state rated load.
Harmonic distortion shall not exceed 5% total harmonic distortion at full linear load and no single
harmonic shall exceed 3% of rated voltage.
Telephone Influence Factor: TIF shall be less than 50.
ENGINE AND ENGINE EQUIPMENT
Engine Type: Water-cooled, [turbo-charged], four cycle, internal combustion engine.
Fuel Type:[Natural Gas]
Governor: Isochronous electronic type to maintain engine speed within 0.5 percent, steady
state, and 1 percent, no load to full load, with recovery to steady state within 2 seconds following
sudden load changes.
Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high water temperature, low oil pressure, over-speed, and
engine over-crank. Limits as selected by manufacturer.
Engine Accessories: Include intake air filter, fuel filter, fuel priming pump, automatic electric fuel
shutoff, fuel/water separator, gear-driven water pump, positive displacement mechanical full
pressure lubrication oil pump, full flow lubrication oil filters with replaceable elements, dipstick oil
level indicator, and oil drain valve with hose extension. Include engine mounted battery charging
alternator with solid state voltage regulator.
Engine Jacket Heater: Thermal circulation type water heater with integral thermostatic control,
sized tomaintain engine jacket water at 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). Heater voltage shall be
served from integral unit load center.
Cooling System: Unit mounted radiator using glycol coolant, with blower type fan, coolant pump
and thermostat temperature control sized to maintain safe engine temperature in ambient
temperature of 105 degrees F. Radiator shall be provided all ductwork required with a duct
adapter flange permitting the attachment of air discharge duct directing the discharge of radiator
air to exterior louver location. The equipment supplier shall provide 50% ethylene glycol
antifreeze solution to fill engine cooling system.
SECTION 26 32 13.16 ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS - NATURAL GAS Page 3
EC shall edit exhaust system narrative to match the project requirements. The
installation of the exhaust system piping for interior installed units or units with
piping extending beyond the generator enclosure shall be done under Division
23. The consultant shall coordinate the requirements with the Division 23
consultant. Provide details indicating routing, length and number of elbows for
exhaust piping. Dimensions of piping shall be included in narrative.
Exhaust System:Provide critical grade silencer, with muffler companion flanges and flexible
stainless steel exhaust fitting, suitable for horizontal orientation, sized in accordance with engine
manufacturer's instructions. The muffler shall be mounted so its weight is not supported by the
engine.
Flexible exhaust connections shall be provided as required for connection between engine
exhaust manifold and exhaust line, in compliance with applicable codes and regulations.
Provide an exhaust condensation trap with manual drain valve to trap and drain off exhaust
condensation and to prevent condensation from entering the engine. Provide drain line to drip
pan.
Provide a suitable rain cap at the stack outlet. Provide all necessary flanges and special fittings
for proper installation.
Contractor shall mount and install all exhaust components as shown on drawings and as required
tocomply with applicable codes and regulations. All components shall be properly sized to assure
proper operation without excessive back pressure when installed as shown on the drawings.
Make provisions as required for pipe expansion and contraction.
The installation of the fuel system shall be done under Division 23. The
consultant shall coordinate the requirements with the Division 23 consultant.
Fuel System:Provide fuel lockout solenoid and fuel regulator, based on manufacturers operating
pressure, between7”-14” H2O.
Provide flexible supply and return line fittings and all connections for connecting fuel system to
the engine in compliance with applicable codes and regulations. All fuel piping shall be pressure
tested for minimum 2 hours. Primary regulator and flexible fuel hose with stainless steel over-
braid shall be provided by the generator supplier.
Coordinate with local utility gas provider for new gas service and associated regulator. Piping
shall be compliant with utility company installation requirements. Provide a gas meter and
regulator for the generator service.Meter and regulator shall be separate from the building’s gas
service. Provide separate identifying labeling at shutoff valves.
Batteries: Heavy duty, diesel starting type, lead-acid, maintenance free storage batteries.
Provide a DC 12-volt system with number of batteries and battery capacity as sized by the
manufacturer adequate for (4) 30 second cranking periods (total of 2 minutes) along with all
additional loads being run on the DC system. Battery submittals shall include type, amp-hour
rating and cold cranking amps.
Mounting: Provide unit with suitable spring-type vibration isolators and mount on structural steel
base.
PART 3 - EXECUTIONEXAMINATION
Verify that required utilities are available in proper location and ready for use.
SECTION 26 32 13.16 ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS - NATURAL GAS Page 4
INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Generator set shall be anchored to concrete pad.
Coordinate with local utility gas provider for new gas service and associated regulator. Piping
shall be compliant with utility company installation requirements. Shut off valve handle shall be
removed and located inside generator enclosure if valve is installed exposed at generator.
Utility costs for service installation shall be separate from this work.
Generator, associated transfer switches and distribution equipment installed indoors shall be
located in separate rooms from normal electrical service equipment. Rooms shall have minimum
2-hour rating. No other equipment, including architectural appurtenances, except those that serve
the space shall be permitted in this room.The room housing the Generator (EPS) and the room
housing the generator distribution equipment and transfer switches (EPSS) shall be ventilated to
and from the exterior.
Generator installations shall be provided with battery powered emergency lighting. This shall
include interior locations and units mounted within exterior enclosures.
Generators shall be provided with emergency power to integral fuel transfer pumps.
Generator Emergency Shutdown switch shall be located [outside interior generator room] [on
exterior building adjacent to exterior generator enclosure].
Feeders:
Feeder wiring serving emergency loads shall be installed per NEC 700.10(D)(1) through (D)(3).
Feeder wiring serving Fire Pump Loads shall be installed per NEC 695.6(A)(2).
Control Conductors:
All generator control conductors installed between transfer equipment and the emergency
generator serving Emergency, Legally Required Standby and Optional Standby systems shall be
kept entirely independent of each other and all other wiring. This shall require a dedicated
conduit system between each transfer switch and the emergency generator.
All Emergency branch control conductors installed between transfer equipment and the
emergency generator shall be installed per NEC 700.10(D)(1) through (D)(3).
All Fire Pump control conductors installed between fire pump controller/ transfer switch and the
emergency generator shall be installed per NEC 695.14(F).
Grounding:
When 4-pole transfer switches are utilized, the generator shall be installed and connected as a
separately derived system and the factory installed generator ground/neutral bonding strap shall
be maintained.
When 3-pole transfer switches are utilized, the generator shall be installed and connected as an
equipment connection (not a separately derived system) and the factory installed generator
ground/neutral bonding strap shall be removed.
Labeling:
SECTION 26 32 13.16 ENGINE-DRIVEN GENERATOR SETS - NATURAL GAS Page 5
Provide a sign at service entrance equipment indicating type and location of onsite emergency
power sources(EPS).
Provide a sign at grounding electrode conductor when grounding connection is remote from
generator. Sign shall identify location of all emergency and normal sources connected to that
location.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Operational testing of complete emergency electrical system shall be conducted prior to
scheduling the required full load test to ensure complete system operation.
The scheduling of the tests shall be approved by the electrical inspector prior to test
commencement.
Provide full load testing utilizing a portable test bank for four hours continuous, minimum. During
the first two hours, step increase the load from 0% to 100% in at least six equal steps. At the end
of two hours, continue running test at 100% load. Record the following in 20 minute intervals
throughout the four-hour test: kilowatts, amperes, voltage, coolant temperature, room
temperature, generator frequency (Hz), oil pressure, fuel consumption.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES Page 1
SECTION 26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED WORK
Applicable provisions of Division 1 govern work under this section.
Section 26 32 13.16 Engine-Driven Generator Sets – Natural Gas
REFERENCE STANDARDS
The following references shall apply to the installation of equipment under this section.
UL 1008 - Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment
NFPA 99 - Essential Electrical Systems for Health Care Facilities
NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems
IEEE Standard 446 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency And Standby Power Systems.
NEMA Standard ICS10-1993 - AC Automatic Transfer Switches.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Manufacturer: Company specializing in automatic transfer equipment with five years documented
experience.
SUBMITTALS
Contractor shall submit product data showing overall dimensions, electrical connections, electrical
ratings, withstand current rating (WCR’s), all specified accessories, interlock methods, and
environmental requirements to EOR for review.
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
Closed Transition Type:
Furnish and install Closed Transition Transfer Switch with number of poles, ampere
rating, voltage, and withstand rating as indicated on drawings, each closed transition
automatic transfer switch shall consist of a power transfer switch mechanism and a
microprocessor controller to provide automatic operation. Where multiple switches are
required, all shall be by same manufacturer.
The closed transition automatic transfer switch shall transfer the load without interruption
(Closed Transition) by momentarily connecting both sources of power only when both
sources are present and acceptable. The maximum interconnection time shall not exceed
100 milliseconds. The unit shall operate as a conventional break before make switch
(Open transition) when the power source serving the loads fails.
Description: NEMA ICS 2; automatic transfer switch.
Configuration: The transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The
electrical operation shall be by a solenoid mechanism operating from the same source to which
the load is being transferred.
The switch shall be rated for continuous duty and be mechanically interlocked to be in either the
normal or the emergency position.
The switch shall be controlled by a single built-in microprocessor with serial communications
module. Controller shall be connected to the transfer switch by plug type with associated
interconnected wiring harness. Relays shall be industrial grade with dust covers, mounted
separate from the transfer switch.
All customer wiring connections shall be to a common terminal block for ease of field wiring.
SECTION 26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES Page 2
The switch shall be designed and built so that it can be manually operated under no-load
conditions from behind a barrier partition or with the door closed. The enclosure shall allow for
inspection of the internal operation of the switch through a full sequence of the transfer cycle with
the door open and the switch de-energized.
In applications where the switch serves as the service entrance disconnect, the switch shall be
rated as suitable for use as a service disconnecting means.
RATINGS
Ratings: As scheduled on drawings.
The minimum withstand and closing rating (WCR) shall be the available fault current at the
installed location of the transfer switch. Unit shall be rated to close in and withstand the available
RMS symmetrical short circuit current at the terminals with the type and rating of overcurrent
protection shown on plans.
WCR ratings shall not be based on specific circuit breakers or fuses. Switches shall be tested and
listed for use with any manufacturer’s circuit breaker or fuse within its rating or fuse class.
Switches shall be tested per UL1008.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Controller keypad and display.
Provide minimum 4 line, multi character LCD display and keypad controller for viewing all
available data and settings operational parameters. Provide serial communications input port.
The following parameters shall be adjustable via DIP switches: Nominal line voltage and
frequency, single or three phase sensing.
Voltage, frequency and phase rotation sensing.
Continuously monitor voltage and frequency on both normal and alternate sources with pickup,
drop out and trip setting capabilities.
Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments via keypad or serial
communications port.
The controller shall sense the phase rotation of both sources.
Source information shall be indicated on data screen for normal and alternate sources to provide
readout of voltage on all phases, frequency and phase rotation.
Time delay settings shall be adjustable utilizing LCD display and keypad or serial
communications port.
TIME DELAYS
Adjustable time delay of 0 to 6 seconds to override momentary normal source outages and delay
all engine start signals.
Adjustable time delay of 0 to 6 seconds to override momentary normal source outages and delay
all transfer signals.
Time delay on transfer to alternate source, adjustable from 0 seconds to 30 minutes upon source
monitor and permission by alternate source monitor.
Time Delay beforetransfer to Normal Source: Upon permission by normal source monitor. An
additional time delay module shall provide function for test mode. 0 to 30 minutes, adjustable.
Time Delay Before Engine Shut Down: 0 to 30 minutes, adjustable, unloaded operation.
Operating transfer time of the switch in either direction shall not be greater than 1/6 of a second.
Time Delay activated output signal shall also be provided to control external relays for selective
load control. Delays shall be minimum of 0 to 5 minutes in the following modes: prior to transfer,
SECTION 26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES Page 3
prior to and after transfer, normal to alternate source only, alternate to normal source only, normal
to alternate to normal.
The following requirement shall be included for Closed Transition Automatic
Transfer Switches.
ACCESSORIES
Engine Exerciser: Digital control, start engine every 7 to 31 days adjustable; run for 0 to 120
minutes adjustable, before shutting down. Bypass exerciser control if normal source fails during
exercising period.
Manual Operator: Provide manual operator to allow switch to be operated under no-load
conditions from behind a barrier partition or with the door closed.
Provide three position momentary test switch for the test/ automatic/ reset. The test position will
simulate a normal source failure. The reset switch shall bypass the time delays on either transfer
to alternate source or retransfer to normal.
Return to Normal Switch: Mount in cover of enclosure to initiate manual transfer from alternate to
normal source.
Indicating Lights: LED type. Mount in cover of enclosure to indicate NORMAL SOURCE
AVAILABLE, ALTERNATE SOURCE AVAILABLE, and SWITCH POSITION.
Transfer Switch Auxiliary Contacts: Minimum 2 normally open; 2 normally closed, rated 10
amps.Minimum one shall be closed when ATS is connected to the normal source and one closed
when ATS is connected to the alternate source.
The following shall be included for Closed Transition Automatic Transfer
Switches. Shunt Trip devices to be indicated on one line drawings.
Normal Source Monitor: Monitor each line of normal source voltage; adjustable set points; initiate
transfer when voltage drops below 85 percent.
Alternate Source Monitor: Monitor alternate source voltage and frequency; adjustable set points;
inhibit transfer when voltage is below 85 percent or frequency varies more than 3 Hertz from
rated nominal voltage.
Inphase monitor shall control transfer so the motor load inrush currents do not exceed normal
starting currents and shall not require external control of power sources.
The switch shall contain an in-phase monitor or adjustable time delay transition to inhibit closing
of the switch into high levels of motor residual voltage.
A factory installed equipment ground bar shall be provided in each switch enclosure.
In general, a 4-pole transfer switch is required on three-phase systems utilizing
ground fault protection at the main service entrance. A 3-pole transfer switch
shall be specified on systems that do not utilize ground fault protection. Indicate
the required number of switched poles in the schedule on the drawings.
Four-pole transfer switches shall contain an overlapping neutral contact or a fully rated switched
neutral pole.
Three-pole transfer switches shall contain a factory installed fully rated solid neutral lug assembly.
ELEVATOR CONTROL INTERFACE ACCESSORIES – TO BE PROVIDED ONLY IF
INCLUDED IN THE ELECTRICAL SCHEME OR IF BUILDING IS HIGH RISE
Transfer switches serving elevators shall be provided with auxiliary contacts designed to provide
emergency system status to the elevator controllers. These contacts are in addition to the
contacts required elsewhere in this specification. Required auxiliary contacts are as follows:
SECTION 26 36 00 TRANSFER SWITCHES Page 4
Emergency standby power signal contact. This shall be a form C contact that will change
state and maintain its state as long as the transfer switch has transferred to the
emergency power source.
Pre-transfer warning signal contact. This contact shall be activated prior to the operation
of the transfer switch, in either direction. These contacts shall change state prior to the
transfer of power for a period of time as determined by the elevator installer, typically in
the range of 10 to 20 seconds. These contacts shall reset to their normal state after the
transfer has taken place. The pre-transfer warning signal shall not delay transfer for a
time greater than allowed by the applicable codes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Starting contacts for all transfer switches shall be wired to the generator starting circuit so that
any transfer switch that senses a loss of normal power will start the generator. This includes
contacts as part of the fire pump controller. This control wiring is not shown on the plans but is
required to be provided by the electrical contractor.
All generator control conductors installed between transfer equipment and the emergency
generator serving Emergency, Legally Required Standby and Optional Standby systems shall be
kept entirely independent of each other and all other wiring. This shall require a dedicated
conduit system for the control wiring between each transfer switch and the emergency
generator.
All Emergency branch control conductors installed between transfer equipment and the
emergency generator shall be installed per NEC 700.10(D)(1) through (D)(3).
[Wiring between the elevator control contacts and the elevator controllers is not shown on the
plans but is required to be provided by the electrical contractor. Terminations at the elevator
controller shall be by the elevator installer.]
[Shunt trip accessories shall be provided on overcurrent protective devices serving both normal
and alternate sources of closed transition automatic transfer switches. Shunt trips shall be
initiated by transfer switch relay output. Relay shall be or similarly labeled “failure to disconnect”.]
FIELD ADJUSTMENTS
The contractor shall field adjust all timing and voltage settings of the transfer switch as necessary
for proper operation of the switch, related loads and sources.
TESTING
Maintenance and operational testing shall be per NFPA 110-8.3.
Operational inspection and testing shall be per NFPA 110-8.4.
CONSTRUCTION VERIFICATION
Contractor is responsible for utilizing the construction verification checklists supplied under
specification Section 26 08 00 in accordance with the procedures defined for construction
verification in Section 01 91 01 or 01 91 02.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 264313SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS Page 1
SECTION 264313SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes field-mounted SPDs for low-voltage (120 to 600 V) power distribution and
control equipment.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Inominal:Nominal discharge current.
B. MCOV:Maximum continuous operating voltage.
C. Mode(s), also Modes of Protection:The pair of electrical connections where the VPR applies.
D. MOV:Metal-oxide varistor; an electronic component with a significant non-ohmic current-voltage
characteristic.
E. OCPD:Overcurrent protective device.
F. SCCR:Short-circuit current rating.
G. SPD:Surge protective device.
H. VPR:Voltage protection rating.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:For each type of product, contractor shall submit the followings
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
2. Copy of UL Category Code VZCA certification, as a minimum, listing the tested values for
VPRs, Inominal ratings, MCOVs, type designations, OCPD requirements, model
numbers, system voltages, and modes of protection.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Field quality-control reports.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data:For SPDs to include in maintenance manuals.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty:Manufacturer agrees to replace or replace SPDs that fail in materials
or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period:Fiveyears from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL SPD REQUIREMENTS
A. SPD with Accessories:Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and application.
SECTION 264313SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS Page 2
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. Comply with UL 1449, 3rd edition.
D. MCOV of the SPD shall be the nominal system voltage.
2.2 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSOR
A. Acceptable manufacturers for surge devices include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Current Technology
2. Eaton
3. Square D
4. General Electric
5. Intermatic
6. Schneider Electric
7. Siemens
B. SPDs:Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying
with UL 1449, 3rd edition, Type 1.
1. SPDs with the following features and accessories:
a. Integral disconnect switch.
b. Internal thermal protection that disconnects the SPD before damaging internal
suppressor components.
c. Indicator light display for protection status.
d. Surge counter.
C. Comply with UL 1283.
D. Peak Surge Current Rating:The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per phase
shall not be less than 200 kA.The peak surge current rating shall be the arithmetic sum of the
ratings of the individual MOVs in a given mode.
E. Protection modes and UL 1449 VPR for grounded wye circuits with 208Y/120 V, three-phase,
four-wire circuits shall not exceed the following:
1. Line to Neutral:700 V for 208Y/120 V.
2. Line to Ground:1200 V for 208Y/120 V.
3. Line to Line:1000 V for 208Y/120 V.
F. SCCR:Equal or exceed 100 kA.
G. Inominal Rating:20 kA.
2.3 ENCLOSURES
A. Indoor Enclosures:NEMA 250, Type 1.
2.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Power Wiring:Same size as SPD leads, complying with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
SECTION 264313SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS Page 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1.
B. Install an OCPD or disconnect as required to comply with the UL listing of the SPD.
C. Install SPDs with conductors between suppressor and points of attachment as short and
straight as possible, and adjust circuit-breaker positions to achieve shortest and straightest
leads.Do not splice and extend SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer.Do not
exceed manufacturer's recommended lead length.Do not bond neutral and ground.
D. Use crimped connectors and splices only.Wire nuts are unacceptable.
E. Wiring:
1. Power Wiring:Comply with wiring methods in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
2. Controls:Comply with wiring methods in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative.
1. Compare equipment nameplate data for compliance with Drawings and Specifications.
2. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
3. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's written installation
requirements.
B. An SPD will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.3 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs
installed.Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance tests, and reconnect them
immediately after the testing is over.
C. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized, stabilized, and tested.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate and maintain SPDs.
END OF SECTION 264313
SECTION 26 51 19 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 1
SECTION 26 51 19 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Recessed LED Down lights
2. LED Troffers
3. Surface Ambient & Suspended LED Luminaires
4. LED Cove Lighting
5. LED Track Lighting
6. LED Lamps
7. Exit/Emergency Lighting
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 56 19 – LED Exterior Lighting
2. Section 26 09 24 – Lighting Controls
3. Section 26 09 43 – Network Lighting Controls
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. CCT: Correlated Color Temperature.
B. CRI: Color Rendering Index.
C. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.
D. Luminaire (Light Fixture): A complete lighting device consisting of lamp(s) and ballast(s),
when applicable, together with parts designed to distribute light, to position and protect lamps, and to
connect lamps to power supply.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. For each fixture type:
1. Arrange in order of designation.
2. Include data on features, accessories, and finishes.
SECTION 26 51 19 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 2
3. Include physical description and dimensions of luminaires.
4. Include life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy efficiency data.
5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with
IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing and Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type.
a. Manufacturers' Certified Data: Photometric data certified by
manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary
Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated luminaires, photometric data
certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for
remaining luminaires shall be certified by manufacturer. Materials and dimensions of
luminaires and poles.
B. Product Schedule: For luminaires and lamps. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Luminaire manufacturer's
laboratory that is accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
B. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent
agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as defined by
OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, accredited under the NVLAP for Energy Efficient Lighting Products, and
complying with the applicable IES testing standards.
C. Provide luminaires from a single manufacturer for each luminaire type.
1. Contractor shall coordinate with fixture schedule and brand standards for selection fixture
2. Contractor shall submit the lighting submittal to arch/client
3. Contractor shall inform in prior the arch /client for any change in light fixtures
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES
A. Protect finishes of exposed surfaces by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering
before shipping.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B. CRI: 90+ Preferred; 80+ Required
SECTION 26 51 19 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 3
C. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
1. All proposed substitutions (clearly delineated as such) must be submitted in writing for approval
by Architect a minimum of 10 working days prior to the bid date and must be made available to all
bidders. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied by a review of the specification noting
compliance on a line-by-line basis.
2. Any proposed substitutions to be reviewed by Architect at Contractor's expense at a rate of
$200 per hour.
2.02 RECESSED LED DOWNLIGHTS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cree (www.Cree.com/Lighting)
2. Juno (www.JunoLighting.com)
3. GenPro Lighting Solutions (www.genproenergy.com)
2.03 LED Troffers
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cree (www.Cree.com/Lighting)
2. Juno (www.JunoLighting.com)
3. GenPro Lighting Solutions (www.genproenergy.com)
2.04 SURFACE AMBIENT & SUSPENDED LED LUMINAIRES
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cree (www.Cree.com/Lighting)
2. Forum Lighting (www.ForumLighting.com)
3. Precision Architectural Lighting (www.PAL-Lighting.com)
4. GenPro Lighting Solutions (www.genproenergy.com)
2.05 LED COVE LIGHTING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cree (www.Cree.com/Lighting)
2. Juno (www.JunoLighting.com)
SECTION 26 51 19 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 4
3. Acolyte LED (www.AcolyteLED.com)
4. Traxon (www.TraxonTechnologies.com)
5. GenPro Lighting Solutions (www.genproenergy.com)
2.06 LED TRACK LIGHTING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Juno (www.JunoLighting.com)
2.07 LED LAMPS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Cree (www.Cree.com/Lighting)
2. Solais by Power Secure Lighting (www.Solais.com)
3. Firefly (www.FireflyCN.com)
4. GenPro Lighting Solutions (www.genproenergy.com)
5. Switch (www.switchlightingco.com)
2.08 EXIT/EMERGENCY LIGHTING
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Juno (www.JunoLighting.com)
2. GenPro Lighting Solutions (www.genproenergy.com)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1
B. Install luminaires level, plumb and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform the following tests and inspection:
SECTION 26 51 19 - LED INTERIOR LIGHTING Page 5
1. Operational Test: After installing luminaires, switches, and accessories, and after
electrical circuitry has been energized, test units to confirm proper operation.
2. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery power and retransfer to normal.
B. Luminaire will be considered defective if it does not pass operation tests and inspections.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 56 19 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 1
SECTION 26 56 19 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Parking/Area Luminaires
2. Flood Luminaires
3. Architectural Accent Luminaires
4. Sign Luminaires
5. Pathway Luminaires
6. Parking Structure Luminaires
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 51 19 – LED Interior Lighting
2. Section 26 09 24 – Lighting Controls
3. Section 26 09 43 – Network Lighting Controls
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Lighting Unit: A luminaire or an assembly of luminaires complete with a common support,
including pole, post, or other structure, and mounting and support accessories.
B. Luminaire (Light Fixture): A complete lighting device consisting of lamp(s) and ballast(s),
when applicable, together with parts designed to distribute light, to position and protect lamps, and to
connect lamps to power supply.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. For each type of lighting unit indicated, arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include
data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Materials and dimensions of luminaires and poles.
2. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance.
3. Photometric data.
B. Shop Drawings: Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 26 56 19 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 2
A. Luminaires and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, for their
indicated use, location, and installation conditions by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction
B. Comply with ANSI C2. C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF POLES
A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.
B. Store poles on decay-resistant treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation.
Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.
C. Handle wood poles so they will not be damaged. Do not use pointed tools that can indent
surface more than 1/4 inch deep. Do not apply tools to section of poles below ground-line.
Handle poles with web fabric straps.
E. Retain factory-applied polewrappings on metal poles until just before pole installation. For poles
with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. Cree (www.Cree.com/Lighting)
2. Juno (www.JunoLighting.com)
3. Illumitex (www.Illumitex.com)
4. Traxon (www.TraxonTechnologies.com)
5. GenPro Lighting Solutions (www.genproenergy.com)
B. Substitutions: Not Permitted.
1. All proposed substitutions (clearly delineated as such) must be submitted in writing for
approval by Architect a minimum of 10 working days prior to the bid date and must be made
available to all bidders. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied by a review of the
specification noting compliance on a line-by-line basis.
2. Any proposed substitutions to be reviewed by Architect at Contractor's expense at a rate
of $200 per hour.
2.02 LUMINAIRES
A. Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light distribution patterns indicated for
luminaires.
B. Comply with Dark Sky and light trespass requirements as defined by local ordinance. C. Metal
Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners, and edges.
SECTION 26 56 19 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 3
D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Form and
support to prevent warping and sagging.
E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or
deform in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.
F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under
operating conditions, and arranged to permit re-lamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames,
lenses, diffusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during re-lamping and when secured in
operating position.
G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.
H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat,
and ultraviolet radiation.
I. Lenses and Refractors: Materials as indicated. Use heat- and aging-resistant, resilient
gaskets to seal and cushion lens and refractor in luminaire.
2.03 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Description: Comply with AASHTO LTS-3 for pole or other support structures, brackets, arms,
appurtenances, base, and anchorage and foundation.
B. Wind-Load Strength of Total Support Assembly: Adequate to carry support assembly plus
luminaires at indicated heights above grade without failure, permanent deflection, or whipping in steady
wind velocities and gust factors as indicated by Wind Speed by Zip (http://www.WindSpeedByZip.com).
Support assembly includes pole or other support structures, brackets, arms, appurtenances, base,
and anchorage and foundation.
equivalent projected area of luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent
projected area to be used in pole selection strength analysis.
C. Finish: Match finish of pole/support structure for arm, bracket, and tenon mount materials.
D. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support
components.
1. Materials: Will not cause galvanic action at contact points.
2. Mountings: Correctly position luminaire to provide indicated light distribution.
3. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication unless stainless-
steel items are indicated.
4. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.
E. Pole/Support Structure Bases: Anchor type with hold-down or anchor bolts, leveling nuts, and
bolt covers.
F. Steel Poles: Tubing complying with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of
46,000 psig (317 MPa); one-piece construction up to 40 feet in length with access handhole in pole wall.
SECTION 26 56 19 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 4
1. Grounding Provisions for Metal Pole/Support Structure: Welded 1/2-inch threaded
lug, accessible through handhole and listed for copper conductor connection.
2. Shafts: Square, straight.
G. Metal Pole Brackets: Match pole metal. Provide cantilever brackets without underbrace, in
sizes and styles indicated, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.
H. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and
securely fastened to pole top.
I. Concrete for Pole Foundations: Comply with Section 03 30 00 (03300) "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
1. Design Strength: 3000-psig, 28-day compressive strength.
2.04 FINISHES
A. Ensure fixture finish will withstand environmental conditions at project location.
B. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
C. Steel: Grind welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish.
1. Galvanized Finish: Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 123.
2. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to
remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill
scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White
Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."
3. Interior: Apply one coat of bituminous paint on interior of pole, or otherwise treat to
prevent corrosion.
4. Polyurethane Enamel: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of
primer and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Concrete Foundations: Construct according to Section 03 30 00 (03300) "Cast-in-Place
Concrete."
1. Comply with details for reinforcement and for anchor bolts, nuts, and washers. Verify
anchor-bolt templates by comparing with actual pole bases furnished.
2. Finish for Parts Exposed to View: Trowel and rub smooth. Comply with Section 03 30 00
(03300) - "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for exposed finish.
SECTION 26 56 19 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 5
B. Embedded Poles: Set poles to indicated depth, but not less than one-sixth of pole length
below finish grade. Dig holes large enough to permit use of tampers the full depth of hole. Backfill in 6-
inch layers and thoroughly tamp each layer so compaction of backfill is equal to or greater than that of
undisturbed earth.
C. Install poles as follows:
1. Use web fabric slings (not chain or cable) to raise and set poles.
2. Mount pole to foundation with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level
recommended by pole manufacturer.
3. Secure poles level, plumb, and square.
4. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use non-shrinking or expanding concrete
grout firmly packed in entire void space.
5. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout. Arrange
to drain condensation from interior of pole.
D. Luminaire Attachment: Fasten to indicated structural supports.
E. Luminaire Attachment with Adjustable Features or Aiming: Attach luminaires and supports to
allow aiming for indicated light distribution.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment.
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's
published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
B. Ground metal poles/support structures according to Section 26 05 26 (16060) - "Grounding
and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
1. Nonmetallic Poles: Ground metallic components of lighting units and
foundations.
Connect luminaires to grounding system with No. 6 AWG conductor.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged units. B. Advance Notice: Give
dates and times for field tests.
C. Provide instruments to make and record test results.
D. Tests and Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires and
energizing circuits with normal power source, and as follows:
1. Measure light intensities at night if specific illumination performance is indicated. Use
photometers with calibration referenced to NIST standards.
SECTION 26 56 19 - LED EXTERIOR LIGHTING Page 6
2. Check intensity and uniformity of illumination.
E. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations and verifications indicating and
interpreting results.
F. Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure
until units operate properly.
3.04 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A. Clean units after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. B.
Adjust aimable luminaires to provide required light distributions and intensities.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 27 05 00 (16050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS Page 1
SECTION 27 05 00 (16050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Supporting Devices for Communication Components.
2. Concrete Equipment Bases.
3. Cutting and Patching For Communication Construction.
4. Touchup Painting.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03 30 00 (03300) - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 07 84 00 (07840) - Firestopping.
3. Section 09 90 00 (09900) - Painting.
4. Division 26 and 28 Sections
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in Project with the following supporting data:
1. Product Data: For electricity-metering equipment.
2. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts of electricity-
metering equipment.
3. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance
requirements.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
C. All work to be in accordance with latest requirements of the N.E.C. and all other applicable
codes and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction over the work.
1.04 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and
arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the communication
installations that follow.
1. Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural
components as they are constructed.
B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing communication materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before
closing in the building.
C. Coordinate communication service connections to components furnished by utility companies.
1. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company
providing electrical power and other services.
SECTION 27 05 00 (16050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS Page 2
D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for communication items that are concealed
by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Section 08 31 00 (08310) -
"Access Doors."
E. Coordinate all work with Division 26.
F. All communication drawings are to be read in conjunction with the project specifications and
all other related contract drawings.
G. The contractor shall examine the site and observe the conditions under which the work will be
done or other circumstances which will affect the contemplated work. No allowance will be
made subsequently in the connection for any error or negligence on the contractor’s part.
H. The contractor shall verify exact location, size and extent of all existing utilities, obstructions
and/or other conditions which may affect the proposed work under the project. The contractor
shall take every precaution to prevent damage to existing work and shall repair any damage
as a result of this work.
I. The contractor shall verify all door swings in the field and mount switches on knob side of
doors or as approved by the engineer.
J. The contractor shall carefully examine all contract drawings/specifications and be responsible
for the proper fittings of materials and equipment at each location as indicated without
substantial alteration. The drawings are generally diagrammatic and because of the small
scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings and accessories which
may be required. Furnishing such fittings that are required to meet such conditions shall be
furnished and installed at no cost.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch diameter
slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs.
1. Channel Thickness: Selected to suit structural loading.
2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports.
D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded
C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or
click-type hangers.
E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
F. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body
and insulating wedging plug for non-armored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have
number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body
constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.
G. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.
H. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
2.02 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Section 03 30 00 (03300) -
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."
2.03 TOUCHUP PAINT
A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.
SECTION 27 05 00 (16050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS Page 3
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other
installations.
D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
E. Coordinate work with other trades and install conduit and boxes to clear embedded ducts,
openings, etc. and all structural features.
F. Unless otherwise noted, mounting heights, as shown, are from finished floor to top of
panelboard and to centerline of other equipment. Coordinate all mounting heights with
contract drawings, local code requirements, and all A.D.A. requirements.
1. Toggle (snap) switch: 4’-0”.
2. Enclosed circuit breaker: 5’-0”
3. Disconnect (safety) switch: 5’-0”.
4. Motor starter: 5’-0”.
5. Panelboard: 6’-6”.
3.02 COMMUNICATION SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION
A. Damp Locations, Pool Equipment Rooms, Storage Rooms and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized
materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components.
B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.
C. Support Clamps for PVC Raceways: Click-type clamp system.
D. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at
least four; minimum of 200-lb design load.
3.03 SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support communication
components.
B. Install individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide
U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for
securing hanger rods and conduits.
C. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.
D. Size supports for multiple raceway installations so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent
minimum in the future.
E. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.
F. Install 1/4-inch- diameter or larger threaded steel hanger rods, unless otherwise indicated.
SECTION 27 05 00 (16050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS Page 4
G. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be
used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving lighting
and receptacle branch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted
channel and angle supports.
H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is
carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
I. Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
J. Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support.
Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar
hangers are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the
raceway with an approved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.
K. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control
enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless components are
mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
L. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-
drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-
rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during
erection of concrete and masonry walls.
M. Securely fasten communication items and their supports to the building structure, unless
otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening
methods are indicated:
1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails.
2. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion bolts on solid masonry
units.
3. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts.
4. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts.
5. Steel: Welded threaded studs or spring-tension clamps on steel.
a. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
6. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe
straps, or other items.
7. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws.
8. Fasteners: Select so the load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its
proof-test load.
3.04 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to
achieve fire-resistance rating of the assembly. Firestopping materials and installation
requirements are specified in Section 07 84 00 (07840) “Firestopping."
3.05 CONCRETE BASES
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger, in both
directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage
recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise
indicated. Use 3000-psi 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
specified in Section 03 30 00 (03300) "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to
permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
SECTION 27 05 00 (16050) - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS Page 5
B. Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent
undisturbed surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed.
Repair and refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
1. Supporting devices for communication components.
2. Concrete bases.
3. Cutting and patching for communication construction.
4. Touch up painting.
3.08 REFINISHING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Refinish and touch up paint. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in
Section 09 90 00 (09900) - "Painting."
3.09 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes,
and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 27 10 00 (16710) - STRUCTURED CABLING (16710) Page 1
SECTION 27 10 00 (16710) - STRUCTURED CABLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Premises Wiring For Telephone Distribution, Including Installations For Service By Local
Telephone Exchange Carrier.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 05 26 (16060) - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
2. Section 26 05 33 (16130) - Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
3. Section 26 05 53 (16075) – Identification for Electrical Systems.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Local Exchange Carrier: Telephone utility or other entity that provides an access line from a
local exchange into the premises.
B. Exchange Access Line: Circuit carrying telephone service into the premises.
C. Distribution Circuit: Circuit from the network interface device to a distribution device, such as
a terminal block or junction box.
D. Station Circuit: Circuit from a distribution device to a telecommunications outlet.
E. Telecommunications Outlet: Telephone jack for connecting equipment to communication
circuits.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit “Letter of Conformance” in accordance with Section 01 33 00 (01330) indicating
specified items selected for use in Project.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Comply with EIA/TIA 570.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless
permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging temporary utility
services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Owner representative not less than two days in advance of proposed utility
interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s representative written
permission.
1.06 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate premises wiring with requirements of local telephone exchange carrier.
B. Coordinate premises wiring with requirements of telephone equipment supplier.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 COMPONENTS
A. Comply with EIA/TIA 570.
SECTION 27 10 00 (16710) - STRUCTURED CABLING Page 2
B. Telecommunications and Auxiliary Disconnect Outlets: Four-position modular, latching, plug-
type, jack-in, flush-mounting wall plate, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Wall Plates: Designed for telephone service. Match those indicated for power receptacle
outlets in same spaces for materials and finish. For wall telephone units, include provision for
support of unit.
D. Distribution and Station Cable: Category 5e or 6, Four-pair, No. 24 AWG, solid-copper,
unshielded, twisted-pair construction in PVC sheath.
1. Comply with ANSI/ICEA S-80-576.
2. Plenum cable is listed for use in plenums.
E. Cabinets: Comply with Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
Furnish cabinets with backboard.
F. Backboard: 3/4-inch fireproofed interior grade plywood. Where installed in wire closet, height
and width shall cover entire wall up to 96 inches above floor, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Telephone Service: Comply with local telephone exchange carrier's requirements for details
of telephone service.
B. Install outlet boxes and telecommunications outlets.
C. Install cable without damaging conductors and jacket.
1. Do not bend cable to a smaller radius than minim um recommended by manufacturer.
D. Install premises wiring in raceways, where raceway is in an accessible location, otherwise
premises wiring shall be plenum rated and installed per manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Install cables in walls unless walls are solid or filled with insulation. In solid walls, install
in raceway and terminate raceway with a bushing in ceiling space above outlet.
2. Install cables without raceway where concealed in accessible ceiling space, unless
otherwise indicated.
3. Use pulling methods that will not damage cable or raceway, including fish tape, cable,
rope, and wire-cable grips. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling
tensions.
4. Pull cables simultaneously where more than one is being installed in the same raceway
or at the same location.
5. Conceal raceway, except in unfinished spaces and as indicated.
E. Install exposed cable parallel or perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and
follow surface contours where possible.
F. Secure cable to independent supports at intervals as required to prevent sagging between
supports.
G. Separation of Wires: Comply with EIA/TIA-569 rules for separating unshielded copper
communication and data-processing equipment cables from potential EMI sources, including
electrical power lines and equipment.
3.02 CONNECTIONS
A. Ground equipment.
1. Install ground terminal at local exchange carrier service location and connect according
to Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
SECTION 27 10 00 (16710) - STRUCTURED CABLING (16710) Page 3
2. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturers published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify components and circuits according to Section 26 05 53 - "Identification for Electrical
Systems."
B. Identify telephone system backboards and cabinets with the legend "Telephone."
C. Identify terminals at terminal strips, telecommunications outlets, and pull-and-junction boxes
with approved designations.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1. Test continuity of each circuit pair loop.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 28 31 00 (13850) - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS Page 1
SECTION 28 31 00 (13850) - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Automatic and Manual Fire Alarm System, complete per NFPA 70, 72, and 101 and
applicable local, state and national codes
2. The Contract Documents are to relay minimum design intent. It is the Contractor's
responsibility to provide a complete approved and operable system.
3. The Contractor shall supply an addressable system to comply with this specification.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 14 24 23 – Elevators.
2. Section 21 10 00 - Fire Protection.
3. Section 27 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical
1.02 REFERENCES
A. The American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Publications:
1. A17.1 “Handbook on Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators”
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Publications:
1. 70 "National Electric Code"
2. 72 “National Fire Alarm Code”
3. 101 "Life Safety Code"
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Non-coded point addressable-analog system with manual and automatic alarm
initiation; automatic sensitivity control and monitoring of certain smoke detectors; and
multiplexed signal transmission dedicated to fire alarm service only.
B. Automatic and selective fire alarm notification using vibrating electric horn (with strobe where
required) to all occupiable spaces including each guestroom. Horns shall sound at temporal
march-time.
1. For multiple building Projects, only the annunciation devices in the building where the
alarm was initiated shall be activated. Provide point addressable networking that reports
to the continuously attended property location.
C. For high rise buildings (as defined in NFPA 101) provide a system using a pre-recorded voice
message with manual voice communication capability through system speaker (with strobe
where required).
D. Activation of any standpipe or sprinkler tamper switch shall activate a distinctive system
audible supervisory signal and illuminate a valve tamper LED at the system controls (so that
there shall be no confusion between valve tamper activation and opens and/or ground on fire
alarm initiation wiring) and visually indicate the type of device at the graphic annunciator on an
addressable system.
E. All manual controls shall be supervised so that all switches must be returned to the normal
automatic position to clear system supervisory signal.
F. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete amber "Trouble" LED to indicate
disarrangement conditions per circuit.
SECTION 28 31 00 (13850) - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS Page 2
G. Supervise the incoming power to the system so that any power failure shall be audibly and
visually indicated at both the control panel and the graphic annunciator.
H. Provide low/high air supervisory signal for dry automatic sprinkler system.
I. Provide running, power fault, and phase reversal trouble signals for fire pump.
J. Provide running and power fault trouble signals for the generator.
K. Provide signal circuit and auxiliary function disconnect capability by disconnect switch or
keypad to facilitate testing without disruption.
1. Provide the following at the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP):
a. Disconnect switches to disable notification, audible appliances, visual strobes, and
auxiliary function points for testing purposes.
b. Alarm sensitivity testing at the FACP.
L. Provide all zones or alphanumeric point of address designations in property operation's
terminology.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Section 01 33 00 (01330) - Submittals: Procedures for submittals
1. Product Data:
a. Provide submittals in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 (01330).
B. Provide Fire Protection Department with 2 sets of system plans and equipment data sheets for
review and approval prior to installation.
C. Forward subsequent changes to Fire Protection for final approval.
D. Record Documents:
1. Refer to Section 01 78 39 (01785) - Project Record Documents and Section
01 78 23 (01830) - Operating and Maintenance Data for required closeout documents to
be provided at completion of Project. In addition to the documents listed in these
Sections, the following documents shall be included:
a. Provide NFPA 72 test certification.
b. Record Documents shall include System Drawings, Equipment Data and Operation
Instructions, and Maintenance Instruction Manuals.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment shall be manufactured by a firm who has been actively manufacturing fire alarm
systems of the type required and shall have supplied similar equipment to comparable
installations and rendered satisfactory service for a minimum of 10 years. All components of
the fire alarm system shall be manufactured by the vendor supplying the equipment, and
standard products of a single manufacturer.
B. Equipment manufacturer shall maintain factory trained personnel within 50 miles of the project
site and shall be available 24 hours per day.
C. Material and equipment shall be new and UL listed.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described in Section 01 78 43 (01790) - “Spare Parts and Materials”
that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and
identified with labels describing contents.
SECTION 28 31 00 (13850) - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS Page 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Approved Manufacturers:
1. ADT – Tyco Fire & Security (888-238-8988)
2. SimplexGrinnell –Tyco Fire & Security (978-731-7352/800-746-7539)
3. Siemens (Cerbeus, Pyrotronics Faraday) – Siemens Fire Safety (201-266-4516)
4. Honeywell Life Safety (Engineered Systems Distributors), Notifier (NESCO); Gamewell,
FCI, Silent Knight (800-658-3726)
5. UTC Fire and Security (860-284-3000) (Edwards; Vigilant Fire & Life Safety)
6. Mircom (816-628-5348)
7. VES (Formely Viking Electronic Services) (800-270-3066)
8. Hochiki America Corporation (281-826-0165)
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Fire Alarm Control Panel
1. Control Panel: Modular, solid state addressable.
2. Locate fire alarm control panel or annunciator in a location attended continuously by
property associates.
3. The control panel shall contain modules which have the capability to perform the
following functions.
a. Mount batteries in the control panel. Battery capacity shall be sufficient to provide
for the entire system upon loss of normal 120 volt power for a period of twenty-four
(24) hours with ten (10) minutes of alarm indication at the end of this period.
b. Control panel to include contacts for alarm and trouble connections to an approved
Central Station. If required by Local Code, a municipal tie module shall be provided
in lieu of the contacts for central station connection. Module shall be selected to be
compatible with local city system.
c. Basic Fire Alarm Panel and Cabinet to house and power the listed modules and
components.
B. Smoke Sensors (Detectors):
1. Guestrooms, Suite Rooms and other Sleeping Units
a. Provide smoke sensors with sounder bases to meet the following:
1) Photoelectric type sensor.
2) Sounder Base: Provide minimum audible alarm of 85 dBA at 10 feet; minimum
of 75 dBA “at the pillow”.
3) Activation of room smoke sensor to immediately and automatically sound an
alarm within the room of incident.
4) System smoke sensor normal and emergency power is provided by the Fire
Alarm Control Panel (FACP).
5) In Suites or other mixed Sleeping / Living Units, provide smoke sensors in each
separate sleeping / living rooms (or in areas providing access to the corridor
doorway). Multiple sensor sounder bases located within the same suite or unit
shall sound at the same time.
SECTION 28 31 00 (13850) - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS Page 4
2. Guestroom Smoke Alarms (Handicap Accessible and Hearing Impaired): Same as
above with the following additions.
a. Visible Alarm Device: Xenon Strobe. Activation of detector to cause both alarm
horn and visible alarm device (xenon strobe) to flash.
3. Smoke Detectors / Sensors are to be located per NFPA 72 so that the function is not to
be compromised by air flow to or from grilles or ceiling fans.
4. Guestroom Smoke Sensors or Smoke Alarms are to be audibly and visually annunciated
at the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) and annunciators as Supervisory Signals.
C. Smoke Detectors - All Other Areas:
1. System Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric or ionization type for corridors and other areas,
incorporating ability to be remotely tested by addressable system.
a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard beige/off-white.
D. Alarm Initiating Devices:
1. All initiating devices to be “point” addressable.
2. Manual Pull Stations: High impact Lexan, which will latch upon operation and remain
latched until reset with a key. Locate at front desk only, unless required in other locations
by applicable codes.
a. Color: Red
3. Duct Smoke Sensors: Complete with a keyed ceiling mounted remote test switch with
alarm lamp, wall mounted not higher than 80 inches above finished floor.
a. Point addressable duct smoke sensors are to be installed at locations in supply
and/or return air ducts of all air handling systems 2000 CFM or greater, or as
required by local codes.
4. Heat Detectors: Rate-of-rise and automatically restorable.
5. Carbon Monoxide Detectors: Provide carbon monoxide detectors in mechanical rooms
containing gas fired water heaters and in guestrooms, public spaces, and any location
with gas fired fireplaces or other gas appliances. Connect so that detectors provide
Supervisory alarm at Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP).
6. Sprinkler water flow alarm/dry system pressure switch.
7. Low/High air alarm for dry system.
E. Alarm Notification Appliances (Low Rise Building)
1. Mini Horns/Sounder Bases:
a. Guestrooms: Install in all guestrooms, and in bedrooms of all suites, beige in color.
b. Smoke Sensors with sounder bases may be installed in lieu of guestroom mini horns
provided the sounder base meets the following requirements:
1) Approval from the local authority having jurisdiction.
2) Listed for general and local evacuation.
3) Capable of sounding both the local in-room alarm upon activation of the in-
room / suite smoke sensor(s) and upon activation of the building fire alarm
notification system.
2. Horns and Strobes:
a. Public areas: Use horns with strobes, beige in color.
b. Back of House: Use horns with strobes, beige in color.
SECTION 28 31 00 (13850) - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS Page 5
c. Accessible and Hearing-Impaired Guestrooms: Flashing lights for the hearing
impaired shall be semi-recessed, with side-viewing tamper-proof lens. White lens
with the word "Fire" in raised red letters. Flashing lights may be an integral part of
the accessible guestroom detector and/or mini horn or may be a separate flashing
device. Flashing lights shall be located in all sleeping areas, living areas and
bathrooms.
F. Alarm Notification Appliances (High Rise Building Only)
1. Speaker Only:
a. Guestrooms: Install in all guestrooms, and in bedrooms of all suites, beige in color.
2. Speaker and Strobes:
a. Public areas: Use speaker with strobes, beige in color.
b. Back of House: Use speakers with strobes, beige in color.
c. Accessible and Hearing-Impaired Guestroom: Speaker and strobe with strobe
connected to central fire alarm. Flashing lights for the hearing impaired shall be
semi-recessed, with side-viewing tamper-proof lens. White lens with the word "Fire"
in raised red letters. Flashing lights shall be located in all sleeping areas, living areas
and bathrooms.
G. Firefighters’ Telephone Communication System (High Rise Building Only)
1. Comply with governing code requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with all national, state and local codes, UL standards, and the
manufacturer's published instructions.
B. Provide necessary materials and appurtenances, including coordination with the Owner
concerning a complete and timely central system tie-in between the fire alarm system and the
local fire department or jurisdictional authority when required by Public Authorities. A
functional test of the tie-in shall be demonstrated during the final fire alarm system testing.
C. Be responsible for designing and installing as complete fire alarm system that meets all codes.
D. Coordinate devices that pertain to other work in the contract with the appropriate trades.
E. Sprinkler flow and tamper switches will be furnished and installed under Section 21 10 00.
The Electrical subcontractor shall be responsible for wiring and connection to sprinkler
switches.
F. Cover smoke detectors to prevent contamination by dust, and keep covered until Substantial
Completion.
G. Provide duct detectors under the fire alarm system as required by code. Provide ceiling
mounted remote test switch with indicator light for each duct detector.
H. Provide connectors and signals from devices in the elevator shaft, machine room, and
landings to the elevator controller to complete activation and shutdown events required per
ASME A17.1 “Handbook on Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators”.
3.02 TESTING
A. The fire alarm system shall be pre-tested and certified by the fire alarm vendor per NFPA 72
(National Fire Alarm Code) prior to acceptance testing. A copy of the manufacturer
representative's certification report shall be made available to the owner and code official.
B. Test completed system in the presence of the Public Authority and hotel brand Fire Protection
Department.
SECTION 28 31 00 (13850) - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS Page 6
C. Provide equipment necessary to perform testing.
D. Refer to Submittals Paragraph for required certifications and documents to be provided with
closeout documents.
3.03 TRAINING
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain units.
1. Conduct training as specified in Section 01 79 00 (01820) - "Training”.
2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for troubleshooting,
servicing, and maintaining system.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL Page 1
SECTION 31 31 16 - TERMITE CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Soil treatment.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include the EPA-Registered Label for
termiticide products.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product certificates.
B. Soil Treatment Application Report: Include the following:
1. Date and time of application.
2. Moisture content of soil before application.
3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer.
4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used.
5. Dilutions, methods, volumes used, and rates of application.
6. Areas of application.
7. Water source for application.
C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator
and Contractor, certifying that termite control work consisting of applied soil termiticide
treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites, including Formosan termites
(Coptotermes formosanus). If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered
during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite
infestation.
1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.
SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL Page 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SOIL TREATMENT
A. Termiticide: EPA-Registered termiticide acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, in
an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite infestation.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
a. BASF Corporation.
b. Bayer Environmental Science.
c. Syngenta.
2. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less
than three years against infestation of subterranean termites.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials, such as
wood debris, tree stumps and roots, stakes, formwork, and construction waste wood
from soil within and around foundations.
B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials
that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated.
3.2 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT
A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Distribute
treatment uniformly. Apply treatment at the product's EPA-Registered Label volume
and rate for maximum specified concentration of termiticide to the following so that a
continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established
around and under building construction.
1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Under ground-supported slab
construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall
treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed.
2. Foundations: Soil adjacent to and along the entire inside perimeter of foundation
walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and
electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and
chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of
footing.
3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations. Treat adjacent areas,
including around entrance platform, porches, and equipment bases. Apply overall
treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or
ground.
4. Masonry: Treat voids.
SECTION 313116 - TERMITE CONTROL Page 3
5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs and
below-grade walls will be penetrated.
B. Post warning signs in areas of application.
C. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading,
landscaping, or other construction activities following application.
END OF SECTION